Simit Enus En-Us

Preface
Basics of SIMIT 1
Couplings 2
SIMATIC
Simulation model 3
SIMIT Simulation Platform (V10.0) 4
Automatic model creation
Diagnostics & visualization 5

Operating Manual
Scripts 6
Component type editor 7
Libraries 8
Menus and dialog boxes 9
06/2018
A5E44876196-AA
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be
used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property
damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified
personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding
potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:
WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or
approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.
Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described.
Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this
publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions.
Siemens AG A5E44876196-AA Copyright © Siemens AG 2018.

Division Process Industries and Drives Ⓟ 03/2019 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface
Security disclaimer for simulation products

Siemens' simulation products allow you to simulate and/or optimize the planning and operation
of a plant/machine. The simulation and optimization results merely represent non-binding
recommendations and are dependent on the completeness and correctness of the input data.
The user must therefore check the input data and results for plausibility after each simulation/
optimization.
Security information
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks.
In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is
necessary to implement – and continuously maintain – a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial
security concept. Siemens’ products and solutions only form one element of such a concept.
Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems,
machines and networks. Systems, machines and components should only be connected to the
enterprise network or the Internet if and to the extent necessary and with appropriate security
measures (e.g. use of firewalls and network segmentation) in place.
Additionally, Siemens’ guidance on appropriate security measures should be taken into
account. You can find more information about industrial security on the Internet (http://
www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
Siemens’ products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure.
Siemens strongly recommends applying product updates as soon as they are available and
always using the latest product versions. Using versions that are obsolete or are no longer
supported can increase the risk of cyber threats.
To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS
Feed (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
What's new?
SIMIT V10.0
Compared with the previous version V9.1, version V10.0 includes the following enhancements
or changes:
● New license model
A license based on the number of simulation tags in a simulation project replaces the
previous product versions, SIMIT Standard, SIMIT Professional and SIMIT Ultimate.
Licenses are managed on a Wibu dongle.
● Changes in DEMO mode
You start the DEMO version by double-clicking on the screen shortcut SIMIT SP Demo. The
DEMO version corresponds to the range of functions from SIMIT version "S".
SIMIT Simulation Platform (V10.0)

Operating Manual, 06/2018, A5E44876196-AA 3
Preface
● New operating mode: "bus synchronous"

The bus synchronous operating mode supplements the previous asynchronous and
synchronous operating modes. The new operating mode is available for the couplings
PLCSIM Advanced and MCD. With bus synchronous operating mode, SIMIT ensures that
all components involved in the simulation have the same synchronized simulation progress.
● Time slices
The minimum cycle time that can be set changes from 10 ms to 1 ms.
There are now eight sub-time slices for each time slice. The sub-time slices offer a better
distribution of the simulation to better utilize multi-core processors.
● New functionality "Distributed simulation"
The distributed simulation makes it possible to distribute the computing load over several
computers that are remotely controlled by the master computer.
● Changes to the "SIMIT Unit" coupling
Shared Devices are now possible with SIMIT.
You simulate alarms either in the properties of a station or with the "SetInterrupt" component.
The device status is determined from within the SIMIT Unit hardware and shown in the
hardware tree.
● Changes to the "Virtual Controller" coupling
The Virtual Controller now also supports the SFC 60 system function and the S7H protocol.
● New "MCD" coupling
SIMIT Simulation Platform V10.0 supports the coupling to a Mechatronics Concept
Designer application.
● External couplings
You can connect your own programmed couplings to SIMIT.
● Instantiate templates
The "Instantiate templates" dialog box combines table import, IEA import, CMT import and
generation of the device level.
● Table import
There are no profiles that have to be selected during a table import any longer. The previous
Profile 2 with placeholders in the first row is now the standard profile.

4 Operating Manual, 06/2018, A5E44876196-AA
Preface
● Changes in the basic library

New components:
– DataAdaption
– DP-DP-ID
– DynamicServoControl
– GeneralDrive
– InFeed_Tel_370
– Multi HART 8
– Multi HART 16
– PROFIdrive1
– PROFIdrive2
– Safety30
– Safety31
– Safety32
– SafetyProcess
– Sensor
– SensorProcessLinear
– SensorProcessRotatory
– SetInterrupt
– SiemensMomentumReduction
Changed components:
– Sinamics
– Universal
Removed components:
– DCMaster
– Masterdrive
– Masterdrive3
– Masterdrive4
– PROFIdrive
● Changes in the library "CHEM-BASIC"
New components:
– Column Tower
– Evaporator
– Flash – 2-phase separator
Changed components:
– Condenser

Preface
– StorageTankLiquid
Licensing
License model
Simulation tags are the basis of the SIMIT license model. Simulation tags are calculated based
on the total number of inputs and outputs as well as the state variables of all components used
in the project. Because an implicit signal interconnection between two couplings takes on the
function of a diagram in which these signals are connected by means of a component with at
least one input and one output, such implicit interconnections in couplings are counted as two
simulation tags.
The following table shows the available SIMIT versions:
SIMIT version Number of simulation tags

XS 1
Up to 250
S Up to 2,500
M Up to 15,000
L Up to 200,000
XL Up to 1,000,000
1
Only in combination with SIMIT Unit hardware
Additional licenses
Additional licenses are required for the following:
● An upgrade to a new version of SIMIT
● Additional libraries (CHEM-BASIC, FLOWNET or CONTEC)
● Component Type Editor (CTE)
● SIMIT Virtual Controller (VC)
Behavior in SIMIT
Select the size variant when SIMIT starts up. You can also change the size later with Portal view
> Start > Size variant.

Preface
The status bar shows the percentage of permitted simulation tags included in your simulation
project.
Number of simulation tags exhaus‐ Consequence

ted up to
80% One-time notification
110% and more 1
Simulation tags can be added: No
Simulation project can be saved: No
Simulation can be started: No
1
SIMIT version XL: No limit. The PC performance capability determines the maximum size of a
simulation project.
Setting up WIBU license server
Introduction
SIMIT directly accesses the dongle when it is inserted into the local computer.
If the dongle is inserted in a computer in the network, you must set up the access to the dongle.
To do so, use the CodeMeter program on the server and the local computer.
Requirement
● The dongle is not inserted in the local computer but in a computer in the network.
Procedure
To open the help, follow these steps:
1. Go to "Start > CodeMeter > CodeMeter Control Center".
The "CodeMeter Control Center" opens.
2. Click on "WebAdmin".
3. Click on the "?" icon.
The "CodeMeter User Help" opens.
4. Execute the steps listed above under "Server access" and under "License access
authorizations".
Result
SIMIT accesses a license on a dongle that is inserted in a computer in the network.

Preface

Table of contents
Preface .........................................................................................................................................................3
1 Basics of SIMIT ..........................................................................................................................................21
1.1 Operating principle .................................................................................................................21
1.2 DEMO mode ..........................................................................................................................21
1.3 Starting SIMIT ........................................................................................................................23
1.4 The SIMIT graphical user interface ........................................................................................25
1.5 Creating a simulation .............................................................................................................27
1.5.1 Structure of a simulation ........................................................................................................27
1.5.2 Visualizing a simulation..........................................................................................................29
1.5.3 Visualizing coupling signals ...................................................................................................32
1.6 Simulation ..............................................................................................................................35
1.6.1 The states of a simulation ......................................................................................................35
1.6.2 Simulation operator control and monitoring ...........................................................................38
1.6.2.1 Actions during ongoing simulation .........................................................................................38
1.6.2.2 Display of the simulation load ................................................................................................39
1.6.2.3 Changes in a simulation project while a simulation is running ...............................................41
1.6.3 Settings for simulation............................................................................................................42
1.6.3.1 Operating modes....................................................................................................................42
1.6.3.2 Time slices .............................................................................................................................46
1.6.3.3 Speeding up and slowing simulation......................................................................................47
1.6.3.4 Adjustable timeout times ........................................................................................................48
1.7 Distributed simulation.............................................................................................................49
1.7.1 Method of operation of the distributed simulation ..................................................................49
1.7.2 Configuration of a distributed simulation ................................................................................50
1.7.3 Data exchange in a distributed simulation .............................................................................51
1.7.4 Setup firewall..........................................................................................................................52
1.7.5 Create screen link "SIMIT Client" ...........................................................................................53
1.7.6 Start distributed simulation.....................................................................................................54
1.7.7 Changing distributed simulation on a client PC......................................................................55
2 Couplings....................................................................................................................................................57
2.1 Coupling concept ...................................................................................................................57
2.1.1 Couplings in the SIMIT architecture .......................................................................................57
2.1.2 Couplings to SIMATIC PLCs..................................................................................................59
2.2 Coupling editor .......................................................................................................................61
2.3 Creating a HWCN export file..................................................................................................62
2.4 Deactivating couplings ...........................................................................................................63
2.5 SIMIT Unit ..............................................................................................................................64
2.5.1 Operating principle of the SIMIT Unit coupling.......................................................................64
2.5.2 Supported PROFIBUS DP configurations..............................................................................66

Table of contents
2.5.3 Supported PROFINET IO configurations ...............................................................................73

2.5.4 Redundant and fail-safe systems...........................................................................................78
2.5.4.1 Redundant configurations (H systems) ..................................................................................78
2.5.4.2 Fail-safe configurations (F systems) ......................................................................................82
2.5.4.3 Redundant and fail-safe configurations (H/F systems) ..........................................................82
2.5.5 Setting up a SIMIT Unit ..........................................................................................................83
2.5.5.1 Configuring a SIMIT Unit........................................................................................................83
2.5.5.2 Importing device description file to SIMIT ..............................................................................84
2.5.5.3 Updating the firmware of the SIMIT Unit ................................................................................84
2.5.6 Configuring a coupling of the "SIMIT Unit" type .....................................................................85
2.5.6.1 Creating a coupling of the "SIMIT Unit" type ..........................................................................85
2.5.6.2 Creating a station ...................................................................................................................86
2.5.6.3 Copying system data blocks ..................................................................................................87
2.5.6.4 Importing hardware configuration to station ...........................................................................87
2.5.6.5 Importing hardware configuration for shared devices ............................................................89
2.5.6.6 Configuring the station ...........................................................................................................90
2.5.6.7 Simulation of alarms...............................................................................................................92
2.5.6.8 Device status..........................................................................................................................94
2.5.6.9 Disabling a line, device or module .........................................................................................94
2.5.6.10 Loading configuration to station .............................................................................................95
2.5.6.11 Properties of the SIMIT Unit coupling ....................................................................................96
2.5.6.12 XML import interface for hardware configuration of third-party systems................................99
2.6 Virtual Controller ..................................................................................................................105
2.6.1 How the Virtual Controller works..........................................................................................105
2.6.1.1 Introduction ..........................................................................................................................105
2.6.1.2 Requirements for a simulation network................................................................................109
2.6.1.3 Functions..............................................................................................................................110
2.6.1.4 Basics of Virtual Controller communication..........................................................................111
2.6.1.5 Supported system functions.................................................................................................113
2.6.1.6 Supported S7 blocks ............................................................................................................115
2.6.1.7 Supported services ..............................................................................................................116
2.6.1.8 Handling sync errors ............................................................................................................119
2.6.1.9 Sequential control ................................................................................................................120
2.6.1.10 Data record communication .................................................................................................122
2.6.1.11 Substitute mechanism for data exchange ............................................................................122
2.6.1.12 Notes on using a virtual controller........................................................................................123
2.6.2 Configuring the Virtual Controller .........................................................................................123
2.6.2.1 Configuring virtual controllers...............................................................................................123
2.6.2.2 Creating a Virtual Controller.................................................................................................125
2.6.2.3 Importing a STEP 7/PCS 7 project.......................................................................................126
2.6.2.4 Configuring virtual controllers...............................................................................................127
2.6.2.5 Distribution editor (Virtual Controller) ...................................................................................128
2.6.2.6 Configuring an additional PC ...............................................................................................132
2.6.2.7 Virtual controller during simulation .......................................................................................133
2.6.3 Editing signals ......................................................................................................................135
2.6.3.1 Properties of the Virtual Controller coupling.........................................................................135
2.6.3.2 Importing DB data from STL sources...................................................................................138
2.7 PLCSIM Advanced coupling ................................................................................................140
2.7.1 Operating principle of the PLCSIM Advanced coupling .......................................................140
2.7.2 Creating a coupling of the "PLCSIM Advanced" type ..........................................................140
2.7.3 Importing hardware configuration to station .........................................................................141

Table of contents
2.7.4 Configuring a PLCSIM Advanced coupling station ..............................................................142

2.7.5 Distribution editor (PLCSIM Advanced) ...............................................................................143
2.8 PLCSIM coupling .................................................................................................................145
2.8.1 How the PLCSIM coupling works.........................................................................................145
2.8.2 Configuring the PLCSIM coupling ........................................................................................145
2.8.2.1 Creating a PLCSIM coupling................................................................................................145
2.8.2.2 Configuring I/O signals in the PLCSIM coupling ..................................................................145
2.8.2.3 Properties of the PLCSIM coupling ......................................................................................146
2.9 OPC coupling .......................................................................................................................147
2.9.1 How the OPC coupling works ..............................................................................................147
2.9.2 Signal transfer between OPC server and OPC client ..........................................................148
2.9.3 Mapping of signals and data types of an OPC server..........................................................150
2.9.4 Status of OPC servers .........................................................................................................150
2.9.5 Configuring an OPC DA client/server coupling ....................................................................151
2.9.5.1 Principle of operation of the SIMIT OPC DA server .............................................................151
2.9.5.2 Configuring a SIMIT OPC DA server coupling .....................................................................153
2.9.5.3 Configuring an OPC DA client coupling ...............................................................................153
2.9.5.4 Properties of the SIMIT OPC DA server coupling ................................................................154
2.9.5.5 Properties of the OPC DA client coupling ............................................................................155
2.9.5.6 Notes on DCOM configuration .............................................................................................156
2.9.6 Configuring an OPC UA client coupling ...............................................................................158
2.9.6.1 Principle of operation of the OPC DA client coupling...........................................................158
2.9.6.2 Certificates ...........................................................................................................................158
2.9.6.3 Configuring an OPC UA client coupling ...............................................................................160
2.9.6.4 Error messages upon connection to the OPC UA server.....................................................161
2.9.6.5 Properties of the OPC UA client coupling ............................................................................161
2.10 Shared memory coupling .....................................................................................................162
2.10.1 How the SHM coupling works ..............................................................................................162
2.10.1.1 Accessing the memory area.................................................................................................163
2.10.1.2 Structure of the memory area ..............................................................................................164
2.10.1.3 Creating the memory area ...................................................................................................167
2.10.2 Configuring the SHM coupling .............................................................................................168
2.10.2.1 Creating an SHM coupling ...................................................................................................168
2.10.2.2 Configuring the signals in the SHM coupling .......................................................................168
2.10.2.3 Signal properties in the SHM coupling .................................................................................169
2.10.2.4 Properties of the SHM coupling ...........................................................................................170
2.10.2.5 Importing and exporting signals ...........................................................................................171
2.11 PRODAVE coupling .............................................................................................................172
2.11.1 How the PRODAVE coupling works.....................................................................................172
2.11.2 Configuring the PRODAVE coupling....................................................................................173
2.11.2.1 Creating a PRODAVE coupling............................................................................................173
2.11.2.2 Editing signals in the PRODAVE coupling ...........................................................................173
2.11.2.3 Properties of the PRODAVE coupling..................................................................................173
2.11.2.4 Importing the signal properties.............................................................................................174
2.11.2.5 Exporting the signal properties.............................................................................................174
2.12 MCD coupling.......................................................................................................................175
2.12.1 How the MCD coupling works ..............................................................................................175
2.12.2 Use scenarios of the MCD coupling.....................................................................................176
2.12.3 Configuring the MCD coupling .............................................................................................177
2.12.3.1 Creating the MCD coupling ..................................................................................................177

Table of contents
2.12.3.2 Importing signals ..................................................................................................................178

2.12.3.3 Linking signals......................................................................................................................179
2.12.3.4 Editing signal properties in the MCD coupling .....................................................................179
2.12.3.5 Configuring bus synchronous MCD coupling .......................................................................180
2.12.3.6 Properties of the MCD coupling ...........................................................................................180
2.13 Editing the signals of a coupling...........................................................................................182
2.13.1 Signal basics ........................................................................................................................182
2.13.1.1 Coupling data direction ........................................................................................................182
2.13.1.2 Meaning of the coupling name .............................................................................................182
2.13.1.3 Sorting and filtering of signals in the coupling editor............................................................183
2.13.1.4 Addressing signals ...............................................................................................................184
2.13.1.5 Fixing signals in the coupling editor .....................................................................................184
2.13.1.6 Mapping of SIMATIC data types in SIMIT............................................................................187
2.13.1.7 Access to a data record or memory area .............................................................................188
2.13.1.8 Converting the data width of signals ....................................................................................189
2.13.1.9 Scaling analog signals .........................................................................................................190
2.13.2 Importing and exporting signals ...........................................................................................193
2.13.2.1 File formats for signals .........................................................................................................193
2.13.2.2 Symbol table ........................................................................................................................193
2.13.2.3 Variable table .......................................................................................................................194
2.13.2.4 Signal table ..........................................................................................................................195
2.13.2.5 INI format of the OPC couplings ..........................................................................................196
2.13.2.6 Importing signal properties...................................................................................................197
2.13.2.7 Importing PLC variable lists .................................................................................................198
2.13.2.8 Exporting signal properties...................................................................................................199
2.13.3 Using I/O signals ..................................................................................................................200
2.13.3.1 I/O signals for connection on charts.....................................................................................200
2.13.3.2 I/O signals for animations.....................................................................................................201
2.13.3.3 I/O signals in controls on charts ...........................................................................................202
2.13.3.4 I/O signals in trends .............................................................................................................202
2.13.3.5 Multiple use of I/O connectors..............................................................................................203
2.13.4 Interconnecting signals ........................................................................................................203
2.13.5 Splitting a signal ...................................................................................................................204
2.13.6 Combining signals................................................................................................................205
2.13.7 Preassigning signals ............................................................................................................206
2.13.8 Fixing a signal ......................................................................................................................206
2.13.9 Addressing a signal symbolically .........................................................................................207
2.13.10 Scaling signals .....................................................................................................................208
2.13.11 Transferring scaling to another signal ..................................................................................209
2.13.12 Limiting a signal ...................................................................................................................210
2.13.13 Reading signals from an OPC server...................................................................................211
2.13.14 Configuring a signal "With readback capability" ...................................................................212
3 Simulation model ......................................................................................................................................213
3.1 Project manager...................................................................................................................213
3.1.1 View and functions of the Project Manager..........................................................................213
3.1.2 Versioning ............................................................................................................................214
3.1.3 Write protection ....................................................................................................................215
3.2 Chart editor ..........................................................................................................................217
3.2.1 Creating and editing charts ..................................................................................................217
3.2.2 Visualizing graphics .............................................................................................................219

Table of contents
3.2.3 Visualizing signals................................................................................................................222

3.2.4 Printing charts ......................................................................................................................223
3.3 Task cards............................................................................................................................224
3.3.1 "Components" task card.......................................................................................................224
3.3.2 "Controls" task card..............................................................................................................226
3.3.3 "Macros" task card ...............................................................................................................228
3.3.4 "Graphic" task card ..............................................................................................................229
3.3.5 "Templates" task card ..........................................................................................................230
3.3.6 "Projects" task card ..............................................................................................................231
3.3.7 "Signals" task card ...............................................................................................................233
3.4 Macro component editor ......................................................................................................234
3.4.1 Macro editor .........................................................................................................................234
3.4.2 Inserting dividing lines between macro component I/Os......................................................237
3.4.3 Topological connectors of macro components.....................................................................238
3.4.4 Default settings for macro component inputs.......................................................................238
3.4.5 Defining parameters of macro components .........................................................................239
3.4.6 Properties of macro components .........................................................................................239
3.4.7 Find and Replace in macro components..............................................................................240
3.4.8 Using macro components ....................................................................................................240
3.5 Migrating projects from previous versions of SIMIT .............................................................241
4 Automatic model creation .........................................................................................................................243
4.1 Templates ............................................................................................................................244
4.1.1 Find and replace in templates ..............................................................................................247
4.1.2 Instantiating templates by entering replacements................................................................247
4.1.3 Creating tables from a template ...........................................................................................248
4.1.4 Defining a folder hierarchy for templates .............................................................................249
4.1.5 Addressing a module via the I/O address ............................................................................250
4.1.6 Indirect addressing...............................................................................................................250
4.1.7 Opening basic templates in the editor..................................................................................251
4.2 Instantiation of templates from files or the simulation model ...............................................251
4.2.1 Instantiating templates from files..........................................................................................251
4.2.2 Table import .........................................................................................................................252
4.2.3 IEA import ............................................................................................................................256
4.2.4 CMT import ..........................................................................................................................258
4.2.5 Instantiating templates from the simulation model ...............................................................261
4.3 Automated import.................................................................................................................262
4.3.1 Import charts from ZIP or XML files .....................................................................................262
4.3.2 Syntax of the XML file ..........................................................................................................263
4.3.3 Examples for XML files ........................................................................................................268
4.3.3.1 Example of a single template instantiation...........................................................................268
4.3.3.2 Example of a grouped template instantiation .......................................................................268
4.3.3.3 Example of chart creation ....................................................................................................269
4.3.4 Structure of the control file "procedure.cfg" for import from ZIP file .....................................270
4.4 Bulk engineering ..................................................................................................................271
4.4.1 Exporting data ......................................................................................................................271
4.4.2 Content of the export file ......................................................................................................272
4.4.3 Importing data ......................................................................................................................273

Table of contents
5 Diagnostics & visualization .......................................................................................................................275

5.1 Trend and messaging editor ................................................................................................275
5.1.1 Functions of the Trend and Messaging Editor .....................................................................275
5.1.2 Message system ..................................................................................................................275
5.1.2.1 Message classes..................................................................................................................275
5.1.2.2 Message editor.....................................................................................................................276
5.1.2.3 Editing messages.................................................................................................................276
5.1.2.4 Message – the message component ...................................................................................277
5.1.2.5 Component-specific messages ............................................................................................277
5.1.2.6 Messages in the status bar ..................................................................................................278
5.1.2.7 Limitations of the message system ......................................................................................278
5.1.3 Archive .................................................................................................................................278
5.1.4 Trends ..................................................................................................................................280
5.1.4.1 Signal with trends.................................................................................................................280
5.1.4.2 Adding and configuring trends .............................................................................................280
5.1.4.3 Displaying trends..................................................................................................................283
5.1.4.4 Trend editor..........................................................................................................................288
5.2 Find & replace ......................................................................................................................289
5.2.1 Find ......................................................................................................................................290
5.2.1.1 Finding with the Find & replace editor..................................................................................290
5.2.1.2 Searching using the properties of signals and connectors...................................................292
5.2.1.3 Searching for fixed signals ...................................................................................................292
5.2.2 Replace ................................................................................................................................292
5.2.2.1 Replacing with the Find & Replace editor ............................................................................292
5.2.2.2 Refresh.................................................................................................................................293
5.3 Consistency check ...............................................................................................................294
5.4 Analysis functions ................................................................................................................295
5.4.1 Basics of the analysis function .............................................................................................295
5.4.2 Generating analyses ............................................................................................................297
6 Scripts.......................................................................................................................................................299
6.1 How scripts work ..................................................................................................................299
6.2 Handling of scripts................................................................................................................300
6.2.1 Creating a script ...................................................................................................................300
6.2.2 Executing a script.................................................................................................................301
6.2.3 External scripts.....................................................................................................................302
6.3 Script syntax.........................................................................................................................302
6.3.1 Controlling the script ............................................................................................................302
6.3.2 Composing scripts................................................................................................................304
6.3.3 Commenting scripts .............................................................................................................305
6.3.4 Signals in scripts ..................................................................................................................305
6.3.5 Controlling the simulation.....................................................................................................306
6.3.5.1 Initializing a simulation .........................................................................................................306
6.3.5.2 Starting the simulation..........................................................................................................307
6.3.5.3 Starting and waiting until an absolute time...........................................................................307
6.3.5.4 Starting and waiting until a relative time...............................................................................307
6.3.5.5 Starting and waiting for a certain number of time slices.......................................................307
6.3.5.6 Starting and waiting for an event..........................................................................................308
6.3.5.7 Stopping the simulation........................................................................................................308

Table of contents
6.3.5.8 Executing a single step ........................................................................................................308

6.3.5.9 Saving a snapshot................................................................................................................309
6.3.5.10 Loading a snapshot..............................................................................................................309
6.3.5.11 Resetting the simulation time ...............................................................................................309
6.3.6 Logging ................................................................................................................................310
6.3.6.1 Opening and closing log files ...............................................................................................310
6.3.6.2 Unformatted output ..............................................................................................................310
6.3.6.3 Formatted output..................................................................................................................310
6.3.6.4 Outputting time and date......................................................................................................311
6.3.6.5 Outputting version information .............................................................................................312
6.3.6.6 The _printlog system function ..............................................................................................312
6.3.7 Signal curves........................................................................................................................312
6.3.7.1 Opening and closing a plot file .............................................................................................312
6.3.7.2 Specifying signals ................................................................................................................313
6.3.7.3 Specifying a cycle ................................................................................................................314
6.3.8 Setting signals......................................................................................................................314
6.3.8.1 Setting individual values.......................................................................................................314
6.3.8.2 Separating connected signals ..............................................................................................315
6.3.8.3 Specifying signals ................................................................................................................315
6.3.9 Conditional execution...........................................................................................................316
6.3.10 Accessing the simulation time..............................................................................................318
7 Component type editor .............................................................................................................................319
7.1 User interface.......................................................................................................................319
7.1.1 Starting the CTE...................................................................................................................319
7.1.2 Structure of the user interface..............................................................................................320
7.1.3 Menu bar and toolbar ...........................................................................................................321
7.1.4 Project tree...........................................................................................................................322
7.1.5 Keyboard shortcuts ..............................................................................................................322
7.1.6 The task cards......................................................................................................................323
7.1.6.1 The "Signals" task card ........................................................................................................323
7.1.6.2 The "Controls" task card ......................................................................................................324
7.1.6.3 The "Components" task card ...............................................................................................325
7.1.6.4 The "Enumeration Types" task card.....................................................................................326
7.1.6.5 The "Connection Types" task card .......................................................................................327
7.2 Principles of component types .............................................................................................329
7.2.1 The SIMIT type-instance concept ........................................................................................329
7.2.2 Properties of component types ............................................................................................330
7.2.3 General properties of component types ...............................................................................331
7.2.3.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................................331
7.2.3.2 Administration properties .....................................................................................................331
7.2.3.3 Protection of the component type ........................................................................................332
7.2.3.4 Special properties ................................................................................................................333
7.2.3.5 Change comments ...............................................................................................................333
7.3 Connectors and parameters of component types ................................................................334
7.3.1 The connector editor ............................................................................................................334
7.3.2 Special default setting for implicitly interconnectable inputs ................................................336
7.3.3 Complex connection types ...................................................................................................338
7.3.4 Parameters of component types ..........................................................................................339
7.4 The behavior of a component type.......................................................................................341
7.4.1 Introduction ..........................................................................................................................341

Table of contents
7.4.2 State variables .....................................................................................................................341

7.4.3 Initialization, cyclic calculation and functions .......................................................................343
7.4.4 Topology ..............................................................................................................................344
7.5 Visualization of component types.........................................................................................345
7.5.1 Introduction ..........................................................................................................................345
7.5.2 The basic symbol .................................................................................................................346
7.5.2.1 Editing the basic symbol ......................................................................................................346
7.5.2.2 Editing graphics....................................................................................................................346
7.5.2.3 Editing connectors................................................................................................................347
7.5.2.4 Editing properties .................................................................................................................347
7.5.2.5 Scalability .............................................................................................................................349
7.5.3 The link symbol ....................................................................................................................350
7.5.4 The operating window ..........................................................................................................351
7.6 Syntax for the behavior description......................................................................................354
7.6.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................................354
7.6.2 Conversion of the behavior description to C# code .............................................................354
7.6.3 The equation-oriented approach ..........................................................................................355
7.6.3.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................................355
7.6.3.2 Local variables .....................................................................................................................355
7.6.3.3 Constants .............................................................................................................................356
7.6.3.4 The calculation order............................................................................................................356
7.6.3.5 Operators .............................................................................................................................358
7.6.3.6 Conditional assignments ......................................................................................................358
7.6.3.7 Enumeration types ...............................................................................................................359
7.6.3.8 Vectors .................................................................................................................................359
7.6.3.9 Function calls for mathematical standard functions .............................................................360
7.6.3.10 User-defined functions .........................................................................................................362
7.6.3.11 Differential equations ...........................................................................................................362
7.6.3.12 Accessing discrete state variables .......................................................................................364
7.6.4 The instruction-oriented approach .......................................................................................364
7.6.4.1 Introduction ..........................................................................................................................364
7.6.4.2 Functions..............................................................................................................................364
7.6.4.3 Blocks...................................................................................................................................365
7.6.4.4 Local variables .....................................................................................................................365
7.6.4.5 Fields....................................................................................................................................366
7.6.4.6 Constants .............................................................................................................................366
7.6.4.7 Loops ...................................................................................................................................367
7.6.4.8 Conditional branches ...........................................................................................................368
7.6.4.9 System functions..................................................................................................................369
7.6.4.10 Operators .............................................................................................................................370
7.6.4.11 Accessing state variables.....................................................................................................372
7.6.5 Internal variables and constants ..........................................................................................372
7.6.6 The characteristic parameter type........................................................................................373
8 Libraries....................................................................................................................................................375
8.1 Basic library..........................................................................................................................375
8.1.1 General ................................................................................................................................375
8.1.1.1 Introduction ..........................................................................................................................375
8.1.1.2 Component symbols ............................................................................................................375
8.1.1.3 Symbols for the controls.......................................................................................................377
8.1.1.4 Structure of the simulation model.........................................................................................378

Table of contents
8.1.1.5 Component connectors ........................................................................................................378

8.1.1.6 Connectors for controls ........................................................................................................379
8.1.1.7 Connecting I/O .....................................................................................................................379
8.1.1.8 Setting inputs .......................................................................................................................381
8.1.1.9 Properties of components ....................................................................................................382
8.1.1.10 Component error messages.................................................................................................389
8.1.1.11 Properties of controls ...........................................................................................................389
8.1.2 Connectors...........................................................................................................................391
8.1.2.1 Global connector ..................................................................................................................392
8.1.2.2 I/O connectors......................................................................................................................393
8.1.2.3 Topological connector ..........................................................................................................393
8.1.2.4 Unit connector ......................................................................................................................393
8.1.3 Standard components ..........................................................................................................394
8.1.3.1 Differentiating standard components ...................................................................................394
8.1.3.2 Analog functions...................................................................................................................394
8.1.3.3 Integer functions...................................................................................................................417
8.1.3.4 Mathematical functions ........................................................................................................423
8.1.3.5 Binary functions....................................................................................................................428
8.1.3.6 Converting values ................................................................................................................437
8.1.3.7 General components in the Misc directory...........................................................................446
8.1.4 Drive components ................................................................................................................454
8.1.4.1 Drives as component types..................................................................................................454
8.1.4.2 Valve drives..........................................................................................................................454
8.1.4.3 Pump drives and fan drives..................................................................................................458
8.1.4.4 Motor ....................................................................................................................................460
8.1.4.5 PROFIdrive devices .............................................................................................................465
8.1.4.6 SIMOCODE pro motor control devices ................................................................................505
8.1.5 Sensor components .............................................................................................................523
8.1.5.1 SIWAREXU components .....................................................................................................523
8.1.5.2 Counter module FM350-1 ....................................................................................................530
8.1.6 Communication components................................................................................................536
8.1.6.1 Components for SIMATIC ....................................................................................................536
8.1.6.2 Components for SINUMERIK...............................................................................................550
8.1.7 Controls................................................................................................................................554
8.1.7.1 Controls for displaying signal values....................................................................................554
8.1.7.2 Controls for entering signal values.......................................................................................560
8.1.7.3 Miscellaneous controls.........................................................................................................570
8.1.7.4 3D Viewer control.................................................................................................................573
8.2 CHEM-BASIC and FLOWNET libraries ...............................................................................585
8.2.1 Introduction ..........................................................................................................................585
8.2.2 Topological connector ..........................................................................................................586
8.2.3 Geodetic height ....................................................................................................................588
8.2.4 Flownets...............................................................................................................................590
8.2.4.1 Flownet basics .....................................................................................................................590
8.2.4.2 Variables used in flownets ...................................................................................................593
8.2.4.3 Modeling of flownet branches ..............................................................................................593
8.2.4.4 Modeling of flownet nodes ...................................................................................................594
8.2.4.5 Heat exchange with the environment...................................................................................597
8.2.4.6 Parameter assignment of flownets.......................................................................................597
8.2.4.7 Coupling simulation model with actuator/sensor level .........................................................601
8.2.5 Components of the CHEM-BASIC library ............................................................................604
8.2.5.1 Burner ..................................................................................................................................604

Table of contents
8.2.5.2 Fittings..................................................................................................................................606
8.2.5.3 Graphics...............................................................................................................................612
8.2.5.4 Heatexchanger.....................................................................................................................613
8.2.5.5 Measurements .....................................................................................................................627
8.2.5.6 Mixing apparatuses ..............................................................................................................637
8.2.5.7 Pump....................................................................................................................................640
8.2.5.8 Separators............................................................................................................................645
8.2.5.9 System .................................................................................................................................675
8.2.5.10 Tanks ...................................................................................................................................682
8.2.5.11 Valves ..................................................................................................................................703
8.2.6 Components in FLOWNET library........................................................................................713
8.2.6.1 General components............................................................................................................713
8.2.6.2 Measuring components........................................................................................................725
8.2.6.3 Component types for "water/steam" medium .......................................................................731
8.2.6.4 Component types for liquid medium.....................................................................................748
8.2.6.5 Component types for gas medium .......................................................................................760
8.2.7 Creating your own component types for flownets ................................................................773
8.2.7.1 Topological properties..........................................................................................................773
8.2.7.2 Connection to the solution procedure ..................................................................................776
8.2.7.3 Constants and functions.......................................................................................................783
8.2.7.4 Initializing FLOWNET simulations........................................................................................788
8.3 CONTEC library ...................................................................................................................788
8.3.1 Introduction ..........................................................................................................................788
8.3.2 Material handling simulation.................................................................................................789
8.3.2.1 Principles of conveyor technology simulation ......................................................................791
8.3.2.2 Modeling of the objects ........................................................................................................792
8.3.2.3 Modeling the conveyor system network ...............................................................................794
8.3.2.4 Special features of conveyor technology simulation ............................................................797
8.3.2.5 Scalability .............................................................................................................................799
8.3.2.6 Generating the simulation of drives and sensors .................................................................802
8.3.3 Components of the CONTEC library....................................................................................807
8.3.3.1 Topological connector in the CONTEC library .....................................................................807
8.3.3.2 Component types for conveyor systems with vehicles.........................................................808
8.3.3.3 Component types for non-vehicular conveyor systems ......................................................823
8.3.3.4 Component types for simulating objects ..............................................................................856
8.3.3.5 Component types for simulating identification systems .......................................................862
8.3.4 Creating custom component types for material handling simulation....................................892
8.3.4.1 Topological properties..........................................................................................................893
8.3.4.2 Connection to the solution procedure ..................................................................................896
8.3.4.3 System functions..................................................................................................................904
8.3.4.4 System variables..................................................................................................................913
9 Menus and dialog boxes...........................................................................................................................915
9.1 Menus ..................................................................................................................................915
9.1.1 Portal view > Start ................................................................................................................915
9.1.2 Portal view > Couplings........................................................................................................916
9.1.3 Portal view > Simulation model ............................................................................................916
9.1.4 Portal view > Automatic model creation ...............................................................................916
9.1.5 Portal view > Diagnostics & visualization .............................................................................917
9.1.6 Project > New project ... .......................................................................................................918
9.1.7 Project > Open... ..................................................................................................................919
9.1.8 Project > Close.....................................................................................................................919

Table of contents
9.1.9 Project > Save all .................................................................................................................919

9.1.10 Project > Save as... ..............................................................................................................920
9.1.11 Project > Archive ..................................................................................................................920
9.1.12 Project > Retrieve.................................................................................................................921
9.1.13 Project > Analysis.................................................................................................................922
9.1.14 Project > Exit ........................................................................................................................922
9.1.15 Edit > Cut .............................................................................................................................922
9.1.16 Edit > Copy...........................................................................................................................922
9.1.17 Edit > Paste..........................................................................................................................922
9.1.18 Simulation > Initialize ...........................................................................................................922
9.1.19 Simulation > Start.................................................................................................................922
9.1.20 Simulation > Pause ..............................................................................................................923
9.1.21 Simulation > Single Step ......................................................................................................923
9.1.22 Simulation > Exit ..................................................................................................................923
9.1.23 Simulation > Snapshot .........................................................................................................923
9.1.24 Window > Tile Horizontally...................................................................................................923
9.1.25 Window > Tile Vertically .......................................................................................................923
9.1.26 Window > Unsplit .................................................................................................................923
9.1.27 Window > Close all...............................................................................................................923
9.1.28 Automatic model creation > Instantiate templates ...............................................................924
9.1.29 Automatic modelling > Automated import ............................................................................924
9.1.30 Automatic model creation > Bulk engineering import...........................................................924
9.1.31 Options > Zoom....................................................................................................................924
9.1.32 Options > SU administration ................................................................................................924
9.1.33 Options > Assign coupling signals .......................................................................................925
9.1.34 Help > Display help ..............................................................................................................925
9.1.35 Help > About ........................................................................................................................925
9.1.36 CTE > Component > New component .................................................................................925
9.1.37 CTE > Component > Open ..................................................................................................925
9.1.38 CTE > Component > Close ..................................................................................................925
9.1.39 CTE > Component > Save ...................................................................................................926
9.1.40 CTE > Component > Save as ..............................................................................................926
9.1.41 CTE > Component > Exit .....................................................................................................926
9.2 Dialog boxes ........................................................................................................................927
9.2.1 "SU Import" dialog box .........................................................................................................927
9.2.2 "PLCSIM Advanced import" dialog box ................................................................................928
9.2.3 "Virtual controller import" dialog box ....................................................................................929
9.2.4 "STL import" dialog box........................................................................................................931
9.2.5 "Importing signal properties" dialog box ...............................................................................932
9.2.6 "Exporting signal properties" dialog box...............................................................................935
9.2.7 "Select project" dialog box ...................................................................................................936
9.2.8 "SU administration" dialog box .............................................................................................937
9.2.9 "Instantiate templates" dialog box ........................................................................................938
9.2.10 "Bulk engineering import" dialog box ...................................................................................940
9.2.11 "Characteristic" editor...........................................................................................................940
9.2.12 "Find & replace" dialog box ..................................................................................................941
9.2.13 "Info" dialog box ...................................................................................................................942
9.2.14 "Print" dialog box ..................................................................................................................942
9.2.15 "Instantiate template" dialog box ..........................................................................................943
9.2.16 "Selection" dialog box ..........................................................................................................943
9.2.17 "Enumeration" dialog box (CTE) ..........................................................................................945
9.2.18 "Manage components" dialog box (CTE) .............................................................................946

Table of contents
9.2.19 "Connection type" dialog box (CTE).....................................................................................947

Basics of SIMIT 1
1.1 Operating principle
SIMIT can be used for the following functions:
● Complete plant simulation
Simulation of signals, devices and plant response
● Input and output simulator of test signals for an automation controller
● Testing and commissioning automation software
Even if only the user interface, for example, is initially used for the signal test, simulation models
can subsequently be added whenever required to simulate plant response and carry out
dynamic tests.
You essentially work with the following elements to create a simulation:
● Chart
To develop a simulation, you combine the components available in the libraries using the
chart editor and enter appropriate passwords.
You can find additional information in section: Creating and editing charts (Page 217).
● Visualization
Visualization gives you an overview of the signals from your plant. Signal are visualized with
controls (input and display objects) and graphical objects.
You can find additional information in section: Visualizing a simulation (Page 29).
● Coupling
The coupling is the interface to the automation system and is required for signal exchange.
You can specify individually the signal scope to be processed by SIMIT.
You can find more information on couplings in: Couplings (Page 57).
1.2 DEMO mode

In DEMO mode you can get an idea of the handling and performance of SIMIT.
Starting SIMIT in DEMO mode

Start SIMIT DEMO with a double click on the screen link SIMIT SP Demo. A dongle is not
necessary.
Only the following SIMIT function modules are available in DEMO mode:
● Macro component editor
You can find additional information on this in section: Macro component editor (Page 234).
● Chart editor
You can find additional information on this in section: Creating and editing charts
(Page 217).

Basics of SIMIT
1.2 DEMO mode
● Trend and messaging editor

You can find additional information on this in section: Trend and messaging editor
(Page 275).
● Automatic model creation
You can find additional information on this in section: Automatic model creation (Page 243).
SIMIT has only limited functionality in the following areas in DEMO mode:
● Virtual controller
You can run SIMIT in DEMO mode and the virtual controller licensed or vice versa. The
DEMO mode restrictions however apply both to SIMIT and to the virtual controller.
● Saving and archiving
Projects, templates and macro components can be saved in DEMO mode. Projects,
templates and macro-components created in DEMO mode can, however, only be used on
the computer on which they were created.
Note
Projects, templates and macro-components created in DEMO mode are not compatible with
the full version of SIMIT.
Projects created in DEMO mode cannot be upgraded.
You cannot archive projects in DEMO mode.
● Opening and retrieving

You can open a project in DEMO mode under the following conditions:
– Project was created on this computer in DEMO mode.
– Project version corresponds to the installed software version.
Projects created with a full version cannot be opened.
You can retrieve projects that have been archived in a full version. However, if the retrieved
project is changed in DEMO mode, it cannot then be used in the full version.
● Address area
In DEMO mode, the address area for the interconnection of signals is limited to 30 bytes. If
you use an OPC coupling, you can interconnect up to 30 signals.
● Runtime
You can use SIMIT in DEMO mode for as long as you want, but the runtime of a simulation
is limited to 45 minutes. The simulation ends automatically at the end of those 45 minutes.
You can restart the simulation once it has ended.
● Number of couplings
You can only create one coupling in a SIMIT project in DEMO mode. The "External
couplings" programming interface is not supported.
● Project folder
In DEMO mode, you can only save projects in a specified memory location in the SIMIT work
area.
● Libraries for macro components and templates
In DEMO mode, you can only store macro components and templates within the SIMIT work
area. You cannot open other library folders.

Basics of SIMIT
1.3 Starting SIMIT
● Snapshots
Snapshots cannot be taken in DEMO mode.
● Simulation process
In DEMO mode, the simulation can only run in real time. It cannot run faster or slower.
● Number of virtual controllers
You can run a maximum of 32 virtual controllers per SIMIT system.
● Size variant
You can only use the size variant S in DEMO mode.
1.3 Starting SIMIT

Start SIMIT either using the Windows Start menu "All programs > Siemens Automation > SIMIT
> SIMIT Simulation Platform" or by using the link on the screen.
When starting SIMIT, select the size variant (XS, S, M, L, XL). You can also change the size
later with Portal view > Start > Size variant.
The portal view opens after the startup process.
The clear layout of the portal view helps you to quickly become familiar with SIMIT. The most
important basic functions can be selected directly:
● Manage projects
● Create couplings
● Create simulation models
● Automatic data import from different file formats

Basics of SIMIT
1.3 Starting SIMIT
Additional functions are:

● Perform consistency checks
● Accessing the "Find & replace" function
● Create a new trend
● Process archives
Click "Project view" to change to the project view. Full functionality of SIMIT is only available in
the project view.
Getting started
After opening, creating or retrieving a project, the "Getting started" section opens. This is where
you can add the basic objects that are required for the function of a SIMIT project.
● Add coupling
● Add chart
● Generate charts automatically
You can perform these steps here or go to the project view to continue editing the project and
start the simulation.

Basics of SIMIT
1.4 The SIMIT graphical user interface

The user interface of SIMIT is divided into the following areas:
① Menu bar and Access to SIMIT functions. Further functions are available in the short‐
toolbar cut menus in the project navigation.
② Task cards Objects such as library components, controls and graphic objects that
can be used in the editor currently open are listed here. These objects
are sorted in task cards.
③ Work area This is where the editors are opened for editing.
④ Project naviga‐ The current project is displayed here in a tree view.
tion
⑤ Property view The properties of the selected object are displayed here.
⑥ Editor bar and Here, you can switch between open editors and the portal view. If nec‐
status bar essary, information on the current status of SIMIT is displayed here.
All editors are opened in the work area. Task cards are provided specifically for each editor. The
work area can be divided in order to open two editors side-by-side or underneath one another
in the work area.
The window buttons of an editor:
The following functions can be performed using the window buttons of an editor:
Minimize, i.e. reduce the entry in the editor bar

Reduced to occupy only part of the work area

Basics of SIMIT
Maximized to occupy the entire work area

Close
Detach an editor with task cards and property view from the work area as a separate
window
Insert an editor window that was detached from the work area back again into the work
area
Anchor a detached editor window in the foreground
Project navigation
Projects are managed in the project navigation. A SIMIT project is divided into the following tree
nodes, whereby a project must not contain all of the objects listed here:
Current project name

Tree node for the project manager. Elements from other projects can
be copied into the currently opened project in the project manager.
You can find additional information on this in section: View and func‐
tions of the Project Manager (Page 213).
"Couplings" folder: Folder for storing the couplings of the current
project.
You can find additional information on this in section: Couplings
(Page 57).
Symbol for the couplings. Couplings create the connection between
SIMIT and a controller or another application.
Tree node to create a new coupling.
"Charts" folder: Folder for the charts.

Symbol for the charts. Charts contain a simulation model created using
library components and controls.
Tree node to create a new chart.
You can find additional information on this in section: Structure of a
simulation (Page 27).
"Monitoring" folder: This folder contains the following functions and is
also their storage location:
● New trend
● Messages
● Archive
You can find additional information on this in section: Functions of the
Trend and Messaging Editor (Page 275).
"Scripting" folder: This folder contains the "New script" function and is
the storage location for existing scripts.
You can find additional information on this in section: Creating a script
(Page 300).

Basics of SIMIT
1.5 Creating a simulation
"Lists" folder: This folder contains the "New list" function and is the
storage location for existing material lists.
This folder is only relevant if the "CONTEC" library has been installed.
You can find additional information on this in section: Modeling of the
objects (Page 792).
"Snapshots" folder: Folder for storing snapshots of the simulation
When simulation is running, the folder also contains the "New snap‐
shot" function.
You can find additional information on this in section: Actions during
ongoing simulation (Page 38).
Tree node for "Find & replace" function Searches can be made for
signals, components, connectors, and graphic texts.
You can find additional information on this in section: Find & replace
(Page 289).
Tree node for performing the consistency check. The consistency
check verifies the project for formal errors.
You can find additional information on this in section: Consistency
check (Page 294).
Tree node for starting simulation.
Each of these functions is run with a double-click.

Functions for the individual project elements are also available in the shortcut menu for the tree
entry.
1.5.1 Structure of a simulation

A simulation is created in charts with components, controls and connections and is linked to the
coupling with connectors.

Basics of SIMIT
You can find a brief description of these elements below. For more information, please see the
links.
● Chart
The chart contains the simulation model. Components, controls and connections are
graphically displayed. Charts are created and edited in the chart editor. A simulation model
can consist of multiple charts.
You can find additional information in section: Chart editor (Page 217).
The figure below shows an example of a chart with components, connections and controls:

Basics of SIMIT
Charts consist of the following objects:

● Components
You will find the components for logical and arithmetic functions and for drives, sensors,
connections and communication on the "Components" task card under "Basic components".
To add components to a chart, select them and drag-and-drop them to the chart.
You can find additional information in section: "Components" task card (Page 224)
● Controls
You will find the controls for entering and displaying values on the "Controls" task card. The
"Display" area contains objects for the dynamic display of values from a current simulation.
The "Input" area contains objects for specifying values in a current simulation.
To add controls to a chart, select them and drag-and-drop them to the chart.
You can find additional information in section: Controls (Page 554)
● Connections
Connections are defined with signals and shown in the chart either with direct connections
or as connectors.
Signals connect components and controls to the coupling and the coupling to the
automation system. The controller signals are processed in the coupling editor.
– Connectors
Signals are shown on a chart by connectors: Output signals are shown as green output
connectors (Output), input signals are shown as red input connectors (Input). Drag-and-
drop connectors from the coupling to charts. Split the work area with the menu command
"Window > Split horizontally" and open the coupling and the chart. Drag the required
signal from the coupling to the chart by selecting it in the coupling window at the left
margin and holding down <Shift>. Connect the connector I/O to the I/O of a component.
Coupling signals can also be dragged to a chart from the "Signals" task card. Filter the
signals accordingly, hold down <Shift> and drag the required signals to the chart.
To create a new chart, drag the components and controls from the relevant task cards to the
chart, connect their I/O and enter the parameter values. You can find more information in
section: Creating and editing charts (Page 217).
● Coupling
Couplings are used by SIMIT to communicate with the automation system. Coupling signals
can be imported in various formats and can be edited in the coupling editor.
A coupling is created in the project navigation by double-clicking on the tree entry "New
coupling". Select the required coupling type and double-click again on the new coupling to
open the coupling editor. Here, you can import and edit signals.
You can find additional information in section: Couplings (Page 57).
Note
The coupling configuration must first be saved before a signal can be extracted from it.
1.5.2 Visualizing a simulation

The signal values and signal states of a simulation are shown with graphics and controls.

Basics of SIMIT
Controls are ready-to-use objects for entering or displaying signals. They just need to be
connected to the required signal.
Graphics are created individually. Graphics can be static or animated.
Controls
Controls are categorized by signal input or display and by data type. The following controls are
available:
Name and symbol Data type Use Link to additional information

Binary display Binary Signal display Binary display (Page 554)
Analog display Analog, in‐ Signal display Analog display (Page 555)
teger
Digital display Analog, in‐ Signal display Digital display (Page 557)
teger
Bar graph display Analog, in‐ Signal display Bar graph display (Page 559)
teger
Button Binary Signal input Pushbutton (Page 560)
Button with image Binary Signal input Pushbutton with image (Page 561)
Switch Binary Signal input Switch (Page 562)
Switch with image Binary Signal input Switch with image (Page 563)
Step switch Integer Signal input Step switch (Page 564)
Step switch with image Integer Signal input Step switch with image (Page 565)

Basics of SIMIT
Name and symbol Data type Use Link to additional information

Digital input Analog, in‐ Signal input Digital input (Page 567)
teger
Slider Analog Signal input Slider (Page 569)
3D viewer – Integrating three-di‐ 3D Viewer control (Page 573)

mensional graphics
into a chart
Signal isolator – Fixing signals, must Signal splitter (Page 570)

be connected to oth‐
er controls
Action – Opening charts and Action (Page 572)
trends.
Proceed as follows to integrate a control into the current chart:

1. Select the "Controls" task card.
2. Click on the required control.
Information on the control is displayed in the "Preview" area.
3. Drag-and-drop the control to the chart.
4. Interconnect the control.
You have the following options:
– Connect the control directly to a component.
– Connect the control over a connector.
– Connect the control over a coupling signal from the "Signals" task card.
Graphics
You use graphics to display signals with an individual view. Static graphics specify a particular
display; animated graphics change within the simulation in size, color and position in line with
their current state.

Basics of SIMIT
The following static graphics are available:
Graphic element Brief description Settings

Entry of text at any point in the chart. Font
Font size
Font color
Background color
Border color
Drawing a straight line. Hold down Line color
<Shift> to create a horizontal or verti‐ Line width
cal line.
Drawing a rectangle. Hold down Border color
<Shift> to create a square. Border width
Fill color
Drawing an ellipsis. Hold down Border color
<Shift> to draw a circle. Border width
Fill color
Drawing a polyline. Double-click or Line color
press <Space> to finish drawing. Line width
Drawing an ellipse arc. Hold down Line color
<Shift> to create an arc. Line width
Drawing a Bezier curve Line color
Line width
Proceed as follows to integrate a graphic into the current chart:

1. Select the "Graphics" task card.
2. Click on the required graphic.
Information on the graphic is displayed in the "Preview" area.
3. Drag-and-drop the graphic to the chart.
4. Interconnect the graphic.
You have the following options:
– Connect the graphic directly to a component.
– Connect the graphic over a connector.
– Connect the graphic over a coupling signal from the "Signals" task card.
You can find information on using animated graphics in the section: Visualizing graphics
(Page 219)
1.5.3 Visualizing coupling signals

When a simulation is running, a control with a signal splitter is provided for each signal in the
coupling. Proceed as follows to position this control in a chart:
1. Split the work area with the menu command "Window > Split horizontally".
2. Open the coupling and the chart in the work area.
3. Create a new chart.

Basics of SIMIT
4. Open the chart.

5. Open the coupling.
You see the chart and coupling in the work area as shown in the figure below:
6. Set appropriate filter settings in the coupling window and select the required signal with a
click of the mouse.
To select multiple signals, press <Strg> (individual selection) or <Shift> (area selection).

Basics of SIMIT
7. Select the " " symbol in the first column of the coupling window.
8. Drag-and-drop the selected signals to the chart as shown in the figure below:
A switch is generated for signals with the data type "Binary", and a digital input for all other
signals, as a control in the coupling.
Dragging coupling signals from the "Signals" task card to the chart
You can alternatively also drag coupling signals from the "Signals" task card to charts.
Follow these steps:
1. Open the chart in the work area.
2. Open the "Signals" task card.
All signals saved in the project are available on this task card.

Basics of SIMIT
1.6 Simulation
3. To select signals, set corresponding filters for the signal list. You can find additional
information in section: "Signals" task card (Page 233).
4. Select the signals from the list and drag-and-drop them to the chart as shown in the figure
below:
1.6 Simulation
1.6.1 The states of a simulation

A simulation is always in one of the following states:
● Offline
● Paused
● Running
These states are changed in the "Simulation" menu. The following graphic shows the states
and the corresponding menu commands that change the simulation from one state to another:

Basics of SIMIT
1.6 Simulation
2IIOLQH
6LPXODWLRQ!6WDUW
6LPXODWLRQ!,QLWLDOL]H
6LPXODWLRQ!(QG
,1,7 3DXVHG 67(3

6LPXODWLRQ!,QLWLDOL]H 6LPXODWLRQ!6LQJOHVWHS
6723 67$57
6LPXODWLRQ!3DXVH 6LPXODWLRQ!6WDUW
6LPXODWLRQ!(QG
5XQQLQJ
Initializing simulation
Simulation is initialized with the menu command "Simulation > Initialize".
You can run simulation initialization before starting a simulation. The state changes to
"Paused". The initialization runs the consistency check; messages are displayed in the event
of an error. You can find additional information on this in section: Consistency check
(Page 294).
The "Single step" function can be executed by an initialized simulation.

Basics of SIMIT
1.6 Simulation
Simulation starts
Simulation is started with the following commands.
● With the " " symbol in the toolbar
● With the menu command "Simulation > Initialize".
● With the project navigation by double-clicking on
Once simulation has been started, SIMIT changes the color scheme of the interface from blue
to orange; the state changes to "Running".
You can find additional information on running simulation in: Actions during ongoing simulation
(Page 38).
Pausing the simulation

Simulation is paused with the menu command "Simulation > Pause".
A simulation can be paused at any point. The simulation is paused in its current state until it is
started again or ended.
When using the SIMIT Unit, pausing the simulation for more than 30 seconds terminates the
connection between the SIMIT Unit and SIMIT.
Executing a single step

A single step is only available if the simulation is in the "Paused" state.
A single step can be executed with the following commands:
● With the menu command "Simulation > Single step".
● With the <F12> function key
An single step executes the smallest time slice of the project and then pauses until another step
is triggered or the "Start" or "End" command is executed.
Stopping simulation
Simulation is ended with the following commands:
● With the " " symbol in the toolbar
● With the menu command "Simulation > End".
The state changes to "Offline" and the color scheme of the interface changes back to blue.

Basics of SIMIT
1.6 Simulation
1.6.2 Simulation operator control and monitoring
1.6.2.1 Actions during ongoing simulation

You can execute the following actions while simulation is running:
● Opening and closing charts and couplings
● Monitoring value changes at the inputs and outputs of selected components in the property
view
Select the " " icon in the toolbar to display value changes of outputs and interconnected
inputs in the chart. The value changes are also displayed in the In the properties of the
component.
● Generating and displaying a trend
You can find additional information in section: Trends (Page 280)
● Creating a script
You can find additional information in section: Handling of scripts (Page 300)
● Saving a snapshot
A snapshot is created with one of the following commands:
– With the menu command "Simulation > Snapshot"
– With the " " symbol in the toolbar
– With a double-click on the entry " " in the project navigation
The snapshot saves the current state of the simulation. Each snapshot is saved in the
"Snapshots" ( ) folder in the project navigation and is named with the date and
time of saving. You can rename a snapshot, move it to a subfolder or delete it.
If you load a snapshot, the simulation is set to the state saved in the snapshot and the
simulation is continued from that state. This process automatically starts the simulation.
In the states "Paused" and "Running", the interface has an orange color scheme, as shown in
the figure below:

Basics of SIMIT
1.6 Simulation
1.6.2.2 Display of the simulation load

Simulations are calculated cyclically. The cycle time is set with a time slice. Each component
of a chart and each coupling is assigned to one of multiple available time slices. The solution
procedures are calculated in the time slice in which the associated components are involved.
The absolute cycle time for a time slice is set in the project manager.
The cycle time specifies the time base in which the calculations are to be run, e.g. every 100 ms.
If not all the calculations of the time slice can be executed within the cycle time, however, this
time frame cannot be met.
SIMIT determines the simulation load to assess the degree to which the computer is busy. It
indicates the percentage ratio of actual computation time for the configured cycle time. This
allows you to establish whether the cycle time is sufficient for all calculations. Only the worst
value overall is displayed.
Example:
Time slice 1 Time slice 2

Configured cycle time 100 ms 200 ms
Calculation time 60 ms 80 ms
Simulation load 60% 40%
Total simulation load (load value) 60%

Basics of SIMIT
1.6 Simulation
Meaning of the percentage load value:

● Load value significantly less than 50%:
The simulation can be calculated in the set cycle times.
The data is exchanged as scheduled between the simulation model and the couplings.
● Load value reached or exceeds 50%:
The simulation can be calculated in the set cycle times.
The data is no longer exchanged with a time delay between the simulation model and the
couplings. Additional cycle offsets are created.
The simulation values are not transferred to the couplings or read from the couplings until
a later computing step.
If a simulation project contains no couplings, the 50% limit is irrelevant.
● Load value reached or exceeds 100%:
The simulation is in overload.
The simulation model can no longer be calculated within the planned cycle time.
Computational steps are omitted.
The simulation load is shown while simulation is running via an symbol in the low right pane.
The current simulation load is shown by the green segment (full circle equals 100%):
Load fluctuations
The load value is not always constant. A fluctuating load can be caused by:
● The simulation model itself can create more load in each calculation step due to the
configuration
● A time slice is interrupted by a time slice with a higher priority.
● Other applications are running in the background in addition to SIMIT
● Internal processes in both the operating system and in the .NET environment used by SIMIT
may delay the simulation calculation
In order to keep the graphical representation of the interface calm, the load values are
smoothed over several increments.
Note
If the load value always jumps back and forth between two values, the problem may be that the
processor of your computer keeps changing the clock frequency for energy saving reasons.
You can avoid this by altering the system settings of your computer, for example. Select
"Control panel > Power Options > Power plan > Advanced power settings > High performance".
Note
The Windows Task Manager is not suitable for evaluating the simulation load. On the one hand,
the distribution of the simulation model on multiple processors or cores has to be taken into
consideration; on the other hand, the task manager only indicates the computing power but not
whether the configured cycle time cannot be met due to communication delays.

Basics of SIMIT
1.6 Simulation
Note
If the simulation load is too high, you can access information on the cause with the
"SimulationLoad" component.
You can find additional information on the component in: SimulationLoad (Page 449)
1.6.2.3 Changes in a simulation project while a simulation is running

You can make changes to the simulation project while the simulation is running. To make
changes while the simulation is running, toggle between "Simulation" and "Project" in the
project navigation.
You can open charts in both project views, but for different purposes:
● If you are in the blue project view, charts are opened for editing. The changes that you make
take effect the next time the simulation is started or when you select the "Activate changes"
menu command.
● If you are in the orange simulation view, charts are opened for operation. Their content
corresponds to the simulation that is running and cannot be changed.
The same chart can be opened simultaneously in both modes. When the simulation ends, the
chart opened from the simulation tree closes automatically.
While the simulation is running, the following restrictions apply to using SIMIT:
● No new couplings can be created and existing ones cannot be deleted.
● Only implicit interconnections can be edited in the couplings.
● All functions of "Automatic modeling" are disabled.

Basics of SIMIT
1.6 Simulation
Preparing and activating model changes

Model changes can also be activated during the simulation.
Follow these steps:
1. Switch to the project view while simulation is running.
2. Make the desired changes to the simulation model.
3. Click "Prepare changes". The preparation may take several minutes.
Once the "Prepare changes" function is completed, the menu command changes to
"Activate changes".
4. To apply the changes to the simulation in progress, click "Activate changes".
Note
While the changes are activated, the simulation model does not process any values for some
time. During this time, I/O devices may not respond. The length of time depends on the size of
the simulation model.
If the current simulation state is transferred to the new configuration, the values can be
identified and assigned based on the signal name. Values for which there is no equivalent are
assigned initial values.
Activation does not include the values of parameters and defaults that are modifiable online; the
values from the simulation in progress are retained. Restart the simulation to enable these
value changes.
1.6.3 Settings for simulation
1.6.3.1 Operating modes
The simulation model and the couplings can be edited in the three different operating
modes asynchronous, synchronous and bus synchronous.
Which mode is appropriate depends on the project. It is set in the property view in the project
manager:

Basics of SIMIT
1.6 Simulation
For additional information about modes, refer to the sections:

● Asynchronous operating mode (Page 43)
● Synchronous operating mode (Page 45)
● Bus synchronous operating mode (Page 45)
Asynchronous operating mode

Model calculation of the individual time slices and coupling processing is time-controlled.
If the simulation model of a time slice is not completed within the scheduled time, one or more
processing cycles are missed and the other time slices are not calculated. The calculation of
the simulation model only continues when all time slices can calculate once again.
If SIMIT cannot calculate a coupling in the scheduled time, one or more processing cycles are
omitted once again but the calculation of the couplings in other time slices and the calculation
of the simulation model are not affected. This means if couplings are blocked by a
communication problem, this does not affect the overall processing.
In order to achieve the fastest possible response times, couplings are scheduled with a time
offset compared to the model calculation:

0RGHOO
.RSSOXQJ
2XWSXWVLJQDO ,QSXWVLJQDO
LVUHFHLYHG LVUHWXUQHG
If the model calculation or the data communication of couplings takes longer than half of the
cycle time, this time offset does not result in faster response time.

Basics of SIMIT
1.6 Simulation
Signal exchange via couplings in asynchronous mode

Both the calculation of the model and the exchange of signals in the coupling are triggered
cyclically by the control system. The cycle time for the model calculation is specified in the
components or in the project properties. The cycle time for the exchange of signals is specified
in the coupling properties (coupling configurator) regardless of this. Delays in the exchange of
signals in a coupling therefore have no effect on the model calculation but only on the other
couplings that are processed in the same cycle time.
To keep delays in the exchange of signals as small as possible, the time at which the coupling
is triggered is generally shifted by half the set simulation cycle relative to the time at which the
simulation model is triggered.
Note
The same value should be set for both the cycle time of the coupling (coupling cycle) and the
cycle time for the calculation of the simulation model (simulation cycle).
In the example below, both the automation system and the calculation of the model have a
cycle time of 100 ms. As the automation system and the simulation are not synchronized, their
timing is usually shifted with respect to each other. The simulation cycle takes no longer than
half the model calculation cycle:
6LPXODWLRQF\FOH
&RXSOLQJF\FOH
&RQWUROOHU
6LJQDOH[FKDQJH
&RXSOLQJPHPRU\
6LPXODWLRQPRGHO
7LPH

PV PV PV PV
① At this time, the automation system has finished its calculation cycle. Additional signals are
available at the outputs of the automation system.
② The output signals of the automation system are applied to the SIMIT coupling memory.
Here they are available for the calculation of the model.
③ The calculation of the model is triggered again.
④ End of the model calculation cycle. The calculated input signals for the automation system
are now available in the coupling memory.

Basics of SIMIT
1.6 Simulation
⑤ With the next clock pulse of the coupling, these input signals are transferred to the controller.
⑥ If the controller only evaluates its inputs at the start of a cycle, the transferred input signals
are only used in the control program now. This means the reaction of the simulation does not
take place until two control cycles later.
Synchronous operating mode

With synchronous mode, modules and couplings are calculated in a precisely specified
sequence. The next action does not start until the previous action has finished.
The coupling is divided into output signal recording and input signal writing:

0RGHOO
.RSSOXQJ
2XWSXWVLJQDO ,QSXWVLJQDO
LVUHFHLYHG LVUHWXUQHG
This results in better response times with short cycle times. However, each module and each
coupling can block the entire simulation execution.
Signal exchange via couplings in synchronous mode

In synchronous mode, model calculation and signal exchange is performed in a specified
sequence. The coupling detects the output signal, and writes back the input signal only after a
model calculation. In contrast to asynchronous mode, no control cycles can be dropped.
Bus synchronous operating mode

With bus synchronous operating mode, SIMIT ensures that all components involved in the
simulation have the same synchronized simulation progress. This operating mode is therefore
suitable for applications with real-time requirement. For applications without real-time
requirement, asynchronous or synchronous operating mode is sufficient.
Requirement:
● The bus synchronous operating mode is available for the couplings PLCSIM Advanced and
MCD.
● With bus synchronous operating mode, a time slice must correspond to the cycle time.
In the bus synchronous operating mode, only the following control commands are available
from the "Simulation" menu:
● Start
● Close

Basics of SIMIT
1.6 Simulation
Example
In the example shown here, the cycle time is 2 ms and a time slice of the project must be set
to 2 ms.
In the top part of the figure you can see how long PLCSIM Advanced, SIMIT and MCD need for
their calculations. Only when all three calculations are complete and the results have been
exchanged do the calculations for the next cycle start. Even if the calculations in the simulation
take longer than the cycle time of 2 ms, the calculation time in the real plant always corresponds
to the set cycle time.
In the bottom part of the figure you can see the timing of the CPU, drive and axis in the real plant.
&\FOH &\FOH &\FOH
3/&6,0$GYDQFHG PV PV PV

6,0,7
6,0,7 PV PV PV
0&' PV PV PV
PV PV PV
&\FOH &\FOH &\FOH
&38
'ULYH
3ODQW
$[LV
PV PV PV
1.6.3.2 Time slices
Definition
Simulations are calculated cyclically. The cycle time specifies the time frame in which the
calculations are to be performed and data is to be exchanged. The cycle time is set by means
of one of eight available time slices. The absolute cycle time for a time slice is set in the project
manager and is valid for the entire project. The minimum cycle time that can be set is 1 ms.

Basics of SIMIT
1.6 Simulation
Time slices of charts

Each component of a chart is assigned a time slice. The solution procedures are calculated in
the time slice in which the associated components are involved. The cycle time specifies the
time frame in which the calculations are to be performed, for example, every 100 ms. If not all
the calculations of the time slice can be executed within the cycle time, however, this time frame
cannot be met.
Components of a chart have eight available sub-time slices, A to H, for each time slice. All sub-
time slices run in the cycle time of the associated main time slice. The sub-time slices offer a
better distribution of the simulation to better utilize multi-core processors.
You set the time slice and the sub-time slice of a component of a chart in the properties of the
component under "General".
You set the time slice and the sub-time slice of a chart or chart folder using the shortcut menu
in the "Set time slice" dialog box.
Time slices of couplings

Each coupling is assigned a time slice. The time slice determines the cycle at which the
coupling exchanges data. Couplings always run in the main time slice.
You set the time slice of a coupling in the properties of the coupling.
You set the time slice and the sub-time slice of a coupling folder using the shortcut menu in the
"Set time slice" dialog box.
1.6.3.3 Speeding up and slowing simulation

To accelerate or slow the progress of simulation, you can change the ratio of simulation time to
actual time.

Basics of SIMIT
1.6 Simulation
This value is set via a drop-down list in the toolbar:
Maximum acceleration is limited in such a way that the shortest cycle time of the project is at
least 1 ms taking into account the acceleration. After the end of the time shift, the time is
synchronized with the computer time again.
This means acceleration may not be possible depending on the cycle time. Only suitable values
are offered for selection.
Note
Time response
Timer OBs in the virtual controller and timer functions that are dependent on timer OBs in the
virtual controller may result in an irregular time response.
1.6.3.4 Adjustable timeout times

Various operations are monitored by SIMIT and terminated if they exceed a pre-defined time in
order to maintain SIMIT operability.
These timeout times are set so that as a general rule they are not exceeded. If you still receive
a message that a timeout has been exceeded, check first to see whether it is due to a SIMIT
error. If not, you can increase the timeout times in the Windows registry. You can find the
corresponding keys under "HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Siemens\SIMIT
\8.0\Timeout" or "HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Wow6432Node\Siemens\SIMIT
\8.0\Timeout" on 64-bit operating systems.

Basics of SIMIT
1.7 Distributed simulation
1.7.1 Method of operation of the distributed simulation
Method of operation
The complexity of the simulation project is limited by the computing power of the simulation PC.
To realize complex simulation projects with SIMIT, distribute a simulation project to up to 16
client PCs. You control the simulation centrally from the master PC.
3URFHVV 3URFHVV
VLPXODWLRQ VLPXODWLRQ

&OLHQW &OLHQW
7&3,3
0DVWHU
3URFHVV
VLPXODWLRQ

Typical scenarios for the use of distributed simulation are, for example,
● Plant components act mostly independent of one another
● Little or no time-critical data exchange between the plant components
● Power plant with multiple blocks
● Manufacturing process with multiple lines

Basics of SIMIT
1.7.2 Configuration of a distributed simulation
Example for configuration of a distributed simulation

Based on the plant structure, a simulation project is divided up into multiple subprojects. To do
so, the simulation project is copied to the client PCs involved and stored in the same local path
as on the master PC. The simulation project is customized on each client PC. Each simulation
project can run independently.
The figure below shows the basic approach:
7&3,3 7&3,3

7&3,3 7&3,3
① Create simulation project on master PC

② Copy simulation project to client PCs
③ Configure simulation and test for each client PC and master PC
④ Start simulation on master PC

Basics of SIMIT
Sequence of a distributed simulation
3URFHVV 3URFHVV 3URFHVV 3URFHVV 3URFHVV 3URFHVV

VLPXODWLRQ VLPXODWLRQ VLPXODWLRQ VLPXODWLRQ VLPXODWLRQ VLPXODWLRQ

7&3,3 7&3,3 7&3,3
3URFHVV 3URFHVV 3URFHVV

VLPXODWLRQ VLPXODWLRQ VLPXODWLRQ

① When you start the simulation on the master PC, you also start the partial simulations on the client PCs.
② To change a subproject on a client PC, disable the remote control of the client PC by the master PC. Then change
the model on the client PC.
③ When you subsequently restore the remote control of the client PC by the master PC, all partial simulations are once
again synchronous again.
See also
Changing distributed simulation on a client PC (Page 55)
Start distributed simulation (Page 54)
1.7.3 Data exchange in a distributed simulation
Distributed simulation with data exchange between client PCs and master PC
If your simulation cannot be completely subdivided into independent partial simulations, use
the distributed simulation with data exchange. Divide your project into subprojects so that the
partial simulations exchange as little data as possible.
Use the OPC DA coupling, for example, for the data exchange. In the example below, the
master PC of the distributed simulation is also the OPC DA server. The client PCs of the
distributed simulation are the OPC DA clients.

Basics of SIMIT
3URFHVV 3URFHVV
VLPXODWLRQ VLPXODWLRQ

&OLHQW &OLHQW
23&FOLHQW 23&FOLHQW
7&3,3
0DVWHU
23&VHUYHU
3URFHVV
VLPXODWLRQ

Figure 1-1 Distributed simulation with data exchange between client PCs and master PC
1.7.4 Setup firewall
Introduction
Set the firewall to ensure that SIMIT SP can establish a connection to the following systems:
● Further SIMIT SP instances in a distributed simulation
● Distributed Virtual Controllers
● Third-party systems which establish a connection to SIMIT SP using a simulation controller
(RCI)
NOTICE
Read the security notes included in the foreword
Changes to the firewall may influence the security of your system!
Contact, if necessary, your system administrator before performing the steps described in the
following.

Basics of SIMIT
Requirement
● SIMIT has been installed.
● All nodes are located within the same network.
Procedure
Proceed as follows to set up the firewall:
1. Open the "Windows Defender Firewall with extended safety", for example, by entering
"wf.msc" in the system prompt and confirming with "Enter".
2. Click on “Incoming rules”.
3. Double-click "SIMIT-CS Manager".
The “Properties of SIMIT CS Manager" windows opens.
4. Select the “Area” tab.
5. Under “Remote IP address”, select “Arbitrary IP address”. Alternatively, add the IP
addresses of the systems involved to the list of approved remote IP addresses.
6. Confirm with "OK".
Result
The firewall has been set such that SIMIT SP can set up a connection to other systems.
See also
Preface (Page 3)
1.7.5 Create screen link "SIMIT Client"
Introduction
To start SIMIT in client mode, create a screen link with a corresponding transfer parameter.
Syntax of the transfer parameter: /[M|m]:<IP address>:<Port>
● /M: The operator of the client PC can disable the remote control.
● /m: The operator of the client PC cannot disable the remote control.
● <IP address>: IP address of the master PC
● <Port>: Port number of the master PC, default value: 50800.
If an administrator has changed the default port, you can locate the current port on the
master PC in the registry under [HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\WOW6432Node
\Siemens\SIMIT\8.0] in the "uri" key.
Example for a complete transfer parameter:

Basics of SIMIT
"C:\Program Files (x86)\Siemens\Automation\SIMIT\SIMIT\SIMIT SF\bin\SIMIT.exe /

M:192.168.0.1:50800".
Requirement
● SIMIT is installed.
● The firewall configuration of the master PC permits incoming connections at the port
number.
Procedure
To create a "SIMIT Client" screen link, follow these steps:
1. Copy the link "SIMIT SP" to the screen.
2. Add the transfer parameter in the properties of the copied link.
3. Rename the link to "SIMIT Client".
Result
The "SIMIT Client" screen link has been created.
1.7.6 Start distributed simulation
Requirement
● The master PC and the client PCs are located in the same network.
● A project with the same name is stored on the master PC and the client PCs under the same
local path.
● The screen link (Page 53) "SIMIT Client" has been set up on all client PCs.
Procedure
To start a distributed simulation, follow these steps:
1. Start SIMIT on the master PC.
2. On the client PCs, start SIMIT in client mode.
3. Open the project on the master PC.
4. Start the simulation on the master PC.
Result
The simulation runs on the master PC and on the client PCs.

Basics of SIMIT
See also
Configuration of a distributed simulation (Page 50)
1.7.7 Changing distributed simulation on a client PC
Introduction
No model changes are possible on the client PC during an ongoing distributed simulation. To
change the model, interrupt the connection between the client PC and the master PC.
Requirement
● A distributed simulation runs on the master PC and on the client PCs.
● The client PC was started with the transfer parameter "/M".
Procedure
To change a distributed simulation on the client PC, follow these steps:
1. Deactivate the "Remote control active" option in the project properties.
The connection to the master PC is disconnected. The simulation on the client PC initially
continues.
2. Change the model.
3. Start the simulation with your changes.
4. When the simulation can be run, bring the simulation on the client PC into the same state as
the simulation on the master PC.
5. Activate the "Remote control active" option in the project properties.
Result
The client PC once again runs under the control of the master PC.
See also
Configuration of a distributed simulation (Page 50)

Basics of SIMIT

Couplings 2
2.1 Coupling concept
2.1.1 Couplings in the SIMIT architecture
Introduction
A coupling is an interface between SIMIT and a coupling partner, for example, an automation
system. A coupling has the following tasks:
● Signal exchange with the coupling partner
The input/output signals (I/O signals) of the coupling partner are exchanged with SIMIT over
the coupling.
● Coordination of signal exchange between SIMIT and the coupling partner
Types of coupling
There are three different types of coupling in SIMIT:
● Coupling with a real SIMATIC controller
● Coupling with an emulated SIMATIC controller
● Coupling with an external partner
Coupling with a real SIMATIC Coupling with an emulated SIMATIC Coupling with an ex‐
controller controller ternal partner
SIMIT Unit PRODAVE Virtual con‐ PLCSIM PLCSIM –
troller Advanced
Simulation of bus behavior Yes No No No
Simulation of isochronous No No Yes No1
mode
Access to the process im‐ Yes Yes No
age
Use of hardware configu‐ Yes No Yes No No No
ration data from STEP 7
Import and export of sig‐ Yes Yes Yes2
nals
1
The MCD coupling supports isochronous mode.
2
Depending on the external coupling partner

Couplings
Each coupling has its own configurator for creating and editing the coupling.
Note
A maximum of 16 external couplings can be used in a SIMIT project, regardless of the coupling
type.
Couplings in the architecture of SIMIT

Each simulation system consists of two components:
● Modeling system
In the modeling system you create the simulation model and configure the interfaces to the
coupling partners.
● Control system
You run the simulation model in the control system. To do so, the simulation model
communicates with the coupling partners.
3URMHFWPDQDJHPHQW
&RPSRQHQW *UDSKLFV 0RGHO *8,FRQWURO $QDO\VLV

HGLWRU HGLWRU HGLWRU YLVXDOL]DWLRQ
0RGHOLQJV\VWHP
&RQWUROV\VWHP
&RPSRQHQWV 0RGHO &RGH 6LPXODWLRQ
JHQHUDWRU PRGHO
&RXSOLQJ
FRQILJXUDWRUV
6,0,78QLW 9LUWXDOFRQWUROOHU
&RPPXQLFDWLRQ
&RXSOLQJV
LQUXQQLQJ57
352'$9( 0&'
FRQILJXUDWLRQ
+DUGZDUH
3/&6,0$GYDQFHG 6KDUHGPHPRU\
3/&6,0 23&'$23&8$
&RXSOLQJSDUWQHU
A coupling provides the connection between the simulation model run by the control system
and the coupling partner.
● The interface to the simulation model
This interface is the same for all couplings. The simulation model therefore does not depend
on the type of coupling used. Couplings can therefore be interchanged within the simulation
model without having to be modified.
● The interface to the coupling partner
The interface must be configured once for each coupling. The interface is different for each
coupling.

Couplings
Configuration of couplings
For signal exchange between the simulation model and an automation system, the coupling
must contain the following information:
● The information required to establish the connection
● Signals to be exchanged
This information is saved for each coupling with a configurator.
2.1.2 Couplings to SIMATIC PLCs
Introduction
SIMIT provides couplings with a SIMATIC controller such as S7-400 over PROFIBUS DP,
PROFINET IO or PRODAVE and a coupling to PLCSIM / PLCSIM Advanced and to SIMIT VC.
The data required for the configuration can be taken from the SIMATIC projects.
Coupling with a SIMATIC controller

You couple a SIMATIC controller with a PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO field bus directly at
the field bus level with SIMIT:
352),%86'3
352),%86'3
(WKHUQHW
3URILEXV'3VODYHV

Couplings
"SIMIT Units" that simulate the field devices are used in SIMIT to do this. Such an SIMIT Unit
is connected to the PROFIBUS DP master or PROFINET IO controller of the control system in
the simplest configuration. The controller then communicates with this SIMIT Unit and with
SIMIT in the same way as in a real plant with the field devices. The SIMIT interface to the
SIMATIC controller is in this case the field bus cable.
You can find additional information on this under SIMIT Unit (Page 64).
Coupling with Virtual Controller

A virtual controller simulates a station with process image input and output. You can find
additional information on this under Virtual Controller (Page 105).
Coupling with PLCSIM Advanced

PLCSIM Advanced coupling of SIMIT enables the dynamic exchange of data between PLCSIM
Advanced and SIMIT. PLCSIM Advanced and SIMIT must be installed on the same computer.
You can find additional information on this under PLCSIM Advanced coupling (Page 140).
Coupling with PLCSIM

The SIMIT PLCSIM coupling enables the dynamic exchange of data between PLCSIM and
SIMIT. PLCSIM and SIMIT must be installed on the same computer. You can find additional
information on this under PLCSIM coupling (Page 145).
Coupling with PRODAVE

An alternative to coupling SIMIT to a SIMATIC controller over a field bus is coupling over the
PRODAVE interface. The physical connection between the controller and the SIMIT PC is in
this case over one of the following interfaces:
● Serial interface
● USB
● MPI interface card
● Ethernet
This coupling does not offer such high performance as the field bus coupling due to the
PRODAVE interface.
You can find additional information on this under PRODAVE coupling (Page 172).
Note
IP address space
SIMIT only supports PCS 7 projects with an IP V4 address space.

Couplings
2.2 Coupling editor
2.2 Coupling editor

You execute the following tasks in the Coupling Editor:
● Configuring the properties of a coupling
● Configuring the properties of signals
The coupling editor is specific to each type of coupling, but always has the structure shown in
the figure below:
① Menu bar
The content of the menu bar depends on the coupling type. By default, the menu bar includes the commands for
importing and exporting signals. For further information, please refer to: Importing and exporting signals (Page 193)
② Input and output signals
Lists the signals with their associated parameters and properties separately by "Inputs" and "Outputs":
● You connect the signals under "Inputs" to the output connectors in the simulation model.
● You connect the signals under "Outputs" to the input connectors in the simulation model.
You can find information on editing signals in the coupling editor in: Signal basics (Page 182).
③ Property view
In the property view you edit the properties of a signal or those of the coupling you selected in the project tree.
The properties that are displayed depend on the type of coupling.
Double-click on a coupling in the project tree to open the coupling editor.

Couplings
2.3 Creating a HWCN export file
2.3 Creating a HWCN export file
Introduction
To import stations from a STEP 7/PCS 7 project on a SIMIT PC on which PCS 7 is not installed,
generate a HWCNExport file from the STEP 7/PCS 7 project. To generate the HWCNExport
file, use the "HWCNExport" application that is by default installed with SIMIT.
Note
The "HWCNExport" application can be run without additional installation.
You can find the application in the Start menu "Start > All Programs >Siemens Automation >
SIMIT > Tools".
If you want to use this application on a PC without a SIMIT installation, copy the complete folder
to any location on the PC and start the "HWCNExport".
The following couplings support import from an HWCNExport file:
Coupling Supported STEP 7 version

Virtual controller ● Up to and including V5.5
PLCSIM Advanced ● V14 SP1 to V15.1
Requirement
● Creating an HWCNExport file for a virtual controller:
– STEP 7 up to V5.5 is installed.
● Creating an HWCNExport file for PLCSIM Advanced:
– STEP 7 (V14 SP1 to V15.1) is installed.
– TIA Portal Openness is installed.
– STEP 7 project is closed.
● .NET Framework 3.5 or higher is installed.
● There is a folder with the "HWCNExport" application.
Procedure
Proceed as follows to create an HWCNExport file:
1. Start the "HWCNExport" application.
2. To export the hardware configuration from a STEP 7 V5.5 project:
– Select the "STEP 7 V5.x" tab.
– Select the required STEP 7/PCS 7 project type.
– Select the STEP 7/PCS 7 project.

Couplings
2.4 Deactivating couplings
3. To export the hardware configuration from a STEP 7 V14 SP1 project:

– Select the "STEP 7 V14 SP1" tab.
– Select the STEP 7 project:
4. Select the folder that contains the HWCNExport file.
5. Click "Create XML".
Result
The HWCNExport file is created in "*.XML" format.
See also
"Virtual controller import" dialog box (Page 929)
"PLCSIM Advanced import" dialog box (Page 928)
2.4 Deactivating couplings

If you have configured a coupling in your simulation project but want to start simulation without
it, set the hardware channel in the coupling property view to "Not assigned":
The coupling is then not enabled the next time simulation is started. All values for the signals
in this coupling are set to "0". There is no signal exchange.
This function is only available with the following types of coupling:
● SIMIT Unit
● PLCSIM
● PRODAVE
● OPC client

Couplings
2.5 SIMIT Unit
2.5 SIMIT Unit
2.5.1 Operating principle of the SIMIT Unit coupling
Function
SIMIT communicates with one or more bus systems over the "SIMIT Unit" coupling:
● PROFINET IO controller
● PROFIBUS DP master
The "SIMIT Unit" is used as a link for communication between the controller and SIMIT. The
SIMIT Unit maps the behavior of devices at the bus and enables the exchange of data between
the controller and SIMIT.
352),%86'3
352),%86'3
(WKHUQHW
3URILEXV'3VODYHV

Couplings
2.5 SIMIT Unit
SIMIT Unit connection to SIMIT

The SIMIT Unit communicates with a SIMIT PC over Ethernet. SIMIT PC and all connected
SIMIT Units must be located in one shared subnet. The devices simulated on PROFINET must
be located in a different subnet. You can find more information in the section "Supported
PROFINET IO configurations (Page 73)".

352),%86'3
352),1(7,2

(WKHUQHW
352),1(7,2
6XEQHW 6XEQHW
Additional information
You can find more information on the SIMIT Unit on the Internet (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109746192).
See also
Configuring a SIMIT Unit (Page 83)
Supported PROFIBUS DP configurations (Page 66)

Couplings
2.5 SIMIT Unit
2.5.2 Supported PROFIBUS DP configurations
Introduction
Typical PROFIBUS DP configurations that are supported by SIMIT are listed below. In the left
of the figure (see below), you can see the configuration of the automation system and on the
right the layout with SIMIT. The following examples of configurations with non-redundant
controllers are shown:
● A controller with a PROFIBUS DP line
● A controller with two PROFIBUS DP lines
● Two controllers, each with a PROFIBUS DP line
The following examples of redundant configurations are provided:
● A redundant controller with a redundant PROFIBUS DP line
● One redundant controller with Y-link
● Two redundant controllers, each with a PROFIBUS DP line configured at one end only
For all configurations, a mixed configuration of real and simulated PROFIBUS DP slaves is
possible.
Bus couplers can also be used, either as DP/DP couplers, as DP/PA couplers, or in redundant
configurations as a Y-link.
Fail-safe I/Os can also be simulated in redundant H/F systems.

Couplings
2.5 SIMIT Unit
A controller with a PROFIBUS DP line
352),%86'3
352),%86'3
(WKHUQHW
3URILEXV'3VODYHV
Note
In this configuration, only one channel of a two-channel SIMIT Unit is used.

Couplings
2.5 SIMIT Unit
A controller with two PROFIBUS DP lines
352),%86'3
352),%86'3
(WKHUQHW
3URILEXV'3VODYHV

Couplings
2.5 SIMIT Unit
Two controllers, each with a PROFIBUS DP line
352),%86'3
352),%86'3
352),%86'3
(WKHUQHW
3URILEXV'3VODYHV

Couplings
2.5 SIMIT Unit
A redundant controller with a redundant PROFIBUS DP line
352),%86'3
352),%86'3
(WKHUQHW
3URILEXV'36ODYHV

Couplings
2.5 SIMIT Unit
One redundant controller with Y-link
352),%86'3
352),%86'3
(WKHUQHW
3URILEXV'36ODYHV
</LQN
</LQN

Couplings
2.5 SIMIT Unit
Two redundant controllers, each with a PROFIBUS DP line configured at one end only
352),%86'3
(WKHUQHW
352),%86'3
3URILEXV'3VODYHV
352),%86'3
Note
Note that the station must actually be configured at one end only in STEP 7.
See also
Redundant configurations (H systems) (Page 78)

Couplings
2.5 SIMIT Unit
2.5.3 Supported PROFINET IO configurations
Introduction
Typical PROFINET IO configurations that are supported by SIMIT are listed below. In the left
of the figure (see below), you can see the configuration of the automation system and on the
right the layout with SIMIT.
● A controller with a PROFINET IO line
● A redundant controller with a redundant PROFIBUS IO line
● One controller with Shared Device
● Ring topology
Note
The IP address of the SIMIT Unit and the IP addresses of the simulated PROFINET IO devices
must be located in different subnets.
Example:
● IP address of the SIMIT Unit: 192.169.xxx.yyy, subnet mask: 255.255.0.0
● IP address of a simulated PROFINET IO device: 192.168.xxx.yyy, subnet mask:
255.255.0.0
At least one digit of the first two segments of the IP address must be different.

Couplings
2.5 SIMIT Unit
A controller with a PROFINET IO line
352),1(7,2
352),1(7,2
(WKHUQHW
352),1(7,2VODYHV

Couplings
2.5 SIMIT Unit
A redundant controller with a redundant PROFIBUS IO line
352),1(7,2
352),1(7,2
(WKHUQHW
352),1(7,2VODYHV

Couplings
2.5 SIMIT Unit
Controllers with Shared Device
352),1(7,2
(WKHUQHW (WKHUQHW

3URILQHW,26ODYH 3URILQHW,26ODYH 3URILQHW,26ODYH


Couplings
2.5 SIMIT Unit
Ring topology
352),1(7,2
352),1(7,2
(WKHUQHW
352),1(7,2VODYHV
The figure below is a schematic representation of the necessary configuration settings in SIMIT:

352),1(7,2

(WKHUQHW
352),1(7,2VODYHV
6,0,781,7,3

3RUW
)LUVWGHYLFHDWSRUW
)LUVWGHYLFHSRUWDWSRUW
)LUVWGHYLFHDWSRUW
3RUW )LUVWGHYLFHSRUWDWSRUW
See also
Properties of the SIMIT Unit coupling (Page 96)
Redundant and fail-safe systems (Page 78)

Couplings
2.5 SIMIT Unit
2.5.4 Redundant and fail-safe systems
2.5.4.1 Redundant configurations (H systems)
Introduction
SIMIT supports the simulation of redundant systems (H-systems). In a connected redundant
system, all redundant diagnostic signals required are generated by the SIMIT Unit. This means
you can also switch your controller from master to standby and back. You can see whether or
not a slave is redundant under "H-system" in the slave property view.
DP/DP couplers can also be included as a Y-link in redundant systems. The coupling signals
of bus nodes that are connected behind the Y-link are also available in SIMIT in the same way
as the coupling signals of nodes that are connected directly to the redundant bus.

Couplings
2.5 SIMIT Unit
Redundant PROFIBUS system

Only the signals of the first redundant system (channel 0) are used as coupling signals in SIMIT,
irrespective of which of the two buses is active. Bus switchovers are handled by SIMIT: The
assignment of the coupling signals to the active channel is performed automatically. The
redundant signals from the second channel are not listed. However, the signal list indicates that
these signals are assigned to two master systems (1 and 2).
Redundant PROFINET system
Note
The simulation of a redundant PROFINET system is only supported with SIMIT Unit PN 256.
Only one line of the redundant system is created in SIMIT.

Couplings
2.5 SIMIT Unit
Setup example
When you configure a coupling to a redundant system, one SIMIT Unit is required for each
redundant system. Two redundant systems are configured in the example below. Two lines are
configured at each redundant system, but the distributed I/O is only connected to one line each.
The following configuration is not permitted with only one SIMIT unit:
352),%86'3
352),%86'3
352),%86'3
(WKHUQHW
352),%86'3
3URILEXV'36ODYHV
352),%86'3
The figure below shows the two possible solutions:

Couplings
2.5 SIMIT Unit

352),%86'3
352),%86'3
(WKHUQHW
(WKHUQHW 3URILEXV'36ODYHV
3URILEXV'36ODYHV
352),%86'3
① You remove the unused line in the hardware configuration.

② You use an additional SIMIT Unit.

Couplings
2.5 SIMIT Unit
2.5.4.2 Fail-safe configurations (F systems)

When you import a fail-safe configuration, the corresponding quality signals for all binary fail-
safe signals are automatically generated and displayed in the property view of the fail-safe
signal.
All quality signals set to "1" are valid by default. To set a signal to "invalid", set the
corresponding quality signal to "0" and deselect the check box under "Quality bit" in the property
view. This can be used, for example, to test the reaction of your control program to signal
interference.
Note
After loading the interface module with a fail-safe configuration, the connected SIMATIC CPU
needs to be restarted.
2.5.4.3 Redundant and fail-safe configurations (H/F systems)

Redundant and fail-safe systems (HF-systems) can also be simulated. The signals and quality
signals are processed and displayed as described in the following sections:
● Redundant configurations (H systems) (Page 78)
● Fail-safe configurations (F systems) (Page 82)

Couplings
2.5 SIMIT Unit
The following mixed configurations can also be simulated:

● Fail-safe and non-fail-safe bus nodes
● Redundant and non-redundant connected bus nodes
2.5.5 Setting up a SIMIT Unit
2.5.5.1 Configuring a SIMIT Unit
Requirement
● SIMIT Unit can be accessed in the network.
● SIMIT is open.
Procedure
Follow these steps to configure a SIMIT Unit:
1. Select the "SU management" command from the "Options" menu.
The "SU management" dialog box opens. The system automatically searches for available
SIMIT units in the network.
2. Enter the following information for the SIMIT Unit:
– Name
– IP address
– Subnet mask
Result
The SIMIT Unit is configured. The configuration data are saved in the SIMIT Unit.
See also
Operating principle of the SIMIT Unit coupling (Page 64)
"SU administration" dialog box (Page 937)
Creating a coupling of the "SIMIT Unit" type (Page 85)

Couplings
2.5 SIMIT Unit
2.5.5.2 Importing device description file to SIMIT
Introduction
If data for a device is already available in the delivered SIMIT software, it is shown in the "SU
Administration" as "System". If you import the GSD or GSDML files to a device, they are
displayed in the "SU mdministration" as "User". The "User" information generally takes
precedence over the "System" information.
Requirement
● SIMIT is open.
● Device description file is available.
Procedure
Follow these steps to import a device description file:
The "SU management" dialog box will open. The system automatically searches for
available SIMIT units in the network.
2. Select the tab for importing a device description file.
3. Click on "Import" to open the device description data.
Result
The additional device information is imported and listed. The device information is saved on the
PC on which SIMIT is installed.
See also
2.5.5.3 Updating the firmware of the SIMIT Unit
Requirement
● SIMIT Unit is configured.
● SIMIT is open.
● Firmware file is available.

Couplings
2.5 SIMIT Unit
Procedure
NOTICE
Damage of SIMIT Unit possible during firmware update
Observe the following rules for the duration of the firmware update:
● Do not switch off the SIMIT Unit.
● Do not restart the SIMIT Unit.
● Do not remove or connect any cables from or to the SIMIT Unit.
To ensure an uninterruptible power supply, connect the SIMIT Unit to a UPS.
Follow these steps to update the firmware of the SIMIT Unit:

The "SU management" dialog box opens. A search for reachable SIMIT Units is
automatically started in the network.
2. Select the desired SIMIT Unit.
3. Click "Firmware update".
4. Select the firmware file.
Result
The firmware of the SIMIT Unit is updated. Once the firmware update is complete, update the
overview of SIMIT Units under "SU management".
See also
2.5.6 Configuring a coupling of the "SIMIT Unit" type
2.5.6.1 Creating a coupling of the "SIMIT Unit" type
Introduction
You can create a coupling of the "SIMIT Unit" type in a SIMIT project. You create "stations"
under the SIMIT Unit to which the hardware configuration of a station is imported from STEP 7.
Requirement
● Project is open in SIMIT.

Couplings
2.5 SIMIT Unit
Procedure
Follow these steps to create a coupling of the "SIMIT Unit" type:
1. Add a new coupling in the project tree under "Couplings".
The "Selection" dialog box opens.
2. Select the coupling type "SIMIT Unit".
Result
The "SIMIT Unit" coupling is created together with a station in the project tree.
See also
2.5.6.2 Creating a station
Requirement
● Project is open.
● Coupling of the "SIMIT Unit" type has been created.
● Hardware configuration from STEP 7 is available.
Procedure
Follow these steps to create a station:
1. Add a new station under "SIMIT Unit" in the project tree.
2. Open the station.
The "SU import" dialog box will open.
3. Configure the import of the stations from the hardware configuration.
Result
You can find the result after import of the hardware configuration in Importing hardware
configuration to station (Page 87).
See also
"SU Import" dialog box (Page 927)

Couplings
2.5 SIMIT Unit
2.5.6.3 Copying system data blocks
Introduction
If STEP 7 and SIMIT are installed on different PCs, transfer the system data blocks with a
software package provided by SIMIT:
● UnlockHWConfig.exe
● CopyHWConfig.exe
Neither program requires installation and both can be accessed from anywhere. The programs
are saved in the following folders:
● SIMIT CD: "Support\Tools"
● PC with installed SIMIT: Windows start menu under "Siemens Automation > SIMIT > Tools"
67(3
WUDQVIHUULQJVGEILOHV
FRS\LQJVGEILOHV LPSRUWLQJVGEILOHV
UnlockHWConfig.exe
In STEP 7, the sdb files are by default deleted following compilation of the hardware
configuration. To prevent this permanently, launch the program "UnlockHWConfig.exe" once
on the STEP 7 PC. Note that you must run this program with administrator rights.
CopyHWConfig.exe
To copy the system data blocks, use the program "CopyHWConfig.exe". By default, the
following folders are set as source folders:
● STEP 7 V5.5 and later: Temporary STEP 7 storage folder
● STEP 7 V13 and higher: "C:\TIAExports\"
2.5.6.4 Importing hardware configuration to station
Note
Configuration in Run (CiR)
"Configuration in Run" is not supported by SIMIT. Import the system data blocks again if you
have changed the hardware configuration in STEP 7.

Couplings
2.5 SIMIT Unit
Introduction
The hardware configuration is imported straight from STEP 7 or from the copied system data
blocks. System data blocks are generated each time the hardware configuration is compiled in
STEP 7. Import the hardware configuration to the station in SIMIT again if you have changed
the hardware configuration in STEP 7.
STEP 7 version SIMATIC controllers supported Format of the system data blocks
V5.5 and higher 1
● S7-300 / S7-400 ● SDB
as of V13 (TIA Portal)2
● S7-300 / S7-400 ● SDB
● S7-1200 / S7-1500 ● OMS
1
Standard storage folder for system data blocks "<STEP7 installation folder> \S7Tmp\SDBDATA
\S7hwcnfx\DOWN\r00s0x"
2
Standard storage folder for system data blocks: "C:\TIAExports"
Exporting the hardware configuration from STEP 7 V5.5 and higher

Export the hardware configuration from STEP 7 in the following formats:
● SDB
● CFG
Importing the hardware configuration of third-party systems

SIMIT supports the import of the hardware configuration of third-party systems in *.XML format.
You can find additional information under "XML import interface for hardware configuration of
third-party systems (Page 99)".
Requirement
● Coupling of the "SIMIT Unit" type has been created.
● Station has been created under the coupling.
● Station hardware configuration from STEP 7 is available.
● Hardware configuration in STEP 7 has been compiled and loaded.
● Station is open in the coupling editor.
Procedure
Follow these steps to import the hardware configuration to a station:
1. Open the dialog box for importing the hardware configuration in the Coupling Editor.
2. Select the source from which you want to import the hardware configuration.
3. If you import the hardware configuration from STEP 7 V5.5 and higher, also select the
configuration file in *.CFG format.
4. Select the devices.
5. Click "Import".

Couplings
2.5 SIMIT Unit
Result
The hardware configuration of the station is imported.
See also
Editing the signals of a coupling (Page 182)
Creating a station (Page 86)
Configuring the station (Page 90)
"SU Import" dialog box (Page 927)
2.5.6.5 Importing hardware configuration for shared devices
Introduction
SIMIT supports simulation of shared devices.
Requirement
● Coupling of the type "SIMIT Unit" has been created.
● Station has been created under the coupling.
● Hardware configuration of the stations from STEP 7 exists.
● Station with the header data for the Shared Device is known.
● Hardware configuration is compiled and loaded in STEP 7.

Couplings
2.5 SIMIT Unit
Procedure
To import the hardware configuration for shared devices into a station, proceed as follows:
1. Import the hardware configuration of the CPU into the station without header data:
– In the coupling editor, open the dialog box for importing the hardware configuration.
– Select the source.
– When you import the hardware configuration of an S7-300 or S7-400, also specify the
configuration file.
– Select the devices.
– Click "Import".
The "Incomplete import of shared devices detected" message is displayed.
2. Import the hardware configuration of the CPU which contains the header data of the Shared
Device into the station:
– In the coupling editor, open the dialog box for importing the hardware configuration.
– Select the source.
– When you import the hardware configuration of an S7-300 or S7-400, also specify the
configuration file.
– Activate the "Additional information for Shared Devices" option.
– Select the devices.
– Click "Import".
Result
The hardware configuration of the station from STEP 7 is imported.
2.5.6.6 Configuring the station
Introduction
The schematic diagram below shows what information is required for configuring a SIMIT Unit
in SIMIT:

&KDQQHO
352),%86'3

(WKHUQHW

Couplings
2.5 SIMIT Unit
Requirement
● Station has been created.
● IP address of the SIMIT Unit is known.
● Hardware configuration has been imported.
Procedure
Follow these steps to configure a station:
1. Double-click on the required station in the project tree under "Couplings > SIMIT Unit".
2. In the properties window, select the "time slice" of the station.
3. In the properties window, assign each master system to a SIMIT unit under "Station":
– Select the IP address of the SIMIT Unit.
– Select the channel of the SIMIT Unit to which the master system is connected.
4. Save the configuration.
Result
The station is configured. The figure below shows the assignment of a PROFIBUS master
system of a station to a SIMIT Unit:
See also
Loading configuration to station (Page 95)
Importing hardware configuration to station (Page 87)
Properties of the SIMIT Unit coupling (Page 96)

Couplings
2.5 SIMIT Unit
2.5.6.7 Simulation of alarms
Alarms
In SIMIT, you can simulate alarms for the following levels of a station:
● PROFIBUS
Line, slave, module, channel
● PROFINET IO
Line, device, module, submodule, channel
You simulate alarms either in the properties of a station or with the "SetInterrupt" component.
Note
Response with migrated projects from SIMIT versions earlier than V10
To simulate alarms, import a current hardware configuration once.
Simulate alarm in the station properties

Different alarms can be simulated depending on the hardware configuration. The alarms that
can be simulated for the selected component are displayed in the station properties.
In the example below, the check box at "[1] Short-circuit to M" activates a short circuit to ground
in Channel 0.
6WDWLRQ
6WDWLRQ 3URSHUW\ 9DOXH
>@ $GGUHVV (:
>@ >@.XU]VFKOXVVQDFK0
>@ >@8HEHUWHPSHUDWXU
>@ >@0DVVHIHKOHU
>@ >@.XU]VFKOXVVQDFK/
>@ >@*HEHUYHUVRUJXQJIHKOW
&KDQQHO >@([WHUQH/DVWVSDQQXQJIHKOW
&KDQQHO >@*OHLFKWDNWIHKOHU
>@ >@5HIHUHQ]NDQDOIHKOHU
>@ >@3UR]HVVDODUP$QDORJZHUWXHEHUVFKULWWHQ
>@ >@3UR]HVVDODUP$QDORJZHUWXQWHUVFKULWWHQ
Simulate alarm with the component "SetInterrupt"

The number of the desired alarm in the properties determines the number of the input of the
component "SetInterrupt".
In the example above, Channel 0 has the error "Short circuit to M" under number 1. You
therefore connect the process value with the "IN1" input of the component "SetInterrupt".
Channel 0 is part of the coupling Station, line 1, slave 4, module 4. You therefore connect the
signal interrupt of Channel 0, that is "Station [1][4][4]_Channel0_Interrupt" to the output of the
component "SetInterrupt". The signal is located in the "Signals" task card.

Couplings
2.5 SIMIT Unit
6WDWLRQ
6WDWLRQ 3URSHUW\ 9DOXH
>@ $GGUHVV (:
>@ >@.XU]VFKOXVVQDFK0
>@ >@8HEHUWHPSHUDWXU
>@ >@0DVVHIHKOHU
>@ >@.XU]VFKOXVVQDFK/
>@ >@*HEHUYHUVRUJXQJIHKOW
&KDQQHO >@([WHUQH/DVWVSDQQXQJIHKOW
&KDQQHO >@*OHLFKWDNWIHKOHU
>@ >@5HIHUHQ]NDQDOIHKOHU
>@ >@3UR]HVVDODUP$QDORJZHUWXHEHUVFKULWWHQ
>@ >@3UR]HVVDODUP$QDORJZHUWXQWHUVFKULWWHQ
6HW,QWHUUXSW
3URFHVVYDOXH ,1 ,QWHUUXSW 6WDWLRQ>@>@>@B&KDQQHOB,QWHUUXSW
)DOVH ,1
)DOVH ,1
)DOVH ,1
Hardware interrupts
SIMATIC PLCs use hardware interrupts to monitor binary or analog I/O signals: When an
analog value is exceeded or undershot or when a binary value is set or reset, the cyclical
operation of the controller is interrupted to execute the reaction of the user program to this
interrupt. If and under which conditions a device or module triggers hardware interrupts is
defined in the STEP 7 project.
Example: Simulation of a hardware interrupt for an analog value

The following figure shows a configuration example for the simulation of a hardware interrupt.
The hardware interrupt is triggered when configured limits are exceeded or undershot. You use
the component "Compare" to simulate the limit monitoring:
6HW,QWHUUXSW
)DOVH ,1 ,QWHUUXSW 6WDWLRQ>@>@>@B&KDQQHOB,QWHUUXSW
)DOVH ,1
)DOVH ,1
)DOVH ,1
)DOVH ,1
)DOVH ,1
)DOVH ,1
)DOVH ,1
3URFHVVYDOXH ,1
,1


Couplings
2.5 SIMIT Unit
See also
SetInterrupt (Page 549)
2.5.6.8 Device status

The device status is determined from within the SIMIT Unit hardware and shown in the
hardware tree. The markings have the following meaning:
● Red: Error
● Blue: Warning
● Bold: Partial tree with errors or warnings
In the example below, an error exists in Channel 0. Channel 0 is therefore highlighted in red.
The module [4], the slave [4] and the line [1] are shown in bold because a lower-level object has
an error. There are also warnings for slave [6] and line [1]. This is why the slave and line are
highlighted in blue. The status of the marked component is shown in the properties, e.g. "Failed,
No Cyclic Data Exchange" or "Cyclic Data Exchange".
2.5.6.9 Disabling a line, device or module
Introduction
For example, to simulate the failure of a line, device or module during a simulation, disable the
line, device or module in the coupling properties. In this way you can test, for example, the
reaction of the controller to failure and return of a line, device or module.
Deactivation works while simulation is running and during configuration.

Couplings
2.5 SIMIT Unit
Requirement
● Coupling of the type "SIMIT Unit" has been created.
● Station is configured.
Procedure
To disable a line, a device or a module, proceed as follows:
1. To disable a line:
– Select the line in the properties.
– Select the option "Line failure".
2. To disable a device:
– Select the device in the properties.
– Select the option "Slave failure".
3. To disable a module:
– Select the module in the properties.
– Select the option "Pull module".
Result
The line, device or module has been disabled.
See also
2.5.6.10 Loading configuration to station
Requirement
● Master system is connected to simulation.
● SIMIT Unit is connected to the PC on which SIMIT is installed.
● Station is configured.
Procedure
Note
Communication between the master system and controller is briefly interrupted during loading.

Couplings
2.5 SIMIT Unit
Follow these steps to load a configuration to a station:

1. Open the station.
2. If you want to also save the SIMIT project in the SIMIT Unit, select the "Load project
permanently" option in the station properties.
3. Click "Save and load" in the coupling editor.
Result
The configuration is loaded to the SIMIT Unit. You can launch simulation for this station once
loading is complete.
See also
2.5.6.11 Properties of the SIMIT Unit coupling
Properties of a station

Couplings
2.5 SIMIT Unit
● Time slice
Here you set the cycle at which the coupling exchanges data. The assignment of absolute
cycle times to the 8 available time slices is valid for the entire project. The default is time slice
2, which corresponds to a cycle of 100 ms.
Note
The time slice with the lowest cycle time always has the highest priority, regardless of the
numbering.
● Mnemonics
Specifies whether the German ("E/A") or English ("I/Q") term for the absolute addresses is
used.
Note
Define the mnemonics immediately after import. If you subsequently change the
mnemonics, signals already interconnected in a chart can no longer be assigned to the
original address.
● H system
Shows that the system is an H system.
● F system
Shows that the system is an F system.
● Load project permanent
Specifies that the simulation project is also saved in the SIMIT Unit. You can continue the
simulation when the SIMIT Unit is restarted without having to load the simulation project to
the SIMIT Unit once again.
To delete the simulation project from the SIMIT Unit, disable the option and load the
configuration to the SIMIT Unit.
General properties of a connection over PROFIBUS/PROFINET

● LineIndex
Shows the number of the master system.
● SIMIT UNIT (IP)
Specifies the IP address of the Simulation Unit to which the SIMIT PC is connected.
● SIMIT Unit (channel)
Specifies the channel on which the controller is connected to the SIMIT Unit.
● H system
Shows that the system is an H system.
● F system
Shows that the system is an F system.

Couplings
2.5 SIMIT Unit
Specific properties of a connection over PROFINET
● First device at port 1

Specifies the device that is configured as the first device in the network configuration as
seen from the PROFINET controller.
● First device port at port 1
Specifies the port connecting the device to the PROFINET controller. Only necessary if
topology is configured.
● First device at port 2
Specifies the device that is configured as the first device in the network configuration as
seen from the PROFINET controller. Only necessary if topology is configured.
● First device port at port 2
Specifies the port connecting the device to the PROFINET controller. Only necessary if
topology is configured.
A configuration example is available in Supported PROFINET IO configurations (Page 73).
Specific properties of a connection over PROFIBUS
● Baud rate
Shows the transmission speed.

Couplings
2.5 SIMIT Unit
See also
2.5.6.12 XML import interface for hardware configuration of third-party systems
Basics for XML import

SIMIT supports the import of the hardware configuration of controllers of third-party vendors via
an XML hardware import interface.
An XML file that conforms to the formats described below can be imported into SIMIT (SU
import / XML import). This creates an executable and loadable PROFIBUS or PROFINET
project.
The user can thus configure a simulation relatively easily using a suitable export of the
hardware data from his configuration tool or also using an XML editor.
XML format for the import of a PROFIBUS line

The following describes the structure of the XML file, which contains all the data required for
SIMIT to simulate a PROFIBUS line.
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="iso-8859-1"?> XML declaration line

<HARDWARE> Root tag, (always "HARDWARE")
<COMMENT/> Comment, optional
<NAME>SimbaPROFIBUS_0[0]</NAME> Name of the simulation box, name is freely assignable, the
number in the square brackets at the end indicates the channel
of the box and must be present.
<HWTYPE>DPBOX</HWTYPE> Type of simulation box, for PROFIBUS "DPBOX"
<BAUDRATE>6</BAUDRATE> PROFIBUS baud rate: 9 = 12 Mbd, 8 = 6 MBd, 7 = 3 Mbd, 6 =

1.5 Mbd etc.
<DPSUBSYSTEM>1</DPSUBSYSTEM> PROFIBUS system ID
<CHILDTYPE>SLAVE</CHILDTYPE> Internal key for the next hierarchy level.
<SLAVE> Tag for the PROFIBUS device

<NAME>My ET200</NAME> Name (optional)
<ORDERNUMBER>6ES7 326-1BK01-0AB0</ Order number (optional)
ORDERNUMBER>
<INDEX>3</INDEX> PROFIBUS address
<TYPE>801E</TYPE> Type identification according to GSD file
<CHILDTYPE>MODULE</CHILDTYPE> Key for the next hierarchy level
<REDUNDANCY>1</REDUNDANCY> Redundancy, only for redundant bus systems
<MODULE> Tag for device modules

<NAME>My DI16</NAME> Name, optional
<INDEX>4</INDEX> Slot

Couplings
2.5 SIMIT Unit
<TYPE>4301009FC2</TYPE> Module type according to GSD file

<CHILDTYPE>CHANNEL</CHILDTYPE> Next hierarchy level
<INLEN>2</INLEN> Input length of the module in bytes
<OUTLEN>0</OUTLEN> Output length of the module in bytes
<LOGIN>0</LOGIN> Logical input address, must be unique AS-wide. Data is ex‐
changed from the interface via this address.
</MODULE>
... Additional modules can follow.
<MODULE>
<COMMENT/>
<NAME>DI 24xFailsafe </NAME>
<ORDERNUMBER>6ES7
326-1BK01-0AB0</ORDERNUMBER>
<INDEX>8</INDEX>
<TYPE>C2838908C1</TYPE>
<CHILDTYPE>CHANNEL</CHILDTYPE>
<INLEN>10</INLEN>
<OUTLEN>4</OUTLEN>
<LOGIN>4</LOGIN>
<LOGOUT>4</LOGOUT> Logical output address, must be unique AS-wide. Data is ex‐
changed from the interface via this address.
</MODULE>
</SLAVE>
<SLAVE> Additional devices can follow
...
</SLAVE>
...
</HARDWARE>
XML format for the import of a PROFINET line

The XML file for importing a PROFINET line differs from that of a Profibus line due to the
different bus hardware and the other associated parameters required.
<HARDWARE>
<COMMENT/>
<NAME>SimbaPNIO_2[0]</NAME> Name of the simulation box, name is freely assignable, the
number in the square brackets at the end indicates the
channel of the box and must be present.
<HWTYPE>PNIO</HWTYPE> Type of simulation box. For PROFINET "PNIO"
<IOSUBSYSTEM>100</IOSUBSYSTEM> PROFINET system ID
<FIRSTDEVICE>6</FIRSTDEVICE> Topology information, the device that is directly behind the
controller and is thus simulated at the external interface of
the simulation box.
<FIRSTPORT>1</FIRSTPORT> The corresponding port for this.

Couplings
2.5 SIMIT Unit
<SECONDDEVICE>6</SECONDDEVICE> Topology information for the second channel for redun‐

dant systems.
<SECONDPORT>2</SECONDPORT> Second port for redundant systems.
<CHILDTYPE>PNIODEV</CHILDTYPE> Child type of the next hierarchy level.
<PNIODEV> Tag for a PROFINET device.
<NAME>My PROFINET IO</NAME> Name of the device (optional).
<INDEX>6</INDEX> Device index
<TYPE>002A0302</TYPE> Device type according to GSDML
<IPADDR>192.168.0.4</IPADDR> Simulated IP address.
<SubnetMask>255.255.255.0</ SubnetMask > Subnet mask plus
<PRJNAME>im153-4pn</PRJNAME> Device name in the project, required by the controller to
identify the device using a DCP telegram.
<CHILDTYPE>PNIOSLOT</CHILDTYPE> Type of the next hierarchy level.
<PNIOSLOT> Tag for a PNIO slot.
<NAME>! IM153-4 PN HF V4.0</NAME> Name (optional)
<ORDERNUMBER>6ES7 153-4BA00- 0XB0</ Order number (optional), the order number can be useful
ORDERNUMBER> if a distinction should be made between different modules
with the same type identification.
<INDEX>0</INDEX> Slot, 0 is always the head module with PROFINET. In
contrast to PROFIBUS devices, this must be specified
here.
<TYPE>00000423</TYPE> Slot type according to GSDML
<API>0</API> API no.
<HEAD>8</HEAD> Identification of the slot as header module, may only be
present once in the device.
<CHILDTYPE>SUBSLOT</CHILDTYPE> Type of the next hierarchy level
<SUBSLOT> Tag for a PNIO subslot
<NAME>DIM 9 HF V4.0</NAME> Name (optional)
<INDEX>1</INDEX> Progressive index within the slot
<TYPE>00000000</TYPE> Type according to GSDML
<INLEN>0</INLEN> IO data input length in bytes
<OUTLEN>0</OUTLEN> IO data output length in bytes
<IOPS_Length>1</IOPS_Length> IO provider module status length in bytes
<IOCS_Length>1</IOCS_Length> IO consumer module status length in bytes
<CHILDTYPE>CHANNEL</CHILDTYPE> Type of the next hierarchy level
</SUBSLOT>
<SUBSLOT>
<NAME>PN-IO</NAME> Subslot for the PNIO interface
<INDEX>32768</INDEX>
<TYPE>00008002</TYPE>
<INLEN>0</INLEN>
<OUTLEN>0</OUTLEN>
<IOPS_Length>1</IOPS_Length>
<IOCS_Length>1</IOCS_Length>
</SUBSLOT>

Couplings
2.5 SIMIT Unit
<SUBSLOT>
<NAME>Port 1</NAME> Subslot for a port of the PNIO interface
<TYPE>0000C000</TYPE>
<INLEN>0</INLEN>
<OUTLEN>0</OUTLEN>
</SUBSLOT>
<SUBSLOT>
<NAME>Port 2</NAME>
<INLEN>0</INLEN>
<OUTLEN>0</OUTLEN>
</SUBSLOT>
</PNIOSLOT>
<PNIOSLOT> Slot example for an input module
<NAME>SM 321 DI16xDC24V</NAME>
<ORDERNUMBER>6ES7 321-1BH50-0AA0</
ORDERNUMBER>
<INDEX>1</INDEX>
<TYPE>00009FC2</TYPE>
<API>0</API>
<CHILDTYPE>SUBSLOT</CHILDTYPE>
<SUBSLOT>
<TYPE>00000000</TYPE>
<INDEX>1</INDEX>
<NAME>14</NAME>
<INLEN>2</INLEN>
<OUTLEN>0</OUTLEN>
<LOGIN>6</LOGIN> Logical input address, must be unique AS-wide. Data is
exchanged from the interface via this address.
<CHILDTYPE>CHANNEL</CHILDTYPE>
</SUBSLOT>
</PNIOSLOT>
... Additional allocated slots
<PNIOSLOT>
<NAME>FDO10xDC24V/2A</NAME>
<INDEX>4</INDEX>

Couplings
2.5 SIMIT Unit
<API>0</API>
<CHILDTYPE>SUBSLOT</CHILDTYPE>
<SUBSLOT>
<TYPE>00000000</TYPE>
<INDEX>1</INDEX>
<INLEN>6</INLEN>
OUTLEN>6</OUTLEN>
<LOGIN>18</LOGIN>
<LOGOUT>18</LOGOUT> Logical output address, must be unique AS-wide. Data is
exchanged from the interface via this address.
</SUBSLOT>
</PNIOSLOT>
</PNIODEV>
... Additional PNIO devices
<PNIODEV>
...
</PNIODEV>
</HARDWARE>
Simultaneous import of several lines

For the simultaneous import of several bus lines, you can arrange the individual "HARDWARE"
tags within a "PROJECT" tag. This can be useful, for example, to generate the two bus lines of
an H system simultaneously.
<?xml version="1.0" XML declaration line

encoding="iso-8859-1"?> Root tag, (now "PROJECT")
<PROJECT>
<HARDWARE> first "HARDWARE"
...
</HARDWARE>
<HARDWARE> second "HARDWARE"
...
</HARDWARE>
</PROJECT>
Syntactic validation of generated XML files

The XML files generated for import in SIMIT can be checked for syntactic errors or missing keys
before the import. A document type definition (DTD file) is available for this. However, the
content of the tags is not checked for meaningfulness.

Couplings
2.5 SIMIT Unit
To check your XML file, copy the following text block from the second line into your XML file and
then load the entire file into a DTD Validator.
<!ELEMENT HARDWARE (COMMENT?, NAME?, HWTYPE, ((DPSUBSYSTEM, BAUDRATE,

CHILDTYPE, SLAVE*) | (IOSUBSYSTEM, FIRSTDEVICE, FIRSTPORT, SECONDDEVICE?,
SECONDPORT?, CHILDTYPE, PNIODEV*)) )>
<!ELEMENT COMMENT (#PCDATA)>
<!ELEMENT NAME (#PCDATA)>
<!ELEMENT HWTYPE (#PCDATA)>
<!ELEMENT CHILDTYPE (#PCDATA)>
<!ELEMENT BAUDRATE (#PCDATA)>
<!ELEMENT DPSUBSYSTEM (#PCDATA)>
<!ELEMENT IOSUBSYSTEM (#PCDATA)>
<!ELEMENT FIRSTDEVICE (#PCDATA)>
<!ELEMENT FIRSTPORT (#PCDATA)>
<!ELEMENT SECONDDEVICE (#PCDATA)>
<!ELEMENT SECONDPORT (#PCDATA)>
<!ELEMENT SLAVE (COMMENT?, NAME?, ORDERNUMBER?, INDEX, TYPE, CHILDTYPE,
REDUNDANCY?, MODULE*)>
<!ELEMENT INDEX (#PCDATA)>
<!ELEMENT TYPE (#PCDATA)>
<!ELEMENT ORDERNUMBER (#PCDATA)>
<!ELEMENT REDUNDANCY (#PCDATA)>
<!ELEMENT MODULE (COMMENT?, NAME?, ORDERNUMBER?, INDEX, TYPE, CHILDTYPE,
INLEN, OUTLEN, LOGIN?, LOGOUT?)>
<!ELEMENT INLEN (#PCDATA)>
<!ELEMENT OUTLEN (#PCDATA)>
<!ELEMENT LOGIN (#PCDATA)>
<!ELEMENT LOGOUT (#PCDATA)>
<!ELEMENT FAILSAFE (#PCDATA)>
<!ELEMENT PNIODEV (COMMENT?, NAME?, ORDERNUMBER?, INDEX, TYPE, IPADDR,
PRJNAME, CHILDTYPE, PNIOSLOT*) >
<!ELEMENT IPADDR (#PCDATA)>
<!ELEMENT PRJNAME (#PCDATA)>
<!ELEMENT PNIOSLOT (COMMENT?, NAME?, ORDERNUMBER?, INDEX, TYPE, API, HEAD?,
CHILDTYPE, SUBSLOT*) >
<!ELEMENT API (#PCDATA)>
<!ELEMENT HEAD (#PCDATA)>
<!ELEMENT SUBSLOT (NAME?, INDEX, TYPE, INLEN, OUTLEN, IOPS_Length,
IOCS_Length, LOGIN?, LOGOUT?, CHILDTYPE?) >
<!ELEMENT IOPS_Length (#PCDATA)>
<!ELEMENT IOCS_Length (#PCDATA)>
If you do not want to copy the text every time, copy the text block into a text file (for example,
"SIMXMLImport.dtd"), and install only a link to this text file for the validation in your XML files
in the second line.
<!DOCTYPE HARDWARE SYSTEM "SIMITXMLImport.dtd">
The first and last line of the text block must be omitted for use in an external DTD file.
XML validators on the Internet are, for example:
● https://www.xmlvalidation.com (https://www.xmlvalidation.com)
● https://www.w3schools.com/xml/xml_validator.asp (https://www.w3schools.com/xml/
xml_validator.asp)

Couplings
2.6 Virtual Controller
However, they only work if the DTD is directly integrated into the XML file.
The "XMLNotepad2007" from Microsoft is suitable for offline XML validation.
2.6.1 How the Virtual Controller works
2.6.1.1 Introduction
Function
The virtual controller simulates the response of a SIMATIC controller of the type S7-300 or
S7-400. The virtual controller is loaded with the original PLC user program. The field device
level and its connection over distributed bus systems are ignored. Instead, process simulation
is connected directly over the process image input and output.
You can use up to 32 virtual controllers in the simulation project, and can distribute them across
multiple PCs.
Virtual controllers can communicate with each other; connections to external partners and the
operator control and monitoring system are also possible. Only IP-based connections in
address space IPv4 are supported, however.
The figure below shows which automation level components are represented as virtual
controllers:

Couplings
26FOLHQWV

26VHUYHU

$XWRPDWLRQOHYHO
'LVWULEXWHG,2
352),1(7 352),%86'3
In SIMIT, all virtual controllers in a simulation project are shown and configured as separate
couplings in the project navigation under "Couplings > Virtual controllers". Data exchange
between SIMIT and the virtual controller is over these couplings.

Couplings
Intended use of a virtual controller
NOTICE
Important information:
● Automation programs can be run on MS Windows with the virtual controller. As MS
Windows is not a real-time operating system, the following limitations apply:
– System availability
– Accuracy of simulation
You also cannot connect real I/O or bus systems.
● While the functions of the virtual controller have been tested for its intended use (testing
and training systems), we cannot guarantee that the system will always demonstrate the
exact time response. The functions provided cannot cover the complete functional scope
of a real controller in all situations.
The system is therefore not intended for the control of real plants.
The results obtained for virtual commissioning must be checked and evaluated by the user.
To protect the confidentiality of your data, use the virtual controller only as part of a holistic
Industrial Security concept that is state-of-the-art. Third-party products you are using should
also be considered.
You can find additional information on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/
industrialsecurity).
Network topology of simulation with a virtual controller

The entire simulation project including operator control and monitoring can run on one PC. If the
PC does not have sufficient capacity, you can distribute virtual controllers across multiple PCs.
The figure below shows the network topology with virtual controllers distributed between
multiple PCs:

Couplings
7&3,3
① PC with installed SIMIT Simulation Platform

● Manages the SIMIT project
● Starts/stops simulation
● Simulates the field and process level
● Can also include a virtual controller.
② PC with SIMIT VC (virtual controller) installed
● Hosts 1 to 8 virtual controllers
● Must be accessible in the network from the SIMIT PC
● Must be accessible from the OS server
③ PCs with PCS 7 installed (ES, OS server and client)
Note
Supported STEP 7 version
The virtual controller coupling is supported up to and including STEP 7 V5.5.
Note
Use of CFC charts on an S7-410 simulated in the virtual controller
If you are simulating an S7-410 with the virtual controller, note the following when using CFC
charts:
Starting with CFC V8.2 Update 3, you can download a user program without any limitations. If
you are using an older version of CFC, follow the stops below on each PC configured as a
virtual controller:
1. Change to the following directory in Windows:
"Programs (x86)\Siemens\Automation\SIMIT\SIMIT VC\data\CPU"
2. Rename the following files:
– "6ES7 410 5HN08-0AB0" → "6ES7 410 5HN08-0AB0_CPU410"
– "6ES7 410 5HX08-0AB0" → "6ES7 410 5HX08-0AB0_CPU410"
3. Rename the following files:
– "6ES7 410 5HN08-0AB0_LEGACY" → "6ES7 410 5HN08-0AB0"
– "6ES7 410 5HX08-0AB0_LEGACY" → "6ES7 410 5HX08-0AB0"
As a result of this action, the virtual controller will signal back as S7-417. You can download the
project with CFC charts from PCS 7 to the PLC. If you update your CFC installation to the latest
version, you must undo this renaming.

Couplings
Note
Delta download
With each delta download, SIMIT saves a time stamp in the controller. Based on the time
stamp, a decision is made as to whether the program is identical in the controller ("online") and
in SIMIT ("offline"). The virtual controller does not support saving this time stamp across a
restart of the simulation but stores the program correctly. SIMIT will therefore signal an
inconsistent status of the program when going online after a delta download and restart of the
simulation. You can avoid this message with a complete download.
Note
BlockPrivacy
The virtual controller cannot execute blocks that are protected with "BlockPrivacy".
If your project contains blocks that are protected this way, these are replaced by a NOP (No
Operation) in the virtual controller.
2.6.1.2 Requirements for a simulation network
Avoiding IP address conflicts

When using a virtual controller, all of its configured IP addresses and the connections based on
them are applied. You therefore need to enter these additional IP addresses in the network
settings of the PC.
NOTICE
Adding and changing IP addresses
Changing an IP address can lead to communication problems in the network. For example, it
may no longer be possible to access a PC.
Never change IP addresses without consulting your IT administrator.
You can find additional information in section TCP/IP addressing and subnets (https://
support.microsoft.com/en-us/kb/164015).
Rules for simulation with a Virtual Controller

Observe the following rules:
● If a virtual controller is to establish a connection for operator control and monitoring, it must
be reachable over the plant bus.
● The PC on which SIMIT Simulation Platform is installed must have its IP address in the
same subnet as the PCs on which a virtual controller is running.
● Each IP address is unique.
● Each computer name is unique.
● The IP addresses of the simulated stations are entered in the network settings of the PCs.

Couplings
See also
Configuring virtual controllers (Page 123)
2.6.1.3 Functions
The virtual controllers support the following basic controller functions, irrespective of the
specific type:
● Downloading the hardware configuration and application software to the virtual memory of
the virtual controllers
● Interpretation of MC7 code
● Provision of data areas, arithmetic unit, batteries and results of logic operations, counters,
timers, memory areas for process images, etc.
● OB management and scheduling
● Communication functions
● A selection of system functions (SFB/SFC) insofar as this is possible and useful in
virtualization.

Couplings
2.6.1.4 Basics of Virtual Controller communication
Introduction
The virtual controller supports IP-based communication over Ethernet / PROFINET and the
following protocols:
'3 3$
$SSOLFDWLRQ/D\HU )06
63URWRFRO
3UHVHQWDWLRQ/D\HU
63URWRFRO
6HVVLRQ/D\HU
5)&
7UDQVSRUW/D\HU 8'3 ,62
7&3
1HWZRUN/D\HU ,3
'DWD/LQN/D\HU )'/
,(&
,QG(WKHUQHW
03, 352),%86
3K\VLFDO/D\HU
Supported:
● S7
● S7H
● TCP
● UDP
● RFC 1006
The system differentiates between communication between the following stations:

● Virtual Controller ⇔ External partner
● Virtual Controller ⇔ Virtual Controller within a SIMIT instance
Connection configuration in SIMIT

Connection configurations are applied from the imported STEP 7/PCS 7 project. Configuration
changes to a connection are only possible in the STEP 7/PCS 7 project. In SIMIT, you can
enable and disable the use of individual IP addresses of a virtual controller in the Distribution
Editor.

Couplings
Communication with an external partner

The following stations are defines as "external partners":
● Any other device, e.g. a real PLC
● OS servers, e.g. WinCC
● Virtual Controller that runs in the context of another SIMIT instance (e.g. with distributed
simulation)
Note
Please note the restrictions that can result when using substitute functions in virtual controllers.
Communication between two virtual controllers in a SIMIT instance

All IP-based connections between two virtual controllers are supported.
Open User Communication (TSEND / TRECV)

Within the framework of Open User Communication (TSEND / TRECV), the IP addresses and
ports that are stored in the data blocks of the S7 program are used by default. These IP
addresses must be entered in the network settings of the PCs and the port numbers must be
available.
If you are using Open User Communication exclusively between virtual controllers, you can use
internal simulation addressing.
You do not have to enter the IP addresses stored in the S7 program in the network settings of
the PCs in this case. Conflicts with existing port numbers are avoided. You define this type of
addressing once for the entire project and for each protocol separately in the Distribution Editor
(Page 128).
Virtual controllers with multiple IP interfaces in the same subnet

A configured connection always consists of a local IP address and the IP address of the
communication partner. The local IP address cannot always be exactly determined from the
connection configuration. SIMIT therefore checks whether there is a local IP address in the
same subnet for the IP address of the communication partner, and assigns it to the connection.
If there is more than one local IP address in this subnet, SIMIT uses the numerically smallest
local IP address. With UDP connections, the local IP address may not be determined at all
(Multicast, free connection) and remains empty. This means that connections may potentially
not be assigned or not be assigned correctly.
The figure below is a schematic diagram of how SIMIT deals with multiple IP interfaces in the
same subnet upon import:

Couplings

① The local IP addresses cannot be read out (system-related). You may need to correct these
addresses manually in the connection configurations.
② The IP addresses of the connection partner can be read out.
③ Result after import: Connection is correctly assigned.
Assumption: All connections to external partners are based on the lowest IP address.
④ Result after import: Connection is not correctly implemented.
On the basis of the assumption in ③, SIMIT enters "192.168.0.1" as the local address upon
import.
Proceed as follows to correct connections assigned incorrectly or not at all:

1. In the SIMIT project folder under "\io\VCROOT\VC<instance number", rename the
"HWConnection_Override.xml.default" file "HWConnection_Override.xml".
The connection information is saved in the "HWConnection_Override.xml.default" file. This
file is generated with each import.
2. In the "HWConnection_Override.xml" file, correct or add the local IP addresses of the
connections.
3. If necessary, change the "Fast Connection" parameter from "slow" to "fast" for each
connection between two virtual controllers.
See also
Supported system functions (Page 113)
Supported S7 blocks (Page 115)
Supported services (Page 116)
2.6.1.5 Supported system functions

Unlike a real controller, the virtual controller runs on PC hardware and on a Windows operating
system. It cannot therefore be expected to simulate all properties, functions and responses of
a real controller.

Couplings
Only the standard functionalities, for example those of an S7-417-5H, are supported. For
extensions and additional functions of an AS 410-5H, virtual controllers map the functionality of
an S7-400 CPU 417-5H.
Substitute functions in virtual controllers

Automation programs consist of MC7 code that can be interpreted by the virtual controller, and
system functions (SFC/SFB) that are part of the firmware of a controller and the original of
which cannot be run on the PC. The virtual controller has a modified substitute implementation
for the most important system functions:
Type Block number Comment

SFB 0–5, 8, 9, 12–15, 22, 23, 31, 33–
36
SFB 54
SFC 0 The virtual controllers are inter‐
nally always synchronized with
the computer time; SET_CLK
therefore only has a temporary
effect
SFC 1–6, 13–15, 17–34, 36–44, 46–50
SFC 51 SZLs are supported by the virtual
controller without restrictions as
there is no simulation of the dis‐
tributed I/O
SFC 60, 62, 64, 79, 80, 81, 851, 87,
90, 107
SFC 131, 132, 133, 134, 135, 136 T communication
1
Only for S7-300

Couplings
Note
● The use of SFCs is limited because, for example, the I/O are not simulated.
● Before using virtual controllers, verify that the SFBs and SFCs required by your automation
system are supported. You can check the reference data of the blocks in SIMATIC
Manager, for example. You can find additional information on the reference data in the
STEP 7 help.
● The substitute functions provide useful feedback on standard operation of the hardware
without faults, provided this is possible with the level of implementation and information from
the SIMATIC project. Only very limited information on response in the event of a fault is
possible, and must be checked by the user independently.
● User blocks and library components (FB, FC) can potentially access system functions that
are not supported by the virtual controller. In this case, the entire block is ignored
(NoOperation).
● If the automation program expects signals from these system functions, you can make the
corresponding (instance) DB in SIMIT addressable and write the expected information for
SIMIT straight to the corresponding DB.
● The virtual controller supports the "S7 F Systems Lib V1_3" library and "Safety Matrix" in
failsafe operation. Error states cannot be mapped. F communication is only possible
between two virtual controllers in a SIMIT instance.
● "Distributed Safety" is not supported.
2.6.1.6 Supported S7 blocks

The following table shows the S7 blocks supported for each protocol used and communication
partner:
Communication be‐ Virtual controller-Virtual controller Virtual controller-External partner

tween:
S7 block S7 TCP UDP ISO-on- S7 TCP UDP ISO-on-
TCP TCP
FB12 BSEND x – – – x – – –
FB13 BRCV x – – – x – – –
FB14 GET x – – – x – – –
FB15 PUT x – – – x – – –
FB8 USEND x – – – x – – –
FB9 URCV x – – – x – – –
FC5 AG_SEND – x x x – x x x
FC50 AG_LSEND – x x x – x x x
FC53 AG_SSEND – x x x – x x x
FC6 AG_RECV – x x x – x x x
FC60 AG_LRECV – x x x – x x x
FC63 AG_SRECV – x x x – x x x
SFB12 BSEND x – – – x – – –
SFB13 BRCV x – – – x – – –

Couplings
Communication be‐ Virtual controller-Virtual controller Virtual controller-External partner

tween:
S7 block S7 TCP UDP ISO-on- S7 TCP UDP ISO-on-
TCP TCP
SFB14 GET x – – – x – – –
SFB15 PUT x – – – x – – –
SFB22 STATUS x – – – – – – –
SFB23 USTATUS x – – – – – – –
SFB31 NOTI‐ – – – – x – – –
FY_8P
SFB33 ALARM – – – – x – – –
SFB34 ALARM_8 – – – – x – – –
SFB35 ALARM_8P – – – – x – – –
SFB36 NOTIFY – – – – x – – –
SFB8 USEND x – – – x – – –
SFB9 URCV x – – – x – – –
SFC107 – – – – x – – –
ALARM_DQ
SFC108 ALARM_D – – – – x – – –
SFC17 – – – – x – – –
ALARM_SQ
SFC18 ALARM_S – – – – x – – –
SFC19 – – – – x – – –
ALARM_SC
SFC131 T_SEND – x – x – x – x
SFC132 T_RCV – x – x – x – x
SFC133 T_CON – x x x – x x x
SFC134 T_DIS‐ – x x x – x x x
CON
SFC135 T_USEND – – x – – – x –
SFC136 T_URCV – – x – – – x –
2.6.1.7 Supported services
Introduction
Real controllers provide comprehensive services that allow access to the controller.
SIMIT VC supports the following communication services, which are required for
communication between virtual controllers and PCS 7 OS/WinCC servers or PCS 7 OS/WinCC

Couplings
clients. These services provide answers to the following queries that can be sent over the
S7_DOS interface of PCS 7 OS/WinCC.
Note
The virtual controller does not answer other queries. Systems that rely on other services cannot
therefore communicate correctly with the controllers emulated. These include, for example:
● BRAUMAT Classic
● AS based Batch
Supported PCS 7 OS / WinCC services

● VFD / Virtual Device Services
– Read SZL (only the scope of SZL IDs that is required for PCS 7 OS/WinCC
communication is implemented)
● OCM Services
– Cyclic Read Variables (Start, Stop, Change, Abort, Delete)
– Read Variables
– Write Variables
● Message Services
– Acknowledge
– Announcement for Messages (not SCAN, LT group messages or archive)
– Lock / Unlock Messages (not SCAN, LT group messages or archive)
– Message Update (not SCAN, LT group messages or archive)
● PBK Services
– USEND / URCV
– BSEND / BRCV
– PUT (Write Variables)
– GET (Read Variables)

Couplings
Supported S7 services
● SPS7
– Set up application relationship
– Cancel application relationship
– Status_Virtuelles_Gerät
– DataExchange2 Cancel
● Operator control and monitoring
– Reading (variable / segmented)
– Writing (variable / segmented)
– Zyklisches_Lesen_Einrichten
– Änderungsgesteuertes_Zyklisches_Lesen_Einrichten
– Auftrag_starten
– Auftrag_stoppen
– Auftrag_löschen
– Ändern_Zyklisches_Lesen with delta evaluation
– Ändern_Zyklisches_Lesen without delta evaluation
● Diagnostics
– An_Abmelden
– Acknowledgment
– Quittierung_an_alle
– Sperren_Meldungen
– Freigeben_Meldungen
– Sperren_an_alle
– Freigeben_an_alle
– Update
– Update_anfordern_an_alle
– SZL_Lesen (forward to SoftPLC online interface)

Couplings
● Programmable block communication

– ALARM_MELD
– ALARM_8_MELD
– ALARM_SQ / ALARM_DQ
– ALARM_S / ALARM_D
– ALARM_MELD_QTM
– ALARM_MELD_8_QTM
– NOTIFY_8_ALARM_MELD
– USEND / URCV
– BSEND / BRCV
– GET
– PUT
● Test and commissioning / object management
– Forwarding to online interface
Supported services for a programming device (PG)

● Loading
● Delta loading
● Online monitoring (values)
● Read diagnostic buffer
Note
Forcing is not supported.
2.6.1.8 Handling sync errors

Not all sync errors are detected or correctly dealt with (call of an error OB). The error may not
be detected, but generate a runtime error (RTE).
Overview of virtual controller error handling:
Error description Supported

BCD conversion error Yes
Range length error when reading No, generates RTE
Range length error when writing No, generates RTE
Range error when reading Yes
Range error when writing Yes
Timer number error No, generates RTE
Counter number error No, generates RTE

Couplings
Error description Supported

Alignment error when reading Yes
Alignment error when writing Yes
Data block write error No, writing to write-protected block
Instance data block write error No, writing to write-protected block
Block number error DB No, generates RTE
Block number error DI No, generates RTE
Block number error FC No, generates RTE
Block number error FB No, generates RTE
DB not loaded Yes
FC not loaded Yes
FB not loaded No, generates RTE
2.6.1.9 Sequential control

The following organization blocks of a real controller are supported:
Supported by SIM‐ Block type Block Description and event Priority

IT VC
1 User program OB1 User program processed after hot restart (end of 1
OB100) and at the end of the cycle.
10–17 Time-of-day interrupt OB10 Time and date. A trigger can be initiated at a specific 2
OB11 point in time so that a time OB (10–17) is called which
then executes a program. Also called time-of-day in‐
OB12
terrupt OB.
OB13
OB14
OB15
OB16
OB17
20–23 Time-delay interrupt OB20 Time-delay interrupts. After a delay time, the OB (20– 3
OB21 23) is called and the program is executed. 4
OB22 5
OB23 6
30–38 Cyclic interrupt OB30 Cyclic interrupts, start periodically after a defined 7
OB31 time. Similar to clock signals, but much more accu‐ 8
rate. Processing of OB1 is interrupted as they have a
OB32 9
higher priority.
OB33 10
OB34 11
OB35 12
OB36 13
OB37 14
OB38 15

Couplings
– Hardware interrupt OB40 Hardware interrupts. Respond at interruptible input, 16

OB41 output or function modules to configured events, for 17
example, positive edge, high limit violation. Are used,
OB42 18
for example, when the response time in the program
OB43 is too long. 19
OB44 20
OB45 21
OB46 22
OB47 23
– DPV1 interrupt OB55 DPV1 interrupts. Status, update or manufacturer- 2
OB56 specific interrupts are triggered with DPV1 slaves.
OB57
– Multicomputing inter‐ OB60 Synchronous operation of multiple CPUs 25
rupt
– Synchronous cycle in‐ OB61 Configuring short and equal process response times 25
terrupt OB62 at the PROFIBUS DP
OB63
OB64
– Background cycle OB90 For program execution in the background 29
100–102 Startup OB100 After a CPU restart (warm start) 27
OB101 After a CPU hot restart
OB102 After a CPU cold restart
121, not 122 Synchronous errors OB121 When a module fault occurs 29
OB122
The sequential control system of SIMIT does not interrupt OBs already running. They are
classified according to their priority in the basic cycle of SIMIT .
The following figure has a basic cycle time of 100 ms:
Figure 2-1 Sequential control
Resultant time response:

In each cycle, the pending OBs are executed in order of priority one after another without
delays. In the figure above, the cycle time is exceeded for the value "400". This means that the

Couplings
total cycle increases and the next basic cycle is therefore delayed. In the subsequent cycle,
SIMIT internally corrects all times (as shown in the figure above), changing them from "400+x"
back to "400", and continues calculations on that basis even if the real time is already at
"400+x". This keeps the virtual simulation time consistent.
Note
SIMIT distinguishes between timer times and the system time, which is used, for example, to
send messages. The system time is regularly synchronized with the system time of the SIMIT
computer, irrespective of the progress of the timer times.
2.6.1.10 Data record communication

The virtual controller supports data record communication over the following SFCs:
● WR_REC (SFC 58)
● RD_REC (SFC 59)
● WRREC (SFB 53)
● RDREC (SFB 52)
● DPNRM_DG (SFC13)
These blocks need a corresponding device model in SIMIT that can provide the data records.
See also
Access to a data record or memory area (Page 188)
2.6.1.11 Substitute mechanism for data exchange

Signals connected over PROFIBUS or PROFINET are not directly available through the
process image. All other signal connections, such as Modbus or FF, need a substitute
mechanism.
Note
You can enter substitute mechanisms on the "DB" tab in the coupling editor of the virtual
controller coupling. You can find additional information in section: Properties of the Virtual
Controller coupling (Page 135).
See also
Supported system functions (Page 113)

Couplings
2.6.1.12 Notes on using a virtual controller
Creating snapshots
The virtual controller can save snapshots while simulation is running. The snapshots are saved
in the SIMIT project directory and are therefore part of a SIMIT project archive. Snapshots
remain unchanged even if changes are made to the SIMIT project.
The following information is not included in snapshots:
● The states of connected systems
● Communication between virtual controllers
● Communication between virtual controllers and connected systems
Note
Snapshots are assigned to a virtual controller on the basis of its name.
If you change the name of a virtual controller in the project navigation after a snapshot is
created, the snapshot can no longer be linked to that virtual controller. Do not rename the virtual
controller in the project tree after creating a snapshot.
Note
Snapshots after changes to simulation
Snapshots save the states of the model and of individual virtual controllers.
● Please note that data in the snapshot is mapped by name (signal names, DB numbers, etc.).
There is therefore no guarantee that a snapshot will lead to a useful simulation or virtual
controller state after changes to the simulation (model or automation program). It is
irrelevant in this case whether the change was caused by the user or the user program (for
example, by using system functions such as CREAT_DB).
● Please note in particular that any existing snapshots may no longer be correctly assigned
if a virtual controller is renamed.
2.6.2 Configuring the Virtual Controller
2.6.2.1 Configuring virtual controllers
Requirement
● The IP addresses of the stations on the plant bus and terminal bus are known.
● The IP addresses in the company/simulation network are known.
● All IP addresses are unique.

Couplings
Action overview
The figure below shows the procedure for creating a Virtual Controller coupling:

6,0,76)

6,0,76) 6,0,76) 6,0,79&
6,0,79&

352),1(77&3 352),%86'3
Automation level with ES, OS server and two OS clients

Control level with PLC and distributed IO.
Simulation in "Stop" state
Simulation in "Started" state
① Preparing the simulation
1. Define the stations that are to be simulated.
2. If necessary, disconnect the control level from the network.
② Creating a SIMIT project:
1. Create a virtual controller coupling.
2. Import stations as virtual controllers from STEP 7/PCS 7 project.
The SIMIT PC is assigned the IP address 127.0.0.1 in the SIMIT project. In the network, the SIMIT PC can still
be accessed at its original IP address, e.g. 192.168.0.1.
3. Enter the IP addresses of the virtual controllers in the network settings of the SIMIT PC.
4. Create a simulation model.
③ Set up an additional PC (optional)
1. Change the IP address of the SIMIT PC in the distribution editor to the IP address visible in the network.
2. Integrate the PC into the network.
3. Distribute virtual controllers between the PCs.
4. Adapt the IP addresses in the network settings of the PCs.
④ Start simulation.

Couplings
See also
Creating a Virtual Controller (Page 125)
Creating a HWCN export file (Page 62)
Importing a STEP 7/PCS 7 project (Page 126)
Configuring an additional PC (Page 132)
Properties of the Virtual Controller coupling (Page 135)
Requirements for a simulation network (Page 109)
2.6.2.2 Creating a Virtual Controller
Introduction
Create a virtual controller coupling in a SIMIT project. Under a virtual controller coupling, you
can import stations from one or more STEP 7/PCS 7 projects.
Note
Requirement
● No virtual controller coupling has been saved in the project.
● There is a STEP 7/PCS 7 project or HWCNExport file.
Procedure
Proceed as follows to create a virtual controller coupling:
1. Select the "New coupling" command from the "Couplings" shortcut menu in the project
navigation.
2. Select the coupling type "Virtual controller".
The "Virtual controller import" dialog box opens.
3. Configure station import from a STEP 7/PCS 7 project or the HWCNExport file.

Couplings
Note
After creating a virtual controller, the complete station must be downloaded to the running
virtual controller because the virtual controller reads information from the system data block
during runtime.
When you make changes to the controller configuration, the complete station must once again
be downloaded.
Result
You can find the result after the import of a STEP 7/PCS 7 project under Importing a STEP 7/
PCS 7 project (Page 126).
If you complete the "Virtual controller" type coupling without importing a STEP 7/PCS 7 project,
only the "Virtual controller" folder is created under "Couplings" in the project navigation.
See also
"Selection" dialog box (Page 943)
2.6.2.3 Importing a STEP 7/PCS 7 project
Introduction
To allow you to create a simulation with a virtual controller coupling, import the stations from a
STEP 7/PCS 7 project. The following information from the STEP 7/PCS 7 project is applied:
● CPU
● Central I/O modules
● Distributed I/O modules
● Connections
You can run the import again at any time, for example to update configuration data or to add
new stations. Identical stations are identified using the following criteria:
● Project name
● Station name
● Storage location in the STEP 7/PCS 7 project

Couplings
As an option, you can also select the stations to be imported when you configure import.
Note
Requirement
● A "Virtual Controller" type coupling has been created.
● SIMATIC Manager is installed or there is a HWCNExport file.
Procedure
Proceed as follows to import a STEP 7/PCS 7 project:
1. Select the "Import" command in the "Couplings > Virtual controller" shortcut menu in the
project navigation.
The "Virtual controller import" dialog box opens.
2. Select the required STEP 7/PCS 7 project or the HWCNExport file.
3. Select the mode for importing the symbols.
4. Select the required stations.
5. Click "Import".
Result
A Virtual Controller is created in the project navigation under "Couplings > Virtual controller" for
each station from the STEP 7/PCS 7 project. The Virtual Controllers imported are assigned to
the emulation PC "My Computer" in the "Distribution" editor after the first import.
See also
2.6.2.4 Configuring virtual controllers
Requirement
● The STEP 7/PCS 7 project has been imported.
● A Virtual Controller coupling has been created.

Couplings
Procedure
Proceed as follows to configure a Virtual Controller:
1. Double-click on the required virtual controller under "Couplings > Virtual Controller" in the
project navigation.
2. Configure the virtual controller in the property view:
– Select the "Time slice".
– If necessary, enter the serial number of the "CPU" and/or memory card.
– Adjust the cycle time of the OBs if necessary.
3. Import selected address ranges of one or more data blocks as required.
See also
Basics of Virtual Controller communication (Page 111)
"Importing signal properties" dialog box (Page 932)
2.6.2.5 Distribution editor (Virtual Controller)
Distribution editor
In the distribution editor, you distribute the virtual controllers between additional PCs. This
spreads the load for simulation across multiple PCs.
Double-click to open the distribution editor under "Couplings > Virtual controller" in the project
navigation.
The figure below shows the structure of the distribution editor:

Couplings

① Menu bar
② Represents the PC on which the SIMIT project is open.
③ Virtual controllers that you have imported from a STEP 7/PCS 7 project. These virtual controllers are by default
assigned to the PC "My Computer".
④ Additional PC (optional)
The PC must be located in the same network as the PC "My Computer". You distribute the available virtual controllers
among the PCs with drag & drop.
⑤ Property view
In the properties window, you configure the properties of the selected PC or virtual controller. Conflicts such as
duplicate IP addresses and inaccessible PCs are also displayed under "Diagnostics".
Menu bar
You can execute the following functions in the menu bar of the distribution editor:
● "Save"
Saves the configuration.
● "New computer"
Adds a new PC. The PC must be located in the same network as the PC "My Computer".

Couplings
● "Save and distribute"

Saves the configuration and distributes the simulation project across the configured PCs.
● "Refresh"
Refreshes the view:
– Checks availability of configured PCs.
– IP addresses are checked for conflicts. Conflicts are displayed in the property view under
"Diagnostics".
– If you remove a PC, its virtual controller is automatically moved to the PC "My Computer".
Properties of "Distribution"
Double-click on "Distribution" in the project tree to open the "Distribution" properties.
It specifies for each protocol which addresses are used for the identification of the
communication partners. You can find additional information in section Basics of Virtual
Controller communication (Page 111).
Properties of "My Computer" / "Emulation PC"
● "Computer name"
Specifies the computer name of the PC on which a virtual controller is to be hosted.
All PCs including "My PC" must be in the same subnet. As long as the PC "My PC" is set on
the LoopBack adapter (127.0.0.1), no other PCs are shown.
● "Computer address"
Shows the IP address of the PC by which it is currently identified in the network.
● "Station addresses"
Shows the IP addresses of the virtual controllers that are assigned to this PC.
Enter these IP addresses in the network settings of this PC. If an IP address is not to be used
in the simulation, disable that IP address in the virtual controller settings.

Couplings
Properties of a virtual controller
● "Name"
Shows the name of the virtual controller.
The name is taken from the STEP 7/PCS 7 project.
● "Active IP addresses"
Shows the configured IP addresses of the virtual controller.
Lists the IP addresses of the PLC and CPs plugged into the station. Enable an IP address
to use it in the simulation. If you disable an IP address, a connection used by that IP address
will not be simulated. Connections between virtual controllers are always simulated
irrespective of this.
● "Excluded blocks"
Specifies the STEP 7 blocks that are not to be included in the simulation.
Separate multiple blocks with commas. Invalid entries are deleted automatically when you
exit the text box.
● "S7 Clock"
Specifies the time format for the internal clock supplied to the virtual controller by the PC.
– Local time
– Universal Time Coordinated
● "Project name (SIMATIC)"
Shows the name of the STEP 7/PCS 7 project.
● "Station name (SIMATIC)"
Shows the station name.
● "Storage path (SIMATIC)"
Shows the storage path of the STEP 7/PCS 7 project.
● "Instance number (virtual controller)"
Shows the instance number of the virtual controller.
The instance number is assigned automatically by SIMIT.
Diagnostics
The virtual controllers are checked when a project is imported.

Couplings
Errors such as incorrect IP addresses are highlighted in color and reported in plain text in the
diagnostics view.
The displays in the diagnostics view disappear automatically when the errors are dealt with. If
they do not, click "Refresh" in the distribution editor.
See also
Configuring an additional PC (Page 132)
2.6.2.6 Configuring an additional PC
Introduction
For complex simulations with multiple virtual controllers, one single PC often does not have
sufficient capacity. You can distribute the load evenly by connecting additional PCs to the
simulation network. You then assign each additional PC one or more virtual controllers in the
SIMIT project.
Note
Configuration limits
One SIMIT project can have a maximum of 32 virtual controllers.
One PC can simulate multiple virtual controllers. As a rule of thumb: A CPU core can run ca. two
virtual controllers. The actual CPU power required depends on the complexity of the simulation.
Requirement
● The PC is accessible in the network.
● Firewall is set up (Page 52).
● "SIMIT VC" is installed on the PC.
● A coupling of the type "Virtual controller" has been created.
● Virtual controllers from STEP 7/PCS 7 project are imported.
● The "Distribution" editor is open.
● Simulation has stopped.

Couplings
Procedure
Proceed as follows to configure an additional PC:
1. Change the IP address of the PC "My Computer" from "127.0.0.1" to the IP address at which
the PC is accessible in the network.
2. Create an additional PC:
– Click on "New computer" in the "Distribution" editor.
– Select the name of the PC.
3. Drag the desired virtual controller to the PC with drag & drop.
4. In the property view of the virtual controller, go to "Properties > Active addresses" and select
the IP addresses that are used in the simulation.
5. Add these IP addresses in the network settings of the PC.
6. In the "Distribution" editor, click on "Save and distribute".
Result
The configuration is saved. The simulation project is now distributed across the PCs.
Conflicts such as duplicate IP addresses and inaccessible PCs are displayed in the property
view under "Diagnostics".
See also
Requirements for a simulation network (Page 109)
Distribution editor (Virtual Controller) (Page 128)
2.6.2.7 Virtual controller during simulation
Virtual controller display

During simulation, each virtual controller is displayed as a symbol in the task bar.
The virtual controller symbol displays a tooltip with the path in which the configuration data of
the virtual controller is saved.
If you click on a virtual controller symbol, the following display window opens.

Couplings
The window size is fixed. It must not be closed normally.

To minimize the window, click on the symbol in the task bar again.
The green box to the left of "RUN" indicates that the virtual controller is in RUN.
A red box to the left of "STOP" indicates that the virtual controller is not running.
Virtual controller buttons

● The button above 1 puts the virtual controller online.
● The button above 2 puts the virtual controller offline.
● The Run_P button switches the virtual controller to Run Protect mode. Virtual controller Run
Protect mode implements a Run mode response.
● The Run button switches the virtual controller to Run mode.
● The Stop button switches the virtual controller to Stop mode.
When simulation is ended, all parts of the simulation project are merged on the computer on
which SIMIT is installed.
See also
Mapping of SIMATIC data types in SIMIT (Page 187)

Couplings
2.6.3 Editing signals
2.6.3.1 Properties of the Virtual Controller coupling
Properties of the address ranges of a virtual controller

The address ranges of the inputs and outputs are taken from the STEP 7/PCS 7 project during
import.
"I/O" tab
Here the inputs and outputs of the coupling are listed. You can find additional information on
this in section: Coupling editor (Page 61).
You can find additional information on importing signal properties in "Importing signal
properties" dialog box (Page 932).
You can find additional information on exporting signal properties in "Exporting signal
properties" dialog box (Page 935).

Couplings
"DB" tab
If you need values of PLC data blocks for the simulation, you can enter the addresses or import
them using the "STL import" button. You can find additional information on this in section:
Importing DB data from STL sources (Page 138).
Note
The addresses are not validated.

Couplings
Properties of a virtual controller

The following properties are taken from the STEP 7/PCS 7 project during import or entered
manually. The properties are not overwritten if you import again.
● "Time slice"
Specifies the cycle time for execution of OB1.
The cycle time of each time slice is configured centrally in the "Project settings". You can set
the time slice for all virtual controllers at once in the shortcut menu under "Project navigation
> Couplings > Virtual controller". This overwrites individual settings.
Note
numbering.
● "Mnemonics"
Specifies whether the German ("E/A") or English ("I/Q") term for the absolute addresses is
used.
Note
Define the mnemonics immediately after import. If you subsequently change the
mnemonics, signals already interconnected in a chart can no longer be assigned to the
original address.

Shows the name of the STEP 7/PCS 7 project.
● "Serial number of CPU"
Specifies the serial number of the CPU. The information is only necessary if the STEP 7/
PCS 7 project needs the serial number, for example, for licensing parts of the program.
● "Serial number of memory card"
Specifies the serial number of the memory card. This entry is optional.
● "Cycle time of OBxx"
Specifies the cycle time.
The cycle time is applied from the STEP 7/PCS 7 project. OBs with a cycle time shorter than
that of the time slice set are run more than once. To reduce load during simulation, set these
cycle times to the configured cycle time of the time slice.
Properties of a module
● "Module name"
Shows the module name.
● "MLFB"
Shows the Siemens order number.
● "Module slot"
Shows the module slot.

Couplings
● "Input address range"

Shows the address range of the inputs in bytes.
● "Output address range"
Shows the address range of the outputs in bytes.
See also
2.6.3.2 Importing DB data from STL sources
Introduction
The following information is transferred to SIMIT when you import from an STL data source:
● Comment
● When you import inputs: default input assignment
The following data types are applied:
● STRING (implemented as BYTE ARRAY)
● ARRAY
● STRUCT
● UDT
● BOOL
● BYTE
● WORD
● DWORD
● INT
● DINT
● REAL
● CHAR
Note
Always select all utilized STL data sources when you generate the STL sources in STEP 7. If
a data block includes a UDT, for example, also add this structure definition when you generate
the STL source.
The following data types are included in addressing but not applied:
● S5TIME
● TIME
● DATE

Couplings
● TIME_OF_DAY
● DATE_AND_TIME
Requirement
● Virtual controller is open.
● The "DB" tab is enabled.
● STL source with data block information exported from STEP 7 is available.
Procedure
Proceed as follows to import DB data from STL sources:
1. Click "STL import".
The "STL import" dialog box opens.
2. Select the STL source.
3. Enter the data block number.
4. Select the direction.
5. Enter the start and end bytes.
Note
Any existing signals in the specified memory area of "From byte" and "Up to byte" are
overwritten.
6. Click "Import".
Result
The specified address range of the data block is imported.
See also
"STL import" dialog box (Page 931)

Couplings
2.7 PLCSIM Advanced coupling
2.7.1 Operating principle of the PLCSIM Advanced coupling
Operating principle
SIMIT uses the PLCSIM Advanced coupling to communicate with PLCSIM Advanced over a
software interface of PLCSIM Advanced. SIMIT uses the PLCSIM Advanced coupling to
cyclically exchange data of the I/O area of the configured S7-1500 stations. SIMIT supports up
to 16 stations per PC.
Note
You may have to observe additional restrictions and notes in the PLCSIM Advanced
documentation.
The following applications must be installed on a PC to use PLCSIM Advanced:

● SIMIT
● PLCSIM Advanced V2.0
● TIA Portal Openness
● STEP 7 V14 SP1 (optional)
The PLCSIM Advanced application is started and closed together with the simulation.
See also
Creating a coupling of the "PLCSIM Advanced" type (Page 140)
2.7.2 Creating a coupling of the "PLCSIM Advanced" type
Introduction
You can create a coupling of the "PLCSIM Advanced" type in a SIMIT project. You create
"stations" under the coupling to which you import the hardware configuration of a station from
STEP 7.
Requirement
● TIA Portal Openness is installed on the SIMIT PC.
● STEP V14 SP1 is installed on the SIMIT PC or an HWCNExport file is available.

Couplings
Procedure
Follow these steps to create a coupling of the "PLCSIM Advanced" type:
1. Add a new coupling under "Couplings" in the project tree.
2. Select the coupling type "PLCSIM Advanced".
The "PLCSIM Advanced Import" dialog box opens.
3. Configure the station import from a STEP 7 project or from the HWCNExport file.
Result
You can find the result after import of a STEP 7 project in Importing hardware configuration to
station (Page 141).
If you complete the coupling of the type "PLCSIM Advanced" without importing a STEP 7
project, only the "PLCSIM Advanced" folder is created in the project tree under couplings.
See also
2.7.3 Importing hardware configuration to station
Introduction
You import the hardware configuration directly from STEP 7. Import the hardware configuration
to the station in SIMIT again if you have changed the hardware configuration in STEP 7.
When importing the hardware configuration from the TIA Portal, the following structures are
evaluated in addition to the simple data types and imported as WORD:
● PD_ZSW1
● PD_ZSW2
● PD_Gx_ZSW
● PD_STW1
● PD_STW2
● PD_Gx_STW
● PD_MELDW

Couplings
Requirement
● A "PLCSIM Advanced" type coupling has been created.
● STEP 7 V14 SP1 is installed on the SIMIT PC.
● Hardware configuration is compiled and loaded in STEP 7.
Procedure
Follow these steps to import the hardware configuration to a station:
1. Select the "Import" command from the "Couplings > PLCSIM Advanced" shortcut menu in
the project tree.
The "PLCSIM Advanced import" dialog box will open.
2. Select the source from which you want to import the hardware configuration.
3. Select the mode for importing the symbols.
4. Select the required stations.
5. Click "Import".
Result
A station is created for each station from the STEP 7 project in the project tree under "Couplings
> PLCSIM Advanced". During the initial import the imported stations are assigned to the
emulation PC "Own computer" in the "Distribution" editor.
See also
2.7.4 Configuring a PLCSIM Advanced coupling station
Requirement
● Station has been created.
● Hardware configuration has been imported.

Couplings
Procedure
Follow these steps to configure a station of a PLCSIM Advanced coupling:
1. Set the "time slice" using the shortcut menu of the PLCSIM Advanced coupling.
2. Open the Distribution Editor of the PLCSIM Advanced coupling.
3. Configure each station in the properties window:
– Enter a name if required.
– Specify the communication path.
Result
The station is configured. Import (Page 197) signal properties to add input and output signals.
You can edit signal properties.
You can find additional information on editing and exporting signals in:
● Editing the signals of a coupling (Page 182)
● Exporting signal properties (Page 199)
See also
Distribution editor (PLCSIM Advanced) (Page 143)
2.7.5 Distribution editor (PLCSIM Advanced)
Distribution editor
You configure the stations of a PLCSIM Advancedcoupling in the distribution editor.
Double-click the distribution editor to open it in the project tree under "Couplings > PLCSIM
Advanced".
Menu bar
You can execute the following functions in the menu bar of the distribution editor:
● "Save"
Saves the configuration.

Couplings
Properties of "My Computer"

● Computer address
Shows the IP address of the PC by which it is currently identified in the network.
● Communication interface
Specifies the communication path between PLCSIM Advanced and SIMIT. You can find
additional information on the communication paths in the PLCSIM Advanced
documentation.
Properties of a station
● Name
Specifies the station name in the SIMIT project. Change the name in the project navigation
using the station shortcut menu.
Shows the name of the STEP 7 project.
● Instance number (VC)
Shows the instance number.
The instance number is assigned automatically by SIMIT.
Shortcut menu of a station

● Clear memory
Deletes the project that has been loaded to the station.
See also
Configuring a PLCSIM Advanced coupling station (Page 142)

Couplings
2.8 PLCSIM coupling
2.8 PLCSIM coupling
2.8.1 How the PLCSIM coupling works

SIMIT uses the PLCSIM coupling to communicate with PLCSIM over a PLCSIM software
interface (Prosim). When the PLCSIM coupling is used, PLCSIM and SIMIT must be installed
on the same computer. PLCSIM must be started before you start a simulation in SIMIT with the
PLCSIM coupling. You must not end PLCSIM while the simulation is running, as the connection
will otherwise be canceled and may not be re-established.
Note
To use the PLCSIM coupling, you also need the PLCSIM software version 5.4 SP5 or higher.
This software is not included in the SIMIT product package.
PLCSIM is a program that can be used independently of SIMIT and can be loaded from
SIMATIC Manager with a STEP 7 program. PLCSIM will then simulate a SIMATIC controller.
In order to simulate the controller behavior as realistically as possible, we recommend that you
always load the STEP 7 program along with the system data blocks (SDBs) into PLCSIM.
Note
The hardware configuration is also determined through the system data. In the SIMIT coupling
with PLCSIM, data exchange is only possible for I/O signals that are defined by the configured
hardware.
2.8.2 Configuring the PLCSIM coupling
2.8.2.1 Creating a PLCSIM coupling

To create a PLCSIM coupling, select the option "PLCSIM" in the "Selection" dialog box.
2.8.2.2 Configuring I/O signals in the PLCSIM coupling

The options for entering input/output signals for the coupling are as follows:
● You enter the signals manually in the coupling editor.
● You import the symbol table from your SIMATIC project. You can find additional information
on this in section: "Importing signal properties" dialog box (Page 932).

Couplings
2.8 PLCSIM coupling
2.8.2.3 Properties of the PLCSIM coupling

Once the coupling is opened, the coupling editor appears in the work area. You can define the
following properties in the property view:
● Time slice
The cycle in which the coupling exchanges data is set here. The assignment of absolute
cycle times to the 8 possible time slices applies to the entire project. Time slice 2, which
corresponds to a cycle of 100 ms, is preset.
Note
numbering.
● PLCSIM number
You can create up to 8 PLCSIM couplings in a project to connect to the corresponding
instances of PLCSIM. Select the number of the PLCSIM instance with which the coupling is
to communicate here. The number can be found in the PLCSIM window header line.
If you set the PLCSIM number to "Not assigned", no connection with PLCSIM will be
established when the simulation is started and there will be no data exchange.
● Mnemonics
Here, you select whether the international (I/Q) or German (E/A) mnemonics are to be used
for the inputs and outputs.
Additional functions
Copying and pasting scaling

You can find additional information in section: Transferring scaling to another signal
(Page 209).
Importing signal properties

You can find additional information in section: "Importing signal properties" dialog box
(Page 932).
Exporting signal properties

You can find additional information in section: "Exporting signal properties" dialog box
(Page 935).

Couplings
2.9 OPC coupling
2.9 OPC coupling
2.9.1 How the OPC coupling works
Introduction
OPC is a widely used communication standard in the automation sector, and is maintained and
supported by the OPC Foundation (www.opcfoundation.org). The OPC protocol is used for
device-independent data exchange between programs with OPC capability.
23&&OLHQW 23&&OLHQW
7&3,3
23&6HUYHU
)LHOGGHYLFHV
In the OPC Classic Architecture, an OPC server is connected to a subordinate device layer
whose signals are made available via the local network to one or more OPC clients.
Note
To protect the confidentiality of your data, use the OPC coupling only as part of a holistic, state-
of-the-art industrial security concept. This should take into account products from other
manufacturers that are being used.
You can find additional information on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).

Couplings
2.9 OPC coupling
OPC protocols supported

The SIMIT OPC coupling supports the following OPC protocols:
● OPC DA 3.0 in "Data Access" mode
● OPC UA
OPC couplings in SIMIT

SIMIT supports the following OPC coupling:
OPC coupling Number per project

OPC DA server coupling 1
OPC DA client coupling Up to 321
OPC UA client coupling
1
For different OPC servers or different name spaces of OPC UA servers
The OPC DA server and OPC DA client can be operated locally on the same PC or on different
PCs. An OPC DA server and various OPC client couplings can also be created simultaneously
in a SIMIT project.
Browsing functionality
SIMIT supports the browsing functionality which allows you to apply the data provided by an
OPC server automatically to the signal table.
See also
Principle of operation of the SIMIT OPC DA server (Page 151)
Principle of operation of the OPC DA client coupling (Page 158)
2.9.2 Signal transfer between OPC server and OPC client
Establishment of connection between OPC server and OPC client

When you launch a simulation, connections are established to all configured OPC servers. If no
connection can be established after 5 seconds, the simulation will start anyway. The
connection attempts continue to run in the background. Status information is displayed over the
SIMIT message system. You can also query the status of each OPC coupling with the "Status
display" signal.

Couplings
2.9 OPC coupling
Start of signal transfer

Once a connection is established, the signals are registered at the OPC server for each OPC
client. The cause of unregistered signals is frequently one of the following:
● Wrong data type
● Signal unknown at the OPC server.
Following registration, the signals are transferred cyclically between OPC server and OPC
client. The following factors are key to updating values:
● OPC server cycle time
● OPC client coupling time slice
● Cycle multiplier of a signal
Cycle multiplier
The cycle multiplier is an integer, "n", which only updates values in every nth cycle. By
specifying a cycle multiplier, you the reduce the load on the communication connection
between OPC server and OPC client. You can configure the cycle multiplier separately for each
signal provided by the OPC server.
● Signal changes frequently: Small cycle multiplier
● Signal changes slowly: Large cycle multiplier
Example: For an OPC client coupling, a cycle time of 250 ms is set with the time slice. A signal
is configured with a cycle multiplier of "4". The signal is therefore only updated every
250 ms × 4 = 1000 ms.
Quality code
Signals transferred between OPC server and OPC client by default also return a "quality code"
that indicates the quality of the signal. For each output signal of an OPC client coupling, SIMIT
by default creates an integer "quality signal" containing the quality code. The signal name is
structured as follows: <Name of output signal>.<quality>
You can use the quality signal in charts, like all other signals. While a simulation is running, the
"quality code" is displayed in the properties of each quality signal.
Signals transferred from the SIMIT OPC client to an OPC server output the following quality
code:
● "Good, non-specific". This corresponds to "0xC0" or "192".

Couplings
2.9 OPC coupling
2.9.3 Mapping of signals and data types of an OPC server
Mapping of data types

SIMIT only has binary, integer and analog signals, with integer and analog signals having a
data width of 8 bytes.
An OPC server can provide signals in a range of other data types. The table below shows the
assignment of OPC data types to the data types used in SIMIT.
OPC DA server OPC UA server SIMIT

BOOL, UI1 Boolean binary
I1, I2, I4, I8, UI1, UI2, UI4, UI8 SByte, Int16, Int32, Int64, Byte, UInt 16, UInt32, integer
UInt64
R4, R8 Float, Double analog
There is no data loss in conversion for output signals of the coupling, as integer and analog
signals in SIMIT have the maximum data width (8 bytes).
Mapping of signals
The signals of the OPC server can be read or written or both. They are treated as inputs or
outputs in SIMIT depending on this read/write access.
OPC SIMIT
readable Output
writeable Input
readWriteable Input
2.9.4 Status of OPC servers
Core statement
While simulation is running, the properties window of the OPC client coupling displays the
current status of the OPC server addressed. The status is also output with an output signal that
you define when you configure the coupling.
The table below shows the meaning of the possible status values:
Note
Which of these status values an OPC server provides depends on the OPC server
implementation.

Couplings
2.9 OPC coupling
Status value 1 Meaning 2

0 No connection to OPC server
1 The server is running normally. This is the usual state for a server.
2 A vendor specific fatal error has occurred within the server. The server is no longer
functioning. The recovery procedure from this situation is vendor specific. An error
code of E_FAIL should generally be returned from any other server method.
3 The server is running but has no configuration information loaded and thus cannot
function normally. Note this state implies that the server needs configuration informa‐
tion in order to function. Servers which do not require configuration information should
not return this state.
4 The server has been temporarily suspended via some vendor specific method and is
not getting or sending data. Note that Quality will be returned as OPC_QUALI‐
TY_OUT_OF_SERVICE.
5 The server is in Test Mode. The outputs are disconnected from the real hardware but
the server will otherwise behave normally. Inputs may be real or may be simulated
depending on the vendor implementation. Quality will generally be returned normally.
6 The server is running properly but is having difficulty accessing data from its data
sources. This may be due to communication problems, or some other problem pre‐
venting the underlying device, control system, etc. from returning valid data. It may be
complete failure, meaning that no data is available, or a partial failure, meaning that
some data is still available. It is expected that items affected by the fault will individ‐
ually return with a BAD quality indication for the items.
1
The information on status values 1 to 6 is taken from the "Data Access Custom Interface Standard,
Version 3.00" specifications.
2
The description of status values 1 to 6 is taken from the OPC specifications.
See also
Properties of the OPC DA client coupling (Page 155)
2.9.5 Configuring an OPC DA client/server coupling
2.9.5.1 Principle of operation of the SIMIT OPC DA server
Behavior of the SIMIT OPC DA server

The SIMIT OPC DA server is automatically configured with the signals configured in the
coupling when you launch the simulation. From this point, OPC clients can connect to the
server and access the signals.
When you end simulation, the SIMIT OPC DA server remains active until all OPC DA clients
have logged off. Signals are no longer updated in this state.
If you change the configuration of the SIMIT OPC DA server, the configuration will automatically
be transferred the next time simulation is launched. Requirements: The SIMIT OPC DA server
is not connected to an OPC DA client.

Couplings
2.9 OPC coupling
Quality codes of output OPC signals

The SIMIT OPC DA server transfers OPC signals with the following quality codes:
Quality code Requirement

"Good, non-specific"; Simulation launched
0xC0
"Bad, Out of service"; Simulation ended, but at least one OPC DA client still connected.
0x1C The SIMIT OPC DA server is not disabled until all OPC DA clients are dis‐
connected.
Data transmission
The SIMIT OPC DA server checks regularly in the simulation model whether the values have
changed. The SIMIT OPC DA server supports synchronous and asynchronous data
transmission:
● Synchronous data transmission All values are cyclically transmitted.
● Asynchronous data transmission Only changed values are transmitted. The SIMIT OPC DA
server automatically groups values. Criteria for grouping are:
– Data type and multiplier, each for input and output values
All values in a group are generally transmitted in case a value has changed.
Status messages
The SIMIT OPC DA server outputs the following status that can be queried by an OPC DA
client:
Value Meaning Requirement

1 Running Simulation launched
4 Suspended Simulation ended
Data types provided

The following data types are provided in the SIMIT OPC DA server:
SIMIT OPC
Binary BOOL
Integer I8 if the option "Use 64-bit integer" is selected, otherwise I4
Analog R8
See also
How the OPC coupling works (Page 147)

Couplings
2.9 OPC coupling
2.9.5.2 Configuring a SIMIT OPC DA server coupling
Requirements
Procedure
Follow these steps to create a SIMIT OPC DA server coupling:
navigation.
2. Select the coupling type "OPC DA server".
3. Select a time slice with an update cycle of at least 100 ms.
4. If the OPC DA client and OPC DA server are installed on different PCs, please see the
"Notes on DCOM configuration (Page 156)".
Result
The SIMIT OPC DA server is configured. The following options are available for adding input
and output signals:
● Entering signals manually
● Importing the signal table (Page 197)
See also
Properties of the SIMIT OPC DA server coupling (Page 154)
Mapping of signals and data types of an OPC server (Page 150)
2.9.5.3 Configuring an OPC DA client coupling
Introduction
The OPC DA client coupling only supports asynchronous data transmission from one OPC DA
server to another. An OPC DA server automatically groups values. All values in a group are
transmitted in case a value changes.
Requirements
● ProgID of the OPC DA server is known.
● Host name of the PC on which the OPC DA server is installed is known.
● OPC DA server can be accessed in the network.

Couplings
2.9 OPC coupling
Procedure
Follow these steps to create an OPC DA client coupling:
navigation.
2. Select the coupling type "OPC DA client".
3. Configure the connection to the OPC DA server.
4. If the OPC DA client and OPC DA server are installed on different PCs, please see the
"Notes on DCOM configuration (Page 156)".
Result
The coupling with the OPC DA server is configured. The following options are available for
adding input and output signals:
● Reading signals from an OPC server (Page 211)
See also
Properties of the OPC DA client coupling (Page 155)
2.9.5.4 Properties of the SIMIT OPC DA server coupling


Couplings
2.9 OPC coupling
● Time slice
This is where you set the cycle in which the coupling exchanges data. The assignment of
absolute cycle times to the 8 possible time slices applies to the entire project. The default is
time slice 2, which corresponds to a cycle of 100 ms in the standard setting.
Note
numbering.
The OPC server updates its data every 100 ms. Cycle times below this value should
therefore not be set.
● Server name
The SIMIT OPC server name is displayed for information only. It is set to "SIMIT OPC DA
Server". The server name or ProgID is needed to configure an OPC client for access to this
OPC server.
● ProgID
The ProgID of the SIMIT OPC server is displayed for information only. It is set to
"Simit.OpcDaServer.8". The ProgID or server name is needed to configure an OPC client
for access to this OPC server.
● Use 64-bit integers
Integer values in SIMIT have a data width of 64 bits (8 bytes). They are therefore also saved
in this format in the OPC server coupling.
Deselect this option if an OPC client connected to this OPC server cannot process integer
values with a data width of 8 bytes. SIMIT then transfers all integer values with a data width
of 32 bits (4 bytes) only. Note that this may lead to loss of data if a number cannot be
represented with 32 bits.
See also
"Exporting signal properties" dialog box (Page 935)
Configuring a SIMIT OPC DA server coupling (Page 153)
2.9.5.5 Properties of the OPC DA client coupling


Couplings
2.9 OPC coupling
● Time slice
This is where you set the cycle in which the coupling exchanges data. The assignment of
absolute cycle times to the 8 possible time slices applies to the entire project. The default is
time slice 2, which corresponds to a cycle of 100 ms in the standard setting.
Note
numbering.
● Host name
The name of the computer on which the OPC server is running. This is the OPC server with
which the coupling communicates. You can provide either the computer name or its IP
address. The default is the local computer (localhost).
● ProgID
Here, enter the ProgID of the OPC server with which the OPC client is to connect on the
computer specified under host name.
If the connection is local, i.e. "localhost" is entered under host name, the ProgIDs of the OPC
servers that are available locally will be available for selection. Select the OPC server with
which the coupling is to communicate.
If the ProgID is set to "Not assigned", no connection to an OPC server is established when
the simulation is started. The coupling signals are not updated cyclically.
● Status display
Specifies the name of the integer output signal that provides the status of the connected
OPC server while simulation is running. You can use this output signals to evaluate the
server status in your SIMIT project. One output signal is generated for each OPC DA client
coupling.
See also
Status of OPC servers (Page 150)
Configuring an OPC DA client coupling (Page 153)
2.9.5.6 Notes on DCOM configuration
Basics of DCOM configuration

No further adjustments to the operating system configuration are required if you have installed
the OPC DA server and OPC DA client on the same PC.
If you have installed the OPC DA server and OPC DA client on different PCs, you will need to
check and if necessary adjust the following settings in the operating system:
● Firewall configuration
● Domains and users
● Assignment of rights

Couplings
2.9 OPC coupling
Note
All settings in the rights systems of a Windows PC depend greatly on the operating system
version and the programs already installed on your PC. We can therefore only give you a guide
and not precise instructions for the configuration of DCOM in your specific environment.
Note
Only change settings on your PC if you know exactly what they mean. Make sure that you do
no inadvertently leave your PC unprotected.
Firewall configuration
If you use a firewall, you will need to enable TCP port 135 for incoming queries for DCOM. You
must ensure that none of the OPC servers or OPC clients or the two programs "Microsoft
Management Console" and "OPCEnum" are blocked.
Domains and users

All relevant PCs must belong to the same working group or domain. Use the same user name
and the same password on all PCs.
Assignment of rights
When an OPC connection is established over DCOM, a PC accesses the resources of or
launches specific processes on another PC. You will need specifically to allow this, as it
involves processes that could potentially put your PC at risk.
Both the access rights and start and activation rights need to be correctly set.
Recommendation: Set up a new user group with these advanced access rights. Assign the
users who use the OPC connection to this user group.
As well as making general COM security settings, you also need to set the rights of the OPC
server and the system utility program "OPCEnum.exe".
The program "dcomcnfg.exe" under Windows 7 is used for configuration.
Details of DCOM configuration can be found in "Using OPC via DCOM with Windows XP
Service Pack 2" from the OPC Foundation, available on the Internet at http://
www.opcfoundation.org.
See also
Configuring a SIMIT OPC DA server coupling (Page 153)

Couplings
2.9 OPC coupling
2.9.6 Configuring an OPC UA client coupling
2.9.6.1 Principle of operation of the OPC DA client coupling
Introduction
You can create up to 32 OPC UA client couplings in SIMIT. Each OPC UA client can contact an
OPC UA server and exchange data.
The OPC UA client coupling supports secure data transfer.
Secure data transfer

In secure data transfer, the OPC UA server and OPC UA client authenticate themselves by
exchanging certificates. The OPC UA client certificate is generated automatically during SIMIT
installation. On the SIMIT PC, only the user group "Administrators" is authorized by default to
configure an OPC UA client coupling with secure data transfer.
See also
How the OPC coupling works (Page 147)
Certificates (Page 158)
2.9.6.2 Certificates
Introduction
For data exchange over OPC UA, certificates confirm the identity of the connection partner. The
certificates are automatically exchanged by the OPC UA client and OPC UA server when a
connection is first established. Before each subsequent connection, the system checks
whether the certificates are still valid.

Couplings
2.9 OPC coupling
Storage of certificates
The following directory structure is created in the "C:\ProgramData\Siemens\Automation\SIMIT
\8.0\PKI\" directory during SIMIT installation. Within this directory structure, members of the
"Administrators" group have full access.
● "issuers": Contains certificates required for verifying CA certificates.
Access rights:
– "Users" group: Read
● "own": Contains the "Application Instance Certificate" and the private key of the OPC UA
client, which is generated during installation. The OPC UA server reads this directory when
a connection is first established. The private key is only generated once and is not
overwritten when the software is updated.
Access rights:
– "Users" group: No access in the \private subdirectory
– "Users" group: Read in \certs subdirectory
● "trusted\certs": Contains certificates of OPC UA servers with which the OPC UA client can
exchange data.
Access rights:
– "Users" group: Read
● "rejected\certs": Contains rejected OPC UA server certificates.
Access rights:
– "Users" group: Write
Notes on certificate exchange

For security reasons, new connections to an OPC UA server are also rejected. A new
connection must be confirmed by the administrator both on the OPC UA client and on the
OPC UA server.
● OPC UA server: The OPC UA client must be included in the list of "trusted clients".
● OPC UA client: Certificates sent by the OPC server are saved in the "rejected\certs" folder
the first time a connection is established. You then need to copy the certificates manually to
the directory "trusted\certs".
By default, only members of the "Administrators" group have access rights to the folders "own
\private" and "trusted\certs". You have the following options if another user wants to set up an
OPC UA client coupling:
● The administrator sets up the necessary access rights for the user in question.
● The administrator grants users read privileges to the "own\private" folder and copies the
certificates stored under "rejected\certs" to the "trusted\certs" folder.
Following one of these two actions, the user can then establish the connection to the OPC UA
server.
See also
Configuring an OPC UA client coupling (Page 160)

Couplings
2.9 OPC coupling
2.9.6.3 Configuring an OPC UA client coupling
Requirements
● URL of the PC with installed OPC UA server is known.
● The OPC UA server can be accessed in the network.
● The OPC UA server support the authentication method "Anonymous".
● Access rights to the following directories are available:
– "C:\ProgramData\Siemens\Automation\SIMIT\8.0\PKI\own\private": Read
– "C:\ProgramData\Siemens\Automation\SIMIT\8.0\PKI\trusted\certs": Write
Procedure
Follow these steps to create an OPC UA coupling:
navigation.
2. Select the coupling type "OPC UA client".
3. Configure the connection to the OPC UA server.
4. If you configure secure data transfer:
– Copy the certificate sent by the OPC UA server from the "..\rejected\certs" folder to the
"..\trusted\certs" folder.
– On the OPC UA server, add the OPC UA client to the list of "trusted clients".
Result
The coupling with the OPC UA server is configured. The following options are available for
adding input and output signals:
● Reading signals from an OPC server (Page 211)
See also
Properties of the OPC UA client coupling (Page 161)
Error messages upon connection to the OPC UA server (Page 161)
Certificates (Page 158)

Couplings
2.9 OPC coupling
2.9.6.4 Error messages upon connection to the OPC UA server
OPC UA client: Error messages and remedies
Error message Cause Remedy

"The client application does not have a You may not have read access to the Have the administrator set up read ac‐
certificate assigned. Secured connec‐ following directory: cess to the specified directory.
tions are not possible." ● "C:\ProgramData\Siemens
"Could not load the application certifi‐ \Automation\SIMIT\8.0 \PKI\own
cate." \private"
"Certificate is not trusted." The server certificate is not on the list of Have the administrator copy the rele‐
trusted certificates. vant certificate from "C:\ProgramData
\Siemens\Automation\SIMIT\8.0\PKI\re‐
jected\certs" to "C:\ProgramData\Sie‐
mens\Automation\SIMIT\8.0\PKI\trus‐
ted\certs".
OPC UA server: Error messages and remedies
Error message Cause Remedy

"Socket was closed gracefully." The OPC UA server does not trust the Add the OPC UA client to the list of trus‐
"Error received from remote host." SIMIT OPC UA client. ted clients.
2.9.6.5 Properties of the OPC UA client coupling

● Time slice
Specifies the cycle in which the coupling exchanges data. The assignment of absolute cycle
times to the 8 possible time slices applies to the entire project. The default is time slice 2,
which corresponds to a cycle of 100 ms in the standard setting.
Note
numbering.
● OPC UA server URL

Specifies the address at which the OPC UA server can be accessed. The following
addresses are possible:
– URL including port
Port 4840 is assumed by default if you do not specify a port. This port uses the service
"Local Discovery Server".
– Server name
– IP address

Couplings
2.10 Shared memory coupling
● End point
Specifies the OPC UA server and transfer mode.
– Protocols supported: OPC UA binary protocol (communication profile "UA-TCP UA-SC
UA Binary")
– Security policies supported: Basic256Sha256, Basic256, Basic128Rsa15, None
– Security modes supported: None, Sign, Sign&Encrypt
● Name space URI
Specifies the scope of the signals provided by the selected OPC UA server. An OPC UA
server can provide multiple name spaces. To use signals from multiple name spaces, create
a separate OPC UA client coupling for each name space.
● Status display
Specifies the name of the integer output signal that provides the status of the connected
OPC server while simulation is running. You can use this output signals to evaluate the
server status in your SIMIT project. One output signal is generated for each OPC UA client
coupling.
See also
Status of OPC servers (Page 150)
2.10.1 How the SHM coupling works
SIMIT uses the Shared Memory coupling, SHM coupling for short, to communicate with any
number of other applications over shared memory (SHM). This coupling is all-purpose and high-
performance.
Input signals are the signals that are written by SIMIT to the memory area and output signals
are the signals that are read by SIMIT from the memory area.

Couplings
$SSOLFDWLRQ
,QSXWVLJQDOV
2XWSXWVLJQDOV
VKDUHGPHPRU\DUHD
VKDUHGPHPRU\
6,0,7
Note
Access to the shared memory area is not limited to a particular user. Each application that runs
on this PC has access to the shared memory area.
2.10.1.1 Accessing the memory area

If multiple independent processes access the same memory area, access must be
synchronized to ensure consistent values. A mutex is used in the SHM coupling as the
synchronization object.
In each simulation time slice, SIMIT writes and reads all the input and output signals defined in
the SHM coupling and blocks the mutex while it does so. All other applications that access this
memory area should do the same.
Note
Each application that is connected to SIMIT over an SHM coupling should minimize the time for
which it blocks the mutex so as not to block access to the shared memory area by SIMIT and
other applications for longer than necessary.

Couplings
2.10.1.2 Structure of the memory area
Header area and data area

The memory area is divided into a header area and a data area. The header area size is at least
8 bytes. The first 4 bytes of the header area contain the size of the total memory area, and the
subsequent 4 bytes the size of the header area. Little-endian format applies for both values.
%\WH

6L]HRIWKHPHPRU\DUHD >%\WH@
6L]HRIWKHKHDGHUDUHD >%\WH@ Header area

Data area

Structure of the data area

SIMIT addresses the data area byte-by-byte in the same way as for addressing the I/O area of
SIMATIC automation systems. Each signal in the SHM coupling is linked to a unique address
in the data area. As a signal at one address in the data area can only be defined either as an
input signal or as an output signal, the same address cannot be assigned to both and input and
output signal.
The input and output signals are mapped to a shared memory area. No overlaps between input
and output signals are permitted. Overlapping input and output signals are detected in the
consistency check and displayed as inconsistencies.
A signal occupies 1, 2 or 4 bytes at its address in the data area depending on its data type:
● 1 byte for the data types BOOL and BYTE,
● 2 bytes for the data types WORD and INT and
● 4 bytes for the data types DWORD, DINT and REAL.
The figure below shows an example of addressing for various different data types:

Couplings
$GGUHVV %\WH

0[
0%

0:
'DWDDUHD

0'

Structure of the header area

The minimum header area size is 8 bytes. The first 4 bytes of the header area contain the size
of the total memory area, and the subsequent 4 bytes the size of the header area.
%\WH

Header area

6L]HRIWKHKHDGHUDUHD >%\WH@
If SIMIT creates the shared memory area, SIMIT can optionally add additional variables and a
list of signals to the header area. This information can then be used by applications to configure
their access to the data area.

Couplings
%\WH

6L]HRIWKHKHDGHUDUHD >%\WH@

9HUVLRQ >%\WH@

6FDQQLQJF\FOHLQPV >%\WH@
Header area

&\FOHFRXQWHU >%\WH@
/HQJWKRIPXWH[QDPH >%\WH@

0XWH[QDPH P FKDUDFWHUV > P %\WH@
P

Signal list
The version identifies the memory structure. As the structure defined here has the version
identifier "0", you will always find a value of "0" entered here. If the structure of the memory area
is altered, the version is changed accordingly.
The predefined sampling time slice for the SHM coupling is entered in milliseconds (ms) as an
integer value.
In each cycle of the SHM coupling, the integer value of the cycle counter is incremented by 1.
The length of the mutex name, which means the number m of characters in the mutex name,
is stored in byte 16 of the header area. The mutex name is saved in the following header area
from byte 17.
The signal list created from byte 17+m onwards in the header provides information about the
signals in the data area. The following variables are specified for each signal:
● Length of the signal name, i.e. the number of characters in the signal name
● Signal name
● Address of the signal, i.e. the signal offset in the data area
● I/O identifier, the identifier that shows whether a signal is an input signal (0) or output signal
(1)
● Type identifier for the data type

Couplings
Table 2-1 Signal type identifiers
Type identifier Meaning (data type)

0 BOOL, bit address 0
... ...
8 BYTE
9 WORD
10 INT
11 DWORD
12 DINT
13 REAL
The figure below shows the structure of the signal list in the header area:
%\WH
P /HQJWKRI6LJQDOQDPH >%\WH@
P

6LJQDOQDPH V FKDUDFWHUV > V %\WH@
PV Signal1
$GGUHVVRI6LJQDO >%\WH@
Signal list
PV ,2LGHQWLILHURI6LJQDO >%\WH@
PV 7\SHLGHQWLILHURI6LJQDO >%\WH@
PV

Signal2, etc.

(QGLGHQWLILHURIVLJQDOOLVW >%\WH@
This signal list ends with an end identifier with a value of "0".
2.10.1.3 Creating the memory area

The shared memory area can be created either by SIMIT or by another application that is
connected to SIMIT via the memory area. SIMIT responds accordingly when a simulation
containing an SHM coupling is started.
If the shared memory area was created by an application, i.e. already exists when the
simulation is started in SIMIT, the memory area is opened by SIMIT. SIMIT only connects to the
memory area if the size of the data area corresponds to the size of the address area defined by
the input/output signals in the SHM coupling. Otherwise, an error message is output and SIMIT
does not connect to the memory area.
If there is no shared memory area when SIMIT is started, it is created by SIMIT. SIMIT enters
the size of the entire memory area and the header area into the header area. The size of the
data area is determined by the highest address of the signals defined in the SHM coupling.

Couplings
Optionally, other sizes and a list of the signals can be entered in the header area by SIMIT. You
can find additional information in section: Structure of the memory area (Page 164).
2.10.2 Configuring the SHM coupling
2.10.2.1 Creating an SHM coupling

To create an SHM coupling, select the option "SHM" in the "Selection" dialog box.
Note
You can create a maximum of 32 SHM couplings in one project.
2.10.2.2 Configuring the signals in the SHM coupling

● Enter the signals manually in the coupling editor.
● Import the symbol table. You can find additional information on this in section: "Importing
signal properties" dialog box (Page 932).
SIMIT reads the output signals from and writes the input signals to the shared memory area.
Access takes place cyclically in the cycle defined for the coupling. One byte of the memory area
must be uniquely assigned to either an input signal or an output signal. Each input signal must
be uniquely represented in the data area and the data areas of different input signals must not
overlap.
The figure below shows an example with 2 input signals, MD3 and MW6, that overlap in byte
6:
%\WH

0'
0:
'DWDDUHD


Couplings
The SIMIT consistency check reports overlapping signals as errors.
Note
As the smallest unit of the memory area that can be addressed is 1 byte, 1 byte can only be
assigned either to an input signal or to an output signal. Binary signals with the same byte
address can therefore only be either all binary input signals or all binary output signals.
SIMIT also accesses the memory area with byte-by-byte rather than bit-by-bit write access. 1
bit in one byte of the memory area for which no binary input signal is defined in the SHM
coupling is set to "0" upon SIMIT write access to the memory area.
The address name of a signal starts with "M" for "Memory" and then contains the data type and
address. Based on the address notation in SIMATIC automation systems, the data types set
out in the table below can be used.
Table 2-2 Definition of data types
Data type Variable Notation Value range

BOOL 1 bit M<byte>.<bit> True/False
BYTE 1 byte (8 bits) MB<byte> 0 ... 255 or −128 ... 127
WORD 2 bytes MW<byte> 0 ... 65,535
INT 2 bytes MW<byte> −32,768 ... 32,767
DWORD 4 bytes MD<byte> 0 ... 4,294,967,295
DINT 4 bytes MD<byte> −2,147,483,648 ... 2,147,483,647
REAL 4 bytes MD<byte> ±1.5 × 10−45 to ±3.4 × 1038
The following applies for mapping the integer signals in SIMIT simulation projects to the data
types in the memory area:
● The least significant byte (LSB) of the signal is used for the BYTE data type.
● The WORD and DWORD data types are unsigned and the INT and DINT data types are
signed. The values are limited to the value ranges specified in the table above.
The structure of a floating-point number is governed by the "IEEE Standard for Binary Floating
Point Arithmetic" (ANSI/IEEE Std 754-1985).
2.10.2.3 Signal properties in the SHM coupling

The properties of a signal are shown in the individual columns of the coupling editor and in the
property view.

Couplings
● Symbol name
The signal is identified by this name in SIMIT.
● Address
Signal values are stored in the data area of the shared memory area under this byte
address. The address "0" corresponds to the first byte after the header area.
● Data type
The data type specifies the space a signal occupies in the data area and how the signal
values saved there are to be interpreted. The options are as follows:
– Logical value
– Signed integer value
– Unsigned value
– Floating-point number
● Comment
The comment is used to document the signal. It is not evaluated.
2.10.2.4 Properties of the SHM coupling

● Time slice
Here you set the cycle at which the coupling exchanges data. The assignment of absolute
cycle times to the 8 available time slices is valid for the entire project. Time slice 2 is the
default, corresponding to a cycle of 100 ms.
Note
numbering.
● Shared Memory name

Here you enter the name with which the shared memory area can be addressed.
● Mutex name
Here you enter the name of the mutex for synchronizing access to the shared memory area.

Couplings
● Signal description in header

This option allows you to choose whether or not SIMIT is to create an extended header area.
You can find additional information on this in section: Structure of the header area
(Page 165).
● Header size
Here you enter the size of the header area in bytes. The value may be freely chosen, but
must be at least 8 bytes. If SIMIT creates the shared memory area, a header area with the
specified size is created.
Note
If you activate the "Signal description in header" option, the size of the header area is
determined by SIMIT based on the input/output signals in the coupling. The "Header size"
property is not editable in this case.
● Big/Little Endian
This property determines the byte order in which values of the WORD, INT, DWORD and
DINT data types are encoded in the data area.
Setting Byte order

Big endian The most significant byte is stored first, which means at the lowest
memory address.
Little endian The least significant byte is stored first, which means at the lowest
memory address.
2.10.2.5 Importing and exporting signals

SIMIT can store coupling content in txt format; this format contains SIMATIC addresses and
information about scaling. Because this kind of information does not exist in SHM couplings,
this format is only suited to a limited extent. However, you can still export import signal tables
in txt format; only relevant information is available or taken into consideration in the SHM
coupling.
SIMATIC symbol tables can also be imported in asc, seq and xlsx format as well as txt format.
Especially in this case, ensure that addresses for inputs and outputs in the SHM coupling are
not allowed to overlap.
Note
If you open the signal table for editing in Excel, all cells must be formatted as "text" so that Excel
does not make any unwanted format conversions.
You can find additional information on this in the following sections:

● Signal table (Page 195)
● "Importing signal properties" dialog box (Page 932)
● "Exporting signal properties" dialog box (Page 935)

Couplings
2.11 PRODAVE coupling
2.11.1 How the PRODAVE coupling works

SIMIT uses the PRODAVE coupling to communicate with a SIMATIC controller over the MPI
interface. For Ethernet-capable controllers, the connection can also be made via Ethernet. An
Ethernet connection performs somewhat better than a connection via MPI.
In SIMATIC Manager, set the PG interface to the selected connection type.
Note
To use the PRODAVE coupling you also need version 6.2 of the SIMATIC PRODAVE software.
This software is not included in the SIMIT product package. You may also need additional
hardware, such as MPI adapters or connecting cables. These also are not included in the SIMIT
product package.
The PRODAVE coupling does not simulate any SIMATIC I/Os. SIMIT directly addresses the
process image of a SIMATIC controller via the PRODAVE coupling. The addresses that are
actually addressable depend on the size of the CPU process image and on what was defined
in your hardware configuration.
6,0$7,&
FRQWUROOHU
&38 ,2PRGXOHV
3URFHVVLPDJH
6,0,7ಥ352'$9(*DWHZD\
Note
Do not use any I/O modules connected to your controller that use the same address ranges as
the PRODAVE coupling. They will otherwise compete for access to the process image.

Couplings
Note
If you have configured I/O modules in HW Config, you can access the address ranges from the
PRODAVE coupling provided the configured modules are not actually connected. This will
cause access errors in the CPU, which you can catch by creating the corresponding OBs in the
control program. Because the PRODAVE coupling only has access to the process image, you
cannot access any simulated signals that are addressed in the CPU as I/O signals (PIW, PQW).
Some SIMATIC controllers such as CPU 313C have fixed connections to I/O modules whose
address ranges cannot be changed. These address ranges cannot be accessed via the
PRODAVE coupling.
2.11.2 Configuring the PRODAVE coupling
2.11.2.1 Creating a PRODAVE coupling

To create an PRODAVE coupling, select the option "PRODAVE" in the "Selection" dialog box.
2.11.2.2 Editing signals in the PRODAVE coupling

● You enter the signals manually in the coupling editor.
● You import the symbol table from your SIMATIC project. You can find additional information
in section: "Importing signal properties" dialog box (Page 932).
2.11.2.3 Properties of the PRODAVE coupling


Couplings
● Time slice
The cycle in which the coupling exchanges data is set here. The assignment of absolute
cycle times to the 8 possible time slices applies to the entire project. Time slice 2, which
corresponds to a cycle of 100 ms, is preset.
Note
numbering.
● Mnemonics
Here, you select whether the international (I/Q) or German (E/A) mnemonics are to be used
for the inputs and outputs.
● CPU slot
Enter the slot number of your SIMATIC CPU here.
● Access mode
Here, you select whether to you want to use MPI (cable or adapter) or IP (Ethernet) access.
● MPI address / IP address
Enter the MPI number / IP address of the SIMATIC CPU here.
Additional functions
Copying and pasting scaling

You can find additional information in section: Transferring scaling to another signal
(Page 209).
Importing signal properties

You can find additional information in section: "Importing signal properties" dialog box
(Page 932).
Exporting signal properties

You can find additional information in section: "Exporting signal properties" dialog box
(Page 935).
2.11.2.4 Importing the signal properties

Import the signal properties by clicking the " " symbol in the coupling editor.
The "Import of signal properties" dialog box opens. You can make the import settings in this
dialog box.
You can find additional information in the section: "Importing signal properties" dialog box
(Page 932).
2.11.2.5 Exporting the signal properties

Click on the " " symbol in the coupling editor to export the signal properties.
The "Exporting signal properties" dialog box opens. You can make the export settings in this
dialog box.

Couplings
2.12 MCD coupling
See also
2.12 MCD coupling
2.12.1 How the MCD coupling works
Method of operation
With the MCD coupling, SIMIT communicates with a Mechatronics Concept Designer
application over a software interface of SIEMENS NX. SIMIT uses the MCDcoupling for cyclic
exchange of data from the signal pool and the technological objects of the coupled MCD
application. The coupling to exactly one MCD application is supported.
6,0,7 0&'
,QWHUIDFH
6LHPHQV1;
The following applications must be installed on a PC to use the MCD coupling:

● SIMIT
● Mechatronics Concept Designer
When you start or finish the simulation, the MCD application is automatically started or finished.
The coupling of the type "MCD" supports two basic modes of operation.
● Importing an MCD application.
If the MCD application is imported, all associated files are copied to the SIMIT project. SIMIT
subsequently only works with the internal project copy. Changes to the original
MCDapplication have no effect on the internal project copy.
● Linking an MCD application.
If the MCD application is linked, all signals it contains are applied to the SIMIT signal pool.
All files referenced by the MCD application remain at their original storage location. They will
not become part of the SIMIT project and will therefore not be taken into consideration when
the project is archived.

Couplings
2.12 MCD coupling
2.12.2 Use scenarios of the MCD coupling
Operating principle
You need the following couplings in SIMIT to simulate the control of a Mechatronics Concept
Designer application:
● Couplings to a controller of the SIMATIC family
● MCD coupling
The figure below shows the simulation of a control schematically using a position change of a
robot axis as an example:
3ODQW
3/& 6,1$0,&6 5RERW
352),1(7
0RWLRQ 'ULYH 0RYHPHQW

3RVLWLRQ
&RQWUROORRS
WDUJHW Q Q
3RVLWLRQ
DFWXDO
6,0,7
&RXSOLQJWR &RXSOLQJWR
&38 0&'
The "Coupling to CPU" transfers the control command to the PROFIdrive component. The
PROFIdrive component calculates the target position based on the control command. The
target position is transferred over the MCD coupling to the Mechatronics Concept Designer
application. The Mechatronics Concept Designer application contains the CAD model of the
robot and its physical properties, such as the weight. Using a physics engine for modeling the
physical conditions, the Mechatronics Concept Designer application calculates the actual
movement of the component. Then the Mechatronics Concept Designer application returns the
calculated actual position.

Couplings
2.12 MCD coupling
Control loop
If you have configured a system with isochronous mode and you want to simulate isochronous
mode, use PLCSIM Advanced. Otherwise, use PLCSIM, Virtual Controller or SIMIT Unit.
6\VWHPFRQILJXUHGZLWK
LVRFKURQRXVPRGH 12
3/&6,0
<(6
9LUWXDO
&RQWUROOHU
6LPXODWHLVRFKURQRXV
PRGH 12 6,0,78QLW
<(6
3/&6,0$GYDQFHG
PLCSIM Advanced, SIMIT and MCD correspond to PLC, SINAMICS and robot in the plant.
Simulate Mechatronics Concept Designer application with configured isochronous mode

1. Creating a SIMIT project
2. Select "bus synchronous" as operating mode in the project properties.
3. Configuring a time slice with the cycle time
4. Configuring a PLCSIM Advanced coupling
5. Configuring an MCD coupling
6. Configuring a PROFIdrive component
7. Interconnecting the PROFIdrive component with signals from both couplings
2.12.3 Configuring the MCD coupling
2.12.3.1 Creating the MCD coupling
Introduction
In a SIMIT project, you can create a coupling of the type "MCD".

Couplings
2.12 MCD coupling
Requirement
● The project is opened in SIMIT.
● Mechatronics Concept Designer version 11.0 or higher is installed on the SIMIT PC.
Note that a coupling to Mechatronics Concept Designer version 12.0 requires at least
service pack 1 (version 12.01).
Procedure
To create a coupling of the type "MCD", follow these steps:
1. Add a new coupling in the project tree under "Couplings".
2. Activate the coupling type "MCD".
Result
The coupling of the type "MCD" is created in the project tree.
2.12.3.2 Importing signals
Requirement
● A coupling of the type "MCD" has been created.
Procedure
To import an MCD application and its signals, follow these steps:
1. Double-click the coupling of the type "MCD" in the project tree.
The coupling editor of the MCD coupling opens.
2. Start the signal import by clicking the "Import" button in the menu bar of the coupling editor.
The "MCD Select Part File" dialog box opens.
3. Select your MCD application in the main file.
4. To import the MCD application and its signals, click on "Import".
Result
The MCD application including all referenced files is copied completely to the SIMIT project.
The signals contained in the MCD application are created in the SIMIT signal pool.

Couplings
2.12 MCD coupling
2.12.3.3 Linking signals
Requirement
Procedure
To link an MCD application and its signals, follow these steps:
2. Start the signal linking by clicking the "Link to" button in the menu bar of the coupling editor.
The "MCD Select Part File" dialog box opens.
3. Select your MCD application in the main file.
4. To link the MCD application and its signals, click on "Link to".
Result
The signals contained in the MCD application are created in the SIMIT signal pool. The files
referenced by the MCD application still remain at their original storage location.
2.12.3.4 Editing signal properties in the MCD coupling
Introduction
The coupling of the type "MCD" permits a configuration of the physical unit of each exchanged
signal. The configured physical unit is valid for use within the simulation model in SIMIT. The
physical unit of the same signal in the MCD application can certainly be different.
Requirement
● SIEMENS NX in version 12.0.1 or higher is installed on the SIMIT PC.
Procedure
To configure the physical unit of signal of the MCD coupling, follow these steps:
2. Select the desired signal in the "Input/output signal" area of the coupling editor.
The signal is highlighted.

Couplings
2.12 MCD coupling
3. Select the desired physical unit in the "Unit" column.

4. Save the changes in the coupling editor.
Result
The physical unit of the desired signal of the MCD coupling was changed.
2.12.3.5 Configuring bus synchronous MCD coupling
Requirement
● MCD coupling has been created.
● "Bus synchronous" operating mode is set.
● A time slice with the configured cycle time from STEP 7 is configured.
Procedure
To configure a bus synchronous MCD coupling, follow these steps:
1. Double-click on "MCD coupling" in the project tree under "Couplings".
2. Configure the MCD coupling in the property view:
– Select the time slice that is configured with the cycle time from STEP 7.
– Activate the "Bus synchronous" option.
Result
The bus synchronous MCD coupling is configured.
2.12.3.6 Properties of the MCD coupling

You can define the following properties in the property view:

Couplings
2.12 MCD coupling
Time slice
Here you set the cycle at which the coupling exchanges data. The assignment of absolute cycle
times to the 8 available time slices is valid for the entire project. Time slice 2 is the default,
corresponding to a cycle of 100 ms.
Note
numbering.
Bus synchronous
Specifies whether the MCD application is synchronized with the SIMIT model calculation.
When you set bus synchronous here, you must configure the parameterized cycle time in the
selected time slice.
When you set bus synchronous here, you must also set bus synchronous in the project
manager in the property view. For more information about the bus-synchronous operating
mode, please visit Operating modes (Page 42).
MCD part file

Shows the referenced MCD part file (main file of your MCD application).

Couplings
2.13 Editing the signals of a coupling
2.13.1 Signal basics
2.13.1.1 Coupling data direction

Each coupling in SIMIT defines signals that can be linked to simulation components. The terms
"input" and "output" are from the perspective of the connected controller:
● An input signal is a signal that is calculated or output by the simulation and read by the
controller.
● An output signal is a signal that is output by the controller and used as an input by the
simulation.
&RQWUROOHU
2XWSXWVLJQDO
IRUH[DPSOH$ ,QSXWVLJQDO
IRUH[DPSOH(
6,0,7
All signals contained in a coupling are listed in the coupling editor. Access to a signal from the
coupling is with the symbol name or the absolute address, irrespective of how the signal is used.
2.13.1.2 Meaning of the coupling name

Signal names consist of a source and a name. For any coupling signal the name of the coupling
itself defines the source, and the symbolic name or the absolute address of the signal defines
the name of the signal.
Signal names therefore remain unique throughout the entire SIMIT project, even if the same
symbol name or the same address occurs in several different couplings.
Note
Each coupling within a SIMIT project must have a unique name.
For example, if you want to connect SIMIT to multiple PROFIBUS DP masters, create a
separate coupling and assign a unique coupling name for each PROFIBUS DP master system.
This ensures that all coupling signals are assigned to the correct coupling.

Couplings
2.13.1.3 Sorting and filtering of signals in the coupling editor

Signals can be sorted and filtered by all properties shown in the individual columns. Follow
these steps:
● Click the title of the column by which the signals are to be sorted.
An arrow appears in the column title:
● Every additional click on the column header toggles between alphabetically ascending and
descending sort order. The arrow changes its direction:
– for sorting in ascending order
– for sorting in descending order
● To further reduce the number of signals displayed, you can also set a filter in each column.
In this case, only signals that meet all filter criteria are displayed.
In the figure below, a text filter for the address of signals is set:
● Select a filter from a drop-down menu or enter a text.

Couplings
2.13.1.4 Addressing signals

In a SIMATIC PLC, different mechanisms are used to access the process image (I/O) and the
I/O addresses (PI/PQ). For SIMIT itself, this access difference is not relevant. To use SIMATIC
couplings in SIMIT, you can either use QW or PQW or IW or PIW in the address of the I/O signal.
Signals are exchanged as follows, depending on the type of coupling:
● The signal exchange with SIMIT in the SIMIT Unit coupling takes place over field device I/O
signals, as in a real plant. For the controller, there is no difference to data exchange with real
I/O. In the SIMATIC PLC, the I/Os or the process image can thus be accessed using the
relevant mechanisms.
● In the case of the PRODAVE coupling, SIMIT only exchanges I/O signals with the process
image of the controller. Access in the SIMATIC PLC to I/O addresses results in access
errors.
● Think of the mechanisms for the PLCSIM coupling like those of the SIMIT Unit coupling:
SIMIT communicates with PLCSIM on the basis of the I/O signals. The access mechanisms
of the PLC are coordinated by PLCSIM.
2.13.1.5 Fixing signals in the coupling editor
Introduction
Signals can be set and "fixed" at a specific value. With fixation, the signal values currently
pending are applied first to achieve a smooth switchover.
There is an automatically generated control for each signal to display fixation in the coupling
editor:
"Toggle switch with fixation" for signals of the data type "binary"
"Digital input with fixation" for signals of the data types "analog" and "integer"
Note
Retaining a specific signal state is known as "forcing" in a SIMATIC controller. Fixing in SIMIT
is a comparable function, but only applies within the simulation model and does not cause
"forcing" in the SIMATIC controller.
For each coupling signal, the controls with fixation are available in the first column after starting
the simulation:

Couplings
Principle of operation of the switch with fixing

The toggle switch with fixation for binary values combines three functions:
Symbol Meaning
Fixation switch is not active; the current value of the signal is displayed
Fixation switch is active; the fixed value is displayed and can be used
This symbol is only displayed with binary values:

Value is "0"
Value is "1"
Input and display field for values of the data types "analog" and "integer"
If the fixation switch and/or the value cannot be operated, the corresponding symbol appears
on a gray background, for example if the coupling signal is not used in the simulation model.
The figure below shows how a toggle switch with fixation works:
$FWXDOYDOXH
(IIHFWLYHYDOXH
Override is basically a changeover, which either transfers the actual value in the coupling or
changes it to a value that is input manually. It is possible both with input and with output signals
i.e. all I/O signals can be specified.

Couplings
Example of fixation
In the example below, two signals are configured in the coupling and used in a chart in the
following way:
In the coupling you can see which value the controller outputs for the signal Q0.0.
Value output by the Q0.0 in the coupling Value used in the simulation model
controller
0 0
1 1
Override allows you to control your simulation model so that it uses a different value from the
one output by the I/O. To do this, click on the fixation switch for the signal Q0.0. This is then
shown like this: . You can now use the toggle switch to directly enter the value to be used in
your simulation model as follows:
Value output by the Q0.0 in the coupling Value used in the simulation model
controller
0 or 1 1
0 or 1 0
The same applies to the input signals. For an input signal I0.0 you can first of all see what value
the simulation model outputs to the controller:
Value calculated in I0.0 in the coupling Value output to the controller

the simulation model
0 0
1 1
Using fixation, you can set the value that is output at the controller irrespective of the value
calculated in the simulation model. Enter the default value using the fixation switch:
Value calculated in I0.0 in the coupling Value output to the controller

the simulation model
0 or 1 1
0 or 1 0
This procedure applies in the same way to analog and integer signals. Only the default values
are entered with a digital input, unlike the binary values. A digital display is used in place of the
binary display.
See also
Fixing a signal (Page 206)

Couplings
2.13.1.6 Mapping of SIMATIC data types in SIMIT

A signal in the SIMATIC coupling has one of the SIMATIC-specific data types BOOL, BYTE,
WORD, INT, DWORD, DINT or REAL, which correspond to access to the address range of the
PLC. When used as an I/O signal it has the data type binary, integer or analog. The table below
shows the mapping of SIMATIC data types to the data types of the I/O signal.
Table 2-3 Mapping of SIMATIC data types to signal data types
SIMATIC data type SIMATIC value range SIMIT data type Mapping to SIMATIC data types
BOOL true, false Binary true, false
BYTE 0 .. 255 Integer [ −128 .. 255 ]
WORD 0 .. 65535 Integer [ −32768 .. 65535 ]
(without scaling)
INT −32768 .. 32767 Integer [ −32768 .. 65535 ]
DWORD 0 .. 4294967295 Integer [ −2147483648 .. 4294967295 ]
DINT −2147483648 .. Integer [ −2147483648 .. 4294967295 ]
2147483647
REAL ±1.175495 × 10−38 Analog ±1.175495 × 10−38
±3.402823 × 1038 ±3.402823 × 1038
Values that are read in the SIMIT coupling, are applied to the SIMIT data types according to the
value range of the SIMATIC data types listed above.
All values output by SIMIT through the coupling that are within the SIMATIC value range are
output unchanged by SIMIT. Values outside this range are limited to the interval specified in the
last column and mapped to the data width of the corresponding SIMATIC data type. Negative
figures are saved as two's complement. For example, the figure −1 is transferred as a byte with
the same bit pattern as the figure 255.
Scaled signals are dealt with slightly differently. Raw values that are read into the SIMIT
coupling are limited to the value range of the SIMATIC and then converted to physical values.
Values output by SIMIT through the coupling are converted to raw values and then limited to the
SIMATIC value range:
SIMATIC data type SIMATIC value range SIMIT data type Mapping to SIMATIC data types
WORD [ −32768 .. 32767 ] Analog [ −32768 .. 32767 ]
(bipolar scaling)
WORD [ −32768 .. 32767 ] Analog [ −32768 .. 32767 ]
(unipolar scaling)
WORD [ −32768 .. 32767 ] Analog [ −32768 .. 32767 ]
(user-specific scaling)
You can find additional information on this in section: Scaling analog signals (Page 190).

Couplings
2.13.1.7 Access to a data record or memory area

Access to data records in the distributed I/Os or to the memory area of a SIMATIC controller is
possible with the following coupling types:
Coupling type Access mode Component

SIMIT Unit Read/write data record in dis‐ ReadDataRecord
Virtual control‐ tributed I/Os WriteDataRecord
ler
PLCSIM Ad‐
vanced
Virtual control‐ Read/write bytes from bit ReadMemory
ler memory address area WriteMemory
PLCSIM Read / write bytes from data ReadDataBlock
PRODAVE block WriteDataBlock
This access is not carried out by cyclic communication between the controller and signals that
are listed in the coupling editor, but through components which are triggered to start a read or
write process. The required component types can be found in the basic library in the directory
COMMUNICATION | SIMATIC.
You can easily link the component with corresponding coupling by entering, in the properties
window of the unit connector, the name of the coupling that you want to access with that
component. Alternatively, you can create the unit connector using drag & drop by dragging the
module to be addressed from the property view of the coupling to the chart.
To use this access method for a coupling, you must have already saved the coupling. Open the
coupling in the editor, define, for example, an input or output signal and then save the coupling.
Access to the memory area of a controller

Enter the coupling name in the property window of the unit connector. Connect the unit
connector with the "Gateway" input of the component.
Access to a data record in the distributed I/Os

Enter the coupling name and the module address in the property window of the unit connector
using the following syntax:
● [<Number of the master system>][<Slave number>][<Slot number>]
Connect the unit connector with the "Unit" input of the component.
Access to a data record in the distributed I/O is possible with both PROFIBUS and PROFINET.

Couplings
An example of use of the unit connector can be found in Linking SIWAREXU components to the
coupling (Page 525).
Data record communication is integrated by default in the following components. You
interconnect the Unit input directly with a unit connector:
● SIWAREXU components (Page 523)
● ASM452 – Interface module for identification systems (Page 867)
● RF170C – Interface module for identification systems (Page 886)
● RF180C – Interface module for identification systems (Page 889)
See also
ReadMemory – Reading a bit memory address area (Page 545)
WriteMemory – Writing to a bit memory address area (Page 545)
ReadDatablock – Reading a data block (Page 546)
WriteDatablock – Writing to a data block (Page 547)
ReadDataRecord – Reading a data record (Page 548)
WriteDataRecord – Writing a data record (Page 548)
Unit connector (Page 393)
Data record communication (Page 122)
2.13.1.8 Converting the data width of signals
Introduction
The signals that belong to an imported configuration are automatically created in the coupling
when system blocks are imported. The system differentiates between binary signals with the
data width "Bit" and signals with the data width "Byte", Word (2 bytes), Double Word (4 bytes)
and others.
You can change the data width, for example by combining eight consecutive binary signals in
one byte signal.
You can only convert signals that have been created in the coupling as a result of the import of
system blocks. The address areas are set by the configuration. They cannot be changed, not
even by converting the signal data width.

Couplings
Converting signals
The table below shows how you can convert signals:
● Combining signals: Read a table row from left to right
● Splitting a signal: Read a table row from right to left
Number Data type Data width Number Data type Data width
of signals of signals
8 BOOL 1 bit ↔ 1 BYTE 1 byte
2 BYTE 1 byte ↔ 1 WORD (INT) 2 bytes
2 WORD (INT) 2 bytes ↔ 1 DWORD (DINT, 4 bytes
REAL)
See also
Splitting a signal (Page 204)
Combining signals (Page 205)
2.13.1.9 Scaling analog signals

In SIMATIC systems and generally also in other automation systems, the values of analog
signals are converted into a fixed integer format. The value range is derived from the resolution
of the A/D converter and is typically within the range –27648 to +27648 for the SIMATIC S7.
Analog values are treated like floating point values in the simulation. The simulation generally
uses the absolute values of physical variables such as pressure, temperature, etc. As input
values for the connected automation systems, these values must not only be converted into
fixed decimal point format, they must also be mapped onto the range of values for the
corresponding measurement ranges. The analog values must therefore be scaled when they
are sent from SIMIT to SIMATIC, and rescaled when sent in the opposite direction.
The scaling of input signals and the rescaling of input and output signals is a way of adapting
the simulation to the characteristics of the controller. Scaling and rescaling are therefore
performed at the interface between the simulation model and the controller in the couplings.
You can define the scaling for a signal either through its properties or using the signal table.
As all analog modules in the SIMATIC module range that are transferred as a word operate with
a resolution of 2 bytes, scaling and descaling in SIMIT is only available for analog values of the
data type WORD.
The figure below shows scaling for unipolar and bipolar measurements:

Couplings
8SSHUOLPLW 8SSHUOLPLW
&RQWUROOHU 6LPXODWLRQ &RQWUROOHU 6LPXODWLRQ
/RZHUOLPLW
0HDVXUHGYDOXHV 0HDVXUHGYDOXHV
5DZYDOXHV 5DZYDOXHV
PDQLSXODWHG PDQLSXODWHG
YDULDEOHV YDULDEOHV
/RZHUOLPLW
8QLSRODUVFDOLQJUHVFDOLQJ %LSRODUVFDOLQJUHVFDOLQJ
● Unipolar measurements only provide positive raw values (0 to 27648)

● Bipolar measurements provide both positive and negative raw values (–27648 to +27648).
The following table lists the scaling/descaling supported by SIMIT:
Scaling type Measuring range Raw values

Number Name Start End Lower Upper
0 No scaling
1 Unipolar 0 (Default) 100 0 27648
2 Bipolar −100 (default) 100 (Default) −27648 27648
3 User-defined 0 (Default) 100 (Default) 0 (Default) 27648 (Default)
4 PT x00 standard −200 °C 850 °C −2000 8500
5 PT x00 climate −120 °C 130 °C −12000 13000
6 Ni x00 standard −60 °C 250 °C −600 2500
7 Ni x00 climate −60 °C 250 °C −6000 25000
8 Cu 10 standard −200 °C 260 °C −2000 2600
9 Cu 10 climate −50 °C 150 °C −5000 15000
10 Type B thermocouple 0 °C 1820 °C 0 18200
11 Type E thermocouple −270 °C 1000 °C −2700 10000
12 Type J thermocouple −210 °C 1200 °C −2100 12000
13 Type K thermocouple −270 °C 1372 °C −2700 13720
14 Type L thermocouple −200 °C 900 °C −2000 9000
15 Type N thermocouple −270 °C 1300 °C −2700 13000
16 Type R, S thermocouple −50 °C 1769 °C −500 17690
17 Type T thermocouple −270 °C 400 °C −2700 4000
18 Type U thermocouple −200 °C 600 °C −2000 6000

Couplings
For types 1 and 2, the "Lower scale value" and the "Upper scale value" are preset with 0 or −100
and 100. These values can, however, be adapted to the measurement or setting ranges.
Unipolar and bipolar scaling (types 1 and 2) and the "User-defined" type (type 3) can also be
used as descaling for output signals.
Scaling types 4 to 18 can only be used as scaling for temperature measurements for input
signals.
Note
For the temperature measurement signals in a coupling, the measuring range limits are only
displayed. They cannot be edited.
High and low raw values can only be edited if the scaling type "User-defined" has been selected.
Changing the scaling while the simulation is running

When the simulation is running, the measuring ranges of the scaling and the raw value ranges
can be changed (for the "Custom" type). Changes take effect immediately.
Note
This function is not available with the Virtual Controller coupling.
Note
The changes only apply to the simulation in progress. They are not automatically applied to the
configuration.
Transfer of floating point values (Float)

Some I/O devices - including those in the PROFIBUS PA range - transfer their measured values
directly to the controller as physical variables in floating point format with a data width of 4 bytes
(double word). In order to handle these floating point values correctly, the corresponding
signals have to be assigned the data type REAL in the coupling.
See also
Signal table (Page 195)
Scaling signals (Page 208)

Couplings
2.13.2 Importing and exporting signals
2.13.2.1 File formats for signals

You can switch signal configurations between couplings by exporting and importing signal
properties. The signals of a coupling are exported and imported in specific formats. The
following file formats are supported in line with the coupling type:
Coupling type Signal tables

Import format 1
Export format
SIMIT Unit asc, seq, txt or xlsx txt, seq
Virtual controller2 asc, seq, txt or xlsx txt, seq
PLCSIM asc, seq, txt or xlsx txt, seq
PRODAVE asc, seq, txt or xlsx txt, seq
SHM asc, seq, txt or xlsx txt, seq
OPC DA server ini, txt txt, ini
OPC DA/UA client ini, txt txt, ini
1
Only files that are encoded as SBCS (Single Byte Character Set) and use the permanently set code
page 1252 ("Western European") are supported.
2
Only the format "*.txt" is supported for the import and export of data block tables.
Additional information on signal import and export:
● The standard format is txt format.
● A signal table in asc format or seq format corresponds to the symbol table of a SIMATIC
project.
You can find additional information on this in section: Symbol table (Page 193).
● Exported signal tables contain all the signals of a coupling and their properties such as
name (symbol), address, comment, etc.
You can find additional information on this in section: Signal table (Page 195).
2.13.2.2 Symbol table

The symbol table is exported from SIMATIC Manager from a SIMATIC project in various
formats. For import to SIMIT, select asc or seq format.
Note
Please note that in seq format, the comment is limited to 40 characters and no data types are
included.
When seq format is imported to SIMIT, data words are always assigned the data type WORD
and double words the data type DWORD. Changes to data types INT or REAL must then be
made manually.

Couplings
The import of the symbol table is supported by all SIMATIC couplings in SIMIT.
Note
The asc format uses fixed column widths. If you edit this file with a text editor other than the
symbol editor, you must not change the number of characters per line.
2.13.2.3 Variable table

The PLC variable lists (symbol tables) are imported from the TIA Portal. The TIA Portal export
these lists in xlsx format. Only input and output signals with following data types are transferred:
TIA Portal STEP 7 SIMIT

Bool BOOL Binary
Bytes BYTE integer
Word WORD integer
Int INT integer
DWord DWORD integer
Dint DINT integer
Real REAL analog

Couplings
2.13.2.4 Signal table

The signal table is structured as follows:
Column Title Heading Meaning

1 Symbol Symbol Symbolic name of the signal
2 I/O InOut Encoded as I, Q, IB, QB, IW, QW, ID, QD, or in the
corresponding international notation (I/Q)
3 Address Address Absolute address of the signal, e.g. 0.0 or 512
4 Type Type Signal data type: BOOL, BYTE, WORD or DWORD
5 Comment Comment Text as comment
6 Default Default Initialization value that is the default of this signal
7 Signal source ImplicitSource Source of implicitly interconnected signal
8 Signal name ImplicitSignal Signal source of implicitly interconnected signal
9 Unit Unit Unit of the signal, e.g. physical unit for measured
values
10 Scaling Scaling Type number of the scaling (for information, see
the table in the section: Scaling analog signals
(Page 190)
11 Low limit ScalingLowerPhys Physical low or high limit of analog signals:
12 High limit ScalingUpperPhys
13 Low raw value ScalingLowerRAW Low or high raw value of scaled analog signals.
14 High raw value ScalingUpperRAW Can only be freely selected with "Custom" scaling
type.
15 Limiting on/off LimitActive Limitation of an analog signal is in enabled / disa‐
bled
16 Low limit LimitLowerPhys Low physical value of the limit
17 High limit LimitUpperPhys High physical value of the limit
18 Multiplier Multiplier OPC client, cycle multiplier
19 Can be read Readback OPC client, signal can be read back
back
In txt format, the tabulator is used as the column separator.

The first row must contain the identifier "#Signal properties;". This row contains information on
the file type. The SIMIT version number with which this table was exported and the coupling
name are also added during export from SIMIT.
The selected properties appear in the second row as column headers. These are displayed
even if no corresponding content is available.
One signal and its properties are described in each of the subsequent rows.
Note
The signal table has been revised with the SIMIT version 8.1 and expanded with column
headings. If you import a signal table that was created with a previous version of SIMIT, you will
need to modify it accordingly.
Due to the new "Custom" scaling type, the significance of the type numbers for scaling has
moved.

Couplings
Note
If you edit a signal table in EXCEL, all columns must be formatted as "text" to ensure that
EXCEL does not carry out any unwanted format conversions.
2.13.2.5 INI format of the OPC couplings

OPC signals have their own import/export format for the following reasons:
● They have no addressing function.
● The name does not indicate the direction of transfer.
● There is no conversion of raw values to physical values or vice versa.
The format of the signal table for OPC signals is ini. The format consists of six sections and
these are indicated by the following keywords:
Keyword Meaning
[AIN] Analog input signals
[IIN] Integer input signals
[BIN] Binary input signals
[AOUT] Analog output signals
[IOUT] Integer output signals
[BOUT] Binary output signals
Each keyword must be in a separate row. This is followed by the signal names to be assigned
to this section. The order of sectors is arbitrary. Not all sections must be used.

Couplings
In each section, the signal table contains a single line per signal. The signals and their
properties are exported in quotation marks and separated by a semicolon.
OPC Server OPC client

Inputs ● Name ● Name
● Comment ● Comment
● Default ● Default
● Implicit interconnection ● Implicit interconnection
(source/target) (source/target)
(signal) (signal)
● Multiplier
● Can be read back ("True/
False")
Outputs ● Name ● Name
● Comment ● Comment
(source/target) (source/target)
(signal) (signal)
● Multiplier
If a row contains only a signal name without quotation marks when the signal table is imported,
the signal will be imported with that name, without comments and with the defaults.
Note
With an OPC client, the import format of SIMIT V8.1 is not backwards compatible with older
versions of SIMIT. If you have specified the multiplier or the readback capability in existing
import files, you must now add 2 additional empty columns for the implicit interconnection.
2.13.2.6 Importing signal properties
Introduction
You can import signal properties from the following files:
● Symbol table
● Variable table
● Signal table
● INI file

Couplings
Requirement
● Import file is available.
● Coupling has been created.
● Coupling editor is open.
Procedure
Follow these steps to import signal properties:
1. In the coupling editor, open the dialog box for importing signal properties.
2. Select the format of the import file.
3. Select the import file.
4. Select the signal properties you want to import.
5. Over "Mode", select what is to happen to the properties of existing signals.
6. If required, select "Adapt data width".
7. Click "Import".
Result
The properties are imported.
See also
2.13.2.7 Importing PLC variable lists

PLC variable lists (symbol tables) are imported from the TIA Portal. These lists are exported
from the TIA Portal in EXCEL format (*.xlsx). Only I/O signals with the data types listed in the
table below are copied from the variable list:
Table 2-4 Comparison of data types
TIA Portal Step 7 SIMIT

Bool BOOL binary
Bytes BYTE integer
Word WORD integer
Int INT integer
DWord DWORD integer
DInt DINT integer
Real REAL analog

Couplings
2.13.2.8 Exporting signal properties
Requirement
Procedure
Follow these steps to export signal properties:
1. In the coupling editor, open the dialog box for exporting signal properties.
2. Select the format of the export file.
3. Select the storage location of the export file.
4. Select the signal properties you want to export.
5. Click "Export".
Result
The properties are exported.
See also

Couplings
2.13.3 Using I/O signals
2.13.3.1 I/O signals for connection on charts

I/O signals can be used in charts for application to the simulation model.
Proceed as follows:
1. Open the required chart in the chart editor.
2. Open the "Signals" task card.
Set the "Origin" filter to "Coupling" to display I/O signals only.
You can find additional information on the task card in: "Signals" task card (Page 233).
3. Select one or more signals from the task card and drag-and-drop it/them to the chart.
Controls for signal operation are then generated in the chart.
If you instead want to generate I/O connectors for the signals, hold down <Shift> when you
drag-and-drop. This generates I/O connectors that already have the correct signal names.
The I/O connectors can now be connected as required to the I/O of another component.
Dragging I/O signals from the "Components" task card

I/O connectors from the "Components" task card can also be used; in this case, however, the
coupling and signals names must be entered manually.

Couplings
To enter the signal name, simply click on the I/O connector to select it and enter the name of
the coupling and the signal name in the property view.
Note
The name of the I/O connector must be written exactly as it is entered in the configurator.
Therefore, pay attention to upper/lower case and do not use spaces in address names such
as I0.0.
2.13.3.2 I/O signals for animations

You can use I/O signals to animate graphic objects. To do this, enter the signal name in the
property view of the animation.
You can drag-and-drop the signals from the "Signals" task card.

Couplings
2.13.3.3 I/O signals in controls on charts

The controls with fixation can be copied from the coupling into the chart. To do this, drag the I/
O signals from the "Signals" task card into the chart. The name for the control is copied as a text
element to the chart.
You can also use I/O signals directly in other controls, such as a pushbutton.
Enter the name of the I/O in the property screen of the control or drag-and-drop the I/O signal
from the "Signals" task card to the property view of the control.
2.13.3.4 I/O signals in trends

You can also use I/O signals in trends. Follow these steps:
● Enter the signal with source and name in the property view of the trend.
● Drag-and-drop the signal from the "Signals" task card to the trend property view.

Couplings
You can find more information on trends in: Trends (Page 280).
2.13.3.5 Multiple use of I/O connectors

I/O input connectors with the same name can be used multiple times in chart. Each of the two
figures below is therefore possible:
An I/O output connector can only be used once in an entire project. The following
interconnection would result in an error when the simulation project is started:
2.13.4 Interconnecting signals
Introduction
An interconnection is the exchange of signals between two objects:
● Two coupling signals
● One coupling signal and the input or output of a component
Requirement

Couplings
● Signals have been created.

● Signals to be interconnected are of the same data type.
● The signal is not interconnected.
Procedure
Follow these steps to interconnect signals:
1. Select the signal.
2. Enter the connection destination under "Connection" in the signal properties.
Result
The signal is interconnected.
2.13.5 Splitting a signal
Introduction
If you split a signal, its symbolic name is removed.
Requirement
● One of the following coupling types has been created:
– SIMIT Unit
– Virtual controller
● The signal to be split:
– Has been imported from a system block
– Is not fail-safe
Procedure
Follow these steps to split a signal:
1. Select a signal with one of the following data types from the signal table:
– BOOL
– WORD
– DWORD
2. Select "Split" from the shortcut menu.

Couplings
Result
The signal is split into up to eight signals in line with the data type.
See also
Converting the data width of signals (Page 189)
2.13.6 Combining signals
Introduction
When you combine signals, their symbolic names are removed.
Requirement
– SIMIT Unit
● Signals to be combined:
– Have been imported from system blocks
– Are located in the same module
– Are not fail-safe
Procedure
Follow these steps to combine signals:
1. Select consecutive signals from the signal table:
– Data type BOOL: 8 signals
– Data type BYTE or WORD: 2 signals
2. Select "Combine" from the shortcut menu.
Result
The signals are combined.
See also
Converting the data width of signals (Page 189)

Couplings
2.13.7 Preassigning signals
Requirement
– SIMIT Unit
– PLCSIM
– PLCSIM Advanced
– PRODAVE
Procedure
Follow these steps to preassign a value to a signal:
1. Open the coupling editor.
2. Allocate the signal under "Inputs > Default":
– Analog signal: Enter the required value.
– Binary signal: Select the check box.
Result
The signal is preassigned the specified value when simulation is launched. The value can
change during the course of simulation.
See also
Fixing a signal (Page 206)
2.13.8 Fixing a signal
Introduction
In the coupling editor, you can set signals and display signal values while simulation is running.
Requirement
● Simulation has started.

Couplings
Procedure
Follow these steps to fix a signal:
1. Either enter a value or select the check box in line with the data type of the signal.
2. Select the fixing switch.
Result
The value of the signal is fixed. The value is not changed during simulation.
See also
Fixing signals in the coupling editor (Page 184)
Preassigning signals (Page 206)
2.13.9 Addressing a signal symbolically
Introduction
In SIMIT, signals are by default uniquely identified with their address. As the address says little
about the function of a signal, you can with some couplings assign a descriptive symbolic name
for a signal. Addresses or symbolic names are, for example, displayed at input and output
connectors.
Requirement
– SIMIT Unit
– PLCSIM
– PLCSIM Advanced
– PRODAVE
Procedure
Follow these steps to address a signal symbolically:
2. Under "Symbol name", enter a symbolic name for the signal.
3. Select the "Options > Assign coupling signals" menu command.

Couplings
Result
The identification of the signal has been switched from absolute addressing to symbolic
addressing. In SIMIT, you can now only access the signal using its symbolic name.
See also
Options > Assign coupling signals (Page 925)
2.13.10 Scaling signals
Introduction
You can enter scaling values in the signal table instead of in the properties of a signal.
Requirement
– SIMIT Unit
– PLCSIM
– PLCSIM Advanced
– PRODAVE
● Signal is analog.
● Signal is of the data type WORD.
Procedure
Follow these steps to scale a signal:
3. Configure the scaling values in the signal properties under "Scaling":
– Select the scaling type.
– Enter the lower and upper physical value.
Result
Scaling for the signal has been defined.

Couplings
See also
Signal table (Page 195)
Scaling analog signals (Page 190)
Transferring scaling to another signal (Page 209)
2.13.11 Transferring scaling to another signal
Introduction
You can transfer scaling from one signal to one or more other signals. Scaling is transferred in
the coupling editor column by column.
Requirement
– SIMIT Unit
– PLCSIM
– PLCSIM Advanced
– PRODAVE
● Signal has been scaled.
● A scaling type is set at the destination signal.
Procedure
Follow these steps to transfer the scaling to another signal:
1. Select the signal from the "Scaling" column.
2. Select "Copy cell" from the shortcut menu.
3. Select the destination signal from the "Scaling" column.
4. Select "Paste to cell" from the shortcut menu.
Result
The scaling is transferred to the destination signal:
● Scaling type
● Lower and upper physical value

Couplings
See also
Scaling signals (Page 208)
2.13.12 Limiting a signal
Introduction
You can define a limit range for all analog coupling signals. Values outside this range many not
be transferred to the coupling partner or the simulation depending on the signal:
● Limit range for input signal: Coupling partner
● Limit range for output signal: Simulation
Requirement
– SIMIT Unit
– PLCSIM
– PLCSIM Advanced
– PRODAVE
● Signal is of the SIMIT data type "analog":
– Standardized measured value (WORD)
– Floating-point number (REAL)
Procedure
Follow these steps to limit a signal:
3. Configure the limits in the signal properties under "Limits":
– Activate the limits.
– Enter the lower and upper physical value.
Result
A limit range is defined for the signal. You can disable or change the limits while simulation is
running.

Couplings
2.13.13 Reading signals from an OPC server
Note
When you read OPC signals, all signals in the coupling editor are overwritten. If you have input
cycle multiplier or comments at signals, for example, export the signals before reading. Once
you have read the signals from the OPC server, import the signals again.
Requirement
– OPC DA client
– OPC UA client
● Connection to OPC sever is configured.
● OPC server can be accessed in the network.
Procedure
Follow these steps to read signals from an OPC server:
1. Open the coupling editor for the OPC client coupling.
2. Import the OPC signals with "Browse".
Result
The OPC signals are read from the OPC server. Only OPC signals whose data types are
supported by SIMIT are entered. Whether a signal is created as "Input" or "Output" depends on
the configuration of the signal on the OPC server.
See also

Couplings
2.13.14 Configuring a signal "With readback capability"
Introduction
Signals transferred from SIMIT to an OPC server need not necessarily be accepted and applied
by the OPC server. To make the value that is actually effective in the OPC server available in
the simulation model, configure the signal as "With readback capability".
Requirement
– OPC DA client
– OPC UA client
● Signal is configured as "ReadWriteable" at the OPC server.
● Signal has been crated under "Inputs" in the coupling editor.
Procedure
Follow these steps to configure a signal as "With readback capability":
2. In the properties of the signal, select the "Signal with readback capability" option.
Result
The signal is configured "With readback capability". You can use the input signal in an output
connector to read the value that is actually effective on the OPC server.
● Value that is sent to the OPC server by SIMIT:
● Value that is read back from the OPC server:

Simulation model 3
3.1 Project manager
3.1.1 View and functions of the Project Manager

You open the project manager with a double-click on the tree entry in the
project navigation.
An alternative view of the project is displayed in the work area for project navigation:

Simulation model
3.1 Project manager
The following editing options are available in the project manager:

● Moving charts, components of the project and entire folders with drag-and-drop
● Copying, pasting, deleting and renaming elements using shortcut menu commands
● Opening elements of the project such as charts for editing with a double-click
The following properties of your SIMIT project are displayed in the property view and can also
be edited:
● Project archive
The folder in which you have saved the project. This property cannot be modified here.
● Project version
You can find additional information in section: Versioning (Page 214).
● "Write-protected" property
You can find additional information in section: Write protection (Page 215).
● "Default scale" if you are using the CONTEC library
You can find additional information in section: Scalability (Page 799).
● Eight different time slices (time slice 1 to time slice 8)
For the eight time slices which you can assign to components, controls and couplings in your
project, you can assign any value in milliseconds, provided it is at least 1 ms.
● "Synchronous", "Asynchronous" and "Bus synchronous" operating modes.
You can find more information on this in the section: Operating modes (Page 42)
3.1.2 Versioning
The version number is automatically included in the simulation project. It consists of several
elements:
● License number (e.g. AB12345)
● Time stamp (resolution is approx. 38 seconds)
● Major version (0 - 127)
● Minor version (0 - 999)
If the simulation project was changed, the version number is updated automatically the next
time the simulation is started.
If the simulation project has been changed but has not been started since then, an asterisk
appears after the version number.

Simulation model
3.1 Project manager
The minor version is incremented to a maximum of 999; it then jumps back to 0 and the major
version is incremented by 1. You can also increment the major version manually by clicking the
"..." button. When you increment manually, a message appears that you need to confirm. The
project is then compiled and the new version identifier entered.
Note
If you create a new simulation project or open or retrieve a simulation project created with a
previous version of SIMIT, the version is set to "unversioned". The version is set automatically
once the simulation is started.
Viewing the versioning with the "ProjectVersion" component type

Another way to display the version identifier is with the "ProjectVersion" component type. This
component type can be found in the "Misc." subfolder of the basic library.
You can find additional information on this component type in: ProjectVersion – Project version
(Page 448).
Viewing the versioning with a system variable

When the Automatic Control Interface function module is used, the project version can be
accessed via the _ProjectVersion system variable. This means that the project version can also
be output in the log file: To do so, create a script with following program code:
OPEN-LOG "C:\\Logfile.txt"
PRINTF "project version: %s", "_ProjectVersion"
CLOSE-LOG
3.1.3 Write protection

You can protect parts of the simulation project or the project as a whole from changes. All
elements in a project that can be protected have the additional property "write-protected".
Setting and removing write protection

If you want to use or cancel write protection for a particular folder, this action can be applied to
all subfolders and the objects that they contain. A message then appears that you need to
confirm.
The write protection can also be changed individually for the objects in subfolders; it does not
have to be the same as the folder status.
Proceed as follows to set or cancel write protection for an object:
1. Select the object.
2. Select or deselect the check box for the "Write-protected" property:

Simulation model
3.1 Project manager
The effects of write protection

The effect of write protection varies depending on the objects in a project to which it is applied:
● Chart
Read-only charts cannot be deleted or renamed. They can be opened in the editor but not
modified. Objects in the chart (components, controls and graphics) can be selected and
copied to other charts. Inputs can be controlled while the simulation is running.
● Chart folders
Read-only folders cannot be deleted or renamed. New charts or subfolders cannot be
created in read-only folders, not even by moving or copying charts or folders.
● Couplings
Read-only couplings cannot be deleted or renamed. They can be opened but not changed.
● Snapshots
Read-only snapshots can be loaded when a simulation is running but not deleted or
renamed.
● Snapshot folders
Read-only folders cannot be deleted or renamed. Charts or snapshots cannot be created in
read-only folders, not even by moving or copying snapshots or folders.
If the uppermost snapshot folder in the project tree is read-only, no more snapshots can be
created, because they are automatically stored in the uppermost snapshot folder. The
corresponding symbol in the toolbar is in this case active.
● Trend
Read-only trends cannot be deleted or renamed. They can be opened but not changed.
● Archive
The write-protected archive can be opened but not changed.
● Script
Read-only scripts cannot be deleted or renamed. They can be opened but not changed.
● Script folders
Read-only folders cannot be deleted or renamed. New scripts or subfolders cannot be
created in read-only folders, not even by moving or copying scripts or folders.
● Lists
Read-only lists cannot be deleted or renamed. They can be opened but not modified.
● Project Manager
If the Project manager is write-protected, the project properties cannot be changed.
However, all actions relating to project elements are available in both the Project Manager
and the project tree, subject to their write protection settings.
● Complete project
Read-only projects cannot be renamed and couplings cannot be created.
Please note that write protection for a project does not automatically mean that all parts of
the project are protected from changes. However, you can apply write protection to all
objects in a project that you are write-protecting.
Write-protected objects open with a white header line in the work area to indicate write-
protected status.

Simulation model
3.2 Chart editor
3.2 Chart editor
3.2.1 Creating and editing charts

A chart with predefined or self-defined components and controls is created in the chart editor.
Proceed as follows to create a new chart:
1. In the project navigation, double-click on the tree entry "New chart".
A new chart is created immediately below this tree entry.
2. Give the new chart a name or accept the "Chart" default setting. Other new charts are also
assigned the default name "Chart" plus a consecutive number.
3. Double-click on the new chart.
The chart editor opens in the work area.
4. Drag-and-drop the components and controls for your project to the chart editor.
– You will find the components for various logical and arithmetic functions, for drives,
sensors, connections and communication on the "Components" task card under "Basic
components".
– You will find the objects for entering and displaying values on the "Controls" task card.
The "Display" area contains objects for the dynamic display of values from a current
simulation.
The "Input" area contains objects for specifying values in a current simulation.
5. Create link views of already placed components with <Ctrl+Shift+Drag & Drop>.
You can use the link view to open the operating window of the component with a double-click
during a current simulation. You can find additional information in section The link symbol
(Page 350).
6. If you want to place control elements of component operating windows in the chart:
– Double-click the operating window of the component to open it.
– Select the required control elements.
– Drag the control elements to the chart with drag & drop.
Consult the component help to determine whether or not a component has an operating
window.
7. Connect the I/O of the components and controls to each other and to the controller. The
connection to the controller is over connectors.
Note
The minimum size for a diagram is 20 × 20 pixels.
The figure below shows an example of a component with input and output connectors in the
chart editor.

Simulation model
3.2 Chart editor

① Output connector
② Component
③ Input connector
Connecting I/O
Proceed as follows to connect I/O:
1. Position the mouse pointer over the I/O to be connected.
If the cursor display changes, a connection is possible at this point.
2. Click on the I/O to be connected.
3. Position the mouse pointer over the connection partner.
4. Click the left mouse button again.
The connection is now established and is shown by a connecting line.
Alternatively, you can hold down the mouse button to drag a connection from one I/O to another.
Assigning parameters and values to an I/O

You set parameters for a component or a control in the text boxes at the inputs or in the property
view of the component or control:
● For input directly at the control/component, open the text box with a double-click.
● For input using the property window, click the component/control to open the property
window.
Enter the desired value and confirm the input by pressing the <Enter> key.
Connecting connectors
The input and output signals of the controller are managed in the couplings. These signals are
shown on charts by connectors:
● Output signal by green output connectors
● Input signals by red input connectors
You can drag-and-drop input and output connectors from the coupling to charts. Follow these
steps:
1. Split the work area with the menu command "Window > Split horizontally".
2. Open the coupling and the chart.

Simulation model
3.2 Chart editor
3. Drag the signal of interest from the coupling onto the chart by grabbing the signal at the left
border of the coupling and pressing the <Shift> key.
4. Connect the connector I/O to the I/O of a component.
Note
The coupling configuration must first be saved before a signal can be extracted from it.
You can alternatively also drag the input and output connectors from the "Signals" task card to
a chart. You can find additional information on this in section: "Signals" task card (Page 233).
3.2.2 Visualizing graphics

Graphics enable you to visualize the simulation model and add an explanatory texts. You can
create static and animated graphics and link them together. Graphics are displayed and edited
in the chart editor.
Static graphic
To use a static graphic, drag-and-drop the required graphic element from the "Graphics" task
card to the chart editor. You can find additional information on this in section: "Graphic" task
card (Page 229).
Edit the graphic element with the functions provided in the chart editor toolbar:
The following functions can be called up from the toolbar:

● Text: Set the font, font size and color for text.
● Lines: Select a color for the fill and lines, change the weight and style of lines.
● Graphic element: Flip graphics, mutually align, distribute or group multiple graphics. Group
graphics, move individual or grouped graphics to the foreground or background.
Select multiple graphics with a lasso frame or by pressing <Shift> or <Strg>.
Graphics are arranged on a specified grid. You can remove the grid when editing graphics by
pressing <Alt>.
You can also change the parameters of graphics in the property view.
Changing the size and angle of a static graphic

Simulation model
3.2 Chart editor
When a graphic object is selected, a selection frame is displayed (as shown in the figure above
under (a)). You can change the size and angle of the graphic element using the superimposed
blue squares as follows:
● Move the mouse cursor over a square until its appearance changes as shown in the figure
above under (d). With the mouse button pressed, drag the graphic element to the desired
size.
● You can also rotate the graphic element by any desired angle with the upper blue point.
Move the mouse cursor over the blue point until its appearance changes as shown in the
figure above under (b). With the mouse button pressed, rotate the graphic element to the
required angle.
● You can move the angle of rotation as required (figure above under (c)).
Changing lines
Both endpoints of a line can be moved, whether for a simple straight line or for a line segment
within a polyline. Follow these steps:
1. Select the line.
A small rectangle appears at each end of the line.
2. Move the mouse cursor over an endpoint until its appearance changes as shown in the
figure above.
3. You can now move the endpoint while pressing the left mouse button.
You can follow the same procedure to move the endpoints of curved lines, in other words the
endpoints of elliptical arcs or the points of a Bezier curve:
Animated graphic
Animations can be created for each graphic element. For example, if you draw a rectangle, you
can see the "Animations" property in the properties view of the rectangle.

Simulation model
3.2 Chart editor
You can create a new animation for the selected graphic element by double-clicking "New
animation".
A dialog box opens and you can choose from the following animations:
● Movement
The graphic element moves in the chart.
● Rotation
The graphic element rotates around the axis of rotation.
● Scaling
The graphic element changes size.
● Visibility
The graphic element is shown and hidden.
● Image change
Image files are shown in the graphic element.
● Image sequence
An image sequence of image files is shown in the graphic element.
You may define several animations for a single graphic element and can both move and scale
an object, for example. Image change and image sequence are, however, mutually exclusive.
Example of "Movement" animation
If you select the "Movement" animation, a copy of the graphic element appears offset from the
original object. A red arrow connects the copy to the original element as shown in the figure
above under (a). This red arrow visualizes the movement of the object.
Use the mouse to move the copy to the required target position.
The figure above under (b) shows the movement and target position for a horizontal movement.
In the properties view (see figure below), enter the signal that supplies the values for the
movement.
● To do this, simply drag the signal from the "Signals" task card into the property field.
● Enter the initial value and end value.

Simulation model
3.2 Chart editor
If you then start the simulation and change the signal value, the graphic element is moved
horizontally.
For signal values within the range specified by the initial and end values, movement takes place
along the specified arrow; for signal values outside the defined range, the movement continues
in a straight line beyond the arrow. The arrow thus specifies the direction of the linear
movement; the initial and end values only define the scale of the graphic element in the chart.
Several movement animations for a graphic object are superimposed and thus allow for
movement along curved paths.
For a group of several graphic objects, you can animate either the group as a whole or each
individual graphic object within the group.
3.2.3 Visualizing signals

Signals are displayed and set in the charts with controls. The controls can be arranged on a
chart in any way, and grouped on charts as required. For each chart, you can specify not just
the signals that are displayed but also their arrangement.
To display a signal in the chart editor, drag-and-drop the signal from the "Signals" task card.
You can find additional information in section: "Signals" task card (Page 233)
. You can also drag the signal from the coupling editor.
How the signal is displayed depends on the data type:
Display of binary signals Display of analog signals
The current signal name and a signal isolator are also displayed.
A signal can also be displayed simultaneously with several controls, for example, with a digital
display and an analog display. You can obtain a digital display by dragging the signal from the
coupling or the task card and deleting the signal splitter.
To generate the digital display and the analog display, drag the corresponding control from the
"Controls" task card onto the diagram.
You can find additional information in section: "Controls" task card (Page 226).
Either you enter the signal name manually, or it is generated by dragging and dropping the
signal from the "Signals" task card to the property view.

Simulation model
3.2 Chart editor
3.2.4 Printing charts

The charts and templates can be printed out. The printout has the following characteristics:
● If a folder is selected in the project navigation, all charts in this folder and all subordinate
folders are generated as individual print jobs.
● If a chart does not fit onto the selected paper format, it is scaled automatically.
● The size of the chart is indicated by a black frame in the printout.
● Additional information that is printed out:
– For charts, the chart name including associated folder hierarchy
– For templates, the absolute file name with path

Simulation model
3.3 Task cards
3.3 Task cards
3.3.1 "Components" task card

When SIMIT is started, the basic library, the global library and the project library are read in and
displayed in the "Components" task card. Any library directories in the "User Components" area
that were open when SIMIT was last closed are opened again.
The task card comprises the following areas:

Simulation model
3.3 Task cards
Basic components
This is where you will find the component types of the basic library. The basic library is created
when SIMIT is installed. The component types in the basic library cannot be changed and no
component types can be added. The component types in the basic library can, however, be
saved as copies in the "User components" and "Project components" areas.
You can find additional information on this in section: Basic library (Page 375).
Note
Adding components used in the project to a library
You can insert components used in the project in the following areas with drag & drop:
● User components
● Project components
User components
This is where you will find the component types that you have created or that other people have
made available to you. If you store component types in the "Global components" area, they will
be available in every SIMIT project.
You open any library directory with the command and have access to the component types
stored in it. The command is used to remove a selected directory from this section.
If you create user component types with the CTE, you must save them either in a library
directory or in Global components so that they are available in SIMIT. SIMIT updates the "User
components" area automatically if you save a component type there with the component type
editor.
You can find additional information on creating user components in the "SIMIT – Component
Type Editor" help.
Project components
This is where you find the component types that you can use with the open SIMIT project. If you
archive the project, all component types in this section are archived with the project as the
project library. If the project is then retrieved, these component types are also available again.
You can move component types anywhere within the two "User components" and "Project
components" sections or add them as copies. The component types of the "Basic components"
section can only be added to the other two areas as copies.
Open component types with the "Open" command in the shortcut menu.
Preview
The following information is displayed for a selected component type in the preview for the
"Components" task card:
● Symbol
The basic symbol of the component type.
● Name
The name entered in the component type.

Simulation model
3.3 Task cards
● Version
The version information entered in the component type.
● Library
The library information entered in the component type.
● UID
The unique identification automatically assigned to the component type.
● Simulation tags
The information entered in the component type regarding the number of simulation tags.
3.3.2 "Controls" task card

Controls display and represent signal values.
Display
You will find the following controls for displaying signal values here:
● Binary display (Page 554)
● Analog display (Page 555)

Simulation model
3.3 Task cards
● Digital display (Page 557)

● Bar graph display (Page 559)
Input
You will find the following controls for entering signal values here:
● Pushbutton (Page 560)
● Pushbutton with image (Page 561)
● Switch (Page 562)
● Switch with image (Page 563)
● Step switch (Page 564)
● Step switch with image (Page 565)
● Digital input (Page 567)
● Slider (Page 569)
With the "with image" option, you can add images to the control on the chart. For example,
photographs give you a realistic representation of the controls.
Others
Here you will find the following additional controls:
● 3D Viewer control (Page 573)
● Signal splitter (Page 570)
● Action (Page 572)
The controls can be linked to all signals in the "Signals" task card. You can use controls to
display not just the input and output signals of couplings and components, but also status
values of components, and to set editable parameters while simulation is in progress.
You can find additional information in section: Visualizing signals (Page 222).

Simulation model
3.3 Task cards
3.3.3 "Macros" task card

You can combine repeated functions of a simulation model in a macro component. Using the
macro then provides simple access to this function: You now longer need to copy this function
from a chart and paste it to other charts: you can simply drag the macro component from the
task card in the same way as the component types, configure it and link it to other components
or macro components.
Basic macros
Here you find five macros that can be used as signal generators. They can be configured with
respect to time slice duration and amplitude and yield different signal patterns:
● Random
● Sawtooth
● Sine
● Square
● Triangle

Simulation model
3.3 Task cards
Note
Adding macros used in the project to a library
You can insert macros used in the project in the following areas with drag & drop:
● User macros
● Project macros
User macros
You can create your own macro components here. These macro components are saved in the
work area of SIMIT and are therefore available for all projects. You use the " " symbol to open
the folders that contain the macro components. You use the " " symbol to close a selected
folder and remove it from this area.
Project macros
You can create your own macro components here. These macro components are stored in the
project folder. They are only available while this project is open. All macro components stored
here are archived with the project. Therefore they are available in the project again when you
retrieve the project.
Info
Here the name, version, library, UID and number of simulation tags of a selected macro
component are displayed.
3.3.4 "Graphic" task card

The task card "Graphic" contains graphic elements for use in charts.

Simulation model
3.3 Task cards
Graphic elements
The various graphic elements are listed.
Drag-and-drop the required graphic element to the chart editor, where it is displayed and can
be edited. Symbols from the chart editor are available for editing.
You can find additional information in section: Visualizing a simulation (Page 29).
Info
You will find a brief description of the selected graphic element here.
3.3.5 "Templates" task card

The "Templates" task card is available when the Project manager is open.
Basic templates
This is where the templates are stored that are provided by SIMIT. The "PCS 7 Library"
directory contains the templates for the process tag types (templates) of the PCS 7 Library.
Templates that are adapted to the APL library (Advanced Process Library) of PCS 7 Vx.y can
be found in the template folder "PCS 7 AP Library Vxy".
You can copy basic templates to the sections "User templates" or "Project templates" with drag
& drop and edit them there.
User templates
Save the templates for your SIMIT installation here. These templates are then displayed in the
"Global templates" section. User libraries can be opened with the " " symbol and closed with
the " " symbol.

Simulation model
3.3 Task cards
Project templates
The templates stored here are saved in the project and are archived with the project. After
opening or retrieving a project these templates are available again.
You can drag and drop or copy defaults within "My templates" and "Project templates".
You can find more information in Templates (Page 244).
3.3.6 "Projects" task card

More than one project is open at once in the "Projects" task card. This allows you to put together
a project using several "Standard projects", for example.
The "Projects" task card is available when the project manager is open. The project manager
is also available when simulation is running. Project elements can then also be opened from the
project manager.
Example:
1. Retrieve each of the 2 projects to project folders.
2. Open another project in SIMIT.
3. Open the project manager.
4. Click on the " " symbol in the "Projects" task card.
The "Open project" dialog box opens.
5. Navigate to the project folder of the open project and select the project file *.simit.
The project opens in read-only mode in the "Projects" task card.

Simulation model
3.3 Task cards
You can now drag-and-drop individual elements such as charts or complete folders to the
project manager to create a copy in the current project as shown in the figure below:
You may also open individual charts from a project in the chart editor, copy parts of these charts
and paste them into charts in another project.
Close the projects in the task card by clicking on the " " symbol.

Simulation model
3.3 Task cards
3.3.7 "Signals" task card

In the "Signals" task card, you can search for the signals in the open project and have them
displayed.
You can select the following search criteria:

Source
Enter any text as search criterion here.
Name
Enter any text as search criterion here.
Origin
Select a search criterion from the drop-down list.
Origin
Data type
You can use the "Reset Filter" button to clear the settings and display all the signals of the open
project under "Search Results".
Not all search criteria need to be assigned. One search criterion is enough to display search
results.

Simulation model
3.4 Macro component editor
Info
If you have selected a signal, the origin, signal type and data type are displayed in the "Info"
area.
You can find additional information in the following sections:
● I/O signals for connection on charts (Page 200)
● Addressing a signal symbolically (Page 207)
3.4.1 Macro editor

You can combine repeated functions of a simulation model in a macro component.
You can find additional information in section: "Macros" task card (Page 228).
Proceed as follows to create a new macro:
1. Open the "Macros" task card.
2. Double-click on the " " symbol in the "User macros" area.
A new macro component is created in this area.
3. Assign the new macro component a name or accept the default.
The macro editor opens automatically when you confirm the default or changed name with
the Enter key.
The only difference between a macro chart and other charts is the two sheet bars on the left and
right:

Simulation model

① Sheet bar for inputs
② Sheet bar for outputs
The inputs and outputs of the macro are assigned to the cells in the sheet bars:
● Inputs in the left sheet bar
● Outputs in the right sheet bar
As with charts, you can use all components in the library and static graphics to model certain
responses in the macro component. Of the connector components, you may only use the global
and the topological connector.
You can find additional information in section: Topological connectors of macro components
(Page 238).
Controls and animations are not available in macro components. Macro components cannot be
hierarchically structured, which means you cannot insert any macro components into a macro
chart.
If you have created a chart already and want to use it to create a macro component, you can
copy the relevant parts of the chart and paste them to a macro chart. Only usable components
are pasted to the macro chart.

Simulation model
Proceed as follows to add I/O to the macro component:

1. Double-click on a cell in the sheet bar.
The cell opens for entering a name, as shown in the figure below under ①.
2. Enter a name.
3. Confirm your entry with the Return key.
4. Connect the macro I/O to the I/O of a component, for example by dragging the component
I/O to the macro I/O, as shown in the figure below under ②.
The connection is then shown by a connecting line (③).
5. Follow this procedure for all I/O.

6. Save and close the macro chart.
Alternatively, you can also generate a macro component I/O by clicking on the connection at
the component I/O with the mouse to open it, dragging it to the required cell in the sheet bar and
closing it with another click. The name of the component connector is used as the default in the
sidebar.
Note
Every connector must have a unique name. The name must contain only letters, digits and the
underscore character, and must start with a letter. The name is case sensitive.
Macro components containing errors are marked with the " " symbol.
Macro components with errors can be opened and edited in the editor, but you cannot use them
in charts. You can find an explanation of the errors on the "Diagnostics" tab of the editor
property view.

Simulation model
3.4.2 Inserting dividing lines between macro component I/Os

The I/Os of macro components are set one after the other in sheet bars. Insert dividing lines to
separate the I/Os visually.
Follow these steps:
1. Open a macro component in the macro editor.
2. In one of the two sheet bars, select the shortcut menu command "Set dividing line" between
two I/Os:
The dividing line is now shown in the cell as a line:
Display in the symbol of the macro component

The I/Os are now also offset from one another in the macro component symbol. This is
represented by a blue rectangle. In the figure below, you can see that the outputs have also
been offset from one another using a dividing line:
Deleting dividing lines

Dividing lines can be deleted using the corresponding command in the shortcut menu of the cell.

Simulation model
3.4.3 Topological connectors of macro components

Components from the FLOWNET and CONTEC libraries can be used in macro components.
Open topological I/Os from these components are mapped to topological I/Os in the sheet bars
of the macro component.
If macro components of this type are used in charts, the topological I/Os of the macro
component can be connected to topological I/Os of other components or other macro
components. The topological structures defined in the macro components are in this case
merely substructures of the overall topological structure of a flow or transport network.
3.4.4 Default settings for macro component inputs

Default settings can be applied to individual inputs of macro components. Follow these steps:
1. Select the "Input" entry in the property view of the macro component editor.
2. Enter the required values in the "Value/signal" column.

Simulation model
3.4.5 Defining parameters of macro components

You can specify parameters for macro components. The only parameters available are,
however, those of the components used within the macro component.
Component parameters are displayed with the " " symbol in the property view of the macro
component.
Editing parameters
● Click on the " " symbol to set a parameter as a parameter of the macro component. This
moves the parameter from the component level to the macro component level.
The symbol changes to " ".
● In the text box to the left of the " " symbol, enter a name for the parameter (example in the
screenshot above: "SpeedSlow").
The parameter is then displayed in the macro component with this name.
● In the text box below the "Value" column, enter a suitable default setting (example in the
screenshot above: "30.0").
When the macro component is used in a chart, the parameters and their default settings are
now shown in the property view.
3.4.6 Properties of macro components

The following properties are available in the property view of the macro component editor:
● Name
The name of a macro component corresponds to the file name under which a macro
component is saved in the file system (work area or any directory in the file system). The
macro component is displayed with this name in the "Macros" task card.
Note
If macro components have been imported from an earlier SIMIT version, the file name may
initially differ from the macro name.
● Short name
The short name is displayed in the header in the instance of a macro component.
● Version
The version of a macro component can be freely assigned. It is displayed in the "Info"
section on the "Macros" task card and in the tooltip for the macro component in the chart.
● Library family
The library family of a macro component can be freely assigned. It is displayed in the "Info"
section on the "Macros" task card and in the tooltip for the macro component in the chart.

Simulation model
● Password
Macro components can be password protected. If a macro component is password
protected, it can be used on charts but cannot be opened without entering the correct
password. The last password entered to open password protected macros is saved until the
project is closed.
Note
Keep the passwords for your macro components in a safe place, otherwise you will not be
able to open even your own password-protected macro components.
● Width
The width of the symbol.
● Height
The height of the symbol.
3.4.7 Find and Replace in macro components

Select the "Find & replace" command in the shortcut menu of the macro component to replace
components within a macro component.
The commands opens the "Find & replace" editor with a preset focus on the macro component.
3.4.8 Using macro components

Like other components, macro components can be inserted in a chart with drag-and-drop. It is
displayed on the chart as a rectangle with a double frame. The name of the macro component
is displayed in the symbol header. The inputs and outputs are arranged on the left and right
hand sides of the component in the sequence specified in the macro chart.
You can use a macro component on a chart like any other component. It can be connected with
components and controls as well as with other macro components.
By double-clicking the macro component in the diagram, you open the macro chart in read-only
mode, which means you cannot make any changes to the macro chart.

Simulation model
3.5 Migrating projects from previous versions of SIMIT

Projects from SIMIT V7.x, SIMIT V8.x and SIMIT V9.x can be opened and retrieved unchanged
in SIMIT V10.0.
Note
Retrieving or opening a SIMIT V7, SIMIT V8 or SIMIT V9 project in SIMIT V10.0 may take a very
long time the first time it is done.
Projects from older SIMIT versions cannot be used with SIMIT V10.0. Such projects must first
be opened with a SIMIT V8 version and migrated.

Simulation model

Automatic model creation 4
SIMIT provides a range of automatic mechanisms for generating and editing charts. The
automation is based on files that have a format that can be read by SIMIT. The files contain the
information needed to generate or modify charts. This information is automatically converted
into charts when the corresponding file is imported.
The following automatisms are available:
● Templates
Templates are patterns for charts in which placeholders are defined for parameters,
defaults, etc. When a table is imported in which values are set for the placeholders, the
charts are automatically generated from the templates. IEA files exported from PCS 7, CMT
files and Excel tables are based on templates.
You can find additional information on this in section: Templates (Page 244).
● Table import
Import of files in table format. The tables contain the replacements for the placeholders.
You can find additional information on this in section: Table import (Page 252).
● IEA import
Import of an IEA file from PCS 7. A corresponding chart is generated for each CFC based
on a model or process tag type.
You can find additional information on this in section: IEA import (Page 256).
● CMT import
Importing control module types from PCS 7.
You can find additional information on this in section: CMT import (Page 258).
● Automated import
Import of charts from a ZIP archive or an XML file.
You can find additional information on this in section: Automated import (Page 262).
● Create device level
Instead of an external file, this automatism uses information available in the parameters of
the components used in the simulation model. This allows you to instantiate templates
automatically for certain types of component, for example to create the right control logic
simulation for process technology devices.
You can find additional information on this in section: Generating the simulation of drives
and sensors (Page 802).
● Bulk processing of parameters
Export and import of parameters and input defaults from and to existing charts.
You can find additional information on this in section: Exporting data (Page 271).
The automatic mechanisms are listed under the "Automatic model creation" menu item. If they
are accessed from there, the new charts are created at the top project level or, if you specify a
folder hierarchy, relative to the "Charts" system folder.
If the automatic mechanisms are called from the shortcut menu of a chart subfolder, all new
charts are created relative to this selected folder. Since the parameter import does not create
new charts, it is not included in the shortcut menu.

4.1 Templates
See also
Structure of the control file "procedure.cfg" for import from ZIP file (Page 270)
4.1 Templates
Templates prepare frequently recurring functions of a simulation model, for example parts of a
chart, in such as way that they can be used as a template for charts when you create new
projects. You can use all of the same elements in templates that you use in charts:
● Components
● Macro components
● Controls
● Graphics
In templates, unlike in charts, placeholders are used for various elements in the components in
the template. When a template is instantiated, a chart is generated in which the placeholders
are replaced with values, signal names, etc. You have the following options to instantiate
templates:
● Drag-and-drop the template to the project
● Importing files
● Using the simulation model
Proceed as follows to create templates:
1. Open the "Templates" task card in the project manager.
2. Open the template dialog to create a new template by double-clicking on " ".
3. Open a template for editing by double-clicking on the template in the task card.
4. Edit the template with the components, controls, macro components, graphics, templates
and projects available to you in the template editor resources.

4.1 Templates
Templates in the "Basic templates" area can only be opened for viewing in the template editor;
they cannot be edited. To indicate this the template is opened in the editor with a white title bar.
If you wish to edit a basic template, copy it to the "User templates" area.
The difference between templates and charts is that placeholders are used in templates.
Example:
1. Create a new plant template in the "Global templates" area.
2. Open the sample project "Elevator" in the "Projects" task card.
3. Open the "Main drive" chart.
4. Now copy the entire content of this chart into the open template.
In the properties of the PLCSIM V0 output connector, the input fields for both source
(coupling) and signal name now also contain the " " symbol for setting placeholders.
5. Click on the two symbols to switch the signal to placeholders.

4.1 Templates
6. Enter "Coupling" and "Slow" as the placeholders.
7. Now set corresponding placeholders for the other input and output signals and for the global
connector.
Make sure that you always use the same placeholder ("Coupling") for the input and output
signals.
The placeholder symbol allows you to define as placeholders: all inputs and parameters of
components and macro components, signals in controls and animations, and component
names.
For some controls you can also define the type, default setting and scaling as placeholders. The
table below shows which properties can be used as placeholders for controls.
Table 4-1 Placeholders for controls
Control Name Time slice Typ Default setting Scaling Connec‐ Objective
e tor
Button X X X
Button with image X X X
Switch X X X X
Switch with image X X X X
Step switch X X X
Step switch with im‐ X X X
age
Digital input X X X
Slider X X X X X
Bar graph display X X X X
Binary display X X X
Analog display X X X
Digital display X X X
Action X X
In some cases the type and default setting of controls take the form of language-dependent lists
in the user interface. If you define these properties as placeholders, you must specify the
position of the corresponding term in the list when making the replacement.
Table 4-2 Parameter value for the NC/NO contact type
Type Value
NC contact 0
NO contact 1

4.1 Templates
Table 4-3 Parameter value for the Off/On default setting
Default setting Value

Off 0
On 1
4.1.1 Find and replace in templates

Select the "Find & replace" command in the shortcut menu of the template to replace
components within a template.
The commands opens the "Find & replace" editor with a preset focus on the template.
4.1.2 Instantiating templates by entering replacements

Templates are instantiated by replacing placeholders with appropriate values. Components
that have a name not defined as a placeholder, receive the name they have obtained on the
template, possibly supplemented by a sequential number, which makes the component name
unique.
In the Project Manager, you may instantiate a template by dragging and dropping it from the
task card into a project folder. Open the project manager and select the Templates task card.
If you now drag the template that was created above, a dialog appears as shown in the figure
below. A two-column list is displayed, which shows all of the placeholders that are contained in
this template. Please enter the replacement for each placeholder in the right column.
If the "Remove elements with empty replacement" option is checked, all elements are removed
where a placeholder does not have a replacement in the table. Global connectors and I/O
connectors, for example, are deleted if no signal is specified. By way of example, this is the
case for the Direction placeholder in the figure below. You may thus create your templates in
such a way that they cover several use cases, and may then instantiate the template for a
specific use case by not replacing the placeholders that apply to the other use cases.

4.1 Templates
After confirming the dialog you will see a new chart with the same name as the template in the
Project Manager. When you open the chart, you will see the instantiated simulation. It is
identical to the simulation of the main drive, except for the missing output signal Direction. The
output connector was not instantiated because it lacked a replacement. If you had deselected
"Remove elements with empty replacements" in the instantiation dialog, a connector with a
signal value i.e. an empty connector would have been generated in the instance.
4.1.3 Creating tables from a template

If you want to create a table for a template so that this template can then be instantiated multiple
times, SIMIT allows you to create a table which already contains a title row matching the
template. Select the "Export to Excel" command from the shortcut menu of the template.

4.1 Templates
The next steps will depend on whether or not Microsoft Excel is installed on your computer.
● Microsoft Excel installed
A new workbook is directly opened in Excel, with the entries needed for the selected
template already entered in the top row on the first sheet. Complete the table and save it in
a location of your choice for use in table import.
● Microsoft Excel not installed
An Excel file in *.xlsx format is created, with the entries needed for the selected template
already entered in the top row on the first sheet. Save this file in a location of your choice for
editing in Excel later – if necessary on another computer.
The first three columns of the generated tables contain the terms HIERARCHY, TEMPLATE
and CHART. The subsequent columns contain the names of the placeholders used in the
template. The name of the template is already entered in the second row, but you must enter
all other information yourself.
Note
Please note that when this table is imported, the profile is set to "Placeholders defined in 1st
row".
4.1.4 Defining a folder hierarchy for templates

You can specify the folder in which to search for a template in your tables. For the TEMPLATE
placeholder, enter the complete folder hierarchy as shown in the "Templates" task card. Use
the backslash '\' as the separator. To refer to a template that is not located in a subfolder, enter
the name of the template preceded by a backslash.
If the template name is entered without separators, all folders and subfolders are searched for
a template of this name as before. In this case, make sure that there are not two templates with
the same name in different subfolders. The three panes of the "Templates" task card are
searched in the following order:
1. Project templates
2. User templates
3. Basic templates

4.1 Templates
4.1.5 Addressing a module via the I/O address

The identity of a module on PROFIBUS or PROFINET is determined by the slave or device
number and the slot number. Accordingly, both values must be entered in the Unit connector
if it is used to identify a device, such as a balance of type SIWAREX-U.
If such devices are used on templates, this information is not always available. Instead the
module start address may be known. Therefore it is now permissible to identify a module on
templates by its start address, for example, "IW512" or "AW512" instead of "[1][4][4]".
When the simulation is started it is necessary to know the address with the slave or device
number and the slot number. Therefore when a template is instantiated, a start address is
automatically converted to the address with the slave or device number and slot number. If
there is no coupling with the appropriate address when the template is instantiated, you can
also run the automatic conversion later with the command "Options > Assign coupling signals
(Page 925)".
4.1.6 Indirect addressing

In the input and output connectors, an additional item of information can be included on
templates, which allows access to signals located relative to a known address. This expression
has the form [$+n:RW], where:
● n : is the offset to be added in bytes
● R : is the input or output identifier E, I, A or Q
● W : is the data width, B, W or D
So, for example, if the address of a control word EW560 is known, the associated status word
AW560 can be specified as follows:
IW560[$+0:QW]
Or, if the control word EW560 has the symbolic name STW1 in the coupling, it can also be
specified in the form STW1[$+0:QW]
If the coupling already exists when the templates are instantiated, an attempt is made to replace
the expression with the corresponding signal. If not, this expression is retained even after the
signal to which it relates is replaced. For example, if the control word STW1 exists in a PLCSIM
coupling with its address IW560 but no associated status word, then the connector
is replaced as follows:

4.2 Instantiation of templates from files or the simulation model
However, you can also start complete replacement subsequently at any time by calling the
function "Options > Assign coupling signals (Page 925)".
Note
Indirect addressing is only supported by the virtual controller and by the following couplings:
PROFIBUS DP, PROFINET IO, PRODAVE and PLCSIM.
4.1.7 Opening basic templates in the editor

Templates in the "Basic templates" pane can now be opened straight from the shortcut menu
in the template editor. However, basic templates opened in this way can only be viewed, not
edited. To indicate this the template is opened in the editor with a white title bar.
To edit a basic template, copy it to the "User templates" pane.
4.2.1 Instantiating templates from files
Requirement
● SIMIT project is open.

Procedure
To instantiate the templates from files, follow these steps:
1. Select "Automatic model creation > Instantiate templates".
The "Instantiate templates" dialog box opens.
2. Select the "Import file" option.
3. Enter the storage location of the import file.
4. To import tables, follow these steps:
– To instantiate a template according to the table multiple times in a chart, select the
grouping to be made in the chart: horizontal or vertical.
– To line up the instances horizontally, enter the maximum width of the chart.
– To line up the instances vertically, enter the maximum height of the chart.
5. To import IEA files, follow these steps:
– Provide a name for the coupling to be used for I/O signals.
– Enter a template that matches the import file.
– Select the separator.
6. To import CMT files, follow these steps:
– Provide a name for the coupling to be used for I/O signals.
– Specify the folder in which the search for the SIMIT templates referenced in the CMT file
is to take place.
7. If necessary, deactivate individual chart folders, charts or replacements under "Preview>>".
8. To start the import, click the "Import" button.
Result
The templates were imported and instantiated from a file. The generated charts are stored in
the "Charts" folder.
See also
Table import (Page 252)
IEA import (Page 256)
CMT import (Page 258)
"Instantiate templates" dialog box (Page 938)
4.2.2 Table import

Templates can be instantiated using tables. The placeholders are always in the first row in
these tables. These other rows contain the replacements for the placeholders and additional
information about the templates to be used and the instances to be created.

In all tables, each row defines the instantiation of one template.

The following table formats are supported:
● *.xls
Microsoft Excel format Office 97 – 2003. Only the first sheet of the workbook is taken into
account. This file format is only available if Microsoft Excel is installed on your computer.
● *.xlsx
Microsoft Excel format. Only the first sheet of the workbook is taken into account. This file
format is available even if Microsoft Excel is not installed on your computer.
● *.txt
Tab-separated list in text format
Note
If you still want to use files in *.csv format from projects in earlier versions of SIMIT, you must
convert them to this tab-separated *.txt format or to the *.xls or *.xlsx format.
Note
When importing a file in *.xls or *.xlsx format that is still open in Excel, it is the last saved version
of this file that is imported and not the currently open version.
Importing to SIMIT
The following options are available to perform a table import into SIMIT:
● In the portal view, select "Automatic model creation" > "Instantiate templates".
● From the Project view, select the menu command "Automatic model creation > Instantiate
templates".
● Select "Automatic model creation" > "Instantiate templates" from the shortcut menu of a
chart folder.
Placeholders in the first row

The meaning of the column is specified with column headers.
The first three columns have a pre-defined meaning and their headings are also pre-defined:
● Column A (HIERARCHY) defines the folder hierarchy to be created in the project.
● Column B (TEMPLATE) defines the template to be used.
● Column C (CHART) defines the name of the chart to be instantiated.

Starting with column D, the table may contain any number of additional columns with
replacements for the placeholders. The placeholder is given in the header of each column. In
this table profile, there are no restrictions in the number of placeholders.
Note
You specify templates (TEMPLATE) with the full folder hierarchy. Use the backslash '\' as the
separator. To refer to a template that is not located in any subfolder, enter the name of the
template preceded by a backslash.
If the template name is entered without separators, all folders and subfolders are searched for
a template with this name. Therefore, it is not permitted for two templates with the same name
to exist in different subfolders. The three panes of the "Templates" task card are searched in the
following order:
1. Project templates
2. User templates
3. Basic templates
Example of instantiation using a table

You will find an example of a table on the SIMIT software CD in the folder "_Examples\SMD".
To instantiate the templates according to the table, select the menu command "Automatic
model creation > Instantiate templates". The "Instantiate templates" dialog box opens.
Select the file "Sample.txt" as the table. To instantiate a template according to the table multiple
times in a chart, you must specify how they are to be grouped and also how much space is
available on the chart. To line up the instances horizontally, enter the maximum width of the
chart. To line up the instances vertically, enter the maximum height of the chart.
If you now use the "Preview>>" button to open the preview, you will see the folder hierarchy and
charts that are to be instantiated on the left-hand side of the preview. For each chart, you can
see and verify the list of replacements according to the table in the right half of the preview
before the charts are actually instantiated. To open the list, select the corresponding chart. You
can now decide whether to accept all information from the table or whether to deselect certain
replacements.

If a chart is deselected in the left tree view, it is not instantiated. By selecting a folder, you can
also select or deselect multiple charts within it. You can tell from the check box whether a chart
or folder is selected ( ) or deselected ( ) or whether at least one check box in one of the
subfolders is deselected ( ).
In the right table, you can also select and deselect individual replacements. If you deselect a
replacement, it is as if the replacement were not in the table at all.

4.2.3 IEA import

If you use PCS 7 and work with process tag types or models, create a suitable chart in SIMIT
for any CFC that is based on a process tag type or a model.
There are several templates supplied with SIMIT that match the process tag types from the
PCS 7 libraries. You can find suitable templates in the directories of the basic templates:
● "PCS 7 Library" contains templates compatible with the PCS 7 standard library.
● "PCS 7 AP Library V71" contains templates compatible with the PCS 7 V7.1 AP Library.
● "PCS 7 AP Library V80" contains templates suitable for the PCS 7 V8.0 AP library.
If you have used one of the standard templates from a PCS 7 library in your project, you can use
these templates and create a matching simulation. The procedure is explained below using the
example of a motor drive (MOTOR). You will find two sample IEA files from a PCS 7 project on
the SIMIT software CD in the "_Samples\SMD" folder.
Importing to SIMIT
The following options are available to perform an IEA import into SIMIT:
templates".
chart folder.
Provide a name for the coupling to be used for I/O signals.
In the preview, you will see that a chart is instantiated for each CFC. This chart has the same
name as the CFC and is placed in a folder hierarchy that is identical to the folder hierarchy of
the PCS 7 project. You can decide whether to copy all information from the IEA file or deselect
specific replacements.

The following figure shows the template under (a) and the resulting instance under (b).

Now import the second sample file "VALVE00_Exp.IEA" for the VALVE template. This creates
additional charts in the SIMIT project in the folder hierarchy that was created during the first
import.
If you are using modified or user process tag types in your PCS 7 project, you can of course also
use these IEA files with corresponding SIMIT templates. Just create matching templates, in
"User templates", for example, or copy suitable basic templates and modify the copies.
4.2.4 CMT import

CMT stands for "Control Module Type" in PCS 7. Control module types are used to create CFC
templates and provide them with variable components. These CFC templates are then copied
and individualized by instantiation. PCS 7 creates an exportable XML file for this, which
includes all control module types as well as all instances in the project, their variable
replacements and versions.
Export from PCS 7

This functionality is used in PCS 7 for bulk data engineering or for exchanging configuration
information with other configuration tools, such as COMOS.
Note
The "XML Transfer" function required for PCS 7 is not included in the product package of SIMIT
but can be obtained through SIOS (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/
63481413):
1. Select category "PCS 7 Software Updates".
2. Select PCS 7 version
3. "Engineering System Collection" download Vx.y.
The "Engineering System Collection" contains several components, which you select via
the installation wizard. You only need the "XML Transfer" component for exclusive use with
SIMIT.
After the installation, the export can be performed directly from the PCS 7 project in the
SIMATIC Manager (from the technological view) using the shortcut menu command "Export
XML".
The exported XML file can now be imported into SIMIT to generate and test the instantiated
control module types in the simulation.

Importing to SIMIT
The following options are available to perform a CMT import into SIMIT:
templates".
chart folder.
After the templates are instantiated, the charts can no longer be identified as "template
instances", unlike in PCS 7. Therefore, it is not possible to subsequently switch versions or
retain customizations. Synchronization is not possible.
If the project changes in PCS 7, the XML file must be exported again and imported once more
into SIMIT. In this import, all the existing instances can be replaced with new charts. Individual
customizations that were made after the last CMT import to the charts already instantiated are
lost in the process.
Template creation
The following options are available in the Template Editor to define variables and placeholders
in the templates:
● A variable can be assigned to the value of a property field. For this purpose, the "{$}" symbol
to the right of it must be enabled. {$} means that the complete field content is interpreted as
a variable name.
● If more than one variable or fixed and variable components are to be combined, you can also
enter a variable name in the respective field using the notation {$ variable name}.
This enables you to specify replacements from the XML file in the instance of a template.
Versions and multiple connections in CMTs

The mapping of versions of a CMT is realized in SIMIT as follows:
● The "Remove elements with empty replacements" check box is selected.
● The variable "CMT_Name_x" is only in the list of replacements available when this variant
is present in the CMT.
This applies to all variables and parameters derived from this CMT.
Note
The "x" in "CMT_Name_x" can be seen as the CMT name and is "I" or "PV" in the figure
below.

If a component is to be integrated in the simulation model in SIMIT with a dependency to an

optional CMT in PCS 7, the name of the component, for example, must refer to this variable.
If the CMT is not in the XML file, its variables, parameters and signals are also absent and all
components that contain one of these replacements are automatically omitted in SIMIT as well.
This makes it possible to reflect the version concept of the CMTs in SIMIT.
Multiple interconnections to CMTs in PCS 7 can be implemented in SIMIT with connectors.
Because these versions can be used only as an alternative in PCS 7, the mechanism of the
versions described above can be used here in SIMIT to interconnect multiple outputs from
components in the template to one input.

These components are assigned to the versions and their outputs are linked to the input of
another component with connectors. If one of the two CMTs is now omitted in the instance, the
corresponding component is also omitted in SIMIT and the connector remains unconnected on
a chart. Such connectors do not exist for SIMIT which means there is no double assignment that
would otherwise lead to a consistency error.
4.2.5 Instantiating templates from the simulation model
Introduction
Instantiation from the simulation model uses parameters of the components used in the
simulation model. Templates can be instantiated automatically for certain types of components,
for example, to create appropriate simulation of the control logic for process engineering
devices.
Requirement
● The components in the project must contain the "TEMPLATE" and "HIERARCHY"
parameters.
Procedure
To instantiate the templates from the simulation model, follow these steps:
1. Select "Automatic model creation > Instantiate templates".
2. Select the "Simulation model" option.
3. Provide a name for the coupling to be used for I/O signals.
4. Specify the template folder in which the search for the referenced SIMIT templates is to take
place.
5. To start the import, click the "Import" button.
Result
The templates were instantiated.
See also
"Instantiate templates" dialog box (Page 938)

4.3 Automated import
4.3.1 Import charts from ZIP or XML files
Introduction
The "Automated import" function supports the import of charts from the following sources:
● ZIP
Imports charts with referenced components, even if the components are not contained in the
SIMIT task card.
Applications such as COMOS can generate these import files. An import file is a ZIP archive.
● XML
Imports charts from an XML file. During import, existing templates for charts can be
instantiated and custom charts can be created without the need for templates.
The XML file contains a description of charts based on an XML syntax.
Note
In order to validate the XML file for correct syntax, run it through a validation with appropriate
tools before importing.
There are three ways to carry out an automated import to SIMIT:

● In the portal view, select "Automatic modelling > Automated import".
● In the Project view, select the menu command "Automatic modelling > Automated import".
● In the shortcut menu of a chart folder, select "Automatic modelling > Automated import".
Requirement
● A file suitable for automated import is available.
Procedure
Follow these steps to import charts from ZIP or XML files:
1. Start automated import using one of the above-mentioned commands.
The "Automated import" dialog opens.
2. To import charts from a ZIP file:
– Select "*.ZIP" as the file format.
– Select the required file.

3. To import charts from an XML file:

– Select "*.XML" as the file format.
– Select the required file.
The "Generic Import" dialog opens.
– Select the required data.
4. Click "Import".
Result
The data is imported.
See also
Syntax of the XML file (Page 263)
Examples for XML files (Page 268)
Structure of the control file "procedure.cfg" for import from ZIP file (Page 270)
4.3.2 Syntax of the XML file

The file for import must be provided as a text file in XML format and must correspond to the
following Document Type Definition:
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="ISO-8859-1" standalone="yes"?>
<!DOCTYPE GENERIC [
<!ELEMENT GENERIC (FOLDER | DIAGRAM | TEMPLATE | BUILDUP)*>
<!ATTLIST GENERIC
VERSION CDATA #REQUIRED>
<!ELEMENT FOLDER (FOLDER | DIAGRAM | TEMPLATE | BUILDUP)*>
<!ATTLIST FOLDER
NAME CDATA #REQUIRED>
<!ELEMENT BUILDUP (TEMPLATE+)>
<!ATTLIST BUILDUP
INSTANCE CDATA #REQUIRED
ALIGNMENT (HOR|VER) "HOR"
WIDTH CDATA #IMPLIED
HEIGHT CDATA #IMPLIED>
<!ELEMENT TEMPLATE (SUBST*)>
<!ATTLIST TEMPLATE
NAME CDATA #REQUIRED
INSTANCE CDATA #IMPLIED>
<!ELEMENT SUBST EMPTY>
<!ATTLIST SUBST
VALUE CDATA #REQUIRED>
<!ELEMENT DIAGRAM (COMP)*>
<!ATTLIST DIAGRAM

WIDTH CDATA #IMPLIED

HEIGHT CDATA #IMPLIED>
<!ELEMENT COMP (POS+, TRANSFORM?, PROP*, DEFAULT*, PORT*)>
<!ATTLIST COMP
UID CDATA #REQUIRED
REF CDATA #IMPLIED
CYCLE CDATA #IMPLIED>
<!ELEMENT TRANSFORM EMPTY>
<!ATTLIST TRANSFORM
SCALEX CDATA #IMPLIED
SCALEY CDATA #IMPLIED
ROTATION CDATA #IMPLIED>
<!ELEMENT POS EMPTY>
<!ATTLIST POS
X CDATA #REQUIRED
Y CDATA #REQUIRED>
<!ELEMENT PROP EMPTY>
<!ATTLIST PROP
<!ELEMENT PORT (POS?, CONNECTION*)>
<!ATTLIST PORT
<!ELEMENT DEFAULT EMPTY>
<!ATTLIST DEFAULT
<!ELEMENT CONNECTION EMPTY>
<!ATTLIST CONNECTION
TYPE (LINE|IMPLICIT) "LINE"
SOURCE CDATA #REQUIRED
]>
This definition can be found in the "Generic.dtd" file in the "_Samples/XML" folder on your
SIMIT installation CD.
A valid XML file starts with the element GENERIC. The version number 8.0 should be entered
as the attribute for this element.
Element Attribute Description

GENERIC Folder
VERSION In the document form described here, "8.0" must be entered as
the version.
The generic import interface can also be used to create an arbitrarily nested folder hierarchy.
The specified folder hierarchy in the import file is relative to the folder whose shortcut menu you
have selected to perform the import. This is the "Charts" system folder when the "Automatic

model creation" menu is used. If the import file contains no FOLDER elements, the templates
are created directly in the selected folder.

FOLDER Generic import interface
NAME The name of a folder to be created. A deeper folder hierarchy
can be achieved by nesting several FOLDER tags.
You can choose to instantiate individual templates (TEMPLATE) or combine multiple templates
in a chart (BUILDUP). In the template, enter the name of the template (NAME) and the name
of the chart to be created (INSTANCE) as attributes.

TEMPLATE Template
NAME Template name
INSTANCE Name of the chart to be created
If you want to combine multiple templates to create a chart, you must enclose the template
elements in a BUILDUP element. In this case, the name of the chart to be created should be
specified in the BUILDUP element rather than in each individual template element:

BUILDUP Grouped templates
INSTANCE Name of the chart to be created
ALIGNMENT HOR: Horizontal alignment (side by side)
VER: Vertical alignment (one below the other)
WIDTH Maximum width of the chart in pixels (for horizontal alignment)
HEIGHT Maximum height of the chart in pixels (for vertical alignment)
Any number of replacements for placeholders can be specified within a template element using
the SUBST element.

SUBST Substitution
NAME Name of the placeholder
VALUE Value to be replaced
Charts can also be created without using templates. To do this, use the DIAGRAM element:

DIAGRAM Chart
NAME Name of the chart to be created
WIDTH Width of the chart to be created in pixels
HEIGHT Height of the chart to be created in pixels
Components on a chart are described with the COMP element:

COMP Component
UID The unique identifier of the component type


NAME The instance name of the component
REF A freely selectable reference name for the component
CYCLE The time slice to which this component is to be assigned (1 to 8).
The type of component is identified by the unique UID. For the component type to be
instantiated, it must be in a library, which means it must be available in the "Components" task
card.
You also need to specify the name (NAME) to be assigned to the component on the chart. If this
name already exists when it is imported into the project, SIMIT automatically adds a
consecutive number to make the name unique.
You only need to specify a reference name (REF) if the name of the component is not unique
within the import file and a connection to the component is to be specified. This can happen with
connectors, for example, which occur repeatedly with the same name.
The time slice to which this component is to be assigned can be specified with the CYCLE
element. If this attribute is not specified, a time slice value of 2 is entered.
Links to an existing component are described with the LINK element:

LINK Component
UID The unique identifier of the component type
NAME The instance name of the component
The position of a component or a link is specified by the POS element and its X and Y attributes.
The top left corner of the component is specified. The zero point of the chart is in the top left
corner of the chart. Positions must be positive and located within the dimensions of the chart:

POS Position
X The X position of the component in pixels
Y The Y position of the component in pixels
A component can also be scaled and rotated with the TRANSFORM element:

TRANSFORM Transformation (scaling, rotation)
SCALEX Scaling in X direction (Default: 1).
SCALEY Scaling in Y direction (Default: 1).
ROTATION Angle of rotation in degrees by which the component is to be
rotated counterclockwise. The center of rotation is the geometric
center of the component.

The parameters or a component or a link can be specified with the PROP element and its
NAME and VALUE attributes:

PROP Parameter
NAME Parameter name
VALUE Parameter value
Component connectors can be joined together. In some cases this takes place automatically if
they are superimposed on the chart and have the same connection type. In other cases the
connection has to be specified in the import file. Start by specifying the name of the I/O with the
PORT element:

PORT Component connector
NAME Connector name
The connection is then described by the CONNECTION element:

CONNECTION Connection
TYPE LINE: Connection using signal line
IMPLICIT: Implicit connection
SOURCE The name of the component with which the connection is to be
established.
If the component has the REF attribute, its value must be used
here.
NAME The name of the connector with which the connection is to be
established.
The connection of directional signals should always be defined starting from the input, as the
input can only be connected to exactly one output of another component. Therefore the
connector to be specified in the connection definition is always the output of a component. As
topological connections are directionless, with this type of connection it makes no difference
which of the two connectors to be connected is specified as the connector in the connection
definition.
The SOURCE attribute contains the name of the component or coupling to be connected. The
NAME attribute contains the name of the I/O or signal. For connections of the type IMPLICIT,
the name of the component must be specified in the SOURCE attribute. Reference names
(REF) are not permitted for implicit connections in this case.
I/O default settings are specified with the DEFAULT element and its NAME and VALUE
attributes.

DEFAULT Default
NAME Connector name
VALUE Default
If no default settings are specified, the values defined in the component type apply for the
connectors.

In accordance with the usual XML conventions, comments are also permitted in the import file:

See also
Import charts from ZIP or XML files (Page 262)
4.3.3 Examples for XML files
4.3.3.1 Example of a single template instantiation

This example can be found in the "_Samples/XML" directory on the SIMIT installation CD.
XML file:
<GENERIC VERSION="7.1">
<TEMPLATE NAME="MOTOR" INSTANCE="Motor1">
<SUBST NAME="GATEWAY" VALUE="PLCSIM"/>
<SUBST NAME="Plan_ChName" VALUE="Motor1"/>
<SUBST NAME="feedback run_SymbolName" VALUE="fbRunM1"/>
<SUBST NAME="monitoring time on_Value" VALUE="2.5"/>
<SUBST NAME="output_SymbolName" VALUE="runM1"/>
</TEMPLATE>
</GENERIC>
Chart:
4.3.3.2 Example of a grouped template instantiation

XML file:
<BUILDUP INSTANCE="Motor1" DIR="VER" HEIGHT="1500">
<TEMPLATE NAME="MOTOR">
</TEMPLATE>
<TEMPLATE NAME="MOTOR">


</TEMPLATE>
</BUILDUP>
</GENERIC>
Chart:
4.3.3.3 Example of chart creation

XML file:
<FOLDER NAME="Motors">
<DIAGRAM NAME="Diag1">
<COMP ID="f_000hsn_20cyz1u8" NAME="Drive1">
<POS X="230" Y="100"/>
<PORT NAME="Run">
<CONNECTION SOURCE="PLCSIM/Command" NAME="Y"/>
</PORT>
</COMP>
<COMP ID="f_000hsn_1zisln8r" NAME="PLCSIM/Feedback">
<POS X="400" Y="110"/>
<TRANSFORM SCALEX="2"/>
</COMP>
<COMP ID="f_000hsn_1zislnd3" NAME="PLCSIM/Command">
<POS X="50" Y="110"/>
<TRANSFORM SCALEX="2"/>
</COMP>
<COMP ID="f_000hsn_21b4dv0t" NAME="Speed">
<POS X="400" Y="170"/>
</COMP>
</DIAGRAM>
</FOLDER>
</GENERIC>
Chart:

4.3.4 Structure of the control file "procedure.cfg" for import from ZIP file
Introduction
The ZIP archive must contain the "procedure.cfg" control file at the top level. You use this
control file to define where the imported components are stored in SIMIT.
Structure of the control file "procedure.cfg"

[RETRIEVE_COMPONENTS]
● source=<ZIP file>
Required. Specifies the ZIP file containing the components. Only unencrypted ZIP files are
supported.
● area=<user | project>
Optional. Specifies whether the components are stored in the "User components" or
"Project components" when the zip file is unzipped in the "Components" task card. If you do
not make a setting here, the components are stored under "Project components".
● destination=<folder name>
Optional. Specifies the folder under "User components" or "Project components" in which
the components are to be saved. If you do not make a setting here, the components are
stored in the highest-level folder.
[COPY_COMPONENTS]
● source=<folder name>
Required. Specifies the folder in the ZIP archive that contains the components in "*.simcmp"
format. Subfolders are included.
● area=<user | project>
Optional. Specifies whether the components in the "Components" task card are imported to
"User components" or "Project components". If you do not make a setting here, the
components are imported to "Project components".
Optional. Specifies the folder under "User components" or "Project components" to which
the components are to be imported. If you do not make a setting here, the components are
imported to the highest-level folder.

4.4 Bulk engineering
[GENERIC_IMPORT]
● file=<XML file>
Required. XML file that contains the import information.
Optional. Specifies the folder under "Project navigation > Charts" to which the components
are to be imported. If you do not make a setting here, the components are imported straight
to "Charts".
● RemoveEmptyElementsWithEmptyReplacement=<True | False>
Optional. Removes components containing empty replacements. The default is "False".
See also
Automatic modelling > Automated import (Page 924)
Import charts from ZIP or XML files (Page 262)
4.4.1 Exporting data
Introduction
You use bulk engineering to edit the parameters of a project in a table without opening
individual charts or components. You can export parameters and input defaults in a
spreadsheet (*.xlsx), edit the values and then import the content of the spreadsheet to the
project again. For structural changes to the simulation model, use the mechanisms for
automatic model generation.
Requirement
● Project view is displayed.
Procedure
Follow these steps to export data:
1. Select the "Bulk engineering export" command from the "Charts" shortcut menu in the
project tree.
The command is available for the "project" and "chart" elements and for all elements below
charts.
If you run the export on elements below the "Charts" level, only the parameters and input
defaults of the components from that selected level on will be exported.
2. Enter a name for the export file.

Result
The export file is generated and saved in the specified directory.
See also
Automatic model creation (Page 243)
4.4.2 Content of the export file
Structure of the export file

The figure below shows the structure of the export file:
① SIMIT ID for import.

Do not change this line.
② Parameter values and defaults of open inputs
③ Parameter pairs of characteristic curves
Rules for working in the export file

Observe the following rules:
● Only change values in the "Value" column.
● When changing values, check the corresponding data type in the column
"Connection_Type".
● Do not change the number or order of columns.
● Do no add any lines. Exception: "Adding parameter pairs"

Adding parameter pairs

You can add parameter pairs of characteristic curves to the export file. The continuation of a
range of parameter pairs is supported:
4.4.3 Importing data
Introduction
You use the "Bulk engineering import" function to import the following data:
● Data exported and edited with the "Bulk engineering export" function
● Changed data from the last simulation run. The changes are saved in a file when you exit
the simulation.
Requirement
● A file suitable for bulk import is available.
Procedure
Follow these steps to import data:
1. In the "Automatic modelling" menu, select the "Bulk engineering import" command.
The "Bulk engineering import" dialog will open.
2. If you want to import data from the last simulation run:
– Select the option "Apply changes from last simulation".

3. If you want to import data with the "Bulk engineering export" function:
– Disable the option "Apply changes from last simulation".
– Select the file from which you want to import the changed values.
4. If necessary, open the preview and select the elements that you want to import.
5. Start the import.
Result
The changed values are imported to the SIMIT project. If a parameter is outside a defined valid
range, the relevant maximum or minimum value is imported. Values with errors are not
imported.
See also
"Bulk engineering import" dialog box (Page 940)

Diagnostics & visualization 5
5.1 Trend and messaging editor
5.1.1 Functions of the Trend and Messaging Editor

The Trend and Messaging Editor supports the analysis of processes and signal values in the
simulation with the following functions:
● New trend
A trend displays the course of signals graphically and can also be printed. You can find
additional information on this in section: Trends (Page 280).
● Messages
The messaging system generates messages for events in the simulation. The messages
can be evaluated in the message editor. You can find additional information on this in
section: Message system (Page 275).
● Archive
The archive allows you to record signals in a simulation run. You can find additional
information on this in section: Archive (Page 278).
The functions are located in the "Monitoring" folder in the project tree.
5.1.2 Message system
5.1.2.1 Message classes

Messages provide information on the occurrence of certain events within the simulation.
Depending on the triggering event they may be classified as follows:
● Messages sent by the message component
A designated message component sends a message. This component is part of the
standard library and can be linked with binary signals on charts. The message category and
message text can be specified individually for any instance of the message component.
● Messages sent by other components
These messages are defined in the component types and have a fixed message category
and message text that are stored in the component type.
● System messages
System messages are generated by SIMIT itself and are used to inform you about
unexpected events, for example, problems when establishing a coupling connection. SIMIT
system messages are always of the SYSTEM category.
All messages that are created after simulation starts are buffered in SIMIT and are available in
the message editor. Existing messages are deleted when the simulation is restarted.

Diagnostics & visualization
5.1.2.2 Message editor

Double-click to open the message editor under "Monitoring > Messages" in the project
navigation. The messages are listed with the following information:
● Simulation time in the format "hh:mm:ss:msec"
● Category
● Name of the component that has triggered the message (source)
● Message text (message)
The message editor is available both when simulation is running and when simulation is
stopped. If the simulation is running, new messages are added as soon as they are issued.
After simulation is stopped, all messages generated in the preceding simulation run are listed.
The messages displayed can be filtered by a range of criteria. In the figure below, a filter for
messages with the source DIV#1 is set:
5.1.2.3 Editing messages
Exporting messages
Export the messages by clicking on the " " symbol in the message editor. Export is in a text file
(*.txt). The text file has 4 columns:
● Simulation time
● Category
● Name of the triggering component
● Message text
The columns are tab-delimited.
The text file allows you to archive messages and edit them with a text editor.

Deleting messages
Delete all messages in the message editor by clicking on the " " symbol.
Hiding messages
A message component generates messages that are triggered by the binary signal to which it
is connected. When the signal changes from zero to one, a message is generated as an
"incoming" message; when the signal changes from one to zero, an "outgoing" message is
generated. "Outgoing" messages are indicated by parentheses around the message text.
A pair of messages consists of an "incoming" message and a subsequent "outgoing" message
for the same event. You can use the "Hide message pair" button to hide and show message
pairs. If you hide message pairs, the only messages that remain visible are those that have
"come in" but have not "gone out" yet.
5.1.2.4 Message – the message component
Symbol
Function
The Message component type is to be found in the standard library Misc folder. A component
of this type will generate a message when the binary value at its input changes. In the case of
an "outgoing" message, the message text that is output by the component is placed in
parentheses.
You can specify the category and message text as parameters in the component property view.
Note
Messages in the SYSTEM category are system messages from SIMIT. Messages in the
ERROR category are messages from components in the basic library. When choosing
category names, avoid using SYSTEM and ERROR. When filtering messages by category, this
will allow to see just the messages from your own categories.
5.1.2.5 Component-specific messages

Some components from the basic library generate messages to notify you of invalid operations
(for example division by 0 or invalid parameter assignment).

For example, a component of the type SQRT outputs the message "SQRT: invalid argument"
if the input value has become negative.
Messages from basic library components are always assigned to the ERROR message
category, and their message text is output in the format "Component type: Error message". All
messages are created as "incoming" or "outgoing".
5.1.2.6 Messages in the status bar

The current message is shown on the right of the SIMIT status bar along with its simulation time
and the message text:
5.1.2.7 Limitations of the message system

The message system can process up to 1000 messages per second. If this value is exceeded,
messages are lost.
If this occurs, the following message is displayed:
A maximum of 4096 messages can be saved. If this limit is reached, the following message
appears:
5.1.3 Archive
The archive records the signals of a simulation run, which means from simulation start until
simulation stop. The next time simulation is run, i.e. the next time simulation is started, the
archive is cleared and the signals to be archived are once again recorded until the simulation
stops.
The following signals are recorded in the archive:
● Component input and output signals
● Component states
● Coupling input and output signals
Archived signals can be visualized as trends.
Configuring the archive

Open the archive by double-clicking on the archive under "Monitoring > Archive" in the project
navigation. The archive editor opens and the signals currently archived are displayed. Manually
enter any other signals or drag them to the table from the "Signals" task card.

A deadband is defined in the archive editor to limit the quantity of data generated by recording
the signals. The deadband specifies how much a signal value must change before the value is
recorded. A signal value is only recorded if the value differs from the last recorded value by
more than the deadband. A deadband can only be specified for analog and integer signals. The
value of a binary signal is recorded every time it changes.
Note
If you enter a deadband of "0", a value is recorded in each cycle for analog and integer signals
that change continuously.
A maximum of 128 signals can be entered in the archive. If this limit is exceeded, an error
message is displayed.
Memory is reserved for each signal. With a basic cycle of 100 ms and a deadband of "0", a
signal is therefore recorded for about 2.5 hours. Less frequent signal changes result in longer
recording times.

5.1.4 Trends
5.1.4.1 Signal with trends

Trends allow you to graphically display the change of signal values over time. You can display
the following signals in trends:
● Component input and output signals
● Component states
● Coupling input and output signals
The signals may be either archived or not archived. Archived signals can be displayed with their
complete trend history as recorded in the archive.
Signals that are not archived are only displayed as long as the trend is open. The trend reserves
memory for each signal that is not archived. With a basic cycle of 100 ms, a signal can therefore
be recorded for about 35 minutes if its value changes in each cycle. Less frequent signal
changes result in longer recording times.
5.1.4.2 Adding and configuring trends
Trends are stored in the "Monitoring" folder in the project navigation. Double-click on "New
trend" to create a new trend. You can create any number of trends in your project. You can
create and configure trends even if you have already started simulation.
Trends are opened in the trend editor within the work area. The trends of the signals are
displayed in the upper section of the trend window, and settings for the trend are made in the
lower section.


① Curve characteristics
② Settings

Configuring trend signals

In the property view of the trend editor, you list the signals that are to be displayed in the trend.
You can manually enter signals into the table with their source and name or drag the signals to
the table from the "Signals" task card.
A trend can contain up to a maximum of 16 signals.
Assigning parameters to signals within a trend

You may specify the following parameters for each signal:
● The color in which the signal is to be displayed
● The value range of the signal
● An alias for the signal
Analog and integer signals are displayed within a certain value range. The default setting is an
automatic mode "Auto (0..0)" in which the value range is continuously adapted to the values
actually occurring. This mode saves you specifying an individual value range, and ensures that
all signal trends are displayed in maximum resolution.
Note
It may be more difficult to compare multiple different signals in automatic mode because the
scaling continuously changes.
To specify fixed ranges, you can also enter the start value and end value separated by two dots,
for example: "0..2000".
If you want to label a signal in the trend with a name that differs from the signal name (which
consists of the source and name), you can assign an alias to the signal. This alias is used to
label the trend.
Note
You can create any number of trends in a project, but the total number of signals contained in
all open trends must not exceed 128.

5.1.4.3 Displaying trends
Displaying trends by data type

Analog and integer signal trends are displayed in charts. The horizontal axis (X-axis) shows the
simulation time and the vertical axis (Y-axis) the signal values.
Binary signals are displayed below the analog and integer signal trends. As binary signals can
only have the values zero (false) and one (true), a bar graph is used to show a binary signal over
the simulation time. A line represents a value of zero (false) and a bar a value of one (true), as
shown in the figure below:
7UXH )DOVH
Displaying archived signals

Archived signals are shown with the archived signal values. As signals in the archive start being
recorded when the simulation is started, the trend for archived signals always covers all times
since the last time the simulation was started, provided the memory limit has not been
exceeded.

Signals that are not archived are only plotted while the trend is open. This means the trend of
such signals is only shown from the time the trend was opened. If you stop a simulation in
progress, you will see only the signal trend of non-archived signals in trends that were already
open while the simulation was running. When a trend is closed, all of the recorded signals are
cleared. This means that the signal trends of non-archived signals can no longer be displayed
when the trend is reopened.
While the simulation is running the signal properties also display the current signal value.
The deadband of archived signals is taken into account in the display of signals in the trend. The
signal property view displays the dead band values while the simulation is running. For non-
archived signals, all values that are calculated in the simulation are recorded in trends.
Zooming in on sections of the trend

When you turn off continuous updating of the trend and move the cursor into the trend chart, a
crosshair is shown. To zoom in on a specific area, select the area with the left mouse button
pressed. The selected area is then zoomed in the trend chart.

Use the "Reset Y scaling" button to reset the Y axis to the defined ranges.
You can find additional information in section: Trend settings (Page 285).
Trend settings
Time axis
The scale of the time axis can be set with a slider:
The time at which the visualization starts is shown on the right hand side, below the time axis.
Add the corresponding number of days (d), hours (h), minutes (m) or seconds (s) according to
the measured values on the X axis to this start time.
The figure below shows a section of the time axis ranging from 31 minutes and 42 seconds to
31 minutes and 50 seconds.

Note
Refreshing the time display
The time axis moves from right to left and shows the seconds. The measuring point for the
minutes is the left-hand edge of the display. As soon as a value of 60 [s] passes the measuring
point, the minute counter is incremented by 1 and the scale values set back 60.
Cyclic update
When you open a trend and start the simulation, you will see the trend values in a constantly
updated sequence. The trends track the signals as they change. In order to obtain a static view
of the current trends, switch off the updating. To do so, deselect the update option:
If there is no simulation running, you see a static view of the recorded signals.
Displaying trends in superimposed mode or one below the other

You can display all analog and integer signals of a trend superimposed in one single chart, or
all signals one below the other in separate charts.
In superimposed display mode, an appropriately labeled Y axis can only be shown for one of
the signals. You can specify which Y axis to display by clicking on the signal name. The Y-axis
is highlighted in the signal color.
The following two figures show a graph with superimposed signals (top figure) and a graph with
signals one below the other (bottom figure):

The trends for binary signals are always displayed in separate trends, one below the other, with
a single common time axis.

5.1.4.4 Trend editor
Features of the trend editor

You can use the trend editor to run the following functions:
● Adapt background color of trends
● Print trends
● Export trends
The relevant commands can be found in the toolbar of the trend editor:
Background color of trends

You can freely choose the background color of a trend. To do this, use the color selection in the
toolbar of the trend editor:
Printing trends
Proceed as follows to print a trend:
● Click on the " " symbol in the trend editor
The "Print" dialog box opens.
● In the dialog box, select one or more signals to be printed and then select "one above the
other" or "overlapping" signals under "Display".
You can find the other functions of the dialog box in section: "Print" dialog box (Page 942).
Exporting trends
Proceed as follows to export signals recorded in a trend to a text file (*.txt):
1. Click on the " " symbol in the trend editor
The "Export" dialog box opens.
2. Select the signals you want to export.
3. Give the export file a name under "File".

5.2 Find & replace
4. Click the "..." button to select a memory location for the export file.
5. Under "Resolution", select a time interval for the signals. The possible settings are 100 ms,
1 s, 10 s and 60 s.
The generated file will contain the points in time and the values for each signal, with one column
per signal. The individual columns are separated with the tabulator character. If there are
several signal values for an analog or integer signal within a time period, the arithmetic mean
between the minimum and maximum values that occurred is used.
5.2 Find & replace

The "Find & replace" function is available in the project navigation.
Double-click to open the function in the work area.
This function is used to search for elements in your project and make replacements.
You can search for the references of a signal in project elements with the " " symbol in the
signal properties of components and controls.
You can find more information on the search function in: Find (Page 290).
You can find more information on the replace function in: Replace (Page 292).
Note
Find & replace in texts
You open the "Find" or "Replace" dialog box with the shortcuts <Ctrl+F> and <Ctrl+H>.

5.2 Find & replace
See also
"Find & replace" dialog box (Page 941)
5.2.1 Find
5.2.1.1 Finding with the Find & replace editor

The Find & replace editor opens in the work area. The "Components", "Macros" and "Signals"
task cards are available in this editor.
You can search for the following elements:
● Signals
● Connectors
● Names of components and macro components
● Components and macro components by type
● Graphic text
Note
Only saved data is searched; charts and couplings must therefore be saved before you search.
Select an element and click the "Find" button to launch the search.
You may be able to define additional search criteria and search options depending on the
element selected, for example a signal name for a signal search.
In the following figure, the system searched for components and macro components that
contain "CFC_NK114" in their name. The search in this case covers the entire project including
all subfolders, and is case-sensitive. You can view the results under "Search results": The
CFC_NK114 component.

5.2 Find & replace
Select a component or macro component under "Search results" to display the diagrams and
links that contain the component or macro component you are looking for under "Project
elements".
In the figure above, when you select "CFC_NK114" as the search result, the "CFC_NK114"
diagram is displayed under "Project elements". If you open the "CFC_NK114" diagram by
double-clicking, you can see that the component you are looking for is highlighted with a blue
frame.
If a search result corresponds to a single chart only, you can open the chart by double-clicking
on the search result.
To search for a specific signal, you can simply drag-and-drop it from the "Signals" task card to
either of the two text boxes.
When searching for a component type, enter its name and/or ID. Similarly, when searching for
a specific component type in your project, you can drag-and-drop a component type from the
"Components" task card to the input field.

5.2 Find & replace
To search for components and connectors, enter the name. With the search option "Output
connectors only", you can hide all search results of input connectors when searching for global
connectors and thus navigate directly to the respective output connector.
5.2.1.2 Searching using the properties of signals and connectors

You can also search for signals and connectors in a chart using the property view.
For example, if you want to search a chart for input connectors that are connected to the
SPEED output connector, open the property view and click the "Find" button ( ).
The Find & replace editor will then open with the search results.
Search results display and navigation are then as detailed in: Finding with the Find & replace
editor (Page 290).
5.2.1.3 Searching for fixed signals

To search for fixed signals in the project, select the search option "Fixed signals only". This
gives you an overview of what signals are currently fixed at any given time.
As signals can only be fixed when simulation is running, this search option is only available after
the start of simulation.
5.2.2 Replace
5.2.2.1 Replacing with the Find & Replace editor

To replace search results in the editor, click on the "Replace" tab. You can replace
● Signals
● Connectors
● Names of components and macro components

5.2 Find & replace
● Components and macro components by type

● Graphic text
Note
Replace only works with saved data. Charts and coupling must therefore be saved before the
replace function is launched.
● Enter the search criteria and options. Complete the "Replace with" text boxes and then click
"Find".
● Select the results that you want to replace in the search results. In line with the search
options set, you see the results of the replacement for each search result. As with the
search, all charts in which the signals for which you searched were found are shown under
"Project elements".
In your project, you can also replace components or macro components of a specific type by a
component or macro component of another type. The type and their UID are applied.
● Click the "Replace" button.
The "Assignments" dialog opens.
● The dialog shows the assignments of the inputs and outputs for both elements. The
assignment can be changed here.
● Click the "Replace" button to apply the assignments and launch the replace function.
5.2.2.2 Refresh
Refreshing components
The search criterion "Refresh" searches by component type for all components in the defined
search range that have the same name and belong to the same library family but were created
(saved) at a later time.
This updates the components in your simulation project in one operation. The search for current
component types is run in all component libraries in the "Components" task card in the following
order: "Project components", "User components" and "Basic components". The most recently
created component type is then suggested as the current type for replacement in the search
result.
"Refresh" works in the same way for all macro components in the defined search range; the
system search for current macro components in the libraries of the "Macros" task card. If all

5.3 Consistency check
components and macro components in the selected search range are already up to date, no
results are returned.
The "Refresh" option is also available if you want to update components by type in macro
components. Start the update via the shortcut menu for the macro component.
5.3 Consistency check

The consistency check is always launched automatically when the simulation is started.
Inconsistent projects cannot be started.
You can start the consistency check manually by double-clicking on the "Consistency check"
tree node in the project navigation. If a project is consistent, a dialog appears indicating that
there are no inconsistencies.
If you rename the "SPEED" connector on the main drive chart in the "Elevator-03" project
"Incrementer", for example, the project then has two output connectors with the same name.
The project is no longer consistent, and when the project is started the consistency check
opens in the work area showing the inconsistencies that were found (see figure below).
Because a consistency check is always performed automatically when the simulation is
started, the consistency check editor also shows when you try to start this inconsistent project.
Inconsistencies are indicated by being preceded with the red symbol " ". Warnings are
indicated with the blue symbol " ". Using a command, you may switch the display on or off for
warnings.
In the above example there are two results:
1. There is no corresponding output connector for the "SPEED" input connector.
2. There is more than one "Incrementer" output connector.

5.4 Analysis functions
The first message is only a warning and indicates that the simulation model may not yet be
finished. A warning will not keep you from launching the simulation. The second result indicates
an error that needs to be fixed before the simulation can be launched.
To fix an error or a warning select its entry in the list of results. The Project elements section
shows the charts in which the error or warning must be resolved. From this view you can then
open the charts to fix the problem. After resolving the inconsistencies, you may recheck the
project using the "Recheck" button.
Note
The consistency check only works with stored data. Data, charts and couplings must therefore
be saved beforehand.
The results of the consistency check can also be exported in a tab-separated text file. To do so,
activate the button in the consistency check editor as shown in the figure below.
5.4.1 Basics of the analysis function
Introduction
The SIMIT analysis function generates a statistical analysis from the data of a SIMIT project.
The statistical analysis is saved as an "*.xslx" analysis file. The following project data is
included in analysis:
● Couplings
● Components
● Macros
Capacities are also calculated for the following objects:
● Folder
● Couplings
● Charts

● Model size
● Scripts
Structure of the analysis file

The figure below shows the structure of the analysis file:

① Capacities
② Statistical data

Content of statistical data

The figure below shows the basis structure of the statistical data, using the example of
"components".

① The types used in the project are listed.

② The percentage is calculated on the basis of the total number.
5.4.2 Generating analyses
Requirement
● Project view is displayed.
Procedure
1. Select the "Analysis" command from the shortcut menu in the project tree.
2. Enter a name for the analysis file.
If Excel is installed on the PC, the analysis file will immediately open in Excel.
Result
The analysis file is generated and saved in the specified directory.


Scripts 6
6.1 How scripts work
A simulation is made functional in SIMIT by defining the graphical interconnection and
parameter assignment of components. When the simulation is started, an executable
simulation model is generated from all charts in the simulation project and that model is then
processed cyclically. The SIMIT user interface gives you access to all input and output signals,
statuses and component parameters that can be changed online during ongoing simulation.
The Automatic Control Interface function module from SIMIT provides you with the additional
option of using scripts to access simulation variables at specific times in ongoing simulations.
You are then able to automate manual interventions through the user interface, monitor
processes within the simulation, and create logs from output information.
A script is a sequence of instructions that are processed in consecutive order and without jumps
from beginning to end. Time slices are used to synchronize the script and the cyclically
executed simulation model. Within each time slice, the script is executed before the simulation
model contained in this time slice.
You can stop a script to wait for specific events in the simulation model or for specific points in
time. You can also use instructions in the script to influence the control system of the simulation
model, such as creating and loading snapshots.
The schematic figure below shows how scripts are incorporated into the architecture of SIMIT:

Scripts
6.2 Handling of scripts
8VHULQWHUIDFH
&UHDWHVLPXODWLRQRIIOLQH 5XQVLPXODWLRQRQOLQH
&KDUW 6FULSW &KDUW
6WDUWVLPXODWLRQ 6WDUWLQJDVFULSW
6\QFKURQL]DWLRQ
6LPXODWLRQPRGHO ([HFXWDEOHVFULSW
&\FOLF 6HTXHQWLDO
6LJQDOVLQSXWVRXWSXWVVWDWHV
6HTXHQWLDOFRQWUROV\VWHP
6.2.1 Creating a script

You can both create and execute scripts in your simulation project. The script editor can be
used to edit scripts.
Scripts are elements of a SIMIT project and are managed in the "Scripting" folder of the project
tree. You can create and edit scripts whenever SIMIT is open – both when the simulation has
not yet been started (offline) and when it has been started (online). Double-click on "New script"
in the "Scripting" folder to create a new script.
To edit a script, open the script editor from the shortcut menu or double-click on the script in the
navigation window.
The editor that then opens lists the line number in a column to the left of the pane in order to
facilitate the allocation of error messages.

Scripts
Enter the time slice in which the script is to be executed in the Property view of the script editor.
If you include other scripts with an instruction, the time slice specified in the scripts included is
irrelevant; the applicable time slice is the one specified in the script that has been started.
If you enable the "Block interface" option, a dialog appears when the script is started that
prevents access over the interface to the simulation in progress. Close this dialog to cancel the
script.
6.2.2 Executing a script

A script can only be executed when a simulation is running. You can start a script either through
its shortcut menu in the project tree or by using the toolbar in the script editor.
A flashing symbol in the status bar indicates that a script has been started. The symbol
for simulation in progress is also displayed.
You can stop a script at any time using the shortcut menu for the "Scripting" folder.
Only one script can be run at a time. Execution of a script is stopped once all instructions in the
script have been completed, when it is stopped by a command or when the simulation is closed
or reinitialized in the interface.
After a script is started, the syntax is checked and the script is compiled into an executable
instruction list. Any error discovered in the script is signaled and the script is not started.
Problems can also arise that only become apparent once the script is being executed. Should
such problems occur, a message appears in the status bar and the script is stopped.

Scripts
6.3 Script syntax
6.2.3 External scripts
Note
We recommend that you only create and edit scripts using the SIMIT script editor, as this will
ensure that they remain in the simulation project. This is because only scripts located in the
SIMIT project tree can be executed and archived with the project.
However, if you wish to create scripts externally using a different editor, note the following:
Scripts are text files with the standard Windows character encoding (code page 1252). Script
files must have the file extension ".script". The script properties that are listed in the property
view of the script editor must be set as follows in the first two lines of the script file in line with
the information in the "Keywords for script properties" table:
Keyword = Value
Example:
META_BLOCKGUI = False
META_CYCLE = 2
Table 6-1 Keywords for the properties of scripts
Keyword Meaning
META_BLOCKGUI True: The user interface is blocked while the script is being executed
False: The user interface is not blocked while the script is being executed
META_CYCLE Cycle (1 to 8) in which the script is to run
You can find additional information in section: Composing scripts (Page 304).
Note
When you archive a project, only the scripts located in the simulation project are archived.
External scripts are not archived with the project. The archived project is therefore incomplete.
6.3 Script syntax
6.3.1 Controlling the script

General
You can exit a running script using a instruction in the script or by initiating a dialog during the
script runtime to display various processing options.
Canceling the script

The instruction
BREAK

Scripts
6.3 Script syntax
is used to cancel the processing of a script. If the BREAK instruction is used in an included
script, processing resumes in the calling script.
Terminating the script
The instruction
QUIT
is used to terminate the script. If the QUIT instruction is in an included script, the calling script
will also be terminated.
The query dialog

The instruction
DIALOG "text" MODE
is used to pause the simulation and a query dialog with the content text is opened. The Mode
parameter can be used in conjunction with the "Buttons for dialogs" table to determine which
buttons this dialog will have.
Table 6-2 Buttons for dialogs
Mode Button
"Yes" "No" "OK" "Cancel"
YESNOCANCEL X X – X
OKCANCEL – – X X
YESNO X X – –
OK – – X –
YESNOCANCEL is the default mode. Selecting "Cancel" in the dialog box terminates the script;
the simulation stays paused. In all other cases, the simulation is restarted and script execution
resumes.
In the example
DIALOG "Ready?" YESNOCANCEL
the dialog box shown in the following figure appears.
If a log file was already open in the script before the DIALOG instruction, the system records in
this file whether the dialog was closed with the "Yes" or "No" button. Based on this, the entry
DIALOG text True
or

Scripts
6.3 Script syntax
DIALOG text False

is made in the log file.
In the script, a YESNOCANCEL dialog with the binary variables
_result
and
_ok.
can be used to query which decision the user has made.
The variable _result has the value True if the most recently opened dialog was closed with
"Yes", and False if it was closed with "No". The variable _ok is also set to False if a dialog was
acknowledged with "No". This variable is not automatically reset to True, but this can be
performed using an instruction if desired.
6.3.2 Composing scripts

You can compose a script from several separate scripts. The instruction below means that the
current script will continue with another script:
INCLUDE "Name"
The name of the script is entered relative to the calling script. Backslashes in the name must be
doubled.
Example:
INCLUDE "..\\subscripts\\test2"
The INCLUDE instruction is executed once the included script has ended.
Multiple scripts can also be linked into chains in which the included scripts also contain
INCLUDE instructions. The maximum depth of such a chain is limited to 10.
External scripts can also be included by specifying an absolute path and the name of the script
file:
INCLUDE "C:\\scripts\\test3"
The included script file must have the file extension .script. The file extension is not specified
in the file name of the INCLUDE instruction.
Note
Once a script is started, an executable instruction list is created for this script and all the
included scripts. The included scripts must therefore exist before the calling script is started;
changes made to an included script after the calling script is started have no effect.
Note
When you archive a project, only the scripts located in the simulation project are archived.
External scripts are not archived with the project. The archived project is therefore incomplete.

Scripts
6.3 Script syntax
6.3.3 Commenting scripts

Comment lines start with two forward slashes. They are ignored when the script is executed.
Example:
// This is a single line comment
You can also comment out entire areas in the script by starting a comment with /* and ending
it with */.
Example:
/* This is a
multiline comment */
You cannot close one comment area and open a new one in the same line.
6.3.4 Signals in scripts

You can use scripts to access inputs, outputs, states and simulation model parameters that can
be changed online. Signals are identified in SIMIT with the source of the signal and the signal
name. The signal designation comprises both items separated by a forward slash and framed
by quotation marks as follows:
“Source/signal name“
Example:
“ADD#1/IN1“
The following rules apply in the unusual event that the source or signal name contains double
quotes or forward slashes:
● All double quotes must be preceded by a '\'.
● If the signal name itself contains a forward slash, then all forward slashes except for the
delimiter between source and signal must be preceded by a '\'.
● If the source name contains a forward slash but not the signal name, then no marking is
required. This is due to the fact that the last forward slash in the signal name is assumed to
be the delimiter which would result in a correct result in this case.

Scripts
6.3 Script syntax
6.3.5 Controlling the simulation
A simulation is always in one of the following three states: "Offline", "Stopped" or "Running".
2IIOLQH
6LPXODWLRQ!6WDUW
6LPXODWLRQ!,QLWLDOL]H
6LPXODWLRQ!(QG
,1,7 3DXVHG 67(3

6LPXODWLRQ!,QLWLDOL]H 6LPXODWLRQ!6LQJOHVWHS
6723 67$57
6LPXODWLRQ!3DXVH 6LPXODWLRQ!6WDUW
6LPXODWLRQ!(QG
5XQQLQJ
The simulation state can be changed by a script. For example, the simulation can be stopped
and started again. However, script commands are only effective if the simulation state is
"Stopped" or "Running". Scripts cannot start an "Offline" simulation, nor can they end a
simulation.
6.3.5.1 Initializing a simulation

The instruction
INIT
is used to initialize the simulation. This instruction corresponds to the command "Simulation >
Initialize" in the SIMIT menu.

Scripts
6.3 Script syntax
This command is invalid if the simulation has already been started. In this case, the following
error message appears in the status bar and the script is terminated:
Wrong simulation state, Script '...', Row ... .
Note
The INIT script command cannot cause the transition from "Offline" to "Online", because a
script can only be executed in online mode.
6.3.5.2 Starting the simulation

The instruction
START
is used to start the simulation. This instruction corresponds to the command "Simulation >
Start" in the menu or the command with the button in the SIMIT toolbar.
A START instruction in the script is ignored if the simulation has already been started.
Note
The START script command cannot cause the transition from "Offline" to "Online", because a
script can only be executed in online mode.
Starting with this command automatically sets the simulation time to real-time (100%).
6.3.5.3 Starting and waiting until an absolute time

The instruction
GO-TO time
is used to pause the script until the simulation time is equal to or exceeds time in milliseconds.
The instruction is ignored if the simulation time is already equal to or greater than time. If the
simulation is initialized but has not yet been started, this command will cause the simulation to
begin.
6.3.5.4 Starting and waiting until a relative time

The instruction
GO-FOR time
is used to pause the script until time in milliseconds has passed.
If the simulation is initialized but has not yet been started, this command will cause the
simulation to begin.
6.3.5.5 Starting and waiting for a certain number of time slices

The instruction
GO n

Scripts
6.3 Script syntax
is used to pause the execution of the script for n time slices. The time slices are counted in the
script time slice. For one cycle, i.e. for n=1, the parameter n can be left out.
6.3.5.6 Starting and waiting for an event

The instruction
GO-UNTIL Condition TIMEOUT time
is used to pause the script until the Condition is met or the TIMEOUT time specified in the
simulation in milliseconds has expired.
Example:
GO-UNTIL “OR#1/Y” TIMEOUT 10000
You do not have to enter a time value for TIMEOUT. The script would then no longer close of
its own accord if the condition was not met.
6.3.5.7 Stopping the simulation

The instruction
STOP
is used to stop the simulation. This instruction corresponds to the command "Simulation >
Pause" in the menu.
A STOP instruction in the script is ignored if the simulation has already been stopped.
6.3.5.8 Executing a single step

The instruction
STEP
is used to carry out a single step in the simulation. This instruction is the same as the
"Simulation > Single step" command in the SIMIT menu. The function key F12 is assigned to
this function.
This instruction is invalid if the simulation is already running cyclically. Otherwise the following
error message appears in the status bar and the script is terminated:
Wrong simulation state, Script '...', Row ... .
Note
A simulation step is always one step of the fastest submodel, which means the submodel with
the shortest cycle time.

Scripts
6.3 Script syntax
6.3.5.9 Saving a snapshot

The instruction
SAVE-IC "name"
is used to save a snapshot in the simulation project under the name name.
The snapshot is always saved at the highest level of the "Snapshot" folder. The specifying of
subfolders is not permitted.
NOTICE
Data loss
Any snapshot with the same name that already exists in your simulation project will be
overwritten without a prompt and the data saved in it will be lost.
6.3.5.10 Loading a snapshot

The instruction
LOAD-IC "name"
loads the snapshot with name from the "Snapshot" folder of the simulation project.
The specifying of subfolders is permitted. Any backslashes in the name must be doubled.
Example:
LOAD-IC "name"
LOAD-IC "subfolder\\name"
If no snapshot with this name exists, the following error message appears in the status bar and
the script is terminated:
Snapshot '...' cannot be loaded, the file might not exist, Script '...', Line ... .
After a snapshot is loaded, the simulation is stopped and must be restarted using either the
STEP or START instruction.
6.3.5.11 Resetting the simulation time

The instruction
SIMTIME-RESET
is used to reset the simulation time to zero. The simulation state remains unchanged.
Note
Resetting the simulation time causes inconsistencies in the trends of the Trend and Messaging
Editor. This is because all the values in the trend are recorded over the simulation time.

Scripts
6.3 Script syntax
6.3.6 Logging
You can log the results of your simulation, i.e. signal values or events. Script instructions can
be used to create log files in which outputs are documented.
Script instructions to output data are ignored if no log file is open when the script is executed.
6.3.6.1 Opening and closing log files

The instruction
OPEN-LOG "name"
is used to open a log file with the name name. Any log file that may already be opened is closed
first. The log file must be entered with its absolute path. Any backslashes in the name must be
doubled.
Example:
OPEN-LOG "c:\\protocol\\log.txt"
Note
Any log file that already exists with the same name will be overwritten without warning. Data that
is already saved in the log file will be lost.
You must close the log file either at the end of the script or at the point where you no longer wish
to record any more data.
The instruction
CLOSE-LOG
closes the log file.
Note
The outputs are not saved in the log file if the log file was not closed by a instruction before the
end of a script. In this case, the log file is empty.
6.3.6.2 Unformatted output

The instruction
PRINT "Signal"
saves the current value of the signal Signal in the open log file. Inputs, outputs, states and
component parameters that can be changed online may be used as signals. Binary values are
output as True or False.
6.3.6.3 Formatted output

The instruction
PRINTF "Formatstring", "Signal1", "Signal2", …

Scripts
6.3 Script syntax
saves the current values of the signals listed in the instruction in the open log file. The
Formatstring contains the format specifier for each signal; it must contain precisely one format
specifier for each signal. The format string may also contain text. The allowed format specifiers
are listed in the table below.
Table 6-3 Formatting instructions
Signal type Formatting instruction

analog, integer, binary %f or %.nf (n: number of decimal places),
binary values are output as "0" or "1".
integer %i
binary %b (values are output as "True“ or "False“)
A backslash must be placed in front of the percentage sign in the format string if you would like
the percentage sign to be output as a normal character: \%. Use the PRINTF instruction without
a signal specification if you want to output a fixed text only.
Signals can be any input signals, output signals, states or component parameters that can be
changed online. You can find additional information on this in the section: Signals in scripts
(Page 305).
In the example
PRINTF "Ramp: %.2f [ULR=%b] [LLR=%b]", "Ramp#1/Y", "Ramp#1/ULR",
"Ramp#1/LLR"
the following is output to the log file:
Ramp: 0.00 [ULR=False] [LLR=True]
6.3.6.4 Outputting time and date

You can enter the time and date of your computer into the log file using the system variables
listed in the following table:
Table 6-4 System variables
Syntax Meaning
_t_day Day
_t_mon Month
_t_year Year
_t_hour Hour
_t_min Minute
_t_sec Second
All figures appear as two digits.

For example, the following instructions
PRINTF "Date: %.0f.%.0f.%.0f", "_t_day", "_t_mon", "_t_year"
PRINTF "Time: %.0f:%.0f:%.0f", "_t_hour", "_t_min", "_t_sec"
generate the following entries in the log file:
Date: 20.06.11

Scripts
6.3 Script syntax
Time: 12:55:13
Note
The system variables in the "System variables" table can only be used in the context of logging
and cannot be used for general calculations within the script.
6.3.6.5 Outputting version information

You can output the version of your current project and the currently used SIMIT version to the
log file using the system variables _ProjectVersion and _SIMITVersion.
For example, the following instructions
PRINTF "Project version: %s", "_ProjectVersion"
PRINTF "SIMIT version: %s", "_SIMITVersion"
generate the following entries in the log file:
Project version: AA12345-344332-3.4
SIMIT version: 7.1.0
6.3.6.6 The _printlog system function

It is also possible to write directly from components to an open log file. However, to do this you
will have modify the behavior description of the relevant component types, which means the
system function.
_printlog("string");
must be inserted in order to output text. When called, this function writes the text in the string
directly to the open log file.
Note
The SIMIT component type editor (CTE) is required to edit the behavior description of
component types. The component type editor is a SIMIT expansion module with which you can
create your own component types.
6.3.7 Signal curves
6.3.7.1 Opening and closing a plot file

You can define signals in the script whose values are to be written cyclically to a plot file. Only
one plot file can be open in a script at any one time.
The instruction
OPEN-PLOT "File name"

Scripts
6.3 Script syntax
opens the plot file File name and starts to record the signals. The name of the file (File name)
must be specified with its absolute path, in which any backslashes must be doubled.
A plot file that is already open is closed first. If the file File name already exists, it will be
overwritten without confirmation.
Note
The signals to be recorded must be specified before the file is opened.
The first line of the plot file shows the signal names of the signals to be recorded. The remaining
rows contain the simulation time in milliseconds, and tab-delimited signal values in the
sequence that is specified in the first row.
The instruction
CLOSE-PLOT
closes the plot file and the list of signals to be recorded is deleted.
The instruction sequence
STOP
INIT
START
PLOT "Ramp#2/Y"
PLOT "Ramp#2/ULR"
PLOT-CYCLE 500
OPEN-PLOT "D:\\plot.txt"
GO-FOR 4000
CLOSE-PLOT
would add the following to the plot file:
Ramp#2/Y Ramp#2/ULR
0 1.66666666666667 Ramp#2/ULR
500 18.3333333333333 False
1000 35.0 False
1500 51.6666666666667 False
2000 68.3333333333333 False
2500 85.0 False
3000 100.0 True
3500 100.0 True
4000 100.0 True
6.3.7.2 Specifying signals

The instruction
PLOT "Signalname"
adds the signal Signalname to the list of signals to be recorded. Please note that the list of
signals to be output must be completely created before the plot file is opened.
You can record input signals, output signals, states and component parameters that can be
changed online within your simulation project.

Scripts
6.3 Script syntax
6.3.7.3 Specifying a cycle

The instruction
PLOT-CYCLE time
specifies the cycle in which the signals are to be recorded. The cycle time time specified in
milliseconds is rounded up to the next multiple of the script cycle time. If you do not add this
instruction to your script, the script cycle time is used for the recording. Please note that the
cycle must be specified before the plot file is opened.
6.3.8 Setting signals
You can set input signals, status variables and parameters and components that can be
changed online with instructions in the script. You can also set these variables to pre-defined
values or apply a linear change to the values.
Note
If you set inputs that are linked to the outputs in the simulation project or give values for states
of a component that are set in the component itself, the value specified in the script will either
be completely ignored or will only be effective during one computing time slice.
6.3.8.1 Setting individual values

The instruction
"Signal" = Value
sets the specified Signal to the given Value.
Example:
"Status/1/BI" = True
Instead of a constant value, you can also specify an expression for the value. An expression
consists of constants or signals that are linked to each other by operators. The permitted
arithmetic operators are listed in the "Arithmetic operators" table, and the permitted Boolean
operators are listed in the "Boolean operators" table.
Table 6-5 Arithmetic operators
Operator Meaning
() Parentheses
* Multiplication
/ Division
+ Addition
− Subtraction

Scripts
6.3 Script syntax
Table 6-6 Boolean operators
Operator Meaning
() Parentheses
! not
&& and
|| or
The operators are listed in both tables from highest to lowest priority.
Example:
"Display/E" = 2 * ("Slider/A" + 0.5)
Note
A value that you have assigned to a signal will not be available until the next execution time
slice. If you have set a signal using an instruction in the script, for example, and you want to use
this signal to assign a value or output its value in the instruction that immediately follows, the
signal still has the value that it had at the beginning of the cycle.
6.3.8.2 Separating connected signals

You can use the
FIX "Signal"
instruction to disconnect the specified signal ("force") to then be able to set a value.
Example:
FIX "Status/1/BI"
"Status/1/BI"=True
You can use the
UNFIX "Signal"
instruction to revoke the disconnection of the specified signal.
Example:
UNFIX "Status/1/BI"
The two commands, FIX and UNFIX, correspond to the operation of the signal splitter on the
user interface.
6.3.8.3 Specifying signals

The instructions
RAMP "Signal" FROM start TO end IN time
RAMP "variable" TO end IN time
allows you to set an analog input signal or the state of a component to a linearly rising or falling
value. This instruction sets the value start and causes the value to increase or decrease so that
it reaches the value end within time milliseconds it, which means the value changes linearly
(ramp).

Scripts
6.3 Script syntax
There is no start value (FROM start) in the second instruction. The start value in this case is the
current value.
Script execution continues during the specified time time, which means other instructions in the
script are executed without waiting for the signal to reach its specified end value. A script is not
terminated until all signals that were set using ramps have reached their end values.
Examples:
RAMP "Display#1/X" FROM 20.0 TO 10.0 IN 15000
6.3.9 Conditional execution
Basics
You can implement conditions for execution with the following instructions:
IF expression THEN
block1
ELSE
block2
ENDIF
If the condition expression is true, the instruction list block1 is executed; otherwise list block2 is
executed. The two instruction lists consist of one or more lines with any number of instructions,
and can therefore themselves contain conditional instructions.
The ELSE instruction can also be omitted:
IF expression THEN
block
ENDIF
You must close each IF instruction with ENDIF.

The expression condition allows you to access input signals, output signals, states and
component parameters that can be changed online. The following relational operators are
supported:
Table 6-7 Comparison operators
Operator Meaning
< Less than
<= Less than or equal to
> Greater than
>= Greater than or equal to
== Equal to
!= Not equal to

Scripts
6.3 Script syntax
A condition can consist of multiple expressions that are linked with Boolean operators. You can
find additional information on Boolean operators in the tables in: Setting individual values
(Page 314).
Examples
IF "Button/1/Z" == True THEN

"Display/E" = 2.0 * ("Slider/A" + 0.5)
ELSE
"Display/E" = "Slider/A"
ENDIF
IF "Button#1/Z" THEN
ELSE
IF !"Button#2/Z" THEN
ELSE
"Display/E" = "Slider/A"
ENDIF
ENDIF
Comparing analog signals

The values of analog signals are mapped in floating point format. Rounding can produce
different values which then lead to incorrect comparison results. Use the RANGECHECK function
for the value comparison with analog signals. The syntax of the function is as follows:
● RANGECHECK("Analog value", "Setpoint", "Tolerance" | "Lower tolerance", "Upper
tolerance")
– Analog value: Value of the analog signal that is compared with the "setpoint"
– Tolerance: Amount by which the analog value is permitted to deviate from the "setpoint".
You can alternatively specify different tolerance values for the low and high limits.
The function returns True or False.
In the example below, "True" is returned when the value of the analog signal
"TemperatureValue" is between "0.5" and "1".
IF RANGECHECK("TemperatureValue", 0.75, 0.25) == True THEN

Block1
ELSE
Block2
ENDIF

Scripts
6.3 Script syntax
In the example below, "True" is returned if the value of the analog signal "TemperatureValue"
is between "0.5" and "1.25".
IF RANGECHECK("TemperatureValue", 0.75, 0.25, 0.5) == True THEN

Block1
ELSE
Block2
ENDIF
6.3.10 Accessing the simulation time

The system variable
_Time
contains the current simulation time in milliseconds.
In the example
IF ("_Time" > 20000) THEN
PRINTF "Simulation time: %.0fms", "_Time"
ENDIF
the output sent to the log file might be:
Simulation time: 26600 ms

Component type editor 7
7.1 User interface
7.1.1 Starting the CTE

The Component Type Editor (CTE) is a stand-alone SIMIT application. You start the editor
using the Start menu in the folder Programs > Siemens Automation > SIMIT > SIMIT CTE.
Once it has started, you have the choice of opening an existing component type or creating a
new component type. You can also access this dialog at any time from the Components menu.
Note
The term 'component' is used in the CTE user interface instead of 'component type'.

Component type editor
7.1 User interface
Starting the CTE from SIMIT or using a component file

You can also open component types for editing from the SIMIT Components task card. To do
this, select the required component type and double-click it. You can also use the Open
command in the shortcut menu of the component type you wish to open. If the CTE was not yet
running, it will automatically start to open the component type.
Component types are stored on the file system in a file with a name ending in simcmp. You may
also open a component type in the CTE by double-clicking the file. Here, too, the CTE is
launched to open the component type if it was not running already.
7.1.2 Structure of the user interface

The CTE user interface is based on the SIMIT GUI design. It is subdivided into the following
panes:
The menu bar and toolbar allow easy access to the CTE functions. There are additional
functions available in the shortcut menus.
The project windoww shows the open component type in a tree view.
The editors are opened for editing in the work area. Every editor contains a toolbar for quick
access to the editor-specific functions.
The Tool window contains the tools that can be used with the respective editor, such as
connection types and graphic tools in task cards.
The Properties window shows the properties of an object selected in the work area.
The editor bar at the bottom left of the interface allows you to toggle between opened editors.
The status bar at the bottom right of the interface shows information about the current status of
the CTE.

7.1 User interface
① Menu bar and toolbar

② Tools window
③ Work area
④ Project window
⑤ Property view
⑥ Editor bar, status bar
All editors are opened in the work area. The tools window only contains the specific task cards
for each editor. There are menu commands that divide the work area horizontally (Window >
Split horizontally) or vertically (Window >Split vertically) so that two editors can be opened side
by side or one below the other in the work area.
7.1.3 Menu bar and toolbar

The CTE menu bar contains all commands you need to create or open and edit component
types.
Frequently used functions are also provided on the toolbar. These include the following
functions:
(New Component) for creating a new component type
(Open ...) for opening a component type
(Save) for saving a component type

7.1 User interface
(Cut) for cutting selected objects

(Copy) for copying selected objects
(Paste) for pasting copied objects
(Refresh) for updating a component type.
Some aspects of a component type affect one another. The Refresh function ensures that all
information in one aspect is compared with the information in the other aspects. When you
refresh, there is also a check to ensure that the specification of the component is formally
correct.
7.1.4 Project tree

The project tree lists all aspects of a component type. For every aspect an associated editor can
be opened by double-clicking the relevant entry in the project tree. Formal errors in the
implementation of an aspect are identified by an overlay in the project tree: . All higher levels
of this aspect are identified with this overlay as well.
7.1.5 Keyboard shortcuts

You can use the keyboard shortcuts listed in the table below to speed up the editing of a
component type. All keyboard shortcuts are context-specific, which means they can only be
used if the associated editor has the keyboard focus.
Table 7-1 Keyboard shortcuts
Shortcut keys Meaning

Ctrl + A Select all
Ctrl + C Copy
Ctrl + F Find
Ctrl + H Replace

7.1 User interface
Shortcut keys Meaning

Ctrl + S Save
Ctrl + V Paste
Ctrl + X Cut
F2 Rename
F3 Find Next
F5 Refresh
7.1.6 The task cards
7.1.6.1 The "Signals" task card

For every text editor of the behavior description, there is a "Signals" task card. It contains all
signals that exist in this component type. Here the "source" of signals is the component type
itself, so you only need the name for the signals in this case.
The Signals task card allows you to filter by name, signal type and data type. It thus provides
a rapid overview of the signals available in this component type. You can also easily move a
signal name from the task card into the text editor using drag & drop.

7.1 User interface
7.1.6.2 The "Controls" task card

The "Controls" task card provides all controls from the SIMIT basic library.
There are three panes of controls:

● Controls for displaying signal values in the Display pane
● Controls for entering signal values in the Input pane and
● Other controls in the Others pane
Controls can be found in the library under their names.
You may place controls on the basic symbol and connect them to input or output signals.
For component types that use controls on the basic symbol, you can set and display values
directly on the symbol without having to open the operating window of the component type.

7.1 User interface
7.1.6.3 The "Components" task card

You can open additional components in read-only mode in the "Components" task card.
Click on the symbol to open a component and display its properties.

Click on the symbol to close the selected component.
You can open and copy individual objects of a component in the corresponding editor and insert
them into objects of another component. You can open several components simultaneously
and thus create a component consisting of parts from several other components.
Note
You can protect components you have created yourself with a password. You are prompted for
the password when you open such a component. Some components from the basic library are
protected when they leave the company and cannot be opened. You can find additional
information in section: Protection of the component type (Page 332).
You can find additional information on the properties of a component in section: Properties of
component types (Page 330).
Transferring a component to SIMIT

When you create custom component types with the CTE, you have to save them either in a
library directory or under Global Components so that you can access them in SIMIT. SIMIT
updates the pane of the User Components automatically when you save a component type with
the Component Type Editor in it.

7.1 User interface
7.1.6.4 The "Enumeration Types" task card

The "Enumeration types" task card contains all enumeration types that can be used for
enumeration parameters.
This task card is divided into three panes:

● Basic enumeration types
This pane shows the enumeration types that are used in the components of the basic library.
You can use these enumeration types as the basis for your own enumeration types by
copying them to the User enumeration types pane.
● User enumeration types
You can create your own enumeration types in this pane. To do this, copy an existing
enumeration type or click the New enumeration type command. A window then opens in
which you define the enumeration type.
Enter the names for the individual elements of the enumeration.
● From Component Types
You can open any component type from this pane on the task card using the command.
The enumeration types used are displayed under this component type and in the selection
list.
When you select an enumeration type from one of these three panes on the task card, the
elements that can be contained in this enumeration type are listed in the preview at the bottom
of the task card.

7.1 User interface
The unique identifier (UID) of the enumeration type is also displayed in the preview.
In the behavior description, you use an element of an enumeration type by entering the name
of the enumeration type followed by a period and the name of the element itself. The entire
construct must also appear in single quotes, for example: 'ClosedOpen.Closed'.
7.1.6.5 The "Connection Types" task card

The "Connection types" task card lists all connection types known in SIMIT and allows you to
define custom connection types.
This task card is divided into three panes:

7.1 User interface
Basic connection types

This pane shows the connection types that are used in the component types of the basic library.
These are essentially the basic connection types as described in the table below.
Table 7-2 Basic connection types
Connection type Value Value range

binary Binary values True/False
analog Floating point values ±5.0 × 10−324 to ±1.7 × 10308
integer Integer values −9.223.372.036.854.775.808 bis
+9.223.372.036.854.775.807
You can use the basic connection types as the basis for your own connection types. To do this,
copy the connection type to the User connection types pane and edit it.
User connection types

This pane allows you to create your own connection types. To do this, copy an existing
connection type or click the New connection type entry. A window then opens in which you
define the signals.
You can create any number of signals in the Forward and Backward directions. For the signal
type, you can only choose between the analog, binary and integer data types.
Select the "Multiple Connection" check box if a component output is to be interconnected with
multiple inputs. Multiple connections are not permitted for connection types that contain
backward signals, otherwise multiple output signals would be routed to the same input. You can
thus only check the Multiple Connection check box if no signals are defined in the backward
direction.
When you close the dialog, a unique identification number (ID) is assigned to this connection
type.
From Component Types

When you create components and you want their connectors to be compatible with the
connectors of other components, it is important to use the same connection type for them. To
do this, you can open any component type from this pane on the task card using the
command. The connection types used are then displayed under this component type and in the
selection list for connection types.
When you select a connection type from one of these three panes on the task card, the signals
that can be transferred using this connection type are listed in the preview at the bottom of the
task card:

7.2 Principles of component types
The unique identifier (UID) of the connection type is also displayed in the preview. Note that
connection types are only identical if they have the same UID. The name of the connection type
is not a sufficient criterion. Even connection types for which the same signals are defined do not
have to be identical.
7.2.1 The SIMIT type-instance concept

Introduction
In SIMIT, components are the smallest units from which a simulation is assembled. All
components are instances of types that are made available in libraries. Component types are
created and edited using the Component Type Editor (CTE). This takes into account all aspects
that can be used for components in SIMIT .
The type/instance concept

In SIMIT, the functional simulation model is made up of the functional behavior of the individual
components that are positioned graphically on charts, assigned parameters and
interconnected. SIMIT follows a type/instance concept in the process: The parameterizable
function is defined in the type, while the individually parameterizable instances of the type are
added to charts. We therefore speak of both component types and components as instances.

This type-instance concept allows you to change a component type without having to change
the instances already created from it.
Note
After making changes to a component type, if you want to update the instances you have
already created in your simulation project, you simply use the Find&Replace function in SIMIT
to replace component types.
Every component instance is identified by a separate, unique name in SIMIT. Every instance
can be parameterized individually with respect to both the actual parameters, any preassigned
inputs and the symbol scaling.
7.2.2 Properties of component types

A component type is a discrete unit that can be created and modified with the Component Type
Editor. From a technical viewpoint, a component type is a file with the extension .simcmp. SIMIT
libraries are thus simply directories in your file system in which component types are stored for
use.
All properties that can be used in SIMIT are implemented in a component type. The
implementation of a component type comprises the following aspects:
● General information
General information relates to the administration, protection and special features of a
component.
● Connectors
Connectors are all the visible and invisible signal inputs and outputs of a component type.
The connectors are defined with their properties in the component type.
● Parameters
Parameters are used to customize the individual component instances. The component
type defines which of its properties should be parameterizable in the instance.
● Behavior
The definition of status variables and the functional behavior description determine the
functional behavior of a component. The dependencies between the output signals and the
input signals and parameters are thereby described in detail.
● Visualization
Components are graphically represented on charts with a basic symbol. Optionally,
components may also have a symbol for a link and an operating window.
Every functional component type, which means one that can be used in SIMIT, is automatically
assigned a unique identifier (ID) when it is saved with the CTE.

7.2.3 General properties of component types
7.2.3.1 Overview
General properties of a component type include
● Administration
● Protection
● Special features and
● Changes
of that component type. To edit the general properties open the corresponding editor by double-
clicking the aspect General in the project tree. You can then edit the individual properties, which
are presented in a fixed arrangement of groups of text boxes.
7.2.3.2 Administration properties

Administration information is as follows:
● Name of the component type
● Version of the component type

● Library identifier
● Library family
You can enter any name. It is used to display the component type in the SIMIT Components
task card. It is also used as the basis for automatically assigning a name when the component
type is instantiated on a chart. The name is independent of the file name under which the
component type is stored in the file system.
The version and library family of a component type can be defined arbitrarily.
This information is displayed in the Components task card preview in SIMIT, but is not
evaluated any further.
If you change the name or version of a component type, saving the component will
automatically open a file selection dialog so that you can also save the component under a new
file name. The default file name will match the component name.
Libraries that are included in the SIMIT product range have a predefined library ID. The library
ID is entered in every component type of a library. When you create user-defined components,
the library ID is automatically set to "0".
The Storage location of the component type in the file system and its unique identifier UID are
displayed for information.
7.2.3.3 Protection of the component type

You can assign a password to prevent the component type you have created from being
opened in the CTE by unauthorized persons. To do this, simply enter a password. You will be
prompted to confirm the password by entering it again.
A password prompt is displayed when you try to open a component type with password
protection.
The password protection has no effect on the use of a component type in SIMIT. It can be
dragged onto a chart, instantiated and interconnected, just like any other component type.
Note
Keep the password in a safe place. You are not be able to open this component type in the
Component Type Editor without the right password, even if you have created it.

7.2.3.4 Special properties

A component type may be assigned the special general property of "graphically scalable". In
this case, the component type has exactly one connector (Graphically scalable connector)
defined as an input or output which can be changed to any number in every instance. The
number of connectors is set on the chart by scaling the symbol vertically using its handles on
the selection frame.
To set this property, use the Is graphically scalable option in the editor and specify which
connector can be scaled graphically.
The graphically scalable connection must be defined as a vector of connectors of which there
is a variable number, whereby the number must be created as a parameter of the type
dimension.
A component type may have other connectors in addition to the one that is graphically scalable.
However, the graphically scalable connector must always be positioned on its symbol below all
the other connectors.
7.2.3.5 Change comments

The change comments in the component type are for documentation purposes only and are not
evaluated by SIMIT. You can keep the change history of a component type here, for example.

7.3 Connectors and parameters of component types
7.3.1 The connector editor

The connectors of a component primarily define the interface that is used to exchange
information with other components. Connectors are also used to incorporate signals into their
operating window. All connectors of a component type are edited in the connector editor, which
is created as a table editor. Open the connector editor by double-clicking the "Connectors"
menu item in the project tree. The following figure shows the connector editor:
Every connector is identified by the following properties:

● Name
Every connector must have a unique name. The name must contain only letters, digits and
the underscore character, and must start with a letter. The name is case sensitive.
Reference is made to the name of a connector in the behavior description, for example.
● Connection type
All connectors in SIMIT are typed, which means the connection type precisely defines which
information can be exchanged via a connector of this type. Connectors must always be of
the same type to be connected to one another on a chart. The available connection types
are listed in a selection box.

● Direction
The direction defines whether the connector is defined in the IN or OUT direction. Binary,
integer and analog connectors are thus defined as inputs or outputs.
The special case of a connector without direction (NONE) is only of relevance in association
with special libraries. You can find further details in the manuals for these libraries.
● Number
If you have entered a value other than the default number one, you have defined a connector
vector with the specified number of elements. These connectors are simply numbered
consecutively in the component instance by appending an index number starting with one
to the name.
You can also enter a parameter as number that determines the number of connectors. This
parameter must then be of the type dimension.
● Default
Connectors that are defined as inputs can be given a default numerical value. This default
setting can be overwritten in every component instance.
Connectors also have other properties that can be defined in the properties window for every
connector:
● Usage
A connector can be used in different ways. The connector should generally be visible on a
chart at the component symbol so that it can be interconnected with other components. Set
the usage to Symbol and properties window to do this.
If you want the connector to only be visible in the properties window for a component, and
not on the component symbol on the chart, set the usage to Only in property view. This
connector will then be permanently identified as an invisible connector by the symbol in
the properties window for the component.
The In CTE only setting allows the connector to be used in the component type, but not to
be visible on the symbol or in the component properties window.
● Default visibility
If a connector has the usage Symbol and properties window, you can set whether it is initially
visible ( ) or invisible ( ) after instantiation on a chart.
● Implicitly interconnectable (for input signals only)
All connectors that have the usage Symbol and properties window can also be implicitly
connected in the properties window for the component instance. The Implicitly
interconnectable property is permanently set for this usage.
Here you can define whether connectors with the usage Only in property view should be
implicitly interconnectable connectors or not. If you set a connector with this usage to not be
implicitly interconnectable, only the default assignment for this connector can be overwritten
in the properties window for the component. If you set it to implicitly interconnectable, the
default for Value/Signal is changed to Signal.
● Default value/signal (for input signals only)
If the usage of the connector is set to Symbol and properties window, you can select whether
the connector is set to Value ( ) or Signal ( ) by default in the component instance.
If the default is Signal, the default visibility setting is automatically set to Not visible.
● Connector is moveable
You can define whether the connector in the component instance may be moved on the
outer edge of the component. Hold down the "Alt" key and drag the connector with the
mouse to move it.

● Comment
The comment for a connector is for documentation purposes only and is not evaluated by
SIMIT.
● Connection type ID
Because the name of a connection type does not have to be unique, the unique ID allows
you to identify it if there is any doubt.
7.3.2 Special default setting for implicitly interconnectable inputs

Inputs are normally set by default to a numerical value for analog and integer inputs or to the
value True/False for binary inputs. If the default setting for Value/Signal is set to Signal ( ),
there is yet another option for the default setting: You can now set a default signal name.
The symbol for this input is then set to the signal name specified in the properties window for
an instance of the component. This input of the component is thus permanently interconnected
to the output of another component. In the sample signal shown in the figure above, the output
X1 is a component with the name ADD#5.

Rather than fixed names for the signal, you can also use parameters or the component instance
name. To do this, write the parameter name or _NAME for the instance name in curly brackets,
preceded by the $ character for the source and/or connector of the signal:
● {$Parameter name} or
● {$_NAME}.
The parameter name and _NAME are thus merely placeholders in the component type for the
values of Parameter value or Instance name that are assigned in the component instance. You
can also compose the signal name as required from placeholders and fixed names.
You may use the system variable _INDEX to define implicit connections for individual elements
of a vector. Use {$_INDEX}, as shown in the following figure, for example. When instantiating
the component this expression is replaced in each element by the element index, whereby the
index counting starts at one.
If the following values have been set for a component as shown in this example,
● Parameter MaxObjects is set to 2 and
● Parameter BaseName is set to "LifterBase#1"
it results in the following default values for the input vector XPosition:
● XPosition1: LifterBase#1 XPositionOut1

7.3.3 Complex connection types

In the basic connection concept, a single analog, integer or binary signal is transferred between
connected connectors of components. The signal connection is always directed from output to
input, which means the direction is determined implicitly by the type of connector. This concept
for connecting an output to an input is illustrated in the figure below.
&RQQHFWLRQYLHZ
&RPSRQHQW. &RPSRQHQW.
&RQQHFWRU$DV &RQQHFWRU%DV
RXWSXW LQSXW
7HFKQLFDOYLHZ
&RPSRQHQW. %LQDU\DQDORJ &RPSRQHQW.

RULQWHJHUVLJQDO
Connections of this type are provided as basic connection types in SIMIT. These types are
offered in the selection screen as analog, integer and binary.
The SIMIT connection concept has been extended compared to this basic concept: A
connection may be used to transfer multiple signals between connectors in both directions. The
direction of a signal thus can no longer be derived from the connected connectors, so it needs
to be defined as a forward or backward signal in the connection type. Forward signals are
transferred from an output to an input; backward signals are exactly the opposite. The diagram
for such a complex connection is depicted in the figure below.
&RQQHFWLRQYLHZ
&RQQHFWRU$DV &RQQHFWRU%DV
RXWSXW LQSXW
7HFKQLFDOYLHZ
)RUZDUGVLJQDOV
%DFNZDUGVLJQDOV

Thus both input and output signals can result from a connector of a complex connection type.
These signals are listed in the properties window of the connector, where default inputs can be
individually specified.
7.3.4 Parameters of component types

Components can be individually configured using parameters. To do this, the corresponding
parameters must be provided in the component type. To define the parameters, open the
parameter editor by double-clicking the Parameter aspect in the project tree.
Divide the parameters into the "Primary" and "Secondary" tabs. This separates the parameters
into "important" and "less important" parameters. Important parameters are used, for example,
for assigning the component parameters. If you define secondary parameters here, SIMIT
takes this distinction into account in the properties window for the component instance. A
further category (Additional parameters, which contains the secondary parameters) will then
appear in the properties window in addition to the Parameters category.

Parameters are identified by the following properties:

● Name
Each parameter must have a unique name. The name must contain only letters, digits and
the underscore character, and must start with a letter. The name is case sensitive.
● Data type
Parameters can have one of the data types listed in the table below.
All enumeration types are also available for parameters. The enumeration types are
described in detail in the section "Defining enumeration types (Page 326)".
Table 7-3 Data types for parameters
Data type Meaning Value range

+9.223.372.036.854.775.807
dimension Number of elements in a connector 1 .. 256
vector or parameter vector
text Single line of text
characteristic Characteristic
● Number
If you have entered a value other than the default number one, you have defined a
parameter vector with the specified number of elements. These parameters are simply
numbered consecutively in the component instance by appending an index number starting
with one to the name.
You can also enter as the number another parameter that determines the number of this
parameter. This parameter must then be of the type dimension.
● Default
Parameters can be assigned a default numerical value.
Parameters also have other properties that you can edit in the properties window for that
parameter.
● Modifiable online
Modifiable online parameters are parameters that can be changed for a component
instance while a simulation is running.
Parameters of the type dimension are not modifiable online.
● Unit
The unit entered here only appears as an additional property of the parameter in the
properties window for the component instance.
● Comment
The comment for a parameter is for documentation purposes only and is not evaluated by
SIMIT.
All names of parameters and connectors must be unique, which means a connector must not
have the same name as a parameter and vice versa.

7.4 The behavior of a component type
7.4.1 Introduction
The functional behavior of a component type is defined by state variables and the behavior
description. The behavior description is subdivided into the following aspects:
● Initialization
● Cyclic calculation
● Functions
The component type editor provides suitable editors for all aspects: a table editor for the states
and a text editor for the sub-aspects of the behavior description.
7.4.2 State variables

State variables of a component are the memory of a component, so to speak. They contain
values that, at any point in time, cannot be calculated from the input variables and parameters
alone, but depend on what has happened in the past. For example, the fill level in a container
cannot be calculated by simply balancing the inflow and outflow at a given point in time; it also
depends on the content of the container before the point in time under consideration.
A table editor is provided for editing the states. You can open the editor by double clicking the
aspect States in the project tree.

A state has the following properties:

● Name
Each state variable must have a unique name. The name must contain only letters, digits
and the underscore character, and must start with a letter. The name is case sensitive.
● State type
There are two different state types: time-discrete and continuous. The difference is
determined by how the new value of a state is calculated:
For time-discrete states, the value is calculated in every processing cycle by a calculation
rule in the form of an explicit equation that you define in the behavior description. The rule
for calculating a continuous state variable is defined by a differential equation. SIMIT
calculates the state values in every processing cycle by solving this differential equation
using a suitable numerical method.
You can find detailed information about how to handle time-discrete and continuous state
variables using explicit equations and differential equations in the behavior description in
the relevant paragraph in section: The equation-oriented approach (Page 355).
● Data type
Time-discrete state variables can have any of the data types listed in the table below.
Continuous state variables are always of the type analog.
Table 7-4 Data types for time-discrete states
Data type Meaning Value range

+9.223.372.036.854.775.807
byte Bytes 0 to 255
● Number
If you have entered a value other than the default number one, you have defined a state
vector with the specified number of elements. These states are simply numbered
consecutively in the component instance by appending an index number starting with one
to the name.
You can also enter as the number another parameter that determines the number of this
parameter. This parameter must then be of the type dimension.
State variables also have other properties that can be defined in the properties window for the
component type:
● Default
Every state variable has a default setting matching its type. This default setting can be
overwritten in the component instance.
● Only visible in CTE
Set this option if you do not want this state to be visible in the component properties window.
● Comment
The comment for a state variable is for documentation purposes only and is not evaluated
by SIMIT.

7.4.3 Initialization, cyclic calculation and functions

The behavior description for a component consists of a part that is executed once during
initialization and a part that is executed in every cyclic calculation step. Calculations that are
used multiple times can optionally be defined as functions. The Component Type Editor
provides a text editor for each of these three sub-aspects of the behavior description. The editor
for any of these sub-aspects can be opened by double-clicking the corresponding sub-aspect
in the project tree.
For ease of orientation, you can activate the Highlight syntax option in the properties window.
Important elements of the description syntax are then made easier to identify by different text
colors. The table below lists the colors used for the individual elements.
Table 7-5 Colors used for the elements
Element Color
Input signal Green
Output signal Red
State Olive green
Parameters Pink

Element Color
Text constant Brown
Keyword Blue
Comment Gray
Note
The use of highlight colors increases the computing power needed to update the user interface
of the text editor; the extra time needed is sometimes sufficient to cause a short delay while you
are typing. You may therefore find it useful to switch off the highlighting, at least temporarily, if
your texts are very long.
All three text editors offer a function for finding and replacing texts under the icon. You can
also call up this function using the Ctrl+F or Ctrl+H shortcuts. There are various options you can
use for searching, as shown in the figure below.
You can find additional information on behavior description in the section Syntax for the
behavior description (Page 354).
7.4.4 Topology
The topology description is only meaningful in association with the libraries CONTEC and
FLOWNET.
For more information on topological aspects, refer to the section Topological properties
(Page 893) The CONTEC library and in the section Topological properties (Page 773) The
FLOWNET library.

7.5 Visualization of component types
7.5.1 Introduction
A graphical representation of a component instance is created in the form of a basic symbol for
every component type. The basic symbol is displayed in the preview of the Components task
card. It represents every component instance on the chart.
Optionally a link view can be created for a component type. This provides additional access to
the component instance. It is also possible to define an operating window for a component type
that can be opened for every instance while the simulation is running to set and display
component values.

7.5.2 The basic symbol
7.5.2.1 Editing the basic symbol

To edit the basic symbol, open the graphical symbol editor by double-clicking the Basic symbol
aspect in the project tree. The Graphic task card contains the graphical elements of the chart
editor for designing the graphical aspects of the basic symbol. You can use these graphical
functions to design the basic symbol as required in the available space.
You can apply animations to graphical elements used for creating the basic and link symbol.
7.5.2.2 Editing graphics

You are provided the full set of features available that the graphics editor in SIMIT for editing
graphics. You can find more information about this topic under "Visualizing graphics
(Page 219)".

7.5.2.3 Editing connectors

All connectors as specified in the connector editor can be automatically arranged on the basic
symbol. Just click the symbol in the toolbar. Connectors are automatically arranged in the
specified order along the border of the basic symbol: Inputs are placed on the left hand side,
outputs on the right hand side of the symbol. You may use the mouse to drag any connector to
the desired position within the predefined grid resolution of 5 pixels.
The coordinates of a connector are displayed in the properties window. You can enter the
desired position there manually. In contrast to positioning with the mouse, manual input is not
limited to the grid resolution. Coordinates therefore also do not need to be integer values.
If there is a vector of inputs or outputs that has a fixed, which means not variable dimension,
each individual connector of that vector can be freely positioned.
Note
Changes in the connector editor do not appear in the symbol editor until you save the
component type or run an update from the toolbar ( ) or by pressing function key F5.
7.5.2.4 Editing properties

You can define properties for the basic symbol in the properties window:
● Title
If you enter a Title, this appears centered at the top of the basic symbol and is offset from
the rest of the area by a horizontal separating line.
When combined with the Draw border option, this represents a rudimentary way to design
a component view.
● Width
Here you can specify the Width of the basic symbol in pixels as a numerical value. You can
also move the left or right edge of the symbol area in the editor window by holding down the
left mouse button. The numerical value for the width is automatically corrected.
● Height
Here you can specify the Height of the basic symbol in pixels as a numerical value. You can
also hold down the left mouse button on the top or bottom edge of the symbol area in the
editor window to move it. The numerical value for the height will change automatically as you
do so.

● Horizontally scalable
The Horizontally scalable option is used to define whether the basic symbol for the
component instance should be scalable in the horizontal direction on a chart. Suitable
handles are then provided on the selection frame of the basic symbol.
● Vertically scalable
The Vertically scalable option is used to define whether the basic symbol for the component
instance should be scalable in the vertical direction on a chart. Suitable handles are then
provided on the selection frame of the basic symbol.
● Minimum width
The Minimum width of the basic symbol cannot be undershot when scaling the basic symbol
horizontally on the chart.
● Minimum height
The Minimum height of the basic symbol cannot be undershot when scaling the basic
symbol vertically on the chart.
● Is rotatable
This option defines whether the basic symbol can be rotated on a chart or not. If it is
rotatable, a suitable handle appears on the selection frame of the basic symbol.

● Show connector names

This option allows you to define whether the connector names of the inputs and outputs
should be displayed in the symbol. Note that inputs can only be displayed on the left edge
and outputs on the right edge of the basic symbol.
● Draw border
This option allows you to define whether the basic symbol should appear with a black border.
● Only proportionally scalable

This option can be used to specify that a component width and height cannot be scaled
independently but only proportionally, which means maintaining a constant ratio between
width and height. This option can only be selected when the component is both horizontally
and vertically scalable.
● Scale
When creating user types for conveyor technology components (components of types from
the CONTEC library) you may specify a scale for the basic symbol. This scale fulfills two
tasks:
– All sizes and positions can be defined in millimeters according to the scale specified
when creating the symbol of a handling equipment component.
– When creating the symbol of an object component, the size resulting from the specified
scale is the default size with which the object is placed in the material list in SIMIT.
Note
The Scale property is only available if you have licensed the CONTEC library in SIMIT.
7.5.2.5 Scalability
When creating your own conveyor technology component types you can also set a scale for the
basic symbol and the link in the CTE. This scale fulfills two purposes:
1. When modelling handling equipment, all dimensions and positions can be specified in
millimeters relative to the selected scale.
2. When modeling an object, the dimension which results from the selected scale in the CTE
is the predefined size with which the object is created in the material list.

Note
This function is only available if the CONTEC library has been licensed.
The following system variables permit access to the actual dimensions of a component in the
behavior description:
Table 7-6 System variables to determine component dimensions
System variable Data type Meaning

_WIDTH analog Width (unscaled) of the component in pixels
_HEIGHT analog Height (unscaled) of the component in pixels
_SCALEX analog Horizontal scaling of the component
_SCALEY analog Vertical scaling of the component
_TECHSCALE analog Scale of the chart on which the component is placed (in mm
per pixel)
7.5.3 The link symbol

The basic symbol of a component type is used to parameterize and connect the component
instance on a chart. Optionally, a component type can have a link view. The symbol shown in
this view – the link symbol – may have a graphic design that is completely independent of the
basic symbol. Unlike the basic symbol it has no connectors. Otherwise, the graphic elements
of the link symbol can be freely designed as in the basic symbol. Thus, they can be animated,
for example, to visualize current simulation states of a component instance.
Double-click the Link entry in the project tree to open the editor for the link symbol. The
graphical editor that opens provides the same functions as the basic symbol editor, except for
the functions that relate to connectors.

If you provide a link for a component type, you can create any number of links for an instance
of this component type on charts in your SIMIT project.
See also
Creating and editing charts (Page 217)
7.5.4 The operating window

An operating window allows you to set and display values of the component instance while the
simulation is running. Double-click the component in the chart to open the operating window.
To create an operating window, open the editor by double-clicking the Operating window entry
in the project tree.

You can use all controls for the SIMIT basic library in an operating window. These controls are
provided on the Controls task card. You can drag these controls from the task card onto the
drawing surface of the editor and connect them to suitable input or output signals of the
component type.
The Graphic task card also provides the SIMIT graphic functions for graphically designing the
operating window. Note that graphic objects in the operating window cannot be animated.

The properties window contains further options for designing the operating window:
● Extended operating window
You can divide the operating window into two areas, for example, to separate frequently
used operator controls from those that are needed less often. To do this, activate
the Extended operating window option. The editor then contains another area for the
extended operating window. This area is just as wide as the area for the operating window,
and the height can be changed as required.
In the open operating window for a component instance, you can easily open the extended
operating window by clicking the bottom edge.

7.6 Syntax for the behavior description
● Width
Here you can specify the width of the operating window in pixels as a numerical value. You
can also move the left or right edge of the window area in the editor by holding down the left
mouse button. The numerical value is updated automatically.
● Height
Here you can specify the height of the operating window in pixels as a numerical value. You
can also move the top or bottom edge of the window area in the editor by holding down the
left mouse button. The numerical value is updated automatically.
7.6.1 Overview
The behavior description for a component consists of a part that is executed once during
initialization and a part that is executed in every cyclic calculation step. The same description
syntax applies to both parts.
There are two different approaches to the behavior description for a component:
● Equation-oriented approach
The equation-oriented approach describes every new status value or output value as an
explicit function of the inputs, parameters and states. It is particularly suitable for modeling
physical contexts. This approach allows you to describe the change in continuous state
variables using common differential equations as well.
● Instruction-oriented approach
The instruction-oriented approach describes the calculation of new state variables or
outputs in the form of programming instructions that are processed sequentially in the
specified order. This approach is particularly suitable for modeling technical behavior.
The two approaches can also be combined in a component type.
7.6.2 Conversion of the behavior description to C# code

Regardless of which approach is used to define the behavior of a component type, it is
ultimately converted into C# code in the simulation project for every component instance. This
conversion takes place automatically and cannot be seen by and is of no significance to the
user.
Not all syntax errors are detected before the code is generated, which means the compiler may
also generate error messages. Note that the information in such error messages relates to the
generated code that differs from the behavior specified in the component type in terms of both
syntax and breakdown.

7.6.3 The equation-oriented approach
7.6.3.1 Overview
In the equation-oriented approach, the syntax in which you set out the behavior of your
component type consists of relationships in the form of equations rather than instructions.
These equations explicitly describe how a state variable or an output is calculated from other
variables, for example as follows:
Output = Parameter * Input;
As a general rule:
● Every equation contains the equals sign.
● On the left of the equals sign is the variable that is being determined. On the right of the
equals sign are the variables that are read (explicit form of an equation).
● At the end of every equation there is a semicolon.
● Any variable may occur only once on the left of the equals sign, which means a variable may
only be determined once.
The following variables may appear on the left of the equals sign:
● Outputs
● States (for time-discrete states, only the new value; for continuous states, only the
differential, which means the change in value) and
● Local variables.
The following variables may appear on the right of the equals sign:
● Inputs
● States (only the differential may appear here for continuous states)
● Parameters
● Local variables and
● Constants.
7.6.3.2 Local variables

You can define local variables as follows in the behavior description for initialization or cyclic
calculation:
Data_type Name[,Name];
Example:
binary b1, b2, b3;

The data types listed in the table below are permitted.
Table 7-7 Data types for local variables
Data type Meaning Value range Default

binary Binary values True/False False
analog Floating point values ±5.0 × 10−324
to ±1.7 × 10
308
0.0
integer Integer values −9.223.372.036.854.775.808 bis 0
+9.223.372.036.854.775.807
The name of a local variable must contain only letters, digits and the underscore character, and
must start with a letter.
Local variables are used to save interim results that will be needed again in the same
processing step.
If you wish to access calculated values again in the next calculation step, always create time-
discrete state variables rather than local variables.
7.6.3.3 Constants
The constants you can use will depend on the data type of the result variable. The constants for
each data type are described in the table below.
Table 7-8 Data types for constants
Data type Constants

binary "FALSE" or "TRUE"
analog Decimal fraction with a dot as the decimal mark, for example "125.61"
Exponential notation, for example "62.2e-4"
integer Sequence of digits without thousands separator, for example "125985"
7.6.3.4 The calculation order

The behavior description for a component type both for initialization and for cyclic calculation
consists of individual equations. With the description, you define only relationships and
dependencies within the relationships. In particular, you do not define a calculation order. The
order in which you write these equations is of no relevance to the calculation.
When you create an executable simulation, SIMIT analyzes all equations in a component
instance and determines the order in which they are calculated based on the reciprocal
dependencies. SIMIT always sorts the calculation order so that equations that determine a
variable are calculated before equations that need this variable are calculated.
In the example below, the local variable p is first assigned the value 3.14, then the new state Z
is calculated and then the value of the newly calculated state is assigned to the output.

The calculation order is automatically obtained from the analysis of the dependencies and, in
this case, is exactly the reverse of the order in the description.
However, SIMIT does not only analyze the equations within a single component instance, but
rather across all the component instances with their reciprocal links in your SIMIT project and
defines a suitable calculation order for the project. In the example below, multiplication is
always executed before addition because the product is needed for the addition.
Situations may occur in which no unambiguous calculation order can be determined. In the
example below, the input values of the two AND operations each depend on the output value
of the other operation. This feedback means that one of the two AND operations is always
calculated with a non-current input value, which means with a value originating from the
previous calculation cycle.
In such cases, the order in which the equations are processed is undefined. SIMIT always tries
to maximize the calculation order, that is, to sort as many equations as possible into one
sequence. Thus, in the above example, SIMIT always processes the "Switch – AND – NOT –
binary indicator" sequence in this order. It is, however, not defined whether the top or the
bottom sequence should be processed first.

7.6.3.5 Operators
The variables on the right of the equals sign can be linked to one another with operators. The
operators listed in the table below are permitted, depending on the data type.
Table 7-9 Permitted operators
Operation Operator Data type Priority

Parentheses (expression) binary, integer, analog highest
Function call Function name (parameter list) binary, integer, analog
Change of sign − integer, analog
Negation NOT binary
Multiplication * integer, analog
Division / integer, analog
Modulo % integer
Addition + integer, analog
Subtraction − integer, analog
Comparison <, >, <=, >= integer, analog
Equality = binary, integer, analog
Inequality != binary, integer, analog
Logical AND AND binary
Logical exclusive OR XOR binary
Logical OR OR binary lowest
7.6.3.6 Conditional assignments

You can assign different values to a variable depending on one or more conditions, using the
following syntax:
y = {Condition1: Expression1; Condition2: Expression2; etc.
ELSE Expression0};
Example:
m = {p<1: m1; p<0: m2; ELSE m3};
The conditions are processed from left to right. Once a condition is fulfilled, the associated
expression is evaluated and assigned to the variable on the left of the equals sign. If no
condition is fulfilled, the expression after the keyword ELSE is evaluated.
You can specify as many condition/expression pairs as you wish. The "ELSE" expression must
always be specified.

7.6.3.7 Enumeration types

Parameters can have enumeration types as the type. You can then select the desired entry
from a list in the properties window of the chart editor to parameterize the component instance.
You can query such a parameter in the behavior description by referencing the name of the
enumeration type followed by a dot and the corresponding list entry. For example:
A = {Initial_Value = ClosedOpen.Open: TRUE; ELSE FALSE};
7.6.3.8 Vectors
You can also define all inputs, outputs, parameters and states as vectors. You can then access
the elements of the vector in the behavior description as follows:
● Individual elements
To access an element of a vector, append the desired index in square brackets to the signal
name.
Note that the first element of the vector has the index 0. The index must be a constant, non-
negative integer value and must not exceed the number of elements that this vector has.
Example:
Output[2] = Input * 2.0;
● Area
You can specify an equation for multiple elements of a vector by entering a range:
Vector_name[Index1 TO Index2]
SIMIT solves this vector equation so that the two examples below are identical:
Example 1:
Output[0 TO 2] = 1.0;
Example 2:
Output[0] = 1.0;
Output[1] = 1.0;
Output[2] = 1.0;
When you want to refer to the index in a vector equation, you can specify an index variable:
Vector_name[Index_variable: Index1 TO Index2]
This index variable can then be used on the right side of the equation. It does not have to be
declared as an additional local variable but its name must be a single character.
Example:
Output[i:0 TO 2] = Input[i + 1];
In this case, the resolution into individual equations is as follows:
Output[0] = Input[1];

● Whole vector
If you want to extend the range to the whole vector, you can also write:
Vector_name[ALL]
or specify an index variable:
Vector_name[Index_variable: ALL]
● Vector of a complex variable
If a signal has a complex connection type, the index is specified in square brackets at the
end of the complete name.
Example:
X1.Re[3] = Y1.Im[1] * Y2.Im[2];
_INDEX system variable

The _INDEX system variable is used for the variable definition of implicit vector connections.
You can use the _INDEX variable with the expression {$_INDEX} when specifying the signal
name. When the component is instantiated this expression is then replaced in each element
with the actual index, starting with 1.
If the following values have been set for a component as shown in this example,
● Parameter MaxObjects is set to 2 and
● Parameter BaseName is set to "LifterBase#1"
it results in the following default values for the input vector XPosition:
7.6.3.9 Function calls for mathematical standard functions

You can use all the mathematical standard functions anywhere in your behavior description
where a scalar input variable is permitted.
Simply prefix the name of the mathematical standard function with an underscore and append
a list of parameters in parentheses. The individual parameters are separated by commas. If a

function has no parameters, it is called with an empty parameter list. The table below lists all the
available mathematical standard functions.
Table 7-10 List of mathematical standard functions
Function Return val‐ Description

ue
_sqrt(x) analog \ [; x≥0
_abs(x) analog/ y = |x|
integer
_exp(x) analog y = ex
_pow(x, z) analog y = xz
_log(x) analog Natural logarithm: y = ln(x); x > 0
_log10(x) analog Common logarithm: y = lg(x); x > 0
_ceil(x) analog Smallest integer greater than or equal to x
_floor(x) analog Largest integer less than or equal to x
_rand() integer Random value between 0 and 32767
_sin(x) analog y = sin(x); angle x in radians
_cos(x) analog y = cos(x); angle x in radians
_tan(x) analog y = tan(x); angle x in radians;
x ≠±(2n +1)π/2
_asin(x) analog y = arcsin(x); −1 ≤ x ≤ 1
_acos(x) analog y = arcos(x); −1 ≤ x ≤ 1
_atan(x) analog y = arctan(x);
_atan2(y, x) analog  \
DUFWDQ [ [!
 \
˭ DUFWDQ \ ุ [
 [
෥ ˭ DUFWDQ \ \ [
\  [
˭
 \ ! [

෥ ˭ \ [

8QGHILQHG \ [
_sinh(x) analog y = sinh(x); angle x in radians
_cosh(x) analog y = cosh(x); angle x in radians
_tanh(x) analog y = tanh(x); angle x in radians
_min(x, y) analog/ The smaller of the two values x or y
integer
_max(x, y) analog/ The larger of the two values x or y
integer
_trunc2byte(x) byte The integer part of x modulo 28
_trunc2int(x) int The integer part of x modulo 216
_trunc2long(x) long The integer part of x modulo 232

Function Return val‐ Description

ue
_round2byte(x) byte The rounded number x modulo 28
_round2int(x) int The rounded number x modulo 216
_round2long(x) long The rounded number x modulo 232
_characteris‐ analog Characteristic is a special case (additional information is available in
tic(c[ALL], x) the section: The characteristic parameter type (Page 373))
7.6.3.10 User-defined functions

If you need your own operator you can define a user-defined function under the Functions sub-
aspect in the behavior description. You can call user-defined functions in the Initialization
and Cyclic calculation sub-aspects.
When you call a user-defined function, you can also set multiple variables if you have declared
the function accordingly. When you call a user-defined function, always specify the list of
calculated function values in parentheses.
Example:
(y1, y2) = UserFunction(x1, x2);
Even a single function value as a return value must be placed in parentheses.
You can only use user-defined functions with a call as shown above. Even if your user-defined
function has only one return value, you cannot use this function like the mathematical standard
functions as a scalar value in other relationships; the function must always be called as shown
above.
The syntax used to describe functions differs significantly from the equation language. It follows
the instruction-based approach. You can find additional information on this in the section:
Functions (Page 364).
7.6.3.11 Differential equations
Introduction
If you have defined an analog state of your component type as continuous, the behavior
description does not specify how this state is calculated. Rather it specifies from which
variables and how this state changes over time: The change of state is defined in the form of
a standard differential equation.
Notation for the differential

The mathematical notation for the differential d/dt is abbreviated with the dollar sign in SIMIT.
For example, for the change of the continuous state "Mass" in a container, you write an
equation in the form:
$Mass = Inflow - Outflow;
The new value of the state variable is now determined by SIMIT in every step of the
computation by numerically solving the differential equation.

You can also describe multiple continuous states in your component type by differential
equations that are dependent on one another. This then yields, for example, the following
system of differential equations:
$Z1 = Z2 + Factor1 * Z3 – Input1;
$Z2 = Factor2 * Z1;
$Z3 = Z1 + Z2;
To solve such standard differential equation systems, SIMIT uses a numerical solution method
based on the Runge-Kutta-Merson method.
Like in the definition of the the calculation order, the SIMIT global view accesses the simulation
project in this case as well: SIMIT not only handles the differential equations of a component,
but all the differential equations of the entire simulation project in a closed manner, which
means the differential equation system of the entire simulation model is mapped onto the
numerical solution method.
Corrections for the state variables

The simulation cannot generally take into account all aspects of reality. A simulation model is
thus simplified compared to reality and also applies only within a range defined by the assumed
requirements. The defined range for state variables can generally be exceeded when solving
differential equations. Typical cases include the calculation of the fill level of a container. In
these cases, the state variables must be checked after solving the differential equation system
and corrected if necessary.
SIMIT allows you to write a conditional equation for correcting state variables. You simply
identify the correction value for the state by prefixing it with a # sign and write a correction
equation as in the example below:
#Mass = {@Mass < 0.0: 0.0; ELSE @Mass};
In this equation, the value for Mass is set to 0.0 if the solution method has calculated a value
that is less than 0.0; otherwise the value for Mass is identical to the calculated value @Mass.
Accessing continuous state variables

As mentioned above, continuous state variables are also calculated cyclically. The values are
thus only available at the times defined by the cycle. In a given time step you can only access
the value in the previous calculation cycle and the newly-calculated or corrected value. As can
be seen in the list below, you access the newly-calculated value for a state Z by prefixing it with
an @ sign.
Table 7-11 Accessing continuous state variables
Notation Access
Z Value from the previous computation cycle
@Z New value after integration of the state equation
#Z Corrected value that is to be used in the next computation cycle instead of @Z

7.6.3.12 Accessing discrete state variables

For discrete state variables you define the initial value or the new value in each cycle with the
aid of an explicit equation. The new value for a state Z is identified by prefixing it with an @ sign.
Table 7-12 Accessing discrete state variables
Notation Access
@Z New value
7.6.4 The instruction-oriented approach
The instruction-oriented approach is used to formulate user functions or entire function blocks.
No equations are used within user-defined functions and blocks; these are replaced by
program commands that are executed in the defined order. The syntax is identical within the
function or block definition.
7.6.4.2 Functions
Functions are created in the Functions sub-aspect of the behavior description. Double-click
the Functions entry in the navigation bar to open the text editor provided.
A function consists of the following elements:
● The keyword FUNCTION,
● The function declaration
● The instruction part and
● The keyword END_FUNCTION.
Syntax:
FUNCTION Function_name (Data_type Output_variable1 [, Data_type
Output_variable2]) : (Data_type Input_variable1 [, Data_type
Input_variable2])
Instruction_part
END_FUNCTION
Only the basic data types binary, integer and analog are permitted as data types for the input
and output variables.
Example:
FUNCTION Trigonometry (analog y1, analog y2) :
(analog x1, analog x2, binary state)
if (state) {
y1 = _sin(x1);
y2 = _tan(x2);
}

else {
y1 = 0.0;
y2 = 0.0;
}
END_FUNCTION
This function can then be called as follows in the initialization part or in the cyclic calculation:
(Out1, Out2) = Trigonometry(In1, In2, In3);
7.6.4.3 Blocks
You can add as many blocks as you like to the initialization or cyclic calculation and use an
instruction-oriented behavior description within these blocks as with functions.
A block consists of the following elements:
● The keyword BLOCK,
● The instruction part and
● The keyword END_BLOCK.
Syntax:
BLOCK
Instruction_part
END_BLOCK
The instructions within a block are carried out in exactly the same order that you defined them.
The order in which the blocks are calculated as a whole, however, is determined by SIMIT
based on dependencies in the same way as for the equation-based approach. SIMIT analyzes
which variables of the behavior description are calculated within a block, that is, which are
changed and to which there is only read access.
If you change a variable in more than one block, for example, by setting an output variable in
two blocks, this creates a contradiction that SIMIT is unable to resolve. Multiple variable
definitions of this type are therefore not permitted.
7.6.4.4 Local variables

You can define local variables within the behavior description for initialization or cyclic
calculation. These can then be used in all blocks. You can find additional information on this in
section:Local variables (Page 355). But you can also define local variables within a function or
a block:
Data_type Name[,Name];
Example:
binary b1, b2, b3;

These variables are then only valid within the block or the function in which they are defined.
The data types listed in the table below are permitted for these variables.
Table 7-13 Data types for variables in blocks and functions
Data type Meaning Value range Default

binary, bool Binary values True/False False
analog, dou‐ Floating point values ±5.0 × 10 −324
to ±1.7 × 10
308
0.0
ble
integer, long Integer values −9.223.372.036.854.775.808 bis 0
9.223.372.036.854.775.807
byte Integer values 0 to 255 0
sbyte Integer values −128 to 127 0
ushort Integer values 0 to 65535 0
short Integer values −32.768 to 32.767 0
uint Integer values 0 to 4,294,967,295 0
int Integer values −2.147.483.648 to 2.147.483.647 0
ulong Integer values 0 to 18,446,744,073,709,551,615 0
text, string Character string (text)
The name of a local variable must contain only letters, digits and the underscore character, and
must start with a letter.
Here again the local variables in the block are only used to save interim results that will be
needed again in the same processing step. If you wish to access calculated values again in the
next calculation step, always create time-discrete state variables rather than local variables.
7.6.4.5 Fields
You can also define local variables as fields (arrays):
Data_type Name[Dimension];
The dimension must be an integer constant. You can also define a field with values:
Data_type Name[] = {Value1, Value2, …};
In this case, the dimension is automatically obtained from the number of defined values. The
field elements are initialized with the values specified in the definition.
7.6.4.6 Constants
The constants you can use will depend on the data type of the result variable. The constants for
each data type are described in the table below.
Data type Constants

Binary value "FALSE" or "TRUE"
Floating point value Decimal fraction with a dot as the decimal mark, for example "125.61"
Exponential notation, for example "62.2e-4"
Integer value Sequence of digits without thousands separator, for example "125985"

7.6.4.7 Loops
DO loop
Syntax:
do
Instruction_list;
while (Condition);
Example:
i = 0;
do
{
i++;
v[i] = 5 * i;
}
while (i < 10)
FOR loop
Syntax:
for (Initialization; Termination_condition; Iteration)
Instruction list
You can assign initial values to variables in the initialization part. The variables must first have
been declared. The termination condition determines how many passes are made through the
loops. The iteration is always carried out at the end of the loop.
Example:
for (i = 0; i < 10; i++)
k = k + 1;
WHILE loop
Syntax:
while (Condition)
Instruction_list;
The instructions in the while loop are executed for as long as the condition is true.
Example:
i = 0;
while (i < 10)
{
k++
i++;
}

7.6.4.8 Conditional branches
IF instruction
The IF instruction has the following syntax:
if (Condition)
Instruction_list;
else
Instruction_list;
The else branch is optional and is executed if the condition proves to be false.
SWITCH instruction
The SWITCH instruction is used to compare a variable with different constants.
Syntax:
switch (Variable)
{
case Constant1:
Instruction_list;
break;
case Constant2:
Instruction_list;
break;
[default:
Instruction_list;
break;]
}
You can create any number of case blocks. The keyword break is needed and acts as an end
marker for instruction lists. The default block is optional.
Example:
switch (Status)
{
case 0:
Output = Input;
break;
case 1:
Output = Factor * Input;
break;
case 2:
Output = -1 * Factor * Input;
break;
default:
Output = 0.0;
break;
}
The variable that is looked up in the switch instruction must be either an integer or an
enumeration type. If it is an enumeration type, the alternatives in the case instruction are given
in single quotes.

7.6.4.9 System functions

You can access the system functions in blocks. Prefix an underscore "_" when calling a system
function, for example "_resetSimTime()".
The following system functions are available:
● message(C, T, D)
The text T is entered in the message system as a message of category C. The parameter D
specifies whether the message is incoming (D=True) or outgoing (D=False).
The category and message text must be simple, non-composite text constants.
Example: _message("ERROR", "error message", True);
● printlog(T)
The text T is written to a file opened by the script.
Text parameters, input variables and status variables can also be used in this function. In
this case, the current values at the time of the call are transferred.
Example: _printlog("calculated value: " + Z + "seconds.");
● resetSimTime()
The simulation time is reset to zero.
● Tools.StringLength(S)
Returns the length of the text variable S as an integer.
● Tools.Substring(S,　I, L)
Returns part of the text variable S, starting from position I and length L.
● Tools.CharAt(S,　I)
Returns the character of the text variable S at position I. The return value is of the
type char. To receive the numeric code of the character, use the _trunc2byte()
function.
● Tools.ConvertToInteger(S,　I,　L, B)
Returns the numerical value that is represented by the text variable S; only the part from
position I with length L is included. B specifies the number base in which this number is
coded (2, 8, 10 or 16).
● Tools.ConvertToInteger(S,　B)
Returns the numerical value that is represented by the text variable S. B specifies the
number base in which this number is coded (2, 8, 10 or 16).
You can find additional functions in the section: Function calls for mathematical standard
functions (Page 360)

7.6.4.10 Operators
The following operators are available within the functions and blocks. In the table below they
are arranged in order from highest to lowest priority. Where several operators appear together
in a section, they have the same priority.
Table 7-14 Operators
Operation Notation
Parentheses (expression)
Function call Function name (parameter list)
Increment I++
Decrement I−−
Increment ++I
Decrement −−I
Unary plus (sign) +Z
Arithmetic negation −Z
Bitwise complement ~I
Logical negation !B
Multiplication Z*Z
Division Z/Z
Modulo remainder Z%Z
Addition Z+Z
Subtraction Z−Z
Bitwise left shift I << J
Bitwise right shift I >> J
Less than comparison Z<Z
Greater than comparison Z>Z
Less than or equal to comparison Z <= Z
Greater than or equal to comparison Z >= Z
Equality Z == Z or B == B
Inequality Z != Z or B != B
Bitwise AND I&I
Bitwise exclusive OR I^I
Bitwise inclusive OR I|I
Logical AND B && B
Logical OR B || B
Conditional expression B ? Expression : Expression

Operation Notation
Simple assignment B = B or Z = Z
Composite assignments Z *= Z
Z /= Z
Z += Z
Z −= Z
I <<= J
I >>= J
I &= I
I ^= I
I |= I
The type of permitted operand is divided into the listed groups of the table below:
Table 7-15 Operand data types
Title Data types

B binary, bool
I integer, sbyte, byte, short, ushort, int, uint, long, ulong
J sbyte, byte, short, ushort, int
Z analog, float, double, integer, sbyte, byte, short, ushort, int, uint, long, ulong
For all assignments it should be noted that it is not possible to assign from a larger to a smaller
data type. The table below lists the assignments that are permitted.
Table 7-16 Data type conversion in assignments
Target data type Permitted assignment data types

binary, bool binary, bool
sbyte sbyte
byte byte
short short, byte, sbyte
ushort ushort, byte
int int, short, ushort, sbyte, byte
uint uint, ushort, byte
integer, long integer, long, int, uint, short, ushort, sbyte, byte
ulong ulong, uint, ushort, byte
float float, integer, long, ulong, int, uint, short, ushort, sbyte, byte
analog, double analog, double, float, integer, long, ulong, int, uint, short, ushort, sbyte, byte
There are functions for rounding or truncating the integer component when converting the data
type. You can find additional information in the section:Function calls for mathematical
standard functions (Page 360).

7.6.4.11 Accessing state variables

You cannot access state variables from functions. You must pass state variables in the function
call, if necessary. Within blocks you can access only discrete state variables. The notation
shown in the table below must be used for this access.
Table 7-17 Accessing discrete state variables
Notation Access
@Z New value
7.6.5 Internal variables and constants

The system variables that you can use as constants are listed in the table below.
Table 7-18 System constants
Name Data type Description

_NAME text The name of the component instance
_TA analog Configured sampling time (=cycle time) in microseconds
_Time analog Current simulation time in milliseconds
_ta analog Configured sampling time (=cycle time) in seconds
_load analog – Reserved –
_scriptmode binary "True" while a script is running
_PI analog Pi (3.14159...)
_E analog Euler's constant (2.71828... )
_GRAVITY analog Gravitational constant (9.81)
In conveyor technology component types you may also use the system variables that are listed
in the table below. These variables allow you to evaluate the dimensions of a component in its
behavior description.
Table 7-19 System variables to determine component dimensions

_WIDTH analog Width (unscaled) of the component in pixels
_HEIGHT analog Height (unscaled) of the component in pixels
_SCALEX analog Horizontal scaling of the component
_SCALEY analog Vertical scaling of the component
_TECHSCALE analog Scale of the chart on which the component is placed (in mm
per pixel)

Table 7-20 System variables to determine the system time

_t_sec integer Second
_t_min integer Minute
_t_hour integer Hour
_t_day integer Day
_t_mon integer Month
_t_year integer Year
7.6.6 The characteristic parameter type

Parameters can have the data type characteristic. It allows you to use one or more
characteristics in a component. Note that you cannot create a vector of characteristics. The
"number" of such a parameter is therefore always set to "1".
The use of such a parameter (P) that maps an input value (IN) onto an output value (OUT)
differs according to the description approach used:
● Instruction-oriented:
OUT = _characteristic(P, IN);
● Equation-oriented:
OUT = _characteristic(P[ALL], IN);


Libraries 8
8.1 Basic library
8.1.1 General
The basic library of SIMIT contains elementary functions for creating simulations, i.e. for
modelling plant and machine behavior. These functions are provided in the form of component
types and controls. This following sections describe in detail the individual component types
and controls contained in the SIMIT basic library.
8.1.1.2 Component symbols

Component types are instantiated as components in order to create a simulation. To do this,
select the required component type with the mouse and drag it into a chart. Each instance of a
component is represented by a type-specific symbol in a chart. The symbol for a component
type, its name, its version, the library to which it belongs, its UID and the number of simulation
tags are displayed in the preview in the figure below. Click on the component type in the library
to select it.
Every symbol has connectors with names and a label or graphic that clearly shows the function
of the component on charts (see the figure below). The symbols are designed so that the
function of both the component and the connectors can be understood intuitively.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library

① Labeling / graphics
② Output connector
③ Connector name
④ Input connector
Components are represented by the type-specific symbol in charts. Click on the relevant
symbol to select a component in a chart. A blue frame then appears around the symbol for the
selected component. Simply hold down the mouse button to drag the symbol and to move it
within the chart.
Some components have handles on the selection frame. These handles are used to change the
size of the symbol.
Components such as connectors have handles on the left and right of the selection frame as
shown in the figure below under (a). When you roll the cursor over the handles, its appearance
changes as shown in the figure below under (b). Hold down the left mouse button to move the
handles and thus change the width of the symbol as shown in the figure below under (c).
For components such as ADD, the selection frame has handles at the top and bottom. These
handles are used to adjust the height of the symbol to suit the number of inputs. Simply click on
the top or bottom gripper, hold down the left mouse button and drag it up or down.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
The formula components have handles on all sides and at every corner of the selection frame.
These allow you to adjust both the width and the number of inputs. The handles at the corners
of the symbol allow you to make these two settings at the same time.
8.1.1.3 Symbols for the controls

When you create a simulation, controls are handled in the same way as component types,
which means they are positioned in a chart with their symbol. Controls that you selected from
the library appear in the preview with their symbol, their designation and a brief description of
their function.
When the simulation starts, controls act as active elements and they are represented
accordingly as active controls by their symbols as seen in figure below under (b). If there is no
active simulation, the symbols represent passive controls and are displayed as such as seen
in figure below under (a).
Controls, like components, are represented by the type-specific symbol in charts. Simply click
on a symbol to select it. The symbol of the selected control then appears with a blue selection
frame; simply hold down the left mouse button to drag the symbol and move it within the chart.
Use the handles on the selection frame to change the size of the symbol.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
8.1.1.4 Structure of the simulation model

A simulation model in SIMIT is created by placing components from the available libraries
(predefined or self-defined) onto charts. The connectors of the individual components are then
connected to each other. Only connectors of the same type can be connected.
Connectors to the flow network are represented by a black unfilled circle on the components.
Connectors to the flow network that are connected are represented by a gray filled circle. If
multiple components are connected via one connector, an internal node is created
automatically. This is represented by a black dot in the connecting line. All flow network
connectors must be connected.
Other connectors are represented using triangles.
● A red unfilled triangle signifies an unconnected output.
● A red filled triangle signifies a connected output.
● A green unfilled triangle signifies an unconnected input.
● A green filled triangle signifies a connected input.
Inputs and outputs do not have to be connected.
8.1.1.5 Component connectors

Component connectors from the Basic Library are inputs or outputs. Inputs (green triangles)
are arranged on the left and outputs (red triangles) appear on the right of the symbol. To visually
emphasize the direction in which the connectors work, the input triangles point into the symbol
while the output triangles point out of the symbol.
Inputs and outputs that belong together from a functional point of view are arranged opposite
one another in the symbol for a component if possible. In the above example of the integrator,
these are input X and integrator output Y, for example. Inputs and outputs that belong together
from a functional point of view are also grouped together and are separated from other groups
by spaces. This means that the functional interactions created by interconnecting components
can be more easily identified in charts. In the example from the section: Component symbols
(Page 375), the following three groups are formed:
● Inputs X and T for calculating the integral value at output Y,
● the limits UL and LL with their binary feedback and
● set point SP and set command SET for setting the integrator output.
The function described by the integral

< ෾; GW
7
can thus easily be assigned to connectors X, T and Y. Connectors are only given names in the
symbol if the function of that connector is not obvious.
All inputs and outputs are either binary (logical), analog or integer inputs or outputs. Complex
connector types are not used in the components of the Basic Library. One exception is the
PROFIdrive type connector that is used to connect the header component and the device-
specific component in the PROFIDRIVE library. The values of the binary inputs or outputs are
designated by zero and one or, alternatively, by False and True.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
8.1.1.6 Connectors for controls

Controls for entering signals have only one output as their connector in form of a red triangle on
the right side of the symbol (see the table below). A green triangle on the left side of the symbol
identifies the input to the display controls. The signal splitter control has only one connector
which is always invisible.
Input control slider
Output-control bar graph display
As with components, the connectors for controls are either binary (logical), analog or integer
inputs or outputs.
8.1.1.7 Connecting I/O
The connectors for controls and components can be connected to one another if the following
rules are observed:
1. Only inputs may be connected to outputs.
2. An output can only be connected to one input, while an input may be connected to multiple
outputs.
3. Connectors to be connected must be of the same type.
Connectors can be connected in different ways:
● Connecting line
● Overlapping connectors
● By implicit connections.
In the first two cases, the connection is made graphically in the work area of the chart editor.
The chart editor is designed so that the rules for connecting connectors defined above are
automatically followed.
Implicit connections are made by changing the settings in the properties of the inputs or outputs
of components to be connected.
Connecting with connecting lines

If you want to create a connection between the output of the Selection component and the
input T of the integrator, for example, move the cursor over one of the two connectors. When
the cursor changes to a cross, as seen in the figure below under (a), you can click or hold down
the mouse button to create the connection. If you then move the cursor, a blue rubber band
indicates the connection between the connector and the cursor.
Now move the cursor over the connector to be connected. When the connector to be connected
is visually highlighted, as seen in the figure below under (b), the connection can be completed.
If you held down the mouse button to open the connection, release the button to close the
connection. If you opened the connection with a mouse click, click on the highlighted connector

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
to close the connection. When the connection is closed, the rubber band is automatically
replaced with a connecting line with right angles and the triangles of the connected connectors
are filled in with color, as shown in the figure below under (c).
To delete connecting lines, first click on the connecting line to be deleted. The connecting line
then changes to a thick blue line as in the figure below and can be deleted by going to "Edit >
Cut" in the menu bar or with the "Del" delete key.
If a connection line selected, this connection can be manually edited.
Connecting by superimposing connectors

Connecting by superimposing connectors is done by positioning two components and/or
controls to be connected on the chart so that the input of one component lies directly above the
output of the other component to be connected.
The figure below compares this type of connection (b) with the connecting line method (a). The
two connectors that are connected by superimposition become invisible.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Note
If the connectors do not become invisible when they are overlapping, the connectors are not of
the same type and thus cannot be connected.
Implicit connections
Implicit connections are made by changing the settings in the properties of the inputs and
outputs to be connected of components and/or controls. To do this, open the property view of
the component (see figure below) and follow these steps:
1. Make the input or output to be connected invisible ( ).
Click the or symbol to toggle between input visible and input invisible.
Note
An invisible input or output is not displayed on the symbol for the component and thus
cannot be connected to another output or input using connecting lines.
2. Set the selection field for value/signal specification to signal specification ( ).

3. Enter the signal to be connected with component name (source) and connector name.
The procedure is the same for a control. Because a control does not allow you to select a value/
signal, the second step is omitted and the output to be connected may be entered directly after
toggling to invisible.
8.1.1.8 Setting inputs

Unconnected inputs may be preassigned with values. You can enter the value in the
● connector box for the input on the chart or in the
● property view for the component
.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Double-click in the connector box to open the field for entering the value (see figure below). To
complete your input, either press Return or click in the chart outside the connector box.
To enter a value in the property view, navigate to the relevant input and click in the input field
to open it (see figure below). To complete your input, either press Return or click in the property
view outside the input field.
Input of True and 1 or False and 0 are equivalent for binary parameters. Binary values are
always displayed as True or False.
You can set inputs in the ways described above even when the simulation has started. In this
case, however, the input will only take effect for the duration of the started simulation, which
means modified input values are reset to their original values when the simulation ends.
8.1.1.9 Properties of components
The properties of components can be accessed in the properties window. To display the
properties of a component in the property view, right-click or left-click on the component. If a
simulation is running, you can only display the properties by right-clicking. The properties of a
component are divided into:
● General properties
● Properties of the inputs
● Properties of the outputs
● Parameters
● States

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
General properties
General properties of components are the name and the time slice of the component, the
unique identifier (UID) of the component type, the position of the component and the width and
height of the symbol.
The name must be unique for all components and controls used in the project, which means the
project must not contain multiple components and/or controls with the same name. When you
drag a component from the library onto a chart, it is automatically assigned a name. This name
is made up of the designation of the component type and a number for the component type that
is unique across the entire project.
Check the Show Name check box to display the name of the component on the chart.
Properties of the inputs

Inputs may be visible or invisible and the signal linked to an input or the input value may be set.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Each input has the following properties:

● Visibility
In the first column, you can toggle between Input visible ( ) and Input invisible ( ). If the
input is connected with a connecting line, you cannot toggle between them. In the figure
above, for example, the two first inputs X and T are connected; they can therefore not be set
to invisible.
● Name
The name of the input is displayed right-justified in the second column.
● References
The third column is used to search for references, which means for objects that use this
input.
● Selection value or signal
The fourth column is used to toggle between value ( ) or signal ( ) as the selection
for the input. This selection is not active if the input is connected with a connecting line.
● Value or signal
In the fifth column, the input value is set if value was selected. If signal was selected, the
output connected with the connecting line is displayed or the output to be connected
implicitly may be set.
The representation of the properties changes when the simulation is running.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
In this case input values are always displayed instead of signals, and it is possible to set each
input value.
● Display On/Off
In the first column, the value at the input of the component can be shown ( ) or hidden
( ). When the simulation is started, the display is switched on for non-connected inputs and
switched off for connected inputs. The display cannot be switched on for invisible inputs.
The figure below shows a component in which the display is switched on for all input values,
which means even for values at connected inputs:
● Forcing input
In the fourth column you can switch forcing on ( ) or off ( ) for every connected input.
● Input value
The fifth column is used to display or set the input value.
Properties of the outputs
1DPH 5HIHUHQFHV
9LVLELOLW\ ,PSOLFLWLQWHUFRQQHFWLRQ
Each output has the following properties:

● Visibility
In the first column, you can toggle between visibility ( ) and invisibility ( ) of the output. If
the output is connected with a connecting line or by overlapping connectors, you cannot
toggle between them.
● Name
The name of the output is displayed right-justified in the second column.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
● References
The third column is used to search for references, which means for objects that use this
output.
● Implicit interconnection
In the fourth column, you can set whether this output is to be implicitly connected.
Output is implicitly connected
Output is not implicitly connected

If implicit connection is selected, an input field opens. Enter here the signal source to be
interconnected and name.
The representation of the properties changes when the simulation is running.
● Display On/Off
In the first column, the value at the output of the component on the chart can be shown ( )
or hidden ( ). When the simulation starts, the display is switched off for all outputs. The
display cannot be switched on for invisible outputs. The figure below shows a component in
which the display is switched on for all output values.
● Forcing output
In the fourth column, you can switch forcing on ( ) or off ( ) for every connected output.
● Output value
The fifth column is used to display or set the output value.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Displaying the input and output values of components

When the simulation is running, the display of individual current input and output values of
components can be switched on in the property view of the component by means of the
button. To switch on the display of all inputs and outputs of components on a chart with a single
mouse click, you can use the same command in the chart toolbar.
If you select one or more components before executing the command, the switch applies only
to the selected components. If no components are selected, the switch applies to all
components on the chart.
Parameters
Each parameter is displayed with its name and value in the property view:
States
States are displayed with their name and initial values in the property view. When the simulation
is started, the current values are displayed for each state.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Displaying vectors in the properties window

Vectors of inputs, outputs, parameters and states are displayed in the property view grouped
and in a numerically correct sequence, as shown by way of example in the figure below.
The vector elements can be expanded and collapsed. The figure below shows a vector with
collapsed elements.
For connectors with complex connection types an additional expandable and collapsible level
has been added.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
8.1.1.10 Component error messages

The components are implemented so that critical or nonsensical parameters or input values do
not cause unstable component behavior. The component outputs an error message if
impermissible values are specified or if input signals are not within the designated range.
In addition, outputs of the component can be set to a defined value in the event of an error to
avoid unstable output values. This set value remains in effect until the error condition is
eliminated.
All error messages from components in the basic library are assigned to the ERROR message
category.
Error messages are generated as so-called incoming and outgoing messages. The incoming
message is generated when the error occurs; the outgoing message is generated when the
error condition has been resolved. Both messages have the same message text; the difference
is that the text of outgoing messages is placed in parentheses.
Note
If you use the ERROR message category in your own messages which you generate using
the Message component from the Trend and Messaging Editor, for example, you will be unable
to distinguish between messages from components of the basic library and your own
messages based on the message category.
8.1.1.11 Properties of controls
The properties of controls can be accessed in the property view. To display the properties of a
component in the property view, right-click or left-click on the component. If a simulation is
running, you can only display the properties by right-clicking. Each control has
● General properties and
● Properties for the connector.
Controls whose representation can be changed also have
● Properties for the view.
You can find additional information on this in section: Controls (Page 554).

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
General properties
General properties of controls are the name, the time slice, the unique identifier (UID), the
position as well as the width and height of the control.
The name must be unique for all components and controls used in the project, which means the
project must not contain multiple controls and/or components with the same name. When you
drag a control from the library onto a chart, it is automatically assigned a name. This name is
made up of the designation of the control and a number for the control that is unique across the
entire project.
Check the Show Name check box to display the name of the control on the chart.
Controls may also have other specific, general properties. You can find additional information
on this in the section: Controls (Page 554).
Properties of connectors
Connectors may be visible or invisible. The figure below shows the property view with the
connector of a control by way of example.
Each connector has the following properties:

● Visibility
In the first column, you can toggle between visibility ( ) and invisibility ( ) of the connector.
If the connector is connected with a connecting line or by superimposing connectors, you
cannot toggle between them.
● Name
The name of the connector is displayed right-justified in the second column.
● Signal
In the third column, the connected signal is displayed or can be set for invisible connectors.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
8.1.2 Connectors
The CONNECTORS directory of the Basic Library contains connectors:

● A global connector,
● The I/O connectors, Input and Output
● The special connector, Unit
● The Topology connector is only used with special SIMIT modules or libraries and is
therefore not described here.
The connectors of the basic library have the following shared characteristics:
● The connectors of the global connector and of the I/O connectors have no type. This means
the connectors assume the connection type of the connector of the connected component
or control.
Note
A type check, which means a check to identify whether the connections connected via
connectors are of the same type, is carried out automatically before the simulation is started.
If connectors are connected with connectors of an incorrect type, a corresponding message is
output by the consistency check and the start of the simulation is cancelled.
● The width of the connector symbol on a chart can be adjusted to match the length of the
connector name. To set the width of a connector, click on the symbol. A blue frame with
handles appears on the right and left of the frame (a). If you move the cursor by means of
a gripper, the shape of the cursor changes (b). Then press and hold down the left mouse
button to change the width by moving the mouse pointer to the to the left or right (c).
● The connector name is displayed in the connector symbol.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
8.1.2.1 Global connector

The global connector Connector is used to connect components and/or controls across the
boundaries of individual charts.
The global connector may be used as either an output connector or an input connector. Its
symbol is illustrated in the figure below.
If the global connector is connected to the output of a component or control, the connector on
the right side of the connector disappears: the connector is now used as an output connector.
If the global connector is connected to the input of a component or control, the connector on the
left side of the connector disappears: the connector is now used as an input connector.
For a connection between an output connector and one or more input connectors, all of these
connectors receive the same name: the connector name.
Note
Global connector name must be unique in the entire simulation project.
If you drag the global connector from the library onto a chart, the connector is assigned a name
that consists of the term Connector and a unique sequence number. A connector name can be
entered directly in the symbol. Double-click on the connector to open the input box, then press
Return or click outside of the input box to confirm your input.
The connector name can also be entered in the property view. The connector name is the only
property of the global connector.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
8.1.2.2 I/O connectors

I/O connectors establish the link to signals in the SIMIT couplings. An I/O connector can
establish a link to signals from any SIMIT coupling.
I/O connectors exist in the form of Input and Output connectors as shown below.
Input connector Input
Output connector Output
Connections between coupling signals and I/O connectors can be

● a connection from one or more Output connectors to a single output signal of a coupling, or
● a connection from a coupling input signal to an input connector Input.
The connection is established by setting the name of the coupling and the name of the coupling
signal in the property view of the I/O connector.
If you do not want the name of the coupling to be displayed on the chart, you may deselect the
option Display coupling name.
8.1.2.3 Topological connector

Topological connections can be realized beyond the respective chart borders using topological
connectors. This connector is present in the CONTEC and in the FLOWNET library. The basic
method of operation is the same.
You can find information on the topological connector in the CONTEC library in the section:
Topological connector in the CONTEC library (Page 807).
You can find information on the topological connector in the FLOWNET library in the section:
Topological connector in the CHEM-BASIC and FLOWNET libraries (Page 586).
8.1.2.4 Unit connector

The Unit connector is a special type of connector that can only be used in conjunction with
"SIMATIC components" or components with integrated data record communication. In
combination with these components, the unit connector establishes relationships between
components and modules of the following couplings:
● SIMIT Unit
● PLCSIM

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
● PLCSIM Advanced
● PRODAVE
See also
Linking SIWAREXU components to the coupling (Page 525)
Components for SIMATIC (Page 536)
8.1.3 Standard components
8.1.3.1 Differentiating standard components

The standard component types in the Basic Library form the Standard Library. They are
contained in the STANDARD directory. The component types are divided into component types
according to function with
● Analog functions,
● Binary functions,
● Integer functions,
● Conversion functions,
● Mathematical functions and
● Various auxiliary functions.
8.1.3.2 Analog functions
General information about the analog functions

All component types with analog functions are contained in the AnalogBasic
and AnalogExtended directories of the Standard Library. AnalogBasic contains the basic
analog functions, while AnalogExtended holds the extended analog functions.
Basic analog functions
Introduction
The four basic analog functions of Addition, Subtraction, Multiplication and Division, which
means the four basic arithmetic operations, are stored as component types in the AnalogBasic
directory of the Standard Library.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
ADD – Addition
Symbol
Function
The ADD component type maps the sum of the analog values at the n inputs x1 to xn onto the
output y:
Q
\ ෤[ L [ [ [Q
L
The number of inputs n is variable and can be set to any value between 2 and 32. All inputs are
set to zero by default.
SUB - Subtraction
Symbol
Function
The SUB component type maps the difference between the analog values at the inputs x1
and x2 onto the output y according to
y = x1 − x2
All inputs are set to zero by default.
MUL - Multiplication
Symbol

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Function
The MUL component type maps the product of the analog values at the n inputs x1 to xn onto
the output y:
Q
\ ෢[
L
L [[[Q
set to one by default.
DIV – Division
Symbol
Function
The DIV component type maps the quotients of the analog values at the inputs x1 and x2 onto
the output y according to
y = x1 / x2
Input x1 is set to zero by default, while the divisor input x2 is set to one by default.
The value of the divisor x2 must not be zero. If the divisor becomes zero during the simulation,
the error message "DIV: division by zero" (message category ERROR) is generated and output
y is set to zero.
Extended analog functions
AFormula – analog formula component
Symbol
Function
The component type AFormula allows the use of explicit algebraic functions. This function f
calculates a value in relation to the n input values xi. The function value is assigned to the
output y:
y = f(x1, ..., xn)

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
The number n of inputs can be varied between 1 and 32. Only the inputs that are available
according to the number currently set may be used in the formula.
The following operators are used in expressions formula:
Table 8-1 Operators in formulas for the AFormula component
Operator Function
+ Addition
− Subtraction
/ Division
* Multiplication
( Opening parenthesis
) Closing parenthesis
Numeric constant Floating point numbers, also in exponential notation
Function calls Standard mathematical functions
Note
When entering floating point numbers, use a decimal point (and not a comma).
Note
There is also no check in the formula component to determine whether the arguments of the
formula have valid values. If division by zero occurs during the simulation in the formula
calculation, output y has the value Inf. If an argument of a formula is undefined during the
simulation, as in the case of a division of zero by zero, output y has the value NaN (not a
number).
These irregular output values will then be propagated in the model in all values that depend on
this output. Your simulation will thus enter an undefined state. To avoid this situation, make sure
that the inputs of the formula component can only assume values that ensure the validity of the
arguments in the formula.
There is no check in the formula component to determine whether all the set inputs are used in
the specified formula.
The mathematical functions listed in the table below are available as standard mathematical
functions.
Table 8-2 Mathematical functions in formulas for the AFormula component
Formula Function
sqrt(x) \ [ ; x ≥0
fabs(x) y = |x|
exp(x) y = ex
pow(x, z) y = XZ;
log(x) Natural logarithm: y = ln(x); x > 0
log10(x) Common logarithm: y = lg(x); x > 0
ceil(x) Smallest integer greater than or equal to x

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Formula Function
floor(x) Largest integer less than or equal to x
rand() Integral random value y, 0 ≤ y ≤ 32767
sin(x) y = sin(x); angle x in radians
cos(x) y = cos(x); angle x in radians
tan(x) y = tan(x); angle x in radians; x ≠±(2n+1)π/2
asin(x) y = arcsin(x); −π/2 ≤ y ≤ π/2
acos(x) y = arccos(x); 0 ≤y ≤ π
atan(x) y = arctan(x); −π/2 ≤ y ≤ π/2
atan2(z, x) y = arctan(x / z); −π ≤ z ≤ π
sinh(x) y = sinh(x); angle x in radians
cosh(x) y = cosh(x); angle x in radians
tanh(x) y = tanh(x); angle x in radians
Note
You can use the function y= rand() to generate random numbers y within a specified range
YMIN ≤ y ≤ YMAX using the formula YMIN + rand() * (YMAX–YMIN) / 32767.0.
Parameter
Parameter name Description Unit Default value

Formula Formula that calculates output y in terms – X1
of inputs xi.
Example of a block with three inputs X1 to X3:

● (X1+X2)*X3
The formula is displayed at the top of the component symbol.
Average
Symbol

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Function
The component type Average maps the average of the n inputs X1 to Xn at output Y.
The number of inputs n is variable and can be set to any value between 2 and 32. The default
value of all inputs is "0".
Arithmetic mean
The arithmetic mean is the sum of all inputs Xn divided by the number n.
Q
; ;
;Q
෤

< Q ;L
L Q
Median
All inputs Xn are arranged in (ascending) order by value. The median is the value exactly in the
middle.
 [ Q QXQJHUDGH

< 
 Q Q
[ [ Q JHUDGH

Geometric mean
The geometric mean is the nth root of the product of all inputs Xn.
෢; ; ; ;Q
Q Q
< L
L
If the product is negative, the error message "Average – geometric mean: the product of all
inputs is negative" (message category: ERROR) is generated and output Y is set to "0".
Parameter

CalculationType Type of mean; Arithmetic mean, Median – Arithmetic mean
or Geometric mean
Characteristic
Symbol

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Function
The Characteristic component type is used to define the mapping of input value x onto output
value y defined by a characteristic:
y = fK(x)
Parameters

Characteristic Defines the characteristic to be used. – –
Open the characteristic editor with .

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Define characteristic
In this editor a characteristic is defined by specifying n interpolation points (xi, yi), i = 1, ..., n and
by selecting the type of Interpolation between these interpolation points.
There may be any number n of interpolation points. The type of interpolation may be either
constant or linear, in which case, the characteristic will take the form of a step curve or a
polyline. Polyline is the default mode.
Outside the interpolation point range (the interpolation range), the output values y are
extrapolated.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
For each of the two axes, which means for the horizontal x-axis and the vertical y-axis of the
characteristic chart, the following variables can be set in the properties of the chart:
● the minimum value and the maximum value,
● the scale division and
● the scale.
Both axes default to a linear scale with a scale division of ten, a minimum value of zero and a
maximum value of one hundred.
The scale may be set to either linear or logarithmic.
The characteristic function for n interpolation points is thus given as 0.0 for n = 0, y1 for n = 1 and
for n > 1 for the step curve using
 \IRU [ ื [

\  \L IRU [ L ෥ [ ื [L L Q
 \ IRU [ ! [
 Q Q
and for the polyline using
 \ ෥ \
 \ [ ෥ [ IRU [ ื [
 [ ෥ [
 \L ෥ \L ෥
\  \L ෥ [ ෥ [L ෥ IRU [ L ෥ [ ื [ L L Q
 [ L ෥ [ L ෥
 \Q ෥ \Q ෥
 \ Q [ ෥ [Q IRU [ ! [Q
 [ Q ෥ [ Q ෥

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Inserting interpolation points:

To insert a interpolation point into the chart, move the cursor to the required position. The
current coordinates are displayed at the cursor position. A new interpolation point is inserted at
the current position with a double-click.
Alternatively, you can also insert an interpolation point at the current position by using the
shortcut menu.
Removing interpolation points:

To remove an interpolation point, select it. The selected interpolation point changes its
appearance.
① Selected interpolation point

You can remove the selected interpolation point with <Delete> or with the shortcut menu.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Changing the coordinates of interpolation points

Select a interpolation point with a left-click and by dragging it to the required position while
keeping the left mouse button pressed. The interpolation point can only be moved within the
boundaries defined by the x-coordinates of its left and right neighbors.
You can also change both coordinates of the selected interpolation point in the properties.
Open the input by clicking in the input field, and then enter each desired value. Input is
confirmed by pressing Enter.
Importing and exporting interpolation points

You can import interpolation points from a file. The command from the toolbar of the
characteristic editor opens the dialog for selecting an Excel file in csv format. In this
interpolation point file there is one interpolation point per line, given as pairs of values with their
two coordinates: x-coordinate separator y-coordinate. If a dot "." is used as the decimal point,
the separator is a comma ",". If a comma "," is used as the decimal point, the separator is a
semicolon ";".
With the command from the toolbar of the characteristic editor, you can also export the
current interpolation points into a csv file where you can modify them, for example. A file is
written which contains all interpolation points as pairs of values (x-coordinate and y-
coordinate). The decimal point is a comma ","; the separator is a semicolon ";".
Compare – Comparison functions
Symbol
Function
The component type Compare compares the analog inputs x1 and x2. The binary output b is set
to 1 if the relational expression is true – otherwise, b is set to 0.
The selected comparison operator is displayed in the component symbol.
The width of the symbol can be changed to slightly offset the">=" and "<=" comparison
operators from the right edge of the symbol.
In SIMIT, analog variables are mapped to variables of the type double. A direct comparison for
equality or inequality is therefore not useful. double variable equality is only possible within the

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
accuracy defined by the computer (machine accuracy). Equality can be checked using the
model illustrated in the figure below, for example.
Alternatively, a functionally identical model can be used, for example with the AFormula
formula block.
The difference between the two variables x1 and x2 is calculated. The amount of this difference
is then compared against a definable positive limit ε:
 LI _[ ෥ [ _ ˢ
E 
 RWKHUZLVH
To check for inequality, only the "greater than" comparison should be used in the comparison
component in both of the illustrated models.
Note
You can create your own components to check for equivalence or non-equivalence based on
the explanatory notes provided above.
You can create macro components with the macro component editor, for example, or a
relational component extended to include these comparisons with the Component Type Editor
(CTE).

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Parameter

Comparison Specifies the type of comparison: – <
● Less than comparison (<), which
means
 LI [ [
E 
 RWKHUZLVH
● Less than or equal to comparison
(<=), which means
 LI [ ื [
E 
 RWKHUZLVH
● Greater than comparison (>), which
means
 LI [ ! [
E 
 RWKHUZLVH
● Greater than or equal to comparison
(>=), which means
 LI [ ุ [
E 
 RWKHUZLVH
DeadTime – Dead time element
Symbol
Function
You use the component type DeadTime to provide a dead time element. The analog value at
input x is passed to output y with an adjustable delay.
A step change in the input value x from zero to one thus gives a curve for the output value y as
shown in the figure below:

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Note
If you change the cycle time Δt in the project properties, the set dead times change accordingly.
In the component, the input values are saved and sent to the output after a delay according to
the selected dead time. Memory is allocated for n values according to the configured number
of delay cycles. All storage locations are initialized to zero. The binary input CLR can be used
to set the output value y and all storage locations n to zero.
Parameter

Delay_Cycles Delay time T , an integer multiple of the – 10
cycle time Δt
Maximum value: 128
The default value and a cycle time of
100 ms therefore result in a delay of one
second.
Filter
Symbol
Function
The Filter component type maps the average over time of the X input to output Y.
Arithmetic mean
The arithmetic mean is calculated by adding up the time values of the input Xn and dividing it
by the number of cycles n.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Q
;Q ;Q ;Q
෤
Q
< Q ;Q
L
L
Q
Median
All time values of the input Xn are put in (ascending) order by value. The median is the value
exactly in the middle.
 [ Q QXQJHUDGH

< 
 Q Q
[ [ Q JHUDGH

Geometric mean
The geometric mean is the nth root of the product of all times values of the input X.
Q
෢; ;Q ;Q ;QQ
Q Q
< Q L Q
L
If the product is negative, the error message "Filter – geometric mean: the product Xi is
negative" (message category: ERROR) is generated and output Y is set to "0".
Parameter

CalculationType Calculation method for the mean – Arithmetic mean
Number_Cycles Number of cycles considered – 3
Value range: 1 to 128
INT – Integration
Symbol
Function
The INT component type forms the integral with the time-specific analog input signal x:

\ ෾[ GW
7

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
The integral value is assigned to the analog output y.

For a step-shaped input signal of amplitude 1, the result is a linear ascending output signal as
shown in the figure below.
The integral value y is limited to an interval defined by the two limits UL (high limit) and LL (low
limit):
LL ≤ y ≤ UL.
The binary outputs ULR and LLR indicate that the integral value has reached the low or high
limit:
 LI \ ุ 8/
8/5 
 RWKHUZLVH
and
 LI \ ื //
//5 
 RWKHUZLVH
The low limit must be less than the high limit. If this condition is violated, the error message “INT:
limits do not match" (message category ERROR) is generated and output y is set to 0.
The time constant T for the integration must have a positive value. If T is not positive, the error
message "INT: zero or negative time constant" (message category ERROR) is generated and
output y is set to zero.
The default setting is 0 for the low limit and 100 for the high limit. The default setting for the time
constant T is 1 s. All other inputs are set to 0 by default.
The integration value y can be set to the value at input SP over the binary input SET: if SET is
set to one, the integration value y is set to the value at the SP input. In this case too, the
integration value is limited by LL and UL.
Parameter

Initial_Value Initial value of the integral value y when – 0.0
starting the simulation

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Operating window
The operating window shows the current function value as a percentage.
You can change the following values:
● Input value X even during the simulation
● Setpoint SP. Confirm the value with SET.
When the inputs SP, SET or X are connected to other components with signal lines, you must
first enable the respective signal isolator for manual operation.
Interval – Interval query
Symbol
Function
The Interval component type checks whether an input value x is within the closed interval
[xmin, xmax]. If the input value is within the specified interval, the binary output is set to one;
otherwise, it is set to zero:
 IRU

[PLQ ื [ ื [PD[
E 
 RWKHUZLVH
Parameter

xmin Low interval limit – 0
xmax High interval limit – 100
The high interval limit may not be less than the lower interval limit. If the high interval limit
becomes less than the low limit during the simulation, the error message "Interval_I: limits do
not match" (message category ERROR) is generated and output b is set to zero.
Limiter
Symbol

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Function
The Limiter component type maps an input value limited to the range from xmin to xmax onto the
output y:
 [PD[ IRU [ ุ [PD[


\ [ IRU [PLQ [ [PD[
 [ IRU [ ื [
 PLQ PLQ
The binary outputs bmin and bmax are set to one when the limiter takes effect, which means
 LI [ ุ [ PD[

EPD[ 
 RWKHUZLVH
and
 LI [ ื [ PLQ

EPLQ 
 RWKHUZLVH
Parameter

xmin Low limit – 0
xmax High limit – 100
The high limit must not be less than the low limit. If the low limit is equal to or greater than the
high limit when simulation is run, the error message "Limiter: limits do not match" (message
category ERROR) is generated and output y is set to zero.
MinMax – minimum and maximum value selection
Symbol
Function
The component type MinMax maps the minimum or maximum of the n inputs X1 to Xn to
output y. The number of inputs n is variable and can be set to any value between 2 and 32. The
default value of all inputs is 0.
The MIN or MAX mapping set is displayed in the component symbol as shown in the figure
below:

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Parameter

MinMax Type of extreme value to be calculated – MIN
Multiplexer
Symbol
Function
The component type Multiplexer interconnects one of the n inputs xi to output in y in line with the
value at the integer selection input i:
y = xi for 1 ≤ i ≤ n.
The number n of inputs xi is variable and can be set to a value of between 2 and 32. The default
value of all inputs is "0".
The value at the selection input i is limited internally to 1 through n, which means that i is set
to "1" or values less than 1 and i is set to n for values greater than n. In the default setting, the
first input xi is therefore interconnected with the output y.
PTn – nth order delay
Symbol
Function
The component type PTn provides an nth order delay.
With a first order delay, the function value y at the output follows the value x at the input with a
delay equal to the differential equation:

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
G\
[ ෥ \
GW 7
A step change in the input value x from 0 to 1 therefore results in an exponential curve for the
output value y (step response):
y = 1 − e−t/T
as illustrated in the figure below.
For higher-order delays, the output value y is obtained by concatenating first-order delays:
G] L
]L ෥ ෥ ]L L Q
GW 7
y = zn
Where zi, i = 1,...n, are the n states of the nth order delay. To illustrate, an nth order delay
corresponds to n first order delays connected in series.
To prevent the component behaving in an unstable manner for delay times that are too short,
the delay time constant T is limited to values that are greater than or equal to the cycle time of
the component. If the values at input T are less than the cycle time, the error message "PTn:
delay time below cycle time“ (message category ERROR) is generated. The default delay time
is 1 s. All other inputs of the component are set to 0 by default.
The binary input SET may be used to set the output value y and the state values zi, i = 1,...n, to
the value at the input SP: If SET is set to 1, these values are set to the value at the input SP.
Parameter

n Order of the delay – 1
Maximum value: 32
Initial_Value Initial value for the delay function states – 0.0

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Ramp – Ramp function
Symbol
Function
The component type Ramp increments or decrements its function value y in each increment of
the simulation by the value
˂W
ෙ\ 8/ ෥ //
7
where Δt is the simulation increment width. The ramp value y is incremented by Δy when the
"+" (UP) input has the value 1. If the "–" input DOWN has the value 1, the ramp value y is
decremented by Δy. If both the "+" and the "–" input are set to 1, the ramp value y does not
change.
The ramp value is limited to an interval defined by the two limits UL (high limit) and LL (low limit):
LL ≤ y ≤ UL.
The binary outputs ULR and LLR indicate that the ramp value has reached the low or high limit:
 LI \ ุ 8/
8/5 
 RWKHUZLVH
and
 LI \ ื //
//5 
 RWKHUZLVH
The low limit must be less than the high limit. If this condition is violated, the error message
"RAMP: limits do not match" (message category ERROR) is generated and output y is set to 0.
The time constant T must have a positive value. If T is not positive, the error message "Ramp:
zero or negative time constant" (message category ERROR) is generated and output y is set
to 0.
The default low limit is 0 and the default high limit 100. The time constant is set to 10 seconds
by default. All other inputs are set to 0 by default.
The binary input SET can be used to set the ramp value y to the value at the SP input: If SET is
set to 1, the ramp value y is set to the value at the input SP. Here too, the ramp value is limited by
LL and UL.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Parameter

Initial_Value Initial value of the ramp function – 0.0
Operating window
The operating window shows the current function value as a percentage.
You can change the following values:
● Ramp function value over "Down" and "Up" buttons even during simulation
● Setpoint SP. Confirm the value with SET.
When the inputs SP, SET, "Down" or "Up" are connected to other components with signal lines,
you must first enable the respective signal isolator for manual operation.
Selection – Analog switch
Symbol
Function
The component type Selection interconnects one of the two inputs x0 and x1 to output y in line
with the value of the binary input a.
If the selection input a = 0, input x0 is interconnected; if the selection input a = 1, input x1 is
interconnected:
[ LI D
\ 
[ LI D
The default value of all inputs is 0.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Tracking
Symbol
Function
The component type Tracking tracks the outputs value Y to input value X with an adjustable
gradient. You can set the positive gradient (G_up) and negative gradient (G_down) separately.
The unit of the gradients is 1/second. If the Y output corresponds to the X input, the Y output
value remains constant.
The binary input SET can be used to set the output value Yto the value at the SP input. If SET
is set to True, the output value Y is set to the value at the input SP.
Parameter

Initial_Value Initial value of the tracking function – 0.0
WeightedAverage – Weighted arithmetic mean
Symbol
Function
The component type Weighted Average maps the weighted arithmetic mean of the analog
inputs X1, X2, X3 and X4 at output Y with the weightings W1, W2, W3 and W4.
; : ; : ; : ; :
<
: : : :

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
The sum of W1, W2, W3 and W4 must not be "0". If the sum is equal to "0" when simulation is run,
the error message "Weighted_Average:sum of W1, W2, W3 and W4 is zero – division by zero"
(message categoryERROR) is generated and output Y is set to "0".
The default setting for inputs X1, X2, X3, X4, W3 and W4 is "0". The default setting for inputs W1
and W2 is 1.0.
8.1.3.3 Integer functions
Integer functions as component types

All component types with integer functions are contained in the IntegerBasic
and IntegerExtended directories of the standard library.
The four basic integer functions of Addition, Subtraction, Multiplication and Division, which
means the four basic arithmetic operations, are stored as component types in the IntegerBasic
directory of the standard library.
The symbols of these component types are blue to distinguish them from analog component
types.
The IntegerExtended directory of the standard library contains further integer functions in the
form of component types.
The symbols of these component types are blue to distinguish them from analog component
types.
Basic integer functions
ADD_I – Addition
Symbol
Function
The ADD_I component type maps the sum of the analog values at the n inputs x1 to xn onto the
output y:
Q
\ ෤[ L [ [ [Q
L

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
SUB_I – Subtraction
Symbol
Function
The SUB_I component type maps the difference between the integer values at the two inputs x1
and x2 onto the output y according to
y = x1 − x2
All inputs are set to zero by default.
MUL_I – Multiplication
Symbol
Function
The MUL_I component type maps the product of the integer values at the n inputs x1 to xn onto
the output y:
Q
\ ෢[
L
L [[[Q
DIV_I – Integer division
Symbol
Function
The DIV_I component type maps the quotients of the integral values at the inputs x1 and x2
according to

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
x1 = y · x2 + R
integer division with remainder. The integer quotient of the division is output at the y output and
the remainder of the integer division at the R output.
The divider at input x1 is set to zero by default, while the divisor input x2 is set to one by default.
The value of the divisor x2 must not be zero. If the devisor becomes zero during the simulation,
the error message "DIV_I: division by zero“ (message category ERROR) is generated and
output y and the remainder R are set to zero.
Extended integer functions
Compare_I – Compare functions
Symbol
Function
The component type Compare_I compares the integer inputs x1 and x2. The binary output b is
set to 1 if the relational expression is true. Otherwise, b is set to 0.
The selected comparison operator is displayed in the component symbol. To inset the relational
operators "<=", ">=" and "<>" from the right of the symbol, change the width of the symbol.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Parameters

Comparison Specifies the type of comparison: – <
● Less than comparison (<), which
means
 LI [ [
E 
 RWKHUZLVH
● Less than or equal to comparison
(<=), which means
 LI [ ื [
E 
 RWKHUZLVH
● Greater than comparison (>), which
means
 LI [ ! [
E 
 RWKHUZLVH
● "Greater than or equal to"
comparison (>=), which means
 LI [ ุ [
E 
 RWKHUZLVH
● Equal to comparison (=), which
means
 LI [ [
E 
 RWKHUZLVH
● Not equal to comparison (<>), which
means
 LI [ ำ [
E 
 RWKHUZLVH
Interval_I – Interval query
Symbol

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Function
The Interval_I component type checks whether an integer input value x is within the closed
interval [xmin, xmax]. If the input value falls within the set interval, the binary output is set to one;
otherwise it is zero:
 IRU

[PLQ ื [ ื [PD[
E 
 RWKHUZLVH
The high interval limit may not be less than the lower interval limit. If the high interval limit
becomes less than the low limit during the simulation, then the error message "Interval_I: limits
do not match" (message category ERROR) is generated and output b is set to zero.
Limiter_I – Limiter
Symbol
Function
The Limiter_I component type maps an input value limited to the range from xmin to xmax onto the
output y:
 [PD[ IRU [ ุ [PD[


\ [ IRU [PLQ [ [PD[
 [ IRU [ ื [
 PLQ PLQ
The binary outputs bmin and bmax are set to one when the limiter takes effect, which means
 LI [ ุ [ PD[

EPD[ 
 RWKHUZLVH
and
 LI [ ื [ PLQ

EPLQ 
 RWKHUZLVH
The high limit must not be less than the low limit. If the low limit is greater than or equal to the
high limit when simulation is run, the error message "Limiter_I: limits do not match" (message
category ERROR) is generated and output y is set to zero.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
MinMax_I – Minimum and maximum value selection
Symbol
Function
The component type MinMax_I maps the minimum or maximum of the n inputs z1 to zn to
output y. The number of inputs n is variable and can be set to any value between 2 and 32. The
default value of all inputs is 0.
The MIN or MAX mapping set is displayed in the component symbol as shown in the figure
below:
Parameter

MinMax Type of extreme value to be calculated – MIN
Multiplexer_I – Integer multiplexer
Symbol
Function
The component type Multiplexer_I interconnects one of the n different Integer inputs xi to output
in y in line with the value at the integer selection input i:
y = xi for 1 ≤ i ≤ n.
The number n of inputs xi is variable and can be set to a value of between 2 and 32. The default
value of all inputs is 0.
The value at the selection input i is limited internally to 1 through n, which means that i is set
to 1 or values less than 1 and i is set to n for values greater than n. In the default setting, the first
input xi is therefore interconnected with the output y.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Selection_I – Integer switch
Symbol
Function
The component type Selection_I interconnects one of the two integer inputs x0 and x1 to
output y in line with the value of the binary input a.
If the selection input a = 0, input x0 is interconnected; if the selection input a = 1, input x1 is
interconnected:
[ LI D
\ 
[ LI D
The default value of all inputs is 0.
8.1.3.4 Mathematical functions
Mathematical functions as component types

The Math directory of the Standard Library contains the most commonly used mathematical
functions in the form of component types: absolute value generation (ABS), square root
extraction (SQRT), natural logarithm (LN) and the exponential function (EXP), plus the
trigonometrical functions sine (SIN), cosine (COS) and tangent (TAN).
Note
You can also use the AFormula component with suitable parameters instead of these
components.
You can increase the available mathematical functions of this type by creating suitable
component types using the SIMIT Component Type Editor (CTE) expansion module.
ABS – Absolute value
Symbol

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Function
The ABS component type maps the absolute value of input x onto output y:
y = |x|.
ABS_I – Absolute integer values
Symbol
The symbol for ABS_I is blue to distinguish it from the ABS component type.
Function
The ABS_I component type maps the absolute value of integer input x onto integer output y:
y = |x|.
COS – Cosine function
Symbol
Function
The component type COS maps the cosine of input x to output y:
y = cos(x).
Parameter

Unit Unit of measurement of argument x: – rad
● rad (radians)
● deg (degrees)

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
EXP – Exponential function
Symbol
Function
The EXP component type maps the exponential value of input x onto output y:
y = ex
LN – Natural logarithm
Symbol
Function
The LN component type maps the natural logarithm of input x onto output y:
y = ln(x).
The argument x must be positive. If the argument becomes less than or equal to zero during the
simulation, the error message "LN: invalid argument" (message category ERROR) is
generated and output y is set to zero. The argument x is set to one by default.
LOG – Common logarithm
Symbol
Function
The LOG component type maps the common logarithm of the X input to output Y.
Y = Log10X
Argument X must be positive. If the argument is less than or equal to "0" when simulation is run,
the error message "LOG: invalid argument" (message category ERROR) is generated and
output Y is set to "0". The default setting for input X is 1.0.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
POW – Power
Symbol
Function
The POW component type maps the base (input) X to the power (input) P to output Y.
Y=X P
The default value of all inputs is 0.0.
RAND – random numbers
Symbol
Function
The component type RAND returns randomly generated numbers at its output Y, the ranges
and distribution of which are set with parameter Distribution. 　
Note
Note that the random numbers are calculated and therefore are not unpredictable.
Parameter

Distribution Value range and distribution of random – Uniform distri‐
numbers bution
● Uniform distribution
The random numbers are equally
distributed in the open interval (0,1).
● Normal distribution
The random numbers are normally
distributed; the mean is 0 and the
standard deviation 1.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
SIN – Sine function
Symbol
Function
The component type SIN maps the sine of input x to output y:
y = sin(x).
Parameter

● rad (radians)
● deg (degrees)
SQRT – Square root
Symbol
Function
The SQRT component type maps the square root of input x onto output y:
\ [
The radicand x must not be negative. If the radicand becomes negative during the simulation,
the error message "SQRT: invalid argument" (message category ERROR) is generated and
output y is set to zero.
TAN – Tangent function
Symbol

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Function
The component type TAN maps the tangent of input x to output y:
y = tan(x).
Parameter

● rad (radians)
● deg (degrees)
8.1.3.5 Binary functions
Binary functions as component types

All of the functions for processing binary signals are contained in the BinaryBasic
and BinaryExtended directories.
Component types with the three basic binary operations of conjunction (AND), disjunction (OR)
and negation (NOT), plus equivalence (XNOR) and non-equivalence (XOR) are stored in the
BinaryBasic directory.
The BinaryExtended directory of the standard library contains further binary (logic) functions
that go beyond the elementary binary functions in the form of component types.
Basic binary functions
AND – Conjunction
Symbol
Function
The AND component type maps the n binary values at the inputs ai as a conjunction, which
means using a logical (Boolean) "AND" function, onto the output b:
Q
E ID L
L

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
OR – Disjunction
Symbol
Function
The OR component type maps the n binary values at the inputs ai as a disjunction, which means
using a logical (Boolean) "OR" function, onto the output b:
Q
E UD L
L
NOT, NOTc – Negation

Negation is available in two component types NOT and NOTc. These differ only in terms of the
symbols used – their functions are completely identical.
Symbol
Function
Output b is equal to the negated input a, which means
E D
As can be seen in the figure below, when the NOTc component type is used, the negation can
be applied clearly and compactly to the inputs or outputs of components.
Using "NOT" Using "NOTc"

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
XOR – Non-equivalence
Symbol
Function
The XOR component type maps the n binary values at the inputs ai onto the output b using the
"Exclusive-OR" function: b is one, if an odd number of inputs ai is one. In all other cases b is zero.
For two inputs
b = a1 ⊗ a2
which is the non-equivalence or "unequal" function.
XNOR – Equivalence
Symbol
Function
The XNOR component type maps the n binary values at the inputs ai onto the output b using the
"Exclusive NOR" function: b is one, if an even number of inputs ai is one. In all other cases b is
zero.
For two inputs
E D ๪ D
which is the equivalence or "equal" function.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Extended binary functions
BFormula – Binary formula component
Symbol
Function
The component type BFormula allows the use of explicit logical expressions. This logic
function f calculates a value in relation to the n values at the inputs ai. The function value is
assigned to the output b:
b = f(a1,...,an)
The number n of inputs can be varied between 1 and 32. Only the inputs that are available
according to the number currently set may be used in the formula.
The operators listed in the following table may be used in formulas.
Table 8-3 Permitted operators in formulas for the BFormula component
Operator Function
AND Conjunction (AND function)
OR Disjunction (OR function)
NOT Negation
( Opening parenthesis
) Closing parenthesis
Note
There is no check in the formula component to determine whether all the set inputs are used in
the specified formula.
Parameter

Formula formula that calculates the output value b – X1
in terms of the input values ai.
Example of a block with three inputs X1 to X3:

● (X1 OR X2) AND X3
The formula is displayed at the top of the component symbol.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
You can make the component wider to allow longer formulas to be displayed in full.
Counter – Up and down counters
Symbol
Function
The component type Counter allows you to count the change in binary signals. When the binary
value at the "+" input changes from zero to one, the counter value is incremented at output y.
When the binary value at the "–" input changes from zero to one, the counter value is
decremented at the y output.
The counter value is limited to an interval defined by the two limits UL (high limit) and LL (low
limit):
LL ≤ y ≤ UL.
The binary outputs ULR and LLR indicate when the counter value has reached the low or high
limit:
 LI \ ุ 8/
8/5 
 RWKHUZLVH
and
 LI \ ื //
//5 
 RWKHUZLVH
The low limit must be less than the high limit. If this condition is violated, the error message
"Counter: limits do not match" (message category ERROR) is generated and the counter value
at output y is set to zero.
The binary input SET may be used to set the counter value y to the value at the input SP: If SET
is set to one, the counter value y is set equal to the value at the input SP. Here, too, the counter
value is limited by LL and UL.
The limits are set to zero for the low limit and to one hundred for the high limit by default. All other
inputs are set to zero by default.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Parameter

Decrement Value by which the counter value is de‐ – 1.0
Modifiable online cremented each time the binary value at
input "–" changes
Increment Value by which the counter value is in‐ – 1.0
Modifiable online cremented each time the binary value at
the "+" input changes.
Initial_Value Counter value when simulation is initial‐ – 1.0
ized (started)
TriggerUp Type of edge change for incrementing – Rising edge
the counter value
TriggerDown Type of edge change for decrementing – Rising edge
the counter value
Delay – On-Off delay
Symbol
Function
With the component type Delay, the binary signal b at the output is tracked to the binary signal a
at the input with a delay.
If the signal at the input changes from zero to one, the output is set to one once the ON-delay
time TON has elapsed. If the input signal is reset to zero before the ON-delay time has elapsed,
the output signal remains unchanged at zero. If the signal at the input changes from one to zero,
the output is set to zero once the OFF-delay time TOFF has elapsed. If the output signal is reset
to one before the OFF-delay time has elapsed, the output signal remains unchanged at one.
This interaction is illustrated in the table below.
Table 8-4 Signal curves at the input and output of the Delay component
Input a
Output b
The delay times must not assume a negative value. If a delay time assumes a negative value,
the error message "Delay: on-delay time negative value" or "Delay: off-delay time negative
value" (message category ERROR) is generated and the corresponding delay time is set to
zero.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Multiplexer_B – Binary multiplexer
Symbol
Function
The component type Multiplexer_B interconnects one of the n inputs Xi to output Y in line with
the value at the integer selection input SEL:
Y = Xi for 1≤ i ≤ n
The number n of inputs Xi is variable and can be set to a value of between 2 and 32. The default
value of all inputs is False.
The value at the selection input SEL is limited internally to 1 through n. i is set to 1 for values
less than 1 and SEL is set to n for values greater than n. In the default setting, the first input X1
is interconnected with output Y.
Pulse – Pulse
Symbol
Function
The component type Pulse sets output b if there is an edge change from 0 to 1 at input a. The
output b is reset once the time T has elapsed. A pulse with pulse width T is thus generated at
output b. The pulse width can be set via the signal at analog input T.
Table 8-5 Signal curves at the input and output of the Pulse component
Input a
Output b
The pulse width T must not be negative, or the error message "Pulse: pulse width negative
value" (message category ERROR) is generated and output b is set to 0. For pulse widths that
are smaller than the simulation cycle time, the output pulse is set to the duration of one
simulation cycle.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Parameter

Trigger Type of edge change evaluated – Rising edge
Modifiable online ● Rising edge: an edge change from
"False" to "True" (rising edge) sets
output b to "True".
● Falling edge: an edge change from
"True" to "False" (falling edge) sets
output b to "True".
Retriggerable Type of response to input signal change – False
Modifiable online from "0" to "1"
● "True": the output pulse is started
again each time the input signal
changes from "0" to "1".
● "False": the output pulse is not
started again when the input signal
changes from "0" to "1".
RS_FF – Flip-flop with default state of "Reset"
Symbol
Function
The component type RS_FF provides the simplest type of flip-flop: an RS flip-flop. If the value
at the set input S is equal to one, the output value Q is set to one. If the input value at the reset
input R1 is set to one, the output is reset to zero. The reset input is dominant, which means if
both inputs are set to one, output Q is reset to zero. The output 4 always assumes the inverse
value of output Q.
The table below lists the possible states of the RS_FF component type.
Table 8-6 State table for the RS_FF component
Input S Input R1 Output Q Output 4

0 0 Unchanged Unchanged
0 1 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 1 0 1

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Parameter

Initial_State Initial value of output Q – 0
Selection_B – Binary switch
Symbol
Function
The component type Selection_B interconnects one of the two binary inputs X0 and X1 to output
Y in line with the value of the binary input SEL.
If selection input SEL = False, input X0 is interconnected; if selection input SEL = True, input X1
is interconnected.
; LI 6(/ IDOVH
< 
; LI 6(/ WUXH
The default value of all inputs is False.
SR_FF – Flip-flop with default state of "Set"
Symbol
Function
The component type SR_FF maps an SR flip-flop. If the value at the set input S1 is equal to one,
the output value Q is set to one. If the input value at the reset input R is set to one, the output
is reset to zero. The set input is dominant, which means if both inputs are set to one, output Q is
reset to one. The output 4 always has the inverse value of output Q.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
The table below lists the possible states of the component SR_FF .
Table 8-7 State table for the SR_FF component
Input S Input R1 Output Q Output 4

0 0 Unchanged Unchanged
0 1 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 1 1 0
Parameter

Initial_State Initial value of output Q – 0
8.1.3.6 Converting values
Converting signals as component types

The Conv directory of the Standard Library contains component types for converting signals:
● Bit2Byte for converting bits to a byte value
● Byte2Bit for converting bytes to bits
● Byte2Word for converting bytes to a word
● Word2Byte for converting a word into bytes
● Byte2DWord for converting bytes to a double word
● DWord2Byte for converting a double word into bytes
● Analog2Integer for converting an analog value into an integer value
● Integer2Analog for converting an integer value into an analog value
● Raw2Phys for converting a raw value to an analog value
● Phys2Raw for converting an analog value to a raw value
● Unsigned2Signed for converting an unsigned value into a signed value
● Signed2Unsigned for converting a signed value to an unsigned value
● Real2Byte for converting a floating point value into its binary representation, and
● Byte2Real for converting the binary representation of a floating point number into an analog
value.
The connectors of the components for bytes, words and double words are integer connectors.
Raw values are integer values too.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Bit2Byte – Converting bits into bytes
Symbol
Function
The Bit2Byte component type converts the binary input values bi , i = 0, ..., 7, into a byte value B
at the integer output according to

% ෤E ຘ
L
L
L
In the conversion, b0 therefore represents the least significant bit and b7 the most significant bit.
The individual bits bi may be set individually while the simulation is running in the component
operating window. To set a bit, open the component operating window. Then select the bits that
you wish to set manually by pressing the button to the left of those bits. You can then set and
reset each bit by pressing the button on the right, which means toggle between zero and one.
In the figure below, bits b0, b3 and b7 are selected to be set and bit b3 is set.
Unset bits are identified by a light blue border, while set bits have a dark blue border.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Byte2Bit – Converting bytes into bits
Symbol
Function
The Byte2Bit component type converts a byte value at the integer input B into binary values bi , i
= 0, ... ,7 at the outputs. In the conversion, b0 will be the least significant bit and b7 the most
significant bit of the byte value.
The input is limited to the range of values of one byte, which means to the range from zero to
255. If the input value is not within this range during the simulation, the message "Byte2Bit:
input not a valid byte value" (message category ERROR) is generated.
The individual output bits bi may be set individually while the simulation is running in the
component operating window. To set a bit, open the component operating window. Then select
the bits that you wish to set manually by pressing the button to the left of those bits. You can
then set and reset each bit by pressing the button on the right, which means toggle between
zero and one. In the figure below, bits b0, b4 and b6 are selected to be set and bit b4 is set:
Byte2Word – Converting bytes into words
Symbol

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Function
The Byte2Word component type combines two byte values B1, B0 at the integer inputs to form
a word at the integer output W. B1 is the most significant byte and B0 is the least significant byte.
The values at the input are limited to the range of values of one byte, which means to the range
from zero to 255. If an input value is not within this range during the simulation, the message
"Byte2Word: input not a valid byte value" (message category ERROR) is generated.
Word2Byte – Converting words into bytes
Symbol
Function
The Word2Byte component type breaks down a word at the integer input W into two byte
values B1, B0 at the integer outputs. B1 is the most significant byte and B0 is the least significant
byte.
The value at the input is limited to the range of values of one word, which means to the range
from zero to 216–1. If the input value is not within this range during the simulation, the message
"Word2Byte: input not a valid word value" (message category ERROR) is generated.
Byte2DWord – Converting bytes into double words
Symbol
Function
The Byte2DWord component type combines four byte values Bi, i = 0, ... ,3, at the integer inputs
to form a double word in the order B3 – B2 – B1 – B0 at the integer output DW. B3 is therefore the
most significant byte and B0 is the least significant byte.
The values at the input are limited to the range of values of one byte, which means to the range
from zero to 255. If an input value is not within this range during the simulation, the message
"Byte2DWord: input not a valid byte value" (message category ERROR) is generated.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
DWord2Byte – Converting double words into bytes
Symbol
Function
The DWord2Byte component type converts a double word at the integer input DW into four
binary values Bi, i = 0, ... ,3 at the integer outputs. B3 is the most significant byte and B0 is the
least significant byte.
The value at the input is limited to the range of values of one double word, which means to the
range from zero to 232–1 . If the input value is not within this range during the simulation, the
message "DWord2Byte: input not a valid double word value" (message category ERROR) is
generated.
Integer2Analog – Converting from integer to analog
Symbol
Function
The Integer2Analog component type converts an integer value at the input into an analog value
at the output.
Analog2Integer – Converting from analog to integer
Symbol
Function
The Analog2Integer component type converts an analog value at the input into an integer value
at the output. The integer value is rounded.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Raw2Phys – Converting from raw to physical
Symbol
Function
The component type Raw2Phys converts an integer x at the input to an analog output value y
in accordance with simple linear transformation:
\ ෥ \/ \8 ෥ \/
[ ෥ [/ [8 ෥ [/
The input value x may be a so-called raw value from an automation system, for example. The
output value y is then the value mapped within a defined physical range of values.
Parameter

Phys_Lower_Limit Low limit for the transformation interval of – 0.0
the integer value
Phys_Upper_Limit High limit for the transformation interval – 100.0
of the integer value
Raw_Lower_Limit Low limit for the transformation interval of – −27648
the analog value
Raw_Upper_Limit High limit for the transformation interval – 27648
of the analog value
You can change the parameters during the course of the simulation.
Phys2Raw – Converting from physical to raw
Symbol
Function
The component type Phys2Raw converts an analog value x at the input to an integer output
value y in accordance with simple linear transformation:
[ ෥ [/ [ 8 ෥ [/
\ ෥ \/ \8 ෥ \/

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
The input value x is thus transformed as a measurement of a physical value into the raw value y
for an automation system, for example.
Parameter

Phys_Lower_Limit Low limit for the transformation interval of – 0.0
the analog value
Phys_Upper_Limit High limit for the transformation interval – 100.0
of the analog value
Raw_Lower_Limit Low limit for the transformation interval of – −27648
the integer value
Raw_Upper_Limit High limit for the transformation interval – 27648
of the integer value
You can change the parameters during the course of the simulation.
Unsigned2Signed – Converting from unsigned to signed
Symbol
Function
The Unsigned2Signed component type converts an unsigned integer value x at the input to a
signed value y at the output.
The parameter Width determines which data width is assigned to the input value: 1 byte, 2 bytes
or 4 bytes. The output value is limited in accordance with the set data width. The conversion is
done as follows:
Data width: 1 byte
෥ LI [ ! ෥

 LI [
\ 
[ [ ! ෥

LI
[ RWKHUZLVH
Data width: 2 bytes
෥ LI [ ! ෥

 LI [
\ 
[ [ ! ෥

LI
[ RWKHUZLVH

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Data width: 4 bytes
෥ LI [ ! ෥

 LI [
\ 
[ [ ! ෥

LI
[ RWKHUZLVH
Signed2Unsigned – Converting from signed to unsigned
Symbol
Function
The Signed2Unsigned component type converts a signed integer value x at the input to an
unsigned value y at the output.
The parameter Width determines which data width is assigned to the output value: 1 byte, 2
bytes or 4 bytes. The output value is limited in accordance with the set data width. The
conversion is done as follows:
Data width: 1 byte
෥ LI [ ෥

 ෥ LI [ ! ෥
\ 
[ [

LI
[ RWKHUZLVH
Data width: 2 bytes
෥ LI [ ෥

 ෥ LI [ ! ෥
\ 
[ [

LI
[ RWKHUZLVH
Data width: 4 bytes
෥ LI [ ෥

 ෥ LI [ ! ෥
\ 
[ [

LI
[ RWKHUZLVH

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Real2Byte – Converting from real to byte
Symbol
Function
The component type Real2Byte converts the values of an analog signal at the REAL input to
the binary representation of an single-precision floating-point number ("single" type) in
accordance with IEEE 754. The converted floating-point number is mapped to the four byte
values Bi, i = 0, ... ,3, at the integer outputs as illustrated in the figure below.
V Sign
E Exponent
M Mantissa
Note
Mapping the analog signal (type double) to the single precision number format (type single)
limits the precision and the value range.
This conversion cannot be used to convert a floating-point number to a whole number (integer).
The Analog2Integer component type should be used for this conversion.
If you want to transfer analog signals to a SIMATIC controller, you normally set the data type
of the corresponding signal in the coupling to REAL. The analog signal is then converted
automatically. A component of the Real2Byte type is necessary, however, if you want to
transfer analog signals directly to bit memories or data blocks of a SIMATIC controller, for
example.
Byte2Real – Converting from byte to real
Symbol

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Function
The Byte2Real component type converts the binary representation of a floating-point number
of type "single" as defined in IEEE 754 at the integer inputs Bi, i = 0, ... ,3 to the value of an
analog signal at the REAL output as shown in the figure below.
V Sign
E Exponent
M Mantissa
Note
This conversion cannot be used to convert a a whole number (integer) into a floating-point
number. The Analog2Integer component type should be used for this conversion.
If you want to receive floating-point numbers from a SIMATIC controller, you normally set the
data type of the corresponding signal in the coupling to REAL. The conversion to an analog
signal then takes place automatically. A component of the Byte2Real type is necessary,
however, if you want to transfer floating-point numbers directly from bit memories or data blocks
of a SIMATIC controller, for example.
8.1.3.7 General components in the Misc directory
Connectors
Three connector component types – referred to simply as connectors – are available:
● The analog connector component type AConnector,
● the binary connector component type BConnector and
● the integer connector component type IConnector.
Connector components
Analog connector
Binary connector
Integer connector

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
A connector component transfers the input value to its output without change or delay. They are
used, for example, in the following cases:
● Connectors (I/O connectors or global connectors) cannot be connected directly to each
other. As shown in the example in the figure below, connectors can be connected with the
aid of connector components.
● An input element, for example a converter, is linked directly to the signal to be set. With the
aid of a connector, the input element can influence several components directly. As shown
in the example in the figure below, the input signal IN of the connector VB is linked to the
input element.
● Component inputs can be directly assigned a default value. With the aid of a connector,
several inputs can be assigned a single default value. As shown in the example in the figure
below, a connector is connected to the inputs of the components to be set. The value to be
set is then set at the input of the connector.
Auxiliary components for the creation of macros

Three so-called auxiliary component types are provided for macros:
● The analog constant component type AConst,
● The binary constant component type BConst and
● The integer constant component type IConst

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Constant component types for macros
Analog constant
Binary constant
Integer constant
Parameters of a macro component can only be built from parameters of the components that
are used within the macro component. The constant component types thus also provide a
parameter for setting inputs of a component as a macro parameter.
You can find additional information on this in the section: Defining parameters of macro
components (Page 239)
ProjectVersion – Project version
Symbol
Function
The following integer values are available at the outputs of a component of this type:
● ProjectVersion
The complete version number coded in numerical form.
● LicenseNumber
The license number coded in numerical form.
● TimeStamp
The time stamp
● MajorVersion
The major version
● MinorVersion
The minor version
Operating window
The individual version numbers are displayed in readable form in the component operating
window.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
SimulationLoad
Symbol
Function
The SimulationLoad component type shows the current simulation load. You can find
information about the simulation load in the section: Display of the simulation load (Page 39).
The symbol shows the total load in % under "Total". All values in this component are not limited
and not smoothed. The values may therefore fluctuate more than the value in the symbol for the
simulation in progress.
The three binary displays OK, Critical and Overload return a rough assessment of the load
value as follows:
Load < 40% OK

40% < Load < 90% Critical
Load > 90% Overload
The time slice containing the component for the load evaluation only has an impact on how
often the values are updated. However, SIMIT always evaluates the values of all eight possible
time slices. The worst value since the last update is used.
Operating window
This component shows the load values for all eight time slices in the operating window. The
following causes are distinguished:
● Components (Components)
● Solution procedures (Solvers)
● Couplings (Gateways)
SIMIT distinguishes between Time and CPU-Ticks.
Time
Time is the percentage ratio of actual cycle time to configured cycle time.
The model with the worst time value is closest to the overload limit. However, this does not
necessarily mean that there is too much calculation in this time slice.
The computational load is distributed across multiple available cores. Usually, a computing
core must work through more than one time slice. Time slices with shorter cycle times have a
higher priority. This means that the calculation of a slower time slice may be interrupted to

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
permit the calculation of a faster time slice. This is important to calculate all cycles within the
configured cycle time, if possible.
The result can be that the calculation in a slow time slice is constantly being interrupted by the
calculation of a faster time slice, thereby creating a load problem. The faster time slice, in
contrast, is calculated with a higher priority and can therefore have a lower load.
CPU-Ticks
To better identify the real cause of a high simulation load, CPU-Ticks are also available. They
do not indicate the time that was needed for the calculation, but rather a measure for the time
spent on the calculation operations. They do not take into account wait times due to
interruptions by other time slices. As the measured absolute value of CPU-Ticks is not very
meaningful, it is scaled:
0$;Q
0RGHOWLPHQ 6ROYHUWLPH
Q

0RGHO7LFNV
L 0RGHO7LFNVL
0$;Q
0RGHOWLFNVQ 6ROYHUWLFNV
Q

0$;Q
0RGHOWLPHQ 6ROYHUWLPH
Q

6ROYHU7LFNV
L 6ROYHU7LFNVL
0$;Q
0RGHOWLFNVQ 6ROYHUWLFNV
Q

ModelTicksn’: Displayed value for the computational load of the component code in time slice n
SolverTicksn’: Displayed value for the computational load of the solution procedure in time slice
n
ModelTicksn: Measured value for the computational operations of the component code in time
slice n
SolverTicksn: Measured value for the computational operations of the solution procedure in
time slice n
ModelTimen: Ratio of the time required for the calculation of the component code to the
configured cycle time in time slice n
SolverTimen: Ratio of the time required for the calculation of the solution procedure to the
The ratio of tick values to each other shows where most arithmetic operations are performed in
a given time. Relief should be provided in the time slice with the highest values, for example by
relocating parts of the simulation model to a slower time slice or setting the entire critical time
slice to a slower speed.
Simulation load by couplings
When calculating the tick values, it is assumed that the components and solution procedures
only perform calculations and do not perform any file or console tasks. Although these
commands require time, they do not fully utilize the calculation cores and therefore lead to
misleading information.
Therefore, the couplings are not included in the count of arithmetic instructions. If a high
simulation load is caused by a coupling, there are two reasons for this:
● The coupling is being interrupted too often by higher priority calculations.
● The coupling itself demands a great deal of time.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
In the second case, reducing the computational work in the area of components or solution
procedure is not very helpful. In general, the coupling must be assigned to a slower time slice,
the signal range of the coupling must be reduced, or a part of the signals must be relocated to
a second coupling with a slower cycle time.
Output signals
The SimulationLoad component has output signals for operating controls in the operating
window. These signals cannot be interconnected to the component symbol, but can be
monitored in the property view.
Output signal Meaning

LoadModelnTicks Normalized computational work for the component code in time slice n
LoadModelnTime Percentage ratio of the time required for the calculation of the component code
to the configured cycle time in time slice n
LoadSolvernTicks Normalized computational work for the solution procedure in time slice n
LoadSolvernTime Percentage ratio of the time required for the calculation of the solution proce‐
dure to the configured cycle time in time slice n
LoadGatewaynTime Percentage ratio of the time required for the calculation of the coupling to the
Link
The average load X over time is shown at the component link on the Load digital display.
Q
;Q ;Q ;Q
෤
Q
$Q]HLJH /RDG ;Q
Q L
Q
L
The number of total steps n is counted. The number of increments at which "TRUE" is pending
at binary signal OK is counted internally (nok).
The digital display OK shows the percentage of increments in which the load was in the OK
range.
QRN
$Q]HLJH 2.
Q
The number of increments at which "TRUE" is pending at binary signal Critical is counted
internally (ncritical).
The digital display Critical shows the percentage of increments in which the load was in the
Critical range.
Q&ULWLFDO
$Q]HLJH &ULWLFDO
Q
The number of increments at which "TRUE" is pending at binary signal Overload is counted
internally (noverload).
The digital display Overload shows the percentage of increments in which the load was in the
Overload range.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Q2YHUORDG
$Q]HLJH 2YHUORDG
Q
The Reset button restarts the calculation. The values of the previous increments are
disregarded from this point and all counters are reset.
SimulationTime – Simulation time
Symbol
Function
The component type SimulationTime returns the current simulation time at its four outputs. The
output takes place at the Time output as an integer value in milliseconds. The simulation time
is available at the H, M and S integer outputs, broken down into hours (H), minutes (M) and
seconds (S).
The simulation time is the time that is counted in the simulation cycle when simulation is
performed. The simulation time is set to zero when a simulation is initialized or started. The
simulation time and real time run synchronously if the simulation is running in real-time mode.
In slow-motion simulation mode, the simulation time is slower than real time; in quick-motion
simulation mode, the simulation time is faster than real time. If the simulation is paused, the
simulation time is stopped as well. When the simulation is resumed, the simulation time starts
running again as well.
Operating window
The operating window shows the simulation time. You can reset the simulation time
with Reset.
WaveformGenerator – Function generator
Symbol

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Function
The WaveformGenerator component type generates periodic signals at output Y. Input Run
must be set to True for output Y to be calculated dynamically. If Run has the value False, the
Y value last calculated remains.
The Period input is specified in seconds; Amplitude is an absolute numerical value. The
significance of these two inputs differs depending on the Waveform setting.
The SquareRate input is only active with the Square setting and sets the percentage ratio of
Tlow to Thigh.
Square
Triangle
Sine

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Sawtooth
Parameter

Waveform Specifies the type of function. – Triangle
8.1.4 Drive components
8.1.4.1 Drives as component types

In the directory DRIVES of the Basic Library you will find component types for simulation of
drives. These component types form the Drive Library. They can be used to simulate general
drives for valves and pumps. The types
● DriveP1 and DriveP2 are designed for simulating pump drives, while the types
● DriveV1 to DriveV4 are intended for simulating valve drives.
The subdirectory PROFIdrives contains components for the simulation of variable-speed
drives corresponding to the PROFIdrive profile. Components for the simulation of SIMOCODE
motor management and control devices can be found in the subdirectory SIMOCODEpro.
8.1.4.2 Valve drives
Four component types are available (DriveV1, DriveV2, DriveV3 and DriveV4) to simulate
valve drives. All four of these component types share the outputs and some of the inputs as
illustrated in the figure below.
The two analog inputs TOpen and TClose indicate the opening and closing times of the drive,
which means the time that the drive takes to fully open or close. If one of the two input values
is negative during simulation, the message "DriveVx: closing or opening time invalid value"
(message category ERROR) is generated.
The current position value of the drive is output at analog output Y as a percentage, which
means in the range from zero to one hundred:
0 ≤ Y ≤ 100.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
The value zero corresponds to the fully closed valve, while the value one hundred represents
the fully open valve.
The four binary outputs 100, Hi, Lo and 0 may be interpreted as limit switches for the drive:
● 100 and 0 as limit switches "Valve fully opened" or "Valve fully closed",
● Hi and Lo as pre-limit switches for "Valve open" or "Valve closed".
The limit switches are permanently set to the position values zero (for the fully closed valve) and
one hundred (for the fully open valve). Binary outputs 100 or 0 are therefore set to one when the
valve is fully closed or open, which means when the position Y of the component has the value
zero or one hundred.
The Hi and Lo pre-limit switches can be set using the HI_Limit or LO_Limit parameters. Their
values are between 0 and 100. Position values of five (LO_Limit) and 95 (HI_Limit) are set by
default.
If one of the two parameter values is negative during the simulation, the message "DriveVx:
high and low parameters do not match" (message category ERROR) is generated.
The Initial_Value parameter is used to set the valve drive to the starting position of Closed or
Open. The default setting for Initial_Value is Closed.
The current position value of the drive is visualized as a bar graph display in the component
operating window. The button on the left labelled MANUAL is used to change the position value
to the desired setting by moving the slider in the operating window.
The position value is then no longer derived from the component inputs, but rather tracks the
value set using the slider. The set opening and closing times remain active. The four binary
outputs 100, Hi, Lo and 0 likewise all remain effective. They are also set as described above if
the position value is to be tracked.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
DriveV1 – Type 1 valve drive
Symbol
Function
The DriveV1 component type simulates a drive unit that sets the position value Y at the output
in relation to a binary value at the input Open. If the binary input is equal to zero, the position
value Y is continuously tracked to zero with the closing time TClose. If the binary input is equal to
one, the position value is continuously tracked to one hundred with the opening time TOpen. The
position value thus only has the two steady states of zero and one hundred, which means the
states "Valve open” and “Valve closed” in relation to the valve function. The drive or the valve
is thus opened or closed whenever the binary value at the input changes.
Symbol
Function
in relation to two binary values at the Open and Close inputs. If the binary value at input Open
is equal to one, the position value Y is continuously tracked to one hundred with the opening
time TOpen. If the binary value at the input Close is equal to one, the position value is continuously
tracked to zero with the closing time TClose.
If both input values are set to one or zero at the same time, the position value remains
unchanged. The position value thus only changes if the binary value at either the Open input or
the Close input is set to one.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Symbol
Function
in relation to three binary values at the Open, Close and Stop inputs. If the binary value at
the Open input changes from zero to one, the position value Y is continuously tracked to one
hundred with the opening time TOpen. The position value is tracked continuously to zero with the
closing time TClose if the binary value at the Close input changes from zero to one. If the binary
value at the Stop input changes from zero to one, the position value remains unchanged.
Opening, closing and stopping of the drive is thus initiated via the edge of the corresponding
binary input signal (signal change from zero to one).
Symbol
Function
that continuously tracks the analog value at the Value input. The tracking occurs in the direction
of rising position values with the opening time TOpen and falling position values with the closing
time TClose. The position value is always limited to values from zero to one hundred, even if the
input value is outside this interval.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
8.1.4.3 Pump drives and fan drives
The two component types DriveP1 and DriveP2 may be used in the simulation as drives for
pumps, fans or similar units. The outputs and some of the inputs common to these two
component types are illustrated in the figure below:
The run-up and run-down speeds of the drive are set at the two analog inputs TUp and TDown. TUp
is the time it takes the drive to run up from standstill to the nominal speed in seconds, while TDown
is the time in seconds it takes to run the drive down from nominal speed to standstill. Both times
have a default value of one second. If one of the two input values is negative during simulation,
the message "DriveVx: run-up or run-down time invalid value" (message category ERROR) is
generated.
The current speed value of the drive is output at analog output Y as a percentage, which means
in the range from zero to one hundred:
0 ≤ Y ≤ 100.
The value zero corresponds to the stopped drive, while the value one hundred represents the
drive at nominal speed.
The direction of rotation of the drive can be set using binary input Dir. When this input is set to
zero, the direction of rotation is positive. If the input is set to one, the direction of rotation is
negative. This input can therefore be used to specify whether the drive turns clockwise or
counterclockwise, for example. If it turns in the negative direction, the speed is output as a
negative value at output Y:
−100 ≤ Y ≤ 0.
Positive values for Y thus indicate speeds in the positive direction, while negative values
indicate speeds in the negative direction. The change in direction of rotation only takes effect
if the drive is at a standstill.
The binary input Speed is used to toggle the speed between nominal speed (full speed) and
partial speed (low speed). If Speed is one, the nominal speed was selected; otherwise the
partial speed was selected. The default setting for the Speed binary input is one. The partial
speed is specified as a numerical value (percentage) at the analog input xLSp:
0 ≤ xLSp ≤ 100.
The default setting for the partial speed is 50, which means half the nominal speed. If the partial
speed is not within the defined range, the message "DrivePx: low speed invalid value"
The binary output Run is only set to one when the drive has reached the preset speed value in
the positive or negative direction of rotation, which means only if the absolute value at the
analog output Y is equal to one hundred (nominal speed) or is equal to the partial speed set at
the input xLSp.
The feedback signal for the selected speed is available at the binary output Speed. The binary
output is only set to one if the drive has reached its nominal speed in the positive or negative
direction of rotation.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
The value at the binary output Dir takes the form of a feedback signal for the current direction
of rotation of the drive. The binary output is zero if the drive is turning in the positive direction;
the value is one if the drive is turning in the negative direction.
The current speed value of the drive is visualized as a bar graph display in the component
operating window. The button on the left labelled MANUAL is used to change the speed value
to the desired setting by moving the slider in the operating window.
The speed value is then no longer derived from the component inputs, but rather tracks the
value set using the slider. The specified start-up and run-down times remain effective. The
binary outputs Run, Speed and Dir likewise remain active. They are also set as described
above if the speed value is to be tracked.
DriveP1 – Type 1 pump drive
Symbol
Function
The DriveP1 component type simulates a drive unit that is switched on and off via the binary
value at the Run input. The drive is switched on while the input value is set to one. If the input
value is set to zero, the drive is switched off.
DriveP2 – Type 2 pump drive
Symbol

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Function
The DriveP2 component type simulates a drive unit that is switched on and off via the two binary
inputs Start and Stop. If the binary value Start changes from zero to one, then the drive is
switched on. If the binary value Stop changes from zero to one, the drive is switched off.
Activation and deactivation of the drive is initiated with the edge of the corresponding binary
input signal (signal change from zero to one).
8.1.4.4 Motor
Common features of motor components
Shared I/O of component types for pump drives

The component types Motor, ReversibleMotor and TwoSpeedMotor can be used in the
simulation as drives for pumps, fans or similar units. Some of the inputs and outputs are the
same for all components as shown in the figure below.
Analog inputs
The start-up and run-down times of the drive are specified at the analog inputs T_UP
and T_DOWN.
T_UP is the time it takes the drive to run from standstill to the nominal speed in seconds;
T_DOWN is the time in seconds it takes to run the drive down from nominal speed to standstill.
The default time is 1 s.
If one of the two input values is negative during the simulation, the message "Motor: run-up or
run-down time invalid value" (message category ERROR) is generated.
Binary inputs
Binary input LocalAct switches the drive to the local operating mode. In this mode, the drive can
only be controlled over the component operating window. The drive can be locked with the
binary input LockAct so that neither local operation nor operation using the component control
inputs is possible. The drive is shut down and locked if the component receives a rising edge
at the LockAct input during operation.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Binary outputs
The binary output FbkOff is True when the drive is at a standstill (Y = 0). The binary output Local
can be activated from the drive operating window. If the output is connected accordingly, it can
send local operations to the controller. The binary output Maint can be activated from the drive
operating window. The binary output Trip can be activated from the drive operating window. If
Trip is enabled, the drive shuts down and remains at a standstill (Y =0).
Analog output
The current speed of the drive is output as a percentage at analog output Y, in other words in
a range of 0 to 100:
0 ≤ Y ≤ 100 or with ReversibleMotor −100 ≤ Y ≤ 100.
A value of 0 corresponds to a drive at a standstill and a value of 100 to a drive at the nominal
speed (or –100 with ReversibleMotor).
Motor
Symbol
Function
The component type Motor simulates a drive unit that is switched on and off by the binary value
at the Start input. The drive is on for as long as the start input value is set to True. If the start
input value is set to False, the drive is switched off.
The component can also be switched on and off with the two binary inputs P_Start and P_Stop .
If the binary signal at the P_Start input changes from False to True , the drive is switched on.
If the binary signal at the P_Stop input changes from False to True, the drive is switched off.
The speed value of the drive can be specified as a percentage in the range from 0 to 100 via
the analog input Setpoint. The default setting for the component is 100. If the speed value is not
in this defined range, the message "Motor: Setpoint invalid value" (message category ERROR)
is generated.
The binary output FbkRun is only set to True if the drive has reached the preselected speed in
a positive direction: The value at analog output Y is identical to the value specified at the
Setpoint input.
The binary outputs StartLocal and StopLocal only represent the duration of the key operation
to set the Start or Stop key in the component operating window to True.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Operating window
The component operating window shows the current speed of the drive as a bar graph.
The left-hand column shows the two inputs LocalAct and LockAct. You can see the current
state pending here.
You can also separate both inputs from their sources and set the value manually.
If LocalAct (Local active) is enabled, the speed is no longer derived from the inputs of the
component. Instead, it is formed from the local operating buttons in the central column Start and
Stop. The specified start-up and run-down times remain effective. The switch from remote to
local is smooth: If the drive was on before the switchover, it is initially also on immediately
afterwards.
In the right-hand column is the operating switch for Local, maintenance (Maint) and Trip.
ReversibleMotor – Motor with 2 directions
Symbol
Function
The component type ReversibleMotor simulates a drive unit that is controlled by two binary
values at the Fwd and Rev inputs. The drive is switched on in forwards mode as long as the
input value Fwd is set to True. If the input value is set to False, the drive is switched off. The
drive is switched on in reverse mode for as long as the input valueRev is set to True. If the input
value is set to False, the drive is switched off.
The component can also be pulse-controlled over the three binary inputs P_Fwd, P_Rev and
P_Stop. If the binary signal at the P_Fwd input changes from False to True, the drive is switched

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
on in forwards mode. If the binary signal at the P_Stopinput changes from False to True, the
drive is switched off. If the binary signal at the P_Rev input changes from False to True , the
drive is switched on in reverse mode.
The change in direction of rotation only takes effect if the drive is at a standstill.
The speed value of the drive can be specified as a percentage in the range from 0 to 100 via
the analog input Setpoint. The default setting for the component is 100. If the speed value is not
in this defined range, the message "Motor: Setpoint invalid value" (message categoryERROR)
is generated.
The binary output FbkFwd is only set to True if the drive has reached the preselected speed in
a positive direction (forwards mode): The value at analog output Y is identical to the value
specified at the Setpoint input.
The binary output FbkRev is only set to True if the drive has reached the preselected speed in
a negative direction (reverse mode): The value at analog output Y is the negative of the value
specified at the Setpoint input.
The binary outputs FwdLocalRevLocal and StopLocal only represent the duration of the key
operation to set the Forward, Reverse or Stop key in the component operating window to True.
Operating window
state pending here.
component. Instead, it is formed from the local operating buttons in the central column,
Forward, Reverse and Stop. The specified start-up and run-down times remain effective. The
switch from remote to local is smooth: If the drive was on before the switchover, it is initially also
on immediately afterwards.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
TwoSpeedMotor – Motor with 2 speeds
Symbol
Function
The component type TwoSpeedMotor simulates a drive unit that is controlled by two binary
values at the Spd1 and Spd2 inputs. The drive is switched on and run until Setpoint1 as long
as the input value Spd1 is set to True. If the input value is set to False, the drive is switched off.
The drive is switched on and run until Setpoint2 as long as the input value Spd2 is set to True.
If the input value is set to False, the drive is switched off. If both the Spd1 and Spd2 input are
pending at the same time, the drive is operated at Spd1 .
The component can also be pulse-controlled over the three binary inputs P_Spd1, P_Spd2 and
P_Stop. If the binary signal at the P_Spd1 input changes from False to True, the drive is
switched on at the reduced percentage speed specified at the Setpoint1 input. If the binary
signal at the P_Stopinput changes from False to True, the drive is switched off. If the binary
signal at the P_Spd2 input changes from False to True, the drive is switched on at the full speed
specified at the Setpoint2 input (max. 100). You can toggle directly between Spd1 and Spd2 .
You can set the reduced drive speed as a percentage of between 0 and 100 at the analog input
Setpoint1. The default setting for this input is 70. You can set the full drive speed as a
percentage of between 0 and 100 at the analog input Setpoint2. The default setting for this input
is 100. If the speed values are not in these defined ranges, the message "Motor: Setpoint invalid
value" (message categoryERROR) is generated. The setpoints can be configured separately.
The binary output FbkSpd1 is only set to True if the drive has reached the preselected speed:
The value at analog output Y is identical to the value specified at the Setpoint1 input.
The binary output FbkSpd2 is only set to True if the drive has reached the preselected speed:
The value at analog output Y is identical to the value specified at the Setpoint2 input.
The binary outputsSpd1Local, Spd2Local and StopLocal only represent the duration of the key
operation to set the Speed 1, Speed 2 or Stop keys in the component operating window to True.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Operating window
state pending here.
component. Instead, it is formed from the local operating buttons in the central column, Speed
1, Speed 2 and Stop. The specified start-up and run-down times remain effective. The switch
from remote to local is smooth: If the drive was on before switchover with Speed 1, it is initially
also on immediately switchover with Speed 1.
8.1.4.5 PROFIdrive devices
Many variable-speed drives are connected directly to the controller via PROFIBUS DP or
PROFINET. To standardize the configuration of such drives, a profile called PROFIdrive was
created by the PROFIBUS User Organization (PNO). This profile defines how a drive matching
this profile behaves on the field bus with regard to some of its more important functions. The
following power converters or frequency converters from the Siemens range of products meets
the requirements of a PROFIdrive:
● SIMOREG DC Master
● SIMOVERT Masterdrive
● Micromaster
● Sinamics
A common feature of all PROFIdrive devices is that they are activated by control words (STW)
and provide feedback in a status words (ZSW). In addition, the drives receive a speed setpoint
from the controller and provide the actual speed and an actual position as feedback.
The functionality of a PROFIdrive can be divided roughly into the following blocks:
● State machine
● Ramp generator for the transferred setpoint speed
● Position actual value preparation

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
● Position control (not included in all PROFIdrive telegrams)

● Torque limiting (only for SIEMENS-specific telegrams)
The state machine defines the transitions from one status to another. A change in status is
triggered by a particular bit in control word 1. The current status can be seen in status word 1.
The purpose of the ramp generator of a PROFIdrive is to convert jumps in the speed setpoint
into linear ramp increases with an adjustable gradient.
In addition to this basic function, PROFIdrive devices can of course offer considerably more
functions and configuration options.
Using the PROFIdrive library to simulate PROFIdrive drives

All component types for the simulation of PROFIdrive devices can be found in the PROFIdrive
directory of the Drives Library:
● The PROFIdrive header component type PROFIdrive2
● The sensor simulation for rotary and linear encoders
● The preparation of sensor data
● Position control in the drive
● The evaluation of the torque reduction for SIEMENS devices
● The support of safety functionality in the drive
● The adaptation of device-specific data with the controller
● The PROFIdrive device-specific component types Sinamics and Universal.
These component types make up the PROFIdrive library.
The state machine and ramp generator functions contained in all PROFIdrive devices are
simulated in the PROFIdrive component type.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Status diagram
S1: Switching On Inhibited
S2: Ready For Switching On

Control word S5: Quick Stop Status word
S3: Switched On
S5: Ramp Stop
S4: Operation
Ramp generator
Speed setpoint Speed to ramp
Speed actual value Speed actual value Speed actual value

Preparation
Encoder actual value Encoder actual value Position actual value

Preparation
Some of the bits in the control and status words are not defined in the PROFIdrive profile. The
five bits 11 to 15 in the control and status word 1 can be drive-specific and may therefore have
different meanings according to the type of drive. For the SINAMICS and Universal AC
converters, these drive-specific functions are emulated in the corresponding device-specific
components. These drive-specific components are simply attached to the PROFIdrive header
component, as illustrated in the figure below.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
The device-specific component types in the PROFIdrive library contain standardized

emulations of different PROFIdrive drives. You can find additional information on this in section:
Sinamics – SINAMICS frequency converter (Page 500).
The meaning of the drive-specific bits can be changed by configuring the converter systems
and may therefore deviate from the standard configuration illustrated here. If this is the case,
the device-specific component type is set to Universal.
You can find additional information on this in section: Universal – Extensions to the PROFIdrive
basic function (Page 496). This component type provides you with bits 11 to 15 of control word
1 and status word 1 as component inputs and outputs, which can be connected as required to
other components in the basic library.
In addition to the control and status word and the speed setpoint and actual speed values,
PROFIdrive devices can exchange other information with the controller. These additional I/O
signals are available in SIMIT through the SIMIT Unit coupling like standard I/O signals and can
therefore also be used for specific modification of a drive simulation.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
PROFIdrive drives – displayable PROFIdrive telegrams

The basic library contains multiple PROFIdrive components. They can be used to map the
following PROFIdrive standard telegrams as well as SIEMENS-specific extended telegrams.
3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3='

7(/B
1RPLQDO 67: 162//B$
7(/B
=6: 1,67B$
$FWXDO
7(/B
1RPLQDO 67: 162//B% 67:
7(/B
=6: 1,67B% =6:
$FWXDO
7(/B
1RPLQDO 67: 162//B% 67: *B67:
7(/B =6: 1,67B% =6: *B=6: *B;,67 *B;,67

$FWXDO
7(/B
1RPLQDO 67: 162//B% 67: *B67: *B67:
7(/B =6: 1,67B% =6: *B=6: *B;,67 *B;,67 *B=6: *B;,67 *B;,67
$FWXDO
7(/B
1RPLQDO 67: 162//B% 67: *B67: ;(55 .3&
7(/B
=6: 1,67B% =6: *B=6: *B;,67 *B;,67
$FWXDO
7(/B
1RPLQDO 67: 162//B% 67: *B67: *B67: ;(55 .3&
7(/B
=6: 1,67B% =6: *B=6: *B;,67 *B;,67 *B=6: *B;,67 *B;,67
$FWXDO
7(/B
1RPLQDO 67: 162//B% 67: 0B5HG *B67:
7(/B =6: 1,67B% =6: 0HOGB: *B=6: *B;,67 *B;,67

$FWXDO
7(/B
1RPLQDO 67: 162//B% 67: 0B5HG *B67: *B67:
7(/B =6: 1,67B% =6: 0HOGB: *B=6: *B;,67 *B;,67 *B=6: *B;,67 *B;,67
$FWXDO
7(/B
1RPLQDO 67: 162//B% 67: 0B5HG *B67: ;(55 .3&
7(/B
=6: 1,67B% =6: 0HOGB: *B=6: *B;,67 *B;,67
$FWXDO
7(/B
1RPLQDO 67: 162//B% 67: 0B5HG *B67: *B67: ;(55 .3&
7(/B
=6: 1,67B% =6: 0HOGB: *B=6: *B;,67 *B;,67 *B=6: *B;,67 *B;,67
$FWXDO
The telegrams are modeled by lining up the individual components.

The following sections explain the "blocks", the available individual components, in more detail.
The "Safety enhancement" component plays a special role; it expands the standard
PROFIdrive drives by safety functions.
In addition, a component is offered for the SIEMENS-specific telegram 370 to simulate an
active infeed (see InFeed_Tel_370 (Page 498)).

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
DataAdaption – Functionality of data adaption of a PROFIdrive drive
Symbol
Function
Technological objects in the S7-1500 have a functionality with which they synchronize their
technological parameters with the technological parameters of the drive. This process is
referred to as data adaption. The DataAdaption component type supplies the required
information to the technology object using acyclic data record communication.
The DataAdaption component is always the last component to be added to a simulated drive.
Connectors
Input Description
Gateway Connection to the configuration of the drive component via a unit con‐
nector
DriveIn Structure for docking to upstream PROFIdrive components
Parameter
Parameters Description
ReferenceSpeed Here you enter the reference speed.
MaxSpeed Here you enter the maximum physical speed of the
drive.
G1_EncoderSystem Enter the type of encoder system here.
0 = rotary encoder system
1 = linear encoder system
G1_SupportsAbsolutValues Enter here whether encoder 1 is an
True = absolute encoder
False = incremental encoder

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
G1_DeterminableRevolutions Specify here how many encoder revolutions can

be determined for the absolute value.
G1_FineResolutionXist1 Enter the fine resolution of G1_Xist1 here.
G2_SupportsAbsolutValues Enter here whether encoder 2 is an
True = absolute encoder
False = incremental encoder
G2_DeterminableRevolutions Specify here how many encoder revolutions can

be determined for the absolute value.
DSC_Configured Specify here whether you use a DynamicServo‐
Control block in the drive block group.
Torque_Nominal Here you enter the reference torque.
Torque_UpperLimit Here you enter the top physical speed limit of your
drive.
Torque_LowerLimit Here you enter the low physical speed limit of your
drive.
Torque_RedScale Here you specify the percentage to which the tor‐
que reduction is to be normalized. The reference
torque is typically 100%.
DeviceIdentificationCompany Enter the manufacturer ID here. Siemens = 42
DeviceIdentificationDeviceType Enter the device ID here. Sinamics S120 = 5011
Additional_Parameter Free text for specifying additional parameters
Additional parameters can be specified as free text in the following format:

Parameter number [ParameterSubIndex] = format#value
For example: "180 [1] = u64#10" means Parameter 180, SubIndex 1 has the value 10 in
unsigned64 data format.
The following data formats are defined:
● b – boolean
● i8 – integer8
● i16 – integer16
● u8 – unsigned8

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
● f64 – floating point
The following table shows the parameters provided by the DataAdaption component to the
technology object.
Parameter Parameter text

51 Drive Data Set DDS effective
107 Drive object type / DO type
108 Drive objects function module
180 Number of Drive Data Sets
505 Selecting the system of units / Unit sys select
922 IF1 PROFIdrive PZD telegram selection
924 SubIndex 0 ZSW bit pulses enabled.Signal number
924 SubIndex 1 ZSW bit pulses enabled.Bit position
925 PROFIdrive clock synchronous sign-of-life tolerance
950 SubIndex 0 Number of fault situation
950 SubIndex 1 Number of fault messages in a fault situation
964 SubIndex 0 Device identification.Company
964 SubIndex 1 Device identification.Device type
964 SubIndex 2 Device identification.Firmware version
964 SubIndex 3 Device identification.Firmware date (year)
964 SubIndex 4 Device identification.Firmware date (day/month)
964 SubIndex 5 Device identification.Number of drive objects
964 SubIndex 6 Device identification.Firmware patch/hot fix
965 PROFIdrive profile number
975 SubIndex 1 Drive object identification.Drive object type
975 SubIndex 5 Drive object identification.drive object type class
978 SubIndex 0 List of drive objects

Libraries
8.1 Basic library

979 SubIndex 0 PROFIdrive encoder format [0] = Header
979 SubIndex 1 PROFIdrive encoder format [1] = Type encoder 1
979 SubIndex 2 PROFIdrive encoder format [2] = Resolution enc 1
979 SubIndex 3 PROFIdrive encoder format [3] = Shift factor G1_XIST1
979 SubIndex 5 PROFIdrive encoder format [5] = Distinguishable revolutions encoder 1
979 SubIndex 6 PROFIdrive encoder format [6] = Reserved
979 SubIndex 15 PROFIdrive encoder format [15] = Distinguishable revolutions encoder
2
979 SubIndex 25 PROFIdrive encoder format [25] = Distinguishable revolutions encoder
3
1082 Maximum speed / n_max
1520 Torque limit upper/motoring / M_max upper/mot

Libraries
8.1 Basic library

1521 Torque limit lower/regenerative / M_max lower/regen
1544 Travel to fixed stop evaluation torque reduction / TfS M_red eval
2000 Reference speed reference frequency / n_ref f_ref
2003 Reference torque / M_ref
2079 IF1 PROFIdrive PZD telegram selection extended / IF1 PZD telegr ext
This makes complete data adaptation possible.
DynamicServoControl – Simulation of a drive controller component in a PROFIdrive telegramm
Symbol
Function
The DynamicServoControl component type is used to enhance a PROFIdrive telegram
according to the PROFIdrive profile (Technical Specification, Version 4.2, Edition: October
2015 (Order No.: 3.172)) by the functionality of the drive-internal controller.
3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3='

7(/B
1RPLQDO 67: 162//B% 67: *B67: ;(55 .3&
7(/B
=6: 1,67B% =6: *B=6: *B;,67 *B;,67
$FWXDO
Telegrams with a higher value have been defined in the PROFIdrive profile; these can be used
to move the position control from the controller to the drive. This is of particular importance
when the cycle in which the technology application in the controller is reduced compared to the
bus clock.
Moving the position control from the controller to the drive necessarily requires an isochronous
bus system and that the SIMIT application is operated in bus synchronous mode. To do so, set
the bus synchronous operating mode (Page 45).
Connectors
Input Description
XERR Error signal from the PROFIdrive telegram
KPC Controller gain from the PROFIdrive telegram
Output Description
DriveOut Structure for connecting additional PROFIdrive components

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Parameter
The parameter values should be consistent with the parameters of the same name of the
sensor block.
GeneralDrive
Symbol
Function
The GeneralDrive component type supplements the PROFIdrive block with the functionality of
a delay element. The actual speed is calculated internally on the basis of the specified setpoint,
so that an external connection of the NIst input on the PROFIdrive component is no longer
necessary.
TDelay is the delay with which the speed actual value tracks the effective setpoint value (ramp
function generator value from PROFIdrive block) via the delay function. The default delay time
is half a second.
The reference value at analog input RefVal is a percentage speed value. If the speed actual
value exceeds the reference value, bit 10 of the status word (ZSW1.10) is set to 1. The default
reference value is 5 percent. The switchover of this signal is performed using a configurable
hysteresis. This is also stated as a percentage speed value in the Hysteresis parameter. The
default hysteresis value is 3 percent.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Connectors
Input Description
TDelay Time constant of the delay time
RefVal Reference value set to one with bit 10 in status
word (ZSW1.10)
DriveIn Structure for docking to upstream PROFIdrive
components
Output Description
Parameter
RampTime Here you enter the ramp slope for changing the
speed setpoint.
EmergencyStopTime Here you enter the slope with which the pending
speed setpoint is to be reduced in case of an error.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
HysteresisSpeed Enter here the width of the window which will be

moved around the target speed. If the actual speed
is within this window, ZSW1.Bit8 (Speed Error
Within Tolerance) is set to TRUE.
SpeedThreshold Enter a comparison value for the speed threshold
here. If the actual speed has reached or exceeded
this comparison value, ZSW1.Bit10 (Speed
Reached) is set to TRUE.
PROFIdrive1 – Basic function of the PROFIdrive drive for speed-controlled axes
Symbol
Function
The PROFIdrive1 component type simulates the state machine with the ramp function
generator according to the PROFIdrive profile (Technical Specification, Version 4.2, Edition:
October 2015 (Order No.: 3.172)).
Functionalities for Application Class 1 (AC1) "Standard Drive – Speed Control Mode" are
simulated.
This component therefore simulates the functionality defined in standard PROFIdrive telegram
1:
3=' 3='

7(/B
1RPLQDO 67: 162//B$
7(/B
=6: 1,67B$
$FWXDO
The starting point for configuring a PROFIdrive1 component is the controller access to the input
and output signals of the PROFIdrive drive. For each dive, a fixed address range is defined
within the controller input and output area, and assigned to a PROFIdrive1 component as
follows: The control word (first process data word in the output area) is connected to the integer
input STW1 and the status word (first process data word of the controller inputs) is connected
to the integer output ZSW1. The speed setpoint and actual speed values are transferred in the
second process data word. Accordingly, the integer input NSOLL_A is connected to the speed
setpoint value. The integer output NIST_A is connected to the speed actual value of the
controller.
In the figure below, an example of a SIMATIC configuration for SINAMICS is shown.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
The figure below shows the PROFIdrive1 component and the connected process data:
The process data speed values, which means NSOLL_A and NIST_A are raw values in the
range zero to 16384. The value 16384 corresponds to the nominal speed. Other process data,
for example, torque values or actual current values, are not taken into account in the
PROFIdrive1 component.
The current speed of the drive is output as a percentage at analog output Y, in other words in
a range of 0 to 100: 0 ≤ Y ≤ 100. A value of 0 thus corresponds to a stationary drive, while a
value 100 corresponds to the nominal speed (raw speed value 16384).
The contents of the control word and the status word are displayed bit-by-bit in the operating
window of the component. In addition, the setpoint speed value NSOLL_A and the speed actual
value NIST_A, are displayed as percentage values and in revolutions per minute (RPM). The
fourth bit and eighth bit in the status word (ZSW1.3 - Fault and ZSW1.7 - Warning) can be set
to 1 using a toggle switch.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
See also
Using the PROFIdrive library to simulate PROFIdrive drives (Page 466)

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
State machine
The state machine is described in detail in the PROFIdrive specification. The state graph
implemented in the PROFIdrive1 component type is illustrated in the figure below:
3RZHURQ
352),GULYH
6WDWXVGLDJUDP
66ZLWFKLQJ2Q,QKLELWHG
=6: =6:
=6: =6:
67: $1'
67: $1'
67:
67: 25
67:
65HDG\)RU6ZLWFKLQJ2Q
=6: =6: 67: 67:
=6: =6: 256WDQGVWLOO
67:
64XLFN6WRS
67: 25
67:
67:
67:
66ZLWFKHG2Q 67:
256WDQGVWLOO
=6: =6: 6ZLWFKLQJ2II
=6: =6: 65DPS6WRS =6: =6:
=6: =6:
67: 67:
67:
67:
62SHUDWLRQ
67: =6: =6: =6:[ %LW[LQVWDWXVZRUG
=6: =6: 67: 67:\ %LW\LQFRQWUROZRUG
3ULRULW\KLJKHVWORZHVW
The control bits shown in the table are used to control the state machine (status transitions).
Depending on the current status, the corresponding status bits are set as illustrated in the table.
Table 8-8 Status table for the component PROFIdrive1
State State Description STW1 (bit sequence 15

… 0)
S1: Switching On Inhibited 1 Off dddd dmsm a1ss a000
S2: Ready For Switching On 2 Ready dddd dmsm a0ss a001
S3: Switched On 3 Switched on dddd dmsm a0ss a011
S4: Operation 4 Normal operation dddd dmsm a0ss a111
S5: Switching Off (Ramp Stop) 5 Ramp stop of the motor dddd dmsm a0ss a011
S6: Switching Off (Quick Stop) 6 Quick stop of the motor dddd dmsm a0ss a011

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
The individual bits in status word STW1 shown in the table have the following meaning:
d device-specific (device-specific component)

s derived directly from STW1
m model-specific (here: delay)
a can be set in the operating window
Table 8-9 Structure of control word
Name STW1.Bit Description Use

On/Off (Off1) STW1.0 Switch off drive Yes
No Coast Stop (Off2) STW1.1 No coast stop of drive Yes
No Quick Stop (Off3) STW1.2 No quick stop of drive Yes
Enable Operation STW1.3 Drive moves to setpoint Yes
Enable Ramp Generator STW1.4 RFG is used Yes
Unfreeze Ramp Generator STW1.5 RFG frozen Yes
Enable Setpoint STW1.6 NSOLL as input for RFG Yes
Fault Acknowledge STW1.7 Fault acknowledgement from Yes
PLC
Jog 1 On STW1.8 not implemented No
Control by PLC STW1.10 DO IO data valid Yes
Device-specific STW1.11–15 Device-specific
component
The meaning of all the status word bits is described in the table below.
Table 8-10 Structure of the status word
Name STW1.Bit Description Source

Ready To Switch On STW1.0 Power supply switched on State machine
Ready To Operate STW1.1 No fault present State machine
Operation Enabled STW1.2 Operation enabled State machine
Fault Present STW1.3 Drive faulty/out of service Operating window
Coast Stop Not Active STW1.4 No coast stop of drive STW1.1
Quick Stop Not Active STW1.5 No quick stop of drive STW1.2
Switching On Inhibited STW1.6 Switching on inhibited State machine
Warning Present STW1.7 Warning present/out of service Operating window
Speed Error Within Toler‐ STW1.8 Setpoint/actual deviation in toler‐ PT1
ance ance range
Control Requested STW1.9 Control requested/local operation STW1.10
Speed Reached STW1.10 Reference speed reached PT1
Device-specific ZSW1.11–15 Drive-specific Additional compo‐
nent/0

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Ramp generator
The ramp function generator (RFG) is controlled by bits 4, 5 and 6 of the control word (STW1.4,
STW1.5, STW1.6). Bit 6 sets the input of the generator to NSOLL_RFG. The generator then
ramps up or down to this setpoint value in a linear manner using the set time RampTime
assuming the generator is enabled via bit 5. Otherwise, the last output value of the generator
is retained. Finally, bit 4 determines whether the ramp generator value is output. A setpoint
connection can only be carried out in state S4. Otherwise the ramp setpoint 0 is output.
Specific output for expansion

A specific Drive connector on the bottom of the component is used to connect a device-specific
component or for adding additional functions.
This connector is of the PROFIdrive connection type. It cannot be connected to the analog,
binary or integer connectors of components.
Use of the PROFIdrive1 component type without extension

The PROFIdrive1 component type implements the standard functions according to the
PROFIdrive profile. The PROFIdrive1 component can therefore be used to simulate
PROFIdrive devices with this basic function, without being connected to a device-specific
component. Drive-specific bits in the control word are then ignored and drive-specific bits in the
status word are set to zero.
Connectors
Input Description
STW1 Control word 1 (STW1) from the PROFIdrive telegram
NSOLL_A Standardized speed setpoint (NSOLL_A) from the PROFI‐
drive telegram
NIst Process value actual speed

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Output Description
ZSW1 Status word 1 (ZSW1) from the PROFIdrive telegram
NIST_A Standardized actual speed value (NIST_A) from the PROFI‐
drive telegram
Y Process value speed setpoint value specification relative to
the reference speed in %
NSoll Process value speed setpoint value specification
Parameter
MaxSpeed Here you enter the maximum physical speed of the drive.
RampTime Here you enter the ramp slope for changing the speed set‐
point.
EmergencyStopTime Here you enter the slope with which the pending speed set‐
point is to be reduced in case of an error.
HysteresisSpeed Enter here the width of the window which will be moved
around the target speed. If the actual speed is within this win‐
dow, ZSW.Bit8 (Speed Error Within Tolerance) is set to
TRUE.
SpeedThreshold Enter a comparison value for the speed threshold here. If the
actual speed has reached or exceeded this comparison val‐
ue, ZSW.Bit10 (Speed Reached) is set to TRUE.
PROFIdrive2 – Basic function of the PROFIdrive drive for positioning axes
Symbol
Function
The PROFIdrive2 component type simulates the state machine with the ramp function
generator according to the PROFIdrive profile (Technical Specification, Version 4.2, Edition:
October 2015 (Order No.: 3.172)).
In addition to the PROFIdrive1 block, the PROFIdrive2 block provides a monitoring option in
form of a sign-of-life signal exchange in STW2 and ZSW2.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
The cyclic exchange of the sign-of-life requires that the SIMIT application is operated in bus
synchronous mode. To do so, set the bus synchronous operating mode.
This component therefore simulates the functionality defined in the standard PROFIdrive
telegram 2 that is used for operation of extended speed-controlled axes:
3=' 3=' 3=' 3='

7(/B
1RPLQDO 67: 162//B% 67:
7(/B
=6: 1,67B% =6:
$FWXDO
Additional components are required for modeling positioning axes; these can be docked over
the special connector for expansion (see also Specific output for expansion (Page 487)).
State machine
The state machine is described in detail in the PROFIdrive specification. The state graph
implemented in the PROFIdrive2 component type is illustrated in the figure below:
3RZHURQ
352),GULYH
6WDWXVGLDJUDP
66ZLWFKLQJ2Q,QKLELWHG
=6: =6:
=6: =6:
67: $1'
67: $1'
67:
67: 25
67:
65HDG\)RU6ZLWFKLQJ2Q
=6: =6: 67: 67:
=6: =6: 256WDQGVWLOO
67:
64XLFN6WRS
67: 25
67:
67:
67:
66ZLWFKHG2Q 67:
256WDQGVWLOO
=6: =6: 6ZLWFKLQJ2II
=6: =6: 65DPS6WRS =6: =6:
=6: =6:
67: 67:
67:
67:
62SHUDWLRQ
67: =6: =6: =6:[ %LW[LQVWDWXVZRUG
=6: =6: 67: 67:\ %LW\LQFRQWUROZRUG
3ULRULW\KLJKHVWORZHVW

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
The control bits shown in the table are used to control the state machine (status transitions).
Depending on the current status, the corresponding status bits are set as illustrated in the table.
Table 8-11 Status table for the component PROFIdrive2
State State Description STW1 (bit sequence 15

… 0)
S1: Switching On Inhibited 1 Off dddd dmsm a1ss a000
S2: Ready For Switching On 2 Ready dddd dmsm a0ss a001
S3: Switched On 3 Switched on dddd dmsm a0ss a011
S4: Operation 4 Normal operation dddd dmsm a0ss a111
S5: Switching Off (Ramp Stop) 5 Ramp stop of the motor dddd dmsm a0ss a011
S6: Switching Off (Quick Stop) 6 Quick stop of the motor dddd dmsm a0ss a011
The individual bits in status word STW1 shown in the table have the following meaning:
d device-specific (device-specific component)

s derived directly from STW1
m model-specific (here: delay)
a can be set in the operating window
Table 8-12 Structure of control word
Name STW1.Bit Description Use

On/Off (Off1) STW1.0 Switch off drive Yes
No Coast Stop (Off2) STW1.1 No coast stop of drive Yes
No Quick Stop (Off3) STW1.2 No quick stop of drive Yes
Enable Operation STW1.3 Drive moves to setpoint Yes
Enable Ramp Generator STW1.4 RFG is used Yes
Unfreeze Ramp Generator STW1.5 RFG frozen Yes
Enable Setpoint STW1.6 NSOLL as input for RFG Yes
Fault Acknowledge STW1.7 Fault acknowledgement from Yes
PLC
Control by PLC STW1.10 DO IO data valid Yes
Device-specific STW1.11–15 Device-specific
component
The meaning of all the status word bits is described in the table below.
Table 8-13 Structure of the status word

Ready To Switch On STW1.0 Power supply switched on State machine
Ready To Operate STW1.1 No fault present State machine
Operation Enabled STW1.2 Operation enabled State machine

Libraries
8.1 Basic library

Fault Present STW1.3 Drive faulty/out of service Operating window
Coast Stop Not Active STW1.4 No coast stop of drive STW1.1
Quick Stop Not Active STW1.5 No quick stop of drive STW1.2
Switching On Inhibited STW1.6 Switching on inhibited State machine
Warning Present STW1.7 Warning present/out of service Operating window
Speed Error Within Toler‐ STW1.8 Setpoint/actual deviation in toler‐ PT1
ance ance range
Control Requested STW1.9 Control requested/local operation STW1.10
Speed Reached STW1.10 Reference speed reached PT1
Device-specific ZSW1.11–15 Drive-specific Additional compo‐
nent/0
Ramp generator
The ramp function generator (RFG) is controlled by bits 4, 5 and 6 of the control word (STW1.4,
STW1.5, STW1.6). Bit 6 sets the input of the generator to NSOLL_RFG. The generator then
ramps up or down to this setpoint value in a linear manner using the set time RampTime
assuming the generator is enabled via bit 5. Otherwise, the last output value of the generator
is retained. Finally, bit 4 determines whether the ramp generator value is output. A setpoint
connection can only be carried out in state S4. Otherwise the ramp setpoint 0 is output.
Sign-of-life exchange over STW2 and ZSW2

The process data STW2 and ZSW2 are defined in the standard PROFIdrive telegrams 2 and
higher. They are used to exchange a sign-of-life between controller and drive. If the sign-of-life
fails in a configurable sequence, an error is generated and the drive is shut down for safety
reasons.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Specific output for expansion

A specific Drive connector on the bottom of the component is used to connect a device-specific
component or for adding additional functions.
This connector is of the PROFIdrive connection type. It cannot be connected to the analog,
binary or integer connectors of components.
Use of the PROFIdrive2 component type without extension

The PROFIdrive2 component type implements the standard functions according to the
PROFIdrive profile. The PROFIdrive2 component can therefore be used to simulate
PROFIdrive devices with this basic function, without being connected to a device-specific
component. Drive-specific bits in the control word are then ignored and drive-specific bits in the
status word are set to zero.
If higher-value PROFIdrive telegrams (3, 4, 5, 6, 102, 103, 105, 106) are to be modeled, the
basic block must be expanded accordingly.
Connectors
Input Description
NSOLL_B Standardized speed setpoint (NSOLL_B) from the PROFIdrive telegram
NIst Process value actual speed
Output Description
NIST_B Standardized speed actual value (NIST_B) from the PROFIdrive tele‐
gram
Y Process value speed setpoint value specification relative to the refer‐
ence speed in %
NSoll Process value speed setpoint value specification
Parameter
MaxSpeed Here you enter the maximum physical speed of the drive.
RampTime Here you enter the ramp slope for changing the speed set‐
point.
EmergencyStopTime Here you enter the slope with which the pending speed set‐
point is to be reduced in case of an error.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
AllowedLifeSignErrors Here you enter the number of tolerated sign-of-life failures. (0

means that not a single sign-of-life may be missed)
HysteresisSpeed Enter here the width of the window which will be moved
around the target speed. If the actual speed is within this win‐
dow, ZSW1.Bit8 (Speed Error Within Tolerance) is set to
TRUE.
SpeedThreshold Enter a comparison value for the speed threshold here. If the
actual speed has reached or exceeded this comparison val‐
ue, ZSW1.Bit10 (Speed Reached) is set to TRUE.
Safety30 – Enhancement of the drive simulation with a PROFISafe telegram 30
Symbol
Function
The Safety30 component type is used to enhance a PROFIdrive telegram according to the
PROFIdrive profile (Technical Specification, Version 4.2, Edition: October 2015 (Order No.:
3.172)) by the functionality of Safety telegram 30.
This block processes user data of Safety telegram 30. The simulation of the PROFISafe trailer
is not performed. Simulation of the secure PROFISafe communication is not required to use
PLCSIM_Adv.
Connectors
Input Description
S_STW1 Safety control word 1
Output Description
S_ZSW1 Safety status word 1
Parameter
Parameter Description
SafetyTimeout Monitoring time of an active Safety function in ms
STO_Enabled Support for the Safety Integrated Function Safe Torque Off (STO)
SS1_Enabled Support for the Safety Integrated Function Safe Stop 1 (SS1)

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
SOS_Enabled Support for the Safety Integrated Function Safe Operating Stop (SOS)
SLS_Enabled Support for the Safety Integrated Function Safely-Limited Speed (SLS)
SLT_Enabled Support for the Safety Integrated Function Safely-Limited Torque (SLT)
SLP_Enabled Support for the Safety Integrated Function Safely-Limited Position (SLP)
SLA_Enabled Support for the Safety Integrated Function Safely-Limited Acceleration
(SLA)
SDI_Enabled Support for the Safety Integrated Function Safely – Safe Direction (SDI)
Symbol
Function
PLCSIM_Adv.
Connectors
Input Description
Output Description
Parameter

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
(SLA)
Symbol
Function
PLCSIM_Adv.
Connectors
Input Description
Output Description
S_XIST32 Safety position of current value (for Safety telegram 32)
Parameter

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
(SLA)
SafetyProcess – Resolution of errors during active Safety functions
Symbol
Function
The SafetyProcess component type is used to resolve errors during active drive-internal Safety
functions.
The component must be connected to the Process connector of a Safety component from the
PROFIdrive telegram.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Connectors
Input Description
S_PositionOffsetError Resolution of a position monitoring error during an active Safety Inte‐
grated function: Safe Operating Stop (SOS)
S_SpeedLimitError Resolution of a speed monitoring error during an active Safety Integra‐
ted function: Safely-Limited Speed (SLS)
S_TorqueLimitError Resolution of a torque limit violation during an active Safety Integrated
function: Safely-Limited Torque (SLT)
S_SpeedDirPError Resolution of a direction reversal (negative) during an active Safety
Integrated function: Safe Direction (SDI)
S_PositionLimitError Resolution of a position limit violation during an active Safety Integrated
function: Safely Limited Position (SLP)
S_SpeedDirNError Resolution of a direction reversal (positive) during an active Safety In‐
tegrated function: Safe Direction (SDI)
Output Description
Safety Output structure for the interconnection to the Process connector of a
Safety component from the PROFIdrive telegram.
Sensor – Simulation of the sensor component in a PROFIdrive telegram
Symbol
Function
The Sensor component type is used to enhance a PROFIdrive telegram according to the
3.172)) by the functionality of a sensor.
This component therefore simulates the part of a sensor in the standard PROFIdrive telegram:
3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3='

7(/B
1RPLQDO 67: 162//B% 67: *B67:
7(/B =6: 1,67B% =6: *B=6: *B;,67 *B;,67

$FWXDO
If a telegram is to be simulated with two sensors, this can be done by docking an additional
"Sensor" component.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3='

7(/B
1RPLQDO
67: 162//B% 67: *B67: *B67:
7(/B =6: 1,67B% =6: *B=6: *B;,67 *B;,67 *B=6: *B;,67 *B;,67
$FWXDO
Connectors
Input Description
Gx_STW Sensor control word (Gx_STW) from the PROFIdrive telegram
Process Structure for docking a sensor simulation
Output Description
Gx_ZSW Sensor status word (Gx_ZSW) from the PROFIdrive telegram
Gx_XIST1 Sensor actual value 1 (Gx_XIST1) from the PROFIdrive telegram
Gx_XIST2 Sensor actual value 2 (Gx_XIST2) from the PROFIdrive telegram
Parameter
GxFineResolutionXist1 Enter the fine resolution of Gx_Xist1 here.
GxFineResolutionXist2 Enter the fine resolution of Gx_Xist2 here.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
SensorProcessLinear – Simulation of a linear encoder
Symbol
Function
The SensorProcessLinear component type is used to simulate the functionality of a linear
encoder. You can simulate linear absolute encoders as well as linear incremental encoders.
The component must be connected to the ""Process"" connector of a "Sensor" (Page 492)
component from the PROFIdrive telegram.
Connectors
Input Description
Gx_XIST Process value in the engineering unit mm
Gx_ReferenceMark1…4 Encoder reference marks 1–4 (TRUE = reference mark deflected)
Gx_Probe1..2 Measuring probe deflection 1–2 (TRUE = measuring probe deflected)
Gx_ErrorCode Simulated encoder error code
Output Description
Sensor Output structure for connection to the "Process" connector of a "Sensor"
(Page 492) component from the PROFIdrive telegram.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Parameter
DistanceBetweenIncrements Here you enter the distance between two tick marks in millimeters.
SupportsAbsoluteValues Here you enter whether an absolute (=TRUE) or an incremental
(=FALSE) encoder is to be simulated.
SensorProcessRotatory – Simulation of a rotary encoder
Symbol
Function
The SensorProcessRotatory component type is used to simulate the functionality of a rotary
encoder. You can simulate rotary absolute encoders as well as rotary incremental encoders.
The component must be connected to the "Process" connector of a "Sensor" (Page 492)
component from the PROFIdrive telegram.
Connectors
Input Description
Gx_XIST Process value of a physical variable
Gx_ReferenceMark1…4 Encoder reference marks 1–4 (TRUE = reference mark deflected)
Gx_Probe1..2 Measuring probe deflection 1–2 (TRUE = measuring probe deflected)
Gx_ErrorCode Simulated encoder error code

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Output Description
Sensor Output structure for connection to the ""Process"" connector of a "Sen‐
sor" (Page 492) component from the PROFIdrive telegram.
Parameters
IncrementsPreRevolution Here you enter the encoder property encoder line per revolution.
DeterminableRevolutions Here you enter the number of revolutions for rotary encoders in which
the absolute value can be determined.
DistancePerRevolution Here you enter the distance in the physical unit you have selected that
is covered in one encoder revolution (e.g. 360.0 for 360°).
SupportsAbsoluteValues Here you enter whether an absolute (=TRUE) or an incremental
(=FALSE) encoder is to be simulated.
Universal – Extensions to the PROFIdrive basic function
Symbol
Function
The Universal component type can only be meaningfully used in combination with
the PROFIdrive1orPROFIdrive2 component type. It enables drive-specific functions to be
realized in addition to the basic PROFIdrive functions.
Bits 11 to 15 of the control word (STW1.11–15), the speed setpoint value NSOLL_A and the
speed actual value NIST (NIST_PT1) are placed on the outputs of the Universal component. By
means of appropriate logical and arithmetical operations, bits 11 to 15 of the status word, the
speed setpoint value NSOLL (NSOLL_RFG), and the speed actual value NIST_A are set at the
inputs of the component. The signal linkage resulting from the connection of the
Universalcomponent to the PROFIdrive component is illustrated in the figure below.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
8QLYHUVDO
The figure below illustrates an example of how the drive-specific functions for the Type 3
Micromaster can be implemented with the aid of the Universal component.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Siemens
InFeed_Tel_370
Symbol
Function
The Infeed_Tel_370 component type simulates an electrical infeed unit that is switched on and
off by commands that are transported by the PROFIdrive telegram 370.
Telegram structure p922=370
Output data Input data

Telegram 370 Signal Comment Signal Comment
PZD1 E_STW1 E_ZSW1
To signal a warning or error situation, set the binary input Warning or Fault from False to True.
When the binary input Close Line Contactor is set to True, the electrical infeed unit requests that
the line contactor is closed. This request must be fed back to the binary input Line Contactor
closed. This is done through a direct connection or by using a delay block to simulate in more
detail.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Dialog box
The "Infeed_Tel_370" dialog box shows the current status of the control and status words in
telegram 370.
SiemensMomentumReduction – Analysis of the torque reduction value from a PROFIdrive telegram
Symbol

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Function
The SiemensMomentumReduction component type is used to enhance a PROFIdrive
telegram according to the PROFIdrive profile (Technical Specification, Version 4.2, Edition:
October 2015 (Order No.: 3.172)) by the manufacturer-specific functionality for the
transmission of a torque reduction value.
3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3='

7(/B
1RPLQDO 67: 162//B% 67: *B67: ;(55 .3&
7(/B
=6: 1,67B% =6: *B=6: *B;,67 *B;,67
$FWXDO
The SiemensMomentumReduction component type denormalizes the transferred torque

reduction specification.
Connectors
Input Description
MOMRED Standardized torque reduction specification from the PROFIdrive tele‐
gram
Output Description
MELDW Currently not used and is always 0
M_RED Reduced torque with reference to Torque_RedScale parameter
M_Lower_Limit Reduced low torque limit
M_Upper_Limit Reduced high torque limit
Parameter
Torque_Nominal Here you enter the reference torque.
Torque_UpperLimit Here you enter the top physical speed limit of your drive.
Torque_LowerLimit Here you enter the low physical speed limit of your drive.
Torque_RedScale Here you specify the percentage to which the torque reduction is to be
normalized. The reference torque is typically 100%.
Sinamics – SINAMICS frequency converter
Symbol

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Function
The specific additional functions for the SINAMICS frequency converter are implemented in
the Sinamics component type. The implementation is coordinated with the processing stages
contained in the SINA_GS function block. The SINA_GS function block is located in the function
block library DriveES-PCS 7 .
The Sinamics component type can only be used in combination with the PROFIdrive1 or
PROFIdrive2 component type.
Table 8-14 Sinamics-specific evaluation of the control word
STW1.11 NSOLL
Inversion of setpoint value
0 NSOLL
1 −NSOLL
The speed actual value NIst and the bit 11 of the status word are set according to the
relationships listed in the table below.
Table 8-15 Sinamics-specific states
NIst ZSW1.11
Positive direction of rotation
NIst >= 0 1
NIst < 0 0
DCMaster – SIMOREG DC Master power converter
Symbol
Function
The specific additional functions for the SIMOREG DC Master power converter are
implemented in the DCMaster component type. The implementation is adapted to the
processing steps contained in the SIMO_DC function block from the Drive ES PCS 7 function
block library.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
The DCMaster component type can only be used in combination with the PROFIdrive1 or
Table 8-16 DCMaster-specific evaluation of the control word
STW1.11 STW1.12 NSOLL

Enable positive direction of rota‐ Enable negative direction of ro‐
tion tation
0 0 0
0 1 -|NSOLL|
1 0 |NSOLL|
1 1 NSOLL
The speed actual value NIst and the bits 12 and 14 of the status word are set according to the
Table 8-17 DCMaster-specific states
NIst ZSW1.12 ZSW1.14

Line contactor requirement Positive direction of rotation
NIst > 0 1 1
NIst = 0 0 1
NIst < 0 1 0
Masterdrive – SIMOVERT Masterdrive frequency converter
Symbol
Function
The specific additional functions for the SIMOVERT Masterdrive frequency converter are
implemented in the Masterdrive component type. The implementation is coordinated with the
processing stages contained in the SIMO_MD function block. The SIMO_MD function block is
located in the function block library DriveES-PCS7.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
The Masterdrive component type can only be used in combination with the PROFIdrive1 or
Table 8-18 Masterdrive-specific evaluation of the control word
STW1.11 STW1.12 NSOLL

Enable positive direction of rota‐ Enable negative direction of rota‐
tion tion
0 0 0
0 1 -|NSOLL|
1 0 |NSOLL|
1 1 NSOLL
The speed actual value NIst and the bits 12 and 14 of the status word are set according to the
Table 8-19 Masterdrive-specific states
NIst ZSW1.12 ZSW1.14

Line contactor requirement Positive direction of rotation
NIst > 0 1 1
NIst = 0 0 1
NIst < 0 1 0
Micromaster3 – MICROMASTER Type 3 frequency converter
Symbol
Function
The specific additional functions for the MICROMASTER Type 3 frequency converter are
implemented in the Micromaster3 component type. The implementation is coordinated with the
processing stages contained in the SIMO_MM3 function block. The SIMO_MM3 function block
is located in the function block library DriveES-PCS7.
The Micromaster3 component type can only be used in combination with the PROFIdrive1 or
Table 8-20 Micromaster3-specific evaluation of the control word
STW1.14 NSOLL
Clockwise rotation
0 - NSOLL
1 NSOLL

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Table 8-21 Micromaster3-specific states
NIst ZSW1.14
Clockwise rotation
NIST >= 0 1
NIST < 0 0
Micromaster4 – MICROMASTER Type 4 frequency converter
Symbol
Function
The specific additional functions for the MICROMASTER Type 4 frequency converter are
implemented in the Micromaster4 component type. The implementation is coordinated with the
processing stages contained in the SIMO_MM4 function block. The SIMO_MM4 function block
is located in the function block library DriveES-PCS7.
The Micromaster4 component type can only be used in combination with the PROFIdrive1 or
Table 8-22 Micromaster4-specific evaluation of the control word
STW1.11 NSOLL
Inversion of setpoint value
0 NSOLL
1 - NSOLL
Table 8-23 Micromaster4-specific states
NIst ZSW1.11
Positive direction of rotation
NIST >= 0 1
NIST < 0 0

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
8.1.4.6 SIMOCODE pro motor control devices
SIMOCODE pro motor management and control devices are used to switch motors on and off
and to monitor the resulting currents. As an option, SIMOCODE pro can also be used to record
other measured values and to access comprehensive statistical evaluations. A SIMOCODE
pro device is connected to the controller as an individual PROFIBUS DP slave.
By configuring the device accordingly, a SIMOCODE pro can be employed for very different
tasks. For example, it can operate as direct-on-line starter, reversing starter, star-delta starter
with or without reversal of rotation, pole switching device with or without reversal of rotation, as
well as positioner, solenoid valve drive, overload relay or power circuit breaker. The directory
SIMOCODEpro in the Drives Library contains component types that emulate the various
control functions of SIMOCODE pro. These component types form the SIMOCODEpro Library
of SIMIT.
Basic functions of SIMOCODE pro components

Each component type of the SIMOCODEpro Library contains, as a basic function, a simple
emulation of the motor together with the logic for switching the motor on and off.
67: =6:
2QRIIVZLWFKLQJORJLF
&RQWUROGDWD 0HVVDJHGDWD

$FWXDOFXUUHQW
&XUUHQW>@

6SHHG

5XQXSWLPH
5XQGRZQWLPH
The corresponding connectors of the SIMOCODEpro component types can be seen in the
symbols depicted in the figure below.
All SIMOCODE pro devices are accessed via control data and return their current status to the
controller by means of message data. The content of the control and message data depends
on which control function is implemented. Only the cyclical control and message data is
processed by the SIMOCODEpro component types; acyclical data such as statistical data, for

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
example, are not taken into account. The components can interface with the controller in the
following ways:
● The control data word (2 bytes) of the controller outputs is connected to the integer
input STW of the component.
● The first data word of the message data in the controller inputs contains the binary feedback
and is connected to the integer output ZSW. Analog message data, for example, the actual
current value, is transferred to the controller in the second data word.
This configuration corresponds to SIMOCODE pro C or, in the case of SIMOCODE pro V, to
basic type 2.
In the figure below, an example of a SIMATIC configuration for a Dahlander motor is shown.
The figure below shows the SIMOCODEpro component and the associated process data.
The actual current I is communicated to the controller as a percentage value of the current
setting (rated motor current). The current value at input I is interconnected as the actual current
to the output I, provided that the motor is switched on. The input has a default value of 100%,
which means the actual current equals the current setting. The switching on and off of the motor
is controlled by a ramp function.
The relationship between current and motor load is not taken into account. This can however
easily be added in the simulation, for example, by not setting the current as a constant value but
by using suitable functions to make it dependent on the motor speed or on the process instead.
You can find additional information on this in section: Individual adaptations (Page 510).
The speed of the motor is available as a percentage value at output Y of a SIMOCODEpro
component. The run-up and run-down times of the motor are set on the two analog inputs TUp
and TDown. TUp is the time in seconds it takes the motor to run up from standstill to the nominal

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
speed; TDown is the time in seconds it takes for the motor to run down to a standstill from the
nominal speed. Both times have a default value of one second. If one of the two input values
is negative during the simulation, the message "x: run-up or run-down time invalid value"
Note
In the case of positioners and solenoid valves, the run-up and run-down times mean the
opening and closing time TUp and TDown of the valve.
The speed of the motor is not specified by the controller nor detected by the SIMOCODE pro
devices. The speed value is therefore not communicated to the controller. Its purpose is to
provide another source of motor speed input for the simulation. Consequently, the run-up and
run-down times are only of minor importance.
Switchover pauses and interlock times are ignored by the SIMOCODEpro component types.
Corresponding feedback for the controller is not generated.
Ramp function
The motor speed is formed using a ramp function. The most general form of this ramp for a drive
with two speeds in two directions of rotation is illustrated in the figure below.
The increase and decrease times of the ramp correspond to the run-up and run-down times TUp
and TDown of the motors. Depending on how SIMOCODE pro is configured, the motor speed Y
is generated as a percentage value in the range –100% to 100%.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Overload behavior
Overload can be set using the Overload switch in the operating window of a component. The
motor is switched off in the event of an overload. A thermal switch-on inhibitor determines when
the motor can be switched on again (cooling down time). The cooling down time begins when
the overload no longer exists. The cooling down time is set in the Cool_Down_Period parameter
and has a default value of 300 seconds, as shown in the figure below.
As shown in the figure below, the remaining cooling down time is displayed in the Cool down
field of the operating window:
During this time the drive is disabled, which means it cannot be restarted.
The thermal switch-on inhibitor is reset by setting the emergency start (EM-Start, STW.12) bit.
The drive can be restarted immediately.
The advance warning for overload (I >115%, ZSW.11) is set as soon as the input current
exceeds 115%.
Standard assignments in the control and message data

The functions shown in the table below are used as standard for bits 11 to 15 of the control word
(STW. 11 to STW.15) in all SIMOCODEpro component types. The Emergency Start function
does not apply to solenoid valves.
Table 8-24 Standard assignments in the control word
Name Control data

Test1 Test function: reset after 5 seconds STW.11
EM-Start Emergency start STW.12
Remote Operating mode switch S1 STW.13
Reset Reset device STW.14
The test function Test1 resets the SIMOCODE pro device five seconds after setting the signal.
The motor is switched off.
Setting EM-Start resets the thermal switch-on inhibitor if it has been triggered by an overload.
The motor can then be switched on again immediately.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
The Remote command displays the controller default for operating mode switch S1. This
command has no functional effect on the simulation.
The SIMOCODE pro device is reset using the Reset command. This switches the motor off.
The table below provides an overview of the standard message data for all SIMOCODEpro
component types. The overload advance warning does not apply to solenoid valves.
Table 8-25 Standard assignments in the status word
Name Message data

I>115% Overload advance warning ZSW.11
Remote Remote operating mode ZSW.13
Fault General fault ZSW.14
Warning General warning ZSW.15
If the current value rises above 115%, bit ZSW.11 is set as advance warning of an overload.
The Remote, Fault and Warning signals can be set in the operating window of the component.
The Remote signal has a default value of one, which means the switch is closed.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Operating window of the SIMOCODEpro components

All SIMOCODEpro components have an operating window in which the signals of the control
word and status word are displayed. The names of the control word signals used by each
component are shown in the operating window. The same applies to the message data signals
that are manipulated by the components. Signals indicated by numbers have no function in the
component and are only displayed in the operating window. The figure below shows the
operating window for the component of type ReversingDahlander. The operating windows for
components of other types are designed accordingly.
Individual adaptations
Depending on how parameters have been assigned to a SIMOCODE pro device, signals in the
control and message data can have meanings that are not present in the SIMOCODEpro
Library components. However, these signals can be included in the simulation by a simple
connection to other components from the SIMIT Basic Library.
In the example of a ReversingDahlander component illustrated in the figure below, the
interlocking time and the change-over pause can be set manually. Neither signal is set in the
component. Here, the status word on the output of the component has been divided into its
individual signals by the conversion components (Word2Byte, Byte2Bit). The signals set in the
component are converted into a word again by the signals linked via the global connectors, and
communicated to the IW516 signal input of the automation system.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
An example is also shown of how the current on the input of the ReversingDahlander
component can be mapped from the speed of the motor on output Y of the ReversingDahlander
component using a suitable trend function (Characteristic) and adjusted as required.
Specific SIMOCODE pro devices

The SIMOCODEpro library contains ten different SIMOCODEpro component types. These
component types emulate the various control functions of a SIMOCODE pro. Each control
function is emulated by a component type. The simulation function of the component types is
tailored to the control variants (function blocks) in PCS 7.
Table 8-26 Supported control functions of the SIMOCODE pro
SIMIT component types Control function PCS 7 FB

DirectStarter Direct starter SMC_DIR
ReversingStarter Reversing starter SMC_REV
StarDeltaStarter Star-delta starter SMC_STAR
ReversingStarDelta Reversing star-delta starter SMC_REVS
Dahlander Dahlander / pole-changing switch SMC_DAHL
ReversingDahlander Dahlander / pole-changing switch with re‐ SMC_REVD
versal of direction of rotation
Valve Solenoid valve SMC_VAL
Positioner Slider SMC_POS
OverloadRelay Overload SMC_OVL
CircuitBreaker Circuit breaker SMC_CB

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
DirectStarter – Direct starter
Symbol
Function
The component type DirectStarter simulates drives that have a single direction of rotation and
can be switched on and off directly. The table below provides an overview of the relevant control
data STW and message data STW for this application.
Table 8-27 Control and message data of the DirectStarter component
Name Control data Message data

Off Switch off drive STW.9 Drive switched off STW.9
On Switch on drive STW.10 Drive switched on STW.10
The commands "Switch off drive" (Off, STW.9) and "Reset" (RESET, STW.14) have priority
over the command "Switch on drive" (On, STW.10).
The actual current value at output I is set to the value at the current input I as soon as the drive
is switched on. If the drive is switched off, it is set to zero. The speed value at the output Y is
formed as a percentage value with the help of the ramp function: 0 ≤ Y ≤ 100.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
ReversingStarter – Reversing starter
Symbol
Function
The ReversingStarter component type simulates drives with two directions of rotation, which
can be switched on and off directly in both directions. The table below provides an overview of
the relevant control data STW and message data ZSW for this application.
Table 8-28 Control and message data of the DirectStarter component

On< Switch on counterclock‐ STW.8 Counterclockwise rotation ZSW.8
wise rotation switched on
Off Switch off drive STW.9 Drive switched off ZSW.9
On> Switch on clockwise rota‐ STW.10 Clockwise rotation switched ZSW.10
tion on
over the command "Switch on counterclockwise rotation" or "Switch on clockwise rotation"
(On<, STW.8 or On>, STW.10). Simultaneous switch-on commands for both directions of
rotation do not alter the status of the drive; they are ignored.
is switched on in one of the two directions of rotation. If the drive is switched off, the actual
current value is set to zero. The speed value at the output y is formed as a percentage value
with the help of the ramp function: −100 ≤ Y ≤ 100.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
StarDeltaStarter – Star-delta starter
Symbol
Function
The StarDeltaStarter component type simulates drives with star-delta switchover. The table
below provides an overview of the relevant control data STW and message data STW for this
application.
Table 8-29 Control and message data of the StarDeltaStarter component

Off Switch off drive STW.9 Drive switched off STW.9
On Switch on drive STW.10 Delta mode switched on STW.10
over the command "Switch on drive" (On, STW.10).
The maximum time for star mode is set in the parameter Max_Star_Time. The default time is 15
seconds. The switchover to delta mode (STW.10) is performed when the maximum star mode
time has been reached or if a value of less than 90% is present on the current input.
is switched on. If the drive is switched off, the actual current value is set to zero. The speed
value at the output Y is formed as a percentage value with the help of the ramp function: 0 ≤ Y
≤ 100.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
ReversingStarDelta – Star-delta starter with reversal of direction of rotation
Symbol
Function
The ReversingStarDelta component type simulates drives with star-delta switchover in both
directions of rotation. The table below provides an overview of the relevant control data STW
and message data ZSW for this application.
Table 8-30 Control and message data for the ReversingStarDelta component

On< Switch on counterclock‐ STW.8 Counterclockwise delta mode switch‐ ZSW.8
wise rotation ed on
On> Switch on clockwise ro‐ STW.10 Clockwise delta mode switched on ZSW.10
tation
over the command "Switch on counterclockwise rotation" or "Switch on clockwise rotation"
(On<, STW.8 or On>, STW.10). Simultaneous switch-on commands for both directions of
rotation do not alter the status of the drive; they are ignored.
The maximum time for star mode is set in the parameter Max_Star_Time. The default time is 15
seconds. The direction-dependent switchover to delta mode (ZSW.10 or ZSW.8) is performed
when the maximum star mode time has been reached or if a value of less than 90% is present
at the current input.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
is switched on in one of the two directions of rotation. If the drive is switched off, the actual
current value is set to zero. The speed value at the output y is formed as a percentage value
with the help of the ramp function: −100 ≤ Y ≤ 100.
Dahlander – Dahlander starter or pole-changing switch
Symbol

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Function
The Dahlander component type simulates drives with a single direction of rotation and two
speeds: full speed and low speed. The table below provides an overview of the relevant control
data STW and message data ZSW for this application.
Table 8-31 Control and message data of the Dahlander component

On>> Switch drive to full speed STW.8 Drive switched to full speed ZSW.8
On> Switch drive to low speed STW.10 Drive switched to low speed ZSW.10
over the commands "Switch to full speed" (On>>, STW.8) or "Switch to low speed" (On>,
STW.10). Simultaneous switch-on commands for both speeds do not alter the status of the
drive; they are ignored.
is switched to one of the two speeds. If the drive is switched off, the actual current value is set
to zero.
The low speed nLow is set as a percentage value on the input Low speed. The default low speed
value is 50%. The speed value at the output Y is formed as a percentage value with the help of
the ramp function: 0 ≤ Y ≤ 100.
ReversingDahlander – Dahlander starter or pole-changing switch with reversal of direction of rotation
Symbol

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Function
The ReversingDahlander component type simulates drives with two speeds of rotation in two
directions. The table below provides an overview of the relevant control data STW and
message data ZSW for this application.
Table 8-32 Control and message data for the ReversingDahlander component

On<< Switch drive to full speed STW.0 Drive switched to full speed ZSW.0
counterclockwise counterclockwise
On< Switch drive to low speed STW.2 Drive switched to low speed ZSW.2
counterclockwise counterclockwise
On>> Switch drive to full speed STW.8 Drive switched to full speed ZSW.8
clockwise clockwise
On> Switch drive to low speed STW.10 Drive switched to low speed ZSW.10
clockwise clockwise
over the switch-on commands "Full speed counterclockwise" (On<<, STW.0), "Low speed
counterclockwise" (On<, STW.2), "Full speed clockwise" (On>>, STW. 8) and "Low speed
clockwise" (On >, STW.10). Several simultaneous switch-on commands do not alter the status
of the drive; they are ignored.
is switched on. If the drive is switched off, the actual current value is set to zero.
The low speed nLow is set as a percentage value on the input Low speed. The default low speed
value is 50%. The speed value at the output Y is formed as a percentage value with the help of
the ramp function: −100 ≤ Y ≤ 100.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
OverloadRelay – Overload relay
Symbol
Function
The OverloadRelay component type simulates drives with overload monitoring. The Overload
command triggers an overload, which means the drive is switched off. The Restart command
switches the drive on. The commands can only be set in the operating window of the
component.
The drive can be initialized as switched on or switched off using the Initial_Value parameter:
switched on with the value Closed, switched off with the value Open. The default setting for
Initial_Value is Closed.
is switched on. If the drive is switched off, the actual current value is set to zero.
The speed value on the output Y is set to one hundred if the drive is on and to zero if the drive
is off.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
CircuitBreaker – Circuit breaker
Symbol
Function
The CircuitBreaker component type simulates drives with switching characteristics. The table
below provides an overview of the relevant control data STW and message data ZSW for this
application.
Table 8-33 Control and message data of the CircuitBreaker component

Off Open switch STW.9 Switch opening / open ZSW.9
On Close switch STW.10 Switch closing / closed ZSW.10
The commands "Open switch" (Off, STW.9) and "Reset" (RESET, STW.14) have priority over
the closing command (On, STW.10).
The switch can be initialized as closed or open using the Initial_Value parameter: closed with
the value Closed, opened with the value Open. The default setting for Initial_Value is Closed.
The actual current value at output I is set to the value at the current input I as soon as the switch
closes. If the switch is opened, the actual current value is set to zero.
The speed value on the output Y is set to one hundred if the drive is on and to zero if the drive
is off.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Positioner – Slide valve/Positioner
Symbol
Function
The Positioner component type simulates positioning drives for slide valves, adjusting valves,
etc. The table below provides an overview of the relevant control data STW and message
data ZSW for this application.
over the opening and closing commands (Open, STW.10 and Close, STW.8). Simultaneously
set opening and closing commands do not alter the status of the drive; they are ignored.
Table 8-34 Control and message data of the Positioner component

Close Close slide valve STW.8 Slide valve closed ZSW.8
Slide valve closes ZSW.2
Stop Stop slide valve STW.9 Slide valve stops ZSW.9
Open Open slide valve STW.10 Slide valve open ZSW.10
Slide valve opens ZSW.0
The actual current value at the output I is set to the value at the current input "I as long as the
slide valve is opening (ZSW.0) or closing (ZSW.2). The actual current value is set to zero if the
slide valve is stationary and when it is closed or open.
The position value at the output Y is formed as a percentage value with the help of a ramp
function: 0 ≤ Y ≤ 100. The value zero represents a closed slide valve, the value one hundred
an opened slide valve. The default opening and closing times of the slide valves are both set
to one second.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Valve – Solenoid valve
Symbol
Function
The Valve component type simulates drives for solenoid valves. The table below provides an
overview of the relevant control data STW and message data STW for this application.
Table 8-35 Control and message data of the Valve component

Close Close valve STW.9 Valve closing / closed STW.9
Open Open valve STW.10 Valve opening / opened STW.10
The commands "Close valve" (Close, STW.9) and "Reset" (RESET, STW.14) have priority over
the opening command (Open, STW.10 and Close, STW.8).
The valve can be initialized as closed or open using the Initial_Value parameter: closed with the
value Closed, opened with the value Open. The default setting for Initial_Value is Closed.
The setting value at the output Y is formed as a percentage value with the help of a ramp
function.
0 ≤ Y ≤ 100
The value zero represents a closed valve, the value one hundred an opened valve.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
The default opening and closing times of the solenoid valve are zero, which means the opening
and closing of the valve is done with a high gradient.
The Valve component does not have a current monitoring function and therefore no overload
behavior, neither does it have a current input nor a current output.
8.1.5 Sensor components
8.1.5.1 SIWAREXU components
The SIWAREX U weighing system is used, for example, to measure fill levels in silos and
bunkers, to monitor crane loads and for overload protection of industrial lifts. In all these
applications, weights are detected with sensors such as load cells or force transducers and
transferred to the controller as measured values. Pressure-sensitive sensors deliver a voltage
proportional to the weight, which is converted by an analog/digital converter into a numerical
value, processed and sent to the controller. The voltage signal is converted and prepared with
the help of the SIWAREX U module. SIWAREX U modules can be connected to the PROFIBUS
DP via ET 200M or used as a module of the SIMATIC S7-300.
The aim of the simulation with SIWAREXU components is to send measured values – which in
the real system are transferred to the controller with the SIWAREX U weighing system – to the
controller as simulated values. The SIWAREX directory of the basic library includes two
component types for simulating the SIWAREX U weighing module:
● SIWAREXU1
● SIWAREXU2
These two component types simulate basic functions of the single-channel and two-channel
versions of the SIWAREX U weighing module. The function is the same for both component
types SIWAREXU1 and SIWAREXU2. Type SIWAREXU2 has one additional measuring
channel than type SIWAREXU1. The detailed descriptions below for one channel of the type
SIWAREXU1 therefore apply to both channels of the type SIWAREXU2 component type.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Symbol
Function
The SIWAREX U components simulate the following functions of the weighing system:
● Linear characteristic of the weighing system (adjustment diagonal)
● Zero offset,
● Decimal point shift
● Two configurable limits.
A function chart for a measuring channel of the component type is shown in the figure below.
6FDOLQJ /LPLW
39 'LJLWV
3URFHVVYDOXH
=HURYDOXH =HURSRLQWRIIVHW
'HFLPDOSRLQW
PHPRU\
RIIVHW
&0' *URVV
S
6HWWLQJWR]HUR
'LVSOD\YDOXH
/LPLWV
6WDWH
/LPLW
/LPLW
In the SIWAREX U weighing system, the weight to be measured is first converted by a pressure
sensor into an electrical voltage and then by an analog/digital converter into a numerical value.
In the simulation the numerical value of a weight is already available as the result of a model
calculation. The electrical signal transfer between the weighing sensor and the SIWAREX U
module is therefore irrelevant for the simulation: the calculated weight value is applied directly
to input PV of a SIWAREXU component as a physical measured variable.
The low-pass filtering and floating average calculation in the SIWAREX U module are not
required as fault suppression measures for the electrical voltage signal in the simulation.
Therefore neither function is included in the component types.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
The weight value is available in Digits as a scaled numerical value limited to the range of zero
to 65,535. Scaling is carried out with the help of the linear characteristic of the weighing system
(adjustment diagonals). Furthermore, after any decimal point shift and zero offset, the weight
value Gross is an integer value limited to the range of –32,768 to +32,767.
See also
Linking SIWAREXU components to the coupling

The two component types SIWAREXU1 and SIWAREXU2 are adapted to the communication
type SFC/SFB/FB for SIMATIC S7/PCS 7. All communication between the automation system
and the SIWAREXU components takes place exclusively via data records. For this reason,
the SIWAREXU components also have no inputs/outputs for connection to signals in the
coupling. They are linked to the data records.
The data record communication is used by the coupling types "SIMIT Unit" and "Virtual
Controller". When you import a hardware configuration that contains SIWAREX U modules into
such a coupling type, the data records that are relevant to communication with the controller are
automatically created in the coupling for each SIWAREX U module. These data records are
linked to SIWAREXU components using the Unit connector.
The figure below shows the SIMATIC configuration for a SIWAREX U module as an example:
The slave with PROFIBUS address 40 on subsystem 1 contains a SIWAREX U module in slot
4.
As shown in the figure below, the assigned SIWAREXU component has a Unit connector at its
Unit input.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
In the property view of the Unit connector, the component can be easily linked with the data
records in the coupling by entering the name of the Coupling and, under addressing the
subsystem number, enter the slave number and slot number in the form [#][#][#], which means
[1][40][4] for the example (see figure below).
A second way to link a SIWAREX component to the data records is provided by the SIMIT Unit
coupling itself. Open the SIMIT Unit coupling and its property view. In the navigation area on the
left, select the SIWAREX U module that is to be linked to the component by clicking on the
module entry with the left mouse button.
Hold down the left mouse button and drag this module onto the (previously opened) chart that
contains the component. The module is instantiated there as a Unit connector, which can be
directly connected to the Unit input of the SIWAREXU component. The Unit connector is
automatically provided with the address of the module.
Adjustment
Conversion of a weight value to a scaled Digit value is done using an adjustment diagonal
defined by two points.
3URFHVV
YDOXH
$GMXVWPHQWGLDJRQDO
$GMXVWPHQW
ZHLJKW
$GMXVWHG
VFDOHV]HUR
SRLQW
'LJLWV
$GMXVWPHQWGLJLW $GMXVWPHQWGLJLW
The first adjustment point is defined by the unloaded (empty) scale with only its inherent weight,
the second point by the selected adjustment weight. The corresponding scaled numerical
values are stored in the weighing module as adjustment digit 0 and adjustment digit 1.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
In the simulation, adjustment is carried out by setting the adjustment parameters. The table
below lists the adjustment parameters of the SIWAREXU component types and their default
values.
Table 8-36 Default setting of the adjustment parameters
Parameter Default
CH1_Dig_0 CH2_Dig_0 Adjustment digit 0 63107
CH1_Dig_1 CH2_Dig_1 Adjustment digit 1 2427
CH1_Adj_W CH2_Adj_W Adjustment weight 10000
The parameters for the adjustment digits are preset to values that correspond to a scale with
"theoretical adjustment" without zero offset. The adjustment weight is preset to a value of
10000 weight units.
Because the scales simulated with the SIWAREXU component types are calibrated by setting
permanently valid parameters, the simulated scales are always deemed to be calibrated.
Therefore a scale adjustment process initiated by the controller is pointless in the simulation.
Any such commands of the controller are ignored by the SIWAREXU components.
Zero offset
When a SIWAREXU component receives the "Set to zero" command via the CMD control word,
the weight value applied at that moment is saved as a new zero point. Consequently the zero
value is now output as a gross value. All subsequent measurements then relate to this value,
which means the difference between the current weight value and the zero value last saved is
output as the gross value.
The zero value used on starting the simulation can be set as a digit value in the CH1_Zero
parameter of the component. A default digit value of 2427 is set, corresponding to a weight
value of the unloaded scale assumed to be zero.
Decimal point shift

A decimal point shift can be configured to increase the resolution of the gross value to be
transferred to the controller. This means that the measured gross value is multiplied by a factor
of 10, 100, 1000, 10,000 or 100,000.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
The decimal point shift is defined by the parameter CH1_Adjust according to the table below.
The default value is 65, which means no decimal point shift.
Table 8-37 Adjustment table for decimal point shift
Number of decimal places Factor Parameter CH1_Adjust

0 1 65
1 10 69
2 100 73
3 1000 77
4 10,000 81
5 100,000 85
Note
If you change the default setting of the CH1_Adjust parameter in SIMIT, you must also change
the C1ADJUST parameter in the instance data block of the controller.
Limits
SIWAREX U has two adjustable limits whose switch-on and switch-off points can be freely
specified in weight units. The setting "Switch on value > Switch off value" leads to a notification
when a weight value is overshot:
0HVVDJH
21
*URVV
2))
2)) 21
The setting "Switch off value > switch on value" leads to a notification when a weight value is
undershot:
0HVVDJH
21
*URVV
2))
2)) 21
In the special case where the limits for OFF and ON are equal, limit 1 signals an exceedance
of this value while limit 2 signals that the set value has been undershot.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
The limits a specified with the parameters CH1_ON_L1 and CH1_OFF_L1 for the first limit and
with the parameters CH1_ON_L2 and CH1_OFF_L2 for the second limit. The default values are
shown in the table below.
Table 8-38 Default limit settings
Parameter Default
CH1_ON_L1 CH2_ON_L1 10000
CH1_OFF_L1 CH2_OFF_L1 9900
CH1_ON_L2 CH2_ON_L2 1000
CH1_OFF_L2 CH2_OFF_L2 1010
The status of the limits is available as part of the status information State of the component type.
Operating window of the SIWAREXU components

The operating window of a SIWAREX U component shows which limits have been reached and
which gross value is transferred to the controller as a weight value. The gross value (Gross) is
shown without decimal point shift to make it easier to read. In the functional chart this is
the Display value.
The Justified status indicator is always active. It indicates that the simulated scale is always
calibrated.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
8.1.5.2 Counter module FM350-1
How FM350-1 works
Symbol
Function
The FM 350-1 function module is a fast counter module for use in the S7-300 automation
system or as a module in an ET 200M station. Only distributed modules used on PROFIBUS/
PROFINET can be simulated with SIMIT.
The module has the following operating modes:
● Counting modes
– Continuous counting
– Single counting
– Periodic counting
● Measurement modes
– Frequency measurement
– RPM measurement
– Continuous periodic measurement
All required functions of these operating modes are simulated in SIMIT.
The data of the real FM350-1 are cyclically transmitted via PROFIBUS DP. The
acknowledgment principle was adopted in the SIMIT component.
You can find additional information in the "S7-300; Counter Module FM 350-1" documentation.
Some functions will not be discussed here in detail. We will merely point out the differences and
describe the basic behavior of the simulated component.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Behavior of the inputs and outputs in the simulated module

The SIMIT simulation system is based on cyclic calculation of mathematical equations. The fast
counting function of the FM350 is simulated in SIMIT, simply stated, by setting the frequency
of the counting pulses and adding or subtracting this to or from the current count depending on
the current count in each processing cycle. The sign of the frequency makes it possible to also
count backwards. The input X should be considered as "count pulses per second" in this case.
Each edge can also be evaluated for slow count pulses when the pulses occur in intervals faster
than twice the cycle time. If the input X is zero and a positive edge is detected at one of the
trigger inputs, the internal counter is incremented or decremented by one.
The "CNT", "TriggerUP" and "TriggerDN" connectors are used to change the internal count
value when the internal gate is open.
The "CNT" input can be directly interpreted as a counting pulse in the counting operating modes
and corresponds directly to the measured value in the measurement modes. Additionally, the
count can be incremented or decremented by one with every positive edge via the two trigger
inputs.
The behavior of the rest of the digital inputs and outputs is identical to the actual module.
Note
Hardware interrupts are not supported by the simulated module.
Data reading via DS0/1 (diagnostic data record) is not supported in the simulated module.
Isochronous mode is not supported in the simulated module. In other words, synchronization
of the function module via PROFIBUS cannot be implemented due to the separation between
physical replication of the bus by the SIMIT Unit and simulation of the logic in this simulation
component.
FM350-1 operating modes
Counting modes
In the counting modes, the measured value is calculated by adding up the pulses queued at
input X. With very slow counts or individual edges, it is possible to increment the counter by one
at the "TriggerUP" input with a positive edge or to decrement it at the "TriggerDN" input. This
makes it possible to simulate very high frequencies of counting pulses, but also to enable the
counting of individual pulses.　
Count limits
The following applies for the 31-bit counting range:
● The high count limit is set at +2 147 483 647 (231 –1).
● The lower count limit is set at –2 147 483 648 (–231).　
The following applies for the 32-bit counting range:
● The high count limit is set at +4 294 967 295 (232 –1).
● The lower count limit is set at 0 (zero).　

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Continuous counting　
In this mode, the simulated FM 350-1 counts continuously starting at the count:
● When the counter reaches the upper count limit while counting forward and an additional
count pulse occurs, it jumps to the lower count limit and resumes counting there without
skipping a pulse.
● When the counter reaches the lower count limit while counting backwards and an additional
count pulse occurs, it jumps to the upper count limit and resumes counting there without
skipping a pulse.　
One-time counting　
By reaching the configured count limit in the main counting direction, the gate automatically
closes internally and it can only be started again by a new gate start.　
Periodic counting
By reaching the configured count limit in the main counting direction, there is an internal jump
to the load value and counting resumes there.
Measurement modes
The measured value is applied directly at the "CNT" input with the measurement modes. The
measured value is equal to the counter value in these modes. Again, the count value can be
changed by 1 by positive edges at the "TriggerUP"/"TriggerDN" inputs.
The update time plays no role in the simulated counter module. The pending value is
transmitted to the controller via the feedback interface. Limit monitoring and gate control are
implemented.
Frequency measurement
The measured frequency is equal to the value applied at the "CNT" input.
Note
The value of the real FM350-1 is transferred here in the unit 10–3 Hz and must be specified
accordingly in the simulation.
Speed measurement
The measured speed is equal to the value applied at the "CNT" input.
Note
The value of the real FM350-1 is transferred here in the unit 10–3 /min and must be specified
accordingly in the simulation.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Period duration measurement

The measured period duration is equal to the value applied at the "CNT" input.
Note
The value of the real FM350-1 is transferred here in the unit 1µs or 1/16µs and must be
specified accordingly in the simulation.
You can find additional information on counting mode and measurement mode in the "S7-300;
Counter Module FM 350-1" documentation.
Operating window of the FM 350-1 component

In the operating window, the signals of the control interface are shown on the left and signals
from the feedback interface are displayed on the right. All signals are always displayed,
regardless of the selected operating mode.
The arrangement of the signals corresponds to the actual module.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
The "Reset" button can be used to manually reset the counter module. Then a restart
calibration must be performed.
You can find additional information in the "S7-300; Counter Module FM 350-1" documentation.
Properties of the FM 350-1 component

The parameters of the simulated module correspond to the settings in HW Config in STEP 7.
The names of the parameters and selection options correspond to the English notations in the
HW Config.
These parameters need to be adjusted for the respective FM350-1 instance. No automatic
import from HW Config is performed.
Properties of the FM 350-1

The figure below shows the property view with selected "Parameters" object in the default
setting:
The individual parameters and your selection options from the drop-down lists are described in
the following sections.
"OperatingMode" parameter
This parameter determines the operating mode. The same value must be set as in HW Config
in STEP 7.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
You can select the following functions from the drop-down list:
● Continuous counting
● Single counting
● Periodic counting
● Frequency measurement
● RPM measurement
● Continuous periodic measurement
"GateControl" parameter
This parameter determines the gate control of the counter module. Gate control is used to start
and stop the counting operations.
● "None": Gate is always open
● "SW gate": Gate state depends on the "SW_GATE" signal of the control interface
● "HW gate (level controlled)": Gate state depends on the "DI_Start" input (level controlled)
● "HW gate (edge controlled)": A positive edge at the "DI_Start" input opens the gate; a
positive edge at the "DI_Stop" input closes it
● "Latch": Requirement for saving counts
● "Latch/Retrigger": Requirement for saving counts followed by setting to the load value and
counting resumes starting at the load value
"CountRange" parameter
This parameter sets the count range. If the counter module is operating in measurement mode,
this setting has no effect.
You can select the following count ranges from the drop-down list:
● "0 to +32 bits"
● "−31 to +31 bits"
This setting has an effect on the count limits and signs of the transferred values.
"MainCountingDirection" parameter
This parameter determines the main counting direction. The main counting direction is only
relevant in the counting modes.
● "None": No counting direction is specified
● "Forward": Count up
● "Backward": Count down

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
"Latch" parameter
This parameter sets the requirement for saving the counts.
● "pos. edge": The count is stored with a positive edge at the "DI Start" input
● "neg. edge": The count is stored with a negative edge at the "DI Start" input
● "both edge": The count is stored with a positive or negative edge at the "DI Start" input
"SetCounter" parameter
This parameter sets the behavior for setting to the load value once or multiple times.
● "Single"
● "Multiple"
"GateFunction" parameter
This parameter sets the gate control to "Cancel" or "Interrupt".
● "Cancel"
● "Interrupt"
8.1.6 Communication components
8.1.6.1 Components for SIMATIC
DP-DP-ID
Symbol
Function
The DP-DP-ID component type is used for simulation of fail-safe master-master
communication (Profisafe V1) with SIMIT and SIMIT Unit. The counterpart of a real
F_SENDDP/F_RCVDP block with SIMIT and SIMIT Unit configured in the CPU is simulated.
The SIMIT UNIT PROFIBUS or PROFINET simulates the configured DP/DP coupler or PN/PN
coupler with the respective universal modules. The fail-safe communication is simulated over
the user data of the module.
Import of the hardware in SIMIT is the same as in a standard project. The only thing that must
be taken into consideration in the HW Config of the S7 project is that the universal modules in
the DP/DP coupler or PN/PN coupler have the correct length for the fail-safe communication
blocks.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
+----------+ ----12 bytes----> +----------+

| F_SENDDP | | F_RECVDP |
+----------+ <----6 bytes----- +----------+
If an incorrect length is configured (e.g. a larger range), SIMIT recognizes the module as
standard I/O module.
A PROFIsafe_V1 function is automatically implemented in the SIMIT project. Each F_SENDDP/
F_RCVDP block in the real CPU has the matching counterpart in SIMIT.
During simulation of the F_RCVDP, only the DP_DP_ID and the device address in form of the
Unit connector must be correct.
During simulation of the F_SENDDP sender block, only the DP_DP_ID and the device address
in form of the Unit connector must be specified. If the information is correct before the CPU
start, the connection will be established successfully after starting the CPU. If the CPU was
already running before, the F_RCVDP block must be reintegrated into the CPU over the
ACK_REI input.
NOTICE
In case the connection is interrupted (for example by plugging the PROFIBUS cable), the CPU
must be restarted for the reintegration. Otherwise, it does not reset its internal telegram
counters.
Inputs
Unit
A module is connected at the Unit input via a Unit connector. The DP-DP-ID component type
enters the DP-DP-ID in one of the data records of the module connected at the Unit input.
DP_DP_ID
The DP-DP-ID is a system-wide, unique connection ID. This parameter must be identical to the
parameter of the same name of the partner block in the CPU.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Example
Figure 8-1 Hardware configuration: Slot 1 of the device 56 in the PROFINET is highlighted

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Figure 8-2 F_RCVDP: The DP-DP-ID has the value 10.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Figure 8-3 DP-DP-ID component in SIMIT: Slot 1 of the device 56 in the PROFINET is connected to the
Unit input via the Unit connector. The same value, 10, is entered at the DP_DP_ID input as
in the F_RCVDP.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Multi HART
Symbol
Figure 8-4 Symbol for the Multi HART 8 component type (left) and the Multi HART 16 component type
(right)

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Function
The Multi HART 8 and Multi HART 16 component types are multiplexers for the ET200SP HA
hardware family.
Depending on the value of the selection input Control, the component type Multi HART 8 / Multi
HART 16 switches one of the 32 / 64 inputs to the Value output. The Status output receives the
same value as the Control selection input.
The default value of the selection input Control is 0. All other inputs are set to 0.0 by default.
Parameter assignment
The configuration of the HART secondary variables in ET 200SP HA defines how many
selection inputs you need to connect in SIMIT:
● Configuration as "1 multiHART":
● Configuration as "4 multiHART":
Example
The Multi HART component is used for the simulation of HART secondary variables when the
HART secondary variables in ET200SP HA are configured as "1 multiHART" or "4 multiHART"
and the Pcs7HaAI block is used in the PCS 7 project. The Multi HART component is not
required for "8 HART" configuration, since the secondary variables are available directly via the
process image.
In the following example, the four HART secondary variables are read from channel 2 of module
7.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
As described in the help for ET200SP HA, the control byte for AB886 and the status byte for
EB546 is included in this configuration. AB886 is linked to the Control input of the Multi HART
component and determines the HART secondary variable to be currently read. The HART
secondary variable just read is passed to ED547.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
In the example, control is generated by Pcs7HaAI and the following sequence is executed:
Control = Channel1_1. Then Status = Channel1_1 and Value = 1.0.
The configuration in CFC looks like this:

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
ReadMemory – Reading a bit memory address area
Symbol
Function
The ReadMemory component type enables one or more successive bytes from the bit memory
address area of a controller to be read. Enter the address of the first byte to be read at the
input MB. The read operation is executed when a rising edge occurs at the Trigger input, which
means a change from False to True.
The number N of outputs can be varied. It can be changed by "graphically scaling" the
component on a chart. You can specify a maximum of 32 outputs, which means you can read
a maximum of 32 bytes with a component of this type. The bytes that are read are available at
the outputs Y1 to YN.
Exactly one read operation is triggered while the simulation is being initialized. This means
initial values from the bit memory address area are available after initialization even though no
trigger signals have been sent.
The component can be operated with the following couplings:
● PLCSIM
● PRODAVE
● Virtual Controller
See also
WriteMemory – Writing to a bit memory address area
Symbol

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Function
The WriteMemory component type allows you to write to one or more successive bytes in the
bit memory address area of a controller. Enter the address of the first byte to be written to at the
input MB. The write operation is executed when a rising edge occurs at the Trigger input, which
means a change from False to True.
The number N of inputs can be varied. It can be changed by "graphically scaling" the
component on a chart. You can specify a maximum of 32 inputs, which means you can write to
a maximum of 32 bytes in the bit memory address area with a component of this type. The bytes
to be written are to be provided at inputs X1 to XN.
Exactly one write operation is triggered while the simulation is being initialized. Initial values can
therefore be written to the bit memory address area during the initialization process, even
though no trigger signals have been sent.
● PLCSIM
● PRODAVE
See also
ReadDatablock – Reading a data block
Symbol
Function
The ReadDatablock component type enables one or more successive bytes from a data block
of a controller to be read. Enter the data block number at the DB input and the address of the
first byte to be read at the DBB input. The read operation is executed when a rising edge occurs
at the Trigger input, which means a change from False to True.
component on a chart. You can specify a maximum of 32 outputs, which means you can read
Exactly one read operation is triggered while the simulation is being initialized. Initial values
from the data block are available after initialization, even though no trigger signals have been
sent.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library

● PLCSIM
● PRODAVE
See also
WriteDatablock – Writing to a data block
Symbol
Function
The WriteDatablock component allows you to write to one or more successive bytes in the data
block of a controller. Enter the data block number at the DB input and the address of the first
byte to be written at the DBB input. The write operation is executed when a rising edge occurs
at the Trigger input, which means a change from False to True.
component on a chart. You can specify a maximum of 32 inputs, which means you can write to
a maximum of 32 bytes in the data block with a component of this type. The bytes to be written
are to be provided at inputs X1 to XN.
therefore be written to the data block during the initialization process, even though no trigger
signals have been sent.
● PLCSIM
● PRODAVE
See also

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
ReadDataRecord – Reading a data record
Symbol
Function
The component type ReadDataReord allows a data record written by the controller or by SIMIT
VC to be read. Specify the number of the data record to be read at input DR. The read operation
is executed when a rising edge occurs at the Trigger input, which means a change from False
to True.
component on a chart. You can set a maximum of 64 outputs, which means that you can read
Exactly one read operation is triggered while the simulation is being initialized. This means
initial values from the bit memory address area are available after initialization even though no
trigger signals have been sent.
● SIMIT Unit
● PLCSIM Advanced
See also
WriteDataRecord – Writing a data record
Symbol

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Function
The component type WriteDataRecord allows a data record that can be read by the controller
or by SIMIT VC to be written. A validity check for the data record is not carried out. Specify the
number of the data record at input DR and the length of the data record at input Length. The
write operation is executed when a rising edge occurs at the Trigger input, which means a
change from False to True. If you only want to write a data record once when starting the
simulation, set the Trigger input to True.
component on a chart. You can set a maximum of 64 inputs and write a maximum of one data
record with a length of 64 bytes with a component of this type. The bytes to be written are to be
provided at inputs X1 to XN.
therefore be written to the data block during the initialization process, even though no trigger
signals have been sent.
● SIMIT Unit
● PLCSIM Advanced
See also
SetInterrupt
Symbol
Function
The component type SetInterrupt sets the hardware interrupts in the SIMIT Unit coupling during
the simulation.
The number of binary inputs is variable. It can be changed by "graphically scaling" the
component on a chart. You can specify a maximum of 64 inputs, which means with a
component of this type you can trigger a maximum of 64 hardware interrupts at a hardware
object of the SIMIT Unit coupling.
The INX input hereby corresponds to the alarm [X] specified in the coupling. With a rising edge
at INX, the corresponding alarm is triggered (incoming), and with a falling edge it is removed

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
again (outgoing). You use the corresponding signal of the hardware object from the SIMIT Unit
coupling as interrupt output.
Note
If you do not use this component, direct inputs are no longer possible in the coupling. Direct
inputs in the coupling are immediately overwritten by the model values.
See also
Simulation of alarms (Page 92)
8.1.6.2 Components for SINUMERIK
A component type that enables the transfer of axis values from SINUMERIK to SIMIT can be
found in the basic library in the directory COMMUNICATION | SINUMERIK.
ADAS – AXIS DATA STREAM PER PROFIBUS
Symbol
Function
The ADAS component type is used for parameter assignment and preparation of axis values,
which are transferred to SIMIT via PROFIBUS DP from a SINUMERIK controller using the
ADAS software package.
Note
The ADAS software package is not part of the SIMIT product and needs to be purchased
separately.
To transfer axis values you need to insert the PROFIBUS slave ccADAS into the SINUMERIK
hardware configuration. The GSD file of the ccADAS slave can be found on the SIMIT
Installation CD in the folder Tools/ADAS.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
This slave has 8 bytes each of input and output data for communication and an additional 4
bytes for each axis value.
All I/O data are configured as double words in the coupling and must be connected to the SIMIT
component (QA, QB, Q1 .. Qn or IA and IB):

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
The transferred axis values are available at the analog outputs TRACKi, i = 2, …, N of a
component of type ADAS. The number N of available channels can be specified by scaling the
component. A maximum of 28 channels can be specified. You can, for example, connect the
TRACKi outputs with the 3D viewer control in SIMIT to animate the 3D view of the machine with
current axis values.
Note
The number of transferred axis values is specified by assigning parameters to the ccADAS
slave. You should set the number in the ADAS component to the same value as defined in the
slave to use all channels within the component.
In case of communication failure the integer output Error provides information about the cause
of the error.
Table 8-39 Error codes for the ADAS component
Error Cause
0 No error
1 No reply to configuration of Track 1
..
100 No reply to Reset command
101 No reply to Set Communication command

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Parameters
The ADAS component has the parameter vectors AxisType and AxisNumber, which have as
many elements as the specified number of channels. This allows for each channel to specify
which axis of the SINUMERIK-NC is to be transferred and whether the axis moves linearly or
is an axis of rotation.
● AxisType
Depending on this parameter assignment, the axis values are provided in mm
(translational), angle degrees (rotatory grad) or radians (rotatory rad).
● AxisNumber
This parameter specifies which axis is to be transferred on the corresponding ADAS
channel.
The figure below shows the parameters together with their default values:
Note
Note that the parameter assignment will be effective only if the Config button in the operating
window or on the basic symbol is pressed to transfer the configuration to the SINUMERIK while
the simulation is running and the SINUMERIK controller is connected.
As an alternative, you may also specify these settings in the SINUMERIK machine data.
Additional parameters
The additional parameter TimeOut allows you to specify the period of time after which the
component will cancel communication with the SINUMERIK, if the command to transfer the
configuration receives no response from the SINUMERIK.
The figure below shows the additional parameter together with its default values:

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Operating window
The transfer of the configuration to the SINUMERIK can be triggered in the operating window
of the ADAS component type by using the Config button. While transfer is in progress, the two
displays Ok and Fault are not active. Successful transfer is indicated by the green display Ok,
and failure is indicated by the red display Fault.
The same operating and display elements can be found on the basic symbol and provide the
same function.
8.1.7 Controls
8.1.7.1 Controls for displaying signal values
Binary display
Symbol
Function
The Binary display control is used to display a binary value. The color and shape of the control
can be defined in the view properties.
You can select any color for the signal Off state (signal value zero) and On state (signal value
one). You can also toggle the shape of the control between Rectangular and Round in a drop-
down box.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
You can change the size of the control as required using the width and height handles on the
selection frame. To change the size using the corner handles, hold down the <Shift> key and
the size of the control will increase or reduce proportionately.
Analog display
Symbol
Function
The Analog display control is used to display an analog or integer value in the form of a pointer
instrument. The Data type of the signal to be displayed can be toggled between Analog
and Integer in the general properties of the control.
Other settings for the analog display can be adapted individually in the view properties. The
figure below shows the property view with the default settings.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
The range of values and the scale, labels and color can all be set as required:
● Value range
The value range is determined by the minimum and maximum values. If the value to be
displayed is outside the set range of values, the pointer of the analog display appears in red.
● Scale
Start angle and end angle identify the start and end of the scale. The start angle displays the
minimum value and the end angle the maximum value. The angle is defined as degrees
from the horizontal axis in counterclockwise direction. Scale division indicates the
subdivision for values on the scale. Scale values are displayed with the specified number
of decimal places.
① Angle
● Label
You can enter a text in the Label property box that will appear in the analog display with the
adjustable Font size.
● Color
The border, scale and texts are displayed in the adjustable, uniform foreground color. The
background color can also be set as the fill color for the control.
You can change the size and thus the round shape of the control as required using the width
and height handles on the selection frame. To change the size using the corner handles, hold
down the <Shift> key and the size of the control will increase or reduce proportionately.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Digital display
Symbol
Function
The Digital display control is used to display the value of an analog or integer signal. The Data
type of the signal to be displayed can be toggled between Analog and Integer in the general
properties of the control.
For analog signals you can set the font size and the number of decimal places to be displayed
in the View properties dialog.
For integer signals, you can set the Font size, the Display format and the Data width in the
property view.
Decimal numbers can be positive or negative. In hexadecimal notation negative numbers are
always represented as a two's complement. When converting to hexadecimal numbers you
need to specify how many bytes are to be included (1, 2, 4 or 8 bytes). As hexadecimal numbers

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
are displayed with a fixed number of characters, this setting also determines the number of
hexadecimal characters displayed (2, 4, 8 or 16 places).
In the Characters display format only the specified number of bytes are included, starting with
the least significant byte, resulting in a display of 1, 2, 4 or 8 characters. A character
corresponding to the coding of the (extended) ASCII code is displayed if it is a displayable
character.
Note
If the data width is set to less than 8, the actual value of an integer input variable might not be
displayed in some circumstances.
The data width does not affect the input of a value as the effective value is not limited. However,
the way the entered value is displayed will depend on the data width setting.
The figure below shows examples of the effect of different display formats and data widths:
GHFLPDOE\WHV
GHFLPDOE\WHV
GHFLPDOE\WHV
GHFLPDOE\WH
KH[DGHFLPDOE\WHV
KH[DGHFLPDOE\WHV
KH[DGHFLPDOE\WHV
KH[DGHFLPDOE\WH
FKDUDFWHUE\WHV
FKDUDFWHUE\WHV
FKDUDFWHUE\WHV
FKDUDFWHUE\WH
You can change the size of the symbol as required, and thus modify the set font size, using the
width and height handles on the selection frame. To change the size using the corner handles,
hold down the <Shift> key and the size of the control will increase or reduce proportionately.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Bar graph display
Symbol
Function
The Bar graph display is used to display an analog or integer signal in the form of a bar graph.
The Data type of the signal to be displayed can be toggled between Analog and Integer in the
general properties of the control.
Other settings for the bar graph display can be adapted individually in the property view.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
The following properties can be set:

● Scale
The displayed range of values is defined by the initial value and the end value. You can
toggle the scale display on and off with the Show scale check box.
● Orientation
The possible orientations for the control are Horizontal (a) and Vertical (b).
● Bar value display

Use the Show value check box to toggle the additional numerical bar value display on or off.
You can change the size of the symbol using the handles on the selection frame. This allows
you to make the horizontally-aligned bar graph display wider, for example.
8.1.7.2 Controls for entering signal values
Pushbutton
Symbol
Function
The Pushbutton control is used to enter a binary signal.
The pushbutton can be defined as Normally Open or Normally Closed in the general properties.
The default setting is Normally Open.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
To activate the pushbutton while the simulation is running, simply click the button. The figure
below shows the unpressed button (a) and the pressed button (b):
(a) (b)
As can be seen in the properties window of the figure below, you can specify a text for the
pushbutton that will appear on the button in the configured font size.
The handles on the button frame can be used to change the size and thus adjust the size of the
specified text, for example. The text is aligned centered in the button (both horizontally and
vertically).
Pushbutton with image
Symbol
Function
The Pushbutton with image is used to enter a binary signal; images are used to represent the
button position.
The pushbutton can be defined as Normally Open or Normally Closed in the general properties.
The default setting is Normally Open.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
To activate the pushbutton while the simulation is running, simply click the symbol. The size of
the symbol and thus the size of the sensitive area can be changed using handles on the
selection frame.
In the property view you can specify images that represent the unpressed (Off) and pressed
(On) pushbutton while the simulation is running. Click to open the dialog for selecting the
corresponding graphic files. Click to delete the selection.
The Adapt to image size check box is not selected by default. The selected images will then be
adapted to the size of the button, which means the width and height are scaled accordingly. If
the check box is selected, the size of the button is matched to the size of the graphic for Image
(not pressed).
Switch
Symbol
Function
The Switch is used to switch a binary signal.
The switch can be defined as Normally Open or Normally Closed in the Off or On position in the
general properties. It is set to Normally Open in the Off position by default. The selected position
takes effect as the Default when the simulation starts.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
To activate the switch while the simulation is running, simply click the button. The closed switch
is represented by a dark-blue border. The table shows the switch as Normally Closed and
Normally Open with the default settings Off and On.
Default setting NC contact NO contact

On
Off
Handles on the button frame are used to change the size.
Switch with image
Symbol
Function
The Switch with image is used to switch a binary signal; images are used to represent the
switch position.
The switch can be defined as Normally Open or Normally Closed in the Off or On position in the
general properties. It is set to Normally Open in the Off position by default. The selected position
takes effect as the Default when the simulation starts.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
To activate the switch while the simulation is running, simply click the symbol. The size of the
symbol and thus the size of the sensitive area can be changed using handles on the selection
frame.
In the property view you can specify images that represent the two possible switch states - Off
and On - while the simulation is running. Click to open the dialog for selecting the
corresponding graphic files. Click to delete the selection.
The Adapt to image size check box is not selected by default. The selected images will then be
adapted to the size of the button, which means the width and height are scaled accordingly. If
the check box is selected, the size of the button is matched to the size of the graphic for Image
(off).
Step switch
Symbol
Function
The Step switch is used to step through the switching of an integer value. The numerical value
is increased or reduced by one every time it is switched.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
The minimum and maximum values for the switched signal can be defined in the general
properties. The default is a ten-step switch with a value range from 0 to10 starting with the
switch value 0.
To activate the step switch while the simulation is running, simply click the top ( ) or bottom
( ) button. The switch value that is currently set is displayed in the symbol.
The size of the symbol and thus the size of the two buttons can be changed using handles on
the selection frame.
Step switch with image
Symbol
Function
The Step switch with image is used to step through the switching of an integer value; images
are used to represent the switch position.
The switch value from which the step switch starts is set in the general properties. The default
setting is zero. The numerical value of the switched signal is increased or reduced by one every
time it is switched.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
The number of switching steps is defined by the number of images. The images are set in the
view properties. They change for every step while the simulation is running in the order set in
the Images list.
Click to open the dialog for selecting the corresponding graphic files. The selected image is
added to the list. The order of the images can be changed by swapping an image with the
previous ( ) or subsequent ( ) image. Click to delete an image.
To activate the step switch while the simulation is running, simply click the symbol. The
Switchover is selected via the drop-down list.
In the "Up-Down" parameter setting, the value of the step switch is incremented when you click
in the top half of the control and decremented when you click in the bottom half.
Handles on the selection frame are used to change the size of the symbol.
The Adapt to image size check box is not selected by default. The images are then adapted to
the size of the button, which means the width and height are scaled accordingly. If the check
box is selected, the size of the button is matched to the size of the graphic for the first image.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Digital input
Symbol
Function
The Digital input is used to enter an analog or integer signal value in digital form.
The data type of the signal can be set to analog or integer in the general properties. The Default
signal value can also be set. It is set to zero by default.
For analog signals you can set the Font size and the number of Decimal places to be displayed
in the View properties.
For integer signals, you can set the Font size, the Display format and the Data width in the
property view.
Entries must be made in the specified display format. If the syntax used does not correspond
to the specified display format, the input is interpreted as zero.
Decimal numbers can be positive or negative. In hexadecimal notation negative numbers are
always represented as a two's complement. When converting to hexadecimal numbers you
need to specify how many bytes are to be included (1, 2, 4 or 8 bytes). As hexadecimal numbers

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
are displayed with a fixed number of characters, this setting also determines the number of
hexadecimal characters displayed (2, 4, 8 or 16 places).
In the Characters display format only the specified number of bytes are included, starting with
the least significant byte, resulting in a display of 1, 2, 4 or 8 characters. A character
corresponding to the coding of the (extended) ASCII code is displayed if it is a displayable
character.
The data width does not affect the input of a value because the effective value is not limited. The
specified value is only displayed in accordance with the configured data width.
Note
If the data width is set to less than 8, the actual value of an integer input variable might not be
displayed in some circumstances.
When entering values via the Digital Input control, you must use the specified display format.
If the entry is syntactically incorrect, it is interpreted as "0".
The figure below shows examples of the effect of different display formats and data widths:
GHFLPDOE\WHV
GHFLPDOE\WHV
GHFLPDOE\WHV
GHFLPDOE\WH
KH[DGHFLPDOE\WHV
KH[DGHFLPDOE\WHV
KH[DGHFLPDOE\WHV
KH[DGHFLPDOE\WH
FKDUDFWHUE\WHV
FKDUDFWHUE\WHV
FKDUDFWHUE\WHV
FKDUDFWHUE\WH
You can change the size of the symbol as required, and thus modify the set font size, using the
width and height handles on the selection frame. To change the size using the corner handles,
hold down the <Shift> key and the size of the control will increase or reduce proportionately.
The signal values appear right-justified in the symbol while the simulation is running.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Slider
Symbol
Function
The Slider is used to set an analog or integer signal.
The default setting for the signal value is set in the general properties. The default is zero.
The slider is moved with the mouse while the simulation is running. Position the mouse pointer
over the button of the slider, hold down the left mouse button and move the button to the desired
position. You can also click to the right or left of the button to increase or reduce the set value
by one step.
Other settings for the slider view can be changed individually in the property view.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
● Scale
The scale is determined by the initial value, the end value and the increment.
● Orientation
The possible orientations for the control are Horizontal and Vertical.
The following properties can be set:
● Bar value display

Use the Show value check box to toggle the additional numerical display of the signal value
on or off.
You can change the size of the symbol using the handles on the selection frame.
8.1.7.3 Miscellaneous controls
Signal splitter
Symbol
Function
The Signal splitter is used to force, which means to set, values at the inputs and outputs of
components or coupling signals while the simulation is running using any of the Input controls.
Forcing is already available in the property view for all inputs and outputs of components.
The Signal splitter control also allows you to force inputs and outputs using any Input control,
as described below by way of example.
Tip: You can use the signal splitter without an assigned Input control and connect it, for
example, to the component input or component output that is to be forced. In this case, the
signal splitter will perform the same function as the signal splitter in the properties of the input
or output.
The figure below shows a section from a chart containing an adder whose output is connected
to the inputs of two PTn elements.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
If you want to implement the forcing of the adder output and the two inputs of the PTn elements
using sliders, add a slider and a signal splitter to a chart for each input and output to be forced.
Then open the property view for the first slider, set its connector to invisible and enter the output
of the adder as the connected signal. Then open the connector properties for the associated
signal splitter. Its connector is always invisible, as can be seen in the figure below.
Here, too, you enter the adder output as the signal.
Connect the other two sliders and signal splitters to the inputs of the two PTn elements in the
same way. You can now force the output and the inputs while the simulation is running, as
shown by way of example in the figure below.
The signal splitters for the two controls Slider#1 and Slider#2 are switched on ( ). Forcing of
the adder output and of the input to PTn#1 via the two sliders is thus activated. The signal
splitter for Slider#3 is not switched on ( ), which means the input PTn#3 cannot be forced this
way. Slider#3 is shown as disabled and is also marked with the overlay .

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Values for the output and input can now be set using the first two sliders. In the example, the
adder output is set to the value 25 and the input of PTn#1 is set to the value 40. The input of
PTn#2 is connected to the adder output, and thus takes on its value (25). The (inactive)
Slider#3 displays the value of the input connected to it.
The following points should thus be noted when using signal splitters:
● The signal splitter and the associated Input control should be linked to the input or output to
be forced.
● Forcing is not activated for signal splitters that are not switched on. The associated input
control is shown as disabled and is marked with the overlay . It indicates the value of the
connected input or output.
● Switching on the signal splitter activates forcing.
See also
Properties of the inputs (Page 383)
Properties of the outputs (Page 385)
Action
Symbol
Function
This action opens a chart or a trend.
You can set whether a chart or a trend is to be opened under "Action" In the general properties.
As "Target", enter the chart or trend to be opened starting with a slash followed by the complete
folder hierarchy separated by slashes. Alternatively, you can drag-and-drop the required chart
or trend from the project tree to the "Target" property field.
Click the button to trigger the action while simulation is running.

Text can be specified for the action. This text is shown with the adjustable font size on the
button:

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
The size of the button can be changed and adjusted, for example to adjust it to the size of the
specified text. The text is aligned centered in the button (both horizontally and vertically).
8.1.7.4 3D Viewer control
The graphical editor in SIMIT allows you to clearly visualize the behavior of a machine using
simple graphical basic elements. Two-dimensional graphics can be used to draw a machine
and to show movements of the machine by animating relevant parts of this drawing. The 3D
Viewer control gives you the added option of incorporating three-dimensional animated views
of a machine in your simulation. The representation of the machine is then clearer, and the
movements of the machine are displayed more realistically.
In order to use the 3D Viewer control you must have a three-dimensional geometry model of the
machine. This 3D model must be made kinematic, which means it must be designed in such a
way that it can be linked to signals from the functional simulation and then execute the
animations controlled by these signals in the simulation. The kinematic 3D model includes
elements that are evaluated by the 3D Viewer control and converted into animations of the 3D
model.
Like the other controls in the basic library, the 3D Viewer control is inserted in a chart and its
parameters are assigned accordingly. It also has connectors with which it can be connected to
signals of the functional model. A special feature of the 3D Viewer control is a menu that can
be used to adapt the view of 3D model by means of commands.
Data format requirements

In order to use the 3D Viewer control you need a three-dimensional geometry model in VRML
V2.0 format. This VRML format can be exported from most CAD systems. In some cases,
however, you will also need to restructure the VRML model after export to identify and capture
the shapes or shape groups that are to be animated as kinematic simulation points. In terms of
the size of a model exported from CAD systems, it is also worth reducing it by eliminating details
of the geometry model that are not necessary for visualization.
To restructure the 3D model and make it kinematic, you can use a suitable VRML editor that
shows the geometric structure of the 3D model and allows you to modify the VRML code.
Information on editing environments for VRML can be found on the web pages of the Web3D
Consortium, for example: www.web3d.org.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Animating the 3D model

The 3D Viewer control allows you to animate individual shapes or shape groups of the 3D
model in various ways. You can:
● Move and rotate shapes or shape groups in space (translational and rotational movement)
● Reshape shapes or shape groups (size scaling)
● Change the color and transparency of individual shapes
In order to perform these operations, you need to assign appropriate elements or identifiers to
the individual shapes or shape groups in the 3D model:
● For movement animations specific motion sensors are added to the 3D model
● For reshaping and changes to the surface of a shape appropriate identifiers are added to the
shape definition.
The functioning of the various motion sensors is explained and the other options for modifying
models are described in the sections below. Examples are used to show how the various
sensors and identifiers can be added to a VRML file.
Animation sensors
A 3D model usually uses sensors to respond to user actions. Sensors in the 3D Viewer control,
on the other hand, are routed to connectors. This means you can connect the connectors of the
3D Viewer control to signals from your functional model. This means movements are calculated
by the functional model during the simulation and visualized by the 3D Viewer control.
The 3D Viewer control supports the following sensors for animating the 3D model:
● Plane sensors for the translational movement of objects
● Cylinder sensors for rotating objects about the local coordinate axes
● Sphere sensors for rotating objects around a vector
For each motion sensor of the 3D model the following applies:
● At least one higher-level Transform node must exist for a sensor. The sensor can be placed
anywhere in the Transform node.
● The position of the sensor alone determines which shapes or shape groups are moved: The
Transform node to which the sensor is assigned and all its child nodes are moved by the
sensor.
● Routes to sensors are not necessary and are not evaluated.
For each sensor a specific number of connectors is made available in the connector properties
of the control. Connect the connectors that perform the desired movement in the 3D model to
the corresponding signals in your functional model.
Faulty sensors, which means sensors that are not assigned to a Transform node, are
interpreted as not being present. For this reason no animation connectors are available for
faulty sensors in the 3D Viewer control properties.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
PlaneSensor – the plane sensor

A plane sensor is used to translate an object, which means a shape or a shape group. In the
VRML standard plane sensors can be used to move objects in two spatial directions – in the X
and Y direction of the local coordinate system. The 3D Viewer control allows a translation in all
three spatial directions at each plane sensor. A plane sensor is placed in the VRML model with
the keyword PlaneSensor.
Once the VRML file has been loaded into the 3D Viewer control, there are three analog
connectors available for a plane sensor in the control properties:
Sensorname#TX for translating the object in the X direction

Sensorname#TY for translating the object in the Y direction
Sensorname#TZ for translating the object in the Z direction
If no Sensorname is defined for a plane sensor, TranslationN is set as the sensor name,
whereby N is a sequential number for the plane sensor, for example, N = 1, 2, ...
The example below defines a cone to which a plane sensor called ConeSensor is assigned:
#VRML V2.0 utf8

DEF ConeTransform Transform
{
children
[
DEF Cone Shape
{
appearance Appearance
{
material Material {}
}
geometry Cone {}
}
DEF ConeSensor PlaneSensor {}
]
}
Once this VRML file has been loaded into the 3D Viewer control, the following three analog
connectors are available in the 3D Viewer control properties for translating the cone:
ConeSensor#TX (translation in X direction)

ConeSensor#TY (translation in Y direction)
ConeSensor#TZ (translation in Z direction)
You can now connect each of these connectors to an analog signal of your functional model to
animate the desired movement of the cone. For connectors that have not been connected to
signals, no movement of the cone occurs in the corresponding direction.
CylinderSensor – the cylinder sensor

Cylinder sensors are used to rotate an object, which means a shape or shape group by one of
the three local coordinate axes. Cylinder sensors should be used as follows to rotate objects
about the local coordinate axes X, Y or Z. A cylinder sensor is placed in the VRML model with
the keyword CylinderSensor. The angle of rotation for an axis is given in degrees.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
connectors available for a cylinder sensor in the control properties:
Sensorname#RX for rotating the object about the local X axis

Sensorname#RY for rotating the object about the local Y axis
Sensorname#RZ for rotating the object about the local Z axis
If no Sensorname is defined for a cylinder sensor, RotationN is set as the sensor name,
whereby N is a sequential number for the cylinder sensor, for example, N = 1, 2, ...
The example below defines a cone to which a cylinder sensor called ConeSensor is assigned:
#VRML V2.0 utf8

{
children
[
DEF Cone Shape
{
{
}
geometry Cone {}
}
DEF ConeSensor CylinderSensor {}
]
}
connectors for rotating the cone are available in the 3D Viewer control properties:
ConeSensor#RX (rotation about the X axis)

ConeSensor#RY (rotation about the Y axis)
ConeSensor#RZ (rotation about the Z axis)
animate the desired rotation of the cone. For connectors that have not been connected to
signals, no rotation of the cone occurs about the corresponding axis.
SphereSensor – the sphere sensor

Sphere sensors resolve the restriction associated with cylinder sensors of only being able to
rotate about coordinate axes. A direction vector is specified for sphere sensors about which the
shape is to be rotated. A sphere sensor is placed in the VRML model with the
keyword SphereSensor. The angle of rotation is given in degrees.
Once the VRML file has been loaded into the 3D Viewer control, there are four analog
connectors available for a sphere sensor in the control properties:
Sensorname#R Angle of rotation

Sensorname#X X-coordinate of the direction vector

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Sensorname#Y Y-coordinate of the direction vector

Sensorname#Z Z-coordinate of the direction vector
If no Sensorname is defined for a sphere sensor, SphereSensorN is set as the sensor name,
whereby N is a sequential number for the sphere sensor, for example, N = 1, 2, ...
The example below defines a cone to which a sphere sensor called ConeSensor is assigned:
#VRML V2.0 utf8

{
children
[
DEF Cone Shape
{
{
}
geometry Cone {}
}
DEF ConeSensor SphereSensor {}
]
}
Once this VRML file has been loaded into the 3D Viewer control, the following four analog
connectors for rotating the cone are available in the 3D Viewer control properties:
ConeSensor#R Angle of rotation

ConeSensor#X X-coordinate of the direction vector
ConeSensor#Y Y-coordinate of the direction vector
ConeSensor#Z Z-coordinate of the direction vector
set the direction vector and animate the desired rotation of the cone.
Scaling objects
If you wish to scale the size of an object, which means a shape or shape group, you need to
modify the name of the Transform node to which the object is assigned or the Transform node
containing the object to be scaled: Prefix the name of the Transform node with the
identifier SCALE. Negative scale values flip the object in the scaling axis.
Note
A scale value of zero in two degrees of freedom, which means in two directions, will cause the
object to disappear from the animation.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
connectors available for a scaled Transform node in the control properties:
SCALETransformname#SX for scaling in the X direction

SCALETransformname#SY for scaling in the Y direction
SCALETransformname#SZ for scaling in the Z direction
Transformname is the name of the Transform node.
The example below shows a VRML model with a box for which a scale has been defined:
#VRML V2.0 utf8

DEF SCALEBoxTransform Transform
{
children
[
Shape
{
{
}
geometry Box {}
}
]
}
connectors for scaling the box are available in the 3D Viewer control properties:
SCALEBoxTransform #SX (scaling in X direction)

SCALEBoxTransform #SY (scaling in Y direction)
SCALEBoxTransform #SZ (scaling in Z direction)
animate the desired reshaping of the box. For connectors that have not been connected to
signals, no scaling of the box occurs in the corresponding axis.
Changing the color and transparency of a shape

In VRML a shape is defined by a Shape node. In order to change the color or transparency
properties of a shape, the name of the shape must be modified. Prefix the name of the Shape
node with the identifier RGBT.
Once the VRML file has been loaded into the 3D Viewer control, there are four analog
connectors available for a Shape node prefixed with the identifier RGBT in the control
properties:
RGBTShapename#CT for the shape transparency value

RGBTShapename#CR for the red component of the shape color
RGBTShapename#CG for the green component of the shape color
RGBTShapename#CB for the blue component of the shape color

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Shapename is the name of the Shape node.

The shape color is determined by corresponding values for the red, green and blue
components. Valid values for a color component are in the range 0, … ,1. The values for the
transparency of the shape are also in the range 0, … ,1. The transparency value 1 means that
the shape is transparent and therefore invisible; the transparency value 0 means that the shape
is not transparent.
The example below constructs a cylinder for which an animation of the color and transparency
is defined:
#VRML V2.0 utf8

Transform
{
children
[
DEF RGBTCylinder Shape
{
{
}
geometry Cylinder {}
}
]
}
Once this VRML file has been loaded into the 3D Viewer control, the following four analog
connectors for the transparency and color of the cylinder are available in the 3D Viewer control
properties:
RGBTCylinder #CT (transparency of the shape)

RGBTCylinder #CR (red component of the shape)
RGBTCylinder #CG (green component of the shape)
RGBTCylinder #CB (blue component of the shape)
animate the desired color and transparency of the cylinder.
If you only want to animate the visibility of a shape, simply connect connector #CT to a signal.
The shape is then displayed in its original color (as defined in the VRML file) and you can switch
its visibility off and on by means of the signal values zero and one.
Note
An invisible shape remains invisible even if you change the color values. Only changing the
transparency value makes it visible again.
To make an entire group of shapes invisible, move the group to a new transformation node and
scale the node in two axis directions to zero or one. You can find additional information on this
in section: Scaling objects (Page 577).
If you want to assign the same color to several shapes and animate it, you can utilize the
inheritance of properties. The material property of a primary shape can be passed onto any

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
number of other shapes. The primary shape includes the RGBT identifier in its name. The
resulting four connectors of the primary shape can be used to switch the color (and also the
visibility/transparency) of all other shapes that inherit this material property.
This is illustrated by the example below: Two cylinders change color at the same time, but only
one has the RGBT identifier.
#VRML V2.0 utf8

Transform
{
children
[
DEF RGBTCylinder Shape
{
{
# Definition of the primary material property
material DEF CylinderColor Material
{
diffuseColor 0.2 0 0.8
}
}
}
]
Translation 2 0 0
}
Transform
{
children
[
Shape
{
{
# Inheritance of the material property
material USE CylinderColor
}
}
]
Translation -2 0 0
}
Switching viewpoints
If viewpoints are included in a VRML file, they can be switched both dynamically in the
simulation and also by manual operation of the 3D Viewer control. If a VRML file is loaded into
the 3D Viewer control, the integer VIEWPOINT connector appears in the connector properties
of the 3D Viewer control, provided that viewpoints have been defined in the file.
The VIEWPOINT connector can be set in the value range 1, ..., N, whereby N is the number of
defined viewpoints.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
The example below shows the syntax for two viewpoints called Main View and Front View:
DEF MainView Viewpoint

{
position -2.076697e3 574.432739 4.039152e3
orientation 0.192129 -0.980301 4.578408e-2 0.482376
description "Main view"
}
DEF FrontView Viewpoint
{
Position -78.220909 1.075813e3 4.449046e3
orientation -0.631093 -0.427644 0.647179 2.717778e-2
description "Front view"
}
To switch viewpoints, connect the VIEWPOINT connector to an integer signal whose values
you can use to switch to the corresponding viewpoint.
Configuring the 3D Viewer control

In order to display a 3D model in the 3D Viewer control and modify it dynamically, you need to
add a 3D Viewer control to the simulation project. Select the VRML file that describes the 3D
model in the control view properties. Once you have selected the VRML file, all degrees of
freedom of the 3D model are available to you in the control properties as connectors for
animating the model. You can then link the connectors to simulation signals from the "Signals"
task card, using drag-and-drop for example.
Importing the 3D model

The 3D Viewer control is located in the Controls task card in the Miscellaneous pane. To add
a 3D model to the simulation, you need to place an instance of the 3D Viewer control on a chart.
As with all other controls, this is done by dragging and dropping it from the "Controls" task card.
The size of the control on the chart – and hence the size of the 3D model – can be changed
using the width and height sizing handles on the selection frame.
You can then load the VRML file containing the description of the 3D model in the control view
properties.
You can use the Operable property to operate the 3D viewer control (even when the simulation
is stopped) and set the view of the 3D model. You can find more information about this in the
section: Simulating with the 3D Viewer control (Page 582).
The scene settings (camera settings) are saved with the chart and are restored when you open
the chart.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Linking the connectors to signals

When the VRML file is loaded, all sensors and modifications defined in the file are recorded and
made available as connectors in the connector settings.
The connectors that can be used for translating, rotating, scaling, hiding or changing the color
of shapes are all provided with a button. Clicking this button starts an explanatory animation
for this connector, making it easy to identify the animated object or its movement axis in the 3D
scene. Then link the connectors that execute the animations you require to the corresponding
signals of the "Signals" task card using drag-and-drop.
Note
Of the connectors of a sphere sensor, only connector #R, which is used to animate the angle
of rotation, has an animation button . When this animation button is activated, a rotation of
the object about the X-axis is animated.
Simulating with the 3D Viewer control

Once the simulation has started you can adjust the view of the 3D model in the 3D Viewer
control by means of commands. You can rotate, move or zoom the scene (camera settings) and
switch to defined viewpoints. You can make the same adjustments to the scene before the start
of simulation by setting the "Operable" view property in the 3D Viewer control.
You can restore the default view at any time with the "Camera > Reset" menu command or the
Pos1 key.

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Rotating the scene

You can rotate the scene manually using the mouse or keyboard. Move the mouse pointer over
a point on the scene and press the left mouse button. The center of rotation, which is also the
viewpoint as seen by the observer (camera), appears in the center of the scene. Hold down the
mouse button and rotate the scene in the direction you want. Alternatively you can also rotate
the scene vertically or horizontally using the arrow keys.
You can reset the center of rotation/viewpoint by double-clicking an element of the scene.
The view cube in the bottom right corner of the 3D Viewer control shows you the current viewing
direction of the 3D scene. Click one side of the cube to reset the scene to the corresponding
viewing plane. Double-click to set the opposite viewing plane. You can show and hide the view
cube by going to "View > Show view cube".
You can also use the shortcut keys listed in the table below to switch the viewing plane.
Table 8-40 Shortcut keys for switching the viewing plane
Viewing plane Abbreviation/acronym Shortcut keys

Front view F (Front) Ctrl + F
Back view B (Back) Ctrl + B
Left view L (Left) Ctrl + L
Right view R (Right) Ctrl + R

Libraries
8.1 Basic library
Viewing plane Abbreviation/acronym Shortcut keys

Top view T (Top) Ctrl + T
Bottom view B (Bottom) Ctrl + B
The bottom left corner of the 3D Viewer control shows the coordinate system with the three
axes X, Y and Z. You can show and hide this coordinate system by going to "View > Show
coordinate system" (see figure above).
Note
The viewing planes are defined in the VRML specification: a Cartesian, left-handed, three-
dimensional coordinate system is used in which the positive Y-axis points upwards and the
viewer looks from the positive Z-axis towards the negative Z-axis.
When you create the 3D model or export it to a VRML file, make sure that the Y axis is pointing
upwards in accordance with the VRML specification.
You can alter the response to rotation with the mouse or arrow keys by going to "Camera >
Rotation sensitivity" and "Camera > Inertia". The sensitivity and inertia factor can be reduced
or increased by means of a slider. The default setting for both sliders is one.
Swiveling the camera

By panning the camera you can move the scene in the window of the 3D Viewer control, which
means move the scene away from or into the center of the window. In contrast to a rotation, if
you pan the camera the position of the viewer (camera) remains constant, only the viewpoint
(target) changes.
The operating instructions for panning the scene are the same as for rotating, except that you
also need to hold down the <Shift> key. You can find information about rotating the scene in the
section: Rotating the scene (Page 583).

Libraries
8.2 CHEM-BASIC and FLOWNET libraries
Zooming the scene

In order to view parts of a scene in more detail you can zoom in or out as required using the
Page Up and Page Down keys. The same effect is achieved if you turn the mouse wheel or drag
with the left mouse button while holding down the Ctrl key. If you press the <Ctrl> and <Shift>
key at the same time and hold down the left mouse button, you can draw an area to be zoomed.
Under "View > Adjust zoom", you can alter the zoom whenever required so that the complete
scene fills the screen in the 3D Viewer control. All other camera settings remain unchanged.
You can influence how the scene responds to zooming by selecting Camera > Zoom sensitivity
and Camera > Inertia. The sensitivity and inertia factor can be reduced or increased by means
of a slider. The default setting for both sliders is one.
Switching the viewpoint

A viewpoint describes a particular viewing position. All viewpoints defined in the VRML file are
listed in the 3D Viewer control in the Viewpoints menu with their name and a sequential number.
If a viewpoint does not have a name, it is listed with the identifier "–". You can switch to a
different viewpoint by selecting it in this menu.
8.2.1 Introduction
The FLOWNET and CHEM-BASIC libraries are extensions of SIMIT that provide component
types for creating simulations of pipeline networks. You use the component types of CHEM-
BASIC, in particular, to create simulations in the chemical and pharmaceutical industries.
By connecting components of these libraries, a model of a pipeline network – a flow network –
is created and can be used to simulate the thermodynamic processes in pipeline networks. The
FLOWNET and CHEM-BASIC libraries enable use of a special solution method in SIMIT that
calculates the flow rates, pressures and specific enthalpies during simulation of pipeline
networks.
With CHEM-BASIC the material mixtures are modeled as pseudo ingredients with the
corresponding mixture properties (especially heat capacity and density). The individual

Libraries
components of the flow networks can also be connected to models of the actuator-sensor level
(basic library).
Although a model approach based on the physical balance equations underlies the flow
networks in SIMIT, the goal is not to enable dynamic process simulations for the design of plant
components or plants. Rather, the goal is to provide a physically plausible simulation of the
thermodynamic variables in pipeline networks for virtual commissioning. This simulation should
be easy to create from components in a graphical interface and should be stable even in
extreme situations. Thus, when component types of the FLOWNET and CHEM-BASIC libraries
are implemented, a detailed simulation of the physics is not the focus. Rather, the emphasis is
on a simple parameter assignment of components and a stable behavior in the flow network.
The component types of the FLOWNET- and CHEM-BASIC libraries can be used to implement
flow networks for different media:
● water/steam,
● liquids or
● ideal gases.
With the Modul Component Type Editor (CTE) of SIMIT, you can create your own flow network
components and thus specifically expand your flow network library. The flow network solution
method can be employed using FLOWNET-specific connection types of the components.
However, existing component types of the CHEM-BASIC library cannot be modified by the
user.
Note
A check is made during startup of the simulation to determine whether your SIMIT installation
has a license for the FLOWNET- or CHEM-BASIC library. If flow network components are
present in your simulation project, that is, components that utilize the solution method for flow
networks, the simulation can only be started if you have the license for FLOWNET or CHEM-
BASIC.
8.2.2 Topological connector

The topological connector Topology is available in the CONNECTORS directory of the SIMIT
basic library; it can be used to create topological connections for flow network components
across chart limits.

Libraries
The Topology symbol is shown in the figure below:
Use the Topology connector to create a topological flownet connection between two or more
branch components. Two components are connected by the CON_A connector under (a) in the
figure below. The connection is functionally identical to the direct connection of both
components via a connecting line, as shown under (b) in the figure below:
Three components are connected by the NODE_A connector under (a) in the figure below. This
configuration is functionally identical to the connection using a connection node that is shown
under (b) in the figure below.

Libraries
8.2.3 Geodetic height
Operating principle
Certain components in the CHEM-BASIC library have an (additional) parameter for geodetic
height, geoHeight. The geodetic height specifies the height z of the equipment. Negative values
indicate lower components. The following formula is used to calculate the pressure change
resulting from geodetic pressure:
ΔPgeo = p • g • geoHeight
A distinction is drawn between the following situations as regards the effect of geodetic height
on the simulation:
● Components that only connect topologically connected flow.
Example: HeatExchangerGeneral. Connection of two topologically separate flow networks.
These flow networks exchange heat, but their pressure and mass flows are separate.
● Components that combine flows from flow networks that are not topologically connected.
Example: StorageTankLiquid. Flows from different flow networks are mixed. The internal
pressure in the tank is mapped to the various different flow networks and therefore
influences the mass flows.)
Components that only connect topologically connected flows operate with differential pressure
only. Geodetic height is not relevant in to this. For these components, the geodetic height is
relevant to material properties and internal functions, for example HeatExchangerGeneral:
Effect on the boiling point of water.
Components that combine flows from topologically separate flow networks work with absolute
pressures. The geodetic height therefore affects both the incoming and the outgoing flows. The
pressure in these nodes is increased by the geodetic height.

Libraries
Example
A pump must build up additional differential pressure in order to pump a liquid to a tank that is
5 m higher. From that higher tank, the liquid then flows into a lower tank. A process tag is fitted
at a height of 2.5 m. All process tags show the pressure that would actually be measured there.
See also
Centrifuge (Page 645)
Compressor (Page 640)
Condenser (Page 613)
DrumWS – Storage tank for water/steam (Page 682)
ElectricHeatExchanger – Electrically heated heat exchanger (Page 618)
HeatExchangerGeneral (Page 619)
HeatExchangerShellTube – Shell and tube heat exchanger (Page 622)
Mixer (Page 637)
PipeMeasure – Pipe measuring point (Page 632)
Pump (Page 643)
PressureStrainer (Page 662)
Screening device (Page 671)
Separator (Page 673)
StorageTankLiquid – Storage tank for liquid media (Page 696)

Libraries
8.2.4 Flownets
A SIMIT flownet is an interconnection of flownet components used for simulation of

thermodynamic processes in pipeline networks. The simulation of flownets is based on a
special solution procedure, which is assigned parameters and configured using flownet
components. The modeling approach described below limits flownets to homogenous media,
but it can be used for liquids, ideal gases or water in either liquid or steam aggregate state.
The FLOWNET library provides component types that can be used to configure or model
flownets. As usual in SIMIT, the chart editor is used to model flownets. The symbol used for the
flownet component types, such as valves or pumps, is the same as the one normally used in
pipeline diagrams. This means you can easily construct a flownet model, as seen in the figure
below, in the form of a pipe diagram using the symbols of the component types:
The flownet topology for configuring the flownet solution procedure is derived from the
interconnection of flownet components. While the simulation is running, the flownet solution
procedure and the flownet components exchange data: calculated values or flownet
parameters.
8.2.4.1 Flownet basics

The process for simulating pipeline networks is based on mapping the connection of flownet
components to flownets as a graph of nodes and branches. The branches model the flow paths
and the nodes model the connections, which means the intersections or joints of the flow paths.
The determining variables for the nodes are the pressures and specific enthalpies and the flow
for the branches (mass flows).
All physical variables with a vector nature, such as the flow of fluids, are represented in the
flownet as one-dimensional variables with direction information, which means as vector
quantities (lines of flow). The direction is indicated by the sign. The variables can be numbered
arbitrarily for reference.

Libraries
Flownets can be depicted by graphs, whose branches (edges) form the pipelines with their
fittings (valves, pumps, etc.), while their nodes form the pipe joints. The graph is directional,
which means the direction of a branch indicates the direction of flow. The graph is also
interconnected just like the flownet. The graph represents the topology of the flownet on the
level of pipelines and joints. As an example, the following figure shows a graph with 7 nodes Ki
and 9 branches Zi:
A graph, as shown in the following figure, with three branches and four nodes results from the
example in the section: Flownets (Page 590).
Nodes K1, K3 and K4 are used to set the boundary conditions for the flownet. For example, the
pressure on the connections of both tanks is specified with these external nodes. In contrast,
node K2 is an internal node, for which the relevant variables, such as pressure, are calculated
using the flownet solution procedure.
The solution procedure for flownets is based on determining the flow in the branches depending
on the pressure, using the momentum balance, and on balancing the flow of matter and
enthalpy in the nodes. The state variables for such a system therefore are the mass flows in the
branches and the pressures and specific enthalpies in the nodes. Other variables, such as
density and temperature in the flownet, can be derived according to the medium in question.
If the flownet components in a branch change neither the rate nor the enthalpy of flow in that
branch, the branch is removed from the flownet, which means both nodes are merged to form
one node.
The solution procedure for flownets is a cyclical solution procedure with equidistant time slices
that extends the standard solution procedure. Flownet component types can also be used in
addition to other component types, such as those in the basic library. Specific connections are
used for data exchange between flownet components and the flownet solution procedure.
Through these connections, the components receive values calculated by the flownet solution

Libraries
procedure; these are then used to calculate variables that are sent back to the flownet solution
procedure.
Note
Depending on the structure of the flownet and on the parameter assignment of the flownet
components, the calculation of the flownet can become unstable during simulation and the
values of the flownet state variables can grow beyond all limits as a result. The stability of
flownets is not checked in SIMIT. In this case, you can establish stability by setting a smaller
value for the cycle time of the flownet, and/or by modifying the parameters of the flownet
balances.
Obviously a flownet must consist of at least one branch with two nodes. The following figure
shows the minimal graph.
The figure below shows a corresponding minimal flownet. The nodes can be external (as in the
figure) or internal.
If a branch is not completed with two nodes, as shown in the figure below, an error message is
output when you start the simulation and the simulation is not started.
The figure below shows this error message, "Isolated branch component(s)", and lists the
components in this branch.
A similar error message appears if the flownet only contains a single isolated component. The
corresponding graph then consists of only one branch or node and does not meet the minimum
requirements for a flownet.

Libraries
The flownet components and the flownet solution procedure are also processed cyclically in
SIMIT. The flownet components must be assigned to a time slice for this purpose. All
components of a flownet must be assigned parameters with the same time slice. Otherwise the
simulation start is canceled with an error message as the one in the figure below.
8.2.4.2 Variables used in flownets

The mass flows, pressures and specific enthalpies as well as the derived densities and
temperatures are considered basic physical variables in flownets. These variables are listed in
the following table along with the symbols and units used in this manual.
Table 8-41 Flownet variables
Variable Symbol Unit

Mass flow rate P
& kg/s
Pressure p bar (absolute)
Specific enthalpy h kJ/kg
Density ρ kg/m³
Temperature T °C
8.2.4.3 Modeling of flownet branches

It is assumed that branches do not store any mass. The mass flow and density are therefore
consistent throughout the entire branch.
These assumptions are always met for incompressible media. For compressible media no
mass is stored in the branch if the branches have "no" volume. The density decreases for
compressible media in the direction of falling pressure, which means in the direction of flow; the

Libraries
density change is negligible for slight throttling, so it is acceptable to regard the density as
constant.
Thus only the pressures at the connection points need to be considered for branch objects. The
relationships between the pressures on either side of a branch object and the mass flow in the
branch, such as ˮ ෙS a P & , are purely of an algebraic nature.
Momentum balance is applied to each branch k using pressure forces. Friction forces,
acceleration forces and gravity are ignored. With a uniform cross-section Ak in a branch of
length Lk, the following applies
GP&N
/N $N ෙSN ෥ $N ෤ ෙSN ˧
GW ˧
where Δpk = pk,A – pk,B is the pressure difference over the entire branch k, and ΔpK,k = pK,kA – pK,kB
are the pressure differences of the individual branch elements (see the figure below).
%UDQFK %UDQFK
1RGH$ REMHFW REMHFW 1RGH%

SN$ SN$ SN% SN$ SN% SN%
P& N
If pressure is applied in bars, the rate of change of the mass flow P

&N is given by
GP&N $N  ෙSN ෙS  NJ
 ෥ ෤ N˧ 
GW /N  EDU ˧ EDU  PV

The length and cross-section of a branch are generally unknown so a reasonable estimate
must be made. Assuming for example a cross-section of 0.05 m2 and a length of 10 m results
in a factor that is subsequently described as the momentum factor
$N
$N
/N
of 500 m.
8.2.4.4 Modeling of flownet nodes
The inflow and outflow of the medium are dynamically balanced at each node. Each node is
assigned a material balance envelope, which means a volume. The mass inflow and outflow
are balanced as well as the enthalpy inflow and outflow as a measure of the energy conversion.

Libraries
Mass balance for the node

The pressure in a node i is determined through the mass balance, which means through the
balancing of the inflow and outflow from the branches that are connected with the node:
GˮL
9L
GW ෤ P&
˧
˧
Vi is the volume of the material balance envelope assigned to the node, pi is the density of the
medium within the material balance envelope and the P & ˧ are the inflows and outflows. Inflows
are positive ( P˧ ! ), outflows are negative ( P˧ ).
& &
Using the equation of state ρ= ρ(p,h) and assuming an isenthalpic change of state for the
pressures in the node, the following applies:
෥
GSL  GˮL 
GW
9
 L GSL

 ෤ P& ˧
 K FRQVW  ˧
The term
GˮL
9L
GSL
is a measure of the compressibility of the medium. Using the compressive modulus Ki
෥
 Gˮ 
.L 0L 9L L 

 GSL 
the following applies for the mass balance:
GSL .L
GW 0L
෤ P&˧
˧ FL ෤ P
˧
&˧
The default setting for the specific compression module ci = Ki / Mi in the flownet solution
procedure is the same for all nodes in the flownet. However, various factors result in increased
compressibility ci of gases and steam in contrast to liquids, and this is taken into consideration
for media with higher and lower densities. You can find additional information on this in section:
Parameter assignment of flownets (Page 597).
Enthalpy balance for the node

The specific enthalpy is treated as another state variable of a node. In principle, the convective
inflow of enthalpy and the existing enthalpy in the node form a mixed enthalpy, which applies
to the outflow. The balancing for a node i is given by
G KL 0 L
GW
෤ K P& ˧
˧ ˧

Libraries
where Mi is the mass and hi is the specific enthalpy of the medium within the material balance
envelope. It follows from
GK L
GW 0L
෤ P& K
˧ෛ = L
˧ ˧ ෥ KL
that by using the difference in enthalpy only the inflows to the node i (k ∈ Zi) need to be summed.
Just like the mass balance factors ci, the default thermal factors mi = 1 / Mi in the flownet solution
method are equal for all nodes, but have different values for media with higher and lower
densities.
Determining the density of the medium in the nodes

The values for the density in the nodes are calculated from the pressure and specific enthalpy
values. The relations used depend on the medium in the flownet.
Water/steam medium
In the case of water/steam, the density in the nodes is calculated using the equation of state for
water/steam with pressure p and specific enthalpy h:
ρ= ρ(p,h).
Liquid medium
In the case of liquids, calculation is based on constant density throughout the entire flownet.
The default is a density of 997.337 kg/m3.
Calculation
The gas equation pV = mRsT is used for ideal gas. Using the specific heat capacity cp the
density is given by
3D
S ຘ
P EDU
ˮ
9  K ෥ K 
56  7 
 FS 
with pressure p in bar, the specific heat capacity cp in kJ/kgK and the specific gas constant RS
in kJ/kgK. If the triple point of water is used for the zero point (T0, h0), we can set T0 = 273.15
K and h0 = 0. The density is then calculated using the following relationship
3D
S ຘ
ˮ EDU
K 
56  .
 FS 

Libraries
In the flownet solution procedure, the specific gas constant has a value of 0.287 kJ/kgK
(specific gas constant for dry air).
Determining the temperature of the medium in the nodes

The temperatures used in the FLOWNET library components are also calculated from the
values for pressure p and specific enthalpy h. The equation of state for water/steam medium
T = T (p,h)
is used. For ideal gases and liquids the temperature is determined using the specific heat
capacity cp from the specific enthalpy in accordance with
T = h / cp
.
8.2.4.5 Heat exchange with the environment

The heat exchange with the environment is taken into account by a corresponding term in the
enthalpy balance equation for the node based on the following formula:
GK L  
 ෤P & ˧ K ˧ ෥ KL ෥ F L 7L ෥7(QY 
GW 0L  ˧ෛ = 
 L 
Where TEnv is the ambient temperature, Ti is the temperature of the node and
ci = αiAi
is the determining heat transfer factor, which is the product of the heat transfer coefficient αi and
the heat transfer surface Ai.
For calculation of the heat exchange with the environment, use the JointParam component as
the node.
8.2.4.6 Parameter assignment of flownets
The variables for the branches and nodes of a flow network are calculated with the help of the
above-described parameters. These parameters are preset with corresponding values in the
flow network solution method but can be changed using special component types of the
FLOWNET and CHEM-BASIC libraries.
Component types
You can use the following component types for parameter assignment of networks:
● NetParam for general parameter assignment of flownets in FLOWNET (NetParam –
network parameter assignment (Page 722)) and in CHEM-BASIC (NetParam – Network
parameter assignment (Page 676))
● NetWS for parameter assignment of networks with water/steam as the medium in
FLOWNET (NetWS – water/steam network parameter assignment (Page 731)),

Libraries
● NetLiquid for parameter assignment of networks with liquids as the medium in FLOWNET
(NetLiquid – liquid network parameter assignment (Page 748)) and
● NetGas for parameter assignment of networks with ideal gas as the medium in FLOWNET
(NetGas – gas network parameter assignment (Page 761)).
You can use the following component types for specific parameter assignment of individual
nodes:
● JointParam for general parameter assignment of nodes in FLOWNET (JointParam –
parameterizable joint (Page 724)) and in CHEM-BASIC (JointParam – configurable
pipeline node (Page 608))
● JointParamWS for parameter assignment of a node in a network with water/steam as the
medium in FLOWNET (JointParamWS – water/steam parameterizable joint (Page 734)),
● JointParamLiquid for parameter assignment of a node in a network with liquid as the
medium in FLOWNET (JointParamLiquid – liquid parameterizable joint (Page 751)),
● JointParamGas for parameter assignment of a node in a network with ideal gas as the
medium in FLOWNET (JointParamGas – parameterizable joint (Page 764)),
You can use the following component type for parameter assignment of individual branches:
● BranchParam in FLOWNET (BranchParam – branch parameter assignment (Page 723))
and in CHEM-BASIC (BranchParam – Branch parameter assignment (Page 675))
Connection types
The following sections describe the connection types with which you can use parameter
assignments in your self-created flow network components in FLOWNET:
● Connector type FLN5 for parameters of a flownet (Page 781)
● Connector type FLN6 for parameter assignment of a branch (Page 782)
● Connector type FLN7 for parameter assignment of an internal node (Page 782)
Flownet media
The following media can be specified for a flownet:
● water/steam,
● ideal gas or
● liquid
Water/steam is the default medium.
Parameters for branches

The momentum factor A can be set for the branches in the flow network. An identical factor
A = 450 m is preset for all branches in the flow network solution method. If there are several
momentum factors in a branch, the effective factor A in the branch is given by

ʿ
෤ʿ
N ˧

Libraries
using the k factors Ak.
Node parameters
The following variables can be parameterized for nodes in a flownet:
● Specific compression modulus c = K / M
● Thermal factor m = 1 / M
Both variables can be individually specified for water and steam as well as liquid and gas.
Transitions between the parameters cL and mL and the parameters cG and mG for water/steam
medium are calculated by the flownet solution method based on the density according to the
following scheme:
 F/ IRU ˮ ุ PuNJ

F 
 F* IRU ˮ PuNJ
and
 P/ IRU ˮ ุ PuNJ

P 
 P* IRU ˮ PuNJ
The transition between both parameter values can also be set with a linear transition function:
 F/ IRU ˮ ! ˮ/

 F IRU ˮ ˮ*
F  *
 ˮ* ˮ/ ෥ ˮ
F F ෥ F RWKHUZLVH


/ * /
ˮ ˮ/ ෥ ˮ *
and
 P/ IRU ˮ ! ˮ/

P IRU ˮ ˮ*
P  *
 P* ෥ P /
 P/ Y ෥ Y/ RWKHUZLVH
 Y* ෥ Y/
with the two reference values ρG = 5 kg/m3 and ρG = 1000 kg/m3.

For liquid medium the corresponding variables cL and mL are always applicable, and for ideal
gas the variables cG and mG are applicable.
For heat exchange with the environment, the ambient temperature Tenv and the heat transfer
factor c = ∝A / M can be parameterized. The default temperature is set at Tenv = 20 °C with factor
c = 0, which means there is no heat exchange with the default settings.

Libraries
Parameters for liquid medium

If liquid is set as the medium for the flownet, constant density is assumed. The density value to
be used can be specified as a parameter.
The specific heat capacity cp of the medium can be specified as an additional variable for the
flownet as well as specifically for each individual node. The default value is 4.18 kJ/kgK.
Parameters for ideal gas medium

For ideal gas as the flownet medium, the gas constant RS and the specific heat capacity cp can
be specified. The default values are RS = 0.287 kJ/kgK and cp = 1 kJ/kgK.
Initialization of variables
Each time the simulation is started, the flownet state variables are initialized as follows:
All branch mass flow rates are initialized with a value of zero ( P
& ). This initialization cannot
be changed. The default values for the pressures in the nodes are p = 1 bar, but they can be
changed to other values by means of a parameter. The initial value h for the specific enthalpy
depends on the medium in the flownet as follows:
● h = 100 kJ/kg for water/steam,
● h = 83.6 kJ/kg for liquid and
● h = 20 kJ/kg for ideal gas.
These initial values can be changed by means of a parameter.
Parameter overview
The table below provides an overview of the available flownet parameters. The signal column
lists the names of the input or output signals for the component, the designation column gives
the names under which the parameters can be found in the component properties dialog. The
default values and units are shown in the last column. If explicit parameters are not set, the
defaults for the flownet as described above apply.
Table 8-42 List of flownet parameters
Signal Title Description Default

Value Unit
MEDIUM Medium Characteristic number for the medium in the 0 –
flownet:
● water/steam: 0
● liquid: 2
● ideal gas: 1
CG sCompressionGas Specific compression modulus c = K / M for 10 bar/kg
ideal gas or steam
CL sCompressionLiquid Specific compression modulus c = K / M for 100 bar/kg
liquids
MG FactorThermalGas Thermal factor m = 1 / M for ideal gas or steam 100 kg−1

Libraries
Signal Title Description Default

ML FactorThermalLiquid Thermal factor m = 1 / M for liquids 0.1 kg−1
P_INIT PressureInit Initial pressure value 1 bar
H_INIT sEnthalpyInit Initial value for specific enthalpy 20 / 83.6 / kJ/kg
100
DENSITY Density(Liquid) Density (only applies to liquid) 997.337 kg/m3
T_ENV TemperatureEnvironment Ambient temperature Tenv 20 °C
C_ENV FactorHeatExchangeEnv Heat transfer factor c = α A 0 kW/K
L_CR sHeatCapLiquid Specific heat capacity cp for liquids 4.18 kJ/kgK
IG_R GasConstant Gas constant RS 0.287 kJ/kgK
IG_CR sHeatCapGas Specific heat capacity cp for gas medium 1.0 kJ/kgK
ST SmoothTransition Switch to linear transition of the compression False
modulus and thermal factor for water/steam
AL FactorMomentum Momentum factor A 450 m
8.2.4.7 Coupling simulation model with actuator/sensor level
Coupling simulation model with actuator/sensor level

The physical simulation model created on the basis of the component type libraries CHEM-
BASIC and FLOWNET is linked to a control technology by means of an actuator/sensor level.
Signals from the control technology about specific drive components are used in the actuator/
sensor level to form the feedback required by the control technology. Drive component types
of the SIMIT basic library can, for example, be used for this purpose.
In addition, these drive components calculate, for example, the position for a valve or the
standardized speed for a pump.
The physical values of measuring points are read by the actuator/sensor level from the
simulation level. These values are then prepared and forwarded in the formats required for the
control technology.
This means the actuator/sensor level is connected as follows with the simulation level:

Libraries
$FWXDWRUVHQVRUOHYHO
3RVLWLRQ 3K\VLFDOPHDVXUHG
YDOXH
6LPXODWLRQOHYHO
Figure 8-5 Schematic coupling of the actuator/sensor level to the simulation level
The following options are available to link the simulation level to the actuator/sensor level:
● Direct connection over signal lines (only possible when the actuator/sensor level and the
simulation level are implemented in one chart)
● Connection of components over signal lines using global connectors
● Implicit connection of the actuator/sensor level to the simulation level
Direct connection over signal lines

The direct connection of the actuator/sensor level with the simulation level over signal lines is
the simplest type of connection. With this type of connection, all parts of both levels that belong
to each other must be located in one chart. This limits the applicability of this type of connection.
A generation of the actuator/sensor level is not practical due to the close linking of both levels
in one chart.
Figure 8-6 Coupling of the valve component type to a drive

Libraries
Direct connection over signal lines in different charts

A coupling solution that provides a better performance is the connection over signal lines using
connectors in different charts. An automated generation of the actuator/sensor level in
connection with a manually created simulation level is possible in this instance. The automated
generation can, for example, take place by a table import integrated in SIMIT using the SIMIT
standard templates. These table imports receive their information from the PCS 7 engineering
data.
The major advantage compared to direct connection without connectors is that the actuator/
sensor level can be located in a completely separate folder structure where it can be easily
swapped or amended.
$FWXDWRUVHQVRUOHYHO
6LPXODWLRQOHYHO
Figure 8-7 Coupling the actuator/sensor level to the simulation level by means of signal lines and
connectors
Connection using implicit coupling

When connecting the two levels by means of implicit coupling, the levels can also be located in
different charts. It makes sense to also manage these charts in different folders.
The major advantages of this type of coupling compared to coupling with signal lines and
connectors are listed below:
● Better overview of charts in the simulation level through simpler display (no connectors
necessary)
● The input of the higher level designation (HID) of the components is only necessary in one
location (name of the valve, pump or measuring point)
● Parameters set in the model (e.g. valve parameters) are automatically linked to the
corresponding HID.
Connection using implicit coupling is achieved by using the same name. To do this, the name
and the output of the writing component must be specified at the reading input of a component.

Libraries
To support the type of coupling for pumps and valves, the input Position is given a default. This
default is defined as follows:
Name of the component to the connected: "Valve name"/ACT

Name of the output to be connected: Y
To use the implicit coupling described above, we recommend assigning the name "Valve name/
ACT" to the corresponding drive in the actuator/sensor level. For this purpose, the templates
are designed accordingly.
Figure 8-8 Implicit coupling of the valve component type to a drive
In case of an implicit coupling of measuring points, the corresponding reading blocks in the
actuator/sensor level must be initialized using templates.
8.2.5 Components of the CHEM-BASIC library
8.2.5.1 Burner
Symbol
Figure 8-9 Symbol of component type Burner
The Burner component type simulates the function of a burner.

A fuel flows through the component.

Libraries
The component calculates the energy released during combustion and provides it at output Q.
This combustion energy can be used to heat the content stored in other components (e.g.
Storage TankLiquid or PressureStrainer).
Function
The Burner component is connected to a flow network over the connectors A and B.
If the fuel is ignited (by means of the input Ignation or the "Ignition" button in the operating
window), the heat flow released from complete combustion of the fuel is output at the output Q.
The heat flow is calculated based on the specified heating value and the mass flow. Typical
heating values are:
Natural gas 53 MJ/kg

Fuel oil 45 MJ/kg
Gasoline 34 MJ/kg
Raw lignite 10 MJ/kg
There is no actual material transformation of the fuel. The mass flow and the enthalpy of the fuel
in the burner are not affected.
As soon as the fuel mass flow falls to zero, the flame extinguishes and there is no longer a heat
flow.
The Burner component type has different symbols depending on the flame status:
Burner without flame Burner with flame
Parameters

HeatingValue Heating value of the fuel in MJ/kg MJ/kg 10.0
Kvs Flow coefficient kVS with kVS ≥ 10 m /h
−6 3
m /h
3
0.1

Kv0 Valve characteristic value kV0 with m /h
3
0.000001
kV0 ≥ 10−6 m3/h

Libraries
8.2.5.2 Fittings
ChangeCrossSection
Symbol
Figure 8-10 Symbol of component type ChangeCrossSection
Function
The ChangeCrossSection component calculates the pressure loss in a pipe with a change of
cross section. The component is configured on the basis of diameter 1 at connection end D1
and diameter 2 at connection end D2.
A constant change in cross section with an angle of 4° is assumed for pressure loss
calculations. The component therefore operates either as a nozzle (diameter 1 > diameter 2)
or as a diffuser (diameter 1 < diameter 2) depending on the dimensions.
Display
The symbol changes accordingly (direction of flow from D1 to D2).
Nozzle Diffuser
Parameter

Diameter1 Pipe diameter at connection end D1 mm 200
Diameter2 Pipe diameter at connection end D2 mm 300
Operating window
The following variables are displayed in the operating window:

Pressure loss Δp mbar

Libraries
Nozzle
Symbol
Figure 8-11 Symbol of component type Nozzle
Function
The Nozzle component type is used to simulate the pressure drop of a connection pipe due to
a change in cross section or inlet effects at devices. You can uses this type for connection of
pipelines to the following component types:
● Tanks
● Heat exchanger
● Centrifuge
● Separator
In principle, you can also connect pipelines to the named components without the Nozzle
component type. However, it gives you the option of configuring the pressure drop of the
connection pipe using the Kvs parameter.
The pressure drop calculated in the Nozzle component type depends on:
● Size of the nozzle (kVS value)
● Throughflow (volume flow, medium)
The pressure drop across the nozzle is calculated according to the following formula.

ෙS ෥ P&  VHF 
 
EDU NJ  K 
N96 ˮ

P
Whereby:
Δp = pB − pA the pressure drop across the nozzle in bar

ṁ the flow or mass flow in kg/s
ρ the density of the medium in kg/m3
kVS the flow coefficient of the nozzle in m3/h
Parameters

Kvs Flow coefficient kVS with m /h 3
10.0
kVS ≥ kV0 + 10−6 m3/h

Libraries
Connection example
Figure 8-12 Connection example of component type Nozzle with StorageTankLiquid
Joint – Pipeline node
Symbol
Figure 8-13 Symbol of component type Joint
Function
You can use component type Joint to join the three branches connected to its connectors A, B
and C in a node. An internal node is added to the flow network with the component Joint.
The parameters required for parameter assignment of this node are read from the
corresponding NetParam block of the flow network. As a result, all nodes of this type located in
the same flow network have the same parameter assignment.
Operating window

Pressure p bar
Density r kg/m³
Temperature T °C
JointParam – configurable pipeline node
Symbol
Figure 8-14 Symbol of component type JointParam

Libraries
Function
You can use component type JointParam to join the three branches connected to its
connectors A, B and C in a node. An internal node is added to the flow network with the
component JointParam. Unlike with the component type Joint, each instance of the component
type JointParam is configured individually.
Parameters

sCompressionGas Specific compression module for low- bar/kg 10.0
density media (gases/vapors, ρ < 500 kg/
m3)
sCompressionLiquid Specific compression module for high- bar/kg 100.0
density media (liquids, ρ > 500 kg/m3)
FactorThermalGas Factor for enthalpy balance calculation 1/kg 100.0
of low-density media (gases/
vapors, ρ < 500 kg/m3)
FactorThermalLiquid Factor for the enthalpy balance calcula‐ 1/kg 0.1
tion of high-density media (liq‐
uids, ρ > 500 kg/m3)

PressureInit Initialization value for the pressure in the bar 1.0
node
sEnthalpyInit Initialization value for the specific enthal‐ kJ/kg 100.0
py in the node
TemperatureEnviron‐ Ambient temperature °C 20.0
ment
FactorHeatExchan‐ Factor of proportionality for heat ex‐ kW/K 0.0
geEnv change of the medium in the node with
the environment; no heat exchange oc‐
curs when the value zero is set
Operating window

Pressure p bar
Density r kg/m³
Temperature T °C

Libraries
Orifice
Symbol
Figure 8-15 Symbol of component type Orifice
Function
The Orifice component calculates the pressure loss of an orifice in a pipe. The component is
configured on the basis of the diameter of the pipe DiameterPipe and the diameter of the
orifice DiameterOrifice.
Parameter

DiameterPipe Diameter of the pipe mm 200
DiameterOrifice Diameter of the orifice mm 40
Operating window

Pipe
Symbol
Figure 8-16 Symbol of component type Pipe
Function
The Pipe component calculates the pressure loss in a pipe. The pipe is configured on the basis
of the pipe length l, the pipe diameter d, the number of elbows n, the ratio of the bend radius to
the pipe diameter, and the roughness k. Pressure loss largely depends on the Reynolds
number Re, so you also need to specify the viscosity η of the medium.

Libraries
We differentiate between three main types in the calculation of pipe flow:

● Hydraulically smooth pipes (Re < 65 d/k)
● Transitional range
● Hydraulically rough pipes (Re > 1300 d/k)
Note
The density is only calculated once for each component. Density is therefore calculated as
constant throughout the entire section of pipe. If you want to take account of a change in
density, you will need to divide up the pipe and connect the components one at a time.
Pipe elbows are always assumed to have a 90° bend. If the ratio of bend radius to pipe diameter
RatioRD is greater than 10, elbows are treated like straight pipe. They therefore increase the
length of the pipe Length.
Guide values for roughness k
Material State of the pipes k in mm

Asbestos cement 0.05 – 0.1
Cast iron New 0.25 – 0.5
Slightly rusted 1.0 – 1.5
Corroded 1.5 – 5.0
Copper, brass, bronze, alumi‐ Technically smooth 0.001 – 0.0015
num, glass, plastic
Riveted steel 0.5 – 10
Welded steel New 05 – 0.1
Rusted 0.4
Slightly corroded 1.0 – 1.5
Highly corroded 2.0 – 4.0
Drawn or rolled steel New 0.02 – 0.1
Slightly corroded 0.4
Highly corroded 3.0
Galvanized steel Smooth 0.07
Normally galvanized 0.15
Parameter

Viscosity Viscosity of the medium mPas 0.891
Roughness Roughness mm 0.05
Diameter Diameter of the pipe mm 200
Length Length of the pipe m 1.0
NbrOfElbows Number of elbows – 0
RatioRD Ratio of bend radius to pipe diameter – 5.0

Libraries
Operating window

The extended operating window also displays:

Reynolds number Re –
8.2.5.3 Graphics
Membrane
Symbol
Function
The Membrane component has no function and is used only for graphic display purposes.
Motor
Symbol
Function
The Motor component has no function and is used only for graphic display purposes.

Libraries
MotorThreePhase
Symbol
Function
The MotorThreePhase component has no function and is used only for graphic display
purposes.
8.2.5.4 Heatexchanger
Condenser
Symbol
Figure 8-17 Symbol of component type Condenser
Function
The Condenser component is a model of a heat exchanger with which the connected flow can
be (partially) condensed on the warm side (HIn, HOut). The heat required for condensing is
withdrawn from the flow on the cold side (CIn, COut). The composition of the warm flow
(component of the low boiler) is specified over the z_in input. The vapor fraction (vf =
VaporFraction) as well as the composition in the liquid (x_out) and in the gas phase (y_out) is
calculated and then made available at the output.
The capacitor is parameterized via the heat exchange surface A and the heat transfer
coefficient k. The mixture to be vaporized is defined over the boiling temperature of the low and
high boiler (TS_LB, TS_HB) as well as over the vaporization enthalpies (hv_LB, hv_HB). The
size of the boiling lens can be varied using the S parameter. This means:
● S = 0, maximum size of the boiling lens (see figure)
● S = THB − TLB, no boiling lens (makes no sense physically)

Libraries
6SUHDG6 6SUHDG6 6SUHDG6

7HPSHUDWXUH>r&@
7HPSHUDWXUH>r&@
7HPSHUDWXUH>r&@

0DVVIUDFWLRQKLJKERLOHU 0DVVIUDFWLRQKLJKERLOHU 0DVVIUDFWLRQKLJKERLOHU
>NJNJ@ >NJNJ@ >NJNJ@
Tau line
Boiling point curve
Figure 8-18 Boiling lens as a function of the parameter S (spread)
A pressure dependency of the boiling temperatures of the pure substances is neglected.
NOTICE
The flow direction is permanently set on the warm side. A flow is always only possible from the
input (HIn) to the output (HOut). A flow due to a difference in pressure from the output to the
input is prevented by a modeled check valve.
The flow direction is permanently set on the cold side. A flow is always only possible from the
input (CIn) to the output (COut). A flow due to a difference in pressure from the output to the
A flownet with the medium Ideal gas must be connected at the input on the warm side (HIn).
A flownet with the medium Liquid must be connected at the output on the warm side (HOut).
Parameters

Area Heat exchanger surface m² 10
K Heat transfer coefficient W/(m²K) 800
cP_Wand Heat capacity of the apparatus wall kJ/kg 0.5
(steel)

T_HB Boiling temperature high boiler °C 100
T_LB Boiling temperature low boiler °C 60
S Boiling lens spread – 10
hv_HB High-boiler evaporation enthalpy kJ/kg/K 2300
hc_LB Low-boiler evaporation enthalpy kJ/kg/K 1800
kvs_H Flow coefficient warm side m³/h 10
kvs_C Flow coefficient cold side m³/h 10

Libraries

kv0 Flow coefficient kV m³/h 0.000001
T1 Damping time s 1
T2 Initialization intervals – 50
geoHeight Geodetic height m 0
zH_Init Composition on the warm side for initi‐ kg/kg 0.8
alizing
T_Init Temperature for initializing °C 30
Operating window

Input temperatures T °C
Input concentration low boiler z kg/kg
Output temperatures T °C
Output concentration low boiler x kg/kg
liquid
Output concentration low boiler y kg/kg
gas
Vapor fraction in output vf –
See also
Geodetic height (Page 588)
Evaporator
Symbol
Figure 8-19 Symbol of component type Evaporator

Libraries
Function
The Evaporator component is a model of a heat exchanger with which the connected flow can
be (partially) vaporized on the cold side (CIn, COut). The heat required for vaporizing is
withdrawn from the flow on the warm side (HIn, HOut). The composition of the cold flow
(component of the low boiler) is specified over the z_in input. The vapor fraction (vf =
VaporFraction) as well as the composition in the liquid (x_out) and in the gas phase (y_out) is
calculated and then made available at the output.
The evaporator can be used as evaporator of a column with natural circulation. To do so, the
ThermoSyph connector must be connected to the corresponding connector of the column. The
necessary information (heat flow, vapor fraction, compositions, kVS value of the cold side at the
interpolation point) is exchanged with the column for the natural circulation via this connector.
For the natural circulation, the current kVS value on the cold side of the evaporator is adjusted
so that the mass flow of the natural circulation is set depending on the differences in density.
The evaporator is parameterized via the heat exchange surface and the heat transfer
coefficient. The mixture to be vaporized is defined over the boiling temperature of the low and
high boiler (TS_LB, TS_HB) as well as over their vaporization enthalpies (hv_LB, hv_HB). The
size of the boiling lens can be varied using the S parameter. This means:
● S = 0, maximum size of the boiling lens (see figure).

7HPSHUDWXUH>r&@
7HPSHUDWXUH>r&@
7HPSHUDWXUH>r&@

Tau line
Boiling point curve
A pressure dependency of the boiling temperatures of the pure substances is neglected.
NOTICE
The flow direction is permanently set on the cold side. A flow is always only possible from the
input (CIn) to the output (COut). A flow due to a difference in pressure from the output to the
The flow direction is permanently set on the warm side. A flow is always only possible from the
input (HIn) to the output (HOut). A flow due to a difference in pressure from the output to the
A flownet with the medium Liquid must be connected at the input on the cold side (CIn). A
flownet with the medium Ideal gas must be connected at the output on the cold side (COut).

Libraries
Parameter

cP_Wand Heat capacity of the apparatus wall kJ/kg 0.5
(steel)

kvs_H Flow coefficient warm side m³/h 10
kvs_C Flow coefficient cold side m³/h 10
kv0 Flow coefficient kV m³/h 0.000001
T1 Damping time s 1
T2 Initialization intervals – 50
geoHeight Geodetic height m 0
zH_Init Composition on the warm side for initi‐ kg/kg 0.2
alizing
T_Init Temperature for initializing °C 60
Operating window

Input temperatures T °C
Input concentration low boiler z kg/kg
Output temperatures T °C
Output concentration low boiler x kg/kg
liquid
Output concentration low boiler y kg/kg
gas
Vapor fraction in output vf –

Libraries
ElectricHeatExchanger – Electrically heated heat exchanger
Symbol
Figure 8-21 Symbol of component type ElectricHeatExchanger
Function
The ElectricHeatExchanger component type is used for simulation of an electrical heater in the
flow network. The electrical heating power Pel in kW is specified with the connector P_EL.
It is assumed that the supplied electrical energy Pel is completely converted into heat. There are
no losses.
GK &
4
GW ˮ9
The ElectricHeatExchanger component is inserted in a flow network using the connectors A
and B. Flows can enter this component type from both ends.
The size of the heat exchanger can be configured with the Volume parameter. The result is a
delayed temperature change at the output side of the medium when the heating power is
switched on or off.
The volume is always considered to be fully filled, which means that mass is neither added nor
removed.
The pressure drop across the component is set with the Kvs parameter.
To prevent undesirable states of the simulation, the maximum enthalpy of the outflowing
medium can be specified with the MaxEnthalpy parameter.
Note
You can also use this component for cooling by specifying a negative heating power Pel at
the P_EL input.
When the ElectricHeatExchanger is in heating mode, this is indicated by a change of color in

the symbol of the ElectricHeatExchanger component.
ElectricHeatExchanger without heating power ElectricHeatExchanger with heating power

Libraries
NOTICE
The ElectricHeatExchanger calculates only heat transfers and not related density changes. If
the ElectricHeatExchanger is being operated in a water-steam flow network, these density
changes are only calculated in the next flowed-through node.
For this reason, a measuring point in the same branch positioned directly after
the ElectricHeatExchanger still operates with the unchanged density. The temperature T = f(p,
h) calculated within this measuring point is thus not exact.
For an exact calculation, a node is needed between ElectricHeatExchanger and the
measuring point.
Parameters

Volume Storage volume of the electrical heat ex‐ m 3
0.1
changer
Kvs Characteristic value for calculation of the m3/h 360.0
pressure drop
InitialEnthalpy Initialization enthalpy of the medium kJ/kg 80.0
MaxEnthalpy Maximum enthalpy of the medium kJ/kg 3000.0
geoHeight Geodetic height; can be changed online m 0.0
See also
HeatExchangerGeneral
Symbol
Figure 8-22 Symbol of component type HeatExchangerGeneral

Libraries
Function
The HeatExchangerGeneral component is a model of a general heat exchanger. Heat is
exchanged between the product side (PS) and the service side (SS). The heat exchanger is
configured on the basis of the heat exchanger area, the heat transfer coefficient and the
minimum temperature difference between the product and service side. Heat transferred is
calculated using the logarithmic mean temperature difference. If the temperature difference is
below the minimum, the flow is adjusted to comply with the minimum temperature difference.
The two mediums are connected at connections P1 and P2 on the process side and
connections S1 and S2 at the service side. The heat exchanger operates as either a
countercurrent or parallel-flow exchanger (see table).
Process side (PS)

Service side (SS) 1→2 2→1
1→2 Countercurrent Parallel flow
2→1 Parallel flow Countercurrent
NOTICE
The model is not suitable for calculating the phase change at the product or service side when
the medium water/steam is connected. Deviations can occur in the calculation of the heat flow
and therefore in outlet temperatures. There are therefore three ranges for component
calculation:
● Supercooled liquid – boiling liquid:
● Boiling liquid – saturated steam
● Saturated steam – superheated steam
Display
During simulation, the direct of flow is displayed in color in the symbol of the component. This
direction is indicated by the heat flow sign in the heat exchanger calculation.
No heat transfer Heat transfer Heat transfer

PS → SS SS → PS
Product side cooling Product side heating
If the calculated heat flow is limited by a phase change, the lines will be gray:
If an error occurs in the calculation of the heat flow, the lines will turn red:

Libraries
This is not a problem if the symbol only appears briefly, for example during a load change.
However, if the problem persists over a longer period of time, check the set parameters or the
corresponding load points.
Parameter

Evaporation/condensation frequently accounts for a large proportion of the heat flow. When
you select water/steam as the medium, you can force calculation of condensation/evaporation
with the options PhaseChangePS (for the process side) and PhaseChangeSS (for the service
side). This runs a calculation in the wet steam area (area 2). Any heat from superheated steam
and supercooled liquid is disregarded.
For the calculation to be run, the input temperatures at the heat exchanger must meet the
physical requirements. If the option is not selected, the calculation only runs until the wet steam
i.e. saturated steam or saturated liquid range is reached. There is no phase change.

DTmin Minimum temperature difference °C 10
KvsPS Process flow coefficient kVS m³/h 100
KvsSS Service flow coefficient kVS m³/h 100
PhaseChangePS Forced calculation in wet steam range for – False
process side (only relevant when medi‐
um is water/steam)
PhaseChangeSS Forced calculation in the wet steam – False
range for service side (only relevant
when medium is water/steam)
Operating window

Input temperatures T_in °C
Output temperatures T_out °C
Heat flow (from service to proc‐ Q kW
ess side)
Countercurrent mode Countercurrent –

Libraries
See also
HeatExchangerShellTube – Shell and tube heat exchanger
Symbol
Figure 8-23 Symbol of component type HeatExchangerShellTube
Function
The HeatExchangerShellTube component is the model of a single-pass counter-flow shell and
tube heat exchanger. The component is therefore configured using corresponding geometric
data.
Both media are routed on the tube side via the connectors TS_IN and TS_OUT, and on the shell
side via the connectors SS_IN and SS_OUT.
If the flow direction is reversed on one side, the heat exchanger works accordingly as a parallel-
flow heat exchanger.
A total volume for the tube inside and for the shell side is calculated based on the configured
geometric data. The transfer area is the sum of the transfer areas of the individual tubes.
The figure below therefore shows the resulting single-tube model.
① Tube-side space
② Tube
③ Shell-side space
Figure 8-24 Structure of the single-tube model in component type HeatExchangerShellTube
This model is segmented to simplify the calculation. The number of segments is specified with
the NbrOfSegments parameter. Perfect mixing of the respective medium is assumed within a
segment. This approach produces a quantization error.
The number of segments can be selected between 2 and 20.

Libraries
The heat transfers between the tube interior, tube material and shell space can be set using the
HTC_TS (tube space → tube) and HTC_SS (tube → shell space).
Heat losses to the surrounding area over the shell can be configured with the HTC_Shell
parameter. The heat loss is calculated depending on the ambient temperature
(AmbientTemperature input).
The "stable condition" state in the operating window can no longer be achieved in this case
because the heat flow Q (SS-Tube) also includes the heat losses over the shell.
Note
Select the optimal number of segments.
A larger number of segments reduces the risk of a discretization error.
However, too many segments can increase the computational load and cause instabilities.
In the unstable state, the heat exchanger displays the following symbol:
Figure 8-25 Unstable states in HeatExchangerShellTube, autocorrection is active
This is not a problem if the symbol only appears briefly, e.g. during a load change. However, if
the problem persists over a longer period of time, check the set parameters or the
corresponding load points. You increase stability, for example, by reducing the number of
segments or the mass flow.
The type of medium on the shell or tube side results from the connection of the heat exchanger
in the flow network and does not have to be configured separately.
The heat capacity of the metal (tubes and shell) is permanently set at 0.46 kJ/(kg⋅K).
NOTICE
The HeatExchangerShellTube calculates only heat transfers and not related density changes.
If the HeatExchangerShellTube is being operated in a water-steam flow network, these
density changes are only calculated in the next flowed-through node.
For this reason, a measuring point in the same branch positioned directly after
the HeatExchangerShellTube still operates with the unchanged density. The
temperature T = f(p, h) calculated within this measuring point is thus not exact.
For an exact calculation, a node is needed between HeatExchangerShellTube and the
measuring point.
Parameters

NbrOfSegments Number of segments of the heat ex‐ – 6
changer

Libraries

D_Tube Outside tube diameter of the individual m 0.016
tube
L_Tube Length of the tube bundle m 2.0
N_Tube Number of tubes – 150
S_Tube Wall thickness of the tubes m 0.0022
Rho_Tube Density of tubes kg/m3 7800.0
KvsSS Flow coefficient on shell side kVS m /h3
100.0
KvsTS Flow coefficient on tube side kVS m3/h 100.0
HTC_TS Heat transfer coefficient on the tube in‐ – 1.0
side
HTC_SS Heat transfer coefficient on the tube out‐ – 1.0
side
HTC_Shell Heat transfer coefficient on the shell side – 0.0
Shell_Volume_Factor Factor for calculation of the shell volume – 3.0
depending on the tube
volume VShell = Shell_Volume_Fac‐
tor ⋅ VTube
InitialEnthTS Initialization enthalpy of the medium in kJ/kg 120.0
the tube space
InitialEnthSS Initialization enthalpy of the medium in kJ/kg 30.0
the shell space
Operating window
Variable Description Unit

Massflow SS Mass flow at the shell side of the kg/s
heat exchanger
DeltaT SS Temperature change of the me‐ K
dium between entry and exit at
the shell side
Massflow TS Mass flow at the tube side of the kg/s
heat exchanger
DeltaT TS Temperature change of the me‐ K
dium between entry and exit at
the tube side
Q (Tube->TS) Heat flow from tube to medium in kW
the tube space
Q (SS->Tube) Heat flow from medium in shell kW
space to tube and shell
A filled box ("stable condition") indicates that a constant throughflow with stable heat transfer
has been reached.

Libraries
Extended operating window

The currently calculated values (temperatures in the shell space, in the tube space and of the
tubes) of the individual segments are displayed in the extended operating window. In addition,
the characteristics of the heat exchanger calculated internally from the configured geometric
data are displayed.
The upper part displays the segments with the corresponding temperatures in the tube space
(left), shell space (right) and tube material (center). Segments that are not in use are shown as
inactive. Six (6) segments are used in the example; you can use a maximum of 20 segments.
The bottom part of the extended operating window shows the characteristics calculated from
the configured geometric data.
See also
HeatPipe – Electrically heated pipe
Symbol
Figure 8-26 Symbol of component type HeatPipe
Function
The HeatPipe component type is used for simulation of an electrically heated pipe. The
electrical heating power Pel in kW is specified with the connector P_EL.
It is assumed that the supplied electrical energy P_EL is completely converted into heat. There
are no losses.
GK &
4
GW ˮ9
The HeatPipe component is inserted in a flow network using the connectors A and B. Flows can
enter this component type from both ends.
You can configure the size of the heated pipe using the Volume parameter. The result is a
delayed temperature change at the output side of the medium when the heating power is
switched on or off. However, the pipe volume is considered to be perfectly mixed, so that the
temperature throughout the entire pipe volume is uniform and is slowly increased or decreased
according to the temperature change.
The volume is always considered to be fully filled, which means that mass is neither added nor
removed.
The pressure drop across the component is set with the Kvs parameter.

Libraries
To prevent undesirable simulation states, you can specify the maximum possible enthalpy of
the outflowing medium using the MaxEnthalpy parameter.
Note
You can also use this component for cooling by specifying a negative heating power Pel at
the P_EL input.
When heating mode is active, this is indicated by a red heating coil in the symbol of the
HeatPipe component.
HeatPipe without heating power HeatPipe with heating power
NOTICE
The HeatPipe component calculates only heat transfers and not related density changes. If
the HeatPipe is being operated in a water-steam flow network, these density changes are only
calculated in the next flowed-through node.
For this reason, a measuring point in the same branch positioned directly after the HeatPipe
still operates with the unchanged density. The temperature T = f(p, h) calculated within this
measuring point is thus not exact.
For an exact calculation, a node is needed between HeatPipe and the measuring point.
Parameters

Volume Storage volume of the heat pipe m3 0.1
Kvs Flow coefficient for calculation of the m /h
3
360.0
pressure drop
InitialEnthalpy Initialization enthalpy of the medium kJ/kg 80.0
MaxEnthalpy Maximum enthalpy of the medium kJ/kg 3000.0


Libraries
8.2.5.5 Measurements
DifferencePressureIndicator – Differential pressure indicator
Symbol
Figure 8-27 Symbol of component type DifferencePressureIndicator
Function
The DifferencePressureIndicator component type displays the difference of the pressures
specified using its inputs Measure1 and Measure2.
You can specify a high or low limit for the measured value with the SwitchValue_Plus or
SwitchValue_Minus parameter. You can enable limit monitoring with the Use_Plus and
Use_Minus switches. A green binary indicator in the symbol shows that the high or low limit has
been reached.
You can set the unit for the analog output and the switching limits with the UoM parameter.
If multiple switch values are required, then you must also use multiple measuring points.
Alternatively, you can configure additional binary values using logic functions.
For additional linking of measured values, you can make the following outputs of the
component visible:
● AOUT
Connection of the analog value with the unit set with parameter UoM
● BOUT_PLUS
Connection of the binary value of the high limit
● BOUT_MINUS
Connection of the binary value of the low limit
The state of these switch values is displayed dynamically in the graphic symbol:
① Display of the high limit switch value state

② Display of the low limit switch value state
Figure 8-28 Switch values in the graphic symbol of component type DifferencePressureIndicator

Libraries
Parameters

ICA_Code MSR code, type of measurement – PDI
Use_Plus Activation of the high limit – False
SwitchValue_Plus Switch value for high limit see UoM 0.0
Use_Minus Activation of the low limit – False
SwitchValue_Minus Switch value for low limit see UoM 0.0
UoM Returns the measured value in the selec‐ bar
ted unit. Switch values are also in the se‐
lected unit. The following units are avail‐
able: atm, bar, inHg, inWC, kPa, mbar,
mmHg, MPa, mWS, Pa, psi, Torr
Operating window
The following variable is displayed in the operating window:

Pressure differential of the meas‐ Δp bar
uring inputs mbar
kPa
Pa
psi
DriveIndicator
Symbol
Figure 8-29 Symbol of component type DriveIndicator
Function
The DriveIndicator component type only has graphic functions. It is used to illustrate the signal
path for the control of drives.
If necessary, you can also use this component directly for controlling drives. To do so, you
connect the component to the actuator-sensor level using the DI input. The DO output is then
connected, for example, to the controlling input of the valve or a pump.

Libraries
Parameter

ICA_Code MSR code – YS
FlowIndicator – Flow indicator
Symbol
Figure 8-30 Symbol of component type FlowIndicator
Function
The FlowIndicator component type displays the flow specified using its Measure input.
Use_Minus switches. A green binary indicator in the symbol shows that the corresponding
switch value has been reached.
component visible:
● AOUT
● BOUT_Plus
● BOUT_Minus

Figure 8-31 Switch values in the graphic symbol of component type FlowIndicator

Libraries
Parameters

ICA_Code MSR code, type of measurement – FI
Use_Plus Activation of the high limit see UoM False
SwitchValue_Plus Switch value for high limit – 0.0
Use_Minus Activation of the low limit see UoM False
SwitchValue_Minus Switch value for low limit – 0.0
UoM Returns the measured value in the selec‐ – kg/s
able: g, kg, l, lb, m³, ml, t per s, min, h, d
Operating window

Mass flow P
& kg/s
kg/h
t/h
Volumetric flow m3/h
9&
l/h
LevelIndicator – Level indicator
Symbol
Figure 8-32 Symbol of component type LevelIndicator
Function
The LevelIndicator component type displays the level specified using its Measure input.
Use_Minus switches. A green binary indicator in the symbol shows that the high or low switch
value has been reached.

Libraries
component visible:
● AOUT
Connection of the analog value
● BOUT_Plus
● BOUTMinus

Figure 8-33 Switch values in the graphic symbol of component type LevelIndicator
Parameters

ICA_Code MSR code, type of measurement – LI
UoM Returns the measured value in the selec‐ m
able: ft, in, m, mm, %
Operating window

Fill level l m
%
NozzleMeasurement
Symbol

Libraries
Figure 8-34 Symbol of component type NozzleMeasurement
Function
The NozzleMeasurement component is used for connecting measuring points
(e.g. LevelIndicator or TemperatureIndicator) to another component (e.g. StorageTankLiquid
or PressureStrainer).
The component transmits the values pending at input A to the output B. The values remain
unchanged
PipeMeasure – Pipe measuring point
Symbol
① Measure
Figure 8-35 Symbol of component type PipeMeasure
Function
The PipeMeasure component type forms a measuring point in the tube. You insert it with its
connectors A and B at the desired measuring point in the flow network.
The following measured variables are output via connector Measure:
● Absolute value |ṁ| of the flow
● Pressure pA at connector A
● Temperature T
All other signals of connector Measure are not set in this component.
Note
The measuring procedures for the different variables are not simulated with suitable models.
Only the quantities calculated in the flow network solver are output.
The direction of the media flow is indicated by an arrow in the symbol during active simulation
(see figure).
P
& ! P
&
Figure 8-36 Media flow indicator of the component type PipeMeasure

Libraries
Parameter

geoHeight Height of the measuring point m 0
Operating window

Pressure p bar
Mass flow P
& kg/s
Temperature T °C
The following variables are displayed in the extended operating window:

Enthalpy h kJ/kg
Density r kg/m³
See also
PressureIndicator – Pressure indicator
Symbol
Figure 8-37 Symbol of component type PressureIndicator
Function
The PressureIndicator component type displays the pressure value specified using its Measure
input.

Libraries
component visible:
● AOUT
● BOUT_Plus
● BOUT_Minus

Figure 8-38 Switch values in the graphic symbol of component type PressureIndicator
Parameters

ICA_Code MSR code, type of measurement – PI
UoM Returns the measured value in the selec‐ bar
able: atm, bar, inHg, inWC, kPa, mbar,
mmHg, MPa, mWS, Pa, psi, Torr
Operating window

Pressure p bar
mbar
kPa
Pa
psi

Libraries
TemperatureIndicator – Temperature indicator
Symbol
Figure 8-39 Symbol of component type TemperatureIndicator
Function
The TemperatureIndicator component type displays the temperature specified using
its Measure input.
component visible:
● AOUT
● BOUT_Plus
● BOUT_Minus
① Display of the switch value state

② Display of the switch value state
Figure 8-40 Switch values in the graphic symbol of component type TemperatureIndicator
Parameters

ICA_Code MSR code, type of measurement – TI
Use_Minus Activation of the low limit – False

Libraries

UoM Returns the measured value in the selec‐ °C
able: °C, °F, K
Operating window

Temperature T °C
°F
K
WeightIndicator – Weight indicator
Symbol
Figure 8-41 Symbol of component type WeightIndicator
Function
The WeightIndicator component type displays the weight specified using its Measure input.
component visible:
● AOUT
● BOUT_Plus
● BOUT_Minus

Libraries

Figure 8-42 Switch values in the graphic symbol of component type WeightIndicator
Parameters

ICA_Code MSR code, type of measurement – TI
UseMinus Activation of the low limit – False
UoM Returns the measured value in the selec‐ – kg
able: g, kg, lb, t
Operating window

Weight m kg
8.2.5.6 Mixing apparatuses
Mixer
Symbol
Figure 8-43 Symbol of component type Mixer
Function
The mixer is used to add a partial mass flow C (e.g. of a solid matter mass fraction or of a liquid
mass fraction) to a main flow AB.

Libraries
The mass fraction of the fed partial mass flow in the main flow is calculated in the mixer. This
can be useful, for example, in a circulating circuit when a second substance is added (e.g.
concentration of an acid).
The flow network of the fed-in partial mass flow C is not connected topologically to the flow
network of the main mass flow AB. The change of the material properties (e.g. heat capacity)
of the exiting main flow due to addition of partial flow C is disregarded.
If solid matter is added, it is handled like a liquid. A pressure difference is therefore necessary
for a solid matter transport The reason being is that the flow network in SIMIT generally only
permits the transport of gases and liquids. Any conveying equipment is replaced with
equivalent connections (consisting of pumps, valves, sources and sinks).
The main mass flow can flow in both directions. The fed partial mass flow always flows into the
mixer. For this to work, a higher pressure is required in the flow network of the partial mass flow
than in the main mass flow.
6XSSOLHGSDUWLDOPDVV 6XSSOLHGSDUWLDOPDVV
IORZ IORZ
0DLQIORZ 0DLQIORZ
Figure 8-44 Possible flows in component type Mixer
The main flow connectors A and B are designed identically. The partial mass flow to be added
is always fed through the connector C.
You can use the Mixer component to specify a mass fraction for the partial masses for each
individual substance flow connector at the inputs RateA, RateB or RateC.
If none of the three connectors is specified (default setting), the following applies:
● 0 % mass fraction in the main flow entry
● 0 % mass fraction in the partial mass flow entry
The mass fraction of the total flow exiting at A or B is calculated and displayed at the output
Rate.
A pressure drop is calculated for the main mass flow. This pressure drop depends on:
● Flow coefficient of the mixer (kVS value)
The pressure drop above the mixer is calculated using the formula below:

 
EDU NJ  K 
N96 ˮ


Libraries
Whereby:
Δp = pB – pA the pressure drop across the mixer in bar

kVS the flow coefficient of the mixer in m3/h
NOTICE
The flow network of the feed-in mass flow at connector C is terminated in the component with
a mass flow source.
Because of this mass flow source, the pressure reached at the edge of the flow network is
dependent on the fed mass flow and the pressure drop in the feeding branch. Pressure drops
that are too high in the feeding branch (for example too low kVS values in the main flow) can
result in impossible physical states.
Parameters

Kvs Flow coefficient of the mixer kVS with m /h
3
10.0
kVS ≥ 10−6 m3/h
Operating window
The following variables for the following mass flows are displayed in the operating window:
● Incoming main mass flow A or B
● Added mass flow C
● Outgoing total mass flow A or B

Mass fraction w %
Mass flow P
& kg/s
See also

Libraries
8.2.5.7 Pump
Compressor
Symbol
Symbol of component type Compressor
Function
The Compressor component type calculates the pressure increase in gas flowing through a
compressor as a function of the flow rate and speed using the following formula:

ෙ3 Q ෙ3 ෙ3 ෥ ෙ3 9&
IRU 9& !
9&
ΔP Current pressure increase in the compressor [bar]
ΔP* Rated pressure increase in the compressor at the design point [bar]
ΔP0 Zero flow head of the compressor [bar]
n Normalized current speed [0..1]
v̇ Current flow rate in the compressor [Nm³/s]
v̇* Rated flow rate in the compressor at the design point [Nm³/s]
For the flow rate v̇, the reference direction is defined from connector A to connector B; i.e. for
a flow rate in the reference direction, v̇ > 0.
The speed is specified as a percentage value at the Speed input. The speed value is limited to
the range 0 ≤ N ≤ 100 %. This means n = n = N / 100 % and thus 0 ≤ n ≤ 1. This speed value
can be linked, for example, over an I/O level as described in Coupling simulation model with
actuator/sensor level (Page 601) to a control technology using the drives from the SIMIT basic
library.
The following figure illustrates the above quadratic relationship between pressure increase and
flow rate during compressor operation in the standard range, which means for v̇ > 0, ΔP > 0.

Libraries
ෙ3

ෙ3
Q
3
Q ෙ
Q9& 9& 9&
① Compressor limit
Qualitative compressor characteristic

An isentropic state change is assumed for the temperature increase resulting from
compression of the gas:
.෥
 3%  .
7% 7$  
 3$ 
There is no pressure increase following a flow reversal (v̇ < 0). The compressor behaves like
a check valve in this case. You set the throttle effect in this case using parameter Kv0.
Note
The Compressor component only compresses gases. For liquids and water, the pump only acts
as a flow resistor with the resistance coefficient Kv0. Water/steam is compressed with a liquid
proportion of up to 5 Ma.%.
Parameters

ZeroFlowHead Zero flow head ΔP0, ΔP0 > ΔP* bar 5
NominalPressure Rated pressure ΔP*; ΔP* > 0 bar 4
NominalVolumeflow Rated mass flow v̇*, v̇* > 0 Nm³/s 1

Libraries
ෙ3
ෙ3
ෙ3
9& 9&
ΔP0 Zero flow head [bar]

ΔP* Rated pressure [bar]
v̇* Rated volumetric flow [kg/s]
Graphic display of the parameters of the Compressor component type

Kv0 Flow coefficient kv m³/h 0.001
Pmin Minimum pressure that can be gener‐ bar 0.01
ated at the suction side
InitialEnth Enthalpy of the gases upon initialization kJ/kg 100
geoHeight Geodetic height; can be changed on‐ m 0.0
line
The operating state in the compressor symbol is displayed as follows:
ṁ>0 ṁ<0 n=0
Symbol display of the compressor operating state
Operating window
You switch between automated control (control using the actuator-sensor level) and manual
control in the operating window. The default is always automated control. The following
variables are displayed in the operating window:

Local control – –
"Slider" – %

Libraries
The compressor characteristic curve is displayed graphically in the extended operating window
of the Compressor component type. The following variables are also displayed:

Pressure increase ∆P bar
Flow rate v̇ Nm³/s
Nominal pressure Ordinate bar
Rated volumetric flow Abscissa Nm³/s
See also
Pump
Symbol
① Speed
Figure 8-45 Symbol of component type Pump
Function
The Pump component type calculates the pressure increase through a pump as a function of
flow rate and speed according to the following formula:
Q ෙS ෙS ෥ ෙS
P
&
ෙS IRU P
& !
P&
Δp Current pressure increase of the pump [bar]
Δp* Rated pressure increase of the pump at the design point [bar]
Δp0 Zero flow head of the pump [bar]
n Normalized current speed [0..1]
ṁ Current flow rate of the pump [kg/s]
ṁ* Rated flow rate of the pump at the design point [bar]
For the flow rate ṁ, the reference direction is defined from connector A to connector B; for a flow
rate in reference direction, ṁ > 0.
The speed is defined as percentage at the Speed input. The speed value is limited to the range
0 ≤ N ≤ 100 %. This means n = n = N / 100 % and thus 0 ≤ n ≤ 1. This speed value can, for
example, be connected over its I/O level as described in Coupling simulation model with

Libraries
actuator/sensor level (Page 601) to a control technology using the drives from the SIMIT basic
library.
The following figure illustrates the above-defined quadratic relationship between pressure
increase and flow rate during pump operation in the standard range, which means for ṁ > 0,
Δp > 0, in the figure below.
3UHVVXUHLQFUHDVH
ෙ3
ෙ3
& ෙ3
P
Q
Q ෙ3
)ORZUDWH
P&
QP
& P
&
Figure 8-46 Qualitative pump characteristic
There is no pressure increase following a flow reversal (ṁ < 0). The pump behaves like a check
valve in this case. You set the throttle effect in this case using parameter Kv0.
Parameters

ZeroFlowHead Zero flow head Δp0, Δp0 > Δp*; can be bar 5.0
changed online
NominalPressure Rated pressure Δp*; Δp* > 0; modifiable bar 4.0
online
NominalMassflow Rated mass flow ṁ*, ṁ* > 0; modifiable kg/s 1.0
online
The determining variables of the pump characteristic are set with parameters:
ෙ3
ෙ3
ෙ3
&
P P
&
Δp0 Zero flow head [bar]

Δ p* Rated pressure [bar]
ṁ* Rated mass flow [kg/s]
Figure 8-47 Graphic display of the parameters of component type Pump

Libraries

Kv0 Pump throttle effect if flow is reversed m /h
3
0.001
The operating state in the pump symbol is displayed as follows (see figure):
P
& P
& ! Q ෙ3
Figure 8-48 Display of the operating state of the pump at the symbol
Operating window
You switch between automated control (control using the actuator-sensor level) and manual
control in the operating window. The default is always automated control.
For manual control, you specify the pump speed as a percentage using a slider.
The pump characteristic is displayed graphically in the extended operating window. The
characteristic values of the characteristic curve and the current operating point are indicated via
digital displays. In addition, the current pressure increase Δp and the flow rate ṁ are displayed.
See also
8.2.5.8 Separators
Centrifuge
Symbol
Figure 8-49 Symbol of component type Centrifuge
Function
The component type Centrifuge is used to separate a mixture (suspension or emulsion)
consisting of two substances into its individual components. This component cannot be used
to separate gas mixtures.

Libraries
Separation in a centrifuge is the result of inertia during operation of the centrifuge (rotation of
the centrifuge chamber). Particles with greater density are propelled to the outside or solid
matter is retained due to installed parts (e.g. screen or filter cloth).
In this model, the separation is simulated by defining a separable mixture component and a non-
separable mixture component. The sum of both fractions is 100%. Different densities are
ignored during the separation.
The part that is propelled to the outside is referred to as filtrate below (separable mixture
component). The part that remains in the centrifuge chamber is referred to as filter cake below
(non-separable mixture component).
The filter cake can be dissolved again and washed out by adding water. By adding pressurized
gas, the liquid can be forced out of the filter cake.
Circuit
The centrifuge has two types of connectors for material flows and thus for connection of
pipelines:
● N1 ... Nn – general connecting pipes
These connection points are used to fill and empty the centrifuge and as gas connections.
All connectors of the vector N1..Nn are initially equal and can be used for all connection
types (water/steam, ideal gas, liquid).
● F1 … Fn – Filtrate drain
These connection points are a special case. The filtrate exits the system through these
connections. All other connections are made using the vector N1..Nn described above.
The number of connection points depends on the system to be simulated and is specified with
the parameters NbrOfInletsOutlets for the connectors N1 ... Nn and NbrOfFiltrateOutlets for the
connectors F1 ... Fn.
The material medium in the neighboring flow networks is defined over the NetParam
component.
The minimum connection is:
● Emulsion/suspension inflow (Nn)
● Filter cake discharge (mixture fraction with low density or held back in the centrifuge
chamber) (Nn)
● Filtrate discharge (mixture fraction expelled from the centrifuge chamber) (Fn)
Possible additional connections include:
● Inflow/discharge of cleansing agents
● Inflow/discharge of washing solutions
● Gas inflow and gas emission
● Ventilation
For the water/steam connector type, the incoming medium is mixed internally in the tank with
a liquid medium. The inflowing mass and enthalpy is taken into account but a corresponding
phase equilibrium does not form in the model. Incoming steam is added to the liquid phase in
the mass balance and does not contribute to building the pressure in the gas phase. Water is
handled in the mixture like a liquid medium.

Libraries
If water/steam is used as a discharge medium, it exits the centrifuge at the output with the
mixture enthalpy of the liquid phase. All other calculations within this flow network are made
using the properties of water/steam (e.g. heat capacity).
Due to the lack of steam properties, steam sterilization, for example, is currently not possible
even at standstill.
Parameter ConnectorHeight
For each of the connection points N1..Nn and F1..Fn you need the installation height of the
connecting pipe on the centrifuge (parameter ConnectorHeight for connectors N1..Nn
or ConnectorHeightF for connectors F1..Fn). The information is entered in meters. The default
is 0 m and thus at the bottom of the centrifuge. Negative values are permitted for simulation of
connectors at a lower position.
Input vector ScreeningRate

You can use the input vector ScreeningRate to specify the fraction of the non-separable mixture
component of the inflowing medium, in percent, for each of the connectors N1..Nn. This will
define the fraction remaining after separation for the emulsion or suspension inflow.
Connectors without separation fractions (e.g. detergents) are given the default value "0". Gas
connectors are also assigned the value "0".
The values defined here only apply to incoming substance flows. All outgoing substance flows
exit with the non-separable mixture component of the total mass Rate currently stored in the
centrifuge. This component is continuously calculated from the incoming and outgoing mass
flows and the respective ScreeningRate.
In the case of outgoing mass flows, any ScreeningRate that may have been entered is not
evaluated.
The filtrate outflows F1..Fn are always pure filtrate (i.e. Rate = 0.0). This means there is no
connector ScreeningRate for filtrate connector F1..Fn.
The input vector ScreeningRate is not visible by default.
Alternatively, you can also manually set the non-separable mixture component Rate of the filled
centrifuge after the filling operation via the operating window.
Balance calculation of the liquid phase

All defined inputs in the connection vectors N1 .. Nn and F1..Fn must also be connected. None
of these connectors may remain open during simulation because this will create open flow
networks. This will result in an error message during code generation.
The liquid phase is balanced with respect to the inflowing and outflowing masses (mLiquid) and
enthalpies (hLiquid). In addition, a mass balance of the non-separable mixture component
(mScreening) is carried out.
Q
GP/LTXLG
GW ෤ P& /LTXLGL
L

Libraries
Q
GP6FUHHQLQJ
GW ෤ P& 6FUHHQLQJL
L
GK/LTXLG  Q 
 ෤ P
& /LTXLGL K/LTXLGL ෤ 4& 
GW P/LTXLG  L 
K/LTXLG
7/LTXLG
F3
Gas balance calculation

If at least one gas connector is connected, a corresponding gas pressure is also calculated. In
this case, a closed and thus pressure-tight centrifuge is assumed. The gas pressure is changed
by adding or removing gas or by changing the gas volume, e.g. by filling the tank. The
calculated gas pressure also acts on the liquid connectors.
The gas balancing applies exclusively to externally added (inert) gases. Steam pressures from
solvents, for example, are not taken into consideration.
The incoming and outgoing masses (mGas) and enthalpies (hGas) are balanced within the gas-
filled space:
Q
GP*DV
GW ෤ P& *DVL
L
GK*DV  Q 
 ෤ P
& *DVL K*DVL ෤ 4& 
GW P*DV  L 
The gas pressure is then calculated according to the state equation of ideal gases:
P*DV 56 7*DV
S*DV
9*DV
If a gas connector is not connected, the gas balance calculation does not take place. In this
case, the gas pressure is replaced with the atmospheric pressure.
The component type Centrifuge has different symbols for operation with and without gas
pressure.
Centrifuge without gas pressure Centrifuge with gas pressure

Libraries
A distinction is not made between suspension and emulsion within the component type. In case
of a suspension, the internal calculation still takes place with two liquids. The corresponding
removal of the filter cake of a suspension is thus also as a "liquid medium". Devices used for
output (scrapers, screw conveyors, or similar) must therefore be replaced with valves and
pumps in the model.
Operating modes of the centrifuge

The centrifuge is designed for continuous as well as intermittent operation.
Operation of the centrifuge is started with a corresponding standardized angular velocity
(0% … 100%) at the Omega input. Filtrate can only exit the centrifuge when the corresponding
filtrate drain is open. The increase in angular velocity results in an increase of the filtrate
discharge pressure. The discharge pressure is calculated in a simplified way from the radius of
the centrifuge (based on geometric data) and the angular velocity.
Filtrate can still exit from a stationary centrifuge because no distinction is made here between
filtrate and, for example, cleaner. If this is to be prevented, an additional valve, for example, can
be added to the model whose position is changed depending on the speed.
The absolute value of the filtrate mass flow can be set by means of kV values in the filtrate drain
(e.g. valve or nozzle).
Overwriting state variables

By using the operating window of the component, the operator can set the following state
variables to any (permissible) value during simulation:
● Stored mass / fill level
● Temperature
● Non-separable mass fraction Rate
For this, the operator must first enter the setpoint in the corresponding digital input SetValues
and apply it with the "Set" button. The state of the total stored mass can be specified using the
value MassTotal as well as using the fill level (Level).
By manipulating state variables in this way, you can, for example, speed up heating processes
or filling processes. As the operator, you can also empty the centrifuge, for example, to return
to an earlier step in a step sequence.
Parameters

Volume Filling volume of the centrifuge m 3
1.0
Height Height of the filling volume of the centri‐ m 1.0
fuge
NbrOfInletsOutlets Number of general flow network connec‐ – 2
tors
NbrOfFiltrateOutlets Number of filtrate connectors – 1
NbrOfMeasurements Number of measuring point connectors – 1

Libraries

MeasurementHeight Installation height of the measuring point m 0.0
[Nr] connectors
ConnectorHeight [Nr] Installation height of the general flow net‐ m 0.0
work connectors
ConnectorHeightF [Nr] Installation height of the filtrate connec‐ m 0.0
tors

PressureOutside Ambient pressure bar 1.0
LevelInit Initialization value for fill level of centri‐ % 3.0
fuge
TemperatureInit Initialization value for suspension tem‐ °C 20.0
perature
PressureInit Initialization value for pressure in the bar 1.0
case of a gas pressure centrifuge
InitScreeningRateTotal Initialization value for solids fraction in % 0.0
suspension (non-separable component)
Density Density of the suspension kg/m3 997.337
RemainderGas Residual volume that cannot be filled m 3
0.05
with liquid when filling the centrifuge
RemainderLiquid Residual volume that remains in the cen‐ m3 0.005
trifuge after it is emptied
CpInit Initial heat capacity for the medium stor‐ – 4.18
ed in the centrifuge during initialization
Operating window
Variable Symbol Unit Can variable be

changed?
Length L m Yes1
Temperature T °C Yes1
Weight M kg Yes1
Pressure pB bar No
Gas pressure pG bar No
Fraction of solid matter in w % Yes1
solid matter/liquid mixture
1
Enable input with "Set"

Libraries
Connection example
The figure below shows an example of the connection of a centrifuge:
Figure 8-50 Connection example of component type Centrifuge
Make the following parameter assignment for this example:
Figure 8-51 Parameter assignment of component type Centrifuge in the connection example
See also

Libraries
Column
Symbol
Symbol of component type Column
Function
The Column component type calculates the distillation of a binary feed flow to a low boiling
mixture (overhead product) and a high boiling mixture (bottom product) in a plate column.
The feed flow enters the column through the F connection with the concentration of low-boiler
x_F. The top product (distillate) is taken from the column at connection D with the concentration
of high-boilers x_D. The bottom product (bottom) is taken from the column at connection B with
the concentration of high-boilers x_B.
There is a condenser with a reflux vessel at the top of the column. The condenser has two
connections for cooling water (CW_in and CW_out). A pump (either in the reflux vessel drain or
in the reflux line) pumps the reflux into the column. Constituents of the column top stream that
have not condensed are removed from the column through connection I.
In the sump, the column is heated by a natural convection evaporator (reboiler). The reboiler
has two connections for heating steam (ST_in and ST_out).

Libraries
The separation of the low-boiling and high-boiling fractions is calculated in idealized terms
using split factors. The split factors are determined using empirical formulas depending on
reflux flow, boilup flow, feed flow and feed concentration compared to the (stationary) operation
point (OP). The stationary operation point is specified with the following parameters:
● Feed flow: OP_mflF
● Feed concentration: OP_xF
● Top concentration: OP_xD
● Bottom concentration: OP_xB
● Reflux amount: OP_mflR
● Boilup amount: OP_mflV
● Evaporator output: OP_Qreb
The split factors are limited with the Split_Max parameter. The maximum split factor is
Split_Max and the minimum is (1 – Split_Max). The greater the individual split factor, the more
the high-boilers or low-boilers are separated through the top stream.
The temperatures in the column are calculated at column operating pressure as a function of
the concentration of low-boiling fraction x and the boiling points of the low-boiling and high-
boiling fraction (TS_LB and TS_HB).
7 [ 76/% ෥[ 76+%

The evaporation enthalpy hV is calculated as a function of the concentration of low-boiling
fraction x and the evaporation enthalpies of the low-boiling and high-boiling fraction (hV_LB and
hV_LB).
K9 [ K9/% ෥[ K9+%

The natural convection in the reboiler is calculated on the basis of the evaporator output Q_Reb
compared to the reflux amount OP_mflV and evaporator output OP_Qreb at the stationary
operating point. The evaporator output is calculated on the basis of the heat transferred by the
heating medium in the reboiler.
The column size is specified with the following parameters:
● Diameter of the column: Diameter
● Number of trays: n_tray
● Tray height: Tray_Height
The feed tray of the column is specified with the Feed_Tray parameter.

Libraries
The Pump_Top parameter allows you to choose whether the pump is at the reflux vessel or in
the reflux line (Reflux) or whether the pump is in the drain of the reflux vessel for reflux and
distillate (Reflux+Distillate).
Representation: Pump in reflux line Pump for reflux and distillate

The top condenser is configured with the A_Cond exchange area and k_Cond heat transfer
coefficient parameters.
The reflux vessel is configured with the diameter Diameter_RefluxVessel and volume
Volume_RefluxVessel parameters. If the reflux vessel is running empty, it is displayed with blue
lines. If the vessel is completely full and overflows, it is displayed with red lines.
Representation: Reflux vessel empty Reflux vessel full

The reboiler is configured with the A_Reb exchange area and k_Reb heat transfer coefficient
parameters.
The level, pressure and temperature in the reflux vessel can be read off at process tag I/O
RefluxVessel.
The flow from the reflux line to the column top can be read at process tag I/O Reflux_Flow.
The level, pressure and temperature in the column sump can be read off at process tag I/O
Bottom.
Measurements (pressure and temperature) at the column can be read out over the measuring
point connectors Measurement[i]. The number can be specified with the NbrOfMeasurements
parameter. The tray with the measuring point can be specified for each measuring point with the
MeasurementTray parameter.
The pump speed can be specified at the Speed_Reflux input. The speed can be between 0
(pump stationary) and 100 (full speed).
The valve position of the valve in the reflux line can be specified at the Position_Reflux input.
The valve position can be specified between 0 (valve closed completely) and 100 (valve
opened completely).

Libraries
Parameters

Diameter Column diameter m 2
N_tray Number of trays – 10
Tray_Height Distance between trays mm 50
Feed_tray Feed tray – 10
A_Cond Top condenser exchange area m² 50
K_Cond Top condenser heat transfer coeffi‐ W/m²/K 1000
cient
ZeroFlowHead_Reflux Pump zero flow head at reflux vessel bar 5
NominalPressure_Reflux Pressure at pump operating point at bar 4
reflux vessel
NominalMassflow_Reflux Mass flow at pump operating point at kg/s 5
reflux vessel
Diamter_RefluxVessel Reflux vessel diameter m 1
Volume_RefluxVessel Reflux vessel volume m³ 1
geoHeight_RefluxVessel Geodetic height, reflux vessel m 0
Pump_Top Pump configuration at reflux vessel Return
flow
OP_mflF Feed mass flow rate at operating kg/s 6
point
OP_xF Feed concentration at operating point kg/kg 0.4
OP_xD Distillate concentration at operating kg/kg 0.9
point
OP_xB Bottom product concentration at op‐ kg/kg 0.1
erating point
OP_mflR Reflux mass flow rate at operating kg/s 4.5
point
OP_mflV Boilup mass flow at operating point kg/s 17
OP_QReb Reboiler heating capacity at operat‐ kW 7000
ing point
A_Reb Reboiler exchange area m² 400
K_Reb Reboiler heat transfer coefficient W/m²/K 1000
geoHeight_Colum Column geodetic height (at the sump) m 0
NbrOfMeasuremnsts Number of column process tags – 1
MeasurementTray Tray on which the measuring point is – 10
located

LiqLevTray Liquid level at column tray mm 50
hV_LB Low-boiler evaporation enthalpy kJ/kg/K 1100
hV_HB High-boiler evaporation enthalpy kJ/kg/K 2200

Libraries

TS_LB Low-boiler boiling point at column °C 65
pressure
TS_HB High-boiler boiling point at column °C 100
pressure
DTmin Minimum temperature difference, K 5
heat exchanger
Split_Max Maximum separation factor – 0.9999
LevelPercent_RefluxVes‐ Reflux vessel level initialization % 50
sel_Init
LevelPercent_Bottom_Init Initialization fill level column bottom % 50
kvs_CW Resistance coefficient, top condens‐ m³/h 200
er flow, service medium
kvs_Reflux Resistance coefficient, reflux valve m³/h 10
pInit_Top Initialization pressure column head bar 1
PInit_Bottom Initialization pressure column bottom bar 1.1
Operating window
The key column characteristics are displayed in the operating window. The following variables
are displayed:

Overhead pressure p_Kopf bar
Overhead temperature T_Kopf °C
Top condenser cooling capacity Q_Cond kW
Reflux mass flow rate mfl_R kg/s
Gas mass flow top mfl_I kg/s
Overhead product flow mfl_D kg/s
Overhead product concentration x_D kg/kg
Reflux ratio RR –
Feed mass flow rate mfl_F kg/s
Feed concentration x_F kg/kg
Boilup ratio BR –
Boilup mass flow rate mfl_V kg/s
Evaporator output Q_Reb kW
Bottom temperature T_Sumpf °C
Bottom pressure p_sumpf bar
Bottom product flow mfl_B kg/s
Bottom product concentration x_B kg/kg

Libraries
Column Tower
Symbol
Figure 8-52 Symbol of component type Column Tower
Function
The Column Tower component type calculates the distillation of a binary feed flow to a low
boiling mixture (overhead product) and a high boiling mixture (bottom product) in a plate
column.
The feed flow is supplied to the column over the F connector with the concentration of low
boilers zF. The overhead product (distillate) is taken from the column at the D connector with
the concentration of low boilers xD. The bottom product (bottom) is taken from the column at the
B connector with the concentration of low boilers xB. The return flow is supplied at the R

Libraries
connector with the concentration zR. The bottom flow to the reboiler is removed at the L
connector. The heated and partially evaporated flow from the reboiler is once again returned to
the column at the V connector. The concentration of low boilers for this flow is input via the zV
connector.
The separation of low boilers and high boilers is calculated idealized using so-called split
factors. The split factors are determined using empirical formulas depending on reflux flow,
boilup flow, feed flow and feed concentration compared to the (stationary) operation point (OP).
The stationary operation point is specified with the following parameters:
● Feed flow OP_mflF
● Feed concentration OP_xF
● Overhead concentration OP_xD
● Bottom concentration OP_xB
● Reflux flow OP_mflR
● kVS value evaporator OP_kvReb (for natural circulation) or
● Circulation flow OP_mflCircForced (for forced circulation)
The split factors are limited with the Split_Max parameter. The maximum split factor is
Split_Max, the minimum split factor is (1 – Split_Max). The greater the individual split factor, the
more low boilers or high boilers are separated over the overhead product flow.
The temperatures in the column are calculated based on the concentration of the low boiler x
and the boiling points of the low boiler and high boiler (TS_LB and TS_HB) as well as the spread
S of the boiling lens at column operation pressure.
T = f (TSLB,TSHB,S,x)
The ThermoSiph connector of the column can be connected to the ThermoSiph connector of
the evaporator/reboiler. The necessary information such as steam mass content vf and
composition of the steam and liquid phase (x and y) at the reboiler output as well as the bottom
concentration of the xB column is then transferred directly. If this connector is connected, you
no longer need to specify the input zV.
The ThermoSiphon parameter can be used to set that the reboiler is operated as natural
circulation evaporator. In this case the ThermoSiph connector of the column can be connected
to the ThermoSiph connector of the evaporator. The natural circulation between column and
evaporator is then implemented accordingly. If the ThermoSiphon parameter is not set, we
assume a forced circulation with pump. The ThermoSiph connector can also be connected to
the evaporator here.
The column size is specified with the following parameters:
● Column diameter Diameter
● Number of trays n_tray
● Tray height Tray_Height
The feed tray of the column is specified with the Feed_Tray parameter.
The reflux vessel is configured with the diameter Diameter_RefluxVessel and volume
Volume_RefluxVessel parameters. If the reflux vessel runs empty, the vessel is shown with
blue lines. If the vessel is completely filled and overflows, the vessel is shown with red lines (see
figure).

Libraries
The level, pressure and temperature in the column sump can be read off at process tag I/O
Bottom.
Measurements (pressure and temperature) at the column can be read out over the measuring
point connectors Measurement[i]. The number can be specified with the NbrOfMeasurements
parameter. The tray on which the measuring point is located can be specified for each
measuring point with the MeasurementsTray parameter.
Parameter
The following parameters are available:

Diameter Column diameter m 2
n_Tray Number of trays – 10
Tray_Height Distance between trays mm 50
Feed_tray Feed tray – 10
NbrOfMeasuremnsts Number of measuring – 1
points on the column
MeasurementTray Tray on which the meas‐ – 10
uring point is located
OP_mflF Feed mass flow rate at kg/s 6
operating point
OP_xF Feed concentration at kg/kg 0.4
operating point
OP_xD Distillate concentration kg/kg 0.9
at operating point
OP_xB Bottom product concen‐ kg/kg 0.1
tration at operating point
OP_mflR Reflux mass flow rate at kg/s 4.5
operating point
geoHeight_Colum Geodetic height of the m 0
column (at the bottom)
H_Reb Length of the reboiler mm 2000
ThermoSiphon Switch for natural circu‐ – True
lation
OP_TF Feed temperature at °C 60
the operating point
OP_TR Return flow tempera‐ °C 60
ture at the operating
point
OP_xR Return flow concentra‐ kg/kg 0.9
tion at the operating
point
OP_mflCircForced Circulation amount kg/s 20
forced circulation at the
operating point

Libraries
The following additional parameters are available:

T_LB Low-boiler boiling point °C 65
at column pressure
T_HB High-boiler boiling point °C 100
at column pressure
hV_LB Low-boiler evaporation kJ/kg/K 1100
enthalpy
hV_HB High-boiler evaporation kJ/kg/K 2200
enthalpy
S Spread of boiling lens – 10
pInit_Top Initialization pressure bar 1
column head
pInit_Bottom Initialization pressure bar 1.1
column bottom
LiqLevTray Liquid level at column mm 50
tray
Split_Max Maximum separation – 0.9999
factor
InitLevelBottom Initialization fill level col‐ % 50
umn bottom
kvsLiq Resistance coefficient m³/h 1000
liquid connectors
kvsVap Resistance coefficient m³/h 100000
gas connectors
kv0 Resistance coefficient m³/h 0.000001
connectors opposite in‐
tended flow direction
(check valve)
Operating window
The key column characteristics are displayed in the operating window. The following variables
are displayed:

Overhead pressure pKopf bar
Overhead temperature TKopf °C
Reflux mass flow rate mflR kg/s
Return flow concentration xR kg/kg
Overhead product flow mflD kg/s
Overhead product concentration xD kg/kg
Reflux ratio RR –
Feed mass flow rate mflF kg/s
Feed concentration xF kg/kg
Boilup ratio BR –

Libraries

Boilup mass flow rate mflV kg/s
Boilup concentration xV kg/kg
Bottom temperature T_Sumpf °C
Bottom pressure p_sumpf bar
Bottom product flow mflB kg/s
Bottom product concentration xB kg/kg
Pressure drop column DeltaP mbar
Filter
Symbol
Figure 8-53 Symbol of component type Filter
Function
The Filter component simulates the behavior of a filter in a pipeline in the form of a pressure
drop.
This pressure drop depends on:
● Flow coefficient of the clean filter (kVS value)
● Clogging of the filter (Clogging)
The pressure drop across the filter is calculated according to the following formula:

 
EDU NJ  K 
N96

෥ FORJJLQJ ˮ

P
Whereby:
Δp = pB − pA the pressure drop across the filter in bar

kVS the flow coefficient of the filter in m3/h
clogging the degree of clogging of the filter [0..1]

Libraries
For the media flow ṁ, the reference direction is defined from connector A to connector B, which
means for a media flow in reference direction ṁ > 0. This means the pressure drop therefore
has a negative value: Δp < 0.
This fact is also represented by an arrow in the symbol.
You can configure a clogging rate using the CloggingRate parameter. This parameter indicates
the clogging rate in percentage per mass passing through. You can use this to model a filter
whose clogging rate and therefore pressure drop increase at a certain rate.
To simplify matters, we assume that the incoming mass flow is equal to the outgoing mass flow
at any time. The partial mass flow filtered out from the main flow is thus neither removed from
the main mass flow nor added or taken away.
You can clean the filter using the "Clogging Reset" button. This function can also be connected
externally using the Reset input (e.g. after expiration of a sequence for purging the filter).
Parameters

Kvs Flow coefficient of the clean filter kVS with m /h
3
10.0
kVS ≥ 10−6 m3/h
CloggingRate Change in degree of clogging per flow- %/kg 0.01
through quantity (specified in kg) in %
Operating window

Pressure loss Δp bar
Mass flow P
& kg/s
Clogging1 – %
1
Can be reset with "Reset"
PressureStrainer
Symbol
Figure 8-54 Symbol of component type PressureStrainer

Libraries
Function
The PressureStrainer component type simulates the functionality of a pressure strainer.
The pressure strainer is a filter in which a suspension is mechanically separated. To do this, the
pressure strainer is filled with a suspension. The pressure strainer is then subjected to an
overpressure, which presses the filtrate through a filter floor, thereby achieving the separation.
Additional steps can be executed between filling the strainer and applying the pressure, such
as
● Sedimentation of the solid matter on the floor
● Smoothing of the layer on the floor caused by sedimentation using an agitator
The pressure strainer component is modeled as perfectly mixed. The above-named steps can
thus not be simulated. However, corresponding actions can be simulated in the actuator/sensor
level, such as:
● Wait times of the agitator
● Activities of the agitator (CCW / CW rotation, speeds, agitation time, etc.)
The effects of these actions are generally not directly measurable in the pressure strainer.
If you need individual effects from these actions, you must model them additionally using logic
blocks.
By applying pressure to the strainer, the filtrate is slowly pressed through the filter floor. As soon
as a configurable level of dryness DryingRate is reached in the filter cake, a "breakthrough" of
the gas occurs. The gas thereby escapes from the strainer space through drying cracks in the
filter cake. The pressure drop associated with this process represents the end of filtration for the
component. Additional drying is now only possible by heating the pressure strainer.
The filter cake is output as liquid medium. Devices used for output (scrapers, screw conveyors,
or similar) must therefore be replaced with valves and pumps in the model.
The component type PressureStrainer offers the option of connecting a heating or cooling
jacket for drying (HeatingJacket, ElectricalHeatingJacket component). A heat input, e.g. by
means of an agitator, is possible using input Q.
Within the component type PressureStrainer, the separation occurs in a simplified manner by
removal of the various fractions (filtrate and filter cake) from partial mass balances. The
structure of the filter cake and the actual filter floor are not modeled.
Circuit
The PressureStrainer component has two types of connectors for material flows and thus for
connection of pipelines:
● N1 ... Nn – general connecting pipes
These connection points are used to fill and empty the pressure strainer and as gas
connections.
All connectors of the vector N1..Nn are initially equal and can be used for all connection
types (water/steam, ideal gas, liquid).
● F1 … Fn – Filtrate drain
These connection points are a special case. The filtrate exits the system through these
connections. All other connections are made using the vector N1..Nn described above.

Libraries
The number of connection points depends on the system to be simulated and is specified using
the parameters NbrOfConnectors for N1 ... Nn and NbrOfFiltrateConnectors for F1 ... Fn.
component.
The minimum connection is:
● Suspension entry (Nn)
● Filter cake discharge (fraction of mixture with low density) (Nn)
● Filtrate discharge (fraction of mixture with higher density) (Fn)
● Gas connector (Nn)
Possible additional connections include:
● Inflow/discharge of cleansing agents (Nn)
● Inflow/discharge of washing solutions (Nn)
● Additional gas inflow and gas emission (Nn)
For the water/steam connection type, the inflowing medium is mixed with a liquid medium inside
the pressure strainer. The inflowing mass and enthalpy is taken into account but a
corresponding phase equilibrium does not form in the model. Incoming steam is added to the
liquid phase in the mass balance and does not contribute to building the pressure in the gas
phase. Water is handled in the mixture like a liquid medium.
If water/steam is used as a discharge medium, the mixture enthalpy of the liquid phase is
specified at the corresponding material output of the centrifuge. All other calculations within this
flow network are made using the properties of water/steam (e.g. heat capacity).
Due to the lack of steam properties, steam sterilization, for example, is therefore currently not
possible even at standstill.
For each of the connection points N1..Nn and F1..Fn you need the installation height of the
connecting piece on the pressure strainer (parameter ConnectorHeight for connectors N1..Nn
or ConnectorHeightF for connectors F1..Fn). The information is entered in meters. The default
is 0 m and thus at the bottom of the pressure strainer. Negative values are permitted for
simulation of connectors at a lower position.
Input vector SolidFraction

The solids fraction of the suspension is specified accordingly at the input of the
connectors N1..Nn and balanced in the pressure strainer. The balance calculation and
parameter assignment of the component is the same as for the StorageTank.
Connectors without separation fractions (e.g. detergents) are given the default value "0". Gas

Libraries
Examples:
● Product suspension – e.g. 90%
● Solvent: 0%
● Rinsing liquid: 0%
The values defined here only apply to incoming substance flows. All outgoing material flows exit
with the solid matter concentration currently stored in the centrifuge. This value is available to
the user at the Rate output for additional calculations. Any entered SolidFraction is not
evaluated in this case.
The filtrate discharges F1..Fn are an exception once again. These outflows are always pure
filtrate. This means there are no connectors SolidFraction for the filtrate discharges F1..Fn. If
these connectors are used as inputs, balancing takes place with the SolidFraction = 0.0
(without separable components).
The input vector SolidFraction is not visible by default.
Alternatively, you can also manually set the SolidFraction parameter of the filled pressure
strainer after the filling operation via the operating window.

All defined inputs in the input vector N1 ..Nn and F1..Fn must be connected. None of these
inputs may remain open during simulation because this will create open flow networks. This will
result in an error message during code generation.
The liquid phase is balanced with respect to the incoming and outgoing masses and enthalpies.
In addition, a mass balance of the separable mixture component is carried out.
Q
GP/LTXLG
GW ෤ P& /LTXLGL
L
Q
GP6FUHHQLQJ
GW ෤ P& 6FUHHQLQJL
L
GK/LTXLG  Q 
 ෤ P
& /LTXLGL K/LTXLGL ෤ 4& 
GW P/LTXLG  L 
K/LTXLG
7/LTXLG
F3

As soon as at least one gas connector is connected (characterized by a
corresponding NetParam component), a corresponding gas pressure is also calculated. The
gas pressure is changed by adding or removing gas and/or changing the gas volume (e.g. by
filling the tank). The calculated gas pressure acts on the produced filter cake and presses the
filtrate out of the filter cake until it reaches a configured level of dryness DryingRate.

Libraries
As soon as the solid matter concentration currently stored in the tank Rate corresponds to the
configured dryness level DryingRate, a pressure breakthrough of the filter cake occurs. The
gas pressure in the pressure strainer drops abruptly. This pressure drop is indicated in the
symbol by a color change of the cross-hatched filter zone to red.
Figure 8-55 Symbol of the PressureStrainer upon reaching the configured dryness level DryingRate
(pressure breakthrough)
The gas balance calculation only refers to externally added (inert) gases, however. Steam
pressures of solvents are not taken into account.
The incoming and outgoing masses and enthalpies are balanced within the gas-filled space:
Q
GP*DV
GW ෤ P& *DVL
L
GK*DV  Q 
 ෤ P
& *DVL K*DVL ෤ 4& 
GW P*DV  L 
P*DV 56 7*DV
S*DV
9*DV
The gas temperature TGas is calculated from the balanced gas enthalpy hGas. If the gas
temperature and liquid temperature are different, a corresponding temperature equalization
occurs during simulation.
The absolute value of the filtrate mass flow can be set by means of kV values in the filtrate drain
(e.g. valve or nozzle). An additional component is required to do this.

By using the operating window of the component, you can set the following state variables to
any (permissible) value during simulation:
● Stored mass / fill level
● Temperature
● Current solid matter concentration

Libraries
For this, you must first enter the setpoint in the corresponding digital input SetValues and apply
it with the "Set" button. You can specify the state of the stored mass using the "Mass" value as
well as using the fill level (Level).
or filling processes. As the operator, you can also empty the pressure strainer, for example, to
return to an earlier step in a step sequence.
Removal of the solid matter

Removal of the solid matter from the pressure strainer by means of screw conveyors, scrapers
or similar is not possible. The reason being is that while the solids fraction can be balanced as
solid matter, it is handled internally in the model like a liquid. As a result, appropriate valves and
pumps must be used for removal and operated by the trigger signals of the actual removal
devices.
Borderline case "Pressure strainer empty"

Inflows into the pressure strainer and outflows out of the pressure strainer are generally
throttled at the nozzle of the strainer. During normal operation, the user does not immediately
recognize this process, because throttling is to have very little impact on the simulation. The
outflow for an empty strainer is severely throttled. The flow coefficient is therefore set to
maximum throttle for all connections over which a medium flows out.
These flow coefficients are calculated internally as a function of the tank volume and cannot be
influenced by the modeler.
The strainer is considered empty when the liquid amount MW/ρ is less than a specified minimum
tank filling RemainderLiquid:
mL < RemainderLiquid ⋅ ρ
Balance calculation of the states is stopped for an empty strainer, which means changes to the
mass, partial masses and specific enthalpy are discarded. The status "empty" only changes
when the amount of liquid increases sufficiently, which means the difference between inflowing
and outflowing quantity is positive.
Borderline case "Pressure strainer full"

The strain is considered full when its amount of liquid has reached the maximum value:
mL < (V − RemainderGas) ⋅ ρ
The balance calculation of the states is stopped for a full strainer That is, if the stored mass,
partial mass or specific enthalpy is changed, the changes are discarded. The status "full" only
changes when the amount of liquid decreases sufficiently, which means the difference between
inflowing and outflowing quantity is negative.

Libraries
Parameters

Volume Volume V of the tank; can be adjusted m 3
1.0
online
Height Height of the tank; can be adjusted online m 1.0
NbrOfInletsOutlets Number N of connectors general – 3
NbrOfFiltrateOutlets Number N of filtrate connectors – 1
NbrOfMeasurements Number N of measuring points – 1
MeasurementHeight Height of the measuring points above the m 0.0
[Nr] drum floor
ConnectorHeight [Nr] Height of the general pipe connectors m 0.0
above the tank floor
ConnectorHeightF [Nr] Height of the filtrate connectors above m 0.0
the tank floor
Boiling Steam pressure curve of the lower boil‐ –
ing component: Pressure in bar as func‐
tion of the temperature (°C)
Vaporization Vaporization enthalpy of the lower boil‐ –
ing component in kJ/kg as a function of
temperature (°C)

LevelInit Initial level % 3.0
TemperatureInit Initial temperature °C 20.0
PressureInit Initial pressure bar 1.0
InitSolidPart Initial mass fraction of solid matter in the % 0.0
suspension
Density Mixture density in the tank kg/m3 997.337
DryingRate Maximum achievable solid matter con‐ kg/kg 0.95
centration in the filter cake after which
pressure breakthrough occurs
RemainderGas Residual volume that cannot be filled m3 0.05
with liquid when filling the strainer.
RemainderLiquid Residual volume that remains in the cen‐ m3 0.005
trifuge after the strainer is emptied.

Libraries
Operating window

changed?
Length L m Yes1
Temperature (fluid) TL °C Yes1
Temperature (gas) TG °C Yes1
Weight M kg Yes1
Pressure pB bar No
Percentage of solid mat‐ w % Yes1
ter in the suspension
1

Libraries
Connection example
The figure below shows an example for connection of a pressure strainer while using
components of the CHEM-BASIC library.
Figure 8-56 Connection example of component type PressureStrainer
The following parameter assignment of the PressureStrainer component is used for this
connection example:

Libraries
Figure 8-57 Parameter assignment of component PressureStrainer for the connection example
See also
Screening device
Symbol
Figure 8-58 Symbol of component type ScreeningDevice
Function
The component type ScreeningDevice is used to separate a partial mass flow from a total mass
flow.
Example:
● Separation of a specific particle size from a total batch
● Separation of a solids fraction from a suspension
This component has a screening stage.

Libraries
The separable fraction of the total mass flow is specified using the input RateA.
The flownet of the separated partial mass flow C is topologically not connected to the flownet
of the total mass flow AB. It must therefore be described using a separate NetParam block.
A separation can only take place when the flow network connected to the connector C is open.
During operation, at least the separable fraction must always be separated from the total mass
flow. If this fraction cannot be discharged using the flow network connected to connector C, the
main flow is reduced. The screen is blocked.
A corresponding flow coefficient of the screen (kVS value) is also required for the main mass
flow. If this flow coefficient is too small, the required mass flow may not be achieved.
The Rate output shows the percentage of the separable mixture component at output B. We
assume a complete separation in the Separator component so that this percentage is always
0%.
There is no backflow via the connector C. A backflow from B to A is also not possible.
A pressure drop is calculated in the component for the main mass flow. This pressure drop
depends on:
● Flow coefficient of the screen (kVS value)
The pressure drop across the screen is calculated according to the following formula:

 
EDU NJ  K 
N96

ˮ
P
Whereby:
Δp = pB − pA the pressure drop across the screen in bar

kVS the flow coefficient of the screen in m3/h
NOTICE
The flow network of the discharged mass flow at connector C begins in the component with a
mass flow source.
Because of this mass flow source, the pressure reached at the edge of the flow network is
dependent on the separated-out mass flow and the pressure drop in the following branch.
Pressure drops that are too high in the following branch (for example too low kVS values in the
valves) can result in impossible physical states (e.g. pressure in the output is higher than in the
main flow).

Libraries
Parameters

−6 3
m /h
3
10.0
Operating window
● Incoming total mass flow
● Outgoing total mass flow
● Separated partial mass flow

Mass fraction w %
Mass flow P
& kg/s
See also
Separator
Symbol
Figure 8-59 Symbol of component type Separator
Function
The separator is used for partial or complete separation of a partial mass flow C (e.g. of a solid
matter mass fraction) from the main flow AB.
Because the flow network in SIMIT generally only permits the transport of gases and liquids,
solids are handled like liquids here. A pressure difference is therefore necessary for a solid
matter transport Conveyor equipment is replaced with equivalent connections that consist of
pumps, valves, sources and sinks.
The flow network of the separated-out partial mass flow C is topologically not connected to the
flow network of the main mass flow AB. The flow network of the partial mass flow must therefore
be described using a separate NetParam block.

Libraries
A separation can only take place when the flow network connected to the connector C is open.
For example, if this flow network is blocked by a closed valve, this separator does not perform
any separation. In this case, the corresponding mass flow is forwarded to the output B.
A corresponding pressure drop is also required from the main mass flow to the connection point
C.
Backflow via the connector C is not possible.
Depending on the flow direction, the mass fraction of the partial mass flow to be separated is
specified using the input RateA or RateB.
A node is included in the Separator component. You can simulate a storage volume using the
dynamics of this node. You must make node settings separately for the main flow network and
the partial flow network using the corresponding network parameter assignment component
(NetParam).
0DLQIORZ 0DLQIORZ
6HSDUDWHGVROLG 6HSDUDWHGVROLG
PDWWHUIUDFWLRQ PDWWHUIUDFWLRQ
Figure 8-60 Possible flows of component type Separator
The main flow connectors A and B are designed identically. The partial mass flow to be
separated is always removed via the connector C .
The mass fraction of the main flow exiting at A or B is calculated and displayed at the output
Rate.
A pressure drop is calculated for the main mass flow. This pressure drop depends on:
● Pressure drop value of the separator (kVS value)
The pressure drop across the separator is calculated according to the following formula:

 
EDU NJ  K 
N96 ˮ

P
Whereby:
Δp = pB − pA the pressure drop across the separator in bar

kVS the flow coefficient of the separator in m3/h

Libraries
Parameters

−6 3
m /h
3
10.0
Operating window
● Incoming main mass flow
● Outgoing main mass flow
● Separated partial mass flow

Mass fraction w %
Mass flow P
& kg/s
See also
8.2.5.9 System
BranchParam – Branch parameter assignment
Symbol
Figure 8-61 Symbol of component type BranchParam
Function
The BranchParam component type is used for parameter assignment of a branch in the flow
network. For this purpose, the component is inserted anywhere in the branch whose
parameters are to be assigned.
Parameters

FactorMomentum Momentum factor for the flow in the m 450.0
branches of the flow network

Libraries
Mnode – Mass flow setting
Symbol
Figure 8-62 Symbol of component type Mnode
Function
The Mnode component type specifies the values for mass flow ṁ and specific enthalpy h at its
connector A. This type of component forms a boundary for the flow network. When looking at
the flow network as a graph, this corresponds to an inflow or outflow into an (internal) node or
branch. An internal node with defined inflow or outflow is added to the flow network for each
component of this type.
Operating window

changed?
Mass flow P
& kg/s Yes
(Default: 0)
Specific enthalpy h kJ/kg Yes
(Default: 100)

Pressure p bar
Density r kg/m³
Temperature T °C
NetParam – Network parameter assignment
Symbol
Figure 8-63 Symbol of component type NetParam

Libraries
Function
The NetParam component type is used for parameter assignment of a flow network. To do so,
the component is added at any location in any branch of the flow network.
Representation of the NetParam component depending on the set medium:
Medium Gas Liquid Water/Steam

The parameters specified in this component apply to the entire flow network. They can be read
and further processed by other components included in the flow network.
The NetParam component has the following inputs:
● MediumExt
External switchover of the medium set in the flow network during runtime through events
from the model. Defined inputs are:
– −9999 (default): This input is not used, the medium set in the Medium parameter is
current
– 0: Switchover to "Water/Steam" medium
– 1: Switchover to "Ideal Gas" medium
– 2: Switchover to "Liquid" medium
● CpExt
External input for heat capacity in the flow network (can, for example, be connected from the
output from an upstream tank). Only values greater than zero are accepted as input; for
input zero (default), the parameters sHeatCapGas or sHeatCapLiquid apply.
Both inputs have the default "not visible" and must be made visible before they can be used.
Figure 8-64 Example for the connection of the CpExt input

Libraries
NOTICE
The component lets you switch the medium during runtime. However, this should only be done
in exceptional cases because, depending on the connection of the components, the model
may enter an undefined state.
Model crashes or reaching of undefined states may be possible.
If no component is used in a flow network for parameter assignment of a flow network, the
calculation is made with the defaults for water/steam.
Parameters

Medium For the medium in the flow network, you – Liquid
can select "Water/Steam", "Liquid" or
"Ideal Gas".
sCompressionGas Specific compression module for "Water/ bar/kg 10.0
Steam" medium with densi‐
ties ρ < 500 kg/m3 or "Ideal Gas" medium
sCompressionLiquid Specific compression module for "Water/ bar/kg 100.0
Steam" medium with densi‐
ties ρ > 500 kg/m3 or "Liquid" medium
FactorThermalGas Factor for the enthalpy balance calcula‐ 1/kg 100.0
tion of "Water/Steam" medium with den‐
sities ρ < 500 kg/m3 or "Ideal Gas" medi‐
um
FactorThermalLiquid Factor for the enthalpy balance calcula‐ 1/kg 0.1
tion of "Water/Steam" medium with den‐
sities ρ > 500 kg/m3 or "Liquid" medium
DensityLiquid Media density; only valid for "Liquid" me‐ kg/m3 997.337
dium
sHeatCapGas Specific heat capacity for gas; only valid kJ/kgK 1.0
for "Ideal Gas" medium
sHeatCapLiquid Specific heat capacity for liquids; only kJ/kgK 4.18
valid for "Liquid" medium
GasConstant Specific gas constant of the medium; on‐ kJ/kgK 0.287
ly valid for "Ideal Gas" medium

Libraries

internal nodes of the flow network
py in the internal nodes of the flow net‐
work
SmoothTransition When this additional parameter is set to – False
True, the variables sCompression
and FactorThermal are calculated with a
density-dependent linear transfer func‐
tion
ment
FactorHeatExchan‐ Factor of proportionality for heat ex‐ kW/kgK 0.0
geEnv change of the medium in the internal no‐
des with the environment; no heat ex‐
change occurs when the value zero is set
PHnode – Pressure and enthalpy default
Symbol
Figure 8-65 Symbol of component type PHnode
Function
The PHnode component type represents an option for closure of a flow network to the outside.
A fixed pressure p and the associated enthalpy h are specified as a boundary condition for the
flow network in the component.
When looking at the flow network as a graph, this component corresponds to an (external) node
for which the entered conditions are permanently specified.
Display
During the simulation, the selected medium is displayed in color in the symbol of the
component. The component receives the information required for this display from the
associated flow network parameter assignment (NetParam component).

Libraries
Representation of the PHnode component depending on the set medium:
Operating window

changed?
Pressure p bar Yes
(Default: 1)
(Default: 100)

Mass flow 1
P
& kg/s
Density r kg/m³
Temperature T °C
1
For outflow ṁ > 0, for inflow ṁ < 0.
PTnode – Pressure and temperature default
Symbol
Figure 8-66 Symbol of component type PTnode
Function
The PTnode component type represents an option for closure of a flow network to the outside.
A fixed pressure p and the associated temperature T are specified as a boundary condition for
the flow network in the component.

Libraries
When looking at the flow network as a graph, this component corresponds to an (external) node
for which the entered conditions are permanently specified.
Note
Please note that you cannot enter a state in the two-phase area with the medium "Water/
Steam". The state is either completely liquid or completely vaporous depending on the
temperature and pressure. If the boiling point is entered at the relevant pressure, the state is
completely gaseous.
If you want to specify a state in the two-phase area, you will need to use component
type PHNode.
Display
During the simulation, the selected medium is displayed in color in the symbol of the
component. The component receives the information required for this display from the
associated flow network parameter assignment (NetParam component).
Representation of the PTnode component depending on the set medium:
Operating window

Pressure p bar
Temperature T °C

Mass flow P
& kg/s
Density r kg/m³
Temperature T °C

Libraries
8.2.5.10 Tanks
Agitator
Symbol
Figure 8-67 Symbol of component type Agitator
Function
The Agitator component type exists to emulate the presence and operation of an agitator. The
agitator is switched on via the Speed connector. The rotation of the agitator is shown
graphically at a Speed > 0.
However, this component has no effect on mixing in a stirring tank because stirring tanks are
always assumed to be perfectly mixed systems.
This component also has no effect on the heat transfer from a heating element to a stirring tank.
To model the heat transfer, you must link the agitator speed with the HeatingJacket component.
DrumWS – Storage tank for water/steam
Symbol
Figure 8-68 Symbol of component type DrumWS
Function
The DrumWS component type provides the simulation of a water/steam drum that is closed off
from the environment.
The closed drum is assumed to be a horizontal or vertical cylindrical tank whose inflows and
outflows are via connectors N1 .. Nn. A throttling action is assumed for each connector
according to the following formula:

Libraries

 
EDU NJ  K 
N96

ˮ
P
The installation height of the individual connectors is specified for each connector with the
ConnectorHeight parameter vector. The type of each connector (inlet or outlet, water or steam)
is defined dynamically during the simulation and depends on the thermodynamic states in the
drum, the configured geometry (ConnectorHeight, Orientation) and the respective boundary
conditions.
You can move the connectors as needed along the outline of the component symbol with the
mouse while pressing the <Alt> key.
An immediate separation of the medium into two homogeneous saturated phases is assumed
in the drum: the saturated liquid phase and the saturated vapor phase. Only connectors to
water/steam-type flow networks are included in the balance calculation. Connectors to other
types of flow networks (gas, liquid or user-specific media) are not balanced.
This way you obtain the mass of water and steam in the tank that is balanced using the mass
flows according to
Q
GP
GW
෤ P& L
L
or due to
m = ρV
the change of the average density to
Q
Gˮ
9
GW
෤ P& L
L
The energy is further balanced according to
Q
G KP
GW
෤ K P& L L
L
Whereby h is the specific enthalpy (mean enthalpy) of water/steam in the drum and hi is the
specific enthalpy of the inflow and outflow at the i-th connector. For outflows, the specific
enthalpy of the medium in the drum is to be used, which means h' for outflows of saturated
water, h" for outflows of saturated steam. The balancing is calculated as follows
Q Q Q
GK
P
GW
෤ KL ෥ K P& L Kಿ ෥ K ෤ P& L Kಿಿ ෥ K ෤ P& L
L L ෛ = L L ෛ $ಿ L L ෛ $ಿಿ
In this case, the inflows Z, outflows of saturated water A' and outflows of saturated vapor A" are
added up.
To model a heat exchange with the ideally insulated tank, the enthalpy balance is added
according to

Libraries
Q Q Q
GK
P
GW
෤ KL ෥ K P& L Kಿ ෥ K ෤ P& L Kಿಿ ෥ K ෤ P& L $ ˞ 77 ෥ 76
TT is the temperature of the tank wall, TS the saturation temperature of water/steam.
The heat storage in the tank wall is described with the heat balance:
G77
$ ˞ 76 ෥77
GW P7 F7
mT Weight of the tank wall [kg]

cT Heat capacity of the tank wall [kJ/(kg⋅K)]
The level of water l, the saturation temperature TS, saturation pressure pS and the mass m of
water/steam are output at the Measure connector.
The connectors N1 .. Nn are assumed according to the configured height. For connectors
below the fill level, the pressure at these connectors is therefore made up of the saturation
pressure and the gravitational pressure of the water as a function of the difference from the
connector height (lA) and fill level (l):
p = ρ' g (l − lA) + pS
lA Height of the connection pipe [m]
Borderline case "empty tank"

The outflow for an empty drum is severely throttled. The flow coefficient is thereby set to the
value kV0 for maximum throttling of all connectors through which water or steam flows out.
The tank is considered empty when the amount of water mW/ρ is lower than a specified
minimum tank filling Vmin:
mW < Vminρ
The balancing of the states is stopped for an empty drum, which means changes to the density
and specific enthalpy are discarded. The status "empty" only changes when the amount of
water increases sufficiently. A check is therefore made in each time increment to see if
 + 
P : ุ 9PLQ ˮ  PLQ 
 
The required increase can be set with the hysteresis Hmin.
A corresponding note is shown in the symbol of a component for an empty drum (see figure).

Libraries
Figure 8-69 Display of an empty drum in the symbol
Borderline case "full tank"

The drum is considered full when the amount of water has reached the maximum value:
mW > (V − Vmin) ρ
The balancing of the states is stopped for a full drum, which means changes to the density and
specific enthalpy are discarded. The status "full" only changes when the amount of water
decreases sufficiently. A check is therefore made in each time increment to see if
 + 
P : ื ˮ9 ෥ ˮ9PLQ  PLQ 
 
The required decrease can be set with the hysteresis Hmin.
A corresponding note is shown in the symbol of a component for a full drum (see figure).
Figure 8-70 Display of a full drum in the symbol
Parameters

1.0
online
HeightOrLength Height or length of the drum; can be m 1.0
changed online
NbrOfConnectors Number of connectors N – 1
[Nr] drum floor
ConnectorHeight [Nr] Height of the pipe connectors above the m 0.0
drum floor
Position Drum position: Vertically or Horizontally – Vertically
If Horizontally is selected, a horizontal
cylinder is assumed for the fill level.

Libraries

LevelInit Initialization value for the level (water vol‐ m
3
50.0
ume) in %
TemperatureInit Initialization value for the temperature of m 20.0
water/steam (saturation temperature)
Kvs Uniform flow coefficient kV for all connec‐ m3/h 360.0
tors
Kv0 Flow coefficient kV0 for severe throttling m3/h 0.000001
in the tank connector
MinVolume Minimum tank volume Vmin; can be adjus‐ m3 0.01
ted online
MinVolumeHys Hysteresis Hmin; can be adjusted online % 50.0
MassDrum Mass mT of the drum; can be changed kg 5000.0
online
SurfaceDrum Inner surface A of the drum; can be m2 12.5
changed online
sHeatCapDrum Specific heat capacity cT of the drum; can kJ/kgK 0.5
be changed online
HeatTransCoe Heat transfer coefficient α for water/ kW/m2K 0.0
steam of the drum; can be changed on‐
line
Operating window

changed?
Water level L m Yes1
Saturation temperature T °C Yes1
Weight of water/steam M kg Yes1
Saturation pressure pB bar No
Water pressure pG bar No
Container temperature TDrum °C No
1
● Mix: Intermediate variables
● Water: Variables for saturated water
● Steam: Variables for saturated steam

Libraries

Density r kg/m³
See also
ElectricalHeatingJacket – Electrical heating jacket
Symbol
Figure 8-71 Symbol of component type ElektricalHeatingJacket
Function
The electrical heating jacket is an add-on to the StorageTankLiquid. The heating power at input
Q_In is supplied as heat flow Q to the tank. The heat flow is specified in kW.
The component is used to visualize the heating jacket in the SIMIT chart. For simulation
purposes, the heating power can also be connected directly to a StorageTankLiquid.
Unlike with the HeatingJacket component, the influence of the agitator speed or of the tank level
is not taken into consideration here.
This component does not have parameters or an operating window.
Flash – 2-phase separator
Symbol
Figure 8-72 Symbol of component type Flash

Libraries
Function
The Flash component describes a 2-phase separator and is used to distribute the content into
a liquid and gas phase. Depending on the temperature and pressure, the phase equilibrium is
established between the low boiler (LB = Low Boiling) and the high boiler (HB = High Boiling).
The incoming and outgoing material flows are hereby automatically balanced regarding mass
and enthalpy. Tempering of the mass stored in the tank is possible by means of a direct input
or various additional components.
The phase equilibrium is parameterized over the normal boiling temperature (at 1 bar) of the
low and high boiler (TS_LB, TS_HB) as well as over their vaporization enthalpies (hv_LB,
hv_HB). The size of the boiling lens can be varied using the S parameter. This means:
● S = 0, maximum size of the boiling lens (see figure)
It is assumed that there is an equal pressure dependency of the boiling points for both
materials. This is parameterized with the boiling temperature of the high boiler (T2_HB) for
another (preferably higher) pressure (p2_HB).

7HPSHUDWXUH>r&@
7HPSHUDWXUH>r&@
7HPSHUDWXUH>r&@

Tau line
Boiling point curve

3UHVVXUH>EDU@

SB+%

SB+% 7B+%

7B+%

7HPSHUDWXUH>r&@
Figure 8-74 Dependency of the boiling temperature on the pressure

Libraries
Circuit
The N1 ..Nn connectors are the connection points for the material flows, which means for the
connection of pipelines. The number of these connection points depends on the system to be
simulated and is specified with the NbrOfConnectors parameter. All connectors of the input
vector N1..Nn are initially equal and can be used for all connector types (water/steam, ideal
gas, liquid).
component. All defined inputs must be interconnected in the input vector N1 ..Nn. These inputs
must not remain open during simulation because this will create open flow networks. This
would, in turn, result in an error message during code generation.
a liquid medium. The incoming mass and enthalpy is taken into consideration.
A flash typically has three connectors. The feed comes in through the first connector. At the
second connector on the top of the tank, the gas flow is removed. At the third connector at the
bottom of the tank, the liquid drain is connected.
At least one gas flow must be connected to the flash.
Input vector z_in and output vector z_aus

The mass fraction of the light boiler in the incoming medium is specified with the input
vector z_in for each of the connectors N1..Nn. Connectors without light boiler component are
assigned the value "0". The specified values only apply to incoming material flows.
For all outgoing material flows, the mass fraction of the light boiler is transferred to the output
vector z_aus. For gas connectors, the concentration of the gas phase is output. For all other
connectors, the concentration of the liquid phase is output. In case of outgoing mass flows, a
parameter entered in z_in may not be evaluated.
The installation height of the connecting pipe at the flash is required for each of the connection
points N1..Nn (ConnectorHeight parameter). The information is entered in meters. The default
setting is 0 m, which means at the bottom of the tank. Negative values are permitted for the
simulation of connectors at a lower position. If a gas connector is located below the fill level of
the tank, neither liquid nor gas can flow out through this connector from the tank. However, the
inflow of gas is possible.

Libraries
Alignment
The Flash component can be operated as vertical or horizontal tank. The alignment can be set
with the Position parameter. The tank is simulated as either vertical or horizontal cylinder. In
case of a vertical flash, the HeightOrLength parameter indicates the height of the tank; for a
horizontal flash, it indicates the length.
Vertical flash Horizontal flash
Heating / cooling of the flash tank

The flash can be heated or cooled with the following options:
● Combination with HeatingJacket component
● Combination with ElectricalHeatingJacket component
● Connection of a Sliders at input Q

Using the operating window of the component, the operator can set the following state variables
to any permitted value during simulation:
● Total mass m
● Temperature T
● Total mass percentage z
● Fill level L
To do so, the setpoint is initially entered in the corresponding digital input SetValues and
applied by clicking the "Set" button. The state "Total mass" can hereby be specified with the
mass value as well as with the fill level. By influencing the state variables, you can, for example,
speed up heating processes or fill processes. The Flash can also be emptied, for example, to
jump back in a sequencer.
Borderline case "empty flash"

Inflows to and outflows from the flash are generally throttled at the tank nozzle. During normal
operation, this throttling is not immediately recognizable for the user, because throttling should
have very little impact on the simulation. The outflow is severely throttled for an empty tank. The
flow coefficient is thereby set to the value for maximum throttling of all connectors through
which water or steam flows out. These flow coefficients are calculated internally based on the
tank volume and cannot be manipulated by the modeler. The tank is considered empty when
the liquid amount mL/ρ is less than a specified minimum percentage tank
filling MinLiquidVolumePercent:
mL < MinLiquidVolumePercent ⋅ Volume ⋅ ρ

Libraries
Balancing of the states is stopped for an empty flash, which means changes to the total mass,
component mass and specific enthalpy are discarded. The "empty" state continues until there
is a sufficient increase in the amount of liquid. A corresponding indicator for an empty tank is
shown in the component symbol (see figure).
Figure 8-75 Empty flash indicator in the symbol
Borderline case "full flash"

The flash is considered to be full when its amount of liquid reaches the maximum possible
percentage value:
mL > (V − MinVaporVolumePercent ⋅ Volume) ⋅ ρ
Balancing of the states is stopped for a full flash, which means changes to the total mass,
component mass and specific enthalpy are discarded. The "full" state continues until there is a
sufficient decrease in the amount of liquid. A corresponding indicator for a full flash is shown in
the component symbol (see figure).
Figure 8-76 Full flash indicator in the symbol
Parameter

1.0
online
HeightOrLength Height of the vertical or length or the hor‐ m 1.0
izontal tank; modifiable online
NbrOfConnectors Number N of connectors – 3
tank bottom
ConnectorHeight Height of the pipe connectors above the m 0.0
tank bottom
Position Alignment of the tank (vertical or horizon‐ – vertically
tal)

Libraries

InitLevelPercent Initialization level % 50.0
InitTemperature Initialization temperature °C 80.0
Initz Initialization composition low boiler kg/kg 0.5
InitEvaporationPart Initialization mass fraction of the low boil‐ % 0.0
ing point medium
InitcpLiquid Heating capacity of the liquid for initiali‐ kJ/kg/K 4.18
zation
InitcpVapor Heating capacity of the gas phase for in‐ kJ/kg/K 1.0
itialization
InitDensityLiquid Liquid density in the tank for initialization kg/m³ 997.337
InitRS Specific gas constant for initialization kJ/kg/K 0.287
geoHeight Geodetic height of the tank m 0.0
T2_HB Boiling temperature high boiler for p2_HB °C 120
P2_HB Pressure for boiling temperature T2_HB Bar 2.0
MinVaporVolumePer‐ Percentage of tank volume that cannot % 5
cent be filled with liquid when filling the tank
MinLiquidVolumePer‐ Percentage of tank volume that remains % 0.5
cent in the tank when draining the tank
Operating window

changed?
Fill level L m Yes
Temperature T °C Yes
Total mass m kg Yes
Pressure p bar No
Low-boiler mass fraction z % Yes
Mass fraction low boiler x % No
liquid phase
Mass fraction low boiler y % No
gas phase
Vapor fraction vf % No

Libraries
HeatingJacket – Heating jacket
Symbol
Figure 8-77 Symbol of component type HeatingJacket in connection with component

StorageTankLiquid, representation of the connectors to be connected
Function
The HeatingJacket component is optimized for use in combination with a StorageTankLiquid.
It represents an add-on component for the StorageTankLiquid but can also be used in
combination with the pressure strainer or on its own.
Use in combination with a StorageTankLiquid

When the HeatingJacket component is used in connection with a StorageTankLiquid, make
sure that the signal exchange between the two components takes place over two connectors.
These are:
● Heat flow Q (output from the HeatingJacket, input for the StorageTankLiquid)
● Measured value connector M (output from the StorageTankLiquid, input for
the HeatingJacket)
The measured value connector used here must be located on the tank at tank height "zero"
or below the anticipated liquid level (MeasurementHeightparameter)
The size of the two components and the position of the named connectors must be preset in
such a way that the two components can be put on top of each other – as shown on the left in
the figure above – so that the corresponding connections are closed automatically. In this case
the connectors disappear as shown on the right in the figure above. Alternatively, you can draw
the connections using connecting lines.
The HeatingJacket component must be linked to a flow network as a branch element.
A (compensating) heat flow Q results due to the temperature difference that arises in the
HeatingJacket and in the StorageTankLiquid.
This heat flow is calculated in a simplified manner using the following equation:
4& N $ ෙ7

Libraries
k Heat transfer coefficient

Q Heat transfer area m2
ΔT Temperature difference between heating/cooling medium and tank temperature
Influence of an agitator on the heat transfer

You can represent the influence of an agitator on the heat transfer using the AgitatorInfluence
parameter. With this parameter, the calculated heat transfer Q is scaled as a function of the
agitator speed. 100% hereby corresponds to the full heat transfer and 0% to no heat transfer.
The default setting for the AgitatorInfluence parameter is 100% across the entire speed range
of the agitator, which means always full heat transfer, no influence of the agitator on the heat
transfer.
You can use the AgitatorSpeed input to link the agitator speed to the HeatingJacket component.

Libraries
Figure 8-78 Parameter AgitatorInfluence of component type HeatingJacket
Influence of the fill level on the heat transfer

You can represent the influence of the tank fill level on the heat transfer using
the LevelInfluence parameter. With this parameter, the calculated heat transfer is scaled as a
function of the tank fill level. 100% hereby corresponds to the full heat transfer and 0% to no
heat transfer.
The default setting for this parameter is 100% across the entire fill level range of the tank, which
means no influence of the fill level on the heat transfer.
You can use the TankLevel input to link the tank fill level to the HeatingJacket component. Use
the tank fill level in percent for this.
The influence of the agitator and influence of the fill level are combined with one another by
multiplication.
Parameters

Kvs Valve characteristic value kVS with m /h3
10.0
kVS ≥ kV0 + 10−6 m3/h
AgitatorInfluence Influence of an agitator on the heat trans‐ –
fer, in percent, as a function of the agita‐
tor speed
LevelInfluence Influence of the tank fill level on the heat –
transfer, in percent, as a function of the
tank fill level

Volume Volume of the heating jacket m 3
0.1
Area Heat transfer area m2 10.0
k Heat transfer coefficient [kW/(m2⋅K)] – 1.0
InitialTemperature Initialization temperature °C 20.0
MinEnthalpy Lowest enthalpy kJ/kg −300.0
MaxEnthalpy Highest enthalpy kJ/kg 3000.0
Operating window

Temperature T °C
Current flow – kg/s

Libraries

Volume – m³
kvs h m³/h
Heat transfer area – m²
StorageTankLiquid – Storage tank for liquid media
Symbol
Figure 8-79 Symbol of component type StorageTankLiquid
Function
The StorageTankLiquid component type is used for mixing and storage of liquid media. The
incoming and outgoing material flows are hereby automatically balanced regarding mass and
enthalpy.
The temperature of the substance stored in the tank can be adjusted by means of a direct input
or different additional components.
If there are gas connectors, these are balanced separately and form a pressure padding above
the liquid in the tank.
The mass balanced in the tank is a mixture of up to two liquid components. The concentration
of these components in the inflows can be specified at each input.
A thermal separation of the two components is possible during the simulation. These
components are therefore referred to in the following as lower boiling and higher boiling
components.
Other physical processes, such as the mixing of concentrations, are also possible.
Circuit
The connectors N1 ..Nn serve as connection points for substance flows, which means for
connection of pipelines.
The number of these connection points depends on the system to be simulated and is specified
with the NbrOfConnectors parameter. All connectors of the input vector N1..Nn are initially
equal and can be used for all connection types (water/steam, ideal gas, liquid).

Libraries
Possible connection types include:

● Liquid inflows of different chemical substances
● Outflows of substances stored in the tank
● Inflow/discharge of cleansing agents
● Inflow/discharge of washing solutions
● Gas inflow and gas emission
● Air extraction
component.
You must connect all defined inputs in the input vector N1 ..Nn. These inputs must not remain
open during simulation because this will create open flow networks. This would, in turn, result
in an error message during code generation.
a liquid medium. The inflowing mass and enthalpy are taken into account but a corresponding
phase equilibrium does not form in the model. Incoming steam does not contribute to pressure
build-up in the gas phase. Water is handled in the mixture like a liquid medium.
Due to the lack of water/steam properties, steam sterilization with a water/steam flow network
connector is currently not possible.
For each of the connection points N1..Nn, the installation height of the connection pipe on the
tank (ConnectorHeight parameter) is needed. The information is entered in meters. The default
is 0 m, which means at the bottom of the tank. Negative values are permitted for simulation of
connectors at a lower position. If a gas connection is below the fill level of the tank, neither liquid
nor gas can flow out of the container through that connection.
Input vector EvapFraction

You can use the input vector EvapFraction to specify the fraction of the low-boiling mixture
component of the inflowing medium, in percent, for each of the connectors N1..Nn. Connectors
without low-boiling mixture component (e.g. detergents) are given the value "0" (default). Gas
The specified values only apply to incoming material flows. All outgoing material flows exit with
the low-boiling mixture component of the total mass Rate currently stored in the tank. This
fraction is continuously calculated based on the incoming and outgoing mass flows and their
EvapFraction parameters.
In the case of outgoing mass flows, any EvapFraction that may have been entered is not
evaluated.

Libraries

The liquid phase is balanced with respect to the incoming and outgoing masses and enthalpies.
Mass balancing is also carried out for the low-boiling component of the mixture.
Q
GP/LTXLG
GW ෤ P& /LTXLGL ෥P
& (YDS
L
Q
GP(YDS)UDFWLRQ
GW ෤ P& (YDS)UDFWLRQL ෥P
& (YDS
L
GK/LTXLG  Q 
GW P/LTXLG
 ෤ P
& /LTXLGL K/LTXLGL ෤ 4& ෥ P
& (YDS Kಿ ෙ+9 
 L 
K/LTXLG
7/LTXLG
F3

If at least one gas connector is connected, a corresponding gas pressure is also calculated. In
this case, a closed and thus pressure-tight storage tank is assumed. The gas pressure is
changed by adding or removing gas and/or changing the gas volume (e.g. by filling the tank).
The calculated gas pressure also acts on the liquid connectors. The status of the gas balancing
is obtained from an orange background in the fill level display.
The incoming and outgoing masses and enthalpies are balanced within the gas-filled space:
Q
GP*DV
GW ෤ P& *DVL ෥P
& (YDS
L
GK*DV  Q 
GW P*DV
 ෤ P & (YDS Kಿ ෙ+9
& *DVL K*DVL P 
 L 
P*DV 56 7*DV
S*DV
9*DV
The gas temperature TGas is calculated from the balanced gas enthalpy hGas. If the gas
temperature and liquid temperature are different, a corresponding temperature equalization
occurs during simulation.
If a gas connector is not connected, the gas balance calculation does not take place. In this
case, the gas pressure is replaced with the atmospheric pressure. In this case we assume that
the tank is open to the surrounding environment.

Libraries
Representation of the balancing in the storage tank with and without gas fraction:
Balancing with gas fraction Balancing as open tank
Alignment
The StorageTankLiquid component can be operated as either a vertical or a horizontal tank.
The alignment can be set with the Position parameter. The tank is then simulated as a vertical
or horizontal cylinder. The HeightOrLength parameter specifies the height of vertical tanks and
the length of horizontal tanks.
Vertical tank Horizontal tank
Evaporation
If the stored liquid contains a lower boiling component, it is possible to evaporate it. To do this,
the liquid mixture must be heated to a temperature above the boiling point corresponding to the
current pressure. The steam pressure curve needed for this is configured using the Boiling
parameter (steam pressure curve of the lower boiling component pS = ƒ (TS) in [bar]).
In addition, the vaporization enthalpy of the lower boiling component must be specified as a
characteristic curve (ΔHV = ƒ(TS) in [kJ/kg]) using the Vaporization parameter.
The respective characteristic curves for water are used by default. They can be edited within
the charts or imported from a text file.
Examples of these characteristic curves are shown in the figures below:

Libraries
36 ෙ+9
76 76
Figure 8-80 Example for vaporization enthalpy and steam pressure curve
When the vaporization condition T > TS (pS) has been reached, the lower boiling component
gradually transforms to the gas phase and is added to the gas balance space. No provision is
made for condensation in the tank.
Heating / cooling of the storage tank

The StorageTankLiquid can be heated or cooled using the following options:
● Combination with HeatingJacket component
● Combination with ElectricalHeatingJacket component
● Connection of a slider at the Q input
To simplify matters, the supplied heat flow is only used to heat the liquid phase.

By using the operating window of the component, you can set these two state variables during
simulation to any permissible value:
● Stored mass
● Temperature

Libraries
For this, you must first enter the setpoint in the corresponding digital input SetValues and apply
it with the "Set" button. The state "stored mass" can be specified using the value of the mass
as well as using the fill level (Level).
or filling processes. Likewise, you can empty the tank, for example, to return to an earlier step
in a step sequence.
Borderline case "Tank empty"

Inflows into the tank and outflows from the tank are generally throttled at the tank connection
pipe. During normal operation, this throttling is not immediately recognizable for the user,
because throttling should have very little impact on the simulation.
The outflow is severely throttled for an empty tank. The flow coefficient is thereby set to the
value for maximum throttling of all connectors through which water or steam flows out.
These flow coefficients are calculated internally based on the tank volume and cannot be
manipulated by the modeler.
The tank is considered empty when the liquid amount mL/ρ is less than a specified minimum
percentage tank filling RemainderLiquidPercent:
mL < RemainderLiquidPercent ⋅ Volume ⋅ ρ
The balancing of the states is stopped for an empty tank, which means changes to the mass,
partial masses and specific enthalpy are discarded. The status "empty" only changes when the
amount of liquid increases sufficiently, which means the difference between inflowing and
outflowing quantity is positive.
A corresponding indicator for an empty tank is shown in the component symbol (see figure).
Figure 8-81 Display of an empty tank in the symbol
Borderline case "Tank full"

The tank is considered to be full when its amount of liquid reaches the maximum possible
percentage value:
mL < (V − RemainderGasPercent ⋅ Volume) ⋅ ρ
The balancing of the states is stopped for a full tank, which means changes to the mass, partial
mass and specific enthalpy are discarded. The status "full" only changes when the amount of
liquid decreases sufficiently, which means the difference between inflowing and outflowing
quantity is negative.
A corresponding note is shown in the symbol of a component for a full tank (see figure).

Libraries
Figure 8-82 Display of the full tank in the symbol
Parameters

1.0
online
HeightOrLength Height of the vertical or length or the hor‐ m 1.0
izontal tank; modifiable online
NbrOfConnectors Number N of connectors – 1
[Nr] tank bottom
ConnectorHeight [Nr] Height of the pipe connectors above the m 0.0
tank bottom
Boiling Steam pressure curve of the lower boil‐ –
ing component: Pressure in bar as func‐
tion of the temperature (°C)
Vaporization Vaporization enthalpy of the lower boil‐ –
ing component in kJ/kg as a function of
temperature (°C)
Position Alignment of the tank (vertical or horizon‐ – vertically
tal)

LevelInit Initialization level % 3.0
TemperatureInit Initialization temperature °C 20.0
PressureInit Initialization pressure bar 1.0
InitEvaporationPart Initialization mass fraction of the low boil‐ % 0.0
ing point medium
Density Mixture density in the tank kg/m3 997.337
RemainderGasPercent Percentage of tank volume that cannot % 5
be filled with liquid when filling the tank
RemainderLiquidPer‐ Percentage of tank volume that remains % 0.5
cent in the tank when draining the tank
geoHeight Geodetic height of the tank m 0.0

Libraries
Operating window

changed?
Fill level L m Yes
Temperature of fluid TL °C Yes
Temperature of gas TG °C No
Mass m kg Yes
Pressure at tank floor pB bar No
Low-boiler mass fraction w % Yes
See also
8.2.5.11 Valves
ControlValve / Valve / AngleValve
Symbol
Figure 8-83 Symbols of the component types ControlValve / Valve / AngleValve
Function
The component types ControlValve, Valve and AngleValve are used to simulate a control
valve. They can also be used for butterfly valves, plug valves or gate valves.
The listed components differ only in their symbols. The behavior of the components is identical.
Depending on the valve position, the configured characteristic curve and the valve size (kVS
value), the pressure drop across the valve is calculated according to the formula below.

 
EDU NJ  K 
N96 ˮ


Libraries
Whereby:
Δp = pB − pA the pressure drop across the valve in bar

kVS the valve characteristic value in m3/h
The reference direction is defined for the mass flow ṁ from connector A to connector. This
means ṁ > 0 for mass flow in the reference direction. The pressure drop then has a negative
value: Δp < 0. This is, however, purely a counting direction, which means the direction in which
the valve is installed is irrelevant. The flow direction can also be reversed during the simulation.
The control of these components through the control technology is not included in the
component types. These are mapped in the actuator/sensor level. The interface between the
drive level of a valve and the component types ControlValve,Valve and AngleValve in the
model level is the valve position.
This position value is limited to the range 0 ≤ Position ≤ 100%. The valve position is mapped to
the valve characteristic value kl using the valve characteristic.
You can select the following valve characteristic curves:
● Linear characteristic
● Square-law characteristic
● Equal-percentage characteristic
● Graphically configured characteristic (polygon)
Parameters

Characteristic Selection of the valve characteristic – Linear
Kvs Valve characteristic value kVS with m3/h 10.0
kVS ≥ kV0 + 10−6 m3/h
OpeningCharacteristic Specification of the valve characteristic
as characteristic curve. This parameter
is only used if the value Polygon has
been selected for the Characteristic pa‐
rameter. The opening in percentage is
hereby specified as a function of the
stroke in percentage.

Kv0 Valve characteristic value kV0 with m3/h 0.000001
kV0 ≥ 10−6 m3/h

Libraries
Operating window
You can switch between automated control (control using the actuator/sensor level) and
manual control in the operating window. The default is always automated control.

Pressure difference Δp bar
Mass flow P
& kg/s
RuptureDisc – Rupture disc
Symbol
Figure 8-84 Symbol of component type RuptureDisc
Function
The RuptureDisc component type simulates the functionality of a rupture disc. Depending on
a configurable rupturing pressure, a diaphragm is irrevocably damaged or, from a simulation
point of view, a valve is irreversibly opened.
However, you can manually close the rupture disk again in the simulation model after it has
ruptured with the "Reset" button in the operating window. This function is needed in order to test
the rupturing of the rupture disc several times in succession without having to reset the
simulation.
You can make use of this function only as a manual function via the operating window. It cannot
be connected to other components or the control technology.
For simulation purposes, the rupture disc is simply considered to be a closed valve that opens
permanently when the rupturing pressure is exceeded. The parameter assignment is therefore
the same as for a valve.
Parameters

Kvs Valve characteristic value kVS m3/h 100.0
with kVS ≥ kV0 + 10−6 m3/h
OpeningPressure Rupturing pressure of the rupture disk bar 10.0

Libraries

Kv0 Valve characteristic value kV0 m /h
3
0.000001
with kV0 ≥ 10−6 m3/h
Operating window
You can reset the rupture disk in the operating window.

Mass flow P
& kg/s
During the simulation, the operating states of the RuptureDisc component are visualized in the
symbol:
Closed rupture disc Destroyed rupture disc
Connection example:
Figure 8-85 Possible connection of component type RuptureDisc
In this connection example, a rupture disc is connected upstream from a safety valve. It is
important in this case that the kV0 value of the downstream safety valve is significantly greater
than the kV0 value of the rupture disc.
Example: kV0rupture_disc = 0.000001

kV0safety_valve = 0.01
If these two values were set to the same value, in the case of a closed valve and rupture disc,
the solution algorithm of the flow network would cause an average pressure calculated from the
pressure value upstream of the rupture disk and the pressure downstream of the safety valve
to arise between the rupture disc and the safety valve.
You must also select a kVS value of the rupture disc that is much higher than the kVS value of the
safety valve.

Libraries
StopValve – Stop valve
Symbol
Figure 8-86 Symbol of component type StopValve
Function
The StopValve component type is used for simulation of a check valve. The pressure drop
across the check valve is calculated depending on the direction of flow. The reference direction
is defined for the mass flow ṁ from connector A to connector. This means ṁ > 0 for mass flow
in the reference direction.
For a positive media flow, the valve is simulated as a fully opened valve. For a negative media
flow, the component type represents a closed valve. In this case leakage becomes active; the
valve coefficient kV therefore corresponds to the minimum opening kV0.
Parameters

Kvs Valve characteristic value kV0 with m3/h 10.0
kV0 ≥ 10−6 m3/h

kV0 ≥ 10−6 m3/h
To realize the check function, the valve characteristic value kV0 must be selected sufficiently
small.
Operating window

Mass flow P
& kg/s

Libraries
SafetyValve / AngleSafetyValve
Symbol
Figure 8-87 Symbols of component types SafetyValve / AngleSafetyValve
Function
The components SafetyValve / AngleSafetyValve are used as a safety valve. For a
configurable pressure difference between the connectors A and B, the valve is also opened in
a configurable time. The valve remains open as long as the pressure difference exists. The
valve is closed automatically as soon as the pressure difference has dropped below the
configured opening pressure minus the configured hysteresis.
9DOYH
/LIW

S>EDU@
+\VWHUHVH 2SHQLQJ
'HOWD3 3UHVVXUH
Figure 8-88 Opening and closing behavior of the safety valve
The model of the safety valve is designed with protection against polarity reversal; flow through
the valve in both directions is permitted. For calculation of the pressure difference, the side on
which the higher pressure exists is immaterial. This means that the safety valve cannot be
inadvertently inserted in the wrong direction in the model (e.g. as the result of an automatic
generation).
Note, however, that a preferred direction of flow from A to B is defined within the valve. If the
flow takes place in this direction, a positive mass flow is displayed in the operating window. If
the flow is in the opposite direction (i.e. the valve is mirrored, for example), this mass flow is
negative. The pressure drop Δp is also negative or positive depending on the flow direction.

Libraries
Parameters

Selection of the valve characteristic is
the same as for control valves. Hystere‐
sis is achieved with the HystereseDeltaP
parameter.
kVS ≥ kV0 + 10−6 m3/h
OpeningPressure Opening pressure (pressure difference bar 10.0
across the valve)
OpeningTime Time until valve is completely open s 0.0
OpeningCharacteristic Specification of the valve characteristic –
HystereseDeltaP Difference between opening pressure bar 1.0
and pressure drop.

Kv0 Valve characteristic value kV0 with m /h3
0.000001
kV0 ≥ 10−6 m3/h
During the simulation, the operating states of the component are visualized in the symbol.
To do this, the valve position is displayed as shown in the figure below.
+ื +ื +!
Figure 8-89 Display of the valve position in the SafetyValve symbol
All parameters can be changed online.
Operating window
The safety valve can also be opened or blocked manually in the operating window using the
"local control" function. This gives you the ability to easily simulate a malfunction of the safety
valve.
For manual control, you can specify the valve position using a slider. In this case the function
is that of a manual valve. The dependency on the pressure drop no longer exists.

Libraries

Mass flow P
& kg/s
ThreeWayValve
Symbol
Figure 8-90 Symbol of component type ThreeWayValve
Function
The ThreeWayValve component type is used for simulation of a three-way valve. Depending
on the valve position, the flow paths shown in the figure below can be opened.
3RVLWLRQ 3RVLWLRQ 3RVLWLRQ
Figure 8-91 Positions of the ThreeWayValve dependent on the Position input
The component type has two flow branches. Flow is always present in connector AB. It is the
connector that is shared by both valve branches. Depending on the valve position, connector A
or connector B can be open (intermediate positions are possible). No flow is possible from A to
B or vice versa (analog to the real three-way valve).
Depending on its insertion, the component can be used as mixing valve or as diverting valve.
The anticipated flow in the valve (mixing valve or diverting valve) must already be known when
the connection is made. Insert the valve in the corresponding orientation.
The flow direction during the simulation results from the relative pressures.
The valve position is specified at the Position input. This value refers to the valve branch AB–A.
Opening of the valve branch AB–B results from the difference of the opening of the valve branch
AB–A at 100%.
The pressure drop above the valve is calculated using the following formula depending on the
valve position, the configured characteristic and the valve size (kVS value):

 
EDU NJ  K 
N96

ˮ
P

Libraries
This calculation is made for both valve branches. The following applies, for example, to the
branch AB–A:
Δp = pAB − pA the pressure drop across the valve in bar (AB–A)

ṁAB–A the flow or mass flow from AB to A in kg/s
kV AB–A the valve characteristic value in m3/h
The reference direction for media flow ṁ is from connector AB to connector A or B. Thus, for a
media flow in the reference direction, ṁ > 0 (diverter valve). The corresponding pressure drops
therefore have a negative value: Δp < 0.
If the flow direction is reversed, the valve is a mixing valve. Here the mass flow is calculated
against the reference direction: ṁ > 0 (from the connectors A and B to AB). The corresponding
pressure drops then have a positive value: Δp > 0 (note the counting direction!).
Parameters

kVS ≥ kV0 + 10−6 m3/h
OpeningCharacteristic Specification of the valve characteristic –

Kv0 Valve characteristic value kV0 m3/h 0.000001
with kV0 ≥ 10−6 m3/h
For simulation purposes, the three-way
valve represents an internal node in the
flow network. Because the size of this
node can be significantly different than
the size of other components, you have
the option of parameterizing this node
here.
m3)
sCompressionLiquid Specific compression module for high- bar/kg 100.0
density media (liquids, ρ > 500 kg/m3)
FactorThermalGas Factor for enthalpy balancing for low den‐ 1/kg 1000.0
sity media (gas/steam, ρ < 500 kg/m3)

Libraries

FactorThermalLiquid Factor for enthalpy balancing for high 1/kg 10.0
density media (liquid, ρ > 500 kg/m3)
node
sEnthalpyInit Initialization value for the specific enthal‐ kJ/(kgK) 100.0
py in the node
ment
the environment; no heat exchange oc‐
curs when the value zero is set
Operating window
You can switch between automated control (control using the actuator/sensor level) and
manual control in the operating window. The default is always automated control.
For manual control, you can specify the valve position using a slider. The slider value hereby
refers to the branch AB–A.

Pressure difference Δp1 bar
Pressure difference Δp2 bar
Mass flow P
& kg/s

Libraries
8.2.6 Components in FLOWNET library
8.2.6.1 General components
Selection of the general components

The GENERAL directory of the FLOWNET library includes component types that can be used
in flownets with any medium.
Valve
Symbol

Libraries
Function
The Valve component type is used for simulating a control valve. Depending on the control
valve position the pressure drop over the control valve is calculated as

ෙS ෥P&  VHF 
 
EDU NJ  K 
N9 ˮ

P
. The following applies:
● ∆p = pB − pA is the pressure drop over the valve in bar
● P
& is the mass flow in kg/s
● ρ is the density of the medium in kg/m³
● kV is the flow coefficient in m3/h
The reference direction is defined for the mass flow P
& from connector A to connector B, which
means it is P
& ! for mass flow in the reference direction. The pressure drop therefore has a
negative value: ∆p < 0.
At the Position connector, the H position of the valve drive is given as a percentage for which
the drive component types of the SIMIT basic library, for example, can be used.
This position value is limited to the range 0 ≤ H ≤ 100%. The control valve position is mapped
using the control valve characteristic to the flow coefficient kV. The following applies
N9   +
෥ 
N9 69  69 
for a linear characteristic,

N9   + 
෥   
N9 69  69   
for a quadratic characteristic,
+
N9 ෥
69
N9
for an equal percentage characteristic.

Libraries
The position ratio
N9
69
N9
is applied here as a quotient consisting of the flow coefficient cV100 for a completely open value
(H = 100 %) and the flow coefficient kV0 for a completely closed valve (H = 0).
Any valve characteristic curves can be created with the Characteristic component type from the
SIMIT basic library. The characteristic component is simply placed upstream of the valve
Position input.
The linear characteristic is then configured at the control valve so that the characteristic
specified with the characteristic component is simply scaled with the factor (kV100 – kV0) / kV0 and
offset by kV0.
Parameters

Characteristic Set valve characteristic: Linear, Quadrat‐ – Linear
ic, EqualPercentage; modifiable online
Kvs Valve characteristic value kV100 with m3/h 360.0
kV100 ≥ kV0 + 10−6 m3/h; can be adjusted
online
kV0 ≥ 10−6 m3/h

ShowFlow Display of valve position in symbol – False
ShowFlowDirection Display of direction of flow in symbol – False
If ShowFlow is set to True , the valve position is displayed as shown in the figure below.
If ShowFlowDirection is also set to True, the valve position and direction of flow are displayed
as shown in the figure below.

Libraries
Operating window

Pressure drop Δp bar
Mass flow P
& kg/s
StopValve – non-return valve
Symbol
Function
The StopValve component type is used for simulation of a check valve. Depending on the flow
direction the pressure drop over the control valve is calculated as

 ෥P &  VHF 
   IRU P
& !
NJ  K 
 N9 ˮ

ෙS  P

EDU  ෥P &
 VHF 

 NJ
  IRU P
&
 K 
 N9 ˮ
 P
. The following applies:
● ∆p = pB − pA is the pressure drop over the non-return valve in bar,
● P
& is the mass flow in kg/s,
● p is the density of the medium in kg/m3 and
● kV is the flow coefficient in m3/h.
The reference direction is defined for the mass flow P
means it is P ! for mass flow in the reference direction.
&

Libraries
Parameters

Kvs Valve characteristic value kV100 with kV100 m /h
3
360.0
≥ kV0 + 10−6 m3/h
Kv0 Valve characteristic value kV0 with kV0 ≥ m3/h 0.000001
10−6 m3/h
In order to implement the non-return function, the flow coefficient kV0 must be sufficiently small.
Pump – pump
Symbol
Function
The Pump component type calculates the pressure increase as a function of flow rate and
speed according to the following formula:
P
&
ෙS IRU P
& !
P&
Whereby:
∆p = pB − pA is the pressure increase in bar,

P& is the mass flow in kg/s,
∆p0 is the zero flow head in bar,
∆p* is the nominal pressure boost in bar,
P& * is the nominal flow in kg/s and
n is the dimensionless speed value.
The reference direction is defined for the flow P
means the following applies for a flow in reference direction P
& ! .
The speed N is specified as a percentage value at the Speed input. The speed value is limited
to the range 0 ≤ N ≤ 100%. This means n = N / 100% and thus 0 ≤ n ≤ 1. You can, for example,
use the drives from the SIMIT basic library, as shown in the figure below.

Libraries
The quadratic relation between pressure boost and flow defined above is illustrated in the figure
below for operation of the pump in the normal range, which means for P & ! , ∆p > 0 .
3UHVVXUHERRVW ˂S
˂S
P ˂S
&
Q
Q ˂S
)ORZ P
&
QP& P
&

The pump characteristic is increased steadily, according to
P&
ෙS IRU P
&
N P&
when the flow is reversed ( P& ). The throttling effect can be influenced by means of the flow
coefficient k. The figure below shows the extended characteristic qualitatively for various
characteristic values k:

Libraries

3UHVVXUHERRVW

)ORZ
N
N
N
.
It is clear that the throttling effect is greater for smaller values of the flow coefficient k.
To stabilize a simulation that contains a component of this type, pressure reversal (∆p < 0) is
also calculated using the above equations. For switched off pumps, which means for zero
speed, this results in pure throttling for the flow in pump direction as well as for the flow against
pump direction:

ෙ S
෥ ෙ S P&
IRU P
&



N P&
ෙS 
 ෙ S ෥ ෙ S P
&
IRU P
& !

 P&
Parameters

ZeroFlowHead Zero flow head ∆p0, ∆p0 > ∆p*; can be bar 10.0
adjusted online
NominalPressure Nominal pressure ∆p*, ∆p* > 0; can be bar 8.0
adjusted online
NominalMassflow Rated mass flow ṁ*, ṁ* > 0; modifiable kg/s 10.0
online

Throttling positive flow characteristic k (k > 0) – 1.0
ShowFlow Display of operating state in symbol – False

Libraries
If the additional parameter Showflow is set to True, the operating state in shown in the pump
symbol.
Operating window

Pressure increase Δp bar
Flow rate P
& kg/s
Pnode – pressure setting
Symbol
Function
The Pnode component type specifies the values for pressure p and specific enthalpy h at its
connector A. This type of component forms a boundary for the flownet. When the flownet is
represented as a graph, it corresponds to an (external) node for which the pressure and specific
enthalpy are predefined.
Operating window

changed?
Pressure p bar Yes
(Default: 0)
(Default: 100)

Libraries

Mass flow P
& kg/s
Condensate pressure drop Δp bar

Density r kg/m³
Temperature T °C
For outflow P
& ! , for inflow P
& .
Mnode – mass flow setting
Symbol
Function
The Mnode component type specifies the values for mass flow P & and specific enthalpy h at its
connector A. This type of component forms a boundary for the flow network. When looking at
the flow network as a graph, this corresponds to an inflow or outflow into an (internal) node or
branch. An internal node with defined inflow or outflow is added to the flow network for each
Operating window

changed?
Mass flow P
& kg/s Yes
(Default: 0)
(Default: 100)

Pressure p bar
Density r kg/m³
Temperature T °C

Libraries
NetParam – network parameter assignment
Symbol
Function
The NetParam component type is used for flow network parameter assignment. To do so, the
component is added at any location in any branch of the flow network.
Parameters

Medium You can select "Water/Steam", "Liquid" – Water/Steam
or "Ideal Gas" as the medium in the flow
network
sCompressionGas Specific compression module for the bar/kg 10.0
"Water/Steam" medium with density ρ <
500 kg/m3 or the "Ideal Gas" medium
sCompressionLiquid Specific compression module for the bar/kg 100.0
"Water/Steam" medium with density ρ >
500 kg/m3 or the "Liquid" medium
FactorThermalGas Enthalpy balancing factor for the "Water/ 1/kg 100.0
Steam" medium with density ρ < 500
kg/m3 or the "Ideal Gas" medium
FactorThermalLiquid Enthalpy balancing factor for the "Water/ 1/kg 0.1
Steam" medium with density ρ > 500
kg/m3 or the "Liquid" medium
DensityLiquid Media density; only valid for "Liquid" me‐ kg/m3 997.337
dium
sHeatCapGas Specific heat capacity for gas; only valid kJ/kgK 1.0
for "Ideal Gas" medium
sHeatCapLiquid Specific heat capacity for liquids; only kJ/kgK 4.18
valid for "Liquid" medium
GasConstant Specific gas constant of the medium; on‐ kJ/kgK 0.287
ly valid for "Ideal Gas" medium

Libraries

work
tion
ment
des with the environment; there is no
heat exchange when the value is zero
BranchParam – branch parameter assignment
Symbol
Function
The BranchParam component type is used for branch parameter assignment in the flow
network. The components are placed anywhere along the branch to be assigned parameters.
Parameters

Joint – joint
Symbol

Libraries
Function
With the component type Joint, three branches connected to its connectors A, B and C can be
combined in a node. An internal node is added to the flow network with the component Joint .
Operating window

Pressure p bar
Density r kg/m³
Temperature T °C
JointParam – parameterizable joint
Symbol
Function
With the component type JointParam, three branches connected to its connectors A, B and C
can be combined in a node. An internal node is added to the flow network with the
component JointParam .
Parameters

m3)
sCompressionLiquid Specific compression module for high bar/kg 100.0
FactorThermalGas Factor for enthalpy balance calculation 1/kg 100.0
of low-density media (gases/vapors, ρ <
500 kg/m3)
FactorThermalLiquid Factor for enthalpy balancing for high 1/kg 0.1

Libraries

node
py in the node
ment
FactorHeatExchan‐ Proportionality factor for the heat ex‐ kW/K 0.0
the environment; for a value of zero, no
heat exchange occurs
Operating window

Pressure p bar
Density r kg/m³
Temperature T °C
8.2.6.2 Measuring components
Components for simulating measurements in pipeline networks can be found in the MEASURE
directory.

Libraries
Connectors of the Measure connection type are used in the measuring components. The
meaning of the individual signals for this type are given in the following table.
Table 8-43 Signals of the Measure connection type
Signal Meaning Unit

Temperature Temperature of measurement °C
Pressure Pressure of measurement bar
Level Measured level m
Weight Measured weight kg
Flow Measured flow kg/s
PipeMeasure – pipe measuring point
Symbol
Function
The PipeMeasure component type forms a measuring point in the tube. It is inserted with its
connectors A and B at the desired measuring point in the flownet. The measuring process for
the various variables is not simulated with suitable models; the variables calculated by the
flownet solution procedure are output.
The measured variables are output over the Measure connector:
● absolute value _P
& _ of the flow rate value,
● Pressure pA at connector A and
● Temperature T.
All other signals of connector Measure are not set.
When the simulation is running, the direction of the medium flow is indicated by an arrow on the
symbol.

Libraries
Operating window

Pressure p bar
Mass flow P
& kg/s
Temperature T °C

Density r kg/m³
Measurements – measurement indicators
Symbol
Function
Component type MeasureAll returns the measured values bundled over measuring
input Measure as individual signals at its outputs: pressure, temperature, flow, level and weight.
This type of component can be connected to the pipe measuring point, for example, and
thereby output its measurement variables as individual signals.

Libraries
Operating window

Pressure p bar
Temperature T °C
Mass flow P
& kg/s
Level l m
Weight M kg
FlowIndicator – flow measurement indicator
Symbol
Function
The FlowIndicator component type displays the flow specified using its Measure input.
Operating window

Mass flow P
& kg/s
LevelIndicator – level indicator
Symbol
Function
The LevelIndicator component type displays the level specified using its Measure input.

Libraries
Operating window

Level l m
PressureIndicator – pressure indicator
Symbol
Function
The PressureIndicator component type displays the pressure specified using its Measure input.
Operating window

Pressure p bar
TemperatureIndicator – temperature indicator
Symbol
Function
The TemperatureIndicator component type displays the temperature specified using
its Measure input.

Libraries
Operating window

Temperature T °C
WeightIndicator – weight indicator
Symbol
Function
The WeightIndicator component type displays the weight specified using its Measure input.
Operating window

Weight M kg

Libraries
8.2.6.3 Component types for "water/steam" medium
Component types that can be used in the flownet with the water/steam medium are located in
the MEDIUM\WATER.STEAM folder of the FLOWNET library. The medium parameter for a
flownet that contains these components must be set to the value "Water/Steam".
NetWS – water/steam network parameter assignment
Symbol
Function
The NetWS component type is used for parameter assignment for a water/steam network. To
do so, the component is added at any location in any branch of the flow network.

Libraries
Parameters

sCompressionSteam Specific compression modulus for densi‐ bar/kg 10.0
ty ρ < 500 kg/m3 (steam)
sCompressionWater Specific compression module for densi‐ bar/kg 100.0
ty ρ > 500 kg/m3 (water)
FactorThermalSteam Factor for enthalpy balancing for densi‐ 1/kg 100.0
FactorThermalWater Factor for enthalpy balancing for densi‐ 1/kg 0.1

work
tion
ment
PnodeWS – water/steam pressure setting
Symbol
Function
The PnodeWS component type specifies the values for pressure p and specific enthalpy h at
its connector A. This type of component forms a boundary for the flownet. When the flownet is
represented as a graph, it corresponds to an (external) node for which the pressure and specific
enthalpy are predefined.

Libraries
Operating window

changed?
Pressure p bar Yes
(Default: 1)
(Default: 100)

Mass flow P
& kg/s
Density r kg/m³
Temperature T °C
For outflow P
& ! , for inflow P
& .
MnodeWS – water/steam mass flow setting
Symbol
Function
The MnodeWS component type specifies the values for mass flow P & and specific enthalpy h
at its connector A. This type of component forms a boundary for the flow network. When looking
at the flow network as a graph, this corresponds to an inflow or outflow into an (internal) node
or branch. An internal node with defined inflow or outflow is added to the flow network for each
Operating window

changed?
Mass flow P
& kg/s Yes
(Default: 0)
(Default: 100)

Libraries

Pressure p bar
Density r kg/m³
Temperature T °C
JointWS – water/steam joint
Symbol
Function
With the component type JointWS, three branches connected to its connectors A, B and C can
be combined in a node. An internal node is added to the flow network with the
component JointWS.
Operating window

Pressure p bar
Density r kg/m³
Temperature T °C
JointParamWS – water/steam parameterizable joint
Symbol
Function
With the component type JointParamWS, three branches connected to its connectors A, B
and C can be combined in a node. An internal node is added to the flow network with the
component JointParamWS.

Libraries
Parameters

sCompressionSteam Specific compression modulus for densi‐ bar/kg 10.0
sCompressionWater Specific compression module for densi‐ bar/kg 100.0
FactorThermalSteam Factor for enthalpy balancing for densi‐ 1/kg 100.0
FactorThermalWater Factor for enthalpy balancing for densi‐ 1/kg 0.1

node
py in the node
ment
FactorHeatExchan‐ Proportionality factor for the heat ex‐ kW/K 0.0
the environment; for a value of zero, no
heat exchange occurs
Operating window

Pressure p bar
Density r kg/m³
Temperature T °C
StorageTankWS – water/steam storage tank
Symbol

Libraries
Function
The StorageTankWS component type provides the simulation with an open water tank, which
means a tank that is not sealed from the environment.
Inflows and outflows occur via the STUBx connectors on the tank. For each of the N connectors,
a throttling effect defined by

ෙS ෥P &  VHF 
 
EDU NJ  K 
N9 ˮ
P
is assumed. The tank can have a minimum of one and a maximum of 16 connectors. The
connectors can be moved to any position on the outline of the component symbol by using the
mouse while simultaneously pressing ALT.
It is assumed that the water in the tank is immediately completely mixed, which means a
homogenous medium with an overall consistent density and enthalpy in the tank.
The inflows and outflows of water are balanced across the N connectors of the tank. The
balanced mass M of the N flow rates P & L of the medium in the tank is thus defined by
G0 1
GW ෤ P& L
L
The water volume balancing via the volume flows results in the rate of change of density ρ given
by
1 1
Gˮ ˮ  
GW 0
 ෤ P& L ෥ ˮ ෤ P& 
ˮL L 
 L L ෛ = L L ෛ =
where only the inflows (i ∈ Z) need to be summed.

The specific enthalpy of the water is determined from the enthalpy balance according to
1 1
GK  
GW 0
 ෤ KL P& L ෥ K ෤ P& 
ˮL L 
 L L ෛ = L L ෛ =
. Here, too, only the inflows (i ∈ Z) need to be summed.

The dynamic behavior of the water in the tank is described by these balances for mass M,
density ρ and specific enthalpy h.
The variables calculated for the level l of water in the drum, its mass M and temperature T and
the pressure p0 at the floor of the drum are output at the Measure connector. The temperature T
is calculated using the equation of state
T = T(ρ,h)
from the density and specific enthalpy of the water. The pressure ρ on the tank base is
calculated as the sum of the weight pressure ρgl of the water and the atmospheric pressure ρU
according to
p = pU + ρgl.

Libraries

value kv0 for maximum throttling of all connectors through which water flows out.
The tank is considered empty when the tank fill level V is lower than a specified minimum tank
filling Vmin:
V < Vmin
When the tank is empty, balancing of the states is stopped, which means changes to the three
state variables mass, density and specific enthalpy are rejected. The empty state continues
until there is a sufficient increase in the fill level. In each increment the validity of
 + 
0 ุ 9PLQ ˮ  PLQ 
 
is checked. The required increase can be set with the hysteresis Hmin. A corresponding indicator
for an empty tank is shown in the component symbol.

For a full tank, the balanced contents are limited in the calculation of the state variables
according to:
M = Vρ
A corresponding indicator is shown in the symbol.
Note
It is not checked whether the state variables (pressure, enthalpy) for the inflows and tank
contents always have values for the water state.
In the simulation, inflows specified accordingly may result in a situation where the state values
for the tank contents describe a water-steam mixture or pure steam, which has no physical
meaning.

Libraries
Parameters

10.0
online
NbrOfStubs Number N of connectors – 1

PressureOutside Atmospheric pressure pU; can be adjus‐ bar 1.0
ted online
LevelInit Initialization value for the level % 50.0
EnthalpyInit Initialization value for the specific enthal‐ kJ/kg 100.0
py in the contents
DensityInit Initialization value for the density of the kg/m3 997.337
contents
tors
ted online
Operating window

Level l m
Pressure p bar
Temperature T °C
Weight M kg

Libraries
DrumWS – water/steam drum
Symbol
Function
The DrumWS component type provides the simulation with a drum, which means a closed
container for water/steam that is sealed off from the environment.
The drum is assumed to be a cylindrical, horizontal or vertically standing container, whose
inflows and outflows occur via the STUBWx and/or STUBSx connectors. For each of the
connectors, a throttling effect defined by

 
EDU NJ  K 
N9 ˮ
P
is assumed. At the NW connectors STUBWx, medium with the state variables of the saturated
water can be drawn out and medium with the state variables of saturated steam can be drawn
out at the NS connector STUBSx. The drum can have a minimum of one and a maximum of eight
connectors of each type. The connectors can be moved to any position on the outline of the
component symbol by using the mouse while simultaneously pressing ALT.
It is assumed that the medium in the drum immediately separates into two homogenous
saturated phases: the saturated liquid phase and the saturated vapor phase.
The inflows and outflows of water/steam are balanced via the N = NW + NS drum connectors.
This results in a mass of water and steam in the drum, balanced via the mass flows, given by
G0 1
GW ෤ P& L
L
or given
M = ρV
the change of the average density to
Gˮ 1
9
GW ෤ P& L
L
The energy is further balanced according to

Libraries
G K0 1
GW ෤ K P& L L
L
Whereby h is the specific enthalpy (mean enthalpy) of water/steam in the drum and hi is the
specific enthalpy of the inflow and outflow at the i-th connector. The specific enthalpy of the
medium in the drum must be applied for outflows, which means h'' for outflows of saturated
water and h" for outflows of saturated steam. The balancing is calculated as follows
GK 1 1 1
0
GW ෤ KL ෥ K P& L Kಿ ෥ K ෤ P& L Kಿಿ ෥ K ෤ P& L
Whereby the inflows Z, outflows of saturated water A' and/or outflows of saturated steam A" are
summed.
In order to model a heat exchange with an ideally insulated drum, the enthalpy balance
equation is extended as follows
GK 1 1 1
0
GW ෤ KL ෥ K P& L Kಿ ෥ K ෤ P& L Kಿಿ ෥ K ෤ P& L $ ˞ 77 ෥ 76
TT is the temperature of the drum wall, TS is the saturation temperature of water/steam.
The heat storage in the drum wall is described by the heat balance
G77
$ ˞ 76 ෥77
GW 07 F7
.
The water level l, the saturation temperature TS, the saturation pressure pS and the mass M of
water/steam are output at the Measure connector.
The STUBWx connectors are assumed to be located at the bottom of the drum. The pressure
at these connectors therefore is the sum
p = p'gl + pS
of the saturated steam and the hydrostatic pressure of the water.
Borderline case "empty drum"

When the drum is empty, the outflow is strongly throttled. The flow coefficient is thereby set to
the value kV0 for maximum throttling of all connectors through which water or steam flows out.
The drum is considered empty when the fill level MW/ρ is lower than a specified minimum fill level
Vmin:
MW < Vminρ.
When the drum is empty, balancing of the states is stopped, which means changes to the
density and specific enthalpy are rejected. The empty state continues until there is a sufficient
increase in the amount of water. In each increment the validity of

Libraries
 + 
0 : ุ 9PLQ ˮ  PLQ 
 
for an empty drum is shown in the component symbol.
Borderline case "full drum"

The drum is regarded as full when the amount of water reaches the maximum possible value:
MW < (V − Vmin) ρ.
When the drum is full, balancing of the states is stopped, which means changes to the density
and specific enthalpy are rejected. The full state continues until there is a sufficient decrease
in the amount of water. In each increment the validity of
 + 
0 : ื ˮ9 ෥ ˮ9PLQ  PLQ 
 
is checked. The required decrease can be set with the hysteresis Hmin. A corresponding
indicator for a full drum is shown in the component symbol.
Parameters

NbrOfStubsW Number NW the STUBWx connectors – 1
NbrOfStubsS Number NS of STUBSx connectors – 1
Position Position of the drum: Vertically or Hori‐ – Vertically
zontally
VolumeDrum Volume V of the drum; can be adjusted m3 10.0
online
HeightOrLength Height or length of the drum; can be ad‐ m 5.0
justed online
MassDrum Mass MT of the drum; can be adjusted kg 5000.0
online
SurfaceDrum Inner surface A of the drum; can be ad‐ m2 12.5
justed online

Libraries

sHeatCapDrum Specific heat capacity cT of the drum; can kJ/kgK 0.5
be adjusted online
HeatTransCoe Heat transfer coefficient α for water/ kW/m2K 4.0
steam of the drum; can be adjusted on‐
line

VolumeInit Initialization value for the volume of water % 50.0
TemperatureInit Initialization value for the temperature of °C 20.0
water/steam (saturation temperature)
tors
in the drum connector
MinVolume Minimal drum volume Vmin; can be adjus‐ m3 0.01
ted online
Operating window

changed?
Water level L m Yes1
Saturation temperature T °C Yes1
Weight of water/steam M kg Yes1
Saturation pressure pB bar No
Water pressure pG bar No
Container temperature TDrum °C No
1
● Mix: Intermediate variables
● Water: Variables for saturated water
● Steam: Variables for saturated steam

Density r kg/m³

Libraries
ElectricalHeaterWS – electrically heated heat exchanger for water/steam
Symbol
Function
The ElectricalHeaterWS component type is used for simulation of an electric heat exchanger.
The electrical heating power Pel is specified in kW with connector ElectricalPower.
Water/steam is directed via the TS_IN and TS_OUT connectors as a heated medium. The flow
P
& is throttled according to the relationship

ෙS ෥P
&  VHF 
 
EDU NJ  K 
N9 ˮ76
P
with throttle coefficient kV. The reference direction for the flow is chosen as from TS_IN to
TS_OUT.
For the heat transfer, a simple one tube model divided into segments is applied. The number N
of segments can be set to a value between 4 and 16.

P
& K +76 +7 3HO
76 76
+76 +7
... ...
+761 +71
① Tube side
② Tube
It is assumed that the supplied electrical energy is completely converted into heat. The heat
balance for a segment i of the spare tube with extremely simplified heat transfer is then given
by
G77L
D7 3HO E7 776L ෥ 77L
GW

Libraries
with
$ 76 ˞76
D7 E7
07 F7 07 F7
In addition, the water/steam-side enthalpy balancing for a segment i is described by
GK76L
D76 K76 L෥ ෥ K76L E76 77L ෥ 776L
GW
with
1P & $76 ˞76

D76 E76
ˮ76976 ˮ76976
TT,i and TTS,i are the temperatures of the tube segments and of the medium in the segments, and
hT,i and hTS,iare the corresponding specific enthalpies.
Parameters

NbrOfSegments Number N of segments: 4 ≤ N ≤ 16 – 4
Kvs Throttle coefficient kV m3/h 360.0
Volume Volume VTS of the medium (inner tube m3 2.25
volume)
Surface Surface ATS of the tube on the water/ m2 550.0
steam side
HeatTransCoef Heat transfer coefficient αTS of the tube to kW/m2K 4.0
water/steam
sHeatCapTube Specific heat capacity cT of the tube kJ/kgK 1.3
MassTube Mass MT of the tube kg 10000.0
Operating window

Flow P
& kg/s

Enthalpy difference Δh kJ/kg
Temperatures for first and last T1 / TN °C
segment, separated by tube and
the heated medium
Electrical heat output Pel kW

Libraries
HeatExchangerWS – heat exchanger water/steam to water/steam
Symbol
Function
The HeatExchangerWS component type is used for simulation of a heat exchanger for water/
steam at the tube and shell side. The simulation is implemented for the three types:
● Parallel-flow heat exchanger
● Counter-flow heat exchanger
● Cross-flow heat exchanger
The flow P
& is throttled on the tube side and shell side according to the relationship

 
EDU NJ  K 
N9 ˮ
P
with the relevant throttle coefficient kv. The chosen reference direction for the flow is from
connector _IN to _OUT on the tube side and shell side.
① Tube-side space
② Tube
The water/steam heat on the tube and shell side and the heat in the tube itself are balanced.

Libraries
7XEHVLGHPHGLXP K76 776

4& 76LQ 4& 76RXW
4& 776
7XEH 77
4& 667
4& 66LQ 4& 66RXW
6KHOOVLGHPHGLXP K66 766
The two heat transfers, from the shell side medium to the tube and from the tube to the tube side
medium, are set according to
4& 66 ෥7 $66 T&66 ෥7 $66 ˞66 766 ෥ 77
4& 7 ෥76 $76 T&7 ෥76 $76 ˞76 77 ෥ 776

in an extremely simplified manner. For each segment i the heat balances
GK76L
D76 K76 L෥ ෥ K76L E76 77L ෥ 776L
GW
G77 L
D7 766 L ෥ 77 L E7 776 L ෥ 77 L
GW
GK66 L
D66 K66 L෥ ෥ K66 L E66 77L ෥ 766 L
GW
apply with the following coefficients, which are the same for all segments:
1P & 76 $76 ˞76 1P & 66 $66 ˞66 $66 ˞66 $76 ˞76
D 76 E76 D66 E66 D7 E7
ˮ76976 ˮ76976 ˮ66966 ˮ66966 0 7 F7 07 F7
The values set for the media in the shell side and tube side of the flownet apply to the densities
ρTS, ρSS and the specific heat capacities cTS, cSS.
For initialization, the temperatures of the tube segments are set to the temperature of the tube-
side medium, calculated on the basis of the pressure (input FNTS.PRESSURE) and the
specific enthalpy (input FNTS.HSPEC).

Libraries
Parameters

Type Type of heat exchanger: Parallel‐ – ParallelFlow
Flow, CounterFlow, CrossFlow
KvsSS Shell side throttle coefficient kV m3/h 360.0
KvsTS Tube side throttle coefficient kV m3/h 360.0
VolumeSS Shell side volume VSS m3 1.65
VolumeTS Tube side volume VTS m 3
2.25
SurfaceSS Shell-side surface ASS of the tube (exteri‐ m2 720.0
or surface of the tube)
SurfaceTS Tube side surface ATSof the tube (interior m2 550.0
surface of the tube)
HeatTransCoefSS Heat transfer coefficient αSS on the tube kW/m2K 4.0
exterior
HeatTransCoefTS Heat transfer coefficient αTS on the tube kW/m2K 4.0
interior
Operating window

Flow P
& kg/s

Enthalpy difference Δh kJ/kg
segment, by
● Tube
● Medium (shell side)
● Medium (tube side)

Libraries
8.2.6.4 Component types for liquid medium
Component types that can be used in the flownet with the liquid medium are located in the
directory MEDIUM\LIQUID of the FLOWNET library. The medium parameter for a flownet that
contains these components should be set to the value "Liquid", if applicable.
NetLiquid – liquid network parameter assignment
Symbol
Function
The NetLiquid component type is used for parameter assignment for a liquid network. To do so,
the component is added at any location in any branch of the flow network.

Libraries
Parameters

Density Density of the liquid kg/m 3
997.337
sHeatCapacity Specific heat capacity of the liquid kJ/kgK 4.18
sCompression Specific compression modulus of the liq‐ bar/kg 100.0
uid
FactorThermal Factor for enthalpy balancing 1/kg 0.1

TemperatureInit Initialization value for the temperature in °C 20.0
the internal nodes of the flownet
ment
PnodeLiquid – liquid pressure setting
Symbol
Function
The PnodeLiquid component type specifies the values for pressure and temperature at its
connector. It forms a boundary for the flownet to which it is connected. When you look at the
flow network as a graph, PnodeLiquid represents an (external) node for which the pressure and
temperature specifications are fixed.

Libraries
Operating window

changed?
Pressure p bar Yes
(Default: 1)
(Default: 20)

Mass flow P
& kg/s
Density r kg/m³
Temperature T °C
For outflow P
& ! , for inflow P
& .
MnodeLiquid – liquid mass flow setting
Symbol
Function
The MnodeLiquid component type specifies the values for mass flow and temperature at its
flow network as a graph, MnodeLiquid represents an inflow or outflow into an (internal) node or
branch. Thus an internal node with a defined inflow or outflow is added to the flownet.
Operating window

changed?
Mass flow P
& kg/s Yes
(Default: 0)
(Default: 20)

Libraries

Pressure p bar
Density r kg/m³
Temperature T °C
JointLiquid – liquid joint
Symbol
Function
With the component type JointLiquid, three branches connected to its connectors can be
combined in a node. All connectors are equal. An internal node is added to the flow network with
the component JointLiquid.
Operating window

Pressure p bar
Temperature T °C
JointParamLiquid – liquid parameterizable joint
Symbol
Function
With the component type JointParamLiquid, three branches connected to its connectors can be
the component JointParamLiquid. This node can be assigned parameters.

Libraries
Parameters

sHeatCapacity Specific heat capacity of the liquid kJ/kgK 4.18
sCompression Specific compression modulus of the liq‐ bar/kg 100.0
uid

node
the node
ment
the environment; there is no heat ex‐
change when the value is zero
Operating window

Pressure p bar
Temperature T °C
StorageTankLiquid – liquid storage tank
Symbol
Function
The StorageTankLiquid component type provides the simulation with an open tank for liquids,
which means a tank that is not sealed from the environment.

Libraries

 
EDU NJ  K 
N9 ˮ
P
It is assumed that the liquid in the tank is immediately completely mixed, which means it is a
homogenous medium with an overall consistent density and temperature.
The inflows and outflows are balanced across the N connectors of the tank. The balanced mass
M of the N mass flows P & L of the liquid in the tank, is defined by
G0 1
GW ෤ P& L
L
The temperature of the liquid is balanced as a mixing temperature from the inflows (i ∈ Z)
according to
1 1
G7  
GW 0
 ෤ KL P& L ෥ 7 ෤ P& 
ˮL L 
 F/ L L ෛ = L L ෛ =
.
The dynamic behavior of the liquid in the tank is described by these balances for mass M and
temperature T.
The calculated variables for the level l of the liquid in the tank, its mass M and temperature T as
well as pressure p0 on the tank base are output at the Measure connector. The pressure p on
the tank base is calculated from the weight pressure ρgl of the liquid and the atmospheric
pressure pU according to
p = pU + ρgl

value kv0 for maximum throttling of all connectors through which the medium flows out.
The tank is considered empty when the tank fill level V is lower than a specified minimum tank
filling Vmin:
V < Vmin
When the tank is empty, balancing of the states is stopped, which means changes to the mass
and temperature of the liquid are rejected. The empty state continues until there is a sufficient
increase in the fill level. In each increment the validity of

Libraries
 + 
0 ุ 9PLQ ˮ  PLQ 
 

For a full tank, only the balanced contents are limited in the calculation:
M = Vρ
A corresponding indicator is shown in the symbol.
Parameters

10.0
online

PressureOutside Atmospheric pressure pU; can be adjus‐ bar 1.0
ted online
LevelInit Initialization value for the level % 50.0
the contents
tors

Libraries

Density Density ρ of the liquid in the tank kg/m3 997.337
sHeatCapacity Specific heat capacity cL of the liquid in kJ/kgK 4.18
the tank
ted online
Operating window

Level l m
Pressure p bar
Temperature T °C
Weight M kg
ElectricalHeaterLiquid – electrically heated heat exchanger for liquid
Symbol
Function
The ElectricalHeaterLiquid component type is used for simulation of an electric heat
exchanger. The electrical heating power Pel is specified in kW with connector ElectricalPower .
The liquid is directed via the connectors TS_IN and TS_OUT as a heated medium. The flow P
&
is throttled according to the relationship

 
EDU NJ  K 
N9 ˮ

P
TS_OUT.

Libraries

PF
& 7 +/ +7 3HO
/ /
+/ +7
... ...
+/1 +71
① Tube side
② Tube
by
G77L
D7 3HO E7 7/L ෥ 77L
GW
with
$˞
D7 E7
07 F7 07 F7
In addition, the heat balance of the liquid in a segment i is given by
G7/ L
D 7/ L ෥ ෥ 7/ L E 77L ෥ 7/ L
GW
with
1P& $˞
D E
ˮ9 F/ ˮ 9
TT,i and TL,i are the temperatures of the tube segment and the liquid in the segment i. The values
of the flow network apply for the density ρ and the specific heat capacity cL of the liquid.
Parameters

Kvs Throttle coefficient kV m3/h 360.0
Volume Volume V of the liquid (inner tube vol‐ m3 2.25
ume)
Surface Surface A of the tube interior m2 550.0

Libraries

HeatTransCoef Heat transfer coefficient α from tube to kW/m2K 4.0
liquid

TemperatureInit Temperature for liquid and tube when the °C 20.0
heat exchanger is initialized
Operating window

Flow P
& kg/s

Temperature difference ΔT °C
Temperatures for first and last T1/ TN °C
segment, separated by tube and
the heated liquid
HeatExchangerLiquid – heat exchanger liquid to liquid
Symbol
Function
The HeatExchangerLiquid component type is used for simulation of a heat exchanger for
liquids at the tube and shell side. The simulation is implemented for the three types:

Libraries
The flow P

ෙS ෥P
&  VHF 
 
EDU NJ  K 
N9 ˮ76
P
① Tube-side space
② Tube
The liquid heat on the tube and shell side and the heat in the tube itself are balanced.
7XEHVLGHPHGLXP 776
4& 76LQ 4& 76RXW
4& 776
7XEH 77
4& 667
4& 66LQ 4& 66RXW
6KHOOVLGHPHGLXP 766
The two heat transfers, from the shell side liquid to the tube and from the tube to the tube side
liquid, are set according to
4& 66 ෥7 $66 T&66 ෥7 $66 ˞66 766 ෥ 77
4& 7 ෥76 $76 T&7 ෥76 $76 ˞76 77 ෥ 776


Libraries
G776L
D76 776 L෥ ෥ 776L E76 77L ෥ 776L
GW
G77 L
D7 766 L ෥ 77 L E7 776 L ෥ 77 L
GW
G766 L
D66 766 L෥ ෥ 766 L E66 77L ෥ 766 L
GW
1P & 76 $76 ˞76 1P & 66 $66 ˞66 $66 ˞66 $76 ˞76
D 76 E76 D66 E66 D7 E7
ˮ76976 ˮ76976 ˮ66966 ˮ66966 0 7 F7 07 F7
The values set for the liquid in the shell side and tube side of the flownet apply to the densities
ρTS, ρSS and the specific heat capacities cTS, cSS.
For initialization, the temperatures of the tube segments are set to the temperature of the tube
side medium, calculated from the specific enthalpy ( FNTS.HSPEC input).
Parameters

KvsSS Shell side throttle coefficient kV m /h3
360.0
KvsTS Tube side throttle coefficient kV m /h3
360.0
VolumeTS Tube side volume VTS m 3
2.25
exterior
interior

Libraries
Operating window

Flow P
& kg/s

segment, by
● Tube
● Liquid (shell side)
● Liquid (tube side)
8.2.6.5 Component types for gas medium
Component types that can be used in the flownet with the gas medium are located in the
directory MEDIUM\GAS of the FLOWNET library. The medium parameter for a flownet that
contains these components should be set to the value "Ideal Gas", if applicable.

Libraries
NetGas – gas network parameter assignment
Symbol
Function
The NetGas component type is used for parameter assignment for a gas network. To do so, the
component is added at any location in any branch of the flow network.
Parameters

GasConstant Specific gas constant kJ/kgK 0.287
sHeatCapacity Specific heat capacity of the gas kJ/kgK 1.0
sCompression Specific compression modulus of the gas bar/kg 10.0

the internal nodes of the flownet
ment
PnodeGas – gas pressure setting
Symbol

Libraries
Function
The PnodeGas component type specifies the values for pressure and temperature at its
flow network as a graph, PnodeGas represents an (external) node for which the pressure and
temperature specifications are fixed.
Operating window

changed?
Pressure p bar Yes
(Default: 1)
(Default: 20)

Mass flow P
& kg/s
Density r kg/m³
Temperature T °C
For outflow P
& ! , for inflow P
& .
MnodeGas – gas mass flow setting
Symbol
Function
The MnodeGas component type specifies the values for mass flow and temperature at its
flow network as a graph, Mnode represents an inflow or outflow into an (internal) node or
branch. Thus an internal node with a defined inflow or outflow is added to the flownet.

Libraries
Operating window

changed?
Mass flow P
& kg/s Yes
(Default: 0)
(Default: 20)

Pressure p bar
Density r kg/m³
Temperature T °C
For outflow P
& ! , for inflow P
& .
JointGas – gas joint
Symbol
Function
With the component type JointGas, three branches connected to its connectors can be
the component JointGas.
Operating window

Pressure p bar
Temperature T °C
Density r kg/m³

Libraries
JointParamGas – parameterizable joint
Symbol
Function
With the component type JointParamGas, three branches connected to its connectors can be
the component JointParamGas. This node can be assigned parameters.
Parameters

GasConstant Specific gas constant kJ/kgK 0.287
sHeatCapacity Specific heat capacity of the gas kJ/kgK 1.0
sCompression Specific compression modulus of the gas bar/kg 10.0

node
the node
ment
the environment; there is no heat ex‐
change when the value is zero
Operating window

Pressure p bar
Temperature T °C
Density r kg/m³

Libraries
StorageTankGas – gas storage tank
Symbol
Function
The StorageTankGas component type provides the simulation of a gas tank.

 
EDU NJ  K 
N9 ˮ

P
It is assumed that the gas in the tank is immediately completely mixed, which means a
homogenous medium in the tank with an overall consistent density and temperature in the tank.
The inflows and outflows are balanced across the N connectors of the tank. The balanced mass
M of the N flow rates P& L of the gas in the tank, is defined by
G0 1
GW ෤ P& L
L
The specific enthalpy h of the gas is balanced from the inflows (i ∈ Z) according to
1 1
GK  
GW 0
 ෤ KL P& L ෥ K ෤ P&  L
 L L ෛ = L L ෛ = 
.
The dynamic behavior of the gas in the tank is described by these balances for mass M and
specific enthalpy h.
At the connector Measure, the variables for pressure p, temperature
K
7
F*

Libraries
and mass M of the gas are output. The pressure is calculated from the equation for ideal gas:
56 7 . 0
S
3D
9 ຘ
EDU

value kv0 for maximum throttling of all connectors through which gas flows out.
The tank is considered empty when the fill level M is lower than a specified minimum tank fill
level Mmin:
M < Mmin
When the tank is empty, balancing of the states is stopped, which means changes to the mass
and specific enthalpy of the gas are rejected. The empty state continues until there is a
sufficient increase in the fill level. In each increment the validity of
 + 
0 ุ 0 PLQ  PLQ 
 

In order to limit the pressure in the tank to meaningful values while the simulation is running, the
tank is considered full when its pressure p reaches a specified maximum pressure pmax:
p < pmax
When the tank is full, the inflow is strongly throttled. The flow coefficient is thereby set to the
value kv0 for maximum throttling of all connectors through which gas flows in.
When the tank is full, balancing of the states is stopped, which means changes to the mass and
specific enthalpy of the gas are rejected. The full state continues until there is a sufficient
decrease ∆M in the fill level. In each increment the validity of
 + 
ෙ0 ุ 0 PLQ  PLQ 
 

Libraries
is checked. The required decrease can be set with the hysteresis Hmin. A corresponding
indicator for a full tank is shown in the component symbol.
Parameters

10.0
online

PressureInit Initialization value for pressure; can be bar 1.0
adjusted online
the gas
PressureMax Maximum tank pressure pmax; can be ad‐ bar 100.0
justed online
tors
Kv0 Flow coefficient kV0 for maximum throt‐ m3/h 0.000001
tling in the tank connector
GasConstant Specific gas constant RS for the gas in kJ/kgK 0.287
the tank
sHeatCapacity Specific heat capacity cG of the gas in the kJ/kgK 1.0
tank
MinMass Minimum fill quantity Mmin of the tank; can kg 0.015
be adjusted online
MinMassHys Hysteresis Hmin; can be adjusted online % 50.0
Operating window

Pressure p bar
Temperature T °C
Mass of the gas M kg

Libraries
ElectricalHeaterGas – electrically heated heat exchanger for gas
Symbol
Function
The ElectricalHeaterGas component type is used for simulation of an electric gas heat
exchanger. The electrical heating power Pel is specified in kW with connector ElectricalPower.
The heated gas is directed via the connectors TS_IN and TS_OUT. The flow P
& is throttled
according to the relationship

ෙS ෥P
&  VHF 
 
EDU NJ  K 
N9 ˮ76
P
TS_OUT.

PF
& 7 +* +7 3HO
* *
+* +7
... ...
+*1 +71
① Tube side
② Tube
by
G7*L
D7 3HO E7 7*L ෥ 77L
GW

Libraries
with
$˞
D7 E7
07 F7 07 F7
In addition, the heat balance of the gas in a segment i is given by
G7*L
D 7* L ෥ ෥ 7*L E 77L ෥ 7*L
GW
with
1P& $˞
D E
ˮ9 F* ˮ9
TT,i and TG,i are the temperatures of the tube segment and the gas in segment i. The values of
the flow network apply for the density ρ and the specific heat capacity cG of the gas.
Parameters

Kvs Throttle coefficient kV m /h3
360.0
Volume Volume V of the gas (inner tube volume) m3 2.25
Surface Surface A of the tube interior m 2
550.0
HeatTransCoef Heat transfer coefficient α from tube to kW/m2K 0.1
gas

TemperatureInit Temperature for liquid and tube when the °C 20.0
heat exchanger is initialized
Operating window

Flow P
& kg/s


Libraries

segment, by tube and gas
HeatExchangerGas – heat exchanger gas to gas
Symbol
Function
The HeatExchangerGas component type is used to simulate a heat exchanger for the gases on
the tube side and shell side. The simulation is implemented for these three types:
The flow P

ෙS ෥P
&  VHF 
 
EDU NJ  K 
N9 ˮ76
P

Libraries
① Tube-side space
② Tube
The gas heat on the tube and shell side and the heat in the tube itself are balanced.
7XEHVLGHPHGLXP 776
4& 76LQ 4& 76RXW
4& 776
7XEH 77
4& 667
4& 66LQ 4& 66RXW
6KHOOVLGHPHGLXP 766
The two heat transfers, from the shell side gas to the tube, and from the tube to the tube side
gas are set according to
4& 66 ෥7 $66 T&66 ෥7 $66 ˞66 766 ෥ 77
4& 7 ෥76 $76 T&7 ෥76 $76 ˞76 77 ෥ 776

G776L
D76 776 L෥ ෥ 776L E76 77L ෥ 776L
GW
G77 L
D7 766 L ෥ 77 L E7 776 L ෥ 77 L
GW
GK66 L
D66 K66 L෥ ෥ K66 L E66 77L ෥ 766 L
GW

Libraries
1P & 76 $76 ˞76 1P & 66 $66 ˞66 $66 ˞66 $76 ˞76
D 76 E76 D66 E66 D7 E7
ˮ76976 F76 ˮ76976 ˮ66966 F66 ˮ66966 0 7 F7 07 F7
The values set for the gases in the shell side and tube side of the flownet apply to the densities
pTS, ρSS and the specific heat capacities cTS, cSS.
For initialization, the temperatures of the tube segments are set to the temperature of the tube
side gas, calculated from the specific enthalpy ( FNTS.HSPEC input).
Parameters

KvsSS Shell side throttle coefficient kV m /h3
360.0
KvsTS Tube side throttle coefficient kV m3/h 360.0
VolumeTS Tube side volume VTS m3 2.25
exterior
interior
Operating window

Flow P
& kg/s

segment, by
● Tube
● Gas (shell side)
● Gas (tube side)

Libraries
8.2.7 Creating your own component types for flownets
The CTE component type editor enables you to create your own component types, which utilize
the mechanisms of the FLOWNET process. You can expand the functions of the components
supplied with the FLOWNET library, for example, add physical effects that are not covered by
the supplied library components and thus enhance your flownet simulations. You can also
extend the FLOWNET library by creating your own component types from scratch.
Two aspects must be considered when creating components:
● The topological aspects
● The connection to the solution procedure
The topological aspect is covered by appropriate extensions to the component type definition.
Special connection types are provided for the connection to the solution procedure.
In addition, the general descriptions of component properties in the "SIMIT – Component Type
Editor" manual form the basis for creating flownet components. The general properties also
apply in full to flownet components.
8.2.7.1 Topological properties
The topology of a flownet is automatically determined when compiling a simulation project from
interconnected flownet components. Each flownet component must thus provide relevant
topological information about itself, which means information about how it is to be treated
topologically in the flownet. From a topological point of view it is necessary to know how the
reference directions for variables in a flownet are defined for a component and how the data
exchange between the component and the solution procedure for the flownet is set up.
The flownet elements with topological information are:
● Internal nodes
● External nodes
● Branch objects
Relationships with the topological connectors of the flownet component must be defined for
each of these elements. To do this, open the topology editor by double-clicking on the Topology
node in the navigation of the component type.

Libraries
Connectors of the FLN1 connector type

The FLN1 connection type indicates the connectors of flownet components that are used to
connect with one another. The topology of a flownet is derived from interconnected connectors
of this type and the topological information on the individual flownet components. FLN1 is
therefore a purely topological connection type, which means it does not carry any signals.
Connectors of this type are simply referred to below as topological connectors. Topological
connectors are represented by circles.
&RQQHFWRUVRIW\SH
)/1
If topological connectors are connected with each other by a connecting line in the chart editor,
then the connected connectors are hidden. They are still visible only as pale shadows.
They can also be joined by superimposing the connectors. Once linked, both connectors are
hidden.

Libraries
Topology of the internal node

An internal flownet node is defined as follows in a component type in the topology description:
INTERNAL_NODE i;
Topological connectors of the component must also be assigned to this internal node. Three
connectors can be assigned in the topological description as per the example below:
FROM i TO a;
FROM i TO b;
FROM i TO c;
The three connectors a, b and c must be defined as type FLN1 connectors in the component
type. The figure below shows a diagram of the resulting topological structure of the component
type.
Topology of the external node

External nodes represent the boundaries of the flownet. External nodes can be used to
predefine pressures and enthalpies in nodes and inflows and outflows for the flownet.
In the topological description of a component type, an external node e is defined as follows:
EXTERNAL_NODE e;
This external node must be also be linked to at least one topological connector of the
component. The topology description is, for example, to be completed as
FROM e TO a;
. The topological connector a must be defined in the component type as a connector of type
FLN1. The figure below shows a diagram of the resulting topological structure of the component
type.
Topology of a branch object

Branch objects are part of a flownet branch, such as throttling of pressure.

Libraries
The reference direction for the variables of a branch object is defined in the topological
description of the flownet component. For example, the definition
FROM a TO b;
defines the branch object with a reference direction from connector a to connector b of the
component. Both of the topological connectors a and b must be defined in the component type
as connectors of type FLN1.
Flow variables are positive in the reference direction. For a branch object, these are the mass
& and the enthalpy flow + PK
flow P & .
Reference direction
Pressure boosts are applied in the reference direction, which means the pressure change is
defined here as
∆p = pb − pa
. For pressure drops in the reference direction (throttling), ∆p is therefore negative and positive
∆p for pressure boosts in the reference direction.
8.2.7.2 Connection to the solution procedure
The flownet objects of a component and the flownet solution procedure exchange data via
special flownet connectors. There are six different connector types FLN2 to FLN7 available for
this purpose. Their use in flownet componetns is explained in the sections Connector type
FLN2 for branch objects (Page 777) to Connection type FLN7 for parameter assignment of an
internal node (Page 782).
)ORZQHWFRPSRQHQWV
)/1 )/1 )/1 )/1 )/1 )/1
)ORZQHWVROXWLRQPHWKRG
Connectors of the types FNL2 to FNL7 provide a connection to the flownet solution procedure
and therefore must be set as invisible in the component symbol. In the connector properties, the
usage "Only in property view" or "Only in CTE" must be set.

Libraries
See also
Connector type FLN6 for parameter assignment of a branch (Page 782)
Connector type FLN2 for branch objects

A branch object can exchange variables with the flownet solution procedure via a connector of
type FLN2. The topological description of a branch object is completed as follows for a
connector with the name FN:
FROM a TO b : FN;
The connector must always be defined in the OUT direction. It connects the component to the
flownet solution procedure to exchange various variables that are relevant to the branch object
between the flownet solution procedure and the component. It maps the branch-influencing
effect (which means the effect that the branch object has on the branch) to the flownet.
The figure below shows the input and output signals with the direction of data flow between the
component and the flownet solution procedure.
)ORZQHWVROYHU
The component receives four variables for calculating the effect of the branch object via the
input signals:
1. Specific enthalpy h (FN.HSPEC),
2. Mass flow P
& (FN.MFL)
3. Pressure pa (FN.PRESSURE),
4. Density ρ (FN.DENSITY).
The pressure pa relates to the "from" connector (FROM) of the topological description, which is
the connector a in our example. Density ρ and enthalpy h are variables of the supplied medium.

Libraries
Reference direction
The output signals for the branch object are calculated in the component and sent to the flownet
solution procedure:
1. Change in specific enthalpy Δh (FN.DELTAH),
2. Pressure change Δp = pb − pa (FN.DELTAP)
3. Derivation of the change in pressure based on the mass flow GෙS G0
& (FN.DPDMFL).
Connector type FLN3 for external nodes

Variables are exchanged between external nodes and the flownet solution procedure via
connectors of type FLN3. A connector of type FLN3 is assigned to the external node in the
topology description, as follows for a connector with name FN:
EXTERNAL_NODE e : FN;
The connector type FLN3 provides signals in the forward and reverse direction as listed in the
table below.
Table 8-44 Signals of the connector type FLN3
Forward signals Backward signals

Name Variable Name Variable
HFW Specific enthalpy HBW Specific enthalpy
PRESSURE Pressure MFL Mass flow rate
The following applies: If the FN connector is defined with the direction OUT, then the pressure
and specific enthalpy are specified via this connector for the external node of the flownet. If the
connector is defined with the direction IN, the mass flow rate and the specific enthalpy are
specified for the external node.
Connector of type FLN3 with direction OUT

If the connector is defined with direction OUT, then the pressure calculated in the component
is set for the flownet solution procedure via this connector. This means the external node is a
pressure node. The following variables can be set at its outputs:
1. Pressure pe (FN.PRESSURE),
2. Specific enthalpy he (FN.HFW).

Libraries
At its inputs, the mass flow supplied to or discharged from the flownet via the external node and
calculated by the flownet solution procedure is returned to the components. In the case of
discharge from the flownet, the specific enthalpy of the flow is also returned to the component:
1. Mass flow P
& (FN.MFL)
2. Specific enthalpy ha (FN.HBW)
The figure below illustrates the signal direction for data exchange between the component and
the flownet solution procedure.
)ORZQHWVROYHU
Regardless of the direction selected in the topology description, the mass flow P & is always
positive for inflows to the flownet ( P
& ! ) and negative ( P
& ! ) for outflows.
Reference direction
Connector of type FLN3 with direction IN

If the connector FN is defined with direction IN, then the mass flow set in the component is
defined for the flownet via this connector. The external node active in the flownet is therefore
a node with mass inflow or a mass flow node. The following variables can be set at its outputs:
1. Mass flow P
& (FN.MFL)
2. Specific enthalpy h (FN.HBW)
At its inputs, the pressure calculated by the flownet solution procedure for the external node is
returned to the components. If discharge from the flownet is set with negative mass flow, then
the specific enthalpy of the medium is returned to the component:
1. Pressure pe (FN.PRESSURE)
2. Specific enthalpy he (FN.HFW)
The figure below illustrates the signal direction for data exchange between the component and
the flownet solution procedure.

Libraries
)ORZQHWVROYHU
Mass flow nodes operate in the flownet like internal nodes with mass inflow or outflow. These
nodes are therefore treated as internal nodes in the flownet, which means an internal node with
additional inflow or outflow is created in the flownet for an external node. The pressure returned
to the component pe therefore corresponds to the pressure in this internal node, and the specific
enthalpy he corresponds to the specific enthalpy of this internal node.
Reference direction
Connector type FLN4 for internal nodes

The variables for pressure, specific enthalpy and density calculated by the flownet solution
procedure for an internal node can be used in a component via a connector of type FLN4. The
topological description of the component type is completed as follows for a connector with the
name FN:
INTERNAL_NODE i : FN;
The connector must always be defined in the IN direction. It connects the component to the
flownet to map the variables that are relevant for the internal node i from the flownet solution
procedure to the component.
The variables calculated in the node i are provided by means of the connector inputs:
1. Pressure pi (FN.PRESSURE)
2. Specific enthalpy hi (FN.HSPEC)
3. Density ρi (FN.DENSITY)
)ORZQHWVROYHU

Libraries
Connector type FLN5 for parameters of a flownet

Parameters of a flownet can be exchanged between a component and the flownet solution
procedure via a connector of type FLN5. This connector can be assigned to any flownet object:
a branch object or an internal or external node. The topological definition of the object should
be completed, for a connector with name FN as per
● FROM a TO b : FN;
● INTERNAL_NODE i : FN;
● EXTERNAL_NODE e : FN;
The signals of connector type FLN5 are listed in the table below. You can find their meaning in
the mathematical model of the flownet in the following section: Parameter assignment of
flownets (Page 597).
Note
The relationships used for calculation of the flownet variables, such as temperature, are
defined via the MEDIUM parameter for the relevant medium. This can only be done during
initialization of the simulation. Changes made to the parameters while the simulation is running
have no effect.
Table 8-45 Signals of connector type FLN5
Signal Meaning
MEDIUM Flownet medium:
MEDIUM := 0 for water/steam,
MEDIUM := 1 for ideal gas,
MEDIUM := 2 for liquid;
must not be changed while the simulation is running
CG Specific compression modulus K / M for water/steam medium with density ρ < 500 kg/m3 and for ideal
gas medium
CL Specific compression modulus K / M for water/steam medium with density ρ ≥ 500 kg/m3 and for liquid
medium
MG Thermal factor 1 / M for water/steam medium with density ρ < 500 kg/m3 and for ideal gas medium
ML Thermal factor 1 / M for water/steam medium with density ρ ≥ 500 kg/m3 and for liquid medium
P_INIT Initial value for the pressure in the internal nodes of the flownet
H_INIT Initial value for the specific enthalpy in the internal nodes of the flownet
DENSITY Density of the medium in the flownet when liquid is set as the medium
T_ENV Ambient temperature
C_ENV Heat transfer factor c = αA for heat exchange in the internal nodes of the flownet with the environment
L_CR Specific heat capacity cp for liquids as medium
IG_R Specific gas constant RS for ideal gas as medium
IG_CR Specific heat capacity cp for ideal gas as medium
ST Binary signal; if ST := "True", then a linear transfer is applied for parameters CL, CG and ML, MG for
the water/steam medium
AL Momentum factor A for branches in the flownet

Libraries
Depending on the direction of the connector FN its signals are inputs or outputs. Depending on
the direction, flownet parameters can be set or used in component. If the connector is defined
with direction OUT, the variables set in the component are provided to the flownet as
parameters. These parameters are available in the component for evaluation, if the connector
is defined with direction IN.
Connector type FLN6 for parameter assignment of a branch

The dynamics of the flow rate can be assigned parameters individually for each branch. To do
this, a connector FN, via which the momentum factor A is transferred to the flownet solution
procedure, must be added to the topological definition of the branch object as follows:
FROM a TO b: FN;
If a connector of type FLN6 is defined with direction OUT, then the momentum factor A for the
branch containing the object is transferred to the flownet solution procedure via this connector.
If the connector is defined with direction IN, then the momentum factor A for the branch is
transferred to the branch object by the flownet solution procedure.
Connector type FLN7 for parameter assignment of an internal node

Each internal node can be assigned parameters individually. A connector via which the
parameters are transferred to the flownet solution procedure must be added to the topological
definition of an internal node. For a connector FN the definition is completed as follows:
Internal_Node i: FN;
FN is always created as an output of type FLN7 .
The variables listed in the table below are transferred to the flownet solution procedure for the
internal node. You can find their meaning in the mathematical model of the flownet in the
following section: Parameter assignment of flownets (Page 597).
Table 8-46 Signals of connector type FLN7
Signal Meaning
CG Specific compression modulus Ki / Mi for water/steam medium with density ρ < 500 kg/m3 and for ideal
gas medium
CL Specific compression module Ki / Mi for water/steam medium with density ρ ≥ 500 kg/m3 and for liquid
medium
MG Thermal factor 1 / Mi for water/steam medium with density ρ < 500 kg/m3 and for ideal gas medium
ML Thermal factor 1 / Mi for water/steam medium with density ρ ≥ 500 kg/m3 and for liquid medium

Libraries
Signal Meaning
P_INIT Initial pressure value
H_INIT Initial value for specific enthalpy
T_ENV Ambient temperature
C_ENV Heat transfer factor ci = αA for heat exchange with the environment
L_CR Specific heat capacity cp for liquids as medium
IG_R Specific gas constant RS for ideal gas as medium
IG_CR Specific heat capacity cp for ideal gas as medium
8.2.7.3 Constants and functions
You can use various constants and functions when creating your own flownet components.
Constants
The available constants are listed in the table below.
Table 8-47 Constants for flownet components
Name Data type Value Description

_GRAVITY analog 9.81 Gravitational constant (gravity)
_T0 analog 273.15 Zero point temperature
Functions
Functions for calculating state variables are available for flownet components with water/steam
medium. The available state variables and units are summarized in the table below.
Table 8-48 State variables for water/steam
Variable Unit
p Pressure bar
pS Saturated steam pressure bar
T Temperature °C
TS Saturated steam temperature °C
h Specific enthalpy kJ/kg
h' Specific enthalpy of saturated water kJ/kg
h" Specific enthalpy of saturated steam kJ/kg
ρ Density kg/m3
ρ' Density of saturated water kg/m3
ρ" Density of saturated steam kg/m3
All state functions FNAME return a state variable ZVAL as an analog value. Calls are performed
as follows:
ZVAL = _WaterSteam.FNAME(PARAM1 (, PARAM2)).

Libraries
The available state functions are described in the table below.
Table 8-49 State functions for water/steam
ZVAL FNAME PARAM1 PARAM2 State function

ρ rph p h ρ = ρ(p,h)
T trh ρ h T = T(ρ,h)
TS tvp pS – TS= T(pS)
pS pvt TS – pS= p(TS)
ρ' rsvt TS – ρ' = ρ'(TS)
ρ" rssvt TS – ρ" = ρ"(TS)
ρ' rsvp pS – ρ' = ρ'(pS)
ρ" rssvp pS – ρ" = ρ"(ps)
h' hsvt TS – h' = h'(TS)
h" hssvt TS – h" = h" (TS)
h' hsvp pS – h' = h' (pS)
h" hssvp pS – h" = h" (pS)
The saturated steam pressure pS and saturated steam temperature TS are limited for the
saturation functions as follows:
0 ≤ TS ≤ 373.94 °C and 0.0065 bar ≤ pS ≤ 220.64 bar.
The relevant limit is set for values outside this range.
The values for pressure p and specific enthalpy h are limited to the following ranges for the state
function ρ = ρ(p,h):
0.007 bar ≤ p ≤ 490 bar and 20 kJ/kg ≤ h ≤ 3998 kJ/kg
For the state function T = T(ρ,h), the specific enthalpy is limited to the range
9 kJ/kg ≤ h ≤ 4158
kJ/kg. The limits for the density ρ depend on the enthalpy value: The lowest valid density value
is 0.0012344 kg/m3 (with h = 4160 kJ/kg); the highest valid density is 1045.239 kg/m3 (with h =
96 kJ/kg).
The auxiliary function Cylniv can be used to calculate fill levels in horizontal cylinders. For a
cylinder of length L and radius r with specified volume V, it calculates a fill level of H. Its call is:
H = _Utilities.Cylniv(V, L, r).

Libraries
User-defined functions
The FLOWNET library provides you with three different media: water/steam, ideal gas and
liquid. The medium to be used is set in the signal MEDIUM of the connection type FLN5 with a
corresponding ID (0, 1, or 2). You can find additional information on this in section: Connector
type FLN5 for parameters of a flownet (Page 781).
The state equations for density and temperature that are defined for the relevant medium are
accordingly applied by the flownet solution procedure.
With the FLOWNET library you also have the option of performing flownet simulations with
other media besides the pre-defined media. You have to provide the media-specific state
equations for the calculation of density and temperature in the nodes by means of a “global
function”.
Such a global function must consist of a .NET assembly that is named Userdefined.dll and
which has its "Assembly Name" specified as "Userdefined" in the project settings. It must have
the namespace Userdefined and a public class named FlownetFunctions. This class must
contain two public static functions for calculation of the state variables:
● public static double trh(long m, double r, double h)
● public static double rph(long m, double p, double h)
The function trh has to calculate the temperature from the density r and the specific enthalpy h;
the function rph has to calculate the density from the pressure p and the specific enthalpy h. The
units of the variables are to be assumed as follows:
● Temperature in °C,
● Density in kg/m3
● Pressure in bar, and
● Specific enthalpy in kJ/kg.
The medium has to be specified by a freely selected negative number. This negative media key
number forms the first transfer parameter m of both functions. In your own functions you only
need to consider the user-defined negative media key numbers; if the value given is ≥ 0
computation will be performed by SIMIT, and your functions will not be called in this case.

Libraries
This means you have the option of defining any desired media in these two functions and of
using them in a simulation project. Note that in your user-defined functions, you only need to
pay attention to negative media key numbers. For non-negative media key numbers, the
functions that are included in SIMIT are used. Your user-defined functions are not called by
SIMIT in this case.
The scope for your user-defined functions might be set up as follows:
namespace Userdefined
{
public class FlownetFunctions
{
public static double trh(long m, double r, double h)
{
switch (m)
{
case -1:
// Calculation for media with key number -1 …
return 0.0;
case -2:
return 0.0;
default:
// Should not occur!
return 0.0;
}
}
public static double rph(long m, double p, double h)

{
switch (m)
{
case -1:
return 0.0;
case -2:
return 0.0;
default:
// Should not occur!
return 0.0;
}
}
}
}

Libraries
To assign a specific medium to a flownet, set the relevant media key number in the MEDIUM
signal of the FLN5 connector type; in the case of user-defined media this means setting the
relevant negative value.
Note
If you set a negative key number for the medium without providing the necessary functions for
the calculation of density and temperature, the flownet solution procedure assumes that the
density and temperature are zero.
You can call these two functions using

_FlownetFunctions.trh(m, r, p)
or
_FlownetFunctions.rph(m, p, h)
even in your own component types. Moreover you can implement additional functions in the
class FlownetFunctions and use them by means of a corresponding function call in your
component types.
You must store the assembly in the SIMIT workspace, in the subfolder GlobalFunctions. The
assembly will then automatically be copied to each new project and will therefore be archived
with your project.
Note
Modifications to the assembly do not affect existing simulation projects. The modified assembly
affects newly-created projects. If you want to use the modified assembly in projects that already
exist, copy it into the globalFunctions folder in these projects.

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
8.2.7.4 Initializing FLOWNET simulations

The initialization of flownet simulations occurs in two steps. When the simulation is started up,
first the components are initialized, which means the simulation model created from the
connected components is initialized. Then the flownet solution procedure is initialized. The
flownet solution procedure uses the values that are initialized in the components and passed
to it via connectors of type FLN2 through FLN7.
,QLWLDOL]LQJIORZQHWFRPSRQHQWV
,QSXWV 2XWSXWV
'HIDXOWV ,QLWLDOL]DWLRQV
,QLWLDOL]DWLRQYDOXHVRIWKHIORZQHWVROXWLRQ
PHWKRG
Since no variables of the flow network solution are available for component initialization, it is
advisable to preassign suitable values to the component type inputs. We recommend values
that are consistent with the default values of the flownet solution procedure.
8.3 CONTEC library
8.3.1 Introduction
The CONTEC library is an extension of SIMIT, which provides component types for creating
simulations of conveyor systems. By linking components of this library, you can create a model
of a conveyor system in SIMIT to simulate the transport of objects in this system. The CONTEC
library provides a special solution procedure for this purpose for use in SIMIT. Once the
simulation has started, the solution procedure continuously calculates the positions of the
objects in the modeled conveyor system.
The CONTEC library is only suitable for simulating conveyor systems for individual objects;
bulk material conveyor systems cannot be simulated. In addition, the simulation is limited to
conveyor systems in which the transportation routes for the objects are fixed by the
arrangement of the handling equipment. Conveyor systems with autonomously operating
vehicles, which means vehicles that determine their own transportation route, are therefore
excluded.
SIMIT provides a real-time simulation for the virtual commissioning of user programs for
automation systems. Likewise, the simulation of conveyor systems with the CONTEC library is
always used in a closed circuit with real or simulated automation systems. This sort of
simulation with SIMIT is therefore fundamentally different from the material flow simulations

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
used for planning and designing conveyor systems. There, the material flow in a conveyor
system is simulated on the basis of a pre-defined control strategy, whereas here the control
strategy is translated into an actual automation system, which includes a simulation of the
purely mechanical elements of the conveyor system created with SIMIT. To differentiate it, this
type of simulation is therefore referred to as material handling simulation in this manual.
As is usual in SIMIT, material handling simulations are easy to create with the CONTEC library,
using components from the graphical user interface. The emphasis in implementing the
component types in the library was on the simple creation and parameter assignment of the
simulation model and on the stability of the model in the simulation, rather than on a detailed
simulation of the mechanical aspects of conveyor systems. Material handling simulation is
therefore based on a movement model that simulates the movement of objects along paths at
a pre-defined speed, the paths being determined by the handling equipment. The weight of the
object and other factors influencing movement, such as friction, for example, are disregarded.
Two types of conveyor systems can be simulated with the component types provided in the
CONTEC library:
● Conveyor systems with rail-mounted vehicles
such as electrical overhead monorails, ground transport systems, etc. and
● Non-vehicular conveyor systems
such as chain, roller and belt conveyor systems, etc.
Component types are also available in CONTEC that allow you to include RFID, Moby, bar
code, etc. in the simulation.
You can use SIMIT to create your own library components for material handling simulations and
thus expand your material handling library. You can use the special CONTEC solution
procedure for material handling simulation in the component types by means of special
connection types.
Note
If there are material handling components in your simulation project, which means components
that use the material handling solution procedure, then the simulation can only be run if you
have a material handling license.
8.3.2 Material handling simulation
Material handling describes the technology used for moving objects in any direction over limited
distances. Objects can generally be moved in any spatial direction. Handling equipment refers
to the individual machines that are used to move the object in the conveyor system.
The CONTEC material handling library can be used to create simulation models of a conveyor
system and to run simulations with them. The handling equipment is subject to the following
restrictions:
● All transportation routes are defined as linear paths.
● Transportation routes and possible branches must be predefined as a structure of the
conveyor system for a simulation.

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
In addition, the simulation of objects is restricted as follows:

● Only individual items can be considered as objects, not bulk goods.
● All objects are represented by a box-shaped outline.
● Other than its dimensions, no other physical properties of the object (for example weight,
friction, etc.) are taken into consideration.
The component types contained in the CONTEC library can be divided into two categories:
● Object component types and
● Equipment component types
As is usual in SIMIT, equipment component types are added to charts as components using
their symbol. The symbols for these component types are designed so that when put them
together they create a scaled layout of the conveyor system, as shown for example in the figure
below. The resulting system model then only needs to be provided with appropriate parameters
and linked to the automation.
Along with the system model, the objects defined for a simulation project are stored in table
form. There are symbols for object component types, too, with which the individual objects can
be displayed correctly in the conveyor system layout when the simulation is running.
Material handling simulation is based on a special solution procedure that is configured and
programmed by means of the individual components of the simulation model. This solution
procedure is based on a movement model which allows the position of the objects on the paths
defined by the handling equipment to be determined at any moment in the simulation. The
solution procedure takes account of the fact that objects can be held up, and it uses the position
and dimensions of the objects to activate sensors in the simulation.
The movement of an object on a path can be initiated in the simulation by both the equipment
components and the object components. In this way it is possible to simulate both conveyor
systems such as roller conveyor systems, in which the drive acts on the equipment, and rail-
mounted conveyor systems, in which the drive acts on the vehicle, which means the object.

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
8.3.2.1 Principles of conveyor technology simulation

The material handling simulation method is based on a movement model that assumes that the
objects move along linear paths, the possible paths being determined by the handling
equipment. The way in which the handling equipment is configured defines a conveyor system
network that represents the possible transportation routes for the objects in a conveyor system.
Complex motions can be realized by self-defined components and connected to the system in
linear pathways. You can find additional information on this in section: Connector type MT8 for
transferring objects at boundary points (Page 902).
A network consists of individual sections and branches. It can be inherently closed or open. In
an inherently closed network both ends of each section connect to a branch, whereas in an
open network at least one end of one section is not connected to a branch. This forms a
boundary point of the network. The smallest possible conveyor system network consists of one
section.
A network section is made up of one or more segments. The geometry of a segment can consist
of either a straight path of a given length or a circular arc of a given radius and angle. In addition,
every segment has a direction. The direction of a segment is the reference direction for the
movement of the object over this segment. It is defined in such a way that a positive speed value
moves the object in the reference direction, while a negative speed value moves the object
against the reference direction.
By way of example, the figure below shows a conveyor system network consisting of three
sections or four segments A1 to A4 and one branch V1.

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
This section is clearly an open conveyor system network with the three boundary points R1, R2
and R3. If the object crosses the boundary of a conveyor system network it is lost, which means
it is removed from the handling equipment and returned to the material list where it is once more
available for use. Components can remove objects from or feed them into the conveyor system
network at the boundaries by means of suitable connections to the solution procedure.
The special solution procedure of the material handling calculates the position of the objects at
equidistant times, as is usual in SIMIT. It supplements the standard SIMIT solution procedure
so that material handling component types can be used alongside other component types, for
example, component types from the basic library. To enable data to be exchanged, material
handling components are connected to the material handling solution procedure by means of
specific connections. They receive values calculated by the solution procedure and send
variables to the solution procedure via these connections.
For each segment in the conveyor system network, positions can be defined at which sensors
detect the object as it passes. The material handling solution procedure then ensures that the
relevant sensor signals are activated in the simulation according to the positions and
dimensions of the objects.
8.3.2.2 Modeling of the objects

Material transport objects are modeled in SIMIT as component types. For each type, at least
the size and the graphical representation of the object must be defined. Connectors,
parameters, states and behaviors can also be defined for an object in its component type.
The link symbol is used where possible to represent the object in charts: if a link symbol is
defined, this is used for the display; otherwise the basic symbol is used, with any connectors on
the symbol being hidden.
To simulate objects the available stock of object components has to be defined in the SIMIT
project. For this, select "New list" node in the project view under the "Lists" project folder.This
creates a material list, which means a list of the object components available in the simulation.
The editor for creating the material list opens:
Here you can define which object components are available in the simulation. For each
component type you can specify the number of instances to be formed. To create an instance,
simply drag the component type you want from the MATERIAL directory of the CONTEC library
into the editor. To create more than one instance, hold down the Alt key as you drag the

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
component type. A query dialog will appear in which you can specify the number of instances,
as shown in the figure below:
You can also create several material lists in the "Lists" project folder and sort the material lists
into different folders if necessary.
In order to place object components on a specific section of the simulated transport network for
the start of the simulation, you can assign one or more object components of the same type
from the material lists in the project to the component simulating the section.
You can find examples for this in the following sections:
● Rail-S4 – Straight rail with four sensors (Page 808)
● Conveyor-S4 – Straight conveyor with four sensors (Page 824)
If object components have a behavior model (behavior description), this is executed at the start
of the simulation in the same way as it would be if the object components were placed on a chart
like other components. The simulation of the behavior of an object defined by that description
is entirely independent of the treatment of that object in the solution procedure for the material
handling simulation.
Once the simulation has started, each object defined in the material list is given a unique
identification number which is automatically set by SIMIT and displayed in the material lists.
If an object is detected at a sensor during the simulation, the solution procedure returns the ID
of the detected object component.

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
8.3.2.3 Modeling the conveyor system network
Conveyor system networks are made up of segments, branches and boundaries.

The CONTEC library provides various component types for modeling the conveyor system
network. These component types represent elementary handling equipment types and
therefore encapsulate corresponding structures consisting of segments, branches and
boundaries. Thus the complexity of these subnetworks modeled in the component types can
differ. For example, in a component type representing a straight conveyor only a single
segment is modeled. By contrast, component types representing more complex handling
equipment, like a 90-degree transfer, for example, have a model made up of multiple segments
and branches.
The individual component types have connectors representing end points of segments or
branch points. If the connectors of two components of these types are connected on charts, the
subnetwork models of the two components are connected accordingly. By connecting them to
other components the complete conveyor system network of a conveyor system is ultimately
constructed.
For every segment the geometry (with coordinates) and the reference direction have to be
specified. Optionally, the positions of stoppers and sensors may also additionally be defined for
a segment. For each branch it must be defined which segments it connects, and these must be
provided with corresponding information about their positions in the conveyor system network.
Modeling segments
A segment is modeled as a line. It is defined by its two end points, the geometry and the
direction of the segment. The geometry can take the form of a straight line or an arc. It is defined
by the position of its two end points A and B and its angle. If the angle is not zero, there are two
possible segments which can be differentiated by the sign of the angle: a positive angle means
that the center point of the arc is located to the right of the segment in the counting direction,
while a negative angle means that the center point of the arc is located to the left of the segment.
The radius of the arc is determined by these three variables. The direction of the segment
corresponds to the reference direction for transporting the objects.
Angle 0 Angle +90 Angle −90
The object being transported over a segment is rotated by the angle of the segment. This
means on straight segments the object is transported without being rotated; the absolute
orientation of the object is maintained. The figure below shows the transport of an object over
a straight and a curved segment:

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
For each segment a speed is defined at which the objects are transported over that segment.
Positive speed values cause the object to be transported in the reference direction, while
negative speed values cause it to be transported against the reference direction. The inherent
speed of an object is added to the segment speed where applicable.
A state is assigned to each segment for movement in the reference direction and for movement
against the reference direction. This state identifies a segment as "active" or "inactive" in the
corresponding direction. Inactive segments are regarded as non-existent in the material
handling solution procedure. This means that objects cannot be moved on these segments,
and the positions of objects already located on these segments are not updated. In addition,
sensors on inactive segments are not updated. The change in state of segments is used to
specify an explicit transportation route at branches. The figure below shows an example of how
a switch function can be modeled by alternately activating and deactivating the two segments
in the reference direction:
Segment AC inactive Segment AB inactive
Positions at which the transport of an object can be blocked can be defined on a segment. The
state of a stopper position can be set to "active" or "inactive". If a stopper is active, all objects
are stopped at this position and all downstream objects are held up accordingly as shown in the
figure below by way of example:
6WRSSHUV
'LUHFWLRQRIPRWLRQ
In addition, positions at which an object can be detected can be defined on a segment as sensor
positions. At each of these sensor positions the identifier (ID) of the object covering the position
is then recorded in the material handling solution procedure. The detection range for the objects
can also be defined for each sensor position. This range is defined as a percentage of the object
size and is assumed to be symmetrical with respect to the center of the object. The figure below
illustrates the detection of an object for two different detection ranges: the top row shows the
activation of a sensor for the full detection range (100%) of the object; the bottom row shows the
activation of a sensor for half the detection range (50%). The detection range for the object is
shown in gray in each case and movement is assumed to be from left to right.

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
6HQVRUQRW\HWDFWLYDWHG 6HQVRUDFWLYDWHG 6HQVRUQRORQJHUDFWLYDWHG
6HQVRU
'LUHFWLRQRIPRWLRQ
Component types in which only one segment with sensors is modeled include, for example, the
straight rail (Rail-S4) and the straight conveyor (Conveyor-S4).
Modeling branches
Because all sections are assumed to be linear, a branch is a point in the conveyor system
network at which more than two segments connect.
In the subnetwork of a component type a branch can either be shown as a connector, which
means a shared end point of multiple segments (as shown in figure below on the left), or it can
be located within a subnetwork (as shown in figure below on the right). In the first case the
position of the branch point is given directly by the position of the connector, whereas in the
second case the branching position is defined relative to the component.
(a) Branch at a connector (b) Branch in a component
At branch points the transportation route must be explicitly defined at every moment of the
simulation. In other words, no more than two of the segments that connect at a branch may be
active as a transportation route at any given time. Therefore activation of the segments must be
included as a function in the component type.

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
Modeling boundaries
Boundaries are end points of a segment that are not connected to other segments. For a
component like a straight conveyor, for example, a boundary of the conveyor system network
is created if a connector of this component is not connected to other components. In the
simulation, if an object moves beyond such a boundary point it is removed from the conveyor
section and returned to the material list. A message to that effect appears in the message line.
%RXQGDU\
SRLQW
Boundary points can also be defined as end points in the subnetwork of component types. The
behavior of an object passing this boundary point can then be freely defined in the component
type using suitable functions. For example, the position of the object can be freely calculated
to simulate complex movements. You can find examples for such components in the following
sections:
● Turntable-R60 – Turntable (Page 846)
● TransferCarriage – Transfer carriage (Page 851)
8.3.2.4 Special features of conveyor technology simulation
Placing and removing objects

Objects that are defined in the available material stock for the simulation project can be placed
on any segment in the simulation. They are placed at the start of the segment in accordance
with the specified reference direction (FROM-TO). Objects are always positioned relative to
their geometric center.
Objects can also be removed from the network. There is a corresponding system call for placing
and removing objects, which allows this function to be simulated in component types.
Simulating the holdup behavior
Holdups on straight conveyor sections

Modeling of the holdup behavior has been simplified to a great extent. This means the positions
of held-up objects in the simulation do not necessarily correspond to the actual positions in all
cases.
The holdup behavior on straight sections is correct for all objects that are either not rotated at
all or are rotated in multiples of 90°.

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
Objects with other rotation angles ϕ are also held up. However, as their position can only be
calculated approximately, this leads to overlaps.
a
The effective width E of an object that is used as a simplification to simulate the holdup is
calculated using the following formula:
a ˳K ˭ ෥ ˳ E
E
˭
where h denotes the height and b the width of the object.
Holdup in trends
Modeling of the holdup behavior has been simplified to a great extent. This means the positions
of held-up objects in the simulation do not necessarily correspond to the actual positions in all
cases.
In trends, too, the position of held-up objects is only an approximation. The held-up objects
overlap, as shown in the figure below.
The overlaps are caused by the fact that the bend of the trend is disregarded in the distance
calculation.

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
Time slice assignment for components

All components forming a cohesive conveyor system network must be assigned to the same
time slice. This means all components that simulate handling equipment and are directly
connected to one another via connectors or signal lines must be assigned to the same time
slice. Otherwise the simulation model of a cohesive conveyor system network will be formed
from multiple sub-models with differing cycle times. The simulation start request will then be
denied and a corresponding error message displayed.
8.3.2.5 Scalability
Unlike in the standard library, the dimensions of components play a decisive role in the
conveyor technology library because they directly indicate the length of conveyor sections or
the dimensions of objects. In accordance with standard engineering practice, millimeters [mm]
are used throughout as the length unit, while speeds are given in meters per second [m/s].
Scalability of conveyor sections

To enable conveyor systems of differing sizes to be mapped on charts with a reasonable
resolution, a scale can be assigned to each chart.
The following scales are possible:

1 pix : 1 mm,
1 pix : 5 mm,
1 pix : 10 mm,
1 pix : 20 mm,
1 pix : 50 mm,

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
1 pix : 100 mm.
Note
If you have licensed the material transport library for your SIMIT installation, the sizes of all
components, including components from the basic library, are reproduced at the specified
scale. For basic library components you can retain the intended sizes by choosing a scale of 1
pix : 1 mm for charts containing basic components.
To avoid having to set the scale individually for each chart, you can choose a default setting for
the entire project in the property view of the Project Manager.
This scale is used as the default for all new charts that you create.
Note
Setting a default scale in the Project manager does not change the scale of any existing charts.
Note that changing the scale of a chart does not change the displayed size of a component, but
rather its effective dimensions in millimeters.
Scalability of objects
Objects are shown in the material lists of a SIMIT project with their absolute size (width and
height) in millimeters. This means objects are represented on charts in differing sizes,
depending on the chosen scale of the chart.
The dimensions of an object are pre-defined in the component type. So when you add an object
to the material list, it is added with the width, height and depth defined by the component type.

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
You can then change the dimensions for each object in the material list, provided that the
component is scalable. The object types provided in the CONTEC library are all scalable.
Note
Note that width and height refer to the dimensions of the object as viewed from above, as shown
in the diagram. The depth is the size in the third dimension, which is not shown. This definition
was chosen so as to retain the meaning of the height and width of components and graphics on
a chart. The component types provided in the material handling library disregard the depth of
the object. With the component types available in the library, objects of any depth are detected
by sensors solely on the basis of their width and height. For that reason the depth of objects is
set to zero by default. The depth of objects only becomes important if you create a custom
material handling component type that evaluates the depth of an object, for example a height
check, and use it in your material handling simulation.
You can find additional information on this in the section: Creating custom component types for
material handling simulation (Page 892).
If you want to set the dimensions of several objects to the same value, you can copy the value
for one object, in other words from one row of this table to any number of others. Follow the
steps outlined below:
● Select the row containing the required object value.
● Right-click on the cell containing the value to be copied and select "Copy Cell" in the shortcut
menu.

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
● Select the rows to which you want to copy the value.

● Right-click on the column to which you want to copy the value and select "Paste to Cell" in
the shortcut menu.
8.3.2.6 Generating the simulation of drives and sensors
As conveyor sections can be shown to scale on charts as a system layout using appropriate
components, there is no point in also showing all additional input and output signals for these
components in graphical form in these charts. This would compromise the clarity of the system
layout. This means the only visible connectors on the component types in the CONTEC library
are those used to connect them to each other to construct the system layout. Connectors for
connecting components to the associated drive and sensor signals, and hence via the
couplings to the controller signals, are implemented by means of an implicit assignment of the
inputs. You have various options for connecting components. They are explained below by
reference to a simple rail.

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
Manual connection of components

The component type of a rail is created in such a way that the component receives its
percentage speed value as an input value from output Y of another component whose name is
formed from the name of the rail and the suffix Speed. For example, the figure below shows a
rail with the name Rail.
This means its Speed input is predefined so that it is implicitly connected to output Y of the
component with the name Rail-Speed.
You can therefore create a chart which in this example contains a component with the name
Rail-Speed and has an output Y which then defines the percentage speed for this rail.
Alternatively, you can also enter every other (analog) output of a component in the Speed input
for the rail by changing the setting from to and entering the corresponding output signal, as
shown by way of example in the figure below.
If you want the speed defined by the rail to be constant, you can also set the Speed input to
and enter the desired percentage directly.
If you want to be able to further process output signals for the rail sensors, you would likewise
use implicit connections. You can use any components and assign their (binary) inputs
accordingly, as shown by way of example in the figure below.
Using templates
Templates can be used as a way of creating charts for drive and sensor simulation with minimal
effort.

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
The material handling library includes suitable templates for connecting the drive and sensor
signals for every component type of a conveyor section, as well as for the vehicles. The
template names are the same as the names of the component types.
All templates include a component from the basic SIMIT library for simulating the drive. In
addition, the template can also be used to connect the simulated sensors in the conveyor
section to the controller via coupling signals. The template for the "Rail-S4" component type is
If you use an identification system that allows the symbolic names of the I/O addresses to be
derived from the names of the conveyor sections, you can modify these templates accordingly.
You can then obtain the full connection of the corresponding conveyor section to the controller
via the coupling by instantiating the template.
To connect all conveyor sections in the simulation project to the controller with the minimum
possible effort, use the "Instantiate templates" function.

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
You have the following options for calling this function:

templates".
chart folder.
You can use the "Instantiate templates" > "Simulation model" function to create an instance of
a template for every component in your simulation project that has a TEMPLATE parameter.
The name of the template to be instantiated is determined using this TEMPLATE parameter.
Using its HIERARCHY parameter the component can also define a folder hierarchy in which the
template is instantiated.
The components of the CONTEC library are designed for use with this method. They contain
the (additional) parameters TEMPLATE and HIERARCHY. If you have used CONTEC
components in your SIMIT project, the "Instantiate templates" > "Simulation model" function
provides the associated charts for connecting the controller.
As a reference is usually made to the coupling signals in the templates for generating the device
level, you can specify a coupling name in the import dialog. It can be entered under the variable
name GATEWAY. If your simulation project already includes couplings, they are listed in the
drop-down list.

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
Note
You have to adapt the names of the input/output signals in the templates to your identification
system to gain the maximum benefit from this method.
The minimum size for a template is 20 × 20 pixels.

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
8.3.3 Components of the CONTEC library
8.3.3.1 Topological connector in the CONTEC library

The CONNECTORS directory of the SIMIT basic library includes a connector that can be used
to create topological connectors for material handling components that transcend chart limits:
● the Topology connector.
The Topology symbol is shown in the figure below:
Using the Topology connector, a topological connection can be created between two or more
material handling components. Under (b) in the figure below, two components are connected
by the CON_A connector. The connection is functionally identical to the direct connection of
both components via a connecting line, as shown under (a) in the figure below.
The figure below shows three components connected by the CON_A connector. This
configuration is not valid, because with material handling components only two topological
connectors can ever be connected to one another.

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
If you start a simulation project containing a configuration like this, an error message will appear
as shown in the figure below and the simulation is aborted.
8.3.3.2 Component types for conveyor systems with vehicles
The RAILS directory of the CONTEC library contains component types for use in vehicular
conveyor system simulations. In the broadest sense these types simulate "rails" on which
vehicles can be placed as objects. The vehicles are either moved at the speed set by the
individual rail segment or the vehicles set the speed themselves. A superposition of both
speeds is also possible, although this is not used in practice.
Rail-S4 – Straight rail with four sensors
Symbol

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
The gray arrow head in the symbol indicates the reference direction for movement of the
vehicles. The width of the symbol is scalable. The width corresponds to the length of the rail
section.
Function
The Rail-S4 component type is used for simulating a straight rail section. The speed at which
vehicles are moved over this rail section is set at the hidden Speed input of the component as
a percentage of the configurable nominal conveyor speed (NominalSpeed parameter).
Between one and four sensors can be positioned along the length of the rail. When a vehicle
is within the detection range of a sensor, the corresponding hidden binary output Sensor1 to
Sensor4 is set. The ID of the detected vehicle can be obtained via the corresponding hidden
integer outputs SensorId1 to SensorId4.
Parameters
The behavior of the component can be set by means of parameters:
● NominalSpeed
Nominal conveyor speed; adjustable online
● NbrOfSensors
Number of sensors used (1 to 4)
● SensorPosition
Position of the corresponding sensor relative to connector A of the symbol.
When the simulation is running, every defined sensor is shown in the correct position in the
symbol. When a sensor is activated, its color changes to yellow.
The parameters, their units and default values are shown in the figure below.
The validity of the parameters is checked while the component is being initialized. The following
messages indicate possible parameter assignment errors:
● Parameter 'SensorPosition' must be less than the component's width
The sensor position must not be outside the component.
● Parameter 'SensorPosition' must not be negative
The sensor position must not be negative.

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
The Rail-S4 component includes the additional parameters TEMPLATE and HIERARCHY,
which can be used to control generation of the drive level. You can find additional information
on this in section: Using templates (Page 803).
Further additional parameters can be used during initialization to place vehicles on the rail.
● MaterialType
The type of vehicle that is to be placed
● MaterialList
The name of the material list from which the vehicle is to be taken. If this parameter is left
blank, all the material lists in the simulation project are searched.
● InitNbrOfObjects
The initial number of vehicles to be placed on the rail
● Clearance
The distance between the vehicles that are initially placed
Operating window
In the operating window, you can set the conveyor speed as a percentage of the nominal
conveyor speed (NominalSpeed) using a slider and monitor the status of a maximum of four
sensors.
CurvedRail45-S4 – 45° curved rail with four sensors
Symbol
vehicles. The size of the symbol can be scaled proportionally. The size corresponds to the size

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
of the rail section. Proportional scaling alters the radius of the curve; the angle of 45° does not
change.
Function
The CurvedRail45-S4 component type is used to simulate a curved rail with a 45° bend. The
speed at which vehicles are moved over this rail section is set at the hidden Speed input of the
component as a percentage of the configurable nominal conveyor speed (NominalSpeed
parameter).
Sensor4 is set. The ID of the vehicles can be obtained via the hidden integer outputs SensorId1
to SensorId4.
Parameters
The behavior of the component can be set by means of a parameter:
● NominalSpeed
● NbrOfSensors
● SensorPosition
● Parameter 'SensorPosition' must be less than the component's length

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
The CurvedRail45-S4 component includes the additional parameters TEMPLATE and
HIERARCHY, which can be used to control generation of the drive level. You can find additional
information on this in section: Using templates (Page 803).
Operating window
sensors.
CurvedRail90-S4 – 90° curved rail with four sensors
Symbol
vehicles. The size of the symbol can be scaled proportionally. The size corresponds to the size
of the rail section. Proportional scaling alters the radius of the curve; the angle of 90° does not
change.
Function
The CurvedRail90-S4 component type is used to simulate a curved rail with a 90° bend. The
speed at which vehicles are moved over this rail section is set at the hidden Speed input of the
parameter).
Sensor4 is set. The ID of the vehicles can be obtained via the hidden integer outputs SensorId1
to SensorId4.

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
Parameters
● MaxSpeed
● NbrOfSensors
● SensorPosition
● Parameter 'SensorPosition' must be less than the component's length
The CurvedRail90-S4 component includes the additional parameters TEMPLATE and

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
Operating window
sensors.
RailSwitch-F – Switchable switch with 45° spur
Symbol
vehicles. The size of the symbol can be scaled proportionally to adjust the size of the switch.
Proportional scaling alters the length of the switch and the radius of the spur curve, but the spur
angle of 45° does not change.
Function
The RailSwitch-F component type is used to simulate a branch (switch) or junction with a 45°
spur. It functions as a switch when objects are moved in the reference direction and as a
junction when they are moved against the reference direction.
If the hidden binary input Switch is set to one (True), transport is switched from the straight
section (A – B) to the spur (A – C). Note that transport against the reference direction is likewise
only possible over an active segment.
The speed at which vehicles are moved over the rails is set at the hidden Speed input of the
parameter).
The switch cannot be operated if it is occupied by vehicles. If an attempt is made to operate an
occupied switch, the following error message appears: "Switch cannot be operated while being
occupied".
Parameters
The behavior of the component can be set by means of a parameter:
● NominalSpeed
The parameter, its unit and default value are shown in the figure below.

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
The RailSwitch-F component includes the additional parameters TEMPLATE and
Operating window
conveyor speed (NominalSpeed) using a slider and switch the sections.
RailSwitch-M – Movable switch with 45° spur
Symbol
vehicles. The size of the symbol can be scaled proportionally to adjust the size of the switch.
Proportional scaling alters the length of the switch and the radius of the spur curve, but the spur
angle of 45° does not change.
Function
The RailSwitch-M component type is used to simulate a branch (switch) or junction with a 45°
spur. It functions as a switch when objects are moved in the reference direction and as a
junction when they are moved against the reference direction.

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
The hidden analog input Switch is used to move the switch from transport over the straight
section (A – B) to transport over the spur (A – C). The switching time is configurable
(SwitchingTime parameter). Positive values at the Switch input move the switch to the A – C
section, while negative values move it to the A – B section. The absolute values are
percentages of the configurable switching speed. The moving operation for a component is
shown in animated form in the symbol.
The speed at which vehicles are moved over the rails is set at the hidden analog input Speed of
the component as a percentage of the configurable nominal conveyor speed (NominalSpeed
parameter).
The switch cannot be moved if it is occupied by vehicles. If an attempt is made to move an
occupied switch, the following error message appears: "Switch cannot be operated while being
occupied".
Parameters
● NominalSpeed
● SwitchingTime
Switching time for the switch when triggered with +/- 100% values at the Switch input.
The RailSwitch-M component includes the additional parameters TEMPLATE and

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
Operating window
In the operating window, you can use a slider to set the conveyor speed as a percentage of the
nominal conveyor speed (NominalSpeed) and the switching time as a percentage of the
configurable switching time (SwitchingTime).
InOut – Inward and outward section for vehicles
Symbol
The width of the symbol is scalable. The set width corresponds to the length of the inward/
outward section.
Function
The InOut component type represents a section over which vehicles are moved into or out of
a conveyor system network. The InOut component is connected to an open section of the
network at connector A to extend the conveyor system network.
To move them into the network, individual vehicles are placed on the unconnected end of the
inward/outward section (left edge of the symbol) by setting the hidden binary input
CreateObject and moved from there to connector A. Correspondingly, vehicles to be moved out
of the network are moved from connector A to the unconnected end of the inward/outward
section, from where they are removed from the conveyor system network. The speed at which
vehicles are moved over the inward/outward section is set at the hidden Speed input of the
parameter).
The inward/outward section can only be occupied by one vehicle at a time. If the section is
occupied by a vehicle, no other vehicle can be positioned to be moved into the network or
removed from the network.
Parameters
The type of vehicles to be moved into the network, the material list from which they are taken
and the speed at which the vehicles are moved over the inward/outward section can be set by
means of parameters.

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
The InOut component includes the additional parameters TEMPLATE and HIERARCHY,
on this in the section: Using templates (Page 803).
Operating window
In the operating window, you can place a new vehicle on the inward/outward section by clicking
the pushbutton.
RailLifter – Lifter
A lifter is a rail that can be moved vertically through several levels. In SIMIT a lifter is made up
of the base component of the RailLifterBase type and up to eight expansion components of
the RailLifterExtension type. The base component simulates the lifter in the base level, while
each additional level is simulated by an expansion component. A lifter that can be moved
through up to eight additional levels can be simulated in this way.
You do not have to position the base component and the associated expansion components on
the same chart. You can create a separate chart for each level, for example, and distribute the
lifter components over the individual charts.
The following points apply to the parameter assignment of the base component:
● There are no restrictions on the name of the base component.
● The NbrOfExtensions parameter indicates the number of additional levels and hence also
the number of expansion components used.
● In the base component you have to specify the position (LevelPosition) for each level, which
means the level above the base level in millimeters. The base level is by definition at level
zero. All level values must be positive and increase with the level number.

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
The following points should be borne in mind when assigning the parameters for the expansion
components:
● The name of the expansion component is formed from the name of the base component, the
'#' character, and a number indicating the level.
● The Level parameter must correspond to the level number. The numbering of the levels
starts with one.
● The BaseName parameter is the name of the base component.
● The length of the lifter is determined by the width of the base component.
Note
All expansion components must be exactly the same width as the base component. Otherwise,
a message will be displayed pointing to this inconsistency when the simulation is started.
The rail drive and the lifter sensors are fully implemented in the base component. This means
expansion components do not work without the base component.
RailLifterBase – Lifter (base component)
Symbol
vehicles. The width of the symbol is scalable. The set width corresponds to the length of the
lifter rail.
Function
The RailLifterBase component type is used to simulate the base station of a lifter. The speed
at which vehicles are moved over the lifter rail is set at the hidden analog input Speed of the
parameter). Similarly, the lifting speed, which means the speed at which the rail is moved to the
different levels, is set at the hidden analog input LifterSpeed as a percentage of the
configurable nominal lifting speed (NominalLifterSpeed parameter).
To move vehicles in and out at the various lifter levels, the lifter rail must be moved to the
appropriate level and stop flush with that level. Flushness must be set with a positioning
accuracy Δ that is the same for all levels (PositioningAccuracy parameter). The rail stops flush
with a level H if the following applies for its level h:
H−Δ≤h≤H+Δ
Between one and four sensors can be positioned on the rail relative to each of the two
connectors A and B. When a vehicle is within the detection range of a sensor, the

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
corresponding hidden binary output Sensor1 to Sensor4 is set. The ID of the detected vehicle
can be obtained via the corresponding hidden integer outputs SensorId1 to SensorId4.
Note
The base component has further hidden inputs for exchanging signals with extension
components. The corresponding signals are assigned to these inputs by default. Do not change
these default settings, otherwise the lifter components will not behave in the intended way in the
simulation.
Parameters
The behavior of the component is configurable.
● NominalSpeed
● NominalLifterSpeed
Nominal lifting speed; adjustable online
● NbrOfExtensions
Number of additional levels (1 to 8)
● LevelPosition
Level of the corresponding additional level
● PositioningAccuracy
Positioning accuracy within which the level is deemed to have been reached.
● NbrOfSensorsA
Number of sensors relative to connector A (1 to 4)
● SensorPositionA
Position of the corresponding sensor relative to connector A of the symbol
● NbrOfSensorsB
Number of sensors relative to connector B (1 to 4)
● SensorPositionB
Position of the corresponding sensor relative to connector B of the symbol
When the simulation is running, the defined sensors are shown in the correct position in the

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
The RailLifterBase component includes the additional parameters TEMPLATE and
You also need to specify how many vehicles can be present on this conveyor section at any one
time.
Operating window
In the operating window, you can use a slider to set the transport speed as a percentage of the
nominal conveyor speed (NominalSpeed) and you can monitor the status of the sensors.
In the extended operating window you can move the lifter up or down by means of pushbuttons.
The current lifter position and level are displayed.

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
RailLifterExtension – Lifter (extension component)
Symbol
vehicles. The width of the symbol is scalable. The set width corresponds to the length of the
lifter rail.
Note
The width of the extension component must be the same as the width of the base component.
Function
The RailLifterExtension component type is used to simulate a lifter at one of the accessible
levels. A component of this type can only be used in combination with a component of
the RailLifterBase type.
Parameters
The behavior of the component is configurable:
● Level
Level at which the component is located. The numbering starts at one.
● BaseName
Name of the corresponding base component
Specify how many objects can be present on the section (lifter rail) defined by the component
at any one time. This parameter should be set to the same value as for the base component.

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
Operating window
In the operating window, you can monitor the status of the sensors.
8.3.3.3 Component types for non-vehicular conveyor systems
The CONVEYOR directory of the CONTEC library contains component types for use in
simulating conveyor systems such as roller, chain and belt conveyor systems. All of these
components determine the speed at which the object is moved. The object is passive in respect
of these components, in other words it generally does not have its own drive. These
components are typically used to transport pallets, containers or capital goods.

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
All component types of the CONVEYOR library have a fixed symbol height of 40 pixels.
According to the selected scale the width of the conveyors can be adjusted to the values listed
in the table below.
Table 8-50 Selectable widths for conveyors
Conveyor width Scale

40 mm 1 pix: 1 mm
200 mm 1 pix: 5 mm
400 mm 1 pix: 10 mm
800 mm 1 pix: 20 mm
2000 mm 1 pix: 50 mm
4000 mm 1 pix: 100 mm
Conveyor-S4 – Straight conveyor with four sensors
Symbol
objects. When the simulation is running the current transport direction is indicated by green
arrows in the symbol.
Table 8-51 Indication of the current transport direction in the symbol
Transport in the reference direction
No transport
Transport against the reference direction
The width of the symbol is scalable. The set width corresponds to the length of the conveyor.

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
Function
The Conveyor-S4 component type simulates a straight conveyor section of a given length. The
speed at which objects are moved over this conveyor is set at the hidden analog input Speed of
parameter).
Between one and four sensors can be positioned on the conveyor relative to each of the two
connectors A and B. When an object is within the detection range of a sensor, the
corresponding hidden binary output Sensor1 to Sensor4 is set. The ID of the detected object
Parameters
● NominalSpeed
● NbrOfSensorsA
● SensorPositionA
Position of the corresponding sensor relative to connector A of the symbol
● NbrOfSensorsB
● SensorPositionB
Position of the corresponding sensor relative to connector B of the symbol
The Conveyor-S4 component includes the additional parameters TEMPLATE and

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
Further additional parameters can be used to place objects on the conveyor for the simulation.
These are placed on the conveyor after the start of the simulation, starting at end A:
● MaterialType
The type of object initially placed on the conveyor
● MaterialList
The name of the material list from which the object is to be taken. If this parameter is left
The number of objects that are to be placed
● Clearance
The distance between the objects that are to be placed
Operating window
conveyor speed (NominalSpeed) using a slider and monitor the status of the maximum eight
sensors.
In the extended operating window you can remove objects that are currently detected by one
of the eight sensors from the conveyor section (Remove). In addition, you can place new
objects on the conveyor section using the Create pushbutton (Create). The object with the
specified object ID (Object-ID) is then placed on the conveyor at the specified distance (Offset)
from connector A. If no object ID is specified, the system searches the material lists
(MaterialList additional parameter) for an object of the type specified by the MaterialType
additional parameter.
This simulates manual interventions in the conveyor system such as the removal and
placement of objects.

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
Conveyor-S4-Stopper – Straight conveyor with four sensors and stopper
Symbol
Table 8-52 Indication of the current transport direction in the symbol
Transport in the reference direction
No transport
Transport against the reference direction
The width of the symbol is scalable. The set width corresponds to the length of the conveyor.
Function
The Conveyor-S4-Stopper component type simulates a straight conveyor section of a given
length with a stopper at a given position on the conveyor section. The speed at which objects
are moved over this conveyor is set at the hidden analog input Speed of the component as a
percentage of the configurable nominal conveyor speed (NominalSpeed parameter).
Between one and four sensors can be positioned on the conveyor relative to each of the two

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
The stopper can be activated and deactivated to stop objects at the stopper position in both
conveyor directions. When a stopper is activated, its color in the symbol changes to red.
Table 8-53 Representation of the stopper in the symbol
Deactivated stopper
Activated stopper
Parameters
● NominalSpeed
● StopperPosition
Position of the stopper relative to connector A
● NbrOfSensorsA
● SensorPositionA
● NbrOfSensorsB
● SensorPositionB
Position of the corresponding sensor relative to connector B of the symbol.

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
The Conveyor-S4 component includes the additional parameters TEMPLATE and
Further additional parameters can be used to place objects on the conveyor for the simulation.
These are placed on the conveyor after the start of the simulation, starting at end A:
● MaterialType
The type of object initially placed on the conveyor
● MaterialList
The name of the material list from which the object is to be taken. If this parameter is left
The number of objects that are to be placed
● Clearance
The distance between the objects that are to be placed:
Operating window
sensors. The stopper can be activated and deactivated by means of a switch.
In the extended operating window you can remove objects that are currently detected by one
of the eight sensors from the conveyor section (Remove). In addition, you can place new
objects on the conveyor section using the Create pushbutton (Create). The object with the
specified object ID (Object-ID) is then placed on the conveyor at the specified distance (Offset)
from connector A. If no object ID is specified, the system searches the material lists
(MaterialList additional parameter) for an object of the type specified by the MaterialType
additional parameter.
This simulates manual interventions in the conveyor system such as the removal and
placement of objects.

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
ConveyorCurve45-R60 – 45° curved conveyor (radius 60 pixels)
Symbol
Function
The ConveyorCurve45-R60 component type is used to simulate a curved conveyor. The
conveyor section forms a 45° arc. The component symbol cannot be scaled. The radius of the
arc is set to 60 pixels and cannot be changed. The effective radius of the component is
determined by the scale set for the chart. For example, a scale of 1 pix: 100 mm gives an
effective radius of 6 meters.
The speed at which objects are moved over this conveyor is set at the hidden analog input
Speed of the component as a percentage of the configurable nominal conveyor speed
(NominalSpeed parameter).
Parameter
The nominal conveyor speed can be set by means of a parameter. Its unit and default value are

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
The ConveyorCurve45-R60 component includes the additional parameters TEMPLATE and
Operating window
conveyor speed (NominalSpeed) using a slider.
Symbol
Function

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
Parameters
Operating window
conveyor speed (NominalSpeed) using a slider
Symbol

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
Function
Parameters
Operating window
conveyor speed (NominalSpeed) using a slider

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
Symbol
Function
Parameters

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
Operating window
Symbol
Function
Parameters

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
Operating window
Symbol
Function

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
Parameters
Operating window
90DegreeTransfer – 90-degree transfer
Symbol
objects on the conveyor section A – B. When the simulation is running the current transport
direction is indicated by green arrows in the symbol. The direction of transfer (to D or C) is also
indicated by green arrows.

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
The width of the symbol is scalable. The set width corresponds to the length of the 90-degree
transfer. As with all component types in the CONVEYOR library, the height of the symbol is
fixed at 40 pixels. The effective width of the 90-degree transfer is therefore determined by the
scale set for the chart.
The location of positions C and D for the transfer of objects can be moved. To do so, hold down
the ALT key and drag the connection point C or D with the mouse (with the left mouse button
held down) to the desired position.
Function
The 90DegreeTransfer component type is used to simulate a 90-degree transfer for moving
objects from conveyor section A – B to a conveyor connected at connector C or D without
rotating them.
The speed at which objects are moved over the conveyor section A – B is set at the hidden
analog input Speed of the component as a percentage of the configurable nominal conveyor
speed (NominalSpeed parameter). Correspondingly, the speed at which the objects are
transferred to the transfer section C – D is set at the hidden analog input TransferSpeed as a
percentage of the configurable nominal transfer speed (NominalTransferSpeed parameter).
The reference direction of the transfer sections is set from connector C to the transport section
or from the transport section to connector D.
Between one and four sensors can be positioned on the transfer relative to each of the four
connectors A, B, C and D. When an object is within the detection range of a sensor, the
Parameters
● NominalSpeed
● NominalTransferSpeed
Nominal transfer speed; adjustable online
Accuracy with which the object must be positioned for transfer to the transfer section
connecting to C or D
● NbrOfSensorsA
● SensorPositionA
● NbrOfSensorsB
● SensorPositionB
● NbrOfSensorsC
Number of sensors relative to connector C (1 to 4)

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
● SensorPositionC
Position of the corresponding sensor relative to connector C of the symbol.
● NbrOfSensorsD
Number of sensors relative to connector D (1 to 4)
● SensorPositionD
Position of the corresponding sensor relative to connector D of the symbol.
The 90DegreeTransfer component includes the additional parameters TEMPLATE and
You also need to specify how many objects can be present on the conveyor section at any one
time.
Operating window
conveyor speed (NominalSpeed) and the transfer speed as a percentage of the nominal
transfer speed (NominalTransferSpeed) using a slider and monitor the status of the maximum
eight sensors.
The extended operating window shows whether the object is close enough to connector C or
D to be transferred.

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
CrossOver – Crossover
Symbol
The two gray arrow heads in the symbol indicate the reference direction for movement of the
objects over sections A – B and C – D. When the simulation is running the current transport
direction is indicated by green arrows in the symbol.
The width of the symbol is scalable. The set width corresponds to the length of the crossover.
Function
The CrossOver component type simulates a crossover. The speed at which objects are moved
over this switch is set at the hidden analog input Speed of the component as a percentage of
the configurable nominal conveyor speed (NominalSpeed parameter).
The switch is operated by means of the two binary inputs Switch_CB_DA and Switch_AD_BC.
If the Switch_CB_DA input is set (True), the object is no longer transported over section A – B
but over section A – D (transport in reference direction) or section B – C (transport against
reference direction), depending on the transport direction. Correspondingly, if the
Switch_AD_BC input is set (True), the object is no longer transported over section C – D but
over section C – B (transport in reference direction) or over section A – D (transport against
reference direction), depending on the transport direction. Setting both inputs at the same time
deactivates the switch, which means that transport is stopped.

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
Parameters
The nominal speed at which the object is transported is set by means of the NominalSpeed
parameter. Its unit and default value are shown in the figure below.
The CrossOver component includes the additional parameters TEMPLATE and HIERARCHY,
Operating window
sensors.
In the extended operating window you can set the two binary inputs Switch_CB_DA and
Switch_AD_BC by means of a slider to set the transport direction of the crossover manually.
Lifter
A lifter is a conveyor section that can be moved vertically through several levels. In SIMIT a lifter
is made up of the base component of the LifterBase type and up to eight expansion
components of the LifterExtension type. The base component simulates the lifter in the base
level, while each additional level is simulated by an expansion component. A lifter that can be
moved through up to eight additional levels can be simulated in this way.
You do not have to position the base component and the associated expansion components on
the same chart. You can create a separate chart for each level, for example, and distribute the
lifter components over the individual charts.

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
The following points apply to the parameter assignment of the base component:
● There are no restrictions on the name of the base component.
● The NbrOfExtensions parameter indicates the number of additional levels and hence also
the number of expansion components used.
● In the base component you have to specify the position (LevelPosition) for each level, which
means the level above the base level in millimeters. The base level is by definition at level
zero. All level values must be positive and increase with the level number.
The following points should be borne in mind when assigning the parameters for the expansion
components:
● The name of the expansion component is formed from the name of the base component, the
'#' character, and a number indicating the level.
● The Level parameter must correspond to the level number. The numbering of the levels
starts with one.
● The BaseName parameter is the name of the base component.
● The length of the lifter is determined by the width of the base component.
Note
All expansion components must be exactly the same width as the base component. Otherwise,
a message will be displayed pointing to this inconsistency when the simulation is started.
The drives and the lifter sensors are fully implemented in the base component. This means
expansion components do not work without the base component.
LifterBase – Lifter (base component)
Symbol
The width of the symbol is scalable. The set width corresponds to the length of the lifter.

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
Function
The LifterBase component type is used to simulate the base station of a lifter. The speed at
which objects are moved over the conveyor section is set at the hidden analog input Speed of
parameter). Similarly, the lifting speed, which means the speed at which the lifter is moved to
the different levels, is set at the hidden analog input LifterSpeed as a percentage of the
configurable nominal lifting speed (NominalLifterSpeed parameter).
To move objects in and out at the various lifter levels, the lifter must be moved to the appropriate
level and stop flush with that level. Flushness must be set with a positioning accuracy Δ that is
the same for all levels (PositioningAccuracy parameter). The lifter stops flush with a level H if
the following applies for its level h:
H−Δ≤h≤H+Δ
Between one and four sensors can be positioned on the lifter relative to each of the two
Note
The base component has further hidden inputs for exchanging signals with extension
components. The corresponding signals are assigned to these inputs by default. Do not change
these default settings, otherwise the lifter components will not behave in the intended way in the
simulation.
Parameters
The behavior of the component is configurable.
● NominalSpeed
● NominalLifterSpeed
Nominal lifting speed; adjustable online
● NbrOfExtensions
Number of additional levels (1 to 8)
● LevelPosition
Level of the corresponding additional level
Positioning accuracy within which the level is deemed to have been reached.
● NbrOfSensorsA
● SensorPositionA

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
● NbrOfSensorsB
● SensorPositionB
The LifterBase component includes the additional parameters TEMPLATE and HIERARCHY,
You also need to specify how many objects can be present on this conveyor section at any one
time.
Operating window
In the operating window, you can use a slider to set the transport speed as a percentage of the
nominal conveyor speed (NominalSpeed) and you can monitor the status of the sensors.
In the extended operating window you can move the lifter up or down by means of pushbuttons.
The current lifter position and level are displayed.

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
LifterExtension – Lifter (extension component)
Symbol
objects. The width of the symbol is scalable. The set width corresponds to the length of the lifter
rail.
Note
The width of the extension component must be the same as the width of the base component.
Function
The LifterExtension component type is used to simulate a lifter at one of the accessible levels.
A component of this type can only be used in combination with a component of the LifterBase
type.
Parameters
The behavior of the component is configurable:
● Level
Level at which the component is located. The numbering starts at one.
● BaseName
Name of the corresponding base component

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
Specify how many objects can be present on the section defined by the component at any one
time. This parameter should be set to the same value as for the base component.
Operating window
In the operating window, you can monitor the status of the maximum eight sensors.
Turntable-R60 – Turntable
Symbol
The gray arrow head in the symbol indicates the reference direction for transport of the object
on the turntable. When the simulation is running the current transport direction is indicated by
green arrows in the symbol.
Function
The Turntable-R60 component type simulates a turntable. A turntable rotates a conveyor
section through multiples of 90°. Using a turntable, objects can be transported onwards in the
original conveyor direction or at right angles to that direction.
The speed at which objects are moved on the turntable is set at the hidden analog input Speed
of the component as a percentage of the configurable nominal conveyor speed (NominalSpeed

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
parameter). Correspondingly, the rotation speed is set at the hidden analog input
RotationSpeed as a percentage of the configurable nominal rotation speed
(NominalRotationSpeed parameter).
The component symbol cannot be scaled. The radius of the turntable is thus fixed at 60 pixels
and cannot be changed. Correspondingly, the length of the turntable is fixed at 120 pixels. The
effective turntable length of the component is determined by the scale set for the chart. For
example, a scale of 1 pix: 100 mm gives an effective length of 12 meters.
Between one and four sensors can be positioned on the turntable relative to each of the two
Parameters
● NominalSpeed
● NominalRotationSpeed
Nominal rotation speed; adjustable online
Accuracy with which the turntable must be positioned for the object to be transferred
● NbrOfSensorsA
● SensorPositionA
● NbrOfSensorsB
● SensorPositionB

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
The TurnTable-R60 component includes the additional parameters TEMPLATE and
Specify how many objects can be located on the turntable at the same time.
Operating window
conveyor speed (NominalSpeed) using a slider and monitor the status of the maximum 8
sensors.
In the extended operating window you can rotate the turntable manually by 90° in both
directions by means of pushbuttons. The end position in each case is displayed.
Swiveltable-R120 – Swivel table
Symbol

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
on the swivel table. When the simulation is running the current transport direction is indicated
by green arrows in the symbol.
Function
The Swiveltable-R120 component type simulates a swivel table that can be used to rotate a
conveyor section through 90°. Using a swivel table, objects can be transported onwards in the
original conveyor direction or at right angles to that direction.
The speed at which objects are moved on the swivel table is set at the hidden analog input
(NominalSpeed parameter). Correspondingly, the rotation speed is set at the hidden analog
input RotationSpeed as a percentage of the configurable nominal rotation speed
(NominalRotationSpeed parameter).
The component symbol cannot be scaled. The radius of the swivel table, which means the
length of the swivel table, is fixed at 120 pixels and cannot be changed. The effective swivel
table length of the component is determined by the scale set for the chart. For example, a scale
of 1 pix: 100 mm gives an effective length of 12 meters.
Between one and four sensors can be positioned on the swivel table relative to each of the two
Parameters
● NominalSpeed
● NominalRotationSpeed
Nominal rotation speed; adjustable online
Accuracy with which the turntable must be positioned for the object to be transferred
● NbrOfSensorsA
● SensorPositionA
● NbrOfSensorsB
● SensorPositionB

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
The Swiveltable-R120 component includes the additional parameters TEMPLATE and
Specify how many objects can be located on the swivel table at the same time.
Operating window
sensors.
In the extended operating window you can rotate the swivel table manually through 90° by
means of a pushbutton. Another pushbutton allows you to rotate it back to its original position.
Indicators show when it has reached the end position.

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
TransferCarriage – Transfer carriage
Symbol
The height and width of this component are scalable. The width sets the length of the transfer
carriage, the height sets the length of the transfer path.
on the swivel table. When the simulation is running the current transport direction is indicated
Function
The TransferCarriage component type is used for simulating a transfer carriage. Objects can
be moved onto the transfer carriage from both sides. It can then be moved to another position
at right angles to the transport direction and the objects can then be transported onwards via
connectors Ai and Bi.
The number of connectors Ai, Bi present on the left and right of the component is configurable.
A maximum of 16 connectors on each side is possible; by default there are two connectors on
each side. A1, A2, B1, B2. Each connector marks a position that can be approached by the
transfer carriage at right angles to the transport direction.
The speed at which objects are transported on the transfer carriage is set at the hidden analog
input Speed of the component as a percentage of the configurable nominal conveyor speed
(NominalSpeed parameter). Correspondingly, the transfer speed is set at the hidden analog
input TransferSpeed as a percentage of the configurable nominal transfer speed
(NominalTransferSpeed parameter).
Between one and four sensors can be positioned on the transfer carriage relative to each of the
two connector sides A and B. When an object is within the detection range of a sensor, the
Parameters
● NominalSpeed
● NominalTransferSpeed
Nominal transfer speed; adjustable online

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
Accuracy with which the transfer carriage must be positioned for the object to be transferred.
● NbrOfConnectorsA
Number of connectors on the left side (A)
● NbrOfConnectorsB
Number of connectors on the right side (B)
● NbrOfSensorsA
Number of sensors relative to connector side A (1 to 4)
● SensorPositionA
Position of the corresponding sensor relative to connector side A of the symbol.
● NbrOfSensorsB
Number of sensors relative to connector side B (1 to 4)
● SensorPositionB
Position of the corresponding sensor relative to connector side B of the symbol.
The TransferCarriage component includes the additional parameters TEMPLATE and
Specify how many objects can be located on the transfer carriage at the same time.
Operating window
sensors.

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
In the extended operating window you can move the transfer carriage manually in both
directions to the next position by means of pushbuttons (Up, Down). The end position in each
case is displayed. Indicators show when the transfer carriage has reached a connector position
on one or the other side.
SpurConveyor-1 – Diagonal feed with one spur
Symbol
on the diagonal feed. When the simulation is running the current transport direction is indicated
Function
The SpurConveyor-1 component type simulates a diagonal feed with one spur. Objects can be
transported along section A – C or along the spur section A – B.
The speed at which objects are moved on the diagonal feed is set at the hidden analog input
(NominalSpeed parameter). To switch conveying to the spur section, the hidden binary input
Switch is set to one (True).
Parameter

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
The SpurConveyor-1 component includes the additional parameters TEMPLATE and
information on this in the section: Using templates (Page 803).
Operating window
In the extended operating window you can change to the spur section by means of a switch.
SpurConveyor-2 – Diagonal feed with two spurs
Symbol
on the diagonal feed. When the simulation is running the current transport direction is indicated
Function
The SpurConveyor-2 component type simulates a diagonal feed with two alternative spurs.
Objects can be transported along section A – C or along one of the two spur sections A – B or
A–D.
The speed at which objects are moved on the diagonal feed is set at the hidden analog input
(NominalSpeed parameter). To switch conveying to one of the two spur sections, one of the two

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
hidden binary inputs Switch_AB or Switch_AD is set to one (True): Switch_AB switches to spur
section A – B and Switch_AD switches to spur section A – D. If one of the two inputs is set,
setting the other one has no effect. There will be no switching to either spur section if both inputs
are set at the same time.
Parameter
The SpurConveyor-2 component includes the additional parameters TEMPLATE and
information on this in the section: Using templates (Page 803).
Operating window
In the extended operating window you can change to the corresponding spur section A – B or A
– D by means of a switch.

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
8.3.3.4 Component types for simulating objects
The MATERIAL directory of the CONTEC library contains component types for simulating
objects. Vehicles (Vehicle) can be used with component types in the RAILS directory to
simulate vehicular conveyor systems. Boxes (Box) can be used to simulate objects for
component types in the CONVEYOR directory.
You create material lists with these components. You can find more information on the topic in
the section: Scalability of objects (Page 800).
The size of a component (width and height of the symbol) is defined in the material list in
millimeters.
Box – Simple object
Symbol
Function
The Box component type is used to simulate an object with a rectangular outline, such as a
pallet or box. The component type defines the dimensions of the object. In the resolution 1:20
the standard dimensions correspond to the dimensions of a Euro pallet (1200 × 800 mm).

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
CBox – Colored object
Symbol
Function
The CBox component type is used to simulate an object with a rectangular outline, such as a
pallet or box. The component type defines the dimensions of the object. In the resolution 1:20
the standard dimensions correspond to the dimensions of a Euro pallet (1200 × 800 mm).
When the simulation is running the symbol of a component of this type can be displayed in one
of 8 different colors. The color is determined with the three binary inputs R, G and B of the
component by mixing together the 3 primary colors red, green and blue.
Table 8-54 Color chart for CBox
Input R Input G Input B Display

False False False
False False True
False True False
False True True
True False False
True False True
True True False
True True True
CBoxDS256 – Colored object with data storage
Symbol
Function
The CBoxDS256 component type is used to simulate an object with a rectangular outline, such
as a pallet or box. The component type defines the dimensions of the object. In the resolution
1:20 the standard dimensions correspond to the dimensions of a Euro pallet (1200 × 800 mm).

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
of 8 different colors. The color is determined with the three binary inputs R, G and B of the
Table 8-55 Color chart for CBoxDS256

False False False
False False True
False True False
False True True
True False False
True False True
True True False
True True True
In addition, a data storage with a configurable size (SizeOfStorage parameter) is defined for
components of this type. This memory represents the mobile data storage for an object. It is
created as a state vector MDS with the data type byte and can be up to 256 bytes in size.
Component types for writing to and reading this memory are located in the SENSORS library
in the RFID (Page 862) directory.
Parameters
The size of the data storage can be set by means of the SizeOfStorage parameter. The default
setting is one.
Vehicle
Symbol

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
Function
The Vehicle component type is used for simulating vehicles, such as those for electric overhead
monorail systems. The vehicle is assumed to have a rectangular outline. The component type
defines the dimensions of the outline. In the resolution 1:20 the standard dimensions
correspond to the dimensions of a Euro pallet (1000 × 300 mm).
The speed at which these vehicles move in the rail network in the simulation is generally
determined by the individual rail sections. However, the speed can also be set at the hidden
speed (NominalSpeed parameter). The two speed settings for a component are added
together.
A component of this type can also be configured so that the vehicle starts off again with a delay
if it has previously been stopped by a holdup. This function is only effective if the speed is set
by the conveyor section.
Parameters
● NominalSpeed
Nominal speed of the vehicle; adjustable online
● StartUpDelay
Start-up delay
● SensorRange
Detection range of the sensors
The Vehicle component includes the additional parameters TEMPLATE and HIERARCHY,

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
CVehicle
Symbol
Function
The CVehicle component type is used for simulating vehicles, such as those for electric
overhead monorail systems. The vehicle is assumed to have a rectangular outline. The
component type defines the dimensions of the outline. In the resolution 1:20 the standard
dimensions correspond to the dimensions of a Euro pallet (1000 × 300 mm).
together.
of 8 different colors. The color is determined with the 3 binary inputs R, G and B of the
Table 8-56 Color chart for CVehicle

False False False
False False True
False True False
False True True
True False False
True False True
True True False
True True True

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
Parameters
● NominalSpeed
Nominal speed; adjustable online
● StartUpDelay
Start-up delay
● SensorRange
Detection range for sensors
The CVehicle component includes the additional parameters TEMPLATE and HIERARCHY,
VehicleDS256 – Vehicle with data storage
Symbol
Function
The VehicleDS256 component type is used for simulating vehicles, such as those for electric
overhead monorail systems. The vehicle is assumed to have a rectangular outline. The
component type defines the dimensions of the outline. In the resolution 1:20 the standard
dimensions correspond to the dimensions of a Euro pallet (1000 × 300 mm).
together.

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
In addition, a data storage with a configurable size (SizeOfStorage parameter) is defined for
components of this type. This memory represents the mobile data storage for a vehicle. It is
created as a state vector MDS with the data type byte and can be up to 256 bytes in size.
Component types for writing to and reading this memory are located in the SENSORS library
in the RFID (Page 862) directory.
Parameters
● NominalSpeed
Nominal speed; adjustable online
● StartUpDelay
Start-up delay
● SensorRange
Detection range for sensors
● SizeOfStorage
Size of the mobile data storage
The VehicleDS256 component includes the additional parameters TEMPLATE and
8.3.3.5 Component types for simulating identification systems
The RFID directory of the SENSORS library contains component types for simulating
identification systems that can be activated by the controller via the FC/FB45 in normal
operation. Other operating modes are not simulated. Components of these types enables data
exchange between the controller and the corresponding simulation components of objects.
You can find additional information on this in the section: Component types for simulating
objects (Page 856).

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
Both fixed data such as barcodes and write/read data in the case of a Moby can be exchanged.
All component types in the RFID directory have the same structure, but they differ in terms of
the number of channels available and the commands that are supported.
As communication between interface modules (ASM) and the controller takes place by means
of cyclical I/O data and non-cyclical records, the component types in the RFID directory can
only be used with couplings that support both methods of communication. These components
can therefore only be used with the PROFIBUS DP and PROFINET IO coupling. The first table
shows the interface modules supported for PROFIBUS DP, while the second table shows the
interface modules supported for PROFINET IO.
Table 8-57 Interface modules for PROFIBUS DP
Interface module MLFB Head-end station supported for modular slaves

ASM 452 6GT2002-0EB20
ASM 454 6GT2002-2EE00
ASM 456 6GT2002-0ED00
ASM 473 6GT2002-0HA00 ET200X 6ES7 141-1BF00-0AB0 (80D2)
6GT2002-0HA10 ET200X 6ES7 141-1BF40-0AB0 (80D3)
ET200X 6ES7 141-1BF11-0XB0 (803D)
ET200X 6ES7 141-1BF12-0XB0 (803D)
ET200X 6ES7 142-1BD21-0XB0 (803C)
ET200X 6ES7 142-1BD22-0XB0 (803C)
ET200X 6ES7 143-1BF00-0AB0 (809A)
ET200X 6ES7 143-1BF00-0XB0 (809A)

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library

ASM 475 6GT2002-0GA10 ET200M 6ES7 153-2BA00-0XB0 (801E)
ET200M 6ES7 153-2BB00-0XB0 (8071)
ASM 754 6GT2302-2EE00
ASM 850 6GT2402-2EA00
ASM 854 6GT2402-2BB00
RF170C 6GT2002-0HD00 ET200pro 6ES7 154-1AA00-0AB0 (8118)
ET200pro 6ES7 154-1AA01-0AB0 (8118)
ET200pro 6ES7 154-2AA00-0AB0 (8119)
ET200pro 6ES7 154-2AA01-0AB0 (8119)
Table 8-58 Interface modules for PROFINET IO

ASM 475 6GT2002-0GA10 ET200M 6ES7 153-4BA00-0XB0
ET200M 6ES7 153-4AA00-0XB0
RF170C 6GT2002-0HD00 ET200pro 6ES7 154-4AB10-0AB0
ET200pro 6ES7 154-6AB00-0AB0
ET200pro 6ES7 154-6AB50-0AB0
Operating principle
Simulated objects are managed in SIMIT as object components in material lists. Every object
component is automatically assigned a unique identifier (ID) at the start of the simulation, which
can be accessed via the simulated sensors of a conveyor section component. In addition, the
content of a mobile data storage (MDS) can be represented in object components. Accordingly,
the two component types CBoxDS256 and VehicleDS256 in the MATERIAL directory of
the CONTEC library have been created with data storage. In order to be able to exchange the
contents of a simulated data storage with the controller, components are needed in the
simulation that simulate the function of the corresponding interface module.
In the real system an interface module (ASM) is connected to a write/read device (SLG), which
is positioned at a certain point in the conveyor system. An object transported past that point is
detected by the SLG, and the SLG can read and in some cases also write to the object data
storage.
In SIMIT, the read/write devices (SLG) that are actually connected to the ASM and their
behavior are not simulated; only their functionality in terms of converting the data from the
mobile data storages in the ASM component types is simulated. As shown schematically in the
figure below, the identifiers (ID) of the objects as supplied by the simulated sensors on the
conveyor section are transmitted to the ASM components. Therefore the corresponding inputs
of the ASM components have to be implicitly connected to the simulated sensors.

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
,PSOLFLWFRQQHFWLRQV
$60VLPXODWLRQ
0DWHULDOKDQGOLQJ
VLPXODWLRQ
7UDQVSRUWHGPDWHULDO
&RQYH\RUOLQH
6HQVRU 6HQVRU
This ID is used to notify the controller via the cyclical input signal that an object has been
detected. Correspondingly, when the ASM component receives an acyclical command, it is
executed with the data from the MDS of the detected object. The data storage is accessed via
the ID.
All of the RFID component types contained in the CONTEC library include a simulation of the
"SIMATIC sensors – RFID systems" for communication with the STEP 7 function FB45 in
normal operation. Other operating modes of the RFID/Moby systems are not simulated and are
therefore not supported in the simulation.
The RFID components support the FB45 commands listed in the figure below.
Table 8-59 Supported FB45 commands
Command Code Meaning

Reset 0x00 Reset of the SLG
Write 0x01 Writes data to an existing MDS
Read 0x02 Reads data from an existing MDS
Init MDS 0x03 Initializes the data area of an MDS
Status SLG 0x04 Reads the status of the SLG
Antenna On/Off 0x0A Switches the antenna on/off (if present)
MDS Status 0x0B Reads the MDS status from an existing MDS
Note
Not every RFID component type supports all the commands listed in the table. A description of
the commands supported by an RFID component type can be found in the description of that
component type.
A mobile data storage (MDS) is simulated in SIMIT in the form of a state array of the byte type,
which is created within the individual conveyor objects. This data is then accessed via the ID of
the detected conveyor object reported to the ASM component and the "MDS" parameter
configured in the ASM component. This parameter specifies the name of the state array to be
accessed. In this way you can define multiple and also different MDS for a conveyor object,
simply by storing details in the ASM component regarding which MDS is to be read or written
to. However, for the component types of objects with MDS provided in the CONTEC library

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
(component types CBoxDS256, VehicleDS256), only one MDS is modeled. Because it is

named "MDS", the correct default setting of parameters of ASM components ensures that
access is available.
A missing MDS, missing state arrays or range violations are reported to the controller by an
RFID component with the appropriate error messages.
Table 8-60 Possible error codes of RFID components

Status OK: 0x00 No error (default)
Presence error 0x01 No MDS (ID==0) at the SLG
Unknown command: 0x05 The SIMIT component does not support the command sent to the
ASM.
Address error: 0x0 ● Error when accessing the data in the MDS
● Range violation when accessing the MDS
Antenna error: 0x1C ● Write/read commands when antenna is switched off
● Incorrect antenna command (2x On / 2x Off)
Signals are exchanged between RFID components and the controller both via input and output
words from the coupling for cyclical communication and acyclically via corresponding
communication functions implemented in the component type. For acyclical communication the
Unit input of the ASM component has to be connected to the Unit connector. The Unit connector
includes the subsystem number, the slave number and the slot number of the ASM from the
hardware configuration. Using drag-and-drop, it can be copied to the diagram from the
Hardware view in the property view of the SIMIT Unit coupling and connected to the ASM
component. When you configure the Unit connector manually, use the subsystem number, the
slave number and the slot number in the form "[#][#][#]".
The figure below shows an example of a hardware configuration with a four-channel interface
module that matches the view in the figure above.

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
ASM452 – Interface module for identification systems
Symbol
Function
The ASM452 component type simulates a 2-channel interface module for identification
systems on PROFIBUS DP. The commands listed in the table below are supported.
All inputs and outputs of the component types are integers. The ASM slave and module
address is set at the Unit input using the Unit connector. The cyclical data for each channel is
exchanged with the controller via the AW0, EW0 and AW2, EW2 inputs/outputs. It should be
linked to the relevant input/output signals of the SIMIT Unit coupling. The ID1 and ID2 inputs
should be implicitly connected to the sensors of the material handling simulation.
Table 8-61 Supported ASM452 commands

Parameters
Parameters MDS1 and MDS2 indicate which memory area of the MDS should be accessed by
object components via sensor ID1 or ID2.
The AntennaInitStatus parameter specifies the initial antenna status with which the SLG should
be initialized in the ASM at the start of simulation: True := antenna on, False := antenna off.
The figure below shows the parameters and their default settings.

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
The additional parameters comprise status values corresponding to the UDT110 as online
modifiable parameters for each of the two simulated read/write devices (SLG).

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
Operating window
The operating window shows the current states of the input and output words of the two
channels that are accessed by FB45. The bits shown in gray are not evaluated by an ASM
component. The extended operating window shows the antenna status, the most recently
executed command and the associated command status for both channels.
See also
Symbol

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
Function
exchanged with the controller via the AW0, EW0 to AW6, EW6 inputs/outputs. It should be
linked to the relevant input/output signals of the SIMIT Unit coupling. The inputs ID1 to ID4

Parameters
Parameters MDS1 to MDS4 indicate which area of the MDS should be accessed by object
components via sensor ID1 to ID4. The figure below shows the parameters and their default
settings.

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
Operating window
The operating window shows the current states of the input and output words of the four
component. The extended operating window shows the most recently executed command and
the associated command status for each of the four channels.
See also
Symbol

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
Function

Parameters

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
Operating window
See also
Symbol

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
Function
The ASM473 component type simulates a single-channel interface module for identification
address is set at the Unit input using the Unit connector. The cyclical data is exchanged with the
controller via the AW0, EW0 input/output. It should be linked to the relevant input/output signal
of the SIMIT Unit coupling. The ID1 input should be implicitly connected to the sensor of the
material handling simulation.

Parameters
Parameter MDS1 indicates which memory area of the MDS should be accessed by object
components via sensor ID1.

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
The additional parameters comprise status values corresponding to the UDT110 as online-
editable parameters for the simulated read/write device (SLG).

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
Operating window
The operating window shows the current states of the input and output word that are accessed
by FB45. The bits shown in gray are not evaluated by an ASM component. The extended
operating window shows the antenna status, the most recently executed command and the
associated command status.
See also
Symbol

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
Function
systems on PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO. The commands listed in the table below are
supported.

Parameters

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
Operating window
See also
Symbol

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
Function

Parameters
Parameters MDS1 to MDS4 indicate which memory area of the MDS should be accessed by
object components via sensor ID1 to ID4. The figure below shows the parameters and their
default settings.

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
Operating window
executed command and the associated command status for each of the four channels.
See also
Symbol

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
Function
The ASM850 component type simulates a single-channel interface module for identification
address is set at the Unit input using the Unit connector. The cyclical data is exchanged with the
controller via the AW0, EW0 input/output. It should be linked to the relevant input/output signal
of the SIMIT Unit coupling. The ID1 input should be implicitly connected to the sensor of the
material handling simulation.

Parameters
Parameter MDS1 indicates which memory area of the MDS should be accessed by object
components via sensor ID1.

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
Operating window
The operating window shows the current states of the input and output word that are accessed
by FB45. The bits shown in gray are not evaluated by an ASM component. The extended
operating window shows the antenna status, the most recently executed command and the
associated command status.
See also
Symbol

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
Function

Parameters
Parameters MDS1 to MDS4 indicate which memory area of the MDS should be accessed by
object components via sensor ID1 to ID4.

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
Operating window
executed command and the associated command status for each of the four channels.
See also
RF170C – Interface module for identification systems
Symbol

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
Function
The RF170C component type simulates a 2-channel interface module for identification systems
on PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO. The commands listed in the table below are supported.
Table 8-69 Supported RF170C commands

Parameters

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
Operating window
See also
RF180C – Interface module for identification systems
Symbol

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
Function
The RF180C component type simulates a 2-channel interface module for identification systems
on PROFINET IO. The commands listed in the table below are supported.
Table 8-70 Supported RF180C commands

Parameters

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
Operating window
See also
8.3.4 Creating custom component types for material handling simulation
The SIMIT component type editor CTE allows you to create your own component types, which
use the mechanisms of the conveyor technology simulation solution procedure. You can thus
expand the functions of the components supplied with the CONTEC library, for example, by
implementing more complex transport processes that are not covered by the supplied library
components and thus enhance your conveyor technology simulations. You can also create
your own component types from scratch to extend the CONTEC library and adapt it to your
specific conditions.

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
Three aspects must be considered when creating component types:

● The topological aspects,
● The connection to the solution procedure, and
● The specific behavior of the component.
The topological aspect is covered by appropriate extensions to the component type definition.
Special connection types are provided for the connection to the solution procedure.
In addition, the general descriptions of component properties in the "SIMIT – Component Type
Editor" manual form the basis for creating component types for material handling simulation.
The general properties also apply in full to these component types.
8.3.4.1 Topological properties
The topology of the modeled conveyor system is automatically determined when compiling a
simulation project from interconnected material handling components. Each component must
therefore provide relevant topological information about itself, which means information about
how it is to be treated topologically in the system. From a topological point of view it is necessary
to know how the reference directions for variables in a material handling system are defined for
a component and how data exchange between the component and the solution procedure is
set up.
Elements of the material handling system with topological information are:
● Segments of conveyor sections
● Branches
● Boundaries
Relationships with the topological connectors of the material handling component must be
defined for each of these elements. To do this, open the topology editor by double-clicking on
the Topology entry in the component type navigation menu.

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
Topological connectors (connection type MT1)

The MT1 connection type indicates the connectors that are used to connect material handling
components to one another. The topology of the conveyor system is derived from
interconnected connectors of this type and the topological information about the individual
handling equipment components. MT1 is purely a topological connector type, which means it
does not carry any signals. Connectors of this type are simply referred to below as "topological
connectors". Topological connectors are represented by circles.
&RQQHFWRUVRIW\SH
07
They can be joined by superimposing the connectors. Once linked, both connectors are hidden.
If topological connectors are connected with each other by a connecting line in the chart editor,
then the connected connectors are hidden. They are still visible only as pale shadows.
Connectors of the MT1 type cannot be joined more than once; they can only ever establish a
1:1 connection.
Topology of a segment
The topology description of a segment is used to set its reference direction. For example, the
definition
FROM a TO b;
defines a segment with a reference direction from the starting point a to the end point b. The
starting point and end point can be defined in the component type as a connector of type MT1
or as a branch or boundary.
Speeds are positive in the reference direction. The reference direction is also the preferred
direction, which is used by the solution procedure to determine the calculation order.
Topology of a branch
A branch as an internal node in a component type is defined as follows in the topology
description:
INTERNAL_NODE i;
The topological connectors of the component must also be assigned to this branch. Three
connectors can be assigned in the topological description as per the example below:
FROM i TO a;
FROM i TO b;
FROM i TO c;

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
The three connectors a, b and c must be defined as type FLN1 connectors in the component
type. The figure below shows a diagram of the resulting topological structure of the component
type:
A branch can also be defined as multiple segments having a common starting or end point that
is defined as an MT1 topological connector.
Topology of a boundary
In the topological description of a component type a boundary point as an external node e is
defined as follows:
EXTERNAL_NODE e;
This external node must be also be linked to at least one topological connector of the
component. The topology description is, for example, to be completed as
FROM e TO a;
. The topological connector a must be defined in the component type as a connector of type
MT1. The figure below shows a diagram of the resulting topological structure of the component
type.
Determining the next section

An object is only ever assigned to one segment in the conveyor system network. Transport can
only take place if the transition to the next segment is unambiguously defined. This means only
one possible subsequent segment can be identified as active at branching points; all other
alternative segments must be inactive.
An exception occurs at a branch as an internal node of a component, if the outline of an object
covers the branch and only one of the segments connected to the branch is active. In this case
the object is assigned to this active segment.
6HFWLRQLQDFWLYH 6HFWLRQLQDFWLYH
6HFWLRQDFWLYH 6HFWLRQDFWLYH
'LUHFWLRQRIPRWLRQ
'LUHFWLRQRIPRWLRQ

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
8.3.4.2 Connection to the solution procedure
The segments, branches and boundary points of a component and the solution procedure for
the material handling exchange data via special connectors. There are seven different
connection types MT2 to MT8 available for this purpose. Their use in material handling
components is explained in the sections below.
&RQYH\RUWHFKQRORJ\FRPSRQHQWV
07 07 07 07 07 07 07
6ROXWLRQPHWKRGIRUFRQYH\RUWHFKQRORJ\
Connectors of connection types MT2 to MT8 establish a connection to the solution procedure
and must therefore be set as hidden on the component symbol. In the connector properties, the
usage "Only in property view" or "Only in CTE" must be set.
Connectors of connection type MT2 to MT7 should be defined in the OUT direction, a connector
of connection type MT8 in the IN direction.
See also
Connection type MT2 for segments (Page 897)
Connection type MT3 for stoppers (Page 898)
Connection type MT4 for sensors (Page 898)
Connector type MT5 for placing objects (Page 899)
Connection type MT6 for positions (Page 900)
Connector type MT7 for parameter assignment of objects (Page 901)
Connector type MT8 for transferring objects at boundary points (Page 902)

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
Connection type MT2 for segments

A segment can exchange variables with the solution procedure via a connector of type MT2.
For a connector with the name MT the topological description of the segment is completed as
follows:
FROM a TO b: MT;
solution procedure to exchange various variables that are relevant to the segment between the
solution procedure and the component.
The figure below shows the input and output signals with the direction of data exchange
between the component and the solution procedure.
D E
0707
072FFXSLHG 07$QJOH
076SHHG
07)RUZDUG&RQGLWLRQ
07%DFNZDUG&RQGLWLRQ
6ROXWLRQPHWKRG
The output signals for the segment are set or calculated in the component and sent to the
solution procedure:
1. Angle (integer)
The angle in degrees of the segment of a circle that describes this segment. Positive angles
rotate in a clockwise direction, negative angles rotate in a counterclockwise direction. For a
straight connection the angle should be set to zero.
This setting is only evaluated when the simulation is initialized; changing the value during
the cyclical calculation has no effect.
2. Speed (analog)
The speed in m/s at which objects are to be moved over this segment. Positive values move
it in the preferred direction, negative values move it against the preferred direction.
3. ForwardCondition (integer)
Specifies whether this segment is active in the preferred direction (0) or not (–1).
4. BackwardCondition (integer)
Specifies whether this segment is active against the preferred direction (0) or not (–1).
The component receives information about the conveyor section from the solution procedure
via the input signal:
1. Occupied (bool)
Specifies whether the outline of one or more objects is in contact with this segment.
Connection type MT2 is used in the Rail-S4 and Conveyor-S4 library components, for example.

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
Connection type MT3 for stoppers

follows:
FROM a TO b: MT;
solution procedure to exchange various variables between the solution procedure and the
component.
D E
0707
073RVLWLRQ
07$FWLYH
6ROXWLRQPHWKRG
solution procedure:
1. Position (analog)
The position of the stopper on the segment as a percentage of the total
length of the segment.
2. Active (binary)
Indicates whether the stopper is active (True) or inactive (False).
Connector type MT3 is used in the Conveyor-S4-Stopper library component, for example.
Connection type MT4 for sensors

follows:
FROM a TO b: MT;
component.

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
D E
0707
072EMHFW,' 073RVLWLRQ
6ROXWLRQPHWKRG
solution procedure:
1. Position (analog)
The position of the sensor on the segment as a percentage of the total length of the
segment.
The component receives information about the segment from the solution procedure via the
input signal:
1. ObjectID (integer)
The ID of the object that is currently detected by the sensor. If no object is detected, this
value is zero.
Connector type MT5 for placing objects

A connector of connection type MT5 can be used for placing objects on a segment. For a
connector with the name MT, the topological definition of the segment should be completed as
follows:
FROM a TO b: MT;
component.
D E
0707
072EMHFW,' 07&OHDUDQFH
072YHUODS
077UDQVIHU
6ROXWLRQPHWKRG

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
solution procedure:
1. ObjectID (integer)
The ID of the object to be placed on this segment. The component generally obtains this ID
by means of appropriate function calls. You can find information on this in the following
sections:
– _MT.GetObjectByName (Page 905)
– _MT.GetObjectByType (Page 905)
2. Overlap (analog)
Overlap in millimeters in the preferred direction. This can be used to move the placement
position in relative terms. The placement position must always be on the segment, however.
3. Transfer (bool)
When this signal is set to True, the solution procedure starts the placement process. The
component can only set the signal for exactly one cycle, after which it must return to False.
The component receives information about the segment from the solution procedure via the
input signals:
1. Clearance (analog)
The available length of segment in millimeters viewed in the preferred direction.
Connection type MT6 for positions

The positions of branches as internal nodes and boundary points as external nodes have to be
configured individually. The topological definition of a node must be supplemented with a
connector via which the position is sent to the solution procedure, for a connector MT as follows:
EXTERNAL_NODE E: MT;
INTERNAL_NODE I: MT;
solution procedure to exchange various variables that are relevant to the node between the
solution procedure and the component.
LH
0707
07;3RVLWLRQ
07<3RVLWLRQ
6ROXWLRQPHWKRG

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
The output signals for the node are set or calculated in the component and sent to the solution
procedure:
1. XPosition (analog)
The X position of the node in millimeters relative to the top left corner of the component.
2. YPosition (analog)
The Y position of the node in millimeters relative to the top left corner of the component.
Connector type MT7 for parameter assignment of objects

An object can exchange variables with the solution procedure via a connector of type MT7. No
topological description is necessary.
The orientation of the object is dependent on its configuration and corresponds to the way the
basic symbol is displayed in the CTE.
5HYHUVH
LQEDFN LQIURQW
)RUZDUG
The connector of type MT7 must always be defined in the OUT direction. It connects the
component to the solution procedure to exchange various variables that are relevant to the
object between the solution procedure and the component.
A component can have no more than one MT7 type connector.
0707
07$EV3RVLWLRQ 076SHHG
07)URQW+ROGXS 076WDUW8S'HOD\
075HDU+ROGXS 076HQVRU5DQJH
6ROXWLRQPHWKRG

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
The output signals for the object are set or calculated in the component and sent to the solution
procedure:
1. Speed (analog)
The speed of the object established by its drive in m/s. A positive speed moves the vehicle
forwards, a negative speed moves it backwards.
This speed is replaced by a speed set by the rail if applicable.
2. StartUpDelay (analog)
The start-up delay in seconds. If the object is held up by the solution procedure, the object
waits for this time before moving again once the hold-up is cleared.
3. SensorRange (analog)
The percentage of the object length that is detected by a sensor. This value must be
between 0 and 100%.
The component receives information about the object from the solution procedure via the input
signals:
1. AbsPosition (analog)
Reserved for subsequent development.
2. FrontHoldup (binary)
If this signal is set to True, there is a stopper or another object directly in front of the object.
3. RearHoldup (binary)
If this signal is set to True, there is a stopper or another object directly behind the object.
Connector type MT7 is used in the Vehicle (Page 858) library component, for example.
Connector type MT8 for transferring objects at boundary points

Objects can be transferred from the solution procedure to a component and vice versa at
boundary points as external nodes. Once a component rather than the solution procedure has
control over the object, the position of the object cannot be changed by the solution procedure.
The object remains visible on the chart, however, and can now be positioned by the component
by means of corresponding system functions. You can find additional information on this in
section: _MT.SetPosition (Page 907).
This allows more complex transport operations, which cannot be simulated with a path-based
solution procedure, to be implemented in conveyor components.
A boundary point as an external node can exchange variables with the solution procedure via
a connector of type MT8. For a connector with the name MT the topological description of the
external node is completed as follows:
EXTERNAL_NODE E: MT;
The connector must always be defined in the IN direction. It connects the component to the
component.

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
H
0707
07$EV3RVLWLRQ 072XW2IIVHW
07;3RVLWLRQ 072XW2EMHFW,'
07<3RVLWLRQ 072XW7ULJJHU
07,Q2IIVHW 072XW6SHHG
07,Q2EMHFW,' 072XW2IIFXW
07,Q7ULJJHU
07,Q6SHHG
07,Q2IIFXW
6ROXWLRQPHWKRG
The output signals for the external node are set or calculated in the component and sent to the
solution procedure:
1. OutOffset (analog)
The length of the available section, viewed from the connector into the component. A
negative value means that viewed from the component, an object is projecting onto the
adjacent section controlled by the solution procedure; in this case the value corresponds to
the length of the projecting part of the object. All values are given in millimeters.
2. OutObjectID (integer)
The object ID of the object that viewed from the component is projecting onto the adjacent
section controlled by the solution procedure. The value is zero if no object is projecting.
3. OutTrigger (binary)
The component sets this signal to True for exactly one cycle to show that the adjacent
section controlled by the solution procedure has to take over the object.
4. Out.Speed (analog)
The speed in m/s at which the object is transferred.
5. OutOffcut (analog)
The time that the current cycle could not include because the object had reached the
transfer node, measured in seconds. The solution procedure has to take this time into
account in the next cycle to calculate an additional movement.
The component receives information from the solution procedure via the input signals:
1. AbsPosition (analog)
Reserved for subsequent developments.
2. XPosition (analog)
The relative X position of the connector linked to the node relative to the top left corner of the
component in millimeters.
3. YPosition (binary)
The relative Y position of the connector linked to the node relative to the top left corner of the
component in millimeters.
4. InOffset (analog)
The length of the available section, viewed from the component connector, in the direction
of the adjacent section outside the component. A negative value means that viewed from
the adjacent section controlled by the solution procedure, an object is projecting into this
component; in this case the value corresponds to the length of the projecting part of the
object. All values are given in millimeters.

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
5. InObjectID (integer)
The object ID of the object that viewed from the section controlled by the solution procedure
is projecting into the component. The value is zero if no object is projecting.
6. InTrigger (binary)
The solution procedure sets this signal to True for exactly one cycle to show that the
component has to take over the object.
7. InSpeed (analog)
The speed in m/s at which the object was last moved by the solution procedure.
8. InOffcut (analog)
The time that the current cycle could not include because the object had reached the
transfer node, measured in seconds. The component has to take this time into account in
the next cycle in order to calculate an additional movement.
Connector type MT8 is used in the TransferCarriage library component, for example.
Errors in the component code

If interfaces to the solution procedure are created in material handling components but not all
necessary signals are made available, the simulation start request is denied and a
corresponding error message displayed.
8.3.4.3 System functions
If you create your own component types you can utilize various system functions to access
objects in the simulation.
All functions described below return an error code as the return value. In order for a function to
be able to supply return values in a variable that is passed, this variable must be defined as a
field (vector), in this case with the dimension one. Refer to the table below for the meaning of
this return value.
Table 8-71 Return values of conveyor technology system functions
Value Meaning
0 No error
−2 The object cannot be positioned directly because it is currently under solution procedure
control.
−3 The object cannot be positioned or rotated because it is not currently assigned to a con‐
veyor section.

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
Value Meaning
−10 There is no object with the specified ID.
−11 The object with the specified ID is not available.1)
−12 There is no object with the specified name.
−13 The object with the specified name is not available.
−14 There is no object of the specified type.
−15 An object of the specified type is not available.
−20 The component has no signal with the specified name.
−21 The specified signal type cannot be used in this context.
−22 The address range of the byte array to be read or written has been exceeded.
−1000 General error
1
An object is not available if it is reserved for being assigned to a conveyor section or if it is assigned
to a conveyor section.
_MT.GetObjectByName
The _MT.GetObjectByName function returns the ID of the object with the instance name name
if it is available as an object, otherwise it returns the value –1. The return value type is long.
Specify values for the following parameters:
● error (long[])
Error code
You can find information about the error code in the table in the section: System functions
(Page 904).
● name (string)
The instance name of the object.
_MT.GetObjectByType
The _MT.GetObjectByType function returns the ID of an object of component type type if it is
available as an object, otherwise it returns the value –1. The return value type is long.
● error (long[])
Error code
(Page 904).
● type (string)
The type of object required.
● store (string)
The name of the material list in which the object is located. If an empty string is passed here,
all existing lists are searched.
_MT.Restore
The _MT.Restore function releases an object. The return value is void.

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library

● error (long[])
Error code
(Page 904).
● id (long)
The ID of the object to be released.
● delay (bool)
Indicates whether the return should be delayed by one cycle so that the object is available
for immediate reuse.
_MT.GetWidth
The _MT.GetWidth function returns the width of an object in millimeters. The return value type
is double.
● error (long[])
Error code
(Page 904).
● id (long)
The ID of the object to be queried.
_MT.GetHeight
The _MT.GetHeight function returns the height of an object in millimeters. The return value type
is double.
● error (long[])
Error code
(Page 904).
● id (long)
_MT.GetDepth
The _MT.GetDepth function returns the depth of an object in millimeters. The return value type
is double.

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library

● error (long[])
Error code
(Page 904).
● id (long)
_MT.GetAngle
The _MT.GetAngle function returns the angle in degrees of an object relative to the tangent of
the segment on which it is located (−180° .. +180°). The return value type is integer.
Note that this function can only be called for objects that are assigned to a conveyor section.
● error (long[])
Error code
(Page 904).
● id (long)
_MT.SetPosition
The _MT.SetPosition function sets the position of an object relative to the position of the
conveyor section component to which this object is assigned. The position is specified in
millimeters relative to the top left corner of the component (in its starting position). The return
value type is void.
Note that this function can only be called for objects that are assigned to a conveyor section but
are not under solution procedure control.
● error (long[])
Error code
(Page 904).
● id (long)
The ID of the object to be changed.
● x (analog)
X position in millimeters relative to the conveyor section component.
● y (analog)
Y position in millimeters relative to the conveyor section component.
_MT.SetAngle
The _MT.SetAngle function sets the angle in degrees of an object relative to the tangent of the
segment on which it is located (−180° .. +180°). The return value type is void.

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
● error (long[])
Error code
(Page 904).
● id (long)
● angle (integer)
Angle in degrees relative to the tangent of the segment.
_MT.AddAngle
The _MT.AddAngle function increases the angle in degrees of an object relative to the tangent
of the segment on which it is located (−180° .. +180°). The return value type is void.
● error (long[])
Error code
(Page 904).
● id (long)
● angle (integer)
Angle in degrees relative to the tangent of the segment.
_MT.SetHoldup
The _MT.SetHoldup function transfers to an object information about whether it is positioned
directly in front of or behind a stopper or another object. The return value type is void.
Note that this function can only be called for objects that are assigned to a conveyor section but
are not under solution procedure control.
● error (long[])
Error code
(Page 904).
● id (long)
● front (binary)
Information as to whether the object is blocked in front.
● rear (binary)
Information as to whether the object is blocked to the rear.

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
_MT.GetBinaryValue
The _MT.GetBinaryValue function is used to query a binary variable (state, input, output) of an
object. The return value type is bool.
● error (long[])
Error code
(Page 904).
● id (long)
● property (string)
The name of the variable to be queried
_MT.GetAnalogValue
The _MT.GetAnalogValue function is used to query an analog variable (discrete state, input,
output) of an object. The return value type is double.
● error (long[])
Error code
(Page 904).
● id (long)
The name of the variable to be queried.
_MT.GetIntegerValue
The _MT.GetIntegerValue function is used to query an integer variable (state, input, output) of
an object. The return value type is long.
● error (long[])
Error code
(Page 904).
● id (long)
The name of the variable to be queried.

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
_MT.GetByteValue
The _MT.GetByteValue function is used to query a byte (state) of an object. The return value
type is byte.
● error (long[])
Error code
(Page 904).
● id (long)
The name of the state to be queried.
_MT.GetByteArray
The _MT.GetByteArray function is used to query a byte array (state) of an object. The return
value type is void.
● error (long[])
Error code
(Page 904).
● id (long)
The name of the state vector to be read.
● stateoffset (long)
The offset in bytes from which the state vector is to be read.
● buffer (byte[])
Byte array in which the read byte is to be entered. If you specify a state vector for the
component, enter it in the notation for new state values, which means prefixed with "@".
● bufferoffset (long)
The offset in bytes from which the read bytes are to be entered.
● count (long)
The number of bytes to be read.
Note
All arrays must be large enough to execute this operation; otherwise, unpredictable errors
could occur in the simulation process.
_MT.SetBinaryValue
The _MT.SetBinaryValue function is used to write a binary variable (state, input) of an object.
The return value type is void.

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library

● error (long[])
Error code
(Page 904).
● id (long)
The ID of the object to be described.
The name of the state to be written.
● value (bool)
The value to be written.
_MT.SetAnalogValue
The _MT.SetAnalogValue function is used to write an analog variable (discrete state, input) of
an object. The return value type is void.
● error (long[])
Error code
(Page 904).
● id (long)
The name of the variable to be written.
● value (double)
_MT.SetIntegerValue
The _MT.SetIntegerValue function is used to write an integer variable (state, input) of an object.
The return value type is void.
● error (long[])
Error code
(Page 904).
● id (long)
The name of the variable to be written.
● value (long)

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
_MT.SetByteValue
The _MT.SetByteValue function is used to write a byte (state) of an object. The return value
type is void.
● error (long[])
Error code
(Page 904).
● id (long)
The name of the state to be written.
● value (byte)
_MT.SetByteArray
The _MT.SetByteArray function is used to write a byte array (state) of an object. The return
value type is void.
● error (long[])
Error code
(Page 904).
● id (long)
The name of the state vector of the object to be described.
● stateoffset (long)
The offset in bytes from which the state vector is to be written.
● buffer (byte[])
Byte array containing the byte to be written.
● bufferoffset (long)
The offset in bytes from which the byte array is to be transferred.
● count (long)
The number of bytes to be written.
Note
All arrays must be large enough to execute this operation; otherwise, unpredictable errors
could occur in the simulation process.

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library
8.3.4.4 System variables

The system variables listed in the table below are available for modeling conveyor technology
components. These variables are available in the component behavior description with read
access only.
Table 8-72 System variables
Variable name Meaning

_WIDTH Width of the component in pixels
_HEIGHT Height of the component in pixels
_SCALEX Horizontal scaling of the component. The factor one is the default setting.
_SCALEY Vertical scaling of the component. The factor one is the default setting.
_TECHSCALE Scale of the chart on which the component is located. The number of millime‐
ters corresponding to one pixel is specified.

Libraries
8.3 CONTEC library

Menus and dialog boxes 9
9.1 Menus
9.1.1 Portal view > Start

The "Start" button provides access to the following functions:
● Open existing project
Here, you can open an existing project. You can find additional information on this in the
section: Project > Open... (Page 919)
● Create new project
Here, you can create a new project. You can find additional information on this in the
section: Project > New project ... (Page 918)
● Retrieve project
Here, you can retrieve a project. You can find additional information on this in the
section: Project > Retrieve (Page 921)
● Retrieve sample project
You retrieve one of the supplied sample projects here. Select the desired sample project
from the drop-down list. You can freely select the storage location of the retrieved sample
project.
● Close project
Closes the current project.
● Getting started
This explains the first steps with SIMIT.
● Installed software
Here, you are shown the currently installed SIMIT software. You can find additional
information on this in the section: "Info" dialog box (Page 942)
● Help
Here you access the SIMIT online help.
● Size variant
Here you change the size variant for which you have purchased a license. The change takes
effect when SIMIT is restarted.
● User interface language
Here you change the user interface language of SIMIT. The change takes effect when
SIMIT is restarted.

Menus and dialog boxes
9.1 Menus
9.1.2 Portal view > Couplings

The "Couplings" button provides access to the following functions:
● Add new coupling
Select a communication path by which data should be exchanged in SIMIT.
● Assigning coupling signals
If the signals of the connectors can be uniquely assigned to a coupling, they can be updated
with this function. This is required for name changes, for example.
● SU management
If "SIMIT Unit" is selected as the coupling, enter a name and the IP address of the SIMIT unit
here.
● Help
This is where you access the SIMIT online help.
See also
Options > Assign coupling signals (Page 925)
9.1.3 Portal view > Simulation model

The "Simulation model" button provides access to the following functions:
● Add new chart
Add a new chart to your project. SIMIT switches to the project view in the chart editor.
● Create new macro
Create a new macro. SIMIT switches to the project view in the Macro Editor.
● Create new component type
Create a new component type. SIMIT switches to the project view in the Component Type
Editor.
● Help
9.1.4 Portal view > Automatic model creation

The "Automatic modelling" button provides access to the following functions:
● Instantiate templates
Generate instances of templates from import files (*.xls, *.xlsx, *.txt, *.iea, *.xml) or from the
simulation model. You can find additional information on this in section: Instantiation of
templates from files or the simulation model (Page 251).
● Create new template
Create a new template. SIMIT switches to the template editor for the project view. You can
find additional information on this in section: Templates (Page 244).

9.1 Menus
● Automated import
Imports models from the following sources:
– XML (Page 263)
– ZIP (Page 270)
You can find additional information in the section Automated import (Page 262).
● Bulk engineering import
Transfer the parameters and input defaults from a table to existing charts. You can find
additional information on this in section: Bulk engineering (Page 271).
● Help
This is where you access the SIMIT online help.
See also
Table import (Page 252)
IEA import (Page 256)
CMT import (Page 258)
9.1.5 Portal view > Diagnostics & visualization

The "Diagnostics & visualization" button provides access to the following functions:
● Consistency check
Check your project for formal errors. The result of the consistency check is displayed in the
project view. You can find additional information on this in section: Consistency check
(Page 294).
● Find & replace
Execute the "Find & replace" function in the current project. You can find additional
information on this in section: Find & replace (Page 289).
● Add new trend
Create a new trend. SIMIT switches to the project view in the Trend Editor. You can find
additional information on this in section: Trends (Page 280).
● Edit archive
Create an archive. A trend can be created from an archive. SIMIT switches to the project
view in the Archive Editor. You can find additional information on this in section: Archive
(Page 278).
● Help

9.1 Menus
9.1.6 Project > New project ...

Use this menu command to open the following dialog box:
Here, you can create a new project. Enter the required data for this and make the settings in the
input fields.
● Project name
Enter a name for your project or accept the default name here.
● Target folder
The storage location of the new project is preset here. Click "..." to select a different storage
location.
● Author
You can change the name of the author here. This entry is optional.
● Comment
You can enter a comment of your choice about the project here. This entry is optional.
Click "Create" to create the new project and close the dialog box.

9.1 Menus
9.1.7 Project > Open...

The most recent projects and the sample project are listed here. The project name, location and
date of the last update of the project are also displayed for each project. This information cannot
be changed here.
If the desired project is not displayed here, you can search for it by clicking "Browse ...".
Open the project by selecting it and clicking the "Open" button.
9.1.8 Project > Close

Use this menu command to close the current project.
9.1.9 Project > Save all

Use this menu command to save the current project.

9.1 Menus
9.1.10 Project > Save as...
Project name and target folder are preset.

● Project name
Accept the preset name or enter another name for your project.
● Target folder
Accept the preset storage location for your project or select another one by clicking "...".
Click "Save" to save the project and close the dialog box.
9.1.11 Project > Archive

This menu command opens the "Save as" dialog box, where you can enter a name and storage
location for the current project. Then click the "Save" button to perform the archiving of the
project.
The archived project receives the file extension "*.simarc".

9.1 Menus
9.1.12 Project > Retrieve

Here, you can retrieve an archived project.

● Archive name
Click "..." to select an archived SIMIT project. Archived SIMIT projects have the file
extension ".simarc".
● Target folder
Click "..." to select the folder in which the project is to be stored after retrieval.
Click "Retrieve" to retrieve the selected project.
Note
An archived SIMIT project can contain executable code. Only retrieve projects from a
trustworthy source.

9.1 Menus
9.1.13 Project > Analysis

Use this menu command to open a dialog box, in which you save a statistical evaluation of the
data of a SIMIT project.
The file is saved in the "*.xslx" format.
9.1.14 Project > Exit

Use this menu command to close the current project.
If changes have not been saved in the project, a dialog box opens in which you are asked
whether you want to save before exiting.
9.1.15 Edit > Cut

Use this menu command to remove the selected object.
9.1.16 Edit > Copy

Use this menu command to copy the selected object to the clipboard.
9.1.17 Edit > Paste

Use this menu command to paste the copied object from the clipboard to the current editor.
9.1.18 Simulation > Initialize

Use this menu command to start the consistency check. The result of the consistency check is
displayed.
Note
Initialization does not start simulation.
9.1.19 Simulation > Start

Use this menu command to start the simulation.
You can find additional information on this in section: Actions during ongoing simulation
(Page 38).

9.1 Menus
Before the simulation starts, you are asked whether you want to save the changes to the project
and the consistency check is performed.
9.1.20 Simulation > Pause

Use this menu command to pause the simulation.
9.1.21 Simulation > Single Step

This menu command executes a single step in the simulation.
You can find additional information on this in the section: Executing a single step (Page 308).
9.1.22 Simulation > Exit

This menu command ends the simulation in progress and takes you to the project view.
9.1.23 Simulation > Snapshot

Use this menu command to make a snapshot of the simulation.
You can find additional information on this in the section: Actions during ongoing simulation
(Page 38).
9.1.24 Window > Tile Horizontally

Use this menu command to split the selected editor window horizontally.
9.1.25 Window > Tile Vertically

Use this menu command to split the selected editor window vertically.
9.1.26 Window > Unsplit

This menu command cancels horizontal or vertical splits of the window.
9.1.27 Window > Close all

This menu command closes all open windows.

9.1 Menus
9.1.28 Automatic model creation > Instantiate templates

Opens the "Instantiate templates" dialog box.
You can find additional information in the section Instantiation of templates from files or the
simulation model (Page 251).
9.1.29 Automatic modelling > Automated import

Opens the file selection dialog to import models from the following sources:
● XML (Page 263)
● ZIP (Page 270)
You can find additional information on this in section: Import charts from ZIP or XML files
(Page 262).
9.1.30 Automatic model creation > Bulk engineering import

Use this menu command to open the "Bulk engineering import" dialog box.
You can find additional information on this in section: "Bulk engineering import" dialog box
(Page 940).
9.1.31 Options > Zoom

Use this menu command to zoom the selected object. Use the slider control to do this.
9.1.32 Options > SU administration

Use this menu command to open the "SU administration" dialog box:
For more information, visit:
● "SU administration" dialog box (Page 937)
● Configuring a SIMIT Unit (Page 83)
● Importing device description file to SIMIT (Page 84)
● Updating the firmware of the SIMIT Unit (Page 84)

9.1 Menus
9.1.33 Options > Assign coupling signals

With this menu command, the entries in input or output connectors are updated on the charts
of the entire project, when the signal registered in the connector is clearly associated with a
coupling.
Examples of applications:
● A coupling was subsequently renamed
● Coupling signals were subsequently assigned symbolic names
See also
Addressing a signal symbolically (Page 207)
9.1.34 Help > Display help

Use this menu command to access the SIMIT online help.
9.1.35 Help > About

This menu command displays the information about the SIMIT installation.
You can find additional information on this in the section: "Info" dialog box (Page 942).
9.1.36 CTE > Component > New component

You create a new component with this menu command.
9.1.37 CTE > Component > Open

You open an existing component with this menu command.
9.1.38 CTE > Component > Close

You close the open component with this menu command.

9.1 Menus
9.1.39 CTE > Component > Save

You save the current component with this menu command.
9.1.40 CTE > Component > Save as

You select an available storage location with this menu command where you save the current
component.
9.1.41 CTE > Component > Exit

You exit the Component Type Editor with this menu command.

9.2 Dialog boxes
9.2 Dialog boxes
9.2.1 "SU Import" dialog box
In this dialog box, you make the following settings for importing the hardware configuration:
● "SDB import"
Defines the folder in which the system data blocks for importing the hardware configuration
of an S7-300/S7-400 station are located.
● "OMS import"
Defines the folder in which the system data blocks for importing the hardware configuration
of a S7-1200/S7-1500 station are located.
The OMS import is supported as of STEP 7 V13 and higher.
● "XML import"
Specifies the file from which a vendor-neutral hardware configuration with PROFIBUS and/
or PROFINET master systems is imported.
You can find information on the structure of this file under "XML import interface (Page 99)".
● "Configuration file"
Specifies the storage location of the configuration file with additional device information.
Only relevant for "SDB import".

9.2 Dialog boxes
● "Additional information for Shared Devices"

Specifies that the system data blocks of the existing hardware configuration of a station to
be imported are completed. Only relevant for the simulation of a Shared Device.
● "Devices"
Shows the area for station selection from the selected system files. All stations are selected
by default.
● "Import"
Starts station import to the SIMIT project.
● "Cancel"
Cancels the import. Only the "SIMIT Unit" folder is created in the project tree.
9.2.2 "PLCSIM Advanced import" dialog box

In this dialog box, make the following settings for importing the hardware configuration of a
STEP 7 project:
● TIA Portal project
Specifies the project from which the hardware configuration is imported. These options are
only available if STEP 7 V14 SP1 is installed on the PC.
● HWCNExport file
Specifies the HWCNExport file from which the hardware configuration is imported.
● Bus synchronous
Specifies that the PLCSIM Advancedcoupling is operated in bus synchronous mode.
● Symbols
Specifies how symbol names for inputs and outputs are treated. The selection is only in
effect if symbol names were assigned in the STEP 7 project.
Symbol mode Stations of the PLCSIM Advanced coupling Stations of the PLCSIM Ad‐
are imported again (updated) vanced coupling are cre‐
ated again
Create new All symbols of the stations to be imported are All symbols of the stations
deleted and the new symbols from the import to be imported are applied
are applied. from the import.
Overwrite All symbols of the stations to be imported are
applied from the import. Existing symbols are
overwritten. New symbols are applied.
Add Only those symbols are applied from the im‐
port of the stations to be imported for which no
prior symbols existed.
Ignore The symbols of the stations to be imported are The symbols of the sta‐
not applied. Existing symbols remain un‐ tions to be imported are not
changed. applied.
● Adapt data width

Specifies that the data width of the imported signals are matched to the symbols. If this
option is not enabled, only symbols linked with the default data type Word will be applied.

9.2 Dialog boxes
● Stations >>
Shows the area for station selection from the selected project. The stations are read in from
the selected project. Only S7-1500 stations that are supported by PLCSIM Advanced are
shown.
All supported stations of the STEP 7 project are selected by default.
● Import
● Cancel
Cancels the import. Only the "PLCSIM Advanced" folder is created in the project navigation.
See also
9.2.3 "Virtual controller import" dialog box
This dialog box allows you to make the following settings to import the hardware configuration
of a STEP 7/PCS 7 project:
● STEP 7/PCS 7 multiproject / STEP 7/PCS 7 project
Specifies the project from which the hardware configuration is imported. These options are
only available if SIMATIC Manager is installed.
● HWCNExport file
Specifies the HWCNExport file from which the hardware configuration is to be imported.

9.2 Dialog boxes
● Symbols
Specifies how symbol names for inputs and outputs are treated. The selection is only
effective if symbol names are assigned in the STEP 7/PCS 7 project.
Symbol mode Virtual controller is imported again (updated) Virtual controller is created
Create new All symbols of the virtual controllers to be im‐ All symbols of the virtual
ported are deleted and the symbols from the controllers to be imported
import saved. are taken from the import.
Overwrite All symbols of the virtual controllers to be im‐
ported are taken from the import. Existing sym‐
bols are overwritten. New symbols are applied.
Add Symbols are only taken from the import for vir‐
tual controllers for which no symbols have yet
been saved.
Ignore The symbols of the virtual controllers to be im‐ The symbols of the virtual
ported are not applied. Existing symbols re‐ controllers to be imported
main unchanged. are not applied.
● Adapt data width

Specifies that the data width of the imported signals are matched to the symbols. If this
option is not enabled, only symbols linked with the default data type Word will be applied.
● Stations >>
Shows the area for station selection from the selected project. The stations are read in from
the selected project. How long this process takes depends on the size of the STEP 7/PCS
7 project. It cannot be canceled.
By default, all stations of an STEP 7/PCS 7 project are selected.
● Import
● Cancel
Cancels the import. Only the "Virtual Controller" folder is created in the project tree.
See also
Importing a STEP 7/PCS 7 project (Page 126)
Creating a Virtual Controller (Page 125)

9.2 Dialog boxes
9.2.4 "STL import" dialog box
Open the dialog box by clicking on the "STL import" button on the "DB" tab in the virtual
controller coupling editor.
The following settings are made in this dialog box:
● "STL sources"
Specifies the STL source
● "Symbol table (opt.)"
Specifies the symbol table.
If the data blocks in the STL source have symbolic names, the system can establish the data
block number if you specify the symbol table. The numbers of the data blocks are read in
from the symbol table and displayed in the dialog box under "Data block number".
● "Data block name"
For import from a symbol table, specifies the data block from which a memory area is to
imported.
● "Data block number"
Specifies the data block number from which a memory area is to imported.
Data block numbers entered manually are not validated. When you import from a symbol
table, the data block number is already entered.
● "Direction"
Specifies when input or output signals are imported.
● "Start byte"
Specifies the start byte from which the signals are imported.

9.2 Dialog boxes
● "End byte"
Specifies the end byte up to which the signals are imported. Here, you enter, at most, the
end of the data block.
● "Import"
Starts the import. The following fields must be filled out:
– STL source
– Data block number
– Start byte
– End byte
Any existing signals in the specified memory area of "Start byte" and "End byte" are
overwritten.
See also
Importing DB data from STL sources (Page 138)
9.2.5 "Importing signal properties" dialog box

9.2 Dialog boxes
In this dialog box, you make the following settings for importing signal properties:
● "Format"
The format that can be read depends on the current coupling type. The following file formats
are read in:
– SIMATIC symbol table from STEP 7 or PCS 7
You can find additional information in section: Symbol table (Page 193).
– PLC tag table from the TIA Portal
You can find additional information in section: Variable table (Page 194).
– Signal table (txt file)
You can find additional information in section: Signal table (Page 195).
Note
OPC coupling
If signal properties were saved in txt format, the file also contains SIMATIC addresses
and information for scaling. However, this information cannot be processed by an OPC
coupling. If a txt file is imported into a OPC connection, the only information included is
that which an OPC coupling can also process.
– INI file
You can find additional information in: INI format of the OPC couplings (Page 196)
● "File"
Specifies the storage location of the import file.
● ""Which properties do you want to import?" area"
Specifies which signal properties are to be imported. You can only import the signal
properties that are in the import file. The following signal properties are imported by default
when you import a symbol table or tag table:
– Address
– Symbol
– Data type
– Comment

9.2 Dialog boxes
● "Mode"
The mode determines how the signals already present in the coupling and their properties
are processed. The import modes that can be selected depends on the current coupling
type.
Note
The import modes "New signals" and "Add signals" are supported by the following coupling
types:
● SHM
● OPC
● PLCSIM
● PRODAVE
The import modes "New properties", "Overwrite properties" and "Add properties" are
supported by all coupling types.
The following import modes are available:
– New signals
All existing signals are deleted and new signals are created with the imported
information. The only properties imported are the once activated in the "Which properties
do you want to import?" area. All other properties retain their default settings.
– Add signals
All signals from the import file are added. The only properties imported are the once
activated in the "Which properties do you want to import?" area. All other properties
retain their default settings. Already existing signals are not changed.
– New properties
The properties selected in the "Which properties do you want to import?" area are set to
their default values for all signals available in the coupling and then taken from the import
file.
– Overwrite properties
All properties selected in the "Which properties do you want to import?" area are taken
from the import file and applied to the existing signals.
– Add properties
All properties selected in the "Which properties do you want to import?" area that still
have their default settings are taken from the import file and applied to the existing
signals.
● "Adapt data width"
Note
This checkbox is only available for the following coupling types:
● SIMIT Unit
● PLCSIM Advanced
Specifies that the data width of signals is to be automatically adjusted to data width specified
in the import file upon import. You can find additional information in section: Converting the
data width of signals (Page 189).

9.2 Dialog boxes
If the check box is not selected and the width of the data to be imported does not match the
existing signal, this signal is not imported.
9.2.6 "Exporting signal properties" dialog box
In this dialog box, you make the following settings for exporting signal properties:
● "Type"
Specifies the file format of the export file. The file format depends on the coupling type
whose signal properties you are exporting.
– SIMATIC symbol table from STEP 7/PCS 7 (seq file)
This format only contains the signals from the coupling for which a symbolic name has
been assigned.
You can find additional information in section: Symbol table (Page 193).
– Signal table (txt file)
This format contains all signals from the coupling.
You can find additional information in section: Signal table (Page 195).
– INI format
Note
OPC coupling
Since OPC signals do not have an address nor can they be transmitted as scaled raw
values, the signal table can only be filled to a limited extent. Such a signal table can be
imported into another OPC coupling, but import into couplings that expect SIMATIC
signals is not possible.
● "File"
Specifies the storage location of the export file.

9.2 Dialog boxes
● ""Which properties do you want to export?" area"

Specifies which signal properties are to be exported. The "Address" uniquely identifies a
signal and is always exported. If you have selected the file format "Symbol table", the
following signal properties are also exported:
– Symbol
– Data type
– Comment
● "Export"
Starts the export.
9.2.7 "Select project" dialog box

9.2 Dialog boxes
This dialog box is opened with the following menu commands:

● "Project > New project ..."
● "Project > Open"
● "Project > Retrieve"
The appearance of the dialog box varies depending on the selection.
The following functions are run in this dialog box:
● "Open project"
Opens an existing project.
You can find additional information on this in section: Project > Open... (Page 919). SIMIT
projects have the file extension ".simit".
● "New project"
Creates a new project.
You can find additional information on this in section: Project > New project ... (Page 918).
● "Retrieve project"
Retrieves an archived project.
You can find additional information on this in section: Project > Retrieve (Page 921).
Archived SIMIT projects have the file extension ".simarc".
SIMIT projects can be stored in any folder in the file system. To select a folder, click "Browse...".
Note
SIMIT manages all information in this folder that is relevant for the project. Note the following:
● Do not rename this folder.
● Do not change any files in this folder.
● Do not save any files in this folder.
● Do not create any files in this folder.
9.2.8 "SU administration" dialog box
In this dialog box, you configure the SIMIT Unit.

9.2 Dialog boxes
"SU hardware/firmware" tab

This tab lists all SIMIT Units accessible in the network. You can find additional information in
section: Configuring a SIMIT Unit (Page 83).
● Refresh
Refreshes the view.
● Firmware update
Updates the firmware of the selected SIMIT Unit.
"Device description PROFIBUS (GSD)" and "Device description PROFINET (GSDML)" tabs
These tabs list the devices supported by the SIMIT Unit. You can expand the list of supported
devices by importing device descriptions. You can find additional information in
section: Importing device description file to SIMIT (Page 84).
● Refresh
Refreshes the view.
● Import
Opens a dialog box for importing device descriptions from a device description file.
● Delete
Removes a device imported from a device description file from the list.
9.2.9 "Instantiate templates" dialog box

9.2 Dialog boxes
You can make the following settings for instantiating a template in this dialog box:
● "Import file"
Specifies that the templates are instantiated from a file.
Specifies the import file. The following file types can be imported: *.txt, *.xls, *.xlsx, *.iea;
*.xml.
● "Simulation model"
Specifies that the templates are instantiated from the simulation model.
● "Coupling"
Specifies the coupling.
● "Template folder"
Specifies the folder in which the search for the SIMIT templates referenced in the CMT file
is to take place.
The name of the CMT type specified in the CMT file must exactly match the name of the
template used in SIMIT.
● "Template"
Specifies the storage location of the template.
● "Separator"
Specifies the separator.
● "Grouping"
Specifies the grouping.
● "Maximum width"/"Maximum height"
Specifies the width/height in pixels.
● "Remove elements with empty replacement"
Specifies if empty replacements are to be removed from the file.
● "Preview >>"
Shows a preview of the import.
On the left in the preview, you can see the newly created folders and charts from the import.
Individual folders and charts can be deselected. If you select a chart on the left, you will see
the replacements to be performed on the right. The template used in each case is entered
in the second header on the right and an indication is given if a template has been found at
all.
● "Import"
Starts the import.
See also
Instantiating templates from files (Page 251)
Instantiating templates from the simulation model (Page 261)

9.2 Dialog boxes
9.2.10 "Bulk engineering import" dialog box
The following settings for automatic parameter assignment and bulk data import are made in
this dialog box:
● "Apply changes from last simulation"
Specifies whether the changes from the most recently active simulation for this project are
to be applied automatically.
The check box is only enabled if at least one simulation has already been run for the project.
Disable this option to import bulk data.
● "Table"
Specifies the file from which the data is read.
● "Parameter"
Specifies whether the parameters from the table are to be applied.
● "Inputs"
Specifies whether the input defaults from the table are to be applied.
● "Controls"
Specifies whether the default control settings from the table are to be applied.
● "Preview >>"
Displays a preview of automatic parameter assignment.
● "Import"
Runs automatic parameter assignment/Imports the modified values.
You can find additional information on this in section: Importing data (Page 273).
9.2.11 "Characteristic" editor

The characteristic editor is used to create a characteristic curve by specifying interpolation
points and interpolation between these points.
You can find additional information in the section: Characteristic (Page 399)

9.2 Dialog boxes
9.2.12 "Find & replace" dialog box
Open the dialog box by pressing the shortcuts <Ctrl+F> for "Find" or <Ctrl+H> for "Replace".
The search is limited to the area in which you opened the dialog box.
The following settings are made in this dialog box:
● "Find"
Specifies the search term.
● "Find Next"
Searches for the next occurrence of the search term.
● "Replace with"
Specifies the term that will replace the search term.
● "Replace"
Replaces the found search term.
The "Find Next" function is automatically executed next.
● "Replace all"
Replaces all search terms found.
● "Options"
Shows a configuration area in which you can enable additional options.
Supported are, for example, "regular expressions" or "placeholders". The following
characters can serve as placeholders:
– "?": Represents a variable character. The search term "H?llo", for example, finds "Hello"
and "Hallo"
– "*": Represents any number of variable characters

9.2 Dialog boxes
9.2.13 "Info" dialog box
This menu command displays the following information about your SIMIT installation:
● Version
● Version of the SU software
● Version of SIMIT Virtual Controller (VC) (if installed)
9.2.14 "Print" dialog box
Select a printer from the drop-down list and set the number of copies.
Click the "Settings ..." button to change the settings of the selected printer.
Click "Print" to start printing and close the dialog box.
See also
Printing charts (Page 223)
Printing trends (Page 288)

9.2 Dialog boxes
9.2.15 "Instantiate template" dialog box
In this dialog box, the parameters of the selected template are listed in the "Placeholder"
column. Arbitrary values can be entered as replacements in the "Replacement" column.
Select the "Remove elements with empty replacement" check box to remove parameter in the
template for which you have not entered a name in the "Replacement" column.
Click "OK" to apply the changes and close the dialog box.
9.2.16 "Selection" dialog box

9.2 Dialog boxes
Select a new coupling in this dialog box. The following couplings are available for selection:
● SIMIT Unit
You can find additional information on the coupling under SIMIT Unit (Page 64).
You can find additional information on the coupling under Virtual Controller (Page 105).
● PLCSIM Advanced
You can find additional information on the coupling under PLCSIM Advanced coupling
(Page 140).
● PLCSIM
You can find additional information on the coupling under PLCSIM coupling (Page 145).
● OPC DA server
You can find additional information on the coupling under OPC coupling (Page 147).
● OPC DA client
● OPC UA client
● Shared memory
You can find additional information on the coupling under Shared memory coupling
(Page 162).
● PRODAVE
You can find additional information on the coupling under PRODAVE coupling (Page 172).
● MCD
You can find additional information on the coupling under MCD coupling (Page 175).
Click "OK" to confirm the selection and close the dialog box.

9.2 Dialog boxes
9.2.17 "Enumeration" dialog box (CTE)
You can enter the names for elements of custom enumeration type in this dialog box.
You can find additional information in the section: The "Enumeration Types" task card
(Page 326).

9.2 Dialog boxes
9.2.18 "Manage components" dialog box (CTE)
You can create new components or open existing ones in this dialog box. To do this, select the
desired function.
Click the "Browse..." button to select the storage location of the component.
Click the "Open" button to open the component in the editor.
Select the check box "Always show this dialog on startup", if this dialog box is to open
automatically when you start the CTE.

9.2 Dialog boxes
9.2.19 "Connection type" dialog box (CTE)
You define the signals of custom connection type in this dialog box. You select the data type of
the signal from the drop-down list. You can create any number of signals.
Select the check box "Multiple connection", if one output is to be connected with more than one
input.
You can find additional information in the section: The "Connection Types" task card
(Page 327).

9.2 Dialog boxes

Simit Enus En-Us

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Simit Enus En-Us

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Simit Enus En-Us

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Preface

Diagnostics & visualization 5

Component type editor 7

Menus and dialog boxes 9

Siemens AG A5E44876196-AA Copyright © Siemens AG 2018.

Security disclaimer for simulation products

SIMIT Simulation Platform (V10.0)

● New operating mode: "bus synchronous"

SIMIT Simulation Platform (V10.0)

● Changes in the basic library

SIMIT Simulation Platform (V10.0)

SIMIT version Number of simulation tags

SIMIT Simulation Platform (V10.0)

Number of simulation tags exhaus‐ Consequence

Setting up WIBU license server

SIMIT Simulation Platform (V10.0)

SIMIT Simulation Platform (V10.0)

SIMIT Simulation Platform (V10.0)

2.5.3 Supported PROFINET IO configurations ...............................................................................73

SIMIT Simulation Platform (V10.0)

2.7.4 Configuring a PLCSIM Advanced coupling station ..............................................................142

SIMIT Simulation Platform (V10.0)

2.12.3.2 Importing signals ..................................................................................................................178

SIMIT Simulation Platform (V10.0)

3.2.3 Visualizing signals................................................................................................................222

SIMIT Simulation Platform (V10.0)

5 Diagnostics & visualization .......................................................................................................................275

SIMIT Simulation Platform (V10.0)

6.3.5.8 Executing a single step ........................................................................................................308

SIMIT Simulation Platform (V10.0)

7.4.2 State variables .....................................................................................................................341

SIMIT Simulation Platform (V10.0)

8.1.1.5 Component connectors ........................................................................................................378

SIMIT Simulation Platform (V10.0)

SIMIT Simulation Platform (V10.0)

9.1.9 Project > Save all .................................................................................................................919

SIMIT Simulation Platform (V10.0)

9.2.19 "Connection type" dialog box (CTE).....................................................................................947

SIMIT Simulation Platform (V10.0)

1.2 DEMO mode

Starting SIMIT in DEMO mode

SIMIT Simulation Platform (V10.0)

● Trend and messaging editor

● Opening and retrieving

SIMIT Simulation Platform (V10.0)

1.3 Starting SIMIT

SIMIT Simulation Platform (V10.0)

Additional functions are:

SIMIT Simulation Platform (V10.0)

1.4 The SIMIT graphical user interface

The window buttons of an editor:

Minimize, i.e. reduce the entry in the editor bar

SIMIT Simulation Platform (V10.0)

Maximized to occupy the entire work area

Current project name

Tree node to create a new coupling.

"Charts" folder: Folder for the charts.

SIMIT Simulation Platform (V10.0)

Each of these functions is run with a double-click.

&\FOH &\FOH &\FOH

3/&6,0$GYDQFHG PV PV PV

6,0,7 PV PV PV

0&' PV PV PV

PV PV PV

&\FOH &\FOH &\FOH

PV PV PV